JP2019129873A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of making a configuration regarding a setting value suitable.SOLUTION: When winning/losing determination processing is executed, one of a jackpot result, a minor jackpot result, and a losing result is selected. Although a jackpot result is determined and the number of pieces of numerical information of a winning random number counter determined to be a jackpot result varies according to a setting value in execution of winning/losing determination processing, the fluctuation portion is absorbed by the number of pieces of numerical information of a winning random number counter determined to be a losing result in execution of winning/losing determination result. The number of pieces of numerical information of a winning random number counter determined to be a losing result is the largest in any setting values. Even in a situation of "setting 6" in a high-probability mode, it can be determined that losing results by winning/losing determination processing. A probability of selection of a minor jackpot result is the same in any winning/losing lottery modes and setting values.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP 2017-23329 A

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can make a configuration related to a setting value that determines an advantage of a gaming machine suitable. Is.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is characterized in that a variable ball entry means provided so that a game ball flowing down a game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An update means for updating the update numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs,
Predetermined acquisition means for acquiring the updated numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs;
Predetermined transition determination means for performing predetermined transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state;
Switching control means for switching the variable pitching means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined gaming state;
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the first winning result, a transition is made to the predetermined gaming state and the gaming mode that affects the player's advantage is changed to the predetermined gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state. First transition means that can be varied from before the start of
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the second winning result, the state is shifted to a state where a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state can be generated, or after the transition to the predetermined gaming state and the predetermined gaming state ends. A second transition means for continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state;
A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
With
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is an outlier result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
A configuration in which the number of the updated numerical information determined that the second set value is the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is larger than the first set value among the plurality of stages of set values by the first specific number. Yes,
The second set value is less than the first set value, and the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result in the predetermined shift determination is a second specified number less,
The second specific number is greater than or equal to the first specific number.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to make the configuration related to the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding discharge | emission of the game ball which flowed down the game area | region. It is a front view of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables memorize | stored in main side ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed with the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the main side CPU input the detection result of a entrance detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various apparatuses which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of IC for management. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for correspondence. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that log | history information is stored in the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the output process of the setting value update signal performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display output process performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed with management side CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables memorize | stored in the main side ROM in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for another storage in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repeated change performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repeated change performed by the main side CPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by the management side CPU in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display output process performed in management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I / F in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path | route which transmits the detection result of each entrance detection sensor in 10th Embodiment to main side CPU and management IC. It is a front view of the main controller in an 11th embodiment. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure for performing various displays in the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting based on control of MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display aspect of the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting in case the management result of a game history is displayed, (b) When the setting state of a pachinko machine is changed It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the display apparatus for 1st-4th notification will be in a display state. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 1st alerting | reporting display apparatus in 12th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 2nd alerting | reporting display apparatus. The first notification display device when displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices and when displaying the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine can be changed It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for 2nd alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the abnormality display area in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality setting process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for abnormality display performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed by the main side CPU in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the main side CPU in another form. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of the program and data of a main side ROM in 15th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of each area in main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed with main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various areas of the work area for non-specific control used in order to manage a game log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the check process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal entrance management process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed with the main side CPU in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed with the main side CPU in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed with the main side CPU in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed with main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure in 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a setting confirmation performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM monitoring process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the main side CPU in another form. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed with the main side CPU in another form. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM monitoring process performed with the main side CPU in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM monitoring process performed with the main side CPU in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the another monitoring process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 29th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the main side CPU in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed with main side CPU. (A) It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of MPU, (b) It is a time chart which shows the mode of the output of the reset signal by a reset signal output part. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting monitoring process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the another monitoring process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 31st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the clear process at the time of abnormality performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the clear process for non-specific control performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed with the main side CPU in 32nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the checksum monitoring process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the clear process for non-specific control performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 33rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a setting confirmation performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting monitoring process performed in main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure for carrying out display control of the various display circuits in main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various buffers provided in the work area for specific control, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various storage area provided in the work area for non-specific control. is there. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure of display IC. (A) to (g) The type data and display data are transmitted from the main CPU to the display IC, and the display data transmitted from the display IC is received by the first display circuit or the second display circuit. It is a time chart. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for the 1st-4th alerting | reporting in the condition where a setting value is updated, (b) The 1st-4th alerting | reporting in the condition where a setting value is confirmed It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for computers. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed with the main side CPU in 34th Embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of a calculation result storage area in a thirty-fifth embodiment. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for 1st-4th information. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas is alert | reported with the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process in the normal time performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a setting confirmation performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for demonstrating the display content of the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display apparatus in case supply of the operating power to the main side CPU is started. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 36th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 37th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal time setting process performed with the main side CPU in 38th Embodiment. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting corresponding | compatible memory | storage area provided in the main side ROM in 39th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the read-out process of the success / failure table performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 5th display data buffer during the setting update performed by main side CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting corresponding | compatible memory | storage area provided in the main side ROM in 40th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various display parts provided in the area | region which can be visually recognized from the front of a pachinko machine through the window panel in 41st Embodiment, (b) The display content of a round display part is demonstrated. It is explanatory drawing for. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 42nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed with the main side CPU in 43rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed with main side CPU. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas is alert | reported by the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas is alert | reported with the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting in 44th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 45th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the storage area regarding the setting value provided in the work area for specific control. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a setting confirmation performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 5th display data buffer in the middle of the setting confirmation performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 5th display data buffer during the setting update performed by main side CPU. Explanation for explaining the contents of the process executed in the main process when restarting the supply of operating power when the process at power failure is executed in the situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is executed FIG. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows the end timing in relation to the operation state of the setting key insertion part of a setting value update process and a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the main side CPU in 46th Embodiment. Explanation for explaining the contents of the process executed in the main process when restarting the supply of operating power when the process at power failure is executed in the situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is executed FIG. Contents of processing executed in main processing when resuming supply of operating power after the processing at power failure is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing is executed in the 47th embodiment It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. The contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operating power is resumed when the process at power failure is executed in the situation where the set value update process or the setting confirmation process is executed in the forty-eighth embodiment It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the main side CPU in 49th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a setting confirmation performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the interruption of a 1st timer interruption process and a 2nd timer interruption process is permitted in the condition where the process at the time of the supply start of operating power is performed. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows the advancing aspect of a process when abnormality regarding a power failure flag, a checksum, or a setting value generate | occur | produces. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows the display content of the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting when supply of the operating power to the main side CPU is started. Explanation for explaining the contents of the process executed in the main process when restarting the supply of operating power when the process at power failure is executed in the situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is executed FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation control process performed by sound light side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect | action corresponding to the content of the process performed in the process at the time of the supply start of the operating power in the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process performed with the sound-light side CPU in 50th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect | action corresponding to the content of the process performed in the process at the time of the supply start of the operating power in the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 51st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 52nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the main side CPU in 53rd Embodiment. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows the mode of the subsequent process in case the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU is stopped in the situation where the set value update process is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the storage area provided in the work area for specific control. (A)-(f) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the setting value of update object is updated. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in 54th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the main side CPU in 55th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the clear object area provided in the work area for specific control, and a non-clear object area. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and universal map display part corresponding to the condition at the time of the supply start of operating electric power. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each area provided in the clear object area of the work area for specific control in 56th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed with main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and universal map display part corresponding to the condition at the time of the supply start of operating electric power. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed with the main side CPU in 57th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and universal map display part corresponding to the condition at the time of the supply start of operating electric power. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each area provided in the clear object area of the work area for specific control in the 58th embodiment, and the area not to be cleared. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed with main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outlier display lottery table for special drawings, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outlier display lottery table for ordinary drawings. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed with the main side CPU in 59th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the initial display lottery table for special drawings, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the initial display lottery table for common drawings. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and universal map display part corresponding to the condition at the time of the supply start of operating electric power. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed with the main side CPU in 60th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and universal map display part corresponding to the condition at the time of the supply start of operating electric power. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by the main side CPU in 61st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed with the main side CPU in 62nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed with main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st display allocation table for special maps, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd display allocation table for special maps, (c) Universal It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st display allocation table for figures, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd display allocation table for general maps. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed with the main side CPU in 63rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in a 64th embodiment. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd action | operation part in the case of being a non-induction state, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd action | operation part in the case of an induction state. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in case a game round is performed. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the main symbol and subsymbol which are variably displayed in each symbol row | line | column. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the internal structure of a distribution prize-winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure for performing various lotteries in the main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table of a 1st special figure, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table of a 2nd special figure. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the type table for jackpots, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each content of multiple types of jackpot results, (c) The type table for jackpots It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each content of several types of small hit results. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure normal power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed with the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each area provided in the clear object area of the work area for specific control. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 1st display data buffer during the setting update performed by main side CPU, (b) The 6th display data buffer during the setting confirmation performed by main side CPU It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the display content of a 1st special figure display part, a 2nd special figure display part, and a special display part changes according to the state of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU in 65th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU in 66th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU in 67th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the special display part in 68th Embodiment, (b) 15R display part in the condition where the setting value update process or the process for a setting confirmation is performed, 6R display part It is a time chart which shows the display content of a small hits display part. It is a front view of the game board in a 69th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure for performing various lotteries in the main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of a low probability, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of a high probability, (c) The first at the time of a low probability It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating 2 success / failure table, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table at the time of high probability. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a classification table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each content of multiple types of big hit results, and the content of one type of small hit results, (c) Support It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of the display continuation period of game times. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure special electric power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed with the main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of low probability in 70th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of high probability, (c ) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table at the time of low probability, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table at the time of high probability. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of low probability in 71st Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of high probability, (c ) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table at the time of low probability, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table at the time of high probability.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko machine 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. Have. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed at the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning ports 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is one game ball entering the first operation port 33 or one game ball entering the second operation port 34 is generated. In the case where one prize ball is paid out and one game ball is thrown into the general prize opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out and the special prize winning device 32 is paid out. When one game ball enters, 15 prize balls are paid out.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 24. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball from the second working port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. In the part 38a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of display segments by LEDs are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the display unit 38a is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as a display apparatus, CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the general-purpose display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display part 37a, a winning change to the first working port 33 or a winning to the second working port 34 is used as a trigger, and a lottery is performed to display a variation display or a predetermined display. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of display segments by LEDs are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as a display apparatus, CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display part 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 37a. A maximum of four game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when a special symbol display unit 37a displays a change or predetermined display of a pattern based on a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and numbers “1” to “9” are attached to the symbol rows. The symbols are scrolled and displayed with the symbols arranged in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol sequences is started first, and the display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol sequence → the lower symbol sequence → the middle symbol sequence. The process ends with the symbols still displayed. Then, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the same odd symbol combination is stopped when the most advantageous jackpot result described later is displayed, and the same even symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the lower probability winning result described later is described. If the winning combination is not the same symbol combination, the combination of symbols that are not displayed in a stopped state is stopped.

  The symbol display device 41 performs not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode that is shifted to after winning the winning combination. Is called. In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and until a predetermined result is displayed and ended, the game number is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  When the big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and can be switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area PA.

  As already described, the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a are discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flows into the game area PA is any one of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the game area PA is discharged. A game ball that has entered any of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

  On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 flow down through the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 that have flowed in, and are led to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and become a discharge ball collection portion (not shown). Collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning ports 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning port detection sensor 42 a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage 42, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. A game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a in the middle of passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and a game that has entered the general winning opening 31 on the right side of the game is entered. The ball is detected by the second winning port detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning ports 31 on the right side at a midway position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side region by joining the inlet side regions in the middle. doing. A third winning port detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. A game ball that has entered one of the two general winning ports 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning port detection sensor 44 a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

  Corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, a fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists. A special electric detection sensor 45 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and a game ball that has entered the special electric prize device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first working port 33. A first operation port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and a game ball that has entered the first operation port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second working port 34. A second operation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and a game ball that has entered the second operation port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and a game ball that has entered the out-port 24 a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

  In addition, the game ball which became a detection target by any one detection sensor 42a-48a among the various detection sensors 42a-48a does not become a detection target of the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 in the middle of flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

  As the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect game balls. The various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal in a situation where a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal in a situation where a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin. The game area PA is defined through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 54 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge to the near side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 60 that controls the main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). FIG. 5 is a front view of the main controller 60.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 accommodated in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface which is one plate surface of the main control board 61. The substrate box 60a is formed to be transparent so that the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be seen from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The substrate box 60a is colorless and transparent. However, the substrate box 60a may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the substrate box 60a. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually check the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. The MPU 62 can be viewed through the opposing wall portion 60b.

  The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c back and forth, and the plurality of case bodies 60c prevent the separation of the case bodies 60c and the traces when the case bodies 60c are separated. A coupling portion 60e is provided for leaving A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. As a result, even if the part of the coupling part 60e is broken and the case body 60c is separated in a state where the separation of the case body 60c is prevented using the part of the coupling part 60e, another coupling is performed thereafter. Separation of the case body 60c can be prevented again by setting the portion 60e in the coupled state. Further, when the case portion 60c is separated, the coupling portion 60e is destroyed and the trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether the case body 60c is illegally separated by visually confirming the coupling portion 60e. It becomes possible. In addition, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side opposite to the side where the coupling portion 60e is arranged in the substrate box 60a so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the seal seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. Thereby, when the seal seal 60f is peeled off at the time of separation of the case body 60c, it becomes possible to leave the trace.

  In the main control device 60 configured as described above, the main control board 61 is owned by the manager of the game hall in order to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. A setting key insertion unit 68a that is turned on when the setting key is inserted; an update button 68b that is operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the ON operation is performed on the setting key insertion unit 68a; A reset button 68c that is operated to clear data in a later-described main RAM 65 provided in the MPU 62 of 60, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history; , Is provided. The MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 is connected to a connection terminal of the external device in order to read the game history management result or information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. A reading terminal 68d is provided. Note that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to six levels of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of levels.

  These setting key insertion portion 68a, update button 68b, reset button 68c, reading terminal 68d (ie, MPU 62) and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. The element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the facing wall 60b of the board box 60a as described above, but the setting key insertion part 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered with the wall part 60b. In other words, the opposing wall portion 60b has individual openings corresponding to the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d. Thus, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a without opening the board box 60a, the update button 68b can be pressed, and the reset button 68c can be pressed. It is possible to connect a connection terminal of an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

  When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and rotated in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on. It is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by starting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, starting the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). It becomes a changeable state. In this state, every time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed step by step in ascending order within the range of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. When the update button 68b is operated in the state of “setting 6”, it is updated to “setting 1”. In addition, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion unit 68a from the ON operation position in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction to return to the initial position. Become. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and the game can be played with the set value at that time. That is, the set value cannot be changed even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends.

  The ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started). Therefore, even if the ON operation is performed on the setting key insertion unit 68a after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the setting value cannot be changed.

  The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of “setting n” (n is an integer from “1” to “6”) (that is, setting). The higher the value), the higher the advantage. Although the details will be described later, there are a low probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as the success / failure lottery mode for determining the winning probability of the jackpot result, and the set value is The higher the probability of winning the jackpot result in the low probability mode, the higher the probability. On the other hand, regardless of the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is constant.

  The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above. In order to generate the clearing of the data, supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the reset button 68c being pressed is performed. (That is, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 needs to be started). The ON operation for the reset button 68c is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

  As described above, the reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the game history management result or information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. In order to perform external output to the terminal, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connection terminal of the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d (that is, the operation of the main controller 60 to the MPU 62) Need to start supplying power). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the external output to the external device is not performed.

  Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but is not limited thereto, and is a single multicolor light emitting type. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed such that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and by the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparently, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c accommodated in the substrate box 60a are visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, as described above, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the substrate box 60a. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notifications are made through the opposing wall portion 60b. The display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c can be visually observed.

  On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only the numbers “0” to “9” but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. On the other hand, the numbers “0” to “9” are displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the details of the notification will be described later in detail. In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Note that a value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a, or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. In addition, the set value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current set value is the first to third notification. It is good also as a structure displayed on the other one display apparatus for notification among the display apparatuses 69a-69c.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism portion 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a backpack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 incorporates a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main-side RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages a game history based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the history of entering the game balls into the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined in accordance with the determined winning history. Further, the management IC 66 grasps the frequency of occurrence of an opening / closing execution mode and a high frequency support mode, which will be described later.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 67 is connected to a power source / launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with operating power via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, each of the winning detection sensors 42a to 49a includes the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection. A sensor 46a, a second working port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a are included. Based on the detection results of these entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to enter each entrance. Further, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first operating port 33 and various lotteries based on winning in the second operating port 34.

  On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion portion 68a, an update button 68b, and a reset button 68c provided on the main control board 61 are provided. The setting key insertion portion 68a is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is disposed at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is arranged at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position based on the detection result from the sensor. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and it is detected by the sensor whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and it is detected by the sensor whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

  A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding entrance part corresponding to the payout of a game ball in the entrance part. The Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32 b that opens and closes the open / close door 32 a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34 b that opens and closes the electric utility item 34 a of the second operating port 34, A figure unit 37 and a universal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display part 37 a and a special figure holding display part 37 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal map unit 38 is provided with a universal map display unit 38 a and a universal map hold display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility 34a is in the open state, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the power drive 34b so that the power utility 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric utility 34a is clearly indicated, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a. In addition, when a winning in the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 occurs, or when a variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the special figure holding display unit 37b. Is executed, and when the winning display to the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 38a, the display control of the general map hold display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

  First to third notification display devices 69 a to 69 c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. In addition, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are controlled by the management IC 66 and are not controlled by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled and the display is controlled by the management IC 66. In the display of the third notification display device 69c, the display control by the main CPU 63 is prioritized over the display control by the management IC 66.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third notification display device 69c may be configured to be controlled by the management IC 66 and not controlled by the main CPU 63. In this case, when the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the main CPU 63 issues a setting value display instruction to the management IC 66. Good.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. The reading terminal 68d is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the game history management result in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the external device.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source / launch control device 78 and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source / launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60. In addition, the power source / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In addition, the payout mechanism 73 is provided with a power switch as described above. When the power switch is turned on, supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the power switch is turned off. As a result, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  The sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 while driving and controlling the display light emitting portion 53 and the speaker portion 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display unit 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the utility power release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the utility power item 34a of the second working port 34 is set to the utility power release state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big hitting type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. Stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

  The holding storage area 65a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, In addition, combinations of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored and stored. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and starting one game round At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general electric utility release counter C4 will be described. For example, the utility power release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250 and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general electric power holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general utility 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general utility release counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric utility 34 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared to the game area PA in a situation where the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner, the utility object 34a of the second working port 34 is released per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric power open state in the electric power open lottery using the electric power utility opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 34a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. Has been. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the public electric power is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 34a is generated a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display duration time for the display unit 38a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning is made to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 38a based on a winning to the through gate 35) is secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, but the release frequency and the release mode of the general utility 34a in the low frequency support mode are any. Even if it is a set value, it is the same, and the open frequency and the open mode of the utility model 34a in the high frequency support mode are the same regardless of the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode varies in accordance with the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in at least one of the opening frequency and the opening mode of the utility appliance 34a. It is good also as a structure. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening of the power utility 34a in the low frequency support mode, and the second operation when the power utility 34a is opened once in the low frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure where the entrance probability of the game ball to the mouth 34 becomes high. In addition, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening the power utility 34a in the high frequency support mode, and the second frequency when the power utility 34a is in the open state once in the high frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure where the entrance probability of the game ball to the operation port 34 becomes high.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success / failure table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As the success / failure tables, low-accuracy mode low-accuracy mode tables 64a to 64f and a high-probability mode high-accuracy mode table 64g are stored.

  The low probability tables 64a to 64f are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the setting states “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. That is, the low-probability table 64a for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” and the setting that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. 2 low accuracy table 64b, the low accuracy table 64c for setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. , A low probability table 64d for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state is low, a low probability table 64e for setting 5 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”, and the pachinko machine 10 And a low probability table 64f for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state is “setting 6”.

  These low probability tables 64a to 64f are set such that the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result. Specifically, when the low probability table 64a for setting 1 is referred to, a jackpot result is obtained at about 1/320, and when the low probability table 64b for setting 2 is referenced, it is about 1/310. A big hit result is obtained, and when the low probability table 64c for setting 3 is referred to, a big hit result is obtained at about 1/300, and when the low probability table 64d for setting 4 is referenced, it is about 1/290. A big hit result is obtained, and when the low probability table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, a big hit result is obtained at about 1/280, and when the low probability table 64f for setting 6 is referenced, it is about 1/270. A jackpot result. As a result, if the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high set value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy determination table 64g is provided with only one type so as to be common in any setting state of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. The high-accuracy determination table 64g is set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result is higher than that of the low-accuracy determination tables 64a to 64f in any of the setting states “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Specifically, when the high-accuracy table 64g is referred to, a jackpot result is obtained at about 1/30. Thereby, regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to make the high probability mode more advantageous than the low probability mode. In addition, even in the lowest setting state “Setting 1”, it becomes possible to increase the probability of a jackpot result compared to the low setting mode “Setting 6” which is the highest setting state by entering the high probability mode. It becomes. Further, in the high probability mode, it becomes possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring, and the storage capacity for preliminarily storing the high-accuracy determination table 64g in the main ROM 64 is suppressed. It becomes possible.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are as follows: (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) a second after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric utility 34a of the two operation ports 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the special electric prize device 32. That is. In addition, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Moreover, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special electricity prize winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long time mode set to 29 seconds, which is a long open duration, and a short time mode set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above long time, Is set.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Be controlled. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an opening continuation time is set that is shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will receive the maximum number of winnings in one round game. When the number of times is released, it is expected that no prize will be given to the special electric prize winning device 32 or that there will be about one even if a prize is generated.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time manner in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special prize winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the special electric prize device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 32 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode starts and ends. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the distribution destination of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a sorting table 64h. And in the allocation table 64h, the low probability big hit result, the low winning high probability big hit result, and the most advantageous big hit result are set as the allocation destination of the big hit result when the big hit result is obtained.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-described game states refers to a state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, not the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the low prize-winning high probability hit result is not set as a game result. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode in the low winning and winning big hit result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of the low winning big hit result and the most advantageous big hit result.

  In the distribution table 64h, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” is the low winning high probability big hit result. “15-29” corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

  The distribution table 64h is provided with only one type so as to be common in any setting state of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and a storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure from which the distribution aspect of a jackpot result differs according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous big hit result, and a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous big hit result or the low winning high probability winning result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of entering the high probability mode after the jackpot result. Also, the higher the set value, the lower the probability that it will be assigned to the low winning high-accuracy result may be lowered. It is good also as a structure which can be distributed to a jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode will occur.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The pachinko machine 10 is set with an expected effect as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 that can display a variation of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining combinations in that state are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The notice display includes a plurality of symbol strings in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all symbol columns after the symbol variable display is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on a symbol row the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed are not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission controller 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 is more prone to generate a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than the game times corresponding to the miss results, and displays a notice display with a low appearance rate. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easily generated. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Here, the probability that the reach display occurs in the game times that are the result of losing is the same in any of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage of the set state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring with respect to the probability that the reach display is generated in the game times that are the result of losing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a reach display will occur in the game times that result in a miss.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display duration in the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (to be described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 37a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed in order for the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step S103). If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned ON (step S103: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main RAM 65 is “excluding the area where the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 65. “0” is cleared, and initial setting is performed for the area where “0” is cleared (step S105). That is, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without the setting key insertion unit 68a being turned on, the setting value information is the operation to the pachinko machine 10. The main RAM 65 is cleared while maintaining the state before the power supply is stopped, and initial setting is performed for the storage area where the clear processing is performed. As a result, it is possible to initialize other areas of the main RAM 65 without changing the set value. In step S105, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared after “0” is cleared.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S106). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 65, and when the predetermined power failure process is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to “1”. Will be set. If “1” is set in the power failure flag, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum stored when the power is shut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). . When the process of step S105 is executed or when an affirmative determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the set value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is determined to be abnormal when it is “0” or 7 or more.

  When a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, an operation prohibiting process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after executing an error notification process for notifying the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S109), an infinite loop is entered. The operation prohibiting process is canceled by executing a clear all process (step S117) described later.

  When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S106 to S108, a power-on setting process is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In addition, after executing the process of step S110, a recognition process (step S111) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and various data are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. A data output process is executed (step S112). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

  The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is prohibited from occurring at the stage where the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S112 is completed and the process of step S113 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S112 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S113 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S113 to S116. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S113 to S116 are repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S113 to S116 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S113, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S114, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in addition, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S115. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S116, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted is performed. When the process of step S116 is executed, the process returns to step S113, and the processes of step S113 to step S116 are repeated.

  On the other hand, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON-operated (step S103: YES), the main RAM 65 also includes an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 65. All areas are cleared to “0” and initial setting is performed for the areas cleared to “0” (step S117). That is, when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, all the areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to “0” and cleared even if the reset button 68 c is not pressed. Initial setting is performed on the storage area where the processing is executed. Further, in step S117, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared after “0” is cleared. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the entire main RAM 65 A configuration may be adopted in which the clearing process is not performed but the clearing process is performed when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

  Thereafter, a set value update process is executed in step S118, and after a set value update signal output process is executed in step S119, the process proceeds to step S110. Hereinafter, the setting value update process will be described. The output process of the set value update signal will be described in detail later. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing.

  First, “1” is set in the set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When “1” is set in the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting value up to that point.

  After that, a set value display start process is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start process, the third notification display device 69c is controlled to display the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1”. The manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting value.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned OFF (step S203: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b is pressed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S206: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed, the setting value is updated to one level higher. When the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting value is set to “setting 1”. Will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206, or if the process of step S207 is executed, a display update process for the set value is executed (step S208). In the set value display update process, display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that a number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is displayed. The manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processing after step S204 is executed again. If an OFF operation has been performed (step S203: YES), a set value display end process is executed (step S209). In the set value display end process, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67. Become. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S302). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S303, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S114, and in step S304, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S115.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S305). In the fraud detection process, occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set to the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In subsequent step S306, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processing after step S307 is executed.

  In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the general power drive unit 34b is started, and the closed state should be switched to. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the incoming ball detection process is executed (step S309). In the entrance detection process, signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 are read. The presence / absence of a ball entering the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S310). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S311). In a situation where the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is launched in 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined launch cycle. In the subsequent step S312, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S308, the disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. I do.

  After that, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  Thereafter, the ordinary power control process is executed (step S314). In the general-purpose power control process, when a winning to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring the reservation information on the general-purpose side is executed and the reservation information on the general-purpose side is stored. In addition, a release determination is performed on the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for a normal diagram is executed using the release determination as a trigger. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the utility wire 34a of the second working port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. In the case of the opening / closing execution mode, even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set.

  In subsequent step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, output information is set for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure hold display unit 37b. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general map display unit 38a to the general map hold display unit 38b is set. In step S315, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, and the display content of the general map display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S316). Further, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). In addition, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S318). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure special power control process in step S313 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, hold information acquisition processing is executed (step S401). In the hold information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred for the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. If a winning has occurred, the number of holds in the holding storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). When the number of reserves is less than the upper limit value, 1 is added to the number of holds, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is used for holding. Stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. In addition, when the winning to the 1st operation port 33 and the 2nd operation port 34 has generate | occur | produced simultaneously, within the range which performs the acquisition process of reservation information once, the process for acquiring the said reservation information is performed. Run multiple times. In addition, when a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, a corresponding acquisition time command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase of the hold information.

  Thereafter, the information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special figure special electric address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electricity counter is obtained from the special figure special electricity address table (step S404), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes in steps S406 to S412 should be executed, and the special figure special electric address table is the special figure special electric counter. Corresponding to the numerical information, the start address of the program for executing the processing of step S406 to step S412 is set.

  In step S406, special figure variation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start process.

  In the special figure change start process, the data setting process is executed (step S502) on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES). In the data setting process, first, the number of holdings is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. Specifically, the second reservation area RE2 → the first reservation area RE1. Then, after shifting the data in each area such as the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3, the fourth reserved area RE4 is cleared to “0”. At this time, a shift time command for recognizing that the data in the holding area has been shifted is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the decrease of the hold information.

  After executing the data setting process, the success / failure table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, information indicating the success / failure lottery mode of the main RAM 65 is read to grasp the current success / failure lottery mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the high-probability table 64g is read from the main ROM 64. On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65. Then, the low-probability tables 64a to 64f corresponding to the grasped setting values are read from the main ROM 64.

  Thereafter, the success / failure determination process is executed with reference to the success / failure tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the success / failure determination process, the information for determination of success / failure among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 is the jackpot numerical value information set in the determination tables 64a to 64g read in step S503. It is determined whether or not they match.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S505: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information relating to the big hit type counter C2 is read. Then, with reference to the sorting table 64h provided in the main ROM 64, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the read numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, which jackpot result corresponds to the low winning jackpot result, the low winning / high winning jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result is specified.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game time related to the start of the change from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is written into the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  Thereafter, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main-side RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result. In step S508, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination process in step S506 is performed. “1” is set in the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not a big win, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S509). Specifically, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of the change from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in advance in the main ROM 64. The specified information is written into the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing one of the processes of step S508 and step S509, a process of grasping the duration of game times is executed (step S510). In such processing, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game times related to the start of the current variation are the low probability big hit result or the most advantageous big hit result. If the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is not the result of any jackpot, but is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the game generation duration corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation duration table stored in the main ROM 64. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64 Get the period. By the way, the duration of game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table.

  The duration of the game times when no reach occurs is set such that the duration of the game times is shortened as the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding area RE increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, a shorter duration of game times is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. A reach non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the duration of the game times does not vary depending on the number of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the duration of game times when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, a duration table may be set individually for each of the cases of outreach and non-reach outliers. In this case, distribution of the duration of game times according to each game result is performed.

  Thereafter, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is set in a special figure special timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S511). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed in a timer update process (step S310). By the way, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the symbols on the special symbol display unit 37a and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are carried out. In the state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a state where a predetermined symbol combination is waited on the active line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is a total time for one game time.

  Thereafter, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information on the duration of game times. Here, as described above, the duration of game times acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of game times acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the change command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sound emission control device 81 can specify whether or not reach has occurred from information on the duration of game times. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred. The type command includes game result information.

  When the sound emission control device 81 receives the change command and the type command from the main CPU 63, the display light emission unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute effects for game times. In this case, the game round effect is performed in a manner corresponding to the contents of the change command and the type command. In addition, the symbol display device 41 displays a variation of the symbol as an effect for the game turn, and when the effect for the game turn ends, a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process is obtained. Stopped display.

  Thereafter, the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is started (step S513). Then, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is “0” when the special figure variation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1”. Thereafter, “1” is set to the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that the game is started should be executed to the management IC 66.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52), in step S407, the special figure fluctuation process is executed. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is during the game time duration and before the final stop display. If it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is regulated. The process for changing automatically is executed. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure changing process from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process. Update to stuff. In the present embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81.

  In step S408, a special figure finalizing process is executed. In the special figure determination process, the display form of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is set to a display form corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. Further, in the special figure determination process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. When the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”. When the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure determination process to the special electric figure start process. Update.

  In step S409, a special electricity start process is executed. In the special electricity start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening / closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the opening period setting process is executed. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The voice light emission control device 81 receives the opening command so that the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute the opening effect. When the opening period has elapsed, a start process for starting the first round game is executed. In the start process, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in an open state and a round game end condition is set. In setting the end condition, an upper limit duration is set for the case where the special electric prize device 32 is kept open in the first round game of this time, and the special electric prize device 32 can be awarded in the first round game of this time. The upper limit number of game balls is set in a winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65.

  In step S410, a special electricity release process is executed. In the special electric release opening process, it is determined whether or not a round game end condition is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special electricity prize winning device 32 is closed. If the round game ended this time is not the last round game, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special electric release opening processing. If the round game ended this time is the last execution round game, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is added by 2 so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric release open processing. Update to the one corresponding to the special electricity termination process.

  In step S411, a special electric power closing process is executed. In the special electricity closing process, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period elapses, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in an open state and a round game end condition is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric power closing process.

  In step S412, special electric power end processing is executed. In the special electric power end processing, when the processing for starting the ending period in the current opening / closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set and the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. . The voice light emission control device 81 receives the ending command so that the display light emission unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute the ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode of this time.

  Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are input to the main CPU 63.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

  In the entrance detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set as a signal group from each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning port detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning port detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6 bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In this case, an HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as the detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Stores the information. That is, in the situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected in the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, information “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In a detected state, information “1” corresponding to information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the entrance detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S602), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). . The first output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The 10 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the withdrawal output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 10 prize balls are When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a receives one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second output flag provided in the main-side RAM 65 (step S605), and the value of the ten award ball counter provided in the main-side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). . The second output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S608), and 1 is added to the value of the ten award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S609). . The third output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, “1” is set in the special electricity prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S611), “1” is set in the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S612), and further The value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special power prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special power prize device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. In the special chart special power control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the special power prize winning flag, so that one game ball enters the special power prize winning device 32. It is determined that a ball has been generated, and 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of balls that can be entered into the special electric prize device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electricity prize flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. . The 15 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to pay out 15 game balls. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, 15 prize balls are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process in step S317 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 11), and 15 prize balls are received. When the command is output once, the counter value for 15 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S615), and “1” is set to the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S616). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special signal special electric control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a by confirming that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag. On the condition that the number of reserved information being held is less than the upper limit of four, processing for newly storing the reserved information is executed. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The fifth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The single prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the single prize ball counter is 1 or more, a single prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) and one prize ball is issued. When the command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives a single prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S619), and “1” is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S620). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special signal special control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to “1”. On the condition that the number of reserved information being held is less than the upper limit of four, processing for newly storing the reserved information is executed. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the second operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The sixth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the ordinary power transmission control process (step S314) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the gate winning flag, so that the ordinary power stored in the general power reservation area 65c is stored. Processing for storing the current numerical information of the general utility release counter C4 in the general electric power reservation area 65c as general information holding information on condition that the number of reserved information on the side is less than the upper limit number of four Execute. It is confirmed that “1” is set in the gate winning flag in the ordinary power control process (step S314), and the gate winning flag is cleared to “0” when processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed.

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 4 milliseconds as already described, when one game ball is detected by one ball detection sensor 42a to 49a, The main CPU 63 specifies that one game ball is detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a in a situation where the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect the one game ball. It is done at. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

  Next, processing contents executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 and the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout-side ROM 93, a payout-side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to a payout-side CPU 92 that is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The payout-side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout-side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the payout side RAM 94 requires a faster time for reading than the payout side ROM 93. The payout-side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout-side ROM 93.

  The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives a prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball can be normally paid out, and if the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball cannot be normally discharged, The payout device 76 is stopped even in a situation where the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout limit command indicating that the payout is not normally possible to the main CPU63. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform notification indicating that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally. In this manner, a notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a state where it is not possible to normally pay out game balls, a full state where the lower plate 56a is filled with game balls, a state where no balls are refilled in the tank 75, a state where no balls are replenished, There are a payout abnormal state in which the machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is fully filled when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is determined that the full tank state has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is not detected when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball detection sensor is released. Identifies that the ballless state has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and a detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor 76 does not continuously detect the game ball in spite of the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is determined that the payout abnormality state is released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95 and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is an open state. Also, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is determined to be opened from the closed state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is changed from the opened state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has been closed when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when a closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and a gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is open. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state from the open state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when receiving a main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when receiving a main body closing command.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and in the case of the full tank, the process for stopping the game ball payout And a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a ball useless process is executed (step S702). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the no-ball state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout abnormality state is based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the payout abnormal state, the process of stopping payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating a payout abnormality state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S704). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95. When the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process for stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for allowing the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S705). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96. If the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, Is executed, and a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a command reading process is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, a process of reading a prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), the payout device 76 pays out game balls. The payout control process for performing the execution control is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and one paying ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number information. When the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, external information setting processing for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing is executed (step S709).

  Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, which are some external terminals and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 as described above, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail, the signal connection board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92 with regard to the configuration of this electrical connection. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout-side CPU 92 but also to an external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  In detail, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 that branches from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result in the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also input to the external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal plate 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round is completed. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation port 34 are included. .

  In the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interruption process (FIG. 17), the payout side CPU 92 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the game ball payout in the pachinko machine 10. For example,
-A payout rate that is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10-A game play state that is not in the opening / closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode Ball ratio (hereinafter referred to as “B”)
-Number of games played in the opening / closing execution mode-Number of games played in the high frequency support mode-Number of game times executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 "S")
B-S × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34”
-Number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”).
B- (S1 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + S2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
The occurrence probability of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game time, the occurrence probability of the high frequency support mode per unit game time, and the like are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding entrance part.

<Configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing a game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. In addition to the above, the MPU 62 includes the I / F 101 and the reading terminal 68d described above.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting / receiving a signal to / from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. As a result of executing various processes by the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 and the main side As a result of executing various processes by the CPU 63, when a command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The management IC 66 includes a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, It has. Each of these devices is connected to be capable of bidirectional communication through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and uses the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via the bidirectional communication signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be accessed at random, and when compared with the same data capacity, the management-side RAM 114 requires a faster time for reading than the management-side ROM 113. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date information) that is being measured in accordance with an instruction from the management CPU 112. It is a possible configuration. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information related to the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management side I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  The calculation result memory 131 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used for sequentially storing various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c and are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. “0” is stored as the first data when the signal is at the LOW level, and “1” information is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is output by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second prize opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is outputted by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a. When a sphere is detected, the second signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is outputted by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. When a sphere is detected, a third signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. HI level fourth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a fifth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and one game is output by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, the fifth signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a sixth signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is output by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a seventh signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at the HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation that is in the opening / closing execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level when the high frequency support mode is set.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

  An eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not a game is started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eleventh signal at the LOW level until the game turn is started, and outputs the eleventh signal at the HI level for a specific period when the game turn is started. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level eleventh signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  The fifteenth buffer 122o receives a set value update signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the main side CPU 63 has newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the main-side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level set value update signal in a situation where a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not performed, and a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In addition, a pulse signal that maintains the set value update signal of the HI level over a specific period is output by the number corresponding to the newly set value. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

  The sixteenth buffer 122p has an output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize when the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 68d. Entered. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  The twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n can be input with signals from the main CPU 63, but the pachinko machine 10 is blank to which normal signals are not input. As described above, by providing a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 as the input port 121 of the management I / F 111, It is possible to divert the management IC 66 to a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118l to 118n may not be formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

  The setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 and receive an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management CPU 112 can specify that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management-side CPU 112 will be described later, when control is started in the main-side CPU 63 and the management-side CPU 112 with the start of the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the management-side CPU 112 changes from the main-side CPU 63 to the management-side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command to In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the various types of signals are specified by the management CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied. Information stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence relationship memory 116 includes first to fourteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123n in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. Is provided.

  In the first correspondence relationship area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included in the first correspondence area 123a together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management CPU 112. The second correspondence area 123b also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included along with information indicating that it is the general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored.

  In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fourth correspondence area 123d also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electricity prize device 32, as well as information indicating that the special electricity prize device 32 is present (15). Stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first working port 33 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 together with information indicating the first operation port 33 in the fifth correspondence area 123e (one) ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second working port 34 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 together with information indicating the second operation port 34 (one piece). ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. In the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k, information indicating the start of game times is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management CPU 112. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management CPU 112. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112.

  As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  In addition, every time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n on the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This is a configuration. As a result, in comparison with the configuration in which information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n output a signal corresponding to the storage of the history information, The amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 can be suppressed.

  The output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management CPU 112 is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Thereby, in the situation where a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

  Information setting that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the 15th buffer 122o and the 16th buffer 122p are used for the set value update signal and the output instruction signal that are surely used not only for the pachinko machine 10 but also for other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. Therefore, it is possible to omit the process for specifying the type of the signal input to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pointer information is set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in correspondence with each pointer information on a one-to-one basis. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information and correspondence information can be stored. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it is necessary to store correspondence information according to signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k in the case of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date / time information measured in the current RTC 115 is stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is currently written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n, which is the information storage trigger this time, is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is currently written.

  Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the types of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of the entrance portion corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As already described in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42 a to 44 a detect game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31. The first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a each store information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation port 33. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored, and in the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored. When the buffer 122a to 122n that is the information storage trigger this time is any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is first to first. The information is read from any one of the seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball-entry part is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether or not the eighth buffer 122h is in the open / close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether or not the ninth buffer 122i is in the high frequency support mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input, and a signal indicating whether or not a game turn has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating the game times is stored in the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation in the opening / closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information together with the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the situation that is the high frequency support mode. The management CPU 112 identifies that the high frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and ends the high frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It is possible to specify that Then, in both cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information together with the history information storage area It stores in the area for storing 125 correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information. It stores in the area for storing 125 correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. However, it is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. The management CPU 112 is triggered to store the corresponding information in the history information storage area 125 both when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Identifies That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal until the game turn start timing is reached. When the game turn start timing is reached, the HI level eleventh signal is output for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management CPU 112 specifies that the game turn has started when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level. In other words, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, information indicating that the game time is read from the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k is stored in the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the ten consecutive business days when game balls are continuously fired in the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It is provided for several minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60000 times a day, 600000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and retained in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 includes a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating pointer information of “0” as a write target is set in the pointer area 126. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-order pointer information and the last-order pointer information is to be written, the pointer is set so that the pointer information “0” becomes the write-target. The information in the service area 126 is updated. As a result, when there is an opportunity to store history information exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

  When the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the external device, all the history information storage areas 125 are cleared to “0” and the pointer information “0” is set as a write target. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information that has been read once from becoming read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  First, “14” is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The recognition output counter is a remaining information output for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 correspond to. Is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the required number of times. As described above, 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are to be recognized as signal types, so “14” is set in the recognition output counter.

  Thereafter, an output process of the identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. When this command is output, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information. A command is output to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal corresponds to .about.122n. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start processing for storing information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1 buffer becomes the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer, so as to correspond to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. The signal type recognition setting is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is “14” to “12”, the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “11”, the special electric prize is received. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read. If the output counter for recognition is “10”, the type identification command indicating the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “9”, it is the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “8”, it is determined that the output port 24a is. If the recognition output counter is “7”, the type identification command indicating the open / close execution mode is read, and the recognition output counter If “6”, the type identification command indicating the high-frequency support mode is read, and if the recognition output counter is “5”, the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read, and the recognition output counter is read. If “4”, the type identification command indicating that the game is played is read, and if the recognition output counter is “3” to “1”, the type identification command indicating that it is blank is read.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. Store information to be used.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S805), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S806). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (steps S803 and S803). Step S804).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S806: YES), an identification end command output process is executed (step S807). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

  Next, management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) after one timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in the main CPU 63. In the management process, the combination of processes after step S908 is executed 16 times or more before the process is started.

  First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). When the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), after the setting update recognition process is executed (step S902), the process returns to step S901. In the process for recognizing the setting update, details will be described later, but when the main CPU 63 performs a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, a corresponding process is executed.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffer 122a to 122n that is the target of signal type setting. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S906).

  When a negative determination is made in step S904, or when the process of step S906 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and on condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), steps S905 and S906 Run the process again.

  If an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processing from step S908 to step S910 is repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later in step S908, a history setting process for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S909, although details will be described later, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation results are notified by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display output processing is executed. In step S910, as will be described in detail later, external output processing for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d is executed.

  FIG. 24 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122n are stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. FIG. 24A shows a period in which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 24C shows the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals inputted to these buffers 122a to 122n. FIG. 24 (d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S905) is executed by the management CPU 112. FIG.

  As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 24 (a). The Also, at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t2, which is the situation where the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the above information. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management process (FIG. 23). Thereafter, the output of the identification start command is stopped at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. In the correspondence setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence relationship area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, the output of the type identification command is stopped at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG.

  After that, at the timings t7 to t9, t10 to t12, t13 to t15, and t16 to t18, respectively, Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fourteenth type identification command is completed from the timing t16 to the timing t18.

  After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. In addition, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG.

  In order to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information, the management CPU 112 recognizes whether the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clearly shown to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It can be recognized.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, “11” is set in the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the management targets the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The management target to be specified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process is seven entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 11 items: presence / absence of execution of the opening / closing execution mode, presence / absence of execution of the high-frequency support mode, presence / absence of opening / closing of the front door frame 14, and presence / absence of the start of game times. Therefore, first, “11” is set in the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S1002). If it is not the HI level (step S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 5 or more, so that the number of management targets corresponding to the value of the management target counter is seven entrance detection sensors 42a. To 48a is specified (step S1003).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is “11” and corresponds to the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “10” and corresponds to the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter is determined. Is “9” and corresponds to the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third output flag, and the value of the management target counter is “8”. In the case of corresponding to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the management target counter is “7”, and the first working port detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to “5”, the fifth output flag is set to “1”. It is determined whether or not it is set. If the value of the management target counter is “6” and corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a, whether or not “6” is set to the sixth output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “5” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the seventh output flag. Note that “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15) as already described.

  When “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S1005). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to “0” (step S1006).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1007). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “4”, it is determined whether or not a transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is “3”, the value is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is “2”, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened, and the management target counter When the value is “1”, it is determined whether or not the game turn is started by determining whether or not “1” is set in the eleventh output flag. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S1008). When the value of the management target counter is “1” and the process of step S1008 is executed, the eleventh output flag is cleared to “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or “1” and the current management target is any of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of game times, the first to seventh signals In addition, it is determined whether or not the HI output duration period (specifically, 10 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the eleventh signals is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. . This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. If the value of the management target counter is “4” and the current management target is the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “3”. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended. The value of the management target counter is “2” and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1010).

  When a negative determination is made at step S1004, when a process at step S1006 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S1007, when a process at step S1008 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S1009, or step When the processing of S1010 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the management target counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1012). When the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the processing after step S1002 is executed for the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in a confirmation target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123k as already described, in step S1101, "11" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122n are numerical value confirmation targets. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh buffer 122k is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is an opening / closing execution mode, information indicating that it is a high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above In addition to the correspondence information, start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n are targets for reading the corresponding relationship information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k is a target for reading the corresponding relationship information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth corresponding relationship area 123e is the corresponding relationship. Information is to be read out.

  By executing the writing process as described above, the value of the check target counter is any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the game times. Is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second A combination of the operation relationship 34 and the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the game times is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. And the combination of the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1105). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the processing of step S1105 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the value of the current confirmation target counter is “8” to “10”, information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode is displayed in the corresponding relationship areas 123h to 123j. Since either the information indicating the presence or the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1106.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from “1” to “0”. It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, the RTC information is read (step S1108) in the same manner as in step S1103, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. In the history information storage area 125, the combination of the RTC information, the correspondence information indicating any one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state. Thereafter, the update processing of the target pointer is executed in the same manner as in step S1105 (step S1110).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1106, a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the processing in step S1110 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1112). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the processing after step S1102 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 27A shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and FIG. 27B shows the HI level to the eighth buffer 122h. 27 (c) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27 (d) shows a HI level signal at the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 27E shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117.

  At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 27A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written in the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 27A, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not a history information storage target, the t2 As shown in FIG. 27E, the history information is not written at the timing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, The output state of the signal input to any of the 11 buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Accordingly, history information is written at each timing as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing t4 to the timing t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the timing t4 when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is in the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode has occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing at time t8 when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high frequency support mode by confirming the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Accordingly, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is also in the high frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 27D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing at t12 when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t15 includes end information. As a result, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being opened. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a thing. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the door is in the state where the front door frame 14 is being opened.

  Next, output processing of a set value update signal that is executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a setting value update signal output process executed by the main CPU 63. The set value update signal output process is executed in step S119 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  A value corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter in the main RAM 65 is set in the pulse number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting value update signal directed to the management CPU 112 is at the HI level (step S1202). As already described, the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management IC 66. Here, the output process of the set value update signal is a process for causing the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main process (FIG. 9). It is executed at a timing before a certain recognition process. On the other hand, since the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is set in the management IC 66 in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the setting value update signal is output before the recognition process. Even if the process is executed, it is possible to specify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the management CPU 112 is a set value update signal.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1203), and whether or not the value of the LOW level counter after the 1 subtraction is “0”. Is determined (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the set value update signal is maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period while a plurality of pulses at which the set value update signal becomes the HI level is output. It is. When the value of the LOW level counter is “0” (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, so the set value update signal is set to the HI level. Setting is made (step S1205).

  Thereafter, “20” is set in the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify a period during which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 with a period of about 10 microseconds, the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. This HI level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  When the set value update signal is at the HI level (step S1202: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the HI level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the 1 subtraction is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S1208). When the value of the HI level counter is “0” (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, so the set value update signal is set to the LOW level. Setting is performed (step S1209).

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pulse number counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1210), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pulse number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1211). When the value of the pulse number counter is not “0” (step S1211: NO), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. In order to mean that there is no, “20” is set in the LOW level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 with a period of about 10 microseconds, it is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between a plurality of pulse outputs by the set value update signal. This maintenance period of the LOW level is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the setting value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

  When the value of the pulse number counter is “0” (step S1211: YES), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signal for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. Therefore, the setting value identification end command output process is executed (step S1213). The set value identification end command is a command for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output of the set value update signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. When the set value identification end command is output, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used in the same manner as the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the set value identification end command is different from the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command.

  As described above, in the output process of the set value update signal, a pulse signal by the set value update signal corresponding to the set value value of the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of the supply of the current operating power is output to the management IC 66. To do. The management-side CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition process, thereby grasping the number of pulse signals by the set value update signal, and grasping the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on the number.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. The setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  It is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to “1” (step S1302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S1304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1303, or when the process of step S1304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, RTC information that is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1308). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  When the setting update recognition process is executed as described above and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the setting is performed, the date and time when the setting is performed, and the A combination of setting values when setting is performed is stored in the history area 124 as history information. Thus, by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting are changed. It is possible to grasp the contents of the set values when performed.

  Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. Thereby, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being deleted, and various parameters to be described later are timings for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It is calculated using the history information that exists between before and after. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is stored in the history memory 117 as described above, the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d and stored in the history memory 117. By reading the information, it is possible to calculate various parameters in a period after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and during which the setting state is maintained.

  Next, display output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, it is determined whether or not it is a calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have elapsed since the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 has started, or if 51 seconds have elapsed since the previous determination in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the number of various incoming balls at normal times is calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the outlets 24a in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored, Calculate the number of balls entered. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the general winning opening 31. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the special power prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the special power prize winning device 32. Calculate the number. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number of balls entered. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number of balls entered.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 An outlet that occurs in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open by referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in a period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are calculated (step S1403). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are stored, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and A period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 in which the start information is stored, and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125 in which the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1402 and step S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of entrances generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from the number of entrances calculated in step S1402. And the following 1st-8th parameters are calculated using the number of each incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of entered balls K1, and the entrance to the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1402 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K2 of balls received, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1402. The difference in the number of incoming balls of 32 is defined as the number of incoming balls K3, and the difference in the number of incoming balls of the first working port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402 is entered. The number K4 is the second number calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1402. The difference between the ball entrance number of Doguchi 34 and ball entrance number K5.
First parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “first operating port 33 The number of winning balls for winning the prize “+ K5 ד the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34 ”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) D1 ”)
Second parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K2 entering the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Third parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32. The total number of balls K3 / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Fourth parameter: the total number K4 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
Fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K5 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
Sixth parameter: D1- (D2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Step S1404 Which stores the first to eighth parameter is the operation result to the normal storage area for the time of the operation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal storage area. The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are overwritten.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the switching execution mode, and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 generated in the state of the open / close execution mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entered into each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1405). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start / close execution mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. When correspondence information and end information indicating that it is in the opening / closing execution mode are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the opening / closing execution mode are stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the like that were generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1405. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1403, except that the period is the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1405.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1405 and S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1405. Then, the following 11th to 18th parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entered balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of entered balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1405 is set as the number of entered balls K11, and the entry of the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1405 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered at the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K12 of balls entered, and the special prize device calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1405. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K13, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405 is entered. The number K14 is calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1405. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
Eleventh parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K13 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K14 × “first operating port 33 The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) D11 ”)
The twelfth parameter: the total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K12 / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) The thirteenth parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32 The total number of balls K13 / the ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA. Fourteenth parameter: the total number K14 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K15 entering the second operating port 34 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
16th parameter: D11− (D12 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
17th parameter: (K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout of game balls (K12 × “general The number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 "+ K13 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32 "+ K14 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 "+ K15 ×" the second operating port 34 ". Ratio / 18th parameter: K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K13 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K14 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K15 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” ") In step S1407, the 11th to 18th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for the open / close execution mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. That is, when the next step S1407 is executed and the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 11th to 18th parameters are stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area. The previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for the open / close execution mode are overwritten.

  Thereafter, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the correspondence relationship indicating the high frequency support mode are stored. The out port 24a generated in the situation of the high frequency support mode by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1408). In the history area 117 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information and start information indicating the high frequency support mode, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode, and A period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the history information storage area 125 in which the start information is stored, and the correspondence indicating the high frequency support mode When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. In addition, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the end information are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as being in the high frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, and the first operating port 33, which are generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, during the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1408. The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1403, except that the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of entered balls K21, and the entry of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1408 is performed. The difference in the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls is set as the number K22 of balls, and the special prize apparatus calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1408. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K23, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408 is entered. The number is K24 and is calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1408. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K24 × “first operating port 33” The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K25 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) D11 ”)
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) 23rd parameter: Game balls to the special prize winning device 32 Total number of entered balls K23 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25). Twenty-fourth parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the first working port 33 K24 / discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
25th parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K25 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
26th parameter: D21− (D22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high frequency support mode storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. That is, when the next step S1410 is executed and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high frequency support mode storage area. Thus, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode are overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, the opening / closing execution mode is obtained by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of occurrences of is calculated. In addition, the number of occurrences of game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that game times are started in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored. . Then, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game time is calculated. Note that the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode is the number of occurrences K31, and the number of occurrences of the game times is the number of occurrences K32.
-31st parameter: K31 / K32
In step S1411, the thirty-first parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the open / close execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the opening / closing execution mode frequency storage area is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1411 is executed and the thirty-first parameter is calculated, the newly calculated thirty-first parameter is stored in the open / close execution mode frequency storage area, so that the open / close execution mode is maintained until then. The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the high frequency Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. In addition, the number of occurrences of game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that game times are started in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored. . Then, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode are calculated. The occurrence frequency of the high frequency support mode is set as the occurrence count K41, the occurrence count of the game times is set as the occurrence count K42, and the occurrence count of the opening / closing execution mode calculated in step S1411 is set as the occurrence count K43.
-41st parameter: K41 / K42
-42nd parameter: K41 / K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters, which are calculation results, are stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when the next step S1412 is executed and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area. Thus, the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are overwritten.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the process of step S1412 is executed, a display process is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display process.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify that it is the timing to update the display contents of the management result of the game history in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management-side CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, whereby the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, and the thirty-first parameter. Parameters and calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters are reported. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. Further, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, a number corresponding to the tenth digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and a number corresponding to the first digit is displayed for the third notification. It is displayed on the device 69c. And in the 1st-3rd information display apparatus 69a-69c, the said 1st-8th parameter, the said 11th-18th parameter, the said 21st-26th parameter, the said 31st parameter, and the said 41st-41st The display corresponding to the calculation result of the forty-second parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the forty-second parameter that is the display target in the last order is displayed, the display that is the display target in the first order. The calculation result of one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

  When the process of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after “1” subtraction is “0”. It is determined whether or not the timing is reached (step S1502). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “24” (step S1504: YES), the display target counter value is cleared to “0” (step S1505).

  The display target counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter that is the display target in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, the thirty-first to forty-second parameters, and display target counters “0” to “24”. There is a one-to-one correspondence with possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the first parameter that is the first display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is “24”. If so, the forty-second parameter that is the last display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1504, or when the process of step S1505 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. Control is performed (step S1506). In addition, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tenth digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The number corresponding to the 1's place is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in step S1506 and step S1507 are continued until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped. The Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

  When supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Is done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether or not the game is continued, and the main body 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. This is done regardless of whether it is visible. As described above, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, and thereby the first to third notification display devices 69a. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of .about.69c.

  The display of the game history management results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the operation power supply to the management CPU 112 is started and the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Is done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similarly to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is displayed.

  When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information corresponding to the setting value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. However, while the information corresponding to the set value is displayed before the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the game history in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management result display is started after an identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. Thus, even if the third notification display device 69c is configured to be used as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the set value and displaying the management result of the game history, the display of these displays is also possible. It is possible to avoid overlapping the periods.

  When information corresponding to the set value is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the management result of the game history is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of information corresponding to the set value and the display of the management result of the game history is being performed on the third notification display device 69c.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. explain. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  In the data output processing, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. Thus, in order to perform external output of history information and various parameters, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. It is necessary to. Since the power switch for stopping and starting the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is provided in the payout mechanism 73 mounted on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, these stop and start operations are performed. In order to do this, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to externally output history information and various parameters, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. By adopting a configuration that needs to be configured, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for reading history information and various parameters by anyone other than the administrator of the game hall.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 68d, so that the current connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is performed on the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is confirmed (step S1602). The external device is configured to allow both confirmation of control information and history information and various parameters, and if control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the external device, the external device A control information confirmation signal is transmitted, and when history information and confirmation of various parameters are selected by a manual operation on the external apparatus, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the external apparatus. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an external device for confirming control information may be configured separately from an external device for confirming history. In this case, when an external device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the external device, and an external for history confirmation is transmitted to the reading terminal 68d. When the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the external device.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, output processing for control information confirmation is executed (step S1603). In the output process, a program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it becomes possible to read the control information in the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and it is confirmed whether the control information is normal or normal. Can be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32B, the management CPU 112 has changed the output state of the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 from the LOW level to the HI level. (Step S1701: YES), the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read, and the read history information and various parameters are output to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the game history management result information can be analyzed. Further, when the history information is output to the reading terminal 68d, the management CPU 112 clears the history memory 117 to “0” (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is deleted only when the history information is read by the external device.

  Returning to the description of the data output process (FIG. 32A), when the process of step S1603 is executed, or when the process of step S1604 is executed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d continues. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S1605). If it is continued (step S1605: YES), the process stands by in step S1605. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released. When the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released (step S1605: NO), the data output process is terminated.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since a game ball is paid out when a game ball enters any of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the player can either The game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In this configuration, a game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as a history target entering unit). When this occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of entering the game balls into each history target entrance part in the pachinko machine 10, and use this managed information. Thus, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entrance mode of the game ball to each history target entrance section. In addition, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the history information.

  All the entrances that discharge the game balls from the game area PA are the targets for executing the history information storage process and the targets for management using the history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the pitching frequency for an arbitrary history target pitching part using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target entrance part with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball has entered the history target entrance portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of the game balls into the history target entry portion.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target entry part, but also history information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect, and the high frequency support mode History information indicating whether or not, and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Thereby, it is possible to manage whether or not the game balls have entered the history target ball entering unit by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to an external device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the history information is read by the external device, and it is possible to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the history target entry portion using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the outside using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program. As a result, the history information can be output to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is a program or history information, and information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the history information is output to the outside using the reading terminal 68d for outputting the program to the outside, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. The specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, only necessary information can be read out even if the reading terminal 68d is also used.

  Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified which of the program and history information the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration relating to selection of information to be externally output from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 for storing a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. As a result, the signal paths for the reading terminals 68d can be collected in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 68d.

  The main CPU 63 that executes processing for paying out the game ball based on the game ball entering any of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Separately, a management CPU 112 is provided, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the manner in which the game balls enter the respective history target entrance portions while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing extremely.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided as the MPU 62 on the same chip. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main-side CPU 63 uses information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a using the signal paths corresponding to the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, and the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. It transmits to 122a-122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information on the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  Information corresponding to whether or not the main CPU 63 is in the opening / closing execution mode, information corresponding to whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened, Information corresponding to the start of the game round is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using a signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122k (that is, the signal paths), and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122k (that is, each signal path 118a to 118k) corresponds to the management CPU 112. Thereby, it is not necessary to store the corresponding relationship information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target entrance part, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target entrance part can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

  Correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding communication compared with the structure which provides the dedicated signal path | route for transmitting corresponding relationship information.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, information that enables the management target IC 66 to specify the history target entrance portion corresponding to the transmission target information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 each time detection result information of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management CPU 112 without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with more buffers than the types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. It has been. Thereby, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, correspondence information indicating the type of the history target entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the entrance mode of the game ball into each history target entrance portion using the read history information.

  In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh, To 18th parameter, 21st to 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are calculated. The various parameters resulting from the calculation are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, it is possible to notify the pachinko machine 10 of various parameters as a result of calculation using the history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. Thereby, it becomes possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Also, various parameters corresponding to each of the situation in the opening / closing execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode are calculated. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the entrance mode of the game ball according to each situation.

  When the history information of the history memory 117 is output to an external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear processing of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes an object to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. Can be made difficult to occur.

  In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to the game ball is generated through the external terminal plate 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . Thus, by using information output externally through the external terminal plate 97, the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the frequency of entering the game ball can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the memory 117 for use, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of entering the game balls into the history target entry portion.

  The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Thereby, even if it is the single pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to produce the situation which becomes advantageous or unfavorable about the probability of being a jackpot result in the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is set in the pachinko machine 10. Does not vary according to conditions. Thereby, it becomes possible to restrict the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of the jackpot result to the situation in the low probability mode. In addition, since the high-accuracy determination table 64g referred to in the high-probability mode can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the determination tables 64a to 64g are stored in advance in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing.

  The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the sort mode of the type of jackpot result is the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Does not fluctuate accordingly. Thereby, it becomes possible to restrict the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low probability mode. Further, since the distribution table 64h referred to when distributing the types of jackpot results can be made common in any of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 can be used. Can be prevented from increasing in storage capacity.

  Even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased. As a result, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information up to that time can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the history memory can be stored for a long period of time. The management result of the game history can be specified using the history information accumulated in 117.

  Even when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased, and the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Is performed, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117. Thereby, it becomes possible to distinguish the history information before the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the history information after the setting is performed.

  When history information corresponding to the history information is stored in the history memory 117 by newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, information corresponding to the setting value is included in the history information. As a result, it is possible to identify the contents of the set values set in the past by referring to the history information.

  When the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting value is changed from a predetermined setting value corresponding to the start. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting value update process (FIG. 10) changes the setting value from the set value corresponding to a certain start. Can be performed. Therefore, the work content of the setting value changing operation is easy for the operator to understand.

  Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting value is changed from “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally ends the set value update process (FIG. 10) immediately after the start of the set value update process (FIG. 10), the setting value having the lowest advantage is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall in such a situation.

  When various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is used based on the history information corresponding to the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 setting. Thus, various parameters may be calculated. In this case, the management result of the game history at the timing after the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed can be derived as various parameters.

  Further, when various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 and based on history information corresponding to a change in the setting value is used as a reference. Alternatively, various parameters may be calculated using history information stored after that. In this case, the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed can be derived as various parameters.

  In addition, although the opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d is provided in the board box 60a of the main controller 60, the opening 69 is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is opposed to the opposing wall 60b. It is good also as a structure covered with. In this case, in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the success / failure table corresponding to the set state of the pachinko machine 10 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 64 has a setting 1 area 161, a setting 2 area 162, a setting 3 area 163, a setting 4 area 164, a setting 5 area 165, and a setting 6 area. 166 are provided. In the setting 1 area 161, the low probability table 161 a for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” and the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high-probability table 161b for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state is “setting 1” and the winning-and-raising lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 2 area 162 includes a low probability table 162a for setting 2 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high probability determination table 162b for setting 2, which is referred to when the setting state of “Setting 2” is “high probability mode”. In the setting 3 area 163, a low probability table 163a for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high-probability table 163b for setting 3, which is referred to when the setting state is “setting 3” and the winning-and-raising lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  In the setting 4 area 164, a low probability table 164a for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high probability determination table 164b for setting 4, which is referred to when the setting state of “setting 4” is “high probability mode”. In the setting 5 area 165, the low probability table 165a for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in the high-probability table 165b for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state is “setting 5” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the setting 6 area 166, a low probability table 166a for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high-probability table 166b for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state is “setting 6” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the low probability tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. Specifically, when the low probability table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, a jackpot result is obtained at about 1/320, and when the low probability table 162a for setting 2 is referenced, it is about 1/310. If the low probability table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/300, and if the low probability table 164a for setting 4 is referenced, it is about 1/290. A big hit result is obtained, and if the low probability table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, the big hit result is about 1/280, and if the low probability table 166a for setting 6 is referenced, it is about 1/270. A jackpot result. As a result, if the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high set value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous to the player.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in the high-accuracy determination tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high-accuracy determination table 161b for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/45, and when the high-accuracy determination table 162b for setting 2 is referred to, it is about 1/40. If the high-decision result table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/35, and if the high-probability table 164b for setting 4 is referenced, it is about 1/30. A big hit result is obtained, and when the high probability determination table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, a big hit result is obtained at about 1/25, and when the high probability determination table 166b for setting 6 is referred, about 1/20. A jackpot result. Thereby, it is easier for the jackpot result to occur in the high probability mode when the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, which is advantageous for the player.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode becomes higher as the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is “Setting 1”. In the present embodiment, both of the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are the same. The setting state of the machine 10 is higher as the setting value is higher. This makes it possible to increase the player's advantage over the setting of a high setting value.

  Even if the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode in the case of “setting 6” which is the highest setting state, the winning result of the jackpot result in the high probability mode in the case of “setting 1” which is the lowest setting state It is set lower than the probability. This makes it possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting”. It is possible to prevent the player's advantage in the case of “6” from becoming extremely high.

  On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common in any setting state of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and a storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher in the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. A configuration in which the set value is lower may be employed. In this case, in the low probability mode, a higher setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is advantageous to the player, and in the high probability mode, a lower setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is advantageous to the player. It becomes possible.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a higher setting value, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. It is good also as a structure which is constant in the setting state of "." In this case, in the high probability mode, the higher the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous for the player. In the low probability mode, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage caused by the set state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring. Become.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the management of game history management results when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In addition to the memories in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 as a memory for storing information. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing.

  The separate storage memory 171 includes a first separate storage area 172, a second separate storage area 173, a third separate storage area 174, a fourth separate storage area 175, and a fifth separate storage area 176. In the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, information on the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, more specifically, the first embodiment described above. The various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters) described in the above are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, first, various parameters are stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter each time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the nth The areas to be stored are switched so that the storage areas 172 to 176 → the (n + 1) th separate storage areas 172 to 176. When various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176 and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are deleted. As a result, various parameters until the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased for more than five times. It is memorized.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the setting update recognition process in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to “1”. Setting is performed (step S1802). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S1804). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1803, or when the process of step S1804 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, a monitoring process for repeated changes is executed (step S1806). Although details will be described later in the repeated change monitoring process, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly generated in a short period, a process for notifying it is executed. In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended Therefore, it is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time to be erased. On the other hand, by executing the repeated change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is executed.

  Thereafter, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S1807). In various arithmetic processes, the processes in steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Accordingly, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, first to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameter, and thirty-first parameter) using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. To 42nd parameter) is calculated.

  Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the current storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for enabling the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 is set. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that the storage target is changed to the next sequential area when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. Updated to By executing the processing in step S1808, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

  Thereafter, the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” (step S1809). That is, in the present embodiment, not only when history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information 117 is deleted.

  Thereafter, RTC information which is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1812). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the repeated change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was previously set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was last set is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of game times is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, 1 is added to the value of the repeated change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, as described above, it is not necessary to supply external power for storing and holding the value of the repeated change counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening execution of game times exceeding the reference number is the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has been exceeded.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, a repeated change display process is executed (step S1904). In the repeated change display processing, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c correspond to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 being repeated a number of times exceeding the notification reference value in a short period. Display content of repeated changes. The display content of the repeated change is a display content that displays “E” in all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. The state in which the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is continued until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to “0”. . The repeated change flag is a flag for the management CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of the repeated change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. When the repeated change flag is set to “1” and the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display processing in the first embodiment is performed. (FIG. 31) is not executed. Thereafter, “1” is set to the repeated change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1905).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeated change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to “0” (step S1906). Thereafter, on the condition that “1” is set in the repeated change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repeated change on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are displayed. The display is terminated (step S1908), and the repeated change flag is cleared to “0” (step S1909).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is deleted. As a result, it is possible to leave history information about the game executed after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the history memory 117.

  When a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are calculated as the management result of the game history using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10. Further, even when the history information in the history memory 117 is deleted when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history based on the history information to be deleted. It becomes possible.

  In the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time when a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, the calculated various parameters are stored in separate storage memories. 171 is stored. Thereby, even if a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting is performed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  By providing a plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it is possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timings of the setting states for a plurality of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods with reference to the timing when the new setting state is set. In addition, even when a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated in a situation where no game is played, various parameters calculated using history information of the situation where the game is actually played are The possibility of remaining in the separate storage memory 171 can be increased.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended Therefore, it is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time to be erased. On the other hand, by executing the repeated change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the administrator or the like that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  Notification that the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period is performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history, the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time. Notification can be performed.

  In a situation where it should be notified that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the display contents of the repeated change continue to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The notification of the management result of the normal game history is not performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, it becomes possible to emphasize the notification that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In the case where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of game balls discharged from the game area PA after a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is not limited to this. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, when the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined entry part (for example, one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or a predetermined In a situation where the total number of game balls discharged into the combination) is within the reference number, and the event where the new setting is made continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, an event that the new setting is performed in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number is notified. A configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the reference value is executed when the reference value is exceeded.

  In addition, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed exceeding a notification reference value within a monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds), a notification corresponding thereto may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value However, the setting value has been changed in a situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number of times. When an event continues beyond the notification reference value, a corresponding notification may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value The corresponding notification is executed, but the new setting is triggered when the number of game times executed after the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number of times. It is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting corresponding to it is performed when the event by which the various parameters made above continue exceeding the alerting | reporting reference value.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value However, in addition to or in place of it, the progress of the game may be limited for a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour).

<Fourth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the monitoring process for repeated changes is executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the repeated change monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63. The repeated change monitoring process is executed when the set value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the monitoring process for repeated change is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which repeated change monitoring processing is executed when a set value is changed may be employed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was previously set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). The main RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for measuring the number of game times executed after the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main CPU 63 executes a new game number. Each time, the value of the game number counter is incremented by one. The game number counter is excluded from the “0” clearing target even when the clear process (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, 1 is added to the value of the repeat change counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2002). The repetitive change counter is excluded from the “0” clearing target even when the clear processing (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening execution of game times exceeding the reference number is the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has been exceeded.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, "1" is set to the repeated change flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). The repeated change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the repeated change notification should be notified. The repeated change flag is excluded from the “0” clearing target even when the clear process (steps S105 and S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S2005). Thereafter, on condition that “1” is set in the repeat change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2006: YES), the repeat change flag is cleared to “0” (step S2007).

  In the repeated change monitoring process, when “1” is set in the repeated change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2008: YES), a repeated change notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the repeated change notification command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting portion 53, and the speaker portion 54 are notified of the repeated change. The notification of the repetitive change is continued until the supply of operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period based on the control by the main CPU 63. In addition, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not required even if the gaming machine body 12 is not opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11. It is possible for the administrator to recognize that the new setting has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration in which a notification command for repeated change is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81 when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, A configuration may be employed in which external output corresponding to that is performed.

  The main CPU 63 may execute the repeated change monitoring process according to the present embodiment, and the management CPU 112 may execute the repeated change monitoring process according to the third embodiment. Thereby, it becomes possible to strictly monitor whether or not the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition process in the management side CPU 112 is different from that in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to “1”. It sets (step S2102). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2103). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S2104). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2103 or when the process of step S2104 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals inputted to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exists in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and further, it is determined whether or not the grasped number of game times exceeds a reference number (specifically, 100 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that game balls are discharged from the game area PA is stored is a reference number (specifically, 1000). It is good also as a structure which determines whether it is over in step S2106. Corresponding relationship information indicating that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entering portion (for example, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or a predetermined combination). In step S2106, it may be determined whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 storing the number exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000). Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not the total reference number of history information stored in the history memory 117 (specifically, 1000) is exceeded in step S2106.

  In the case where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of game balls discharged from the game area PA after a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is not limited to this. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, when the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined entry part (for example, one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or a predetermined In a situation where the total number of game balls discharged into the combination) is within the reference number, and the event where the new setting is made continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, an event that the new setting is performed in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number is notified. A configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the reference value is executed when the reference value is exceeded.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various calculation processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processes, the processes in steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Accordingly, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, first to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameter, and thirty-first parameter) using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. To 42nd parameter) is calculated.

  Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the current storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for enabling the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 is set. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that the storage target is changed to the next sequential area when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. Updated to By executing the processing of step S2108, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” (step S2109). That is, in the present embodiment, not only when history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information 117 is deleted.

  Thereafter, RTC information which is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2112). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is stored in the history memory 117 on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly set in a short period of time, the information on the management result of the game history as a result of the game being substantially played is stored in the separate storage memory 171. It can be stored.

  Note that the process of step S2109 may be executed on condition that the processes of step S2107 and step S2108 have been executed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. Thereby, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly set in a short period, the history information in the history memory 117 can be prevented from being deleted.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, and 144a to 144n. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth counters 141f to 144f of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 141g to 144g of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of the respective areas 141 to 144.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing history setting processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating that it is blank is stored in the first to eleventh corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set to the check target counter in step S2201.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which a status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, as the corresponding relationship information, information indicating that it is an open / close execution mode, information indicating that it is a high-frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

  If a positive determination is made in step S2202, state information setting processing is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not in the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect is displayed on the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is deleted from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in operation is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in operation is stored in the management-side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management-side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2202, or when the process of step S2203 is executed, numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is displayed. , It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level by confirming whether or not it has been changed from “0” to “1” ( Step S2204). If the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is a value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information on the first state is stored in the management RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from “0” to “1” in the situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is a value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information on the second state is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is a value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information on the third state is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding sum counter is added (step S2205). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n for summation in the summation area 141 of the history memory 117 is added. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 141k for summation is an addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 141e for summation is an addition target. If the value of the check target counter is “1”, the total first counter 141a is an addition target.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding counter processing for the first state is added (step S2207). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to first counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is an addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is set. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 142a for the first state is the addition target.

  Thereafter, by referring to the status information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding second state counter addition processing is executed (step S2209). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 143e for the second state is set. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 143a for the second state is the addition target.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the corresponding third state counter addition process is executed (step S2211). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is set. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 144a for the third state is the addition target.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2204, a negative determination is made in step S2210, or if the process in step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2213). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  When the history setting process is executed as described above, the number of game balls that enter the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the opening and closing are executed. The number of occurrences of the mode, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode, and the number of occurrences of the game times are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment but are stored as number information. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  As described above, since the number information is stored instead of the history information, it is not necessary to execute a process for deriving the number information from the history information when calculating various parameters. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Next, setting update recognition processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to “1”. Setting is performed (step S2302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S2304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2303, or when the process of step S2304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S 2305, the summation eleventh counter 141 k measuring the number of game times executed in the summation area 141 in the history memory 117 and the opening / closing execution in the summation area 141 in the history memory 117. Each of the eighth counter 141h for counting the number of occurrences of the mode and the ninth counter 141i for totaling the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode in the summing area 141 in the history memory 117 “0” is cleared (steps S2306 to S2308). As a result, the number of game times, the number of times of opening / closing execution mode, and the number of times of high-frequency support mode are cleared to “0” when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Is done. Accordingly, the thirty-first parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game time, the forty-first parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time, and the high-frequency support mode for the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. As a result, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memory 117 has counters other than the total eighth counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k. “0” is not cleared. Thereby, the management of the number or frequency of entering the game balls into each history target entrance part is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the number of game balls that enter the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, the number of times of opening / closing execution mode, and the high frequency support The number of occurrences of the mode and the number of occurrences of the game times are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as number information. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  In addition, since the configuration is such that the number information is stored instead of the history information, it is not necessary to execute a process for deriving the number information from the history information when calculating various parameters. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Information about the number of game times, the number of times of opening / closing execution mode, and the number of times of occurrence of high-frequency support mode is cleared to “0” when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Accordingly, the thirty-first parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game time, the forty-first parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time, and the high-frequency support mode for the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. As a result, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memory 117 has counters other than the total eighth counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k. “0” is not cleared. Thereby, the management of the number or frequency of entering the game balls into each history target entrance part is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  The configuration of the history memory 117 as in the present embodiment may be applied to the first to fifth embodiments and the embodiments described after the present embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to “0”.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the process of step S2306-step S2308 is performed in the process for a setting update recognition (FIG. 41) when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Thus, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, if the setting value is not changed before and after that, information on the number of times of game play execution, information on the number of times of opening / closing execution mode, and high frequency support The information on the number of occurrences of the mode is not cleared to “0”, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the information on the number of executions of the game times, the information on the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode, and the high frequency support mode It is possible to clear the information on the number of occurrences of “0”.

  In the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 before the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6”, which are the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, are provided. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to “setting 1”, and a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to “setting 2”. A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided in correspondence with “setting 3”, and a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided in correspondence with “setting 4”, corresponding to “setting 5”. A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to “setting 6”.

  Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to store history information corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting has been performed are stored as history information. The history information can be stored separately for each set value without deleting the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

  In addition, in each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, the total area 141, the first state area 142, the second state area 143, and the third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment. It is good also as a structure by which these combinations are set.

  Next, the setting update recognition process in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 Is set to “1” (step S2402). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”. In the present embodiment, since the set value grasping counter is provided in the calculation result memory 131 which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, it is assumed that the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. Also, the value stored in the set value grasping counter is stored and held.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2404). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2403, or when the process of step S2404 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the value of the set value grasping counter in the calculation result memory 131 are set as the history information storage targets and the reference targets when various parameters are calculated ( Step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “1”, it means that it has been set to “setting 1”. Therefore, the history memory 181 for setting 1 is stored in the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference object during calculation. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “2”, it means that it is set to “setting 2”. Therefore, the history memory 182 for setting 2 is stored in the history information storage target and when various parameters are calculated. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “3”, it means that it has been set to “setting 3”. Therefore, the history memory 183 for setting 3 is stored in the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “4”, it means that it has been set to “setting 4”. Therefore, the history memory 184 for setting 4 is stored in the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “5”, it means that it has been set to “setting 5”. Therefore, the history memory 185 for setting 5 is stored in the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “6”, it means that it has been set to “setting 6”. Therefore, the history memory 186 for setting 6 is stored in the storage target of history information and various parameters are calculated. Set as a reference target.

  Thereafter, RTC information which is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the history information storage targets in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 that are the storage targets, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target is specified and becomes the write target. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information. Further, information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2409). In the update process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the history information storage targets in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, and the history memories 181 to 186 are stored. The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided as the history memory 117 so as to correspond to “setting 1” to “setting 6”, respectively. Thereby, it becomes possible to store the game history corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting has been performed are stored as history information. The history information can be stored separately for each set value without deleting the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

  The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which the six memories 1 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided, and one memory is used for the setting 1 Corresponding to the history memory 181 for the second setting, an area corresponding to the history memory 182 for the setting 2, an area corresponding to the history memory 183 for the setting 3, and a history memory 184 for the setting 4. An area, an area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where history information is stored using one of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. If the history information is stored, the history information in the one history memory 191 or 192 is not deleted until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 or 192. The history information can be newly stored in both the history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 and 192. Become.

  Next, setting update recognition processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to “ 1 "(step S2502). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S2504). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2503, or when the process of step S2504 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, "1" is set to the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag has been set as the history information storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 until after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This is a flag for the management CPU 112 to specify whether not only the history memory 191 and 192 but also the other history memory 191 and 192 is a target for storing history information. In addition, since a setting change generation flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, setting change occurs even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. The value stored in the flag is stored and held.

  Thereafter, RTC information which is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, the writing process to each of the history memories 191 and 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, and the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored in the first history memory 191 as history information. In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the pointer that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the update process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is not set to “1” (step S2601: NO), the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are set to the storage target side. Only the history information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 that are currently stored are grasped (step S2602). The calculation result memory 131 is provided with a storage target flag. When the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the first history memory 191 is a storage target, and the value of the storage target flag is “1”. In this case, the second history memory 192 is to be stored. The storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, so even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag The value of is stored.

  Thereafter, a history setting execution process is executed for the memory for history 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, the process from step S1101 to step S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed on one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored. As a result, history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2601: YES), the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are stored. This means that the history information should be stored not only on the side but also on the other side. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the processes in steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the first history memory 191. As a result, history information is stored in the first history memory 191. Thereafter, the processing of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting processing (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed on the second history memory 192. Thereby, history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

  When the process of step S2603 is executed, or when the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2605). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories exist in the non-memory target history memories 191 and 192 (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is a storage target, so the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not the history information indicating that the game ball has been discharged from is stored a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more. Further, when the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is “1”, the second history memory 192 is a storage target, and therefore, the game ball from the game area PA to the first history memory 191. It is determined whether or not the history information indicating that has been discharged is stored a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more. In addition, it is not determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) of history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA is stored. It is good also as a structure which determines whether the log | history information which shows is stored more than predetermined number (specifically "100").

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a storage target change process is executed (step S2607). In the process of changing the storage target, the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is set to a value different from the current value between the two values, whereby the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 Change the side to be stored. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to “1”. If the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to “0”. As a result, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only the history information regarding the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed are set as storage targets. Then, various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memories 191 and 192 that are newly stored, and are executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. It is possible to derive various parameters depending on the game.

  Thereafter, a clear process is executed on the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that has been stored until then (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the second history memory 192 is cleared to “0”, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the first history memory 191 is set to “ Clear “0”. Thereafter, the setting change occurrence flag in the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to “0” (step S2609).

  Next, display output processing in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the storage side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is grasped as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the second The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. Thereafter, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed using the history information stored in the memory histories 191 and 192 to be stored grasped in step S2702. As a result, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated, and the calculated various parameters are calculated. The result is stored in the result memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to “1”. Even if there are, various parameters are calculated using one of the history memories 191 and 192 that are stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the process of step S2703 is executed, a display process is executed (step S2704). The processing content of the display processing is the same as the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, While the history memories 191 and 192 that have been stored are directly stored, history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not stored. When a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the discharge of game balls from the game area PA is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that is not the storage target, the memory is not the storage target. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are directly stored, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that have been stored until then are cleared to “0”. Thereby, when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only the history information of the game performed at the newly set value. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period so as not to appropriately calculate various parameters, The memories 191 and 192 are maintained without being changed. Thereby, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period, it is possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history so far.

  The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which the two memories of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided. The first history area corresponding to the storage memory 191 and the second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 may be set.

  Further, only one history memory 117 may be provided. In this case, a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds a predetermined number after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which history information before the timing at which the information is released is erased, and history information after the timing at which the setting is made is stored and retained without being erased. Thereby, the history before the timing when the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set at the timing when a predetermined number or more of history information is accumulated after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Information can be erased. Further, the history information corresponding to the history information is stored in the history memory 117 at the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, so that the new setting state is set in the history memory 117. It is possible to distinguish between history information before and after the timing at which is performed.

  In addition, the timing of erasing the history information is limited to a case where the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number after the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Alternatively, the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 may be a predetermined number or more.

  Further, even when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, if the setting value is not changed before and after that, the change of the history memory 191 and 192 as described above and the history information are changed. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting value is changed before and after the setting, the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above are not erased. The change and the deletion of the history information may be performed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111, the type of the buffer whose input signal type is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is the above-described buffer type. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to make the management CPU 112 specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p is instructed to output. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. A signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j, a signal corresponding to the start of the game turn is input as the eleventh buffer to the eleventh buffer 122k, and the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer. However, in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the start of the game round is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as a game round signal, a set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, and a signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is in the opening / closing execution mode. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a high frequency support mode signal, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as a signal. It is input to the buffer 122o.

  The game turn signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, the open / close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n is input It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the high frequency support mode signal is input, the door opening signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. Thus, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to the 11th to 16th buffers 122k to 122p are input. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9), as in the first embodiment.

  First, “10”, which is the number of first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j to be recognized as signal types, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). Thereafter, an output process of an identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output processing, output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level to start outputting the identification start signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  After that, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in an output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output count of the type identification signal.

  In the present embodiment, when the management CPU 112 recognizes the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of winning balls set for the pitching portion corresponding to the type of signal. The type identification signal is output the same number of times. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times of receiving the type identification signal for each of the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. . In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j is grasped as the number of winning balls set for the pitching part corresponding to the type of signal.

  In step S2803, when the value of the recognition output counter is “10”, “9”, or “8”, “10” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. . When the value of the output counter for recognition is “7”, “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electricity prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “6”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operation port 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “5”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is “4”, since the game ball is not paid out even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the output counter Set “0” to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of “3” to “1”, there is no corresponding entrance portion and it is blank, so “0” is set in the output number counter.

  Thereafter, a start trigger signal output process is executed (step S2804). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on condition that the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is not “0” (step S2805: YES), that is, on condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2803. The process proceeds to step S2806. In step S2806, a type identification signal output process is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2808). When the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 or an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, an output process of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In this output processing, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2810), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction. To do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2811: YES), an identification end signal output process is executed (step S2812). In the output process, the respective output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, management processing in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the setting update recognition process is executed in step S2902, and then the process of step S2901 is executed again. The processing contents of the setting update recognition processing are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  When reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S2903). Thereafter, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether a type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63 or not. When the type identification signal is received (step S2905: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S2906). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to “0” when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2905 or when the process of step S2906 is executed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905. If the end trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence setting process, the reception number counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 among the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. Stores the value that is being stored. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first corresponding relationship area 123a, the second corresponding relationship area 123b, and the third corresponding relationship area 123c, and the fourth corresponding relationship area 123d. Is set to “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relation is set. In the area 123f, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Further, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth corresponding relation areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the setting target counter in the management-side RAM 114 (step S2909).

  When a negative determination is made in step S2904, or when the process of step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2910). If the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and the processing after step S2905 is performed on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES). Run. If reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2910: YES), the history setting process in step S2911, the display output process in step S2912, and the external output process in step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 51A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Indicates a period in which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51 (d) indicates a period in which the output state of the signal in the opening / closing execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. The period during which the output state of the high frequency support mode signal is at the HI level is shown, and FIG. 51 (f) shows the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed, FIG. 51 (g) shows the timing when the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. Management CPU 112 Correspondence relationship setting Te processing (step S2908) shows a timing of the execution of.

  As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as shown in FIG. 51A, FIG. 51D, and FIG. The output states of the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output state of the first signal, the opening / closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management process (FIG. 50) to enter the identification state as shown in FIG. 51 (f).

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51A from the timing t3 to the timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51 (b) from the timing t5 to the timing t7. Thus, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51C from the timing t8 to the timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “1” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123 a to 123 j in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51A from the timing t11 to the timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the timings t13 to t15, t16 to t18, t19 to t21, and t22 to t24, respectively. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 as shown in FIG. 51 (g) at the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51 (c) from the timing t25 to the timing t27. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “10” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123j in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c), 51 (d), and 51 (e), the output state of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is LOW. Change from level to HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output state of the third signal, the opening / closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 50), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes a prize ball corresponding to the entry part that triggered the storage of the history information. Number information is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of pitched portions having the same number of winning balls, the pitched portions cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 each have one winning ball, it is possible to distinguish the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 may be different. Thereby, even if it is the structure where history information like this embodiment is stored, it becomes possible to distinguish the 1st operation port 33 and the 2nd operation port 34 in history information.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the set value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether or not the game round has been started, information corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is being performed and the information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened, the main CPU 63 indicates that the signal path corresponds to the information. Even if the corresponding relationship information is not received, the management CPU 112 can specify the correspondence information. In this case, only information corresponding to the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is information that requires the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between the information and the signal paths 118a to 118j from the main CPU 63. Become. When the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of winning balls corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing information on each entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a signal path for allowing detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42 a to 48 a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. In addition, the detection result of the second prize winning port detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. In addition, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above-described configuration, the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without any processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize each result of entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch location and each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and prevents an illegal act of inputting an abnormal entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display device for displaying the game history management result is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a front view of the main controller 60 in the present embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c. However, in the present embodiment, the first notification display device 69b is provided. A display device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61.

  Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but is not limited to this, and is a single multicolor light emitting type. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is installed such that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and by the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparently, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 accommodated in the substrate box 60a are visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are provided through the opposing wall portion 60b. The display surface of ~ 204 can be visually observed.

  On the display surface of the first notification display device 201, alphabets such as “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” are displayed. On the other hand, in the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers are displayed in the range of “0” to “9”. The management result of the game history is notified using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the management result of the game history that is the notification target (the first to eighth parameters in the first embodiment, the first to the eighteenth parameters). Display corresponding to the types of parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters), and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are subject to notification. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the type of game history is performed.

  Specifically, as the types of game history management results, the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the thirty-first to forty-second parameters in the first embodiment. Is present. In the first notification display device 201, display corresponding to the type of parameter group to be notified is performed. Specifically, when any one of the first to eighth parameters is a notification target, “A” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and any one of the first to eighteenth parameters is displayed. When it is a notification target, “E” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and when any of the 21st to 26th parameters is a notification target, the first notification display device is displayed. When “H” is displayed at 201 and any of the 31st parameters is a notification target, “L” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the 41st to 42nd parameters are notified. If it is the target, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201.

  The second notification display device 202 displays the order corresponding to the type of management result of the game history that is the notification target, among the arrangement order of the management results of the game history in the parameter group that is the notification target. The parameter group of the first to eighth parameters will be described as an example. When the first parameter is a notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the second parameter is When it is a notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the third parameter is a notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. Is displayed, “4” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the fourth parameter is a notification target, and when the fifth parameter is a notification target, When “5” is displayed on the display device 202 and the sixth parameter is a notification target, “6” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the seventh parameter is a notification target. If there is a second notification display device 202 "7" is displayed Te, when the eighth parameter is a notification target "8" is displayed in the second notification for the display device 202. Further, the parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters will be described as an example. When the 21st parameter is a notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the 22nd parameter is displayed. When the parameter is a notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. When the parameter is a notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. 3 ”is displayed, and when the 24th parameter is a notification target,“ 4 ”is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 25th parameter is a notification target, When “5” is displayed on the notification display device 202 and the 26th parameter is a notification target, “6” is displayed on the second notification display device 202.

  In detail about the display contents of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number corresponding to the tenth digit is the third notification value among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100. A number displayed on the display device 203 and corresponding to the first digit is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the forty-second parameter that is the display target in the last order is displayed, the first parameter that is the display target in the first order The calculation result of is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. On the other hand, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management CPU 112 is 51 seconds, and the number of various parameters is 25. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 become notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, not only the notification of the management result of the game history but also the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed as in the first embodiment In, a value corresponding to the current set value is displayed. Specifically, while the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off in the changeable state, the first to fourth notification display devices 204 arranged side by side exist at the right end. On the fourth notification display device 204, the value corresponding to the current set value is displayed. That is, when “setting 1” is selected in the changeable state, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 2” is selected in the changeable state. When “2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and “setting 3” is selected in the changeable state, “3” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and can be changed. When “setting 4” is selected in the state, “4” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 5” is selected in the changeable state, the fourth notification is displayed. When “5” is displayed on the display device 204 and “setting 6” is selected in the changeable state, “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing various displays in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62.

  As described above, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205, a second display IC 206, a third display IC 207, and a fourth display IC 208.

  The first display IC 205 is provided corresponding to the first notification display device 201, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL31 and electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 through the signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the first notification display device 201 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display The segment light emission control is performed. When the operating power is supplied, the first display IC 205 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored display data in the first notification display device. 201 is continuously displayed. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the first notification display device 201 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operating power to the first display IC 205 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data. The first notification display device 201 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the first display IC 205, the display is performed on the first display IC 205. A configuration may be adopted in which data can be stored. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped The first notification display device 201 is started.

  The second display IC 206 is provided corresponding to the second notification display device 202, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL33 and electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 through the signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the second notification display device 202 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display The segment light emission control is performed. The second display IC 206 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored display data in the second notification display device. 202 is continuously displayed. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the second notification display device 202 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operating power to the second display IC 206 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data. The second notification display device 202 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the second display IC 206, the display is performed on the second display IC 206. A configuration may be adopted in which data can be stored. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped The second notification display device 202 is started.

  The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL35 and electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 through the signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the third notification display device 203, that is, each display according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. The segment light emission control is performed. The third display IC 207 can store the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored display data in the third notification display device. 203 is displayed continuously. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the third notification display device 203 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operating power to the third display IC 207 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data. The third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the third display IC 207, the display is performed on the third display IC 207. A configuration may be adopted in which data can be stored. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped It will be started by the third notification display device 203.

  The fourth display IC 208 is provided in correspondence with the fourth notification display device 204, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL37 and electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 through the signal path SL38. It is connected. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the fourth notification display device 204, that is, each display according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. The segment light emission control is performed. The fourth display IC 208 can store the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored display data in the fourth notification display device. 204 is displayed continuously. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the fourth display IC 208 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data. The fourth notification display device 204 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the fourth display IC 208, the display is performed on the fourth display IC 208. A configuration may be adopted in which data can be stored. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped The fourth notification display device 204 starts.

  Output of display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, and output setting of the display data is performed by each of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112. That is, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in the main CPU 63 and the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in the management CPU 112. In this case, the display data output setting period is adjusted in each of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 so that the display data output setting is not performed at the same time. Specifically, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 is performed. On the other hand, the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 is not performed. On the other hand, in the state where the setting value is not changeable, the display data output setting is performed by the management CPU 112 while the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 is not performed.

  If the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 and the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 are performed at the time of synchronization, the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 has priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 may be prioritized.

  Next, the display processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify that it is the timing to update the display contents of the management result of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. After that, whether or not the timing of updating the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is determined by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after 1 subtraction is “0”. Is determined (step S3002).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, 1 is added to the value of the display target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S3003). When the value of the display target counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “24” (step S3004: YES), the display target counter value is cleared to “0” (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, the thirty-first to forty-second parameters, and display target counters “0” to “24”. There is a one-to-one correspondence with possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the first parameter that is the first display target is the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the value of the display target counter is “24”. In the case, the forty-second parameter that is the last display target is the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3004, or if the process of step S3005 is executed, display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the management ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, display data setting processing corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and display data setting processing corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is “0” and the first parameter is a display target, display data for displaying “A” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed in the first display IC 205. In addition to outputting, display data for displaying “1” on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206. For example, if the value of the display target counter is “24” and the forty-second parameter is a display target, display data for displaying “O” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed in the first display. While outputting to IC205, the display data for displaying "2" on the 2nd alerting display apparatus 202 are output to 2nd display IC206.

  Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the 10th place and the display data corresponding to the 1st place are obtained by multiplying the read parameter by 100. Read from the management-side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, display control is performed on the third notification display device 203 so that the number corresponding to the tenth digit of the result is displayed (step S3010), and the fourth corresponding to the number corresponding to the first digit is displayed. Display control of the notification display device 204 is performed (step S3011). For example, when the result obtained by multiplying by 100 is “53”, display data for displaying “5” on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207 and also displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Display data for displaying “3” is output to the fourth display IC 208.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3012).

  By executing the display process as described above, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether or not the game is continued, and the main body 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. This is done regardless of whether it is visible. As described above, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, thereby the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of .about.204.

  The display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started after the operation power supply to the management CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Is done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similarly to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is displayed.

  The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold display data output from the MPU 62 while operating power is supplied, and correspond to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 corresponding to the display data. Display control. Therefore, after the display of the management result of the game history is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not turned off (that is, not displayed), and are turned on corresponding to some display ( That is, the display state.

  Next, the setting value update processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, the extinguishing process of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is executed (step S3101). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207. As a result, the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are all turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are not displayed. Immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all turned off, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are displayed. ˜204 is a non-display state. Therefore, step S3101 is a process of maintaining the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in a non-display state, and if any of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is temporarily affected, If it is in the display state, it is a process of making it non-display state.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3102). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When “1” is set in the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting value up to that point.

  Thereafter, the display start processing for the set value in the fourth display notification device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the set value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned OFF (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3105: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3106). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S3107: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S3108). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed, the setting value is updated to one level higher. When the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting value is set to “setting 1”. Will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process of step S3108 is executed, a display update process for the set value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, a number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. The administrator of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the fourth notification display device 204.

  After executing the process of step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processing after step S3105 is executed again. When OFF operation is performed (step S3104: YES), the management result display start process in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3110).

  In the display start processing, a management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management-side CPU 112 that has received the management result display start command executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). Thereby, the display corresponding to the 1st parameter calculated just before the operating electric power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is performed on the display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

  Next, display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated will be described. FIG. 57 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when a game history management result is displayed, and FIG. 57 (b) is a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the display apparatuses 201-204 for 1st-4th alerting | reporting in case 10 setting states are changed.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment is in a light emitting state in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. This is the same even when any of the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters is a notification target. . Thereby, the manager of the game hall visually observes that all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, so that in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, It is possible to grasp that the management result of the game history is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), all the display segments are turned off in each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203. That is, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in a non-display state. Further, any one of “1” to “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. As described above, when any one of “1” to “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in a non-display state, The manager of the game hall can grasp that the display corresponding to the set value is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and can clearly grasp the current set value. It becomes possible.

  Next, how the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enter the display state will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (h). 58A shows a changeable state period during which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and FIG. 58B shows an update of the setting display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 58 (c) shows a period during which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 58 (d) shows the first to fourth notification display devices. The display update timing corresponding to the management result of the game history in 201-204 is shown, FIG.58 (e) shows the period when the display apparatus 201 for 1st notifications is a display state, FIG.58 (f) is the 1st. 2 shows a period in which the notification display device 202 is in a display state, FIG. 58 (g) shows a period in which the third notification display device 203 is in a display state, and FIG. 58 (h) shows a fourth notification. The display device 204 is in a display state It is shown.

  When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started with the setting key insertion portion 68a being turned on, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. Can be changed. At the timing t1, the setting display update timing is reached as shown in FIG. 58B, the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state as shown in FIG. 58H, and the display state is continued. In this case, since “Setting 1” is selected, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, at the timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are not displayed, that is, all display segments are turned off. Maintained.

  Thereafter, an operation for changing the set value is performed by operating the update button 68b at each of the timing t2, the timing t3, the timing t4, and the timing t5, and as shown in FIG. This is the update timing of the set value display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (h), in the fourth notification display device 204, the display content is switched to a number corresponding to the set value after the change at each timing. The fourth notification display device 204 is maintained in the display state including the respective timings when. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, that is, for all display, at each of the update timings of the set value display. The segment is kept off.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off at the timing of t6, whereby the changeable state is terminated as shown in FIG. In this case, the display period of the management result of the game history is started at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state at the timing t6, and the fourth notification display is performed. Although the display content of the device 204 is changed, the display status is maintained.

  Thereafter, the timing of t7, t8, t9, t10, t11, and t12, respectively, is the display update timing of the game history management result as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (h), in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, display contents corresponding to the management result of the updated game history are displayed at each timing. Although being switched, all the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the display state including the timings at which the display contents are switched.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the configuration in which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a corresponding display is provided. This is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Accordingly, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing a display corresponding to the changeable state. .

  This corresponds to the period in which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting value changeable state on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period during which the display is performed. Thereby, any display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by grasping the situation in which the display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to specify whether or not

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured so as to have a display mode different from the display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display controlled. Thereby, by identifying the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is specified which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays as displays corresponding to the game history management results. Further, since there are a plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode is greatly increased when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. It is possible to make it different.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 that are not in the non-display state when the management result of the game history is displayed are in the non-display state. Thereby, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value can be performed only by confirming whether or not the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly identify which one is being performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and the display content is the fourth notification display device 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed. This is the display content that can be displayed. In this way, by allowing the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 to overlap, each of the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed are performed. It becomes possible not to give restrictions to the display contents. In addition, even if the display contents in the fourth notification display device 204 can overlap, the first to third notification display devices are displayed when the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. Since 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. Thereby, the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is clearly different between the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. It becomes possible.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the non-display state even when the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is changed. . Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history regardless of the timing when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed in the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed. In addition, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed, the display of the game history management result and the setting value can be changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

  When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed.

  In the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in the horizontal direction, the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed using only the fourth notification display device 204 arranged at the right end. Done. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is performed using the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. Using the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, a display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history is performed. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp the management result of the game history. In this case, in the setting value changeable state, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 that display the type of management result of the game history are not displayed. Thereby, the non-display state of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type corresponds to the changeable state of the set value, and corresponds to the changeable state of the set value. It becomes easy to grasp that the display is performed.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 on which the type of the management result of the game history is displayed, but also the game The third notification display device 203 on which the contents of the history management results are displayed is also hidden. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp that the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed.

  Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 perform predetermined display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. In the configuration, the display data is stored and held in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Thereby, for example, even when the execution of processing for advancing the game is stopped in the main CPU 63 due to occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality (when an affirmative determination is made in step S306), It becomes possible to maintain the display of the game history management results in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the objects that are not displayed (all unlit) in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed are the first to fourth notification devices. It is good also as the 1st, 2nd information display apparatus 201,202, without being limited to the 3rd information display apparatus 201-203. In this case, the third notification display device 203 performs a predetermined display (for example, “5”) that is different from the content of the current setting value, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the current setting value. The fourth notification display device 204 may perform a predetermined display (for example, a display of “5”) different from the content of the current set value, and the third notification. The display device 203 may be configured to display numbers corresponding to the current set values. In addition, the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all-off state), and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a display state. The first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a non-display state (all off state), and the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in the display state. The second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all-off state), and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. The second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all-off state), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 Is displayed It may be configured.

  Moreover, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in a non-display state (all-off state). Only the display device 202 may be in a non-display state (all-off state), or only the third notification display device 203 may be in a non-display state (all-off state). The fourth notification display device Only 204 may be in a non-display state (all extinguished state).

  In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the display state, and only the second notification display device 202 is displayed. It may be configured to be in a state, or only the third notification display device 203 may be in a display state.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in a setting value changeable state are different from those in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 59A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device 202.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, the first notification display device 201 includes seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is formed in a bar shape and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. The seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 is a so-called seven-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 59B, the second notification display device 202 includes seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is formed in a bar shape, and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. The seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged so that the second notification display device 202 is a so-called seven-segment display.

  FIG. 60 shows a case where the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a case where a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed is displayed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus 201 for 1st notifications and the display apparatus 202 for 2nd notifications.

  The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the management result of the game history are the same as in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, any one of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and “1” to “8” are displayed on the second notification display device 202. "Is displayed.

  In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 is “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, At least one of the “O” displays is a light emission target. That is, the display segments 201a to 201g that are not the light emission target even when any of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 are displayed. Does not exist.

  Similarly for the second notification display device 202, each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 is “1” to “8” in the second notification display device 202. Among these displays, at least one kind of display is a light emission target. That is, there is no display segment 202a to 202g that is not a light emission target even when any of “1” to “8” is displayed on the second notification display device 202.

  In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state in the first notification display device 201. As described above, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in a light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201. Furthermore, in any case where the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. On the other hand, the display content of the first notification display device 201 in which only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are in the light emitting state is management of game history. Does not exist when displaying results. As a result, when the management result of the game history is displayed while using the display segments 201b and 201e that can be in the light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed in the setting value changeable state, the display is not displayed. The mode can be displayed on the first notification display device 201. Therefore, it is possible to cause the first notification display device 201 to perform display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value while also using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It becomes possible.

  In the setting value changeable state, in the second notification display device 202, the third display segment 202c is in a light emitting state. As described above, the third display segment 202c can be in a light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed on the second notification display device 202. On the other hand, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in which only the third display segment 202c among the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is in the light emitting state exists when displaying the management result of the game history. Not done. As a result, a display mode that is not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed while using the display segment 202c that can be in the light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed in the setting value changeable state. It can be displayed on the second notification display device 202. Therefore, the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value can be performed on the second notification display device 202 while also using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It becomes possible.

  Next, the setting value update process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, set value display start processing in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, for the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, and 201g are in an unlit state. Is output to the first display IC 205. For the second notification display device 202, the display data is output to the second display IC 206 in which the third display segment 202 c is in the light emitting state and the other display segments 202 a, 202 b, 202 d to 202 g are in the unlit state. Thereby, the display for alert | reporting that it is a changeable state which can change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is started by the display apparatus 201 for 1st notifications and the display apparatus 202 for 2nd notifications.

  Then, the light-off process of the 3rd alerting | reporting display apparatus 203 is performed (step S3202). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the third display IC 207. As a result, all the display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3203). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When “1” is set in the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting value up to that point.

  Thereafter, a display start process of the set value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the set value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned OFF (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF.

  If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3207). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S3208: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S3209). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed, the setting value is updated to one level higher. When the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting value is set to “setting 1”. Will return.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3208, or when the process of step S3209 is executed, a display update process for the set value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3210). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, a number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. The administrator of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the fourth notification display device 204.

  After executing the process of step S3210, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processing after step S3206 is executed again. When OFF operation is performed (step S3205: YES), the management result display start process in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3211).

  In the display start processing, a management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management-side CPU 112 that has received the management result display start command executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). Thereby, the display corresponding to the 1st parameter calculated just before the operating electric power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is performed on the display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The setting value can be changed by setting the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 that can be in a light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed to the light emitting state. A display corresponding to the state is performed. Thereby, when diversifying the display of the management result of the game history, it is possible to minimize the restrictions on the contents of the display corresponding to the management result of the game history. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to be in a light emitting state when the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. The combination of 202g is a combination that does not exist when the management result of the game history is displayed. Thereby, the management result display of the game history is performed by grasping the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. It is possible to grasp which of the displays corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is being performed.

  For each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are not in a light emitting state even if the display of the game history management results is performed in all patterns. Not done. As a result, it is possible to minimize the display contents of the management result of the game history as much as possible when diversifying the display corresponding to the management result of the game history.

  When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the third notification display device 203 that is not in the non-display state when the management result of the game history is displayed is in the non-display state. Thereby, not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 but also whether or not the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state, the game history It is possible to clearly identify which one of the management result display and the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In addition, it is limited to a configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 can be changed is set. However, a configuration in which a plurality of types are set may be employed. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents may be determined in advance, and the display contents to be displayed may be changed according to the display order each time a changeable state is newly executed. As described above, even when there are a plurality of types of display contents corresponding to the setting value changeable state, the display contents are displayed in the display segment 201a that is in the light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed. -201g and 202a-202g are displayed, and the display contents are not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed.

  In addition, in one of the case of displaying the management result of the game history and the case of performing the display corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices It is good also as a structure by which blink display is performed in 201,202 and the display which maintains lighting is performed on the other. In this case, the game hall manager can specify which of the display of the game history management result and the display corresponding to the changeable state depending on whether it is blinking display or lighting display. The combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state in the display corresponding to the possible state may be a combination used when displaying the management result of the game history, and management of the game history Combinations that are not used when displaying results may also be used. In addition, the lighting period and the extinguishing period in the blinking display may be the same in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, or may be completely shifted. Alternatively, a configuration in which only a part overlaps may be used.

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding thereto is performed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, unlike the eleventh embodiment. Yes. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main RAM 65.

  The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing information on abnormal states to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In the abnormality display area 211, a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d are provided. Specifically, a first unit area 211a, a second unit area 211b, a third unit area 211c, and a fourth unit area 211d are provided. Each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d can store information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 one by one. That is, the abnormality display area 211 can store and hold up to four pieces of information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 specifies all information on the abnormal state that occurs in the pachinko machine 10. For example, when an abnormality relating to the payout of the game ball (for example, a full tank in the lower plate 56a, no ball in the tank 75, a payout abnormality by the payout device 76) occurs, a command corresponding to the generated abnormality is issued to the payout CPU 92. To the main CPU 63. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when the radio wave detection sensor detects an improper radio wave, a corresponding abnormal signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63 and an abnormal signal is detected. When vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor, a corresponding abnormality signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, based on the fact that normal signal transmission from each of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 49a is not specified, occurrence of disconnection abnormality of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 49a is specified.

  The type of abnormal state specified by the main CPU 63 is larger than the maximum number of abnormal state information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211. Then, when a large number of abnormal states occur simultaneously, it is assumed that new abnormal information occurs even though the maximum number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormal display area 211. On the other hand, for the abnormal state information, the storage priority is set at the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and a new number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormal display area 211. When an abnormal state occurs, information on the abnormal state having a high storage priority is left in the abnormal display area 211. Thereby, it becomes possible to give priority to the notification of the abnormal state having a high storage priority.

  Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, it is determined whether or not an abnormality display target has occurred (step S3301). The types of abnormality display targets include a full tank in the lower plate 56a, no balls in the tank 75, a dispensing abnormality by the dispensing device 76, a radio wave detection abnormality, a vibration detection abnormality, and a disconnection abnormality in each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. The number of types of abnormality display objects is larger than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211 a to 211 d provided in the abnormality display area 211.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, whether or not the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time has already been stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Is determined (step S3302). If already stored, information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the same type of abnormal state information from being stored redundantly in the abnormal display area 211.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically “4”) (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in which abnormality state information is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d in the abnormality display area 211.

  When the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), priority comparison processing is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first, the abnormal state information having the lowest storage priority is specified from the abnormal state information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. The storage priority is determined in advance at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and specifically, the bottom of the lower plate 56a is full, the ball of the tank 75 is absent, the vibration is detected abnormally, the payout is abnormal due to the payout device 76, and the ball is detected. Storage priority increases in the order of disconnection abnormality of 49a to radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, whichever storage priority is higher, the information on the abnormal state with the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the abnormality display target that has occurred this time. To make a comparison.

  When the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is lower (step S3305: NO), information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. Thereby, in the configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display objects is larger than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211, information on the abnormal state having a high storage priority is displayed. It can be left in the abnormality display area 211.

  When the storage priority of the abnormality display target generated this time is higher (step S3305: YES), the abnormality display area 211 setting processing is executed (step S3306). In the setting process of the abnormal display area 211 executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, this occurs in the unit areas 211a to 211d identified as storing information on the abnormal state with the lowest storage priority. Overwrite the abnormal status information corresponding to the abnormal display target.

  On the other hand, if the value of the abnormality target counter in the main RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), 1 is added to the value of the abnormality target counter (step S3307), and then the abnormality display area 211 is set. Is executed (step S3306). In the setting process, one area is selected from the unit areas 211a to 211d in the abnormal display area 211 in which no abnormal state information is stored, and the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that has occurred this time in the selected area. Stores the information.

  In step S3306, when there is only one abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and the abnormal display area 211 is displayed. When there is a plurality of abnormal state information stored in the area, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of “n” in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b.

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether an abnormality display target cancellation event has occurred (step S3308). For example, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the payout side CPU 92 indicating that the lower tray 56a is full, that the tank 75 is free of balls, or that the payout abnormality by the payout device 76 is released. judge. In addition, it is determined whether an abnormality canceling operation for occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality has been performed, an abnormality canceling operation for occurrence of vibration detection abnormality has been performed, or an abnormality canceling operation for occurrence of disconnection abnormality has been performed. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3308, the abnormality display area 211 is erased (step S3309). In the erasing process, it is specified whether or not the information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has been canceled this time is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. If it is stored, the information on the abnormal state is erased by clearing the stored area to “0”. In this case, if there is only one abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211 after erasure, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. When there are a plurality of abnormal state information stored in the display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area of the nth unit areas 211a to 211b having the smallest “n” value. Further, 1 is subtracted from the value of the abnormality target counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3310).

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an abnormality display start operation has occurred (step S3311). The abnormality display start operation is performed by pressing the update button 68b with the gaming machine main body 12 being opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. This is done by operating.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether or not information on one or more abnormal states is stored in the abnormality display area 211 (step S3312). When the information on the abnormal state is not stored, the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the abnormal display from starting even though there is no abnormal state information to be notified.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, "1" is set to the abnormal display flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3313). The abnormal display flag cancels the display corresponding to the management result of the game history and displays the display corresponding to the information on the abnormal state stored in the abnormal display area 211 through the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation should be performed at Even if an abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormality display flag is already set to “1”, a negative determination is made in step S3311.

  Thereafter, the management result display stop setting process is executed (step S3314). In the cancellation setting process, a display cancellation command is transmitted to the management CPU 112 to temporarily stop the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The management CPU 112 receives the display stop command and stops the display processing (FIG. 55). However, even if the management-side CPU 112 receives a display stop command, the management-side CPU 112 does not set display data that is all “0” data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the management result of the game history at that time is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an abnormal display end operation has occurred (step S3315). The abnormal display ending operation is performed by pressing the reset button 68c with the gaming machine main body 12 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. This is done by operating. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormality display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3316). Even if an abnormal display end operation is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is already “0”, a negative determination is made in step S3315.

  Thereafter, a cancellation cancellation process of the management result display is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation cancellation process, the display of the management result display of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is canceled by transmitting a cancellation cancellation command to the management CPU 112. To release. The management-side CPU 112 resumes the execution of the display process (FIG. 55) by receiving the cancellation cancellation command. However, even if the management-side CPU 112 receives the cancellation cancellation command, the management-side CPU 112 does not set display data to be all “0” data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormal display at that time is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the management CPU 112 continues to store history information and calculate various parameters even when the update of the display of the game history management results is stopped, and the results of calculating the various parameters are calculated. It is stored in the result memory 131. Therefore, when the update of the display of the game history management result is canceled, the display of the latest game history management result is immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be resumed.

  In the abnormality setting process, when “1” is set in the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3318: YES), an abnormality display process is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the abnormality display process.

  First, the turning-off process of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3401). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206. As a result, all the display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that the display content of the abnormal display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is updated. If the value of the update timing counter is already “0”, that state is maintained. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter is “0” ( Step S3403).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, a display target counter update process provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3404). In this update process, if this time is the first process of the abnormal display process after “1” is set in the abnormal display flag of the main RAM 65, “0” is set in the display target counter. The value of the display target counter corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Specifically, the value of “0” of the display target counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a. The value “1” of the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b, the value “2” of the display target counter corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and “3” of the display target counter. "Corresponds to the fourth unit area 211d. In the update process, if the current abnormal display process time is not the first abnormal display process after the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1”, the value of the display target counter is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not abnormal state information is stored in an area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as described above, when only one piece of abnormal state information is stored, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information are stored. In this case, information on abnormal states is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of “n” in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b. Therefore, if no abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, the abnormal state information is also stored in the area corresponding to a value larger than the value of the display target counter. There will be no. If the value of the display target counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “3”, the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, so that the information on the abnormal state is not stored. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that all the abnormal states that are the targets of the abnormality display are canceled in the situation where the abnormality display is performed. In this case, even if the abnormal display process is executed, the abnormal display area 211 does not store the abnormal state information. In such a situation, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 display to indicate that no abnormal state information is stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3405 or if the process of step S3406 is executed, display target display data corresponding to the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, the information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 is read out from the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Then, display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64. The display data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the abnormal state information, and the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data are displayed for each type of abnormal state information. It is different. There is also display data corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information, which is different from the display data corresponding to abnormal state information. Therefore, when there is no abnormal state information, the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are different from the display contents when the abnormal state information exists.

  On the other hand, the display content corresponding to the information on the abnormal state in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display content corresponding to the absence of the information on the abnormal state are The display contents when the management results of the game history are displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 overlap with the display contents of the set values on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, when the management result of the game history is displayed, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a display state, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In the state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state and the fourth notification display device 204 is in a display state. Since 201 and 202 are in a non-display state and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in a display state, even if the display contents overlap as described above, any situation is supported. The administrator of the game hall can grasp whether the display is displayed.

  Thereafter, display control is performed on the third notification display device 203 in accordance with the display data read in step S3407 (step S3408), and display control is performed on the fourth notification display device 204 (step S3409). In this case, the display device 203 for the third notification and the fourth notification device 4 are used for either the display corresponding to the information on the abnormal state or the display corresponding to the absence of the information on the abnormal state. None of the display devices 204 are in a non-display state (that is, they are not completely turned off), and are in some display state.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the main RAM 65 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3410).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the configuration in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Done. Accordingly, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing display corresponding to the abnormal state.

  When the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the display corresponding to the abnormal state when no abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 A display corresponding to the fact that no abnormal condition has occurred is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to clearly identify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  A period in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period of time. Thereby, any display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by grasping the situation in which the display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to specify whether or not

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured so as to have a display mode different from the display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display controlled. Thereby, by identifying the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is specified which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays as displays corresponding to the game history management results. In addition, due to the presence of the plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode is greatly increased when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to make it different.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 that are not in the non-display state when the management result of the game history is displayed are in the non-display state. Thereby, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed only by confirming whether or not the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly identify which one is being performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, and the display content is the third when the management result of the game history is displayed. , Display contents that can be displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. In this way, by allowing the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 to overlap, a display corresponding to the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when they are performed. In addition, even when the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 can overlap, the first and first notifications are displayed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. 2 Since the notification display devices 201 and 202 are not displayed, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In addition, when an abnormal display start operation is performed in a situation where abnormal state information is not stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. It is good also as a structure by which the display corresponding to not having been memorize | stored is performed.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the management output process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the history information should be stored in the history memory 117. In this embodiment, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is the management start reference. When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the number corresponding to the management start reference value without storing history information in the history memory 117 until the number corresponding to the value is equal to or greater than the number. The storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. In the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 and the like, an operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before the shipment. In this case, the game balls are maintained in the respective ball-entry portions and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball at the time of the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3501, "7" is set in the start time management counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3502). The start-time management counter indicates which of the seven ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is used to identify the detection state of the game ball in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the start time management counter (step S3503). Specifically, when the value of the start time management counter is “7” and corresponds to the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. When the value of the start time management counter is “6” and corresponds to the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the start time management is determined. If the value of the counter is “5” and corresponds to the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third output flag, and the value of the start time management counter is If “4” corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, and the value of the start time management counter is “3”. If it corresponds to the working port detection sensor 46a, the fifth output flag is set. It is determined whether or not “1” is set. If the value of the start time management counter is “2” and corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a, “1” is set to the sixth output flag. If the value of the start time management counter is “1” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the seventh output flag. . Note that “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15) as already described.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the start time management counter is cleared to “0” (step S3504). Thereafter, the value of the discharge number counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3505). The discharge number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is not set to “1”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharge number counter is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506). The management start reference value is set to “300”, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to have a number smaller than “300” or may be configured to be larger than “300”. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S3503 or a negative determination is made in step S3506, the value of the start time management counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start management counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3508). If a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, the management output process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the discharge number counter of the main RAM 65 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), “1” is set to the management start flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3509). Thereafter, a management process is executed (step S3510). The management process is also executed when the management start flag is set to “1” and an affirmative determination is made in step S3501 (step S3510). The processing contents of the management process are the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is managed. The history memory 117 does not store history information until the number corresponding to the start reference value or more, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value. In this case, the storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. In the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 and the like, an operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before the shipment. In this case, the game balls are maintained in the respective ball-entry portions and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball at the time of the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

  Here, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started as described above, until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, In the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the memory 117, the management result of the game history during that time cannot be calculated. Therefore, in such a situation, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform display corresponding to the situation. For example, it is good also as a structure which makes all the display segments light-emit in each of the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display apparatuses 201-204. The display content is not displayed either when displaying the management result of the game history or when displaying the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. By checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify whether or not the history information is stored as described above.

  It should be noted that the setting mode of the management start flag information in the main RAM 65 differs depending on whether or not the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the operation power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started. It is good also as composition to do. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the different form executed by the main CPU 63. In steps S3601 to S3609, the same processing as steps S101 to S109 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed, and in steps S3611 to S3620, the main processing (FIG. The same processing as in steps S110 to S119 of 9) is executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3610), and the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is executed after executing the processing of step S3620. Is set to “1” (step S3621). According to this configuration, when the process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 History information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the management start reference value is greater than or equal to the management start reference value, and when processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, The history information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of game balls discharged after the start of supply of operating power. Thereby, in a situation where there is a high possibility that the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 is not likely to be performed, it becomes possible to manage the game history immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. Instead of the configuration having no history, an area for storing history information may be provided separately from the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls reaches the management start reference value or more. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the said situation.

  In addition, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. As a condition under which no situation occurs, a condition may be added in which supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information is not stored in the history memory 117. In this case, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information is already stored in the history memory 117, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is the management start reference. Regardless of whether or not the value exceeds the value, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning.

  In addition, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. In addition to or instead of the above configuration, when an abnormal state such as a radio wave detection abnormality or a vibration detection abnormality occurs, history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored for an event that has occurred in the abnormal state.

  In addition, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. In addition to or instead of the configuration, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 in a situation where the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is opened. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored for an event that occurs in a situation where the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is opened.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution subject of the process for managing the game history is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with the management IC 66. However, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 is not provided with the management IC 66. Instead of providing the management IC 66, in the present embodiment, processing for managing the game history is executed by the main CPU 63. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes various controls by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, control related to management of game history is set as non-specific control, and control other than non-specific control is set as specific control including control for advancing a game based on a game operation by the player.

  Specifically, the specific control includes all the control by the main process (FIG. 9) executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the present embodiment, the recognition process (step S111), the data output process (step S112), and the set value update signal output process (step S119) in the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are as follows. Not executed. Further, even in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed so as to interrupt the processes in steps S113 to S116 in the main process (FIG. 9). Among these, the processing other than the management processing described later is included in the specific control. Part of the management process is also included in the specific control.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a program and data setting mode in the main ROM 64. In correspondence with the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is distinguished from the specific control and the non-specific control, as shown in FIG. 67, the main ROM 64 also uses the specific control program and the specific control program. The addresses of the areas where the data, the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored are clearly distinguished.

  Specifically, the programs for specific control are collectively stored in the area of each successive address within the range of addresses X (1) to X (k + 2). Addresses X (k + 3) to X (k + 5) that follow the addresses X (1) to X (k + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which no data is stored, and then the address X ( The data for specific control is collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range of k + 6) to X (m + 2). Addresses X (m + 3) to X (m + 5) that follow the addresses X (k + 6) to X (m + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which no data is stored. Subsequently, the address X ( Non-specific control programs are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within a range of m + 6) to X (n + 2). Addresses X (n + 3) to X (n + 5) that follow the addresses X (m + 6) to X (n + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which no data is stored. Subsequently, the address X ( Data for non-specific control is collected and stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range of (n + 6) to X (p + 2). The relationship between the program and data as described above and the address is set in both the physical address in the main ROM 64 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

  As described above, the program for specific control and the data for specific control, and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are independent of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding control, For example, when checking only the program for specific control and the data for specific control by being stored in areas of different ranges of addresses, the address for storing the program for specific control and the data for specific control is stored. For example, when checking only the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, the address where the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored. You only need to check the area of the range. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform the work when checking the program and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Along with this, it is possible to efficiently perform the work in the case where the program and data are distinguished and corrected by specific control and non-specific control.

  No data is stored between the address range of the area where the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored and the address range of the area where the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored Since the address range of the unused area that has not been set is set, the boundary between the address range for the specific control and the address range for the non-specific control can be easily grasped during the check operation.

  In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, the program and data are stored in different address ranges regardless of the execution order of the processing for executing the corresponding control. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform the work in the case of checking the program and data separately. In addition, the address range of the unused area where no data is stored is set between the address range of the area where the program is stored and the address range of the area where the data is stored. It becomes easy to grasp the boundary between the address range and the address range of the data when checking.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how each area is set in the main RAM 65. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is distinguished by specific control and non-specific control, as shown in FIG. The address range of the stack area 222 for use and the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are clearly distinguished.

  Specifically, the area of each successive address within the range of addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) is set as a work area 221 for specific control. Addresses Y (r + 3) to Y (r + 5) continuous to addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) are addresses of unused areas. Subsequently, addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2) are used. The area of each successive address within the range of) is set as a stack area 222 for specific control. Addresses Y (s + 3) to Y (s + 5) continuous to addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2). The area of each consecutive address within the range of) is set as a work area 223 for non-specific control. Addresses Y (t + 3) to Y (t + 5) continuous to addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently addresses Y (t + 6) to Y (u + 2). The area of each successive address within the range of) is set as a stack area 224 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 65 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

  As described above, when the specific control work area 221 and the non-specific control work area 223 are set differently, the main CPU 63 executes specific control and non-specific control. Thus, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when various calculations are performed. Thereby, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an event that information on the main side RAM 65 necessary for the other is deleted. Incidentally, when writing information to each work area 221, 223 and reading information from each work area 221, 223, the main CPU 63 issues a load instruction.

  Since the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set differently, the main CPU 63 executes the specific control and executes the non-specific control. When the information stored in the register of the side CPU 63 is saved and when the return address information on the program is stored, different areas of the main side RAM 65 are used. As a result, when the information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the situation where one of the specific control and the non-specific control is being executed, and when the return address information on the program is stored, it is used on the other side. It is possible to make it difficult to generate an event that information to be deleted is deleted. Incidentally, the main CPU 63 issues a push command when writing information to the stack areas 222 and 224, and the main CPU 63 issues a pop command when reading information from the stack areas 222 and 224. Further, when information is read from each stack area 222, 224, the order of writing to the stack area 222, 224 becomes the target to be read first from the later information.

  Here, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. Information can be read from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Information cannot be written to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent information used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control from being deleted accidentally in a situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed.

  When the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. In addition, information can be read from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. Information cannot be written to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. As a result, in a situation where processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed, it is possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being deleted by mistake.

  Note that backup power is supplied to the main-side RAM 65 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The backup power includes the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the non-specific control. Are supplied to all the work area 223 and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is stored in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 10. The data is stored and held while the backup power is supplied.

  Next, timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds) in the situation where the processes of Step S113 to Step S116 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment. Note that the program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  In steps S3701 to S3718, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In step S3719 in the timer interrupt process, a management process is executed. When executing the management process, a subroutine program corresponding to the management process set in the specific control program is executed. When executing the subroutine program, after executing the management process The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing at is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the management process. Note that the processing from step S3801 to step S3805 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S3801). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  After that, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as “PUSH PSW” (step S3802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of the arithmetic instruction, rotate instruction, input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register information in a state before the subroutine is changed or changed after the subroutine is started is saved. It can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S3803). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management execution process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the management process program after the execution of the management execution process, the main CPU 63 stores the information of the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S3802 as a “POP PSW” by a pop instruction. To the flag register (step S3804). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S3802 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, an interrupt permission is set (step S3805). Thereby, a new execution of the timer interrupt process can be performed.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing management execution processing. Note that the processing of steps S3901 to S3915 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  First, as “LD SP, Y (u + 2)”, Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S3901). The stack pointer is an area in which information of an address for specifying in the stack area 222, 224 a storage area to which information is written by a push command is specified by the main CPU 63. Each time a push instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order. It is updated to the address information of the storage area. When the non-specific control stack area 224 is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the non-specific control stack area 224, and the information to be stored is added each time. In addition, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S3901, the last address information in the non-specific control stack area 224 is set in the stack pointer. As described above, the information is stored from the storage area of the last address toward the storage area of the first address as well in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  By the way, in the case where both the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are additionally set in spite of information being set in all storage areas, All areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to “0” because an abnormality has occurred regarding the storage process. This makes it possible to prevent the game from proceeding as it is despite the occurrence of an abnormality with respect to the storage process.

  Thereafter, as “LD (_WABUF), WA”, the WA register information of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3902). Also, as “LD (_BCBUF), BC”, the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3903). Also, as “LD (_DEBUF), DE”, the DE register information of the main CPU 63 is saved in the DE buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3904). Also, as “LD (_HLBUF), HL”, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3905). Further, as “LD (_IXBUF), IX”, the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3906). Also, as “LD (_IYBUF), IY”, the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3907).

  The general-purpose CPU 63 has various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers described above. In this case, in steps S3902 to S3907, information on each of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Are saved in a corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The amount of information in each of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is 2 bytes.

  These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S3908) which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such a register to the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the check process (step S3908), the information of these registers used for the specific control is non-specific controlled. It is possible to evacuate before starting. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is restored to these registers, so that the state of these registers is restored. Can be returned to a state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Also, instead of saving all the information in the various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA to be used in a check process that is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Register information is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control by selectively saving information in the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the work area 223 for non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the capacity to be secured. Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while ensuring a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that can be used for the check process. Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information set before the process to start is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

  In addition, the register information is not saved in the non-specific control stack area 224, but is saved in the non-specific control work area 223, thereby reducing the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224. It becomes possible. Further, when using the non-specific control stack area 224, the information writing order is read first from the later information as already described, and therefore the information reading order is shifted due to some noise or the like. If this happens, all of the subsequent reading order information will be restored to a different register. The occurrence probability of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-described event from occurring even when there is a lot of information to be saved. .

  After executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907, check processing is executed (step S3908). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the subroutine program, management after the execution of the check process is performed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address. Details of the check process will be described later.

  After executing the check process, “LD SP, Y (r + α)” is set to Y (r + α) as a fixed address when returning to the specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as “LD SP, Y (r + α)” (step S3909). ). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  The amount of information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control is always constant immediately before the execution of the management execution process subroutine in step S3803 of the management process (FIG. 70), and accordingly, the main amount at that timing is The information on the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control includes, for example, information on the return address of the management process (FIG. 70) after the management execution process (FIG. 71) ends, and the management process ( Information on the return address of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) after the completion of FIG. The constant information of the stack pointer is Y (r + α). Therefore, when the check process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, Y (r + α) that is the constant information is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. As a result, the information of the stack pointer can be restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. In this way, by setting fixed information in the stack pointer, the information corresponding to the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. It is no longer necessary to save the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 65 before starting the operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is not necessary to secure an area for the retreat in the main RAM 65.

  Thereafter, as “LD WA, (_WABUF)”, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3910). Also, as “LD BC, (_BCBUF)”, the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S3911). Further, as “LD DE, (_DEBUF)”, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3912). Also, as “LD HL, (_HLBUF)”, the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3913). Also, as “LD IX, (_IXBUF)”, the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3914). Further, as “LD IY, (_IYBUF)”, the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3915). By executing the processing of step S3910 to step S3915, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before starting.

  Here, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the main RAM 65 when processing corresponding to specific control is resumed. . Thus, it is not necessary to secure a storage area for saving the information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Further, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is processed by processing corresponding to non-specific control after returning to the processing corresponding to specific control. This information is not used when it is started again. In other words, the information necessary for the plurality of processing times corresponding to the non-specific control executed with the process corresponding to the specific control in between is the non-specific control work area 223 or the non-specific control stack area. 224 and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63. Therefore, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the main RAM 65, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed. No problem.

  Next, the check process executed when the subroutine program is called in step S3908 will be described. In the check process, a process for collecting game history information, a process for deriving a management result of the game history, and a process for informing the management result are executed. That is, the process for collecting game history information, the process for deriving the management result of the game history, and the process for notifying the management result are executed as processes corresponding to non-specific control.

  Prior to the description of the check process, the contents of the various areas 231 to 234 of the non-specific control work area 223 used for managing the game history will be described. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas 231 to 234 of the work area 223 for non-specific control used for managing the game history.

  The non-specific control work area 223 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and a high frequency support mode counter area 233. In each of these areas 231 to 233, general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, special electric winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, first operating counters 231c, 232c, 233c, second operating counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and Out counters 231e, 232e, and 233e are provided. The general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start opportunity. The special electricity prize counters 231b, 232b, and 233b are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the special electricity prize device 32 from a predetermined measurement start opportunity. The first operation counters 231c, 232c, and 233c are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The second operation counters 231d, 232d, and 233d are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The out counters 231e, 232e, and 233e are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start opportunity.

  Each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 is a target entry portion 24a in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and is not in either the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls that have entered 31-34. Each of the counters 232a to 232e in the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232 enters the target entrances 24a, 31 to 34 in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the opening / closing execution mode. Used to count the number of game balls that have been balled. Each of the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 is a state in which the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and is a target entry portion 24a, 31 to 34 in the high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls that have entered the ball.

  It should be noted that the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is not subject to measurement because the game ball enters the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 open. This is in order to exclude the number of entered balls from the measurement target. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the situation in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state may be a measurement target in the same manner as the situation in which the front door frame 14 is in a closed state.

  In addition to the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The calculation result storage area 234 is an area for storing information on the management result of the game history calculated using the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233. . The game history management result information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored and held until the game history management result information is newly calculated and the newly calculated information is overwritten.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a check process executed when a subroutine program is called in step S3908. Note that the processing from step S4001 to step S4008 in the check processing, including subroutine processing, is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. When executing a subroutine process, the return address information after the subroutine process is executed is written in the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer value of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224. At the same time, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the address information of the storage area to be stored in the next order. Further, when the subroutine processing is completed, the return address information is read from the storage area corresponding to the value in the previous order with respect to the current stack pointer value of the main CPU 63, and the return address information is handled. While returning to the program, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the address information of the storage area from which the return address information is read.

  In the check process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4001: YES), the normal entrance management process (step S4004), the entrance management process during the opening / closing execution mode (step S4005), and the high frequency A result calculation process (step S4007) and a display process (step S4008), which will be described later, are executed without executing any of the pitch management processes (step S4006) in the support mode. When the front door frame 14 is in an open state because the game area PA is formed by a space partitioned back and forth by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24. Even if the game area PA is opened toward the front and the game ball is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. In addition, when the front ball frame 14 is in an open state, a game ball entering the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 is generated by the manager of the game hall for maintenance or resolution of problems. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is in an open state and a game ball enters due to care or the like. Since such a game ball entry is not a game ball entry in a regular game execution situation, it is not necessary to manage such a game ball entry as a management target. Therefore, in the check process, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes in steps S4004 to S4006 are executed.

  When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is not in either the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode (step S4001 to step S4003: NO), a normal entry management process is executed (step S4004). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S4001: NO, step S4002: YES), the entrance management process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S4005). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high frequency support mode (step S4001: NO, step S4003: YES), the entrance management process in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4006).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a normal entrance management process in step S4004.

  When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first prize opening detection sensor 42a (step S4101: YES), that is, the signal received from the first prize opening detection sensor 42a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the game has been changed, when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a (step S4103: YES), that is, the signal received from the second prize opening detection sensor 43a. Is confirmed to have switched from the LOW level to the HI level, or when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a (step S4105: YES), that is, the third prize opening. When confirming that the signal received from the detection sensor 44a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, The value of the counter 231a is incremented by 1 (step S4102, step S4104, step S4106).

  In the case of the entrance management process in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 232a for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to steps S4102, S4104, and S4106, and the entry in the high frequency support mode is performed. If it is a ball management process, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 233a for the high frequency support mode as a process corresponding to steps S4102, S4104, and S4106. Also, in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, the detection results of the first to third prize opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are monitored. Processing for causing the number of game balls corresponding to the general winning port 31 to be paid out when it is determined that any one of the first to third winning port detection sensors 42a to 44a has been detected. Execute.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S4107: YES), that is, it is confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the special special prize winning counter 231b (step S4108).

  If it is a pitch management process in the open / close execution mode, the value of the special power prize counter 232b for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4108, and if it is a pitch management process in the high frequency support mode. As a process corresponding to step S4108, 1 is added to the value of the special power prize counter 233b for the high frequency support mode. In addition, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is also monitored in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 69) executed as a process corresponding to the specific control. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a process for allowing the number of game balls corresponding to the special prize device 32 to be paid out is executed and a process for specifying the end timing of the round game is executed.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a (step S4109: YES), that is, the signal received from the first operating port detection sensor 46a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the normal first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1 (step S4110).

  If it is a pitch management process in the open / close execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 232c for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4110, and the pitch management process in the high frequency support mode may be performed. For example, as the process corresponding to step S4110, the value of the first operation counter 233c for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is also monitored in the ball entry detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 69) executed as processing corresponding to the specific control, and the first working port detection sensor. If it is determined at 46a that one game ball has been detected, processing is performed so that the number of game balls corresponding to the first operating port 33 is paid out, and the holding information for special figure is acquired. Execute processing to identify the trigger.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a (step S4111: YES), that is, the signal received from the second operating port detection sensor 47a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 (step S4112).

  If it is a pitch management process during the open / close execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 232d for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4112, and the pitch management process during the high frequency support mode may be performed. For example, as a process corresponding to step S4112, the value of the second operation counter 233d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is also monitored in the ball entry detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 69) executed as processing corresponding to the specific control, and the second working port detection sensor. If it is determined at 47a that one game ball has been detected, processing is performed so that the number of game balls corresponding to the second operation port 34 is paid out, and acquisition of hold information for special figures Execute processing to identify the trigger.

  When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S4113: YES), that is, that the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If confirmed, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 (step S4114).

  If it is a pitch management process in the open / close execution mode, the value of the out counter 232e for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4114. As a process corresponding to S4114, 1 is added to the value of the out counter 233e for the high frequency support mode. In addition, in the entrance detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is not monitored.

  As described above, by executing the processing from step S4004 to step S4006, the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, and the special electric prize winning device 32 is obtained. The number of game balls that enter the game is measured using the special electricity prize counters 231b, 232b, and 233b, and the number of game balls that enter the first operation port 33 uses the first operation counters 231c, 232c, and 233c. The number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 is measured using the second operation counters 231d, 232d, and 233d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured by the out counter 231e, Measurement is performed using 232e and 233e. Thereby, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the entry history of each entry unit 24a, 31-34. In addition, the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are separately provided, so that neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is present. In addition, the main CPU 63 can recognize the entry history of the entry units 24 a and 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the situation in the opening / closing execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode.

  Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 73), if an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, the process of step S4004 is executed, the process of step S4005 is executed, or the process of step S4006 is executed, step A result calculation process is executed in S4007, and a display process is executed in step S4008.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process in step S4007.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4201). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the game history collection for calculating the game history management result is to be executed. In this embodiment, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, when supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the game discharged from the game area PA Until the total number of balls reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA without collecting the game history for calculating the game history management result When the number exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, game history collection for calculating the game history management result is executed. In the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 and the like, an operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before the shipment. In this case, the game balls are maintained in the respective ball-entry portions and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, the game for calculating the management result of the game history until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after starting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 becomes equal to or higher than the management start reference value. By preventing the collection of history, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball at the time of the operation check as described above from being collected as a game history for calculating the management result of the game history. Become.

  Here, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the value of the management start flag is “0”. It has become. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231; the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232; and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 for the high frequency support mode Is also “0”. On the other hand, in the situation where the value of the management start flag is “1”, the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and then the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is supplied in the situation where the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65. When the supply is started, the value of the management start flag remains “1”. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231; the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232; and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 for the high frequency support mode In addition, the state before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is maintained. Due to the above configuration, when the value of the management start flag is “0”, the value of each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231; the value of each counter 232a to 232e in the counter area 232 for opening / closing execution mode; The values of the counters 233a to 233e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are also “0”.

  Incidentally, when the main RAM 65 clear process is executed in step S105 or step S117 in the main process (FIG. 9), the clear process is targeted for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack. The non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are excluded from the clear process. Thus, the game hall manager cannot intentionally clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control “0” intentionally.

  Further, the main CPU 63 confirms whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in a timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) described later, and the occurrence of the abnormality. In such a case, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to “0”. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, initialization can be performed. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the configuration, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” without clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control. However, when an abnormality occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the non-specific control stack area 224 is cleared to "0" without clearing the non-specific control work area 223 to "0". Also good. Further, even if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the calculation result storage area 234 may be excluded from the target of “0” clear.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the counter area 233 for the high frequency support mode The total number is calculated by adding all the values of the counters 233a to 233e (step S4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is larger than “300” that is the management start reference value (step S4203).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, "1" is set to the management start flag of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4204). Also, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to “0”. (Step S4205). Thereby, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is the management start reference value. All game history information collected up to the number corresponding to is deleted. Therefore, collection of game history for calculating the management result of the game history until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after starting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value. Can be prevented from being executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, the calculation processing for the total number is executed in the same manner as in step S4202 (step S4206). That is, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are set. The total number is calculated by summing all of them. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is equal to or greater than the calculation reference number “6000” (step S4207).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, various parameter calculation processing is executed (step S4208). Specifically, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are set to K61 to K65, and the values of the various counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232 are set to K71 to K75, for the high frequency support mode. When the values of the various counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 are K81 to K85, the following 61st parameter to 68th parameter are calculated.
61st parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (“K61 + K71 + K81” × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + “K62 + K72 + K82” × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + “K63 + K73 + K83” "×" number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 "+" K64 + K74 + K84 "×" number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34 ") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA ( Ratio of K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) · 62nd parameter: Total number of game balls paid out in the normal time (K61 × “Number of winning balls for winning into the general winning opening 31” + K62 × “Winning for special prize winning device 32” X "Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K64 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in normal time (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65) ) Ratio / 63th parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out in the open / close execution mode (K71 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K72 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32”) + K73 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K74 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total of game balls discharged from the game area PA in the opening / closing execution mode Number (K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75) ratio · 64th parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out in the high frequency support mode ( 81 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K82 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K83 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K84 × “number” 2) Number of winning balls for winning at the operating slot 34) / Ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA in the high frequency support mode (K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85). 65th parameter: gaming balls to the general winning slot 31 The total number of balls (K61 + K71 + K81) / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) / 67th parameter: (“K62 + K72 + K82” × “the number of K balls for the special electrification device 32 + 64 K K + 74 for K) +84 K for K ++ 84” Number of winning balls for winning in the mouth 34) / total number of game balls to be paid out (“K61 + K71 + K81” × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + “K62 + K72 + K82” × “for winning in the special electric winning device 32” No. of winning balls ”+“ K63 + K73 + K83 ”ד the number of winning balls for winning in the first working port 33 ”+“ K64 + K74 + K84 ”ד the number of winning balls for winning in the second working port 34 ”) / 68th Parameters: “K62 + K72 + K82” × “number of winning balls for winning the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (“K61 + K71 + K81” × “number of winning balls for winning the general winning opening 31” + “K62 + K72 + K82” × “ “Number of winning balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32” + “K63 + K73 + K83” × “number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33” + “K64 + K74 + K84” × “number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34” Then, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated in step S4208 are overwritten in the calculation result storage area 234 (step S4209). In this case, the 61st to 68th parameters of the calculation results in the previous processing times that have already been stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are deleted. Even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, so if the backup power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, Even immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power, the calculation result storage area 234 stores information on the 61st to 68th parameters calculated before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to “0”. (Step S4210). As a result, when the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated, the game history information can be temporarily deleted at that time.

  It should be noted that immediately after the management start flag is set to “1”, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the value obtained by subtracting the management start reference value from the calculation reference number, Steps S4208 to S4208 are performed. The process of step S4210 may be executed, and thereafter, the process of steps S4208 to S4210 may be executed when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the calculation reference number.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the display processing in step S4008 in the check processing (FIG. 73).

  First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4301). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the timing to update the display contents of the game history management results in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The main CPU 63 notifies the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters by controlling the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. Further, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, a number corresponding to the tenth digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and a number corresponding to the first digit is displayed for the third notification. It is displayed on the device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display corresponding to the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and is the display object in the last order. After the calculation result of the 68th parameter is displayed, the calculation result of the 61st parameter which is the display target in the first order is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the 61st to 68th parameters in the main CPU 63 is 60 minutes at the shortest. On the other hand, the number of the 61st to 68th parameters is 8, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Therefore, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated by the main CPU 63 are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

  When the process of step S4301 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after 1 subtraction is “0”. It is determined whether or not the timing is reached (step S4302). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4302, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4303). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “7” (step S4304: YES), the display target counter value is cleared to “0” (step S4305).

  The display target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The 61st to 68th parameters correspond to the possible values of the display target counters “0” to “7” on a one-to-one basis. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the 61st parameter which is the first display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is “7”. In this case, the 68th parameter which is the last display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4304, or when the process of step S4305 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. Control is performed (step S4306). In addition, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result storage area 234, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tenth digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The number corresponding to the 1's place is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S4307).

  Here, a display IC is provided corresponding to each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In step S4306, the main CPU 63 outputs display data to the display IC corresponding to the first notification display device 69a. In step S4307, the main CPU 63 displays the display IC corresponding to the second notification display device 69b and the third notification. Display data is output to each display IC corresponding to the display device 69c. These display ICs can store display data when operating power is supplied, and display contents corresponding to the stored display data are continuously displayed on the corresponding display devices 69a to 69c. Display. Then, when the display data is changed by the main CPU 63, the display of the notification display devices 69a to 69c is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Thereby, even after the management execution process (FIG. 71), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, ends and returns to the process corresponding to specific control, it is set in the execution status of the process corresponding to non-specific control. The display corresponding to the display data is continued on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4308).

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started by executing the display process as described above, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Is done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether or not the game is continued, and the main body 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. This is done regardless of whether it is visible. As described above, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, and thereby the first to third notification display devices 69a. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of .about.69c.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control and a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. In the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, processing corresponding to specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In contrast, information can be stored and read out, while processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. In some cases, information can be read but information cannot be stored. The non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 can store information and read information when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63. On the other hand, when the process corresponding to the specific control is executed by the main CPU 63, the information can be read but the information cannot be stored. Thus, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control 224 can be handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, the storage destination of information in the main RAM 65 can be clearly different between the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the processes corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed.

  The process corresponding to the specific control includes a process for controlling the progress of the game, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control includes a process for managing the game history. As described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are handled as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the non-specific control work area. The stack area 224 is handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Thereby, when executing the process for controlling the progress of the game, information used in the process for managing the game history, for example, the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode It is possible to prevent the information stored in the counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 from being rewritten.

  A normal counter area 231 in which information for managing game history is stored, an opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the main RAM 65. As a result, the main CPU 63 can complete the process for managing the game history. It is also possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to game history information and various parameter information calculated using the game history information.

  When the situation corresponding to the specific control is executed from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed or the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the main CPU 63 Register information is saved in the main RAM 65. As a result, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, it is possible to prevent information stored in various registers of the main CPU 63 from being rewritten when executing processing corresponding to specific control. Become. Further, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed or after the process is completed, the information saved in the main RAM 65 is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63. Thereby, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to the specific control from the state of the various registers of the main CPU 63 before the execution of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Become.

  When the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is executed from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is executed or the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the various registers of the main CPU 63 Among them, information of some registers is saved in the main RAM 65. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for saving the register information of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65.

  When the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is executed from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is executed or the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the various registers of the main CPU 63 Among these, the information of the register that is the storage target of information is saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Thereby, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, it is possible to restart the process corresponding to the specific control from the register state of the main CPU 63 before the execution of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In the main RAM 65, the storage capacity necessary for saving the register information of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  When processing corresponding to non-specific control is started, information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in processing corresponding to specific control, and the WA register, BC register, Information in the DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control in processing corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, it is possible to perform saving at a timing preferable for each information stored in the various registers of the main CPU 63, and the processing for saving the information corresponds to the processing corresponding to the specific control and the non-specific control. It is possible to execute the processing in a distributed manner.

  The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of the arithmetic instruction, rotate instruction, input / output instruction, and the like. In this case, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by the process corresponding to the specific control before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. As a result, it is possible to save the information of the flag register in a state before the subroutine call corresponding to the non-specific control and the state before the subroutine is changed to the specific control stack area 222.

  The information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is not saved in the non-specific control stack area 224, but is saved in the non-specific control work area 223. It is possible to reduce the capacity of the stack area 224 for specific control. In addition, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the information writing order is read first from the later information. Therefore, if the information reading order is shifted due to some noise or the like, All of the subsequent reading order information is restored to a different register. The occurrence probability of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-described event from occurring even when there is a lot of information to be saved. .

  The stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is executed from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is executed or when the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is executed This information is a fixed information, and the information of the stack pointer is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of processing corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving information of the stack pointer in the main RAM 65, so that the storage capacity of the main RAM 65 can be reduced accordingly. Further, even when the stack pointer information is not saved in this way, the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is executed to the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed. When the corresponding process is executed, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 becomes fixed information. Therefore, the process corresponding to the non-specific control can be performed without saving the stack pointer information as described above. When the processing is completed, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  In addition, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the flag register information of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the flag register information may be saved in the main RAM 65 in a process corresponding to non-specific control. In addition, after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the return of information to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the return of information to the flag register is performed in a process corresponding to non-specific control.

  In addition, after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started for the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63, the main CPU 63 performs the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which information in these registers is saved in the main RAM 65 in processing corresponding to specific control. In addition, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the return of the information to each of the registers is performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. The configuration may be such that the return of information to the register is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the management process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing in steps S4401 to S4405 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S4401). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  After that, as “LD (_PSWBUF), PSW”, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction (step S4402). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of the arithmetic instruction, rotate instruction, input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before the subroutine is changed or changed after the subroutine is started is saved. Information can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4403). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management execution process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the management process program after the execution of the management execution process, “LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)” is saved in the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S4402 as a load instruction. The flag register information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S4404). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4402 was previously executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, an interrupt permission is set (step S4405). Thereby, a new execution of the timer interrupt process can be performed.

  According to the above configuration, the flag register information of the main CPU 63 immediately before switching from the specific control to the non-specific control is saved in the work area 221 for specific control instead of the stack area 222 for specific control. As a result, the flag register information can be saved while suppressing the capacity of the stack area 222 for specific control.

  The PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control is secured as a dedicated area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may also be used where other information can be written. In other words, in the situation where the management process is not executed, it is not necessary to save the flag register information of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control, so that the process corresponding to the specific control in the situation where the management process is not executed is predetermined. A configuration may also be used in which a shared area that is also used as a PSW buffer is used when performing arithmetic processing. In this case, the shared area is surely used to save the flag register information when the management process is executed. Therefore, before the management process is executed as information other than the flag register information, It is necessary to have a configuration in which unnecessary information is written in the shared area.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management execution process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing management execution processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S4501 to S4515 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is used as a load instruction to start the non-specific control on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address at (step S4501).

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH WA”, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in a storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command (step S4502). In this case, the WA register information is saved in the storage area corresponding to the fixed address set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S4501. Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH BC”, the BC register information of the main CPU 63 is saved in a storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4503). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  After that, as a “PUSH DE”, the DE register information of the main CPU 63 is saved in a storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4504). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH HL”, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in a storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command (step S4505). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH IX”, the information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved in a storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command (step S4506). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  After that, as “PUSH IY”, the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command (step S4507). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  After executing the processing of step S4502 to step S4507, check processing is executed (step S4508). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is sent to the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

  Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (r + α)” is used to return the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the specific control by the load instruction. Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address at (step S4509). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as “POP IY”, the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The IY register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4510). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  After that, as “POP IX”, the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction is displayed. The IX register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4511). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  After that, as “POP HL”, the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4512). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  After that, as “POP DE”, the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The DE register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4513). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is displayed as “POP BC” by the pop instruction. The BC register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4514). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  After that, as “POP WA”, the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The WA register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4515). Also, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  By executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before starting.

  In addition to the flag register, the general-purpose CPU 63 includes various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in Steps S4502 to S4507, information on each of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Are saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4508) which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such a register to the non-specific control stack area 224 prior to the execution of the check process (step S4508), the information of these registers used in the specific control is non-specific controlled. It is possible to evacuate before starting. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 is restored to these registers so that the state of these registers is restored. Can be returned to a state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Also, instead of saving all the information in the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the non-specific control stack area 224, the WA to be used in the check process corresponding to the non-specific control. Register information is saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 by selectively saving information in the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the non-specific control stack area 224. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the capacity to be secured. Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while ensuring a large capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control that can be used in the check process.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management execution process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is used as a load instruction to start the non-specific control on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address at (step S4601).

  Thereafter, as “LD (_ALLBUF), ALL”, the information of all registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the ALL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S4602). As a result, not only the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register used in the check process, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, but also all other registers are included. The register information is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. Thus, by saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is not necessary to selectively save the register information of the main CPU 63.

  Here, the registers to be saved include a flag register. The information in the flag register is saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S3802 of the management process (FIG. 70). In step S4602, the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Is done. Thereby, it is not necessary to selectively save the register information of the main CPU 63 including the flag register information. Even if the information in the flag register is saved in an overlapping manner in this way, after the management execution process is completed, the main CPU 63 is moved from the special control stack area 222 in step S3804 of the management process (FIG. 70). Since the information is returned to the flag register, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be returned to the state immediately before the execution of the management execution process when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. It becomes.

  Thereafter, a check process is executed (step S4603). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is sent to the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

  Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (r + α)” is used to return the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the specific control by the load instruction. Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address at (step S4604). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as “LD ALL, (_ALLBUF)”, the information saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the register corresponding to each of the main CPUs 63 by the load instruction (step S4605). As a result, it is possible to restore each piece of information in all the registers of the main CPU 63 to information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  According to the above configuration, the register information of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 but is saved in the non-specific control work area 223, so that the non-specific control stack area is increased accordingly. The capacity of 224 can be kept small. In addition, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the information writing order is read first from the later information. Therefore, if the information reading order is shifted due to some noise or the like, All of the subsequent reading order information is restored to a different register. The occurrence probability of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-described event from occurring even when there is a lot of information to be saved. .

  Further, when saving the register information of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA register, BC register, DE register, and HL register used in the check process corresponding to the non-specific control. The information of all registers including not only the IX register and the IY register but also other registers is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. Thus, by saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is not necessary to selectively save the register information of the main CPU 63.

  Note that the information of all registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. In other words, the information of all the registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to all the registers by the process corresponding to the non-specific control. The return of the information may be performed in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management execution process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S4701 to S4706 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  First, as “LD (_SPBUF), SP”, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is saved in the SP buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S4701). As a result, information on the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  After that, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is used as the load instruction to start the non-specific control on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address at (step S4702).

  After that, as a “PUSH ALL”, the information of all registers of the main CPU 63 is transferred from the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 and the storage area by a push command. The data is saved in a continuous storage area (step S4703). In this case, since the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 cannot be stored in one storage area in the non-specific control stack area 224, the current state of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 as described above. The storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information and the storage area continuing from the storage area are used as the saving destination of the register information. In addition, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order with respect to the storage area in which the last information is stored when saving the information of all registers.

  Thereafter, a check process is executed (step S4704). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is sent to the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

  After that, as “POP ALL”, information saved in the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and information saved from the storage area to a continuous storage area by a pop instruction Is overwritten in the register corresponding to each of the main CPUs 63 (step S4705). As a result, it is possible to return the information of all registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  Thereafter, as “LD SP, (_SPBUF)”, the information saved in the SP buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S4706). As a result, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 returns to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  According to the above configuration, when the register information of the main CPU 63 is saved in the non-specific control stack area 224, the WA register, BC register, DE used in the check process that is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Information on all registers including not only registers, HL registers, IX registers, and IY registers but also other registers is collectively saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Thus, by saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224, it is not necessary to selectively save the register information of the main CPU 63.

  Information on the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. As a result, even if the information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started can be changed, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is ended and the specific control is performed. When returning to the corresponding process, it is possible to return the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  Note that the information of all registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. In other words, the information of all the registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to all the registers by the process corresponding to the non-specific control. The return of the information may be performed in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<20th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configurations of the management process and the management execution process are different from those of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the management process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S4801 to step S4811 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S4801). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  After that, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as “PUSH PSW” (step S4802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of the arithmetic instruction, rotate instruction, input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before the subroutine is changed or changed after the subroutine is started is saved. Information can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as “LD WA, 0”, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4803). Further, as “LD BC, 0”, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4804). Further, as “LD DE, 0”, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4805). Further, as “LD HL, 0”, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4806). Further, as “LD IX, 0”, the load command clears the IX register of the main CPU 63 to “0” (step S4807). Also, as “LD IY, 0”, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4808).

  In addition to the flag register, the general-purpose CPU 63 includes various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in step S4803 to step S4808, each of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is set. Clear “0”. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902) that is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Prior to execution of processing corresponding to non-specific control by clearing such registers to “0” prior to execution of management execution processing (step S4809) which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. In addition, it is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  Each information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. This is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the process corresponding to the specific control that is restored after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

  After executing the processing in steps S4803 to S4808, the management execution processing is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution processing set in the program for non-specific control (step S4809). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management execution process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the management process program after the execution of the management execution process, the main CPU 63 stores the information of the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S4802 as a “POP PSW” by a pop instruction. Is returned to the flag register (step S4810). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4802 was previously executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, an interrupt permission is set (step S4811). Thereby, a new execution of the timer interrupt process can be performed.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing in steps S4901 to S4909 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is used to load the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 at the start of non-specific control as a load instruction. Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address (step S4901).

  Thereafter, a check process is executed (step S4902). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the subroutine program, management after the execution of the check process is performed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

  Thereafter, as “LD WA, 0”, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4903). Further, as “LD BC, 0”, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4904). Also, as “LD DE, 0”, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4905). Further, as “LD HL, 0”, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4906). Further, as “LD IX, 0”, the load command clears the IX register of the main CPU 63 to “0” (step S4907). Also, as “LD IY, 0”, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S4908).

  These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902) that is a process corresponding to non-specific control as already described. Prior to returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control, such registers are cleared to “0” before the return to processing corresponding to specific control. The state immediately after the supply of operating power to the side CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

  In addition, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the process corresponding to the specific control is started is not specified after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed. This is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the process corresponding to the non-specific control that is restored after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed.

  Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (r + α)” is used to return the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the specific control by the load instruction. Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address at (step S4909). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  According to the above configuration, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, and IX register of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed. The IY register is cleared to “0”. Thereby, it is not necessary to save the information of each register in the main RAM 65. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving these pieces of information.

  Further, when returning from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed to the process corresponding to the specific control, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main CPU 63 are also changed. “0” is cleared. Thereby, when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, it becomes possible to return the state of each of these registers to the state immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started.

  The state in which each register is cleared to “0” is a state when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the registers to a predetermined state when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control. .

  When starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the registers subject to execution of “0” clear are some of the various registers of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting the registers to a predetermined state when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started and when processing returns to processing corresponding to specific control.

  In the configuration in which the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to “0” when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started and when processing corresponding to specific control is restored. Registers other than "0" are not cleared. Thereby, it is possible to prevent information necessary for the process corresponding to the specific control from being erased at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  Further, information of registers other than the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of processing corresponding to non-specific control. Thus, it is not necessary to secure an area for saving the information in the main RAM 65.

  Information on the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. This information is not used in the process corresponding to the specific control. As a result, even if the above-described registers are cleared to “0” when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, it corresponds to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It becomes possible not to affect the processing.

  In addition, instead of the configuration in which the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0” in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), The register may be initialized. That is, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information of each register is set so that each register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to “0” and then is in an initial state. In steps S4803 to S4808, each register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, in each of steps S4903 to S4908, each register is set so as to be in the initial state, and when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the state of each register is not specified. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the control is started.

  Also, instead of the configuration in which the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0” in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), A configuration may be adopted in which “1” is set in all of the registers. In this case, also in steps S4903 to S4908, when “1” is set to all the above-described registers to return to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the state of each of the registers corresponds to the non-specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before starting.

  Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the flag register information of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the flag register information may be saved in the main RAM 65 in a process corresponding to non-specific control. In addition, after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the return of information to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the return of information to the flag register is performed in a process corresponding to non-specific control.

  In addition, the process of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to “0” is a process corresponding to the specific control before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process of clearing these registers to “0” may be executed in a process corresponding to non-specific control. In addition, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the process of clearing each register “0” is performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The process of clearing each register “0” may be performed in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

  Further, in the management process (FIG. 81), the “PUSH PSW” process in step S4802 is executed before setting “0” in each register in steps S4803 to S4808. The process of “PUSH PSW” in step S4802 is executed after setting “0” in each register in steps S4803 to S4808 and before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is read in step S4809. It is good also as a structure to be made. As a result, it becomes possible to save the information in the flag register after being changed by the load instruction in steps S4803 to S4808 in the stack area 222 for specific control.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for collecting game history information is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration according to the present embodiment.

  Similar to the fifteenth embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65. Further, unlike the fifteenth embodiment, the management RAM 241 is electrically connected to the MPU 62. That is, a management RAM 241 is provided separately from the main RAM 65 built in the MPU 62, and the management RAM 241 is externally attached to the MPU 62.

  Similar to the fifteenth embodiment, the main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. ing. Therefore, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the specific control using the program for specific control in the main ROM 64 and the data for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 and When the specific control stack area 222 is used and the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the non-specific control using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main ROM 64. The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65 are used.

  The management RAM 241 includes a normal counter area 231, an opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and an operation result storage area 234. The contents of these areas 231 to 234 are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment. Also in the present embodiment, a management execution process including a check process is executed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control in the main CPU 63. In the check process, the game history is collected through the update of the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233, as in the fifteenth embodiment. The 61st to 68th parameters calculated by using the collected game history are written in the calculation result storage area 234. That is, since the management RAM 241 is used when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to non-specific control, the management RAM 241 is used as a work area for non-specific control.

  In addition, when the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated using game history collection and the collected history information, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 of the main RAM 65 are provided. Used as appropriate.

  According to the above configuration, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to store the collected game history information while not increasing the necessary storage capacity in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65, and use the game history. It is possible to store the calculated 61st to 68th parameters. Further, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing game history information while using the general-purpose MPU 62.

  Non-specific control work area 223 and non-specific control stack area 224 in main RAM 65 are used as appropriate when collecting the game history and calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collected history information. Is done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing speed from being extremely reduced when processing related to history information is executed.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the management RAM 241 is provided with the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234, the first embodiment described above. A storage area corresponding to the history memory 117 in the form or the like may be set. In this case, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity necessary for storing the history information, but the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 is used as a storage unit for storing the history information. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with an increase in storage capacity.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing in steps S5001 to S5019 in the main processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S5001). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5002).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S5003), and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step S5004). 13 determines whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S5005), and determines whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11 (step S5006).

  In the present embodiment, a front door opening sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the front door opening sensor The detection result 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, the main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is an open state.

  In the present embodiment, a main body opening sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main body opening sensor 96 detection results are input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when a closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and a gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in an open state.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5003: YES) and if a negative determination is made in any of steps S5004 to S5006, a clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S5007). . In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the specific control is performed except for an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. The work area 221 is cleared to “0” and initial setting is performed for the area that has been cleared to “0”. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clear process at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the clear process at the time of non-setting update, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared after “0” is cleared.

  In the clear process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started with the reset button 68c being pressed, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S5003: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S5008). The power failure flag is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and when the predetermined power failure process is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power failure flag “1” will be set to. If “1” is set in the power failure flag, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum stored when the power is shut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S5009). . If clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S5007, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S5009, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is confirmed by checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control It is determined whether or not the value is normal (step S5010). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the set value set in the set value counter is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and abnormal when it is “0” or 7 or more. Judge that there is.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5008 to S5010, an operation prohibiting process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after executing an error notification process for notifying the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S5011), an infinite loop is entered. The operation prohibiting process is canceled by executing a setting updating clear process (step S5018), which will be described later.

  When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S5008 to S5010, a power-on setting process is executed (step S5012). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81.

  The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is prohibited from occurring at the stage where the main process is started. The state where the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S5012 is completed and the process of step S5013 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. Thereby, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process in step S5012 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S5013 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S5013 to S5016. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S5013 to S5016 are repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S5013 to S5016 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly. In steps S5013 to S5016, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5003: YES) and if a positive determination is made in all of steps S5004 to S5006, processing for updating the set value is executed. Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S5017). In the copy process, information on the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . Thereby, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to “0” in the clear process at the time of setting update (step S5018) executed thereafter, the main process before the clear process at the time of update of the set value is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

  Thereafter, a clear process at the time of setting update is executed (step S5018). In the clear process at the time of setting update, the work area 221 for specific control is set to “0” except for the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode in the work area 221 for specific control is the high probability mode and the copy area. "Is cleared, and initial setting is performed for the area cleared" 0 ". As a result, the game times are not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed. It becomes a certain situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clear process at the time of setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is performed for the area cleared to “0”. In the clear process at the time of setting update, the set value counter used for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to “0”. In the clear process at the time of setting update, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared after “0” is cleared.

  On the other hand, the clearing process at the time of setting update does not clear “0” in the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, so even if the setting value updating process (step S5019) is executed, the winning / failing lottery mode Can be maintained in the mode before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to “0” in the clear process at the time of setting update, the set value set before the clear process at the time of setting update is executed can be specified thereafter.

  In the clear process at the time of setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thereby, even if the set value update process capable of changing the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. It becomes possible to do so.

  Then, after executing the set value update process in step S5019, the process proceeds to step S5012. Hereinafter, the setting value update process will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing. In addition, the process of step S5101-step S5114 in a setting value update process is performed in the main side CPU63 using the program for specific control, and the data for specific control.

  First, “1” is set to the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5101). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When “1” is set in the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting value up to that point.

  Thereafter, a display start process of the set value is executed (step S5102). In the setting value display start process, the third notification display device 69c is controlled to display the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1”. The manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S5103). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the out port detection sensor 48a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S5104: YES), the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5105). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S5106: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S5107). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed, the setting value is updated to one level higher. When the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting value is set to “setting 1”. Will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5106, or if the process of step S5107 is executed, a display update process for the set value is executed (step S5108). In the set value display update process, display control is performed on the third notification display device 69c so that a number corresponding to the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. The manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  After executing the process of step S5108, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. When one out-of-game ball is not detected by the out mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103: NO), the processing after step S5104 is executed again. When one game ball is detected by the out mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5109). In this case, it is not specified whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, but it is specified whether or not the switching from the ON state to the OFF state has occurred, and the switching has occurred. If specified, an affirmative determination is made in step S5109.

  If it is not switched to the OFF state (step S5109: NO), the process of step S5109 is executed again. As a result, the progress of the process is waited until the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. When the state is switched to the OFF state (step S5109: YES), a set value display end process is executed (step S5110). In the set value display end process, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended. In this case, display of information on various parameters stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is started by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  After that, a setting value comparison process is executed (step S5111). In the setting value comparison process, it is determined whether or not the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control matches the information stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting value set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is the same as the setting value set in the current setting value update process.

  When the set value set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value set in the current set value update process are the same (step S5112: NO), non- A notification process at the time of change is executed (step S5113). In the notification process at the time of non-change, a setting maintenance command indicating that the setting value has not been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting maintaining command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting maintenance, and outputs a sound “setting is maintained” from the speaker unit 54. In addition, a character image “setting is maintained” is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  These notifications are maintained until a notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting maintenance command is transmitted, and are ended when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the set value has been maintained. In the non-change notification process, the set value is maintained by setting the display content on at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to the display content corresponding to the setting maintenance. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports this, and it is good also as a structure which performs the external output which shows that the setting value was maintained.

  If the set value set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value set in the current set value update process are not the same (step S5112: YES), change An hour notification process is executed (step S5114). In the notification process at the time of change, a setting change command indicating that the setting value has been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting change, and outputs a sound “setting change” from the speaker unit 54. In addition, a character image “setting change” is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  These notifications are maintained until a notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting change command is transmitted, and are ended when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the set value has been changed. In the notification process at the time of the change, the setting value has been changed by setting the display content on at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c as the display content corresponding to the setting change. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports, and it is good also as a structure which performs the external output which shows that the setting value was changed.

  As described above, in order to execute the setting value update process in the present embodiment, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, but also the reset button 68c is pressed, and the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 needs to be opened. This makes it difficult to execute the set value update process illegally.

  Further, in order to execute the set value update process, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be opened. As a result, even if the setting value update process is attempted to be executed illegally, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in an open state, so that the illegal action becomes conspicuous, and the administrator of the gaming hall It becomes easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in order to execute the set value update process, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is required. It becomes possible to make the work of the illegal act complicated, and to make the illegal action stand out.

  In addition, in the configuration that does not return to the process for advancing the game when the set value update process is not completed, in order to confirm the set value selected in the set value update process and end the set value update process, It is necessary to cause a game ball to enter the out port 24a and cause the out port detection sensor 48a to detect the game ball, and then to turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. Thereby, even if the set value update process is executed illegally, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for ending the set value update process and then returning to the process for proceeding with the game.

  Further, the set value set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value selected in the set value update process are compared, and whether or not both set values are the same. Notification corresponding to this is executed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the set value can be changed by the set value update process.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds) in a state where the processes of steps S5013 to S5016 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 84). Note that the program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  In steps S5201 to S5205, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  Thereafter, a setting confirmation process is executed (step S5206). When executing the setting confirmation process, a subroutine program corresponding to the setting confirmation process set in the specific control program is executed. When executing the subroutine program, the setting confirmation process is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process after the execution of is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the setting confirmation processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process. Note that the processing from step S5301 to step S5312 in the setting confirmation processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, it is determined whether or not the third notification display device 69c displays a setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5301). If a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the game times or the opening / closing execution mode is in effect (step S5302), and the pattern change display times and the general electric utility 34a are released in the general-purpose display unit 38a. It is determined whether or not any of the open states that can enter the state (step S5303), and it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5304). 11 determines whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state (step S5305), and determines whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is ON-operated (step S5306). Whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state is determined based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 as in step S5005 in the main process (FIG. 84), and whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. This determination is made based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 as in step S5006 in the main process (FIG. 84).

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5302 to S5306, the setting confirmation process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S5307 to S5309. When affirmative determination is made in all of step S5302 to step S5306, a setting value display start process is executed (step S5307). In the set value display start processing, the third notification display device 69c is controlled to display the set value number corresponding to the set value counter information in the work area 221 for specific control. The manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by visually checking the third notification display device 69c when checking the set value.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5308). The game stop flag is a situation where an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 86) and the process of steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed, that is, the execution of the process for advancing the game is to be stopped. This is a flag for specifying whether or not there is a main CPU 63. When “1” is set in the game stop flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), so that the process of steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed. As a result, the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. However, even if the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S5201 to S5205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86) is executed, and the setting value is being confirmed. Even in this case, the power failure monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further illegal detection is executed.

  Thereafter, a confirmation notification start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5309). Upon receiving the confirmation notification start command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting confirmation, and outputs a sound “setting confirmation is in progress” from the speaker unit 54. . Further, a character image “Setting is being confirmed” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are continued until a confirmation notification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Note that an external output indicating that the set value is being confirmed may be performed.

  As described above, on the condition that it is neither a game time nor an opening / closing execution mode, nor is it any of the variable display time of the picture on the general-purpose display portion 38a and the general power release state in which the general electric utility 34a can be in the open state. By making the display for confirming the set value on the third notification display device 69c, it is possible to prevent the set value from being confirmed in a situation where a game is being performed. It becomes possible.

  In addition, in order to display the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, but also the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 needs to be opened. This makes it difficult to display the setting value confirmation display illegally.

  Further, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be performed on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if the display for confirming the set value is illegally performed, since the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, the illegal act becomes conspicuous, and management of the gaming hall It becomes easy for a person to find the fraud.

  In particular, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the display for confirming the set value is performed on the third notification display device 69c. Further, by requiring the opening operation of the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to make the work of the illegal act complicated and to make the illegal action stand out.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF (step S5310). If an OFF operation has been performed (step S5310: YES), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S5311). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), so that the processes in steps S5208 to S5221 are executed. Thereby, the state in which execution of the process for advancing a game is stopped is cancelled.

  Thereafter, a confirmation notification end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5312). By receiving the confirmation notification end command, the sound emission control device 81 ends the notification indicating that the set values are being confirmed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), after the setting confirmation process in step S5206 is completed, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (step S5207). In this case, if the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1” in the setting confirmation process in step S5206, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, and steps S5208 to S5221 are performed. Do not execute processing. Further, also when the occurrence of fraud is detected in the fraud detection process in step S5205, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, and the processes in steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed.

  In steps S5208 to S5219, the same processes as those in steps S307 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In step S5221, the same process as step S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, in step S5220, a RAM monitoring process is executed. When executing the RAM monitoring process, a subroutine program corresponding to the RAM monitoring process set in the program for specific control is executed, but after executing the RAM monitoring process, the subroutine program is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing at is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the RAM monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process. Note that the processing from step S5401 to step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5401). In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the work area 221 for specific control, whether or not the state of the storage area where information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. And a method of determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when “1” is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value “0”. In addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is a value different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5401 that there is an abnormality (step S5402: YES), processing in steps S5409 to S5412 is executed. If it is not determined in step S5401 that there is an abnormality (step S5402: NO), the process proceeds to step S5403.

  In step S5403, the monitoring process for the stack area 222 for specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the stack area 222 for specific control, whether or not the state of the storage area where information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. And a method of determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when “1” is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value “0”. In addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is a value different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5403 that there is an abnormality (step S5404: YES), processing in steps S5409 to S5412 is executed. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5403 (step S5404: NO), the process proceeds to step S5405.

  In step S5405, a monitoring process for the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the work area 223 for non-specific control, whether or not the state of the storage area where information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. There is a method of monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when “1” is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value “0”. In addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is a value different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5405 that there is an abnormality (step S5406: YES), processing in steps S5409 to S5412 is executed. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5405 (step S5406: NO), the process proceeds to step S5407.

  In step S5407, the non-specific control stack area 224 is monitored. In this monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the non-specific control stack area 224 due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, whether or not the state of the storage area where information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. There is a method of monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when “1” is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value “0”. In addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is a value different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5407 that there is an abnormality (step S5408: YES), processing in steps S5409 to S5412 is executed. Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S5409). In the copy process, information on the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to “0” in the abnormality clearing process (step S5410) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value.

  Thereafter, a clear process at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5410). In the abnormal clear process, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack for non-specific control. The area 224 is cleared to “0”. The initial setting is performed after clearing “0”. That is, in the RAM monitoring process, an abnormality occurs in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. When it is specified that the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the non-specific control use area Clear the stack area 224 of “0”. As a result, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, neither the process corresponding to the specific control nor the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed as it is. It becomes possible to do so.

  When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the return address information after execution of the RAM monitoring process is also deleted. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the process returns to a predetermined program after the process of step S5412 is completed. Specifically, it is configured to uniquely return to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22). However, the program that uniquely returns is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86). When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the stack order of the stack pointer 222 for the main CPU 63 is set to the address of the first storage area.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that a clear process at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5411). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to forced clearing, and outputs a sound “forcibly cleared” from the speaker unit 54. Further, the character image “forced clear” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the main RAM 65 has been forcibly cleared.

  Thereafter, a set value update process is executed (step S5412). In other words, when the clear process at the time of abnormality occurs, “0” clear is executed including the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control, so the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is reset. A set value update process is executed to perform this. The processing content of the set value update processing is the same as step S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84). Accordingly, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated one step at a time, and the set value being selected is determined by detecting the game ball with the out port detection sensor 48a. The setting value in the middle of updating and the determined setting value are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Thereafter, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the end condition of the setting value update process is satisfied.

  Here, it is not determined that the end condition is satisfied only by the setting key insertion unit 68a being in the OFF state, and the end condition is determined when the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined that it has been established. When the set value update process is executed in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88), the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the set value update process. In order to establish it, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion unit 68a and perform the ON operation after once performing the ON operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending even though a regular operation by the game hall manager is not performed.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the end condition of the set value update process is satisfied, step S5111 in the set value update process (FIG. 85) is executed. It is compared whether or not the set value stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control and the set value set this time in the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control are the same. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value set before the execution of the clear process at the time of abnormality (step S5410) is the same as the set value set in the current set value update process. When both set values are the same (step S5112: NO), the already-described setting maintenance notification is performed by executing the non-change notification process (step S5113). On the other hand, when the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the already-described setting change notification is performed by executing the notification process at the time of change (step S5114).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In order to execute the set value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON, but also the reset button 68c is pressed. The front door frame 14 is in an open state, and the gaming machine main body 12 needs to be in an open state. This makes it difficult to execute the set value update process illegally.

  In order to execute the set value update process, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if the setting value update process is attempted to be executed illegally, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in an open state, so that the illegal action becomes conspicuous, and the administrator of the gaming hall It becomes easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in order to execute the set value update process, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is required. It becomes possible to make the work of the illegal act complicated, and to make the illegal action stand out.

  In a configuration in which the process does not return to the process for advancing the game when the set value update process is not completed, the set value selected in the set value update process is confirmed and the set value update process is terminated. It is necessary to cause a game ball to enter 24a and cause the out-port detection sensor 48a to detect the game ball, and then to turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. Thereby, even if the set value update process is executed illegally, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for ending the set value update process and then returning to the process for proceeding with the game.

  The set value set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value selected in the set value update process are compared, and whether or not both set values are the same. Corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the set value can be changed by the set value update process.

  The set value is set on the condition that it is neither the game time nor the opening / closing execution mode, nor is it in either the variable display time of the pattern in the general-purpose display portion 38a or the general power release state in which the general utility 34a can be in the open state. By making the display for confirmation to be performed on the third notification display device 69c, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value confirmation work from being performed in a situation where a game is being performed. .

  In order to display the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, the setting key insertion portion 68a is not only turned ON, but the front door frame 14 is opened. The gaming machine main body 12 needs to be in an open state. This makes it difficult to display the setting value confirmation display illegally.

  In order for the display for confirming the set value to be performed on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if the display for confirming the set value is illegally performed, since the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, the illegal act becomes conspicuous, and management of the gaming hall It becomes easy for a person to find the fraud.

  In particular, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the display for confirming the set value is performed on the third notification display device 69c. Further, by requiring the opening operation of the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to make the work of the illegal act complicated and to make the illegal action stand out.

  When it is specified that an error has occurred in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control Clears the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area, and sets the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to “0”. "clear. As a result, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, both the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control are executed as they are. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

  In the process corresponding to the specific control, an information abnormality occurs not only in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is monitored whether or not As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which whether or not an information abnormality has occurred is divided into processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  When it is specified that an error has occurred in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control In the process corresponding to the specific control, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are “0”. Cleared. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared with a configuration in which “0” clear is performed separately for processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  When the clear process at the time of abnormality is executed due to the occurrence of the information abnormality, the set value update process is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding although the set value is not set. In this case, when the set value that was set before the clear process at the time of abnormality is the same as the set value that was set by the set value update process after the execution of the clear process at the time of abnormality The setting maintenance notification is performed. Thereby, even if the clear process at the time of abnormality is executed, the setting maintenance notification is performed by resetting the setting value set in the previous situation, and the clear process at the time of abnormality is executed It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the set value has not changed. By the way, since it is common to record the set values of each installed pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the set value update process after executing the clear process at the time of abnormality so as to become the recorded set value Can be performed.

  Note that the condition for executing the set value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started may be a condition different from the above embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a main process according to another embodiment. In the main process, the same processes as steps S5001 to S5019 of the main process (FIG. 84) in the above embodiment are executed in steps S5501 to S5506 and steps S5508 to S5520. On the other hand, in the main process, it is determined in step S5507 whether or not the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 operated to fire the game ball in the game area PA has been rotated from the initial rotation position. Then, the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5503: YES), the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (step S5504: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. (Step S5505: YES), the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S5506: YES), and the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position. If so (step S5507: YES), the set value update process (step S5520) is executed. Thus, in order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 68a but the ON operation is performed, It becomes necessary to start supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the operation handle of the operation device 28 is rotated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of changing the set value illegally. In step S5507, it is not determined whether or not the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, but it is determined whether or not the firing operation device 28 is touched by the player. It is good also as a structure.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the set value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outside Although both conditions that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state are set for the frame 11, only one of these conditions may be set.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the set value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, a condition that the reset button 68c is pressed is set. However, a configuration in which the condition is not set may be employed.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the set value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where a game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a condition that power supply is started is set. Thus, in order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 68a but the ON operation is performed, and the through operation is performed. It is necessary to start supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the game ball remaining in the gate 35. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of changing the set value illegally.

  In addition, the content of the operation for confirming the set value in the set value update process may be different from that in the above embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process according to another embodiment. In the set value update process, the same processes as steps S5101 to S5102 and steps S5104 to S5114 of the set value update process (FIG. 85) in the above embodiment are executed in steps S5601 to S5602 and S5604 to S5614. . On the other hand, in the set value update processing, in step S5603, it is not determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, but the ON signal is continuously output from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined whether or not the ON duration period is equal to or longer than the end reference period (specifically, 5 seconds). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the currently selected set value is confirmed, and the flow advances to step S5609. According to this configuration, in order to determine the set value being selected, it is necessary to intentionally retain the game ball in the through gate 35 over the end reference period. The game ball staying in the through gate 35 for more than the end reference period does not occur in a situation where a normal game is being performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent or make it difficult to establish a condition for determining the set value being selected in a situation where a normal game is being performed. Further, even if the setting value update process is started due to injustice, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for determining the setting value being selected in the setting value update process.

  Further, in the setting value update processing, the setting value being selected may be determined when the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, and the firing operation device 28 is touched by the player. In this case, the setting value being selected may be determined.

  In addition, in the setting value update processing, when the special electricity detection sensor 45a detects that a game ball has entered the special electricity prize winning device 32 provided with an opening / closing member, the setting value being selected may be determined. Alternatively, the setting value being selected may be determined when the second operation port detection sensor 47a detects that a game ball has entered the second operation port 34 provided with the opening / closing member. In this case, in order to determine the set value being selected, it is necessary to care for the game ball after manually setting the target pitching part to an open state, so that it is difficult to illegally change the set value. It becomes possible.

  Further, in the set value update process, the selection is made based on the detection that the game ball has entered the second ball entry part after the game ball has been detected to have entered the first ball entry part. It is good also as a structure by which an inside setting value is decided. In this case, in order to fix the set value being selected, it is necessary to enter the game balls into a plurality of ball-entry parts according to a predetermined order, so that it is difficult to illegally change the set values. Is possible. In this case, the workability of regular work is not drastically reduced by making both the first and second entrance parts be entrance parts without opening and closing members. It becomes possible to do.

  In the setting value update processing, the setting key insertion unit 68a may be switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting value being selected is confirmed and the end condition of the setting value update processing is satisfied.

  In addition, the operation for updating the setting value by one step in the setting value updating process is not limited to the pressing operation of the update button 68b, and the setting value is set to one step by pressing the reset button 68c. It is good also as a structure updated.

  Further, in the situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON by the setting key, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. When the front door frame 14 is not in an open state with respect to the frame 13 or when the gaming machine main body 12 is not in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, a clear process (step S5007) at the time of non-setting update is executed. The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be such that the clear process at the time of non-setting update is not executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the clear process at the time of non-setting update from being executed against the intention of the manager of the game hall.

  Further, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned ON by the setting key, When the front door frame 14 is not in an open state with respect to the frame 13 or when the gaming machine main body 12 is not in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, a clear process (step S5007) at the time of non-setting update is executed. The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be such that the clear process at the time of non-setting update is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear process at the time of non-setting update illegally.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process is different from that of the twenty-second embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the twenty-second embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing in steps S5701 to S5720 in the main processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S5701). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5702).

  Thereafter, based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5703). Based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, the outer frame 11 is determined. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state (step S5704), and it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5705). If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5703 to S5705, the processes of steps S5706 to S5714 are executed. The processes in steps S5706 to S5714 are the same as steps S5008 to S5016 in the main process (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  When affirmative determination is made in all of steps S5703 to S5705, a selection process is executed (step S5715). In the selection process, the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the set value update process is not executed, and the clear process at the time of setting update is executed and the set value update process is executed. A process of determining whether or not based on a selection operation by the manager of the game hall is executed. Specifically, every time the update button 68b is pressed, the state is switched from the state in which one of the above states is selected to the state in which the other state is selected. The selection operation may be performed by operating the reset button 68c, or may be performed by operating another operation unit. Further, when the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update process is not executed is selected, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b. When the third notification display device 69c is turned off, the clear processing at the time of setting update is executed, and the setting value update processing is executed, “O” is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. And the first notification display device 69a and the third notification display device 69c are turned off. In addition, when the reset button 68c is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the selected situation among the above situations is confirmed as the current selection target. To do.

  In addition, when the update button 68b is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the selected situation among the above situations is confirmed as the current selection target. It may be configured, and when the other operation unit is continuously pressed for more than the fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds), the situation on the selected side among the above situations is selected this time It is good also as a structure decided as an object. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which confirms the situation of the side selected among said each situation as this selection object by operating the operation handle of the firing operation apparatus 28. FIG.

  In the selection process, when the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update process is not executed is determined as the current selection target (step S5716: NO), the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed. (Step S5717). The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is the same as step S5007 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  In the selection process, when the clearing process at the time of setting update is executed and the situation in which the setting value update process is executed is determined as the current selection target (step S5716: YES), the setting value copy process is executed (step S5718), a clear process at the time of setting update is executed (step S5719), and a set value update process is executed (step S5720). The processing content of these steps S5718 to S5720 is the same as that of steps S5017 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, even when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not provided, the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update process is not executed, and the clear process at the time of setting update is executed. At the same time, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to select which of the situations in which the set value update process is executed.

  In addition, not only when the set value update process is executed but also when the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed, the operation power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is pressed. In addition to starting, it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 relative to the inner frame 13 and open the gaming machine main body 12 relative to the outer frame 11. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear process at the time of non-setting update illegally.

  As a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outer frame. 11, the game machine main body 12 is in a state in which both conditions for being in an open state are set, but only one of these conditions may be set.

  Further, as a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, a condition that the firing handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated is added. A configuration in which a condition that the firing operation device 28 is touched may be added, or a condition that a game ball is detected in the gate detection sensor 49a is added. Also good.

<Twenty-fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the RAM monitoring process is different from that of the twenty-second embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the twenty-second embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S5801 to step S5814 in the RAM monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5801). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5801 that there is an abnormality (step S5802: YES), processing in steps S5805 to S5808 is executed.

  If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5801 (step S5802: NO), monitoring processing for the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5803). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5803 that there is an abnormality (step S5804: YES), processing in steps S5805 to S5808 is executed.

  For details of the processes in steps S5805 to S5808, first, a set value copy process is executed (step S5805). In the copy process, information on the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to “0” in the abnormality clear process (step S5806) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clear process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value.

  Thereafter, a clear process at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5806). In the clear process at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. The initial setting is performed after clearing “0”. On the other hand, “0” clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not executed. That is, in the RAM monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the specific control is excluded except for the copy area. The work area 221 is cleared to “0” and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. As a result, when there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, processing corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it from being lost Further, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. As a result, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to “0” in response to an information abnormality in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222. It becomes possible not to be.

  When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the return address information after execution of the RAM monitoring process is also deleted. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the process returns to a predetermined program after the process of step S5808 is completed. Specifically, it is configured to uniquely return to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22). However, the program that uniquely returns is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86). When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the stack order of the stack pointer 222 for the main CPU 63 is set to the address of the first storage area.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that a clear process at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5807). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to forced clearing, and outputs a sound “forcibly cleared” from the speaker unit 54. Further, the character image “forced clear” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

  Thereafter, a set value update process is executed (step S5808). The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as that in step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  When it is not determined that there is an abnormality in both step S5801 and step S5803 (step S5802 and step S5804: NO), the monitoring process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S5809). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5809 that there is an abnormality (step S5810: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is performed (step S5811). In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are cleared to “0”. Thereby, it becomes possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S5811, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are “ It becomes possible not to clear “0”.

  In step S5811, although the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to “0”, the management start flag is not cleared to “0”. It is good also as a structure. In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to “0”. It is good also as a structure. In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to “0”. It is good also as a structure.

  When a negative determination is made in step S5810 or when the process of step S5811 is executed, a monitoring process for the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S5812). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5812 that there is an abnormality (step S5813: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is performed (step S5814). Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control stack area 224.

  On the other hand, in step S5814, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thus, even if an information abnormality occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control work area 223 are " It becomes possible not to clear “0”.

  According to the above configuration, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control work area 221 except for the copy area. Is cleared to “0” and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. As a result, when there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, processing corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it from being lost

  Even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Accordingly, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0” when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible to do so.

  Even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. This prevents the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to “0” triggered by an information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It becomes possible.

  Even if an information abnormality occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control work area 223 are not cleared to "0". This prevents the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control from being cleared to “0” triggered by an information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It becomes possible.

  If an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to “0”, while the stack area 222 for specific control is “ The configuration may not be cleared to “0”.

  Further, when an information abnormality has occurred in the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, while the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to “0”. It is good. In this case, even if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the process of steps S5805 to S5808 may not be executed.

<25th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 is different from that in the twenty-second embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the twenty-second embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S5901 to step S5908 in the RAM monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5901). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5901 that there is an abnormality (step S5902: YES), processing in steps S5905 to S5908 is executed.

  If it is not determined in step S5901 that there is an abnormality (step S5902: NO), monitoring processing for the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5903). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5903 that there is an abnormality (step S5904: YES), processing in steps S5905 to S5908 is executed.

  For details of the processes in steps S5905 to S5908, first, a set value copy process is executed (step S5905). In the copy process, information on the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . Thereby, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to “0” in the clear process at the time of abnormality (step S5906) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the clear process at the time of the abnormality is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value.

  Thereafter, clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5906). In the clear process at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. The initial setting is performed after clearing “0”. On the other hand, “0” clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not executed. That is, in the RAM monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the specific control is excluded except for the copy area. The work area 221 is cleared to “0” and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. As a result, when there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, processing corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it from being lost Further, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. As a result, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to “0” in response to an information abnormality in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222. It becomes possible not to be.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that a clear process at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5907). By receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and the speaker unit 54. To output a voice saying "Forced clear was executed for specific control." In addition, a character image “Forced clear for specific control has been executed” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

  Thereafter, a set value update process is executed (step S5908). The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as that in step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  In the RAM monitoring process that is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data as described above, information abnormality monitoring is performed for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. However, information abnormality monitoring is not performed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The monitoring of the information abnormality about the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is a process corresponding to non-specific control in which a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are used. Executed.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing management execution processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The management execution process is executed by reading out a subroutine program in the management process (FIG. 70) as in the fifteenth embodiment. Further, the processes in steps S6001 to S6016 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  In Steps S6001 to S6008 and Steps S6010 to S6016, the same processing as Steps S3901 to S3915 of the management execution processing (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment is executed. In step S6009, another monitoring process is executed. When executing the separate monitoring process, the subroutine program corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the subroutine program, the separate monitoring process is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the later management execution process is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command. When the separate monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. Note that the processing in steps S6101 to S6108 in the separate monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S6101). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S6101 that there is an abnormality (step S6102: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is performed (step S6103). In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are cleared to “0”. Thereby, it becomes possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S6103, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are “ It becomes possible not to clear “0”.

  In step S6103, although the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to “0”, the management start flag is not cleared to “0”. It is good also as a structure. In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to “0”. It is good also as a structure. In step S6103, although the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to “0”, the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to “0”. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a clear notification process is executed (step S6104). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and “history information is forcibly cleared from the speaker unit 54. Sound is output. In addition, a character image “history information has been forcibly cleared” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6102, or if the process of step S6104 is executed, a monitoring process for the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S6105). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S6105 that there is an abnormality (step S6106: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is performed (step S6107). Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control stack area 224.

  On the other hand, in step S6107, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thus, even if an information abnormality occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control work area 223 are " It becomes possible not to clear “0”.

  Thereafter, a clear notification process is executed (step S6108). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control. "Forcibly cleared" is output. In addition, a character image “Non-specific control stack has been forcibly cleared” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

  When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the address of the program in step S6010 in the management execution process (FIG. 94) is uniquely set as return address information after the execution of the separate monitoring process. . Thereby, even if the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, it is possible to return to the program that should be returned in the management execution process. When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the stack order of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control in the main CPU 63, Whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed in a process corresponding to the non-specific control in the main CPU 63. Thereby, not only clearly distinguishing the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 to be used by the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the area of the main RAM 65 to be monitored. 221 to 224 can also be clearly distinguished.

  When the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0”, it is information on various registers of the main CPU 63 that is used in the processing corresponding to the specific control and is stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The saved information is also cleared to “0”. In this case, even if the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, it may not be possible to return to the state before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. Accordingly, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0”, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control may be cleared to “0”. In this configuration, since the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is returned to the process corresponding to the specific control, the specific control is performed. As a corresponding process, the setting value update process may be executed first.

<Twenty-sixth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the twentieth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the twentieth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the twentieth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the management process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S6201 to step S6219 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6201). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  Thereafter, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD HL, SP” (step S6202). In this case, since the information amount of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the information amounts of the H register and the L register are 8 bits, the continuous 8-bit information from the upper side of the stack pointer is the H register. The 8-bit information from the lower side of the stack pointer is overwritten in the L register.

  After that, “LD (HL), 0” is set to “0” as the one byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. Clear (step S6203). Note that the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in step S6202, and the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is not updated until the processing of step S6203 is executed. In step S6203, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 is cleared to “0”.

  After that, as the “LD SP, SP-1”, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written next in the specific control stack area 222 by the load instruction. (Step S6204). When using the stack area 222 for specific control, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and for each time the information to be stored is added The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222. Accordingly, in step S6204, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information corresponding to the smaller storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing in step S6204, the next storage area is set as the information storage target by the next push command with respect to the storage area cleared to “0” in step S6203, and in step S6203. The storage area that has been cleared to “0” is set as a target for reading information by the next pop instruction.

  Thereafter, as “LD WA, 0”, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6205). Also, as “LD BC, 0”, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6206). Also, as “LD DE, 0”, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6207). Further, as “LD HL, 0”, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6208). Further, as “LD IX, 0”, the load command clears the IX register of the main CPU 63 to “0” (step S6209). Further, as “LD IY, 0”, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6210).

  In addition to the flag register, the general-purpose CPU 63 includes various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S6205 to S6210, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are changed. Clear “0”. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in the management execution process (step S6212) which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Prior to execution of processing corresponding to non-specific control, the state of these registers is cleared by clearing “0” prior to execution of management execution processing (step S6212) which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. In addition, it is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  Each information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. This is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the process corresponding to the specific control that is restored after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

  Thereafter, as a “POP PSW”, information is read from the storage area of the previous writing order with respect to the storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6211). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the execution of the pop instruction in step S6211 is the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to “0” in step S6203. It becomes information corresponding to. Therefore, the storage area of the previous writing order with respect to the storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 is the storage area cleared to “0” in step S6203. . Then, the information read from the storage area is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63, whereby the flag register is cleared to "0". Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte) and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . Before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the flag register is cleared to “0” prior to the execution of the management execution process (step S6212) which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. A state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6212). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management execution process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  The processing contents of the management execution process are the same as the management execution process (FIG. 82) in the twentieth embodiment. Therefore, after the check process is completed in the management execution process, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to “0”. As a result, these registers are cleared to “0” prior to returning from the process corresponding to the non-specific control to the process corresponding to the specific control, and the state of these registers is changed to the process corresponding to the specific control. A state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

  When returning to the management process program after executing the management execution process, a process for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to “0” is executed. Specifically, first, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S6213). After execution of the push instruction, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  After that, as “LD HL, SP”, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6214). In this case, since the information amount of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the information amounts of the H register and the L register are 8 bits, the continuous 8-bit information from the upper side of the stack pointer is the H register. The 8-bit information from the lower side of the stack pointer is overwritten in the L register.

  After that, “LD (HL), 0” is set to “0” as the one byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. Clear (step S6215). Note that the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in step S6214 in the HL register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated until the processing of step S6215 is executed. In step S6215, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”.

  After that, as the “LD SP, SP-1”, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written next in the specific control stack area 222 by the load instruction. (Step S6216). When using the stack area 222 for specific control, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and for each time the information to be stored is added The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222. Therefore, in step S 6216, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information corresponding to the storage area on the side having a smaller address in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing of step S6216, the storage area of the next order is set as a storage target of information by the next push command with respect to the storage area cleared to “0” in step S6215, and in step S6215. The storage area that has been cleared to “0” is set as a target for reading information by the next pop command.

  Thereafter, as a “POP PSW”, information is read from the storage area of the previous writing order with respect to the storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6217). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the execution of the pop instruction in step S6217 is the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to “0” in step S6215. It becomes information corresponding to. Therefore, the storage area in the write order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 is cleared to “0” in step S6215. It becomes a storage area in the stack area 222. Then, the information read from the storage area is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63, whereby the flag register is cleared to "0". Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte) and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . After the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed by clearing “0” after the execution of the management execution process (step S6212) that is a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to is started. Further, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is the previous one.

  After that, as “POP HL”, the HL register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6213 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6218). Since the HL register is cleared to “0” immediately before the management execution process (step S6212) ends, the information cleared to “0” is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213. At the same time, in step S6218, the information cleared to “0” is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63. As a result, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, an interrupt permission is set (step S6219). Thereby, a new execution of the timer interrupt process can be performed.

  According to the said structure, in addition to the effect demonstrated in the said 20th Embodiment, there can exist the following effects.

  When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. Accordingly, it is not necessary to save the flag register information used in the process corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 in the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving the information.

  In addition, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” even when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is returned to the process corresponding to the specific control. Thereby, when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, it becomes possible to return the state of a flag register to the state immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started.

  The state where the flag register is cleared to “0” is a state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the flag register to a predetermined state when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started and when processing returns to processing corresponding to specific control.

  The information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is information that is not used in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. As a result, even if the flag register is cleared to “0” when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It becomes possible not to affect.

  “0” is cleared in a predetermined storage area of the stack area 222 for specific control, and the flag register is cleared to “0” by overwriting the flag register with the pop instruction by the pop instruction. It is a configuration. As a result, even if “0” clearing to the flag register is restricted to be performed directly by the load instruction, the flag register can be cleared to “0”.

  Note that the flag register may be initialized instead of the flag register being cleared to “0”. That is, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information setting is performed so that the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to “0” and then the initial state is set. In S6204 and step S6211, the flag register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, the flag register is set so as to be in the initial state in steps S6213 to S6218, and the state of the flag register is set to non-specific control when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to is started.

  In steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be set to “1” in place of the configuration of clearing the flag register of “0”. In this case, also in step S6213 to step S6218, by setting “1” to all the flag registers, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the operation.

  Further, instead of the processing of step S6202 to step S6204 and step S6211, it is possible to set “LD PSW, 0” to directly clear “0” in the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction. Further, instead of the processing of step S6213 to step S6218, “LD PSW, 0” may be configured to directly clear “0” in the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the processing of step S6213 and step S6218 is executed, the configuration may be such that “0” is cleared in the HL register by “LD HL, 0” by a load instruction. Even in this case, it is possible to return the state of the HL register to the state immediately before the execution of the management execution process that is a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register “0” is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control, a configuration in which the process is performed in a process corresponding to the non-specific control may be adopted.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the twentieth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the twentieth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the twentieth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the management process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S6301 to step S6323 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6301). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH AF”, the information of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are stored in correspondence with the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The area and the storage area are evacuated to each storage area in the next writing order (step S6302). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an 8-bit (1 byte) information amount, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses Evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area after the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6302 are overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as “POP HL” (step S6303). . In this case, the information of the A register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63, and the flag register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is changed to the L of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. The H and L registers of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, as “LD A, 0”, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6304). Then, the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD L, A” (step S6305), and the load instruction as “LD H, A” The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6306). Since the A register is cleared to “0” in step S6304, the L register and the H register are overwritten with the information of the A register, and the L register and the H register are cleared to “0”. It becomes.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area are saved (step S6307). Since the H and L registers of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the information of the L register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area after the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as “LD BC, 0”, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6308). Further, as “LD DE, 0”, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6309). Further, as “LD IX, 0”, the load command clears the IX register of the main CPU 63 to “0” (step S6310). Also, as “LD IY, 0”, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6311).

  In addition to the flag register, the general-purpose CPU 63 includes various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S6308 to S6311, the BC register, the DE register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are cleared to “0”. In step S6305 and step S6306, the HL register is cleared to “0”. These BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the management execution process (step S6313) that is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Prior to execution of processing corresponding to non-specific control, the state of these registers is cleared by clearing “0” prior to execution of management execution processing (step S6313) which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. In addition, it is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In addition, each information of the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is performed in the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It is unnecessary information in the corresponding processing. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the process corresponding to the specific control that is restored after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

  Thereafter, as a “POP AF”, the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6307 is overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction ( Step S6312). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. Since both the H register information and the L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all “0” information, the A register of the main CPU 63 is changed by executing the processing of step S6312. “0” is cleared and the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the state of the flag register can be set to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6313). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management execution process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  Note that after the check process is completed in the management execution process, the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to “0”. As a result, these registers are cleared to “0” prior to returning from the process corresponding to the non-specific control to the process corresponding to the specific control, and the state of these registers is changed to the process corresponding to the specific control. A state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

  When returning to the management process program after executing the management execution process, a process for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to “0” is executed. Specifically, first, as “PUSH HL”, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S6314). After execution of the push instruction, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  After that, as “PUSH AF”, the information of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are stored in correspondence with the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The area and the storage area are evacuated to each storage area in the next writing order (step S6315). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an 8-bit (1 byte) information amount, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses Evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area after the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as a “POP HL”, the A register information and the flag register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6315 are overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6316). . In this case, the information of the A register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63, and the flag register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is changed to the L of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. The H and L registers of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, as “LD A, 0”, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by a load instruction (step S6317). Then, the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD L, A” (step S6318), and the load instruction as “LD H, A” The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6319). Since the A register is cleared to “0” in step S6317, each of the L register and the H register is cleared to “0” by overwriting the information in the A register to each of the L register and the H register. It becomes.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area of the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6320). Since the H and L registers of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the information of the L register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area after the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as “POP AF”, the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6320 are overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction ( Step S6321). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. Since both the H register information and the L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all “0” information, the processing of step S6321 is executed, so that the A register of the main CPU 63 is changed. “0” is cleared and the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. By clearing the flag register to “0” after the execution of the management execution process (step S6313), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to is started. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  After that, as “POP HL”, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6322). Since the HL register is cleared to “0” immediately before the management execution process (step S6313) ends, the information cleared to “0” is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314. At the same time, in step S6322, the information cleared to “0” is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63, and as a result, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, an interrupt permission is set (step S6323). Thereby, a new execution of the timer interrupt process can be performed.

  According to the above configuration, the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be cleared to “0” without executing the process of clearing “0” to a predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control by a load instruction. It becomes. As a result, even if the configuration is such that clearing “0” with respect to a predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control is restricted by the load instruction, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. Is possible.

  Note that the flag register may be initialized instead of the flag register being cleared to “0”. That is, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information setting is performed so that the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to “0” and then the initial state is set. In S6307 and step S6312, the flag register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, by setting the flag register so that the initial state is set also in steps S6314 to S6322, the state of the flag register is set to non-specific control when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to is started.

  Further, in steps S6302 to S6307 and S6312, instead of a configuration in which the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”, “1” may be set in all the flag registers. In this case, also in step S6314 to step S6322, by setting “1” to all the flag registers, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the operation.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the process of step S6302 and step S6303 is not performed. In this case, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the process of step S6315 and step S6316 is not performed. In this case, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Further, instead of the configuration for executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6306, “LD HL, 0” is set to “LD HL, 0”, the HL register is cleared to “0” by the load instruction, and then the “0” cleared HL register is pushed to the push instruction. The flag register of the main CPU 63 may be cleared to “0” by restoring the saved information to the AF register by a pop instruction after saving to the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register “0” is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control, a configuration in which the process is performed in a process corresponding to the non-specific control may be adopted.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing management processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S6401 to step S6416 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6401). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  After that, as “PUSH WA”, the information of the WA register (that is, the W register and the A register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6402). Since the W register and A register of the main CPU 63 each have 8 bits (1 byte) of information, the information in the W register and A register is individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. The When the push instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area after the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD A, PSW” (step S6403). In this case, both the flag register and the A register have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). Then, as “LD (_FGBUF), A”, the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction (step S6404). Since the register A is overwritten with the information in the flag register in step S6403, the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6404.

  After that, as a “POP WA”, the WA register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6402 is returned to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6405). As a result, even if the A register is used to save the flag register information to the work area 221 for specific control, the state of the A register can be returned to the state before the saving is performed. Become. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6406). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management execution process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  The processing content of the management execution process is the same as the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Therefore, before the check process is started in the management execution process, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, after the check process is completed in the management execution process, each information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control is the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. Returned to This makes it possible to make the states of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 the same before and after the check process.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing content of the management execution process may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and the management execution process in the eighteenth embodiment. The configuration may be the same as (FIG. 79), or the same configuration as the management execution process (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

  When returning to the management process program after the execution of the management execution process, a process for returning the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the execution of the management execution process is executed. Specifically, first, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S6407). After execution of the push instruction, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH WA”, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S6408). After execution of the push instruction, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 includes information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the WA register information is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  Thereafter, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD HL, SP” (step S6409). In this case, since the information amount of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the information amounts of the H register and the L register are 8 bits, the continuous 8-bit information from the upper side of the stack pointer is the H register. The 8-bit information from the lower side of the stack pointer is overwritten in the L register.

  After that, as “LD A, (_FGBUF)”, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6406) S6410). Then, as “LD (HL), A”, the main instruction stores in the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. Information on the A register of the CPU 63 is stored (step S6411). As a result, the flag register information saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as the “LD SP, SP-1”, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written next in the specific control stack area 222 by the load instruction. (Step S6412). When using the stack area 222 for specific control, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and for each time the information to be stored is added The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222. Accordingly, in step S6412, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information corresponding to the smaller storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the process of step S6412, the next storage area is set as the information storage target by the next push instruction with respect to the storage area in which the information of the A register is saved in step S6411. In S6411, the storage area in which the information in the A register is saved is set as the information read target by the next pop instruction.

  Thereafter, as a “POP PSW”, information is read from the storage area of the previous writing order with respect to the storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6413). The stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 immediately before the execution of the pop instruction in step S6413 is information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the A register is saved in step S6411. It has become. Therefore, in the storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, the storage area in the previous write order is the storage in which the information in the A register is saved in step S6411. It becomes an area. The information read from the storage area is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63, so that the information in the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is the flag of the main CPU 63. It will be restored to the register. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is the previous one.

  Thereafter, as a “POP WA”, the WA register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6408 is returned to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6414). When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous. Also, as “POP HL”, the HL register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6407 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6415). When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, an interrupt permission is set (step S6416). Thereby, a new execution of the timer interrupt process can be performed.

  According to the above configuration, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed, the flag register information of the main CPU 63 is not the specific control stack area 222. It is possible to retreat to the work area 221 for specific control. When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is returned to the process corresponding to the specific control, the information in the flag register saved in the work area 221 for the specific control is the flag of the main CPU 63. Return to register. As a result, information can be restored from the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control specified in the program to the flag register of the main CPU 63 without referring to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Even when the information of the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 is rewritten due to noise or the like, the information can be returned to the flag register of the main side CPU 63.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the flag register information in the main RAM 65 is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process may be executed in a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of returning the flag register information saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. It may be configured to be executed.

<Twenty-ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the management process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S6501 to step S6519 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6501). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and each storage area in the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6502). Since the H and L registers of the main CPU 63 each have an 8-bit (1 byte) information amount, the information in the H and L registers is individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. The When the push instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area after the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH AF”, the information of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are stored in correspondence with the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The area and the storage area are evacuated to each storage area in the next writing order (step S6503). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an 8-bit (1 byte) information amount, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses Evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area after the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as a “POP HL”, the A register information and the flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6503 are overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6504). . In this case, the information of the A register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63, and the flag register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is changed to the L of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, as “LD A, L”, the information in the L register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6505). Since the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in step S6504 in the L register, the information in the flag register is overwritten in the A register by overwriting the information in the L register. Become. Then, as “LD (_FGBUF), A”, the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction (step S6506). Since the register A is overwritten with the information of the flag register in step S6505, the information of the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6506.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area are saved (step S6507). In this case, since the A register information and the flag register information are overwritten in step S6504, the A register information and flag register information are saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507. I was allowed to. When the push instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area after the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as “POP AF”, the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6507 are overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction ( Step S6508). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. The H register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the A register information at the time of step S6503, and the L register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag at the time of step S6503. Register information. Accordingly, by executing the processing of step S6508, the states of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are restored to the state at the time of step S6503. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6502 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as “POP HL” (step S6509). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state at the time of step S6502. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6510). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management execution process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  In the management execution process, the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register information of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control before the check process is started. After the check process is completed in the management execution process, each information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is returned to the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. As a result, the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 can be set to the same state before and after the check process.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing content of the management execution process may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and the management execution process in the eighteenth embodiment. The configuration may be the same as (FIG. 79), or the same configuration as the management execution process (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

  When returning to the management process program after the execution of the management execution process, a process for returning the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the execution of the management execution process is executed. Specifically, first, as “PUSH HL”, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S6511). After execution of the push instruction, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH AF”, the information of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are stored in correspondence with the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The area and the storage area are evacuated to each storage area in the next writing order (step S6512). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an 8-bit (1 byte) information amount, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses Evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area after the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as a “POP HL”, the A register information and the flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6512 are overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6513). . In this case, the information of the A register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63, and the flag register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is changed to the L of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  After that, as “LD A, (_FGBUF)”, the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503 saved in the FG buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S6506 by the load instruction is stored in the A register of the main CPU 63. Is overwritten (step S6514). Then, as “LD L, A”, the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6515). Since the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 at the time of step S6503 is restored to the A register in step S6514, the information of the A register is overwritten on the L register by the information of the A register at the time of step S6503. The information in the flag register is overwritten.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area of the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6516). In this case, since the information of the A register at the time of step S6512 is overwritten in step S6513 in step S6513, the information of the A register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516. Become. Further, since the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503 is overwritten in step S6515 in step S6515, the information of the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516.

  After that, as “POP AF”, the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6516 are overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction ( Step S6517). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. Information on the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is information on the A register at the time of step S6512, and information on the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the flag at the time of step S6503. Register information. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the state of the A register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state of step S6512, and the state of the flag register returns to the state at the time of step S6503.

  Incidentally, the A register of the main CPU 63 is not used in the management execution process. Accordingly, the state of the A register at the time of step S6512 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6508, and the state of the A register at the time of step S6508 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the states of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are restored to the state at the time of step S6503. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  After that, as “POP HL”, the HL register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6511 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6518). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the state at the time of step S6511. When the pop instruction is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two previous.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, an interrupt permission is set (step S6519). Thereby, a new execution of the timer interrupt process can be performed.

  According to the above configuration, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is not executed by executing the process of directly overwriting the flag register information from the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the other registers of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction. Can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Instead of executing the processing of step S6505 to step S6508, instead of executing the processing of step S6504, the flag register information is overwritten by the load instruction as “LD (_FGBUF), L”. A configuration may be adopted in which the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by saving the information in the L register in the FG buffer.

  Instead of executing the processing of step S6514 and step S6515, instead of executing the processing of step S6513, a work area for specific control is obtained as “LD L, (_FGBUF)” by a load instruction. The flag register information saved in 221 may be overwritten in the L register.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the flag register information in the main RAM 65 is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process may be executed in a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of returning the flag register information saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. It may be configured to be executed.

<Thirty Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a main process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing in steps S6601 to S6621 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S6601). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S6602).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 (step S6603). If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S6603: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6604).

  Although the checksum calculation method is arbitrary, for example, there is a calculation method of adding all the numerical values of the storage area that is the checksum calculation target. This checksum calculation method is the same as the checksum calculation method in power failure processing described later. The checksum calculated in the power failure processing described later is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. The storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which this checksum is stored is calculated as a checksum. At this time, it is excluded from the storage area to be calculated.

  That is, in calculating the checksum, a part of the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is a calculation target. In the storage area to be calculated, the checksum is calculated in the power failure process when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed and the process of step S6604 is executed. Until this is done, when the power supply such as the backup power to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is continued, the information is basically not rewritten. Accordingly, the information on the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed. In this case, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the same as immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. In addition, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. )It is included.

  Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area for specific control which are calculated and stored in the work area 221 for specific control calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. The checksum for 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S6604 (step S6605). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S6606).

  Here, the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S6801 in a timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) described later.

  In the power failure information storage process, first, information “10”, which is information on the number of repetitions for a power failure signal, is set in a repetition counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6701), and the work area for specific control The power failure detection counter provided at 221 is cleared to “0” (step S6702).

  Then, the process which reads the information of the power failure signal received to the input port of MPU62 is performed (step S6703). In this case, when a power failure signal (LOW level power failure signal) corresponding to the fact that the power shutdown has not occurred is received, information of “0” is stored as non-power failure information in the input port. When a power failure signal (HI level power failure signal) corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received, information “1” is stored as power interruption occurrence information in the input port. In step S6703, the process which reads the information of this power failure signal into the register | resistor of main side CPU63 is performed.

  If the information of the power failure signal read in step S6703 corresponds to the occurrence of a power failure (power failure occurrence) (step S6704: YES), 1 is added to the numerical information of the power failure detection counter (step S6705). If a negative determination is made in step S6704 or if the processing of step S6705 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the numerical information of the repetition counter (step S6706). Then, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the repetition counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S6707). If a negative determination is made in step S6707, the process returns to step S6703 and the processes in steps S6703 to S6706 are repeated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S6707, the process proceeds to step S6708.

  In step S6708, it is determined whether the current numerical information of the power failure detection counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure. If it is less than the trigger reference number, the power failure information storage process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number is the trigger reference number or more, the power failure processing in steps S6709 to S6712 is executed.

  Specifically, first, “1” is set to a power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6709). As a result, when the power failure process is normally executed and the storage of information in the main RAM 65 is normally performed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started again for the specific control. That is, “1” is set in the power failure flag of the work area 221.

  Thereafter, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6710). In this case, the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, which are calculation targets when calculating the checksum, is a checksum calculation target in step S6604 of the main process (FIG. 100). It is the same as the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. In addition, in the storage area that is a calculation target when calculating the checksum, an area (specifically, a setting value counter) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set. )It is included. Then, the calculated checksum is stored in a storage area for storing the checksum in the work area 221 for specific control and excluded from the checksum calculation target.

  Thereafter, all the output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to “0” (step S6711), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S6712). Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  Since the power failure information storage process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process, there is no need to execute the timer interrupt process in the middle of the power recovery. As a result, it is not necessary to store the address of the process executed when the power failure occurs in the main RAM 65 as the stack information, and the processing load of the process when the power failure occurs can be reduced.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 100), when a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, a clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S6607). In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the specific control is performed except for an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. The work area 221 is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clear process at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. Further, in the clear process at the time of non-setting update, various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0” and then the initial setting is executed.

  On the other hand, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to “0” in the clear process at the time of non-setting update. As a result, even if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process is not normally executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are “0”. It becomes possible not to be cleared. In addition, even if an abnormality occurs regarding the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. It becomes possible not to be done.

  When a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, after the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S6607, the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is checked to confirm the pachinko machine. It is determined whether or not the set value of 10 is normal (step S6608). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the set value set in the set value counter is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and abnormal when it is “0” or 7 or more. Judge that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6608: NO), processing (steps S6619 to S6621) for newly setting a set value to be described later is executed. As a result, it is possible to monitor whether or not the set value is normal even when a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606 and the clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. In addition, when the set value is abnormal, it is possible to reset the set value.

  If the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), the power-on setting process is executed (step S6609). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81.

  The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is prohibited from occurring at the stage where the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S6609 is completed and the process of step S6610 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process in step S6609 is terminated, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S6610 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S6610 to S6613. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S6610 to S6613 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S6610 to S6613 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly. In steps S6610 to S6613, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if the power failure flag of the work area 221 for specific control is not set, or the checksums do not match. In this case, after executing the clear process at the time of non-setting update, if the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), the process proceeds to a process for advancing the game. As a result, even if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process has not been executed normally, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the power is turned ON / OFF again. There is no need to turn it off. Further, even if an abnormality occurs regarding the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the power supply is turned ON / OFF again after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. There is no need to operate.

  When an affirmative determination is made in both step S6603 and step S6606, it is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6614). ). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the set value set in the set value counter is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and abnormal when it is “0” or 7 or more. Judge that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6614: NO), processing (step S6619 to step S6621) for newly setting a set value to be described later is executed.

  If the set value is normal (step S6614: YES), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615), and whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key. Whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S6617), and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11. It is determined whether or not there is (step S6618).

  In the present embodiment, a front door opening sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the front door opening sensor The detection result 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, the main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is an open state.

  In the present embodiment, a main body opening sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main body opening sensor 96 detection results are input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when a closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and a gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in an open state.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S6615: NO), after executing the power-on setting process in step S6609, the remaining processes in steps S6610 to S6613 are repeated. That is, when the reset button 68c is not pressed, the process proceeds to the process for controlling the progress of the game without executing the clear process of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. .

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615: YES), and if a negative determination is made in any of steps S6616 to S6618, the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S6607). ), On condition that the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), the process proceeds to a process for controlling the progress of the game in step S6609 and thereafter. The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is as already described.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615: YES), and if a positive determination is made in all of steps S6616 to S6618, processing for updating the set value is executed. Also, when it is determined in step S6608 or step S6614 that the set value is abnormal, processing for updating the set value is executed.

  Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S6619). In the copy process, information on the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to “0” in the clear process at the time of setting update executed thereafter (step S6620), the main data before the clear process at the time of update of the set value is executed It becomes possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

  Thereafter, a clear process at the time of setting update is executed (step S6620). In the clear process at the time of setting update, the work area 221 for specific control is set to “0” except for the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode in the work area 221 for specific control is the high probability mode and the copy area. Clear and execute the initial setting. As a result, the game times are not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed. It becomes a certain situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the clear process at the time of setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. In the clear process at the time of setting update, the set value counter used for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to “0”. In the clear process at the time of setting update, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0” and then the initial setting is executed.

  On the other hand, the clearing process at the time of setting update does not clear “0” in the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Can be maintained in the mode before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to “0” in the clear process at the time of setting update, the set value set before the clear process at the time of setting update is executed can be specified thereafter. Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may not be cleared to “0” in the clear process at the time of setting update. In the clearing process, an area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode may be cleared to “0”.

  In the clear process at the time of setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thereby, even if the set value update process capable of changing the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. It becomes possible to do so.

  Thereafter, a setting value update process is executed in step S6621. The processing content of the set value update process is the same as the set value update process (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. After executing the set value update process, the process proceeds to a process for controlling the progress of the game after step S6609.

  According to the above configuration, when the set value is abnormal, the set value update process is started without requiring a special operation by the manager of the game hall. Then, when the set value update process is completed, the process proceeds to a process for controlling the progress of the game. This makes it possible to play a game in a situation where the normal set value is set. On the other hand, in order to complete the set value update process, it is necessary to perform an OFF operation with the set key on the set key insertion unit 68a. Therefore, a set value is arbitrarily set by a person other than the manager of the game hall and the game is started. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that occurs.

  Next, a description will be given of a configuration for forcibly stopping the progress of the game when the main CPU 63 cannot perform various processes normally. FIG. 102A is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU 62.

  As shown in FIG. 102A, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65, as well as a reset signal output unit 251 and a program monitoring unit 252. The reset signal output unit 251 has a function of outputting a reset signal to the main CPU 63. Specifically, the reset signal output unit 251 outputs the reset signal as the HI level signal when the operating power is supplied from the power source / launch control device 78 and the output disable condition is not satisfied. When the operating power is not supplied from the power source / launch control device 78 or when the operating power is not supplied even if the operating power is not satisfied, the reset signal is sent to the main CPU 63. Is not output. The main CPU 63 executes various processes when the operating power is supplied from the power / fire control device 78 and receives the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251, and Even when operating power is supplied, if the reset signal is not received from the reset signal output unit 251, various processes are not executed. Further, when the main CPU 63 is switched from a situation in which no reset signal is received from the reset signal output unit 251 to a situation in which a reset signal is received when operating power is supplied from the power supply / launch control device 78. The main process (FIG. 100) is started.

  The program monitoring unit 252 has a function of monitoring whether or not the main CPU 63 can perform various processes normally. Specifically, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether or not the value of the program counter provided in the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value. The program counter is for storing an address where an instruction to be executed in the main CPU 63 is stored. A possible value is determined for the program counter, and the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter is a value other than the possible value. Further, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether or not the address designated as the writing destination area is an abnormal address when information is written in the work area 221 for specific control by the load instruction. The program monitoring unit 252 may be configured to monitor whether or not the address designated as the area to be read is an abnormal address when information is read from the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction.

  When the program monitoring unit 252 determines that the value of the program counter is an abnormal value, or when it is determined that the address specified when writing information by a load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251 A monitoring error signal is output to. When the reset signal output unit 251 receives a monitoring abnormality signal from the program monitoring unit 252, the reset signal output unit 251 temporarily stops the output of the reset signal even when operating power is supplied from the power supply / launch control device 78, and continues to stop. After stopping the output of the reset signal over a period, the output of the reset signal is restarted. The stop continuation period is a period sufficient for the main CPU 63 to specify that the output of the reset signal is stopped. As a result, when the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value, or when the address specified when writing information by the load instruction becomes an abnormal address, the main CPU 63 passes through the reset signal OFF / ON. The main process is executed at

  FIG. 102B is a time chart showing how the reset signal output unit 251 outputs a reset signal. FIG. 102 (b1) shows a period during which operating power is supplied from the power supply / emission control device 78, FIG. 102 (b2) shows a period during which a reset signal is output from the reset signal output unit 251, and FIG. b3) indicates the timing at which a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252.

  First, the case where a monitoring abnormality signal is not output from the program monitoring unit 252 will be described. At the timing t1, supply of operating power from the power supply / launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is started as shown in FIG. 102 (b1). , T2 starts to output a reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the supply of operating power from the power supply / launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 102 (b1), so that the reset is performed at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. The output of the reset signal from the signal output unit 251 is stopped.

  Next, the case where a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 will be described. At the timing t5, as shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102B, the reset signal output unit 251 starts outputting the reset signal at the timing t6. Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the program counter value becomes an abnormal value, or the address designated when information is written by the load instruction becomes an abnormal address, so that the program monitoring is performed as shown in FIG. A monitoring abnormality signal is output from the unit 252 to the reset signal output unit 251. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102 (b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is temporarily stopped at the timing of t7 and restarted at the timing of t8 thereafter.

  In this case, the main CPU 63 stops the execution of various processes at the timing of t7, and starts the main process (FIG. 100) at the timing of t8, which is the timing when the rising edge of the reset signal is confirmed. However, since the power failure process is not executed when the execution of the various processes of the main CPU 63 is stopped, the main process (FIG. 100) is performed in a situation where the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set. Is started, and the main process (FIG. 100) is started without storing the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. Therefore, in the main process (FIG. 100), a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, and a clear process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed. As a result, when the monitoring error signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 because the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address specified when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, It is possible to execute a clear process at the time of non-setting update in which a predetermined storage area of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. .

  However, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to “0” in the clear process at the time of non-setting update. As a result, even if a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 due to an abnormal value of the program counter value or an address specified when information is written by a load instruction, It is possible to prevent the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to “0”.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 102 (b), the supply of operating power from the power supply / launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped at the timing t10 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 102 (b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is stopped.

  Next, timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds) in a state where the processes of steps S6610 to S6613 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 100). Note that the program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  In steps S6801 to S6819, the same processing as steps S5201 to S5219 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86) in the twenty-second embodiment is executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. Thereafter, a setting monitoring process is executed (step S6820). FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring process.

  It is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6901). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the set value set in the set value counter is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and abnormal when it is “0” or 7 or more. Judge that there is.

  If the set value is abnormal (step S6901: NO), first, a set value copy process is executed (step S6902). In the copy process, information on the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the execution of the set value update process executed thereafter.

  Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality of the set value has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S6903). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the set value abnormality, and a sound “The set value abnormality has been detected” is output from the speaker unit 54. Output. In addition, a character image “Setting value abnormality detected” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that a set value abnormality has occurred.

  Thereafter, a set value update process is executed (step S6904). In other words, every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is executed, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value. The set value update process is executed to The processing content of the set value update process is the same as the set value update process (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. Accordingly, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated one step at a time, and the set value being selected is determined by detecting the game ball with the out port detection sensor 48a. The setting value in the middle of updating and the determined setting value are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Thereafter, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the end condition of the setting value update process is satisfied. After executing the set value update process, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103).

  Here, in the setting value update process, it is not determined that the end condition is satisfied only by the setting key insertion unit 68a being in the OFF state, and the setting key insertion unit 68a switches from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined that the end condition is satisfied. When the setting value updating process is executed in the setting monitoring process, the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value updating process, so that the end condition of the setting value updating process is satisfied. Needs to be turned OFF after the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and once turned ON. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending even though a regular operation by the game hall manager is not performed.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the end condition of the set value update process is satisfied, step S5111 in the set value update process (FIG. 85) is executed. It is compared whether or not the set value stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control and the set value set this time in the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control are the same. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value set before the set value update process (step S6904) is executed and the set value set in the current set value update process are the same. When both set values are the same (step S5112: NO), the already-described setting maintenance notification is performed by executing the non-change notification process (step S5113). On the other hand, when the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the already-described setting change notification is performed by executing the notification process at the time of change (step S5114).

  In a configuration in which a set value update process is executed when a set value abnormality has occurred, the set value set before the set value update process is executed and the set value update process are set. If the set value is the same, the setting maintenance notification is performed. As a result, even if the setting value update process is executed due to the setting value abnormality, the setting maintenance notification is performed by resetting the setting value set in the previous situation, and the setting value update due to the setting value abnormality is performed. Even if the process is executed, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the set value has not changed. By the way, since it is common to record the set values of each installed pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, it is possible to execute a set value update process due to a set value abnormality so as to be the recorded set value. Is possible.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), after executing the setting monitoring process in step S6820, the management process is executed in step S6821. When executing the management process, a subroutine program corresponding to the management process set in the specific control program is executed. When executing the subroutine program, after executing the management process The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing at is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the management process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S7001 to S7005 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), an interrupt prohibition is set (step S7001). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  Then, as “LD (_PSWBUF), PSW”, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction (step S7002). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of the arithmetic instruction, rotate instruction, input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before the subroutine is changed or changed after the subroutine is started is saved. Information can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S7003). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management execution process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the management process program after the execution of the management execution process, “LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)” is saved in the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S7002 as a load instruction. The flag register information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7004). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7002 was executed last time. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, an interrupt permission is set (step S7005). Thereby, a new execution of the timer interrupt process can be performed.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S7101 to S7116 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  In steps S7101 to S7108 and S71010 to S7116, the same processes as those in steps S4501 to S4515 of the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment are executed. In step S7109, another monitoring process is executed. When executing the separate monitoring process, a subroutine program corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the subroutine program, after executing the separate monitoring process Information for specifying the return address of the management execution process is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command. When the separate monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. Note that the processing in steps S7201 to S7206 in the separate monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  In the separate monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process being executed in the non-specific control program exceeds the normal numerical value range (step S7201). The information stored in the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is clearly abnormal information. It is determined whether or not (step S7202). For example, in the normal counter area 231, if the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is 1000 or more even though the value of the normal out counter 231e is “0”, it is determined as abnormal. Further, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is clearly abnormal information (step S7203). For example, when any of the 62nd to 64th parameters is not “0” even though the 61st parameter is “0”, it is determined as abnormal.

  If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S7201 to S7203, it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and a partial clear process for the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. (Step S7204). In the partial clear process, the storage area other than the management start flag is cleared to “0” in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to “0”. Thereby, it becomes possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  In addition, by not clearing the management start flag to “0”, it becomes possible to maintain the state where “1” is already set in the management start flag, and the pachinko machine 10 has already continued in the game hall. In spite of being used, it is possible to prevent regulation of the shipment stage of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the collection of history information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In step S7204, the entire work area 223 for non-specific control including the management start flag may be cleared to “0”.

  In step S7204, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to “0”. In the non-specific control stack area 224, information on various registers used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved in steps S7102 to S7107 in the management execution processing (FIG. 106). In this case, by not clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to “0”, information on various registers used in processing corresponding to this specific control, which is a stack area for non-specific control It is possible to prevent the information saved in 224 from being erased. The non-specific control stack area 224 stores information on the return address of the management execution process (FIG. 106) after the separate monitoring process ends. By not clearing, it is possible to prevent the information of this return address from being erased.

  Thereafter, initial setting processing is executed (step S7205). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area that is the target of “0” clear in step S7204 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, a clear notification process is executed (step S7206). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and “history information is forcibly cleared from the speaker unit 54. Sound is output. In addition, a character image “history information has been forcibly cleared” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in all of steps S7201 to S7203, or if the process of step S7206 is executed, the separate monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the monitoring execution process (FIG. 106).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the program monitoring unit 252 specifies that the address specified when writing information by the load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, thereby causing the main CPU 63. Then, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed in the same manner as when the supply of operating power is newly started. When the reset signal is turned OFF → ON, “1” is not set in the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control, and the checksum at the time of power failure is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since it is not performed, the clear process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is forcibly executed. In the clear process at the time of non-setting update, the storage area other than the storage area in which the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” and the stack area 222 for specific control is “ “0” is cleared, and further, initial setting processing of these areas is executed. As a result, when there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred regarding the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are displayed. On the other hand, by executing the “0” clear process and the initial setting process, the information abnormality can be resolved.

  When the program monitoring unit 252 determines that the value of the program counter of the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value, the reset signal output unit 251 switches the reset signal from OFF to ON, thereby causing the main CPU 63 to reduce the operating power. The main process (FIG. 100) is executed in the same manner as when the supply is newly started. When the reset signal is turned OFF → ON, “1” is not set in the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control, and the checksum at the time of power failure is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since it is not performed, the clear process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is forcibly executed. In the non-setting update clear process, the internal storage area of the main CPU 63 including various registers is cleared to “0” and the initial setting process is executed. As a result, when there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred with respect to the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the "0" clear and initial setting process are executed for the internal storage area of the main CPU 63. It is possible to eliminate the information abnormality.

  On the other hand, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to “0” in the clear process at the time of non-setting update. As a result, “0” is cleared with respect to the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the work area 221 for specific control, and the stack area 222 for specific control because the information abnormality is specified in the program monitoring unit 252 as described above. Even if the initial setting process is executed, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being erased and to prevent the game history management result information from being erased. It becomes possible to do.

  If the power failure flag is not set to “1” in the main process (FIG. 100) when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, or if the checksums do not match, clear at non-setting update In the configuration in which the process (step S6607) is executed, when the occurrence of an information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252, "1" is not set in the power failure flag by turning the reset signal from OFF to ON At the same time, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed in a situation where the checksum is not stored. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality identified by the program monitoring unit 252 by using a configuration for eliminating the information abnormality at the start of supply of operating power.

  In the configuration in which whether or not the checksum is normal is monitored in the main process (FIG. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the checksum calculation target is for specific control. The work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control are included, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not included. Thereby, it is possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65.

  When it is specified that the checksum is abnormal in the main process (FIG. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, a clear process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed. However, in the clear process at the time of non-setting update, a process of clearing “0” and an initial setting process are executed in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, the process of clearing “0” is not executed in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This prevents the processing corresponding to the specific control from being continuously executed in the state as it is despite the occurrence of information abnormality in the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control. “0” is cleared to the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control of the main RAM 65 triggered by the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible not to be.

  In the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 101) (steps S6709 to S6712), the checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. No checksum is calculated for the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing period required for completing the power failure process from becoming excessively long.

  Corresponding to non-specific control when occurrence of abnormality is specified for information stored in work area 223 for non-specific control in another monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control In the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) that is to be performed, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting process is executed. As a result, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed in a state where the information of the work area 223 for non-specific control is retained as it is even though some abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Further, the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to “0” and the process of initial setting are executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from intervening.

  In another monitoring process (FIG. 107) that is a process corresponding to non-specific control, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed, and when an abnormality has occurred The process for clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to “0” and the process for initial setting are executed. As a result, a series of processes in the process corresponding to the non-specific control includes monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and executing the initialization of the work area 223 for non-specific control. Can be executed as

  When the occurrence of an abnormality is specified for the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in another monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, Although the process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting are executed for the work area 223, the process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting are not executed for the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and information on various registers used in the processing corresponding to the specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and separate management. It is possible to prevent the return address information from being deleted after the processing is completed.

  The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to “0” and initial setting is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to “0”. The process of clearing and initial setting is executed in a process corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, regarding such initialization processing, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are handled as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to specific control, and for non-specific control. The work area 223 can be handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  In the main process (FIG. 100), it is configured to monitor whether or not the set value is normal in steps S6608 and S6614. However, the process for monitoring whether or not these set values are normal is performed. It is good also as a structure which is not performed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the process at the start of the supply of operating power that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In addition, even if the setting value is not normally monitored in the process at the start of supply of operating power in this way, the timer interrupt that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed In the setting monitoring process (step S6820) of the process (FIG. 103), it is monitored whether or not the setting value is normal. Therefore, if the setting value is abnormal, it can be dealt with.

  Further, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is not limited to a configuration that is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is started. The configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is executed every time the number of times (for example, 10,000 times) is executed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the monitoring while periodically monitoring whether or not the set value is normal.

  The setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed in the remaining process (steps S6610 to S6613) in the main process (FIG. 100). In this case, it is possible to monitor whether or not the set value is normal using the idle time when the timer interrupt process is not executed.

  Further, the configuration monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed when a game round is newly started. More specifically, the configuration monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed before the success / failure determination process is executed when a game round is newly started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the determination process from being executed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

  When the setting monitoring process (step S6820) specifies that the set value is abnormal, the setting control process area 221 is provided in place of the configuration for shifting to the set value update process (step S6904). The game stop flag may be set to “1”. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S6807 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), the process from step S6808 to step S6821 is not executed, so that the progress of the game is stopped when the set value is abnormal. It becomes. However, since the processing of step S6801 to step S6806 is executed, power failure monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated. Fraud detection is performed. In addition, when “1” is set in the game stop flag, a notification indicating that the setting value should be updated may be executed to prompt the execution of the setting value update process. In this case, the game hall administrator who has confirmed the notification performs the power-off operation after the power-off operation, and the game stop flag is cleared to “0”. Thus, the state where the progress of the game is stopped is released, and the set value update process is executed to set a normal set value.

  When the setting monitoring process (step S6820) specifies that the setting value is abnormal, the main process (with the setting abnormality flag set in the work area 221 for specific control set to “1”) (FIG. 100) may be configured, and in order to stop the progress of the game with the setting abnormality flag set to “1” and release the state where the progress of the game is stopped, the power is turned off → It is good also as a structure which needs ON. In this case, even if an operation for causing the set value update process to be executed is not performed in the main process (FIG. 100), the setting is forcibly set when “1” is set in the setting abnormality flag. By executing the value update process, it is possible to force a new setting value to be set using the set value update process set in the main process (FIG. 100).

  In addition, when the occurrence of an information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252 and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, initialization processing is performed on the work area 221 for specific control. The setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may be “setting 1”. In addition, when the occurrence of an information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252 and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, the setting is performed after the initialization process is executed for the work area 221 for specific control. The value update process may be executed.

  In addition, when the occurrence of an information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252, the reset signal is not forcibly turned OFF → ON, and the clear process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the clear process at the time of setting update (step S6620) and the set value update process (step S6621) are executed.

  Further, in the clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “setting 1” by initializing the storage area for storing the setting value information in the work area 221 for specific control. It is good also as a structure and it is good also as a structure used as predetermined setting values other than "setting 1". Thereby, when the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed, it becomes possible to set a predetermined set value.

  Further, in the non-setting update clear process (step S6607), the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to “0”, but may be configured to be cleared to “0”. Good.

  Further, in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the management start flag is not cleared to “0”, but the management start flag may be cleared to “0”. In step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to “0”. The configuration may be such that 234 is not cleared to “0”.

  In step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the “0” clear process and the initial setting process are executed not only for the work area 223 for non-specific control but also for the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is good also as a structure. In this case, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, it is used in the processing corresponding to the specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and the information on the return address of the management execution process after the completion of the separate monitoring process. It is preferable not to erase the information in various registers.

  In another monitoring process (FIG. 107), it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the non-specific control stack area 224. The stack area 224 may be configured to execute “0” clear processing and initial setting processing. In this case, it is preferable not to delete the return address information of the management execution process after the completion of the separate monitoring process in the non-specific control stack area 224.

  The specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are not limited to the configuration in which the checksum is calculated, and only the specific control work area 221 is the checksum calculation target. Alternatively, only the stack area 222 for specific control may be a checksum calculation target.

<Thirty-first embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirtieth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirtieth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirtieth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, the process of step S7301-step S7322 in a main process is performed using the program for specific control in the main side CPU63, and the data for specific control.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S7301). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S7302).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 (step S7303). When “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S7303: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7304). The checksum calculation method is the same as that in step S6604 of the main process (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment.

  Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated and stored in the work area 221 for specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7304 (step S7305). Then, it is determined whether or not these checksums match (step S7306).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7306, the processing in steps S7307 to S7320 is executed. In this case, the processing contents of steps S7307 to S7314 are the same as steps S6614 to S6621 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment, and steps S7316 to S7320 are the main processing in the thirtieth embodiment. This is the same as steps S6609 to S6613 of the process (FIG. 100).

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7308: YES), but a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, a clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S7308: YES) S7315). The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is the same as step S6607 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, after executing the clear process at the time of non-setting update, the process proceeds to steps S7316 to S7320 without determining whether or not the set value is normal. Only when a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, the clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S7315) is executed, but before the processes of steps S7309 to S7311 are executed. Since it is determined whether or not the set value is normal in step S7307, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the set value is normal after executing the clear process at the time of non-setting update.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7303 or step S7306, that is, if the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" or if a checksum abnormality occurs, clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (Step S7321). FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a clear process at the time of abnormality. Note that the processing in steps S7401 to S7405 in the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, clear processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7401). In the clear process, the work area for specific control except the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. 221 is cleared to “0” and initial setting is performed for the area where “0” is cleared. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted.

  Thereafter, clear processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S7402). In the clear processing, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is performed.

  Thereafter, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by “push instruction” as “PUSH PSW” (step S7403). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of the arithmetic instruction, rotate instruction, input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the clear processing for non-specific control is started, the flag in the state before changing after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started It is possible to save the register information in the stack area 222 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

  Thereafter, the non-specific control clear process is started by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific control clear process set in the non-specific control program (step S7404). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the clear process at the time of abnormality after execution of the non-specific control clear process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the clear process for non-specific control is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the clear process program at the time of abnormality indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the program of the clear process at the time of abnormality after executing the clear process for non-specific control, the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S7402 as a “POP PSW” by the pop instruction Is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7405). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7402 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a clear process for non-specific control. Note that the processing in steps S7501 to S7516 in the clear processing for non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  First, as “LD SP, Y (u + 2)”, Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S7501). In this case, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, information on the last address in the non-specific control stack area 224 is set in the stack pointer.

  After that, as “LD (_WABUF), WA”, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7502). Also, as “LD (_BCBUF), BC”, the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7503). Further, as “LD (_DEBUF), DE”, the DE register information of the main CPU 63 is saved in the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7504). Also, as “LD (_HLBUF), HL”, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7505). Also, as “LD (_IXBUF), IX”, the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7506). Further, as “LD (_IYBUF), IY”, the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7507).

  The general-purpose CPU 63 has various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers described above. In this case, in steps S7502 to S7507, information on each of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Are saved in a corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The amount of information in each of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is 2 bytes.

  The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are partially cleared (step S7508) and initial setting process (step S7508) in the work area 223 for non-specific control, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. This is the register used in step S7509). The information set in such a register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the partial clear process (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By doing so, it is possible to save the information of these registers used in the specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is restored to these registers, so that the state of these registers is restored. Can be returned to a state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Further, instead of saving all the information in the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the non-specific control work area 223, the non-specific control work area 223 is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Information for WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register to be used in partial clear processing (step S7508) and initial setting processing (step S7509) is selectively used for non-specific control. By retreating to the work area 223, it is possible to suppress the capacity reserved for retreating register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Therefore, while ensuring a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that can be used in the partial clear process (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control, Such register information can be saved. Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information set before the process to start is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

  In addition, the register information is not saved in the non-specific control stack area 224, but is saved in the non-specific control work area 223, thereby reducing the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224. It becomes possible. Further, when using the non-specific control stack area 224, the information writing order is read first from the later information as already described, and therefore the information reading order is shifted due to some noise or the like. If this happens, all of the subsequent reading order information will be restored to a different register. The occurrence probability of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-described event from occurring even when there is a lot of information to be saved. .

  After executing the processing of step S7502 to step S7507, partial clear processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7508). In the partial clear processing, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the storage areas other than the storage area where the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved Is cleared to “0”. Specifically, among the storage areas of the non-specific control work area 223, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer are not cleared to “0”, but other than these various buffers are stored. Clear the area to “0”.

  In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are cleared to “0”. Thereby, it becomes possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Further, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed by not clearing “0” the storage area where the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control can be returned to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  In step S7508, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to “0”. The non-specific control stack area 224 stores information on the return address of the clear processing (FIG. 109) at the time of abnormality after the non-specific control clear processing is completed. By preventing 224 from being cleared to “0”, it is possible to prevent the information at this return address from being erased.

  Thereafter, an initial setting process is executed (step S7509). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area that is the target of “0” clear in step S7508 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  After that, as “LD SP, Y (r + α)”, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is returned to the specific control by the load instruction, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Y (r + α) is set as a fixed address at the time (step S7510). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as “LD WA, (_WABUF)”, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7511). In addition, as “LD BC, (_BCBUF)”, the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7512). Also, as “LD DE, (_DEBUF)”, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7513). Further, as “LD HL, (_HLBUF)”, the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7514). Further, as “LD IX, (_IXBUF)”, the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7515). Further, as “LD IY, (_IYBUF)”, the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7516). By executing the processing of step S7511 to step S7516, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before starting.

  According to the above configuration, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” in the main process (FIG. 108) executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, or the checksum is abnormal. In some cases, the clear process at the time of abnormality (step S7321) is executed, so that not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control is “0”. Cleared and initialized. If an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control, there may be an information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The work area 223 is also initialized so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is not executed in the state as it is even though the information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for the non-specific control. It becomes possible to do.

  Even when the process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting are executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control in the clear process at the time of abnormality (step S7321), the work area for non-specific control Information of various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the H.223 is not cleared to “0”. As a result, the process of clearing “0” to the work area 223 for non-specific control while not erasing the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. In addition, it is possible to execute initialization processing.

  Even when the process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting are executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control in the clear process at the time of abnormality (step S7321), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed. The process for clearing “0” and the process for initial setting are not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the information of the return address from being deleted after the non-specific control clear process (FIG. 110) is completed.

  The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to “0” and the process of initial setting are executed in a process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is designated as “ The process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting are executed in a process corresponding to non-specific control. Accordingly, regarding the process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to the specific control, and non- The work area 223 for specific control can be handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  The specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are not limited to the configuration in which the checksum calculation target is included, and only the specific control work area 221 is the checksum calculation target. Alternatively, only the stack area 222 for specific control may be a checksum calculation target.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the work area 223 for non-specific control is a checksum calculation target. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be a checksum calculation target, and the stack area 222 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are checked. The configuration may be a sum calculation target, or the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control work area 223 may be a check sum calculation target.

  The stack area 224 for non-specific control may be a checksum calculation target. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be subject to checksum calculation, and the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are checked. The configuration may be a sum calculation target, or the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be a check sum calculation target.

  The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be a checksum calculation target. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be a checksum calculation target. The specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be a checksum calculation target. The specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be used. The work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be a checksum calculation target.

  In step S7508 and step S7509 in the non-specific control clear process (FIG. 110), not only the non-specific control work area 223 but also the non-specific control stack area 224 is cleared. The initial setting process may be executed. In this case, it is preferable not to delete the return address information of the clear process at the time of abnormality after the completion of the clear process for non-specific control.

  Further, in step S7508 in the clear process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the management start flag is cleared to “0”, but the management start flag may not be cleared to “0”. In step S7508 in the non-specific control clear process (FIG. 110), the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to “0”. The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”.

<Thirty-second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration relating to monitoring of information abnormality in the main RAM 65 using a checksum is different from that in the thirtieth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirtieth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirtieth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the power failure information storage process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103). In addition, the processes in steps S7601 to S7613 in the power failure information storage process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  In steps S7601 to S7608 in the power failure information storage process, the same processes as steps S6701 to S6708 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 101) in the 30th embodiment are executed. When the occurrence of a power failure is specified, an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, and the power failure process in steps S7609 to S7613 is executed.

  Specifically, first, “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7609). As a result, when the power failure process is normally executed and the storage of information in the main RAM 65 is normally performed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started again for the specific control. That is, “1” is set in the power failure flag of the work area 221.

  Thereafter, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7610). In this case, the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, which are calculation targets when calculating the checksum for specific control, is stored in step S7701 of checksum monitoring processing (FIG. 112) described later. These are the same as the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control that are the targets of calculation of the checksum for specific control. Further, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum for specific control, an area (specifically, information on setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set). Includes a set value counter). The calculated checksum for specific control is a storage area for storing the checksum for specific control in the work area 221 for specific control, and is excluded from the calculation target of the checksum for specific control. Store in the storage area.

  Thereafter, a checksum is calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7611). In this case, the storage areas in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224, which are calculation targets when calculating the check sum for non-specific control, checksum monitoring processing described later (FIG. 112) This is the same as the storage area in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which is the calculation target of the check sum for non-specific control in step S7706. The calculated checksum for non-specific control is a storage area for storing the checksum for non-specific control in the work area 221 for specific control, and is excluded from the calculation target of the checksum for specific control. Stored in the storage area.

  Thereafter, all the output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to “0” (step S7612), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S7613). Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  Next, a checksum monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the checksum monitoring process is executed instead of steps S6604 to S6066 in the main process (FIG. 100). In addition, the processes in steps S7701 to S7711 in the checksum monitoring process are executed in the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, a checksum for specific control is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7701). The calculation method of the checksum for specific control is the same as that in step S7610 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 111). After that, the specific control checksum calculated in step S7610 of the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is specified. While reading from the control work area 221, the read checksum for specific control is compared with the checksum for specific control calculated in step S7701 (step S7702). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums for specific control match (step S7703).

  If the checksums for specific control do not match (step S7703: NO). Clear processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7704). In the clear process, the work area for the specific control, except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control. 221 is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the clear process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0”, and then the initial setting is executed. Further, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed (step S7705).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, or if the processing in step S7705 is executed, a checksum for nonspecific control is calculated for the work area 223 for nonspecific control and the stack area 224 for nonspecific control (step S7706). The checksum calculation method for non-specific control is the same as that in step S7611 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 111). Thereafter, the checksum for non-specific control calculated in step S7611 of the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for specific control is stored. While reading from the work area 221 for specific control, the read checksum for non-specific control is compared with the check sum for non-specific control calculated in step S7706 (step S7707). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums for non-specific control match (step S7708).

  If the checksums for non-specific control do not match (step S7708: NO), the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the specific control stack area 222 as a “PUSH PSW” by a push command ( Step S7709). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of the arithmetic instruction, rotate instruction, input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the clear processing for non-specific control is started, the flag in the state before changing after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started It is possible to save the register information in the stack area 222 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

  Thereafter, the non-specific control clear process is started by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific control clear process set in the non-specific control program (step S7710). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the checksum monitoring process after execution of the non-specific control clear process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the clear process for non-specific control is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the checksum monitoring process program indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the program of the clear process at the time of abnormality after executing the clear process for non-specific control, the flag register saved as “POP PSW” in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S7709 as a pop instruction Is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7711). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7709 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a clear process for non-specific control. Note that the processing in steps S7801 to S7818 in the clear processing for non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

  In steps S7801 to S7807 in the non-specific control clear process, the same processes as steps S7501 to S7507 in the non-specific control clear process (FIG. 110) in the thirty-first embodiment are executed.

  Thereafter, a partial clear process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7808). In the partial clear processing, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the storage areas other than the storage area where the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved Is cleared to “0”. Specifically, among the storage areas of the non-specific control work area 223, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer are not cleared to “0”, but other than these various buffers are stored. Clear the area to “0”.

  In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are cleared to “0”. Thereby, it becomes possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Further, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed by not clearing “0” the storage area where the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control can be returned to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, initial setting processing is executed (step S7809). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area that is the target of clearing “0” in step S7808 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, a partial clear process of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S7810). In the partial clear process, information on the return address of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) after the non-specific control clear process is completed is stored in each storage area of the non-specific control stack area 224. “0” is cleared in storage areas other than the storage area. As a result, the information on the return address in the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) after the non-specific control clear process is completed is not erased, and the information abnormality in the non-specific control stack area 224 is detected. Can be eliminated.

  Thereafter, an initial setting process is executed (step S7811). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area that is the target of “0” clear in step S7810 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, the processing of step S7812 to step S7818 is executed. The processes in steps S7812 to S7818 execute the same processes as steps S7510 to S7516 in the clear process for non-specific control (FIG. 110) in the thirty-first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and the checksum for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control Calculated individually. As a result, it is possible to individually specify information abnormality for each of the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 and the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control in the main RAM 65.

  If there is an abnormality in the checksum for specific control, “0” clear processing and initial setting processing are executed for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and for non-specific control If there is an abnormality in the checksum, “0” clear processing and initial setting processing are executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, it is possible to narrow down the targets for executing the “0” clearing process and the initial setting process to the area where the checksum abnormality is specified.

  The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to “0” and the process of initial setting are executed in a process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is designated as “ The process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting are executed in a process corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, regarding the process of clearing “0” and the initial setting process, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are handled as dedicated storage areas for processes corresponding to the specific control, and are not specified. The control work area 223 can be handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  In step S7808 in the clear process for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the management start flag is cleared to “0”, but the management start flag may not be cleared to “0”. In step S7808 in the clear process for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to “0”. The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”.

<Thirty-third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S7901 to step S7924 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S7901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. In addition, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S7902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds). And the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and started with respect to the main process, is a second interrupt period that is shorter than the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 2 milliseconds).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist so that the interrupt cycle is relatively short as the timer interrupt process. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process is not started by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. Further, when both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing are not executed, the second timer interrupt processing is performed regardless of the elapsed order of the cycles. It is started first from timer interrupt processing. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process activated in preference to the first timer interrupt process.

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63 To do. In addition, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, the setting process of numerical ranges of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set to the startup processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7903). The startup process flag indicates that the first timer interrupt process should be terminated without executing the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process even if the first timer interrupt process is started. Is a flag for specifying the main CPU 63. By setting “1” to the startup processing in progress flag, even if the first timer interrupt process is started, the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process are not executed. Timer interrupt processing will be terminated.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S7904). Thus, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. However, since “1” is set in the startup process flag in step S7903, even if the first timer interrupt process is started, various processes set in the first timer interrupt process are executed. The first timer interrupt process is terminated without any processing.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7905). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S7905: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7906). When a power failure process is executed in a power failure information storage process (step S8202) of a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later, “1” is set to the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing has been appropriately performed at the time of the previous power shutdown.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S7906: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7907). The checksum calculation method is arbitrary, but the same calculation method as that used when the checksum is calculated in the power failure information storage process (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later. It has become a method. The checksum calculated in the power failure process is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. The storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which the checksum is stored is used when the checksum is calculated. It is excluded from the storage area to be calculated.

  In other words, when calculating the checksum, the storage area that is a calculation target in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is a calculation target. In the storage area to be calculated, the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed after the checksum is calculated in the power failure process when the operating power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, and the process of step S7907 is executed. Until this is done, when the power supply such as the backup power to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is continued, the information is basically not rewritten. Accordingly, the information on the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed. In this case, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the same as immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. In addition, in the storage area that is a calculation target when calculating the checksum, an area (specifically, a setting value counter) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set. )It is included. The checksum calculation target does not include the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated and stored in the work area 221 for specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7907 (step S7908). Then, it is determined whether or not these checksums match (step S7909).

  When a negative determination is made in step S7906 or S7909, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step S7910). The game stop flag makes a positive determination in step S8207 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later and stops executing the process of steps S8208 to S8221, that is, the process for proceeding with the game. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation should be. By setting “1” to the game stop flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later, so that the process of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the progress of the game is stopped and for the specific control. If at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control does not match the checksum due to a change in the storage state of information since the last power-off, the progress of the game is stopped It becomes a state.

  In this case, in the storage area to be calculated when the checksum is calculated, the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above (specifically, Set value counter). Therefore, if the set value abnormality has occurred after the previous power-off, the checksums do not match, and the progress of the game is stopped.

  On the other hand, even in a situation where the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing from step S8202 to step S8206 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) is executed. Therefore, even if the progress of the game is stopped, the power failure monitoring is performed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated. Fraud detection is performed.

  Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S7911). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change setting” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is issued when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (step S7918) is executed. It is good also as a structure continued.

  The manager of the game hall who confirmed the notification in the situation where the progress of the game is stopped temporarily stops the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 and then restarts the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 In order to execute the setting value, an operation for executing the set value update process (step S7918) is performed. As a result, when an abnormality occurs regarding the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of supply of operating power, a new setting value can be set in the setting value update process (step S7918). .

  In particular, as described above, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, an area (specifically, a set value) in which set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above. Counter), if there is an abnormality in the checksum, there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the set value. On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs with respect to the checksum as described above, the execution of the set value update process (step S7918) is prompted to prevent the game from being played with the abnormal set value. It becomes possible to do.

  When “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal (step S7906 and step S7909: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key. Then, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S7913). Whether the front door frame 14 is open or not with respect to the inner frame 13 is detected using the front door opening sensor 95 in the same manner as in the thirtieth embodiment, and the gaming machine main body 12 is The main body opening sensor 96 is used for detecting whether or not the body is in the open state, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S7912: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body with respect to the outer frame 11 When 12 is in an open state (step S7913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S7914). In the setting confirmation process, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 used for displaying various parameters that are management results of the game history. The process for performing the display indicating the current status and the display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processing in steps S8001 to S8003 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, “1” is set to the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8001). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed. When “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag, the corresponding display control is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described later. Is called. Thereby, the display which shows the present setting value of the pachinko machine 10, and the display which shows the present setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notifications. Is done.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF using the setting key (step S8002). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state. If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned OFF (step S8002: NO), the process of step S8002 is repeated as it is.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF (step S8002: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S8003). Thereby, the display which shows the present setting value of the pachinko machine 10, and the display which shows the present setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notifications. Is released. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the management result of the game history.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the power on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state in which the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, thereby operating power to the main CPU 63. When the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on in the situation where the supply of the game is started and the main process is started, the process that allows the game to proceed in the main process is performed. The setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power, which is the situation before execution, is being executed. This makes it possible to check the set value in a situation where no game is played.

  Assuming the case where the set value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game is continued, for example, when the set value is confirmed during the execution of the game round, the set value is being confirmed. May cause the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be launched toward the special electricity prize winning device 32 in spite of the opening / closing execution mode being started. In addition, when the setting value is confirmed during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode proceeds in a situation where the setting value is being confirmed. There is a possibility that the game ball cannot be launched toward the.

  Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when the set value is confirmed, the progress of the game is stopped halfway when the confirmation of the set value is started in the situation where the game is being performed. There is a risk that the processing will be complicated. For example, if the confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of execution of a game and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game, a process for stopping the game is required. In this case, when the confirmation of the set value is started, the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is stopped halfway, and when the confirmation of the set value is completed, the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is resumed. Attempting to do so requires complicated processing. Further, for example, if the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode and the progress of the game is to be stopped halfway, a process for stopping the opening / closing execution mode is required. In addition, when the confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of the execution of the variation display of the picture in the normal map display unit 38a and the progress of the game is stopped halfway, a process for stopping the variation display of the pattern is performed. Necessary. In addition, if the confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of the execution of the open execution state of the power utility 34a and the progress of the game is stopped in the middle, a process for stopping the release execution state in the middle is required. Become. On the other hand, a configuration in which the set value is confirmed after all the games are finished is conceivable. In this case, the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, the display of the variation of the pattern on the general map display unit 38a, There is a need to wait until a state where none of the execution execution states of the object 34a is executed, and there is a possibility that the waiting time until the confirmation of the set value is started becomes long.

  On the other hand, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main process that is executed when the operation is started is the state before the process that allows the game to proceed is executed. Since the setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process is being executed, the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game has already been stopped. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being checked while the game is in progress, and to stop the progress of the game when checking the setting value, or to stop the progress of the game. There is no need to wait for confirmation of the set value until Therefore, it is possible to appropriately check the set value.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 114), when the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7905: YES), a RAM clear process is executed (step S7915). In the RAM clear process, except for an area (specifically, a setting value counter) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control, the work area for specific control 221 is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. In the RAM clear process, the initial setting is executed after clearing various registers of the main CPU 63 to “0”. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing (step S7902) in step S7902 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the RAM clear process, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to “0” by the clear operation by the manager of the game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7916), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outer frame 11 is also opened. It is then determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state (step S7917). Whether the front door frame 14 is open or not with respect to the inner frame 13 is detected using the front door opening sensor 95 in the same manner as in the thirtieth embodiment, and the gaming machine main body 12 is The main body opening sensor 96 is used for detecting whether or not the body is in the open state, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S7916: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body with respect to the outer frame 11 When 12 is in the open state (step S7917: YES), the set value update process is executed (step S7918).

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing. In addition, the process of step S8101-step S8107 in a setting value update process is performed using the program for specific control in the main side CPU63, and the data for specific control.

  First, “1” is set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8101). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated. When “1” is set in the setting update display flag, display control corresponding to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) described later is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is called. Thereby, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Is called.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to “setting 1” and 6 or less corresponding to “setting 6” (step). S8102). If the value of the set value counter is “0” or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8102, and “1” is set in the set value counter (step S8103). Thereby, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8102, or if the process of step S8103 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off using the setting key (step S8104). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state.

  When the setting key insertion portion 68a is not operated to be turned off (step S8104: NO), on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8105: YES), the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control Is incremented by 1 (step S8106). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to one level higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8105: NO), or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8102, but the set value counter is updated in step S8102. If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, “1” is set to the set value counter in step S8103. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting returns to “setting 1”.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF (step S8104: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S8107). Thereby, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. The state to be released is released. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the management result of the game history.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main process is started. The button 68c is pressed, and the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on. Accordingly, the operation content of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clear process (step S7915), and the RAM clear process (step S7915) is performed. The operation content to be generated can be easily understood by the game hall manager.

  Even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to “0” and the information of the set value counter is not changed. Thereby, even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed.

  RAM clear processing based on not only turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c but also turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key. Not only (Step S7915) but also the set value update processing (Step S7918) is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) is performed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Executed. As a result, the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a can be made common as an operation for executing the process related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation content for generating the processing related to the set value easy to understand for the game hall manager.

  Further, when the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed and the reset is performed. When a pressing operation of the button 68c is added, a set value update process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the execution target process different among the setting confirmation process and the set value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Further, by increasing the operation content for executing the set value update process as compared with the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform an act of performing the set value update process illegally.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 114), when the process of step S7911 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S7912 or step S7913, when the process of step S7914 is executed, negative at step S7916 or step S7917. When the determination is made, or when the process of step S7918 is executed, the startup process flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S7919). By clearing the start processing flag “0”, the state in which various processes set in the first timer interrupt process are not executed even when the first timer interrupt process is started is released. In step S7919, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S7920). The return command indicates information indicating the number of hold information for the special figure display section 37a, information indicating the current lottery mode, information indicating the current support mode, and whether the open / close execution mode is being executed. Information and information indicating whether or not the game is being executed are included. These pieces of information are set based on information stored in the work area 221 for specific control. By receiving the return command, the voice light emission control device 81 responds to the various information set in the return command with respect to the display content of the symbol display device 41, the light emission content of the display light emitting unit 53, and the sound output content of the speaker unit 54. The content to be

  Here, when confirming the set value of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key. Then, for example, when it is necessary to check the set value during the execution of the game round, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off during the execution of the game round. The power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the ON operation is performed. In this case, since the backup power is not supplied to the RAM provided in the sound emission control device 81, the effect for game play in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 is performed when the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Information for controlling is deleted. On the other hand, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 and the clearing process of the main RAM 65 is not executed when the set value is confirmed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off during the game round. After that, when the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on with the setting key, the variation display of the pattern is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a after the setting confirmation processing is executed. Will be resumed. As a result, a situation occurs in which the symbol display is not performed on the symbol display device 41 even though the symbol variation display is performed on the special symbol display unit 37a.

  On the other hand, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 after the setting confirmation processing is completed, and the return command includes information indicating whether or not a game round is being executed. When the sound emission control device 81 receives the return command, the symbol display device 41 starts the symbol variation display. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the symbol display is not performed on the symbol display device 41 even though the symbol variation display is performed on the special symbol display unit 37a. . This variation display of symbols is performed at a relatively high speed so that each symbol in the variation display is indistinguishable or difficult to identify for the player. Further, the return command does not include the result of the determination process of the game times to be resumed and the result of the distribution determination process, and does not include information indicating the end timing of the game times to be resumed. Therefore, when the sound emission control device 81 starts the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 based on the return command, if the game number to be resumed corresponds to the result of losing, the next game number is started. When a command to be displayed or a command to be displayed on the demo display is received by the symbol display device 41, the symbol variation display based on the return command is terminated, the display corresponding to the newly received command is started, and the restart target If the game time corresponds to the jackpot result, when the opening command indicating the start of the opening / closing execution mode is received, the symbol variation display based on the return command is terminated and the opening effect is started.

  When the return command includes information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the sound display controller 81 starts a display effect indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in the symbol display device 41. To be. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), but between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time will occur. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S7921 to S7924 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S7921 to S7924 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly. In steps S7921 to S7924, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, the first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first timer interrupt process is periodically started at a 4 millisecond period which is the first interrupt period as already described. A program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8201). As already described, “1” is set to the startup processing flag in step S7903 of the main processing (FIG. 114). If “1” is set in the startup process flag (step S8201: YES), the first timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the various processes of steps S8202 to S8221. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the main process (FIG. 114) is started, the execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process is permitted early. Even if there is, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the first timer interrupt process until the execution of the process for controlling the progress of the game is permitted after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. It is possible to prevent execution.

  As already described, the startup process flag is cleared to “0” in step S7919 when the process for starting the supply of operating power is completed in the main process (FIG. 114). In the first timer interrupt process, when “1” is not set in the start-up process flag (step S8201: NO), the processes after step S8202 are executed.

  In steps S8202 to S8219 and S8221, the same processing as that in steps S3701 to S3719 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment is executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In this case, as already described, when it is determined in the main process (FIG. 114) that “1” is not set in the power failure flag (step S7906: NO), or when it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S7906). S7909: NO), “1” is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7910). When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the process of steps S8201 to S8206 is executed in the first timer interruption process, but the process of steps S8208 to S8221 is performed by making an affirmative determination in step S8207. Do not execute. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the progress of the game is stopped and for the specific control. If at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control does not match the checksum due to a change in the storage state of information since the last power-off, the progress of the game is stopped It becomes a state. For example, the launch of the game ball is prohibited because the process of step S8212 is not executed. Further, the execution of the game times and the opening / closing execution mode is prohibited because the process of step S8214 is not executed. In addition, the payout of the game ball is prohibited because the process of step S8218 is not executed.

  On the other hand, even in the situation where the progress of the game is stopped in this way, the power failure monitoring in step S8202 is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 in steps S8203 and S8204. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and the fraud detection in step S8206 is performed.

  In the first timer interrupt process, a setting monitoring process is executed in step S8220. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring process. Note that the processing from step S8301 to step S8303 in the setting monitoring processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  It is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8301). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the set value set in the set value counter is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and abnormal when it is “0” or 7 or more. Judge that there is.

  If the set value is abnormal (step S8301: NO), similarly to step S7910 in the main process (FIG. 114), “1” is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8302). When “1” is set in the game stop flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), so that the process of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed. Thereby, when it is specified that the set value is abnormal, the progress of the game is stopped. On the other hand, even if the game stop flag is set to “1”, the process from step S8202 to step S8206 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is executed, so the progress of the game is stopped. Even in such a situation, the power failure monitoring is performed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is performed.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that the set value is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8303). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the set value abnormality, and outputs a voice “Please change setting” from the speaker unit 54. . In addition, a character image “Please change setting” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (step S7918) of the main process (FIG. 114) is executed. It is good also as a structure by which the said alerting | reporting is continued when it is made.

  The manager of the game hall who confirmed the notification in the situation where the progress of the game is stopped temporarily stops the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 and then restarts the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 In order to execute the setting value, an operation for executing the set value update process (step S7918) is performed. As a result, when a set value abnormality occurs, a new set value can be set in the set value update process (step S7918).

  Here, the monitoring process of whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is periodically started. This makes it possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even in a situation where a game is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing even though the set value is abnormal. Also, monitoring whether the set value is abnormal is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal.

  In the main process (FIG. 114), a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set. If a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 114), a power failure flag and checksum are set at the start of supply of operating power. In addition to monitoring, it is necessary to monitor whether or not the set value is normal, which increases the monitoring load. Further, when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of supply of operating power, if the RAM clear process (step S7915) and the set value update process (step S7918) are attempted to be executed, the processing configuration accordingly. Will be complicated. On the other hand, since the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set in the main process (FIG. 114), the processing configuration of the process at the start of supply of operating power is preferable. It becomes possible. Even if the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in this way, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is performed as described above. Therefore, when the setting value is abnormal, it is possible to cope with the setting monitoring process (step S8220).

  In the configuration in which the first timer interrupt process is executed as described above, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is performed separately from the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) as the timer interrupt process as already described in the present embodiment. In addition, the second timer interrupt process is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process even during the execution of the first timer interrupt process. In this case, although illustration is omitted in the first timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is prohibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after each process in steps S8201 to S8221. For example, the timer interrupt process is prohibited before the lottery random number update process (step S8203) is executed, and the timer interrupt process is allowed after the lottery random number update process (step S8203) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and started during the lottery random number update process. Also, the timer interrupt process is prohibited before executing the special figure special power control process (step S8214), and the timer interrupt process is permitted after executing the special figure special electric control process (step S8214). As a result, it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and started during the execution of the special figure special electric control process.

  Next, a configuration for controlling display of various display units by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for controlling display of various display units by the main CPU 63.

  As a target on which display control is performed by the main CPU 63, a special map display unit 37a, a special map hold display unit 37b, a general map display unit 38a, a general map hold display unit 38b, and first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201. 204 exists. These are all provided as a segment display section in which a plurality of display segments using LEDs are arranged. These segment display units are set to light emission state by setting data corresponding to the light emission state (for example, “1” data which is one of the binary data), and data corresponding to the light-off state (for example, binary data). When the other data “0” is set, the light is turned off.

  The main control board 61 is provided with a first display circuit 261 corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a, and a second display circuit 262 corresponding to the special figure display unit 37b. A third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the display unit 38a, a fourth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the general-purpose hold display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201- A fifth display circuit 265 is provided in correspondence with 204. In the eleventh embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. However, in the present embodiment, these first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are not provided.

  The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure display unit 37a. Thereby, each display segment of the special figure display part 37a will be in a light emission state or a light extinction state in the aspect corresponding to the display data provided to the 1st display circuit 261. In this case, the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds). It will approach the state of. Accordingly, the display segment of the special figure display unit 37a that is in the light emission state by the display data provided to the first display circuit 261 passes a predetermined period without providing new display data to the first display circuit 261. This will gradually turn off the lights. Further, the display data output process of the previous display data is not only performed when the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is changed but also when the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is not changed. The same display data as the first time is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

  The number of display segments provided in the special figure display unit 37a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the first display circuit 261 as display data for display control of the special figure display unit 37a.

  The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure hold display unit 37b. Thereby, each display segment of the special figure hold display unit 37b is in a light emitting state or a light-off state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, the second display circuit 262 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but the display data gradually becomes all “0” when the predetermined period elapses. It will approach the state of. Therefore, the display segment of the special figure hold display unit 37b that is in a light emitting state by the display data provided to the second display circuit 262 has a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the second display circuit 262. As time elapses, the light is gradually turned off. In addition, because of such a configuration, not only when the display content of the special figure hold display unit 37b is changed but also when the display content of the special figure hold display unit 37b is not changed, the previous display data The same display data as the output processing times is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

  The number of display segments provided in the special figure hold display section 37b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the second display circuit 262 as display data for display control of the special figure hold display section 37b. However, since the display data is provided in units of 8 bits, 8-bit data is also provided when the display data is provided to the second display circuit 262. Of these, 4 bits are provided in the special figure hold display section. 37b is used as display data for display control.

  The third display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general-purpose display unit 38a. As a result, each display segment of the general-purpose display unit 38a is turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263. In this case, the third display circuit 263 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all “0”. It will approach the state of. Accordingly, the display segment of the general-purpose display unit 38a that is in a light emitting state by the display data provided to the third display circuit 263 has passed a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the third display circuit 263. This will gradually turn off the lights. Further, the display data output process of the previous display data is not only performed when the display content of the general map display unit 38a is changed but also when the display content of the general map display unit 38a is not changed. The same display data as the first time is supplied to the third display circuit 263.

  The number of display segments provided in the general-purpose display unit 38a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the third display circuit 263 as display data for controlling the display of the general display unit 38a.

  The fourth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general-purpose hold display unit 38b. Thereby, each display segment of the general-purpose hold display unit 38b is turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264. In this case, the fourth display circuit 264 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all “0”. It will approach the state of. Accordingly, the display segment of the general-purpose hold display unit 38b that is in a light emitting state by the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264 has a predetermined period of time without new display data being provided to the fourth display circuit 264. As time elapses, the light is gradually turned off. Further, with this configuration, not only when the display content of the general map hold display unit 38b is changed but also when the display content of the general map hold display unit 38b is not changed, The same display data as the output processing times is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264.

  The number of display segments provided in the general map hold display section 38b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264 as display data for display control of the general-purpose hold display unit 38b. However, since the display data is provided in units of 8 bits, 8-bit data is also provided when display data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264. Of these, 4 bits are used for the reserved display section. 38b is used as display data for display control.

  The fifth display circuit 265 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. In this case, the fifth display circuit 265 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds). It will approach the state of. Accordingly, new display data is provided to the fifth display circuit 265 in the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 that are in a light emitting state by the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. The light is gradually turned off when the predetermined period has passed. In addition, the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed not only when the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed. Even if not, the same display data as the previous display data output process is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265.

  Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided with seven display segments. On the other hand, display data is provided in units of 8 bits. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided to the fifth display circuit 265, the 7-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as 8-bit data. Thereafter, 7-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided as 8-bit data, and thereafter, 7-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is provided in 8-bit units. Finally, 7-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as 8-bit data.

  In the configuration in which the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266. That is, the display ICs 266 are not provided on the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 on a one-to-one basis, but are provided so as to be common to all the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. Display IC 266 is provided. When the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 also supplies type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 corresponds to the display data to the display IC 266.

  The electrical connection between the main CPU 63 and the display IC 266 will be described in detail. The main CPU 63 and the display IC 266 include the type data signal line LN1, the type clock signal line LN2, the display data signal line LN3, and the display clock signal. It is electrically connected using the line LN4. These signal lines LN1 to LN4 are all signal lines for transmitting signals from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by one-way communication.

  The classification data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the classification data signal line LN1. In this case, each 1-bit segment of classification data by serial communication is indicated by a classification clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the classification clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 corresponds to the display data to be transmitted. The type data is transmitted as 5-bit data consisting of the first to fifth bits. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit is at the HI level and the other bits are at the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit is at the HI level and the other bits are at the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit 263, the third bit is at the HI level and the other bits are at the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit 264, the fourth bit is at the HI level and the other bits are at the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit 265, the fifth bit is at the HI level and the other bits are at the LOW level.

  Display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, each 1-bit break of display data by serial communication is indicated by a display clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. Display data is transmitted in units of 8 bits by the 1st to 8th bits.

  The main CPU 63 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described later. In this case, display data is transmitted to one of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 in one processing time of the second timer interrupt process, and the nth display circuit → the n + 1th display. The display circuits 261 to 265 to which display data is to be transmitted are changed one by one each time a new processing time of the second timer interrupt processing occurs according to the order of the circuits. Further, in the second timer interrupt processing in the next processing time after the processing time for transmitting the display data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 which is the last order in the order, the first display circuit 261 which is the first order in the order. Display data corresponding to is sent. Note that, in the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting display data to any one of the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, only one piece of display data in units of 8 bits is transmitted, but the fifth display circuit 265 is used. In the processing time of the second timer interrupt process for transmitting the display data, four pieces of display data in units of 8 bits are transmitted corresponding to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In the configuration in which the main CPU 63 transmits display data as described above, various storage areas referred to by the main CPU 63 for transmitting display data to the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control. Is set. 120A is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers 271 to 275 provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 120B is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various storage areas 234,276.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), the work area 221 for specific control includes a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, A fifth display data buffer 275 is provided.

  Display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the first display data buffer 271. Since the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a as described above, the first display data buffer 271 has display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display. Will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the first display data buffer 271 in the display control process (step S 8216) based on the contents of the special figure special electric control process (step S 8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). . Further, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the first display circuit 261 is reached, only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is changed. Instead, even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the second display data buffer 272. Since the second display circuit 262 is provided in correspondence with the special figure hold display unit 37b as described above, the second display data buffer 272 has a display for causing the special figure hold display unit 37b to perform a predetermined display. Data will be stored. In this case, display data is stored in the second display data buffer 272 in the display control process (step S 8216) based on the contents of the special figure special power control process (step S 8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). . In addition, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the second display circuit 262 is reached, only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is changed. Instead, even when the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Display data to be supplied to the third display circuit 263 is stored in the third display data buffer 273. Since the third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the universal map display unit 38a as described above, the third display data buffer 273 has display data for causing the universal map display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display. Will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the third display data buffer 273 in the display control process (step S 8216) based on the contents of the general power control process (step S 8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). Is called. Further, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the third display circuit 263 is reached, only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is changed. Instead, even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit 264. As described above, the fourth display circuit 264 is provided in correspondence with the general map hold display unit 38b. Therefore, the fourth display data buffer 274 has a display for causing the general map hold display unit 38b to perform a predetermined display. Data will be stored. In this case, display data is stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 in the display control process (step S 8216) based on the contents of the general power control process (step S 8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). Is called. Further, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the fourth display circuit 264 is reached, only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is changed. Instead, even when the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit 265. Since the fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as already described, the fifth display data buffer 275 includes the first to fourth notification display devices 201. Display data for making the predetermined data displayed in .about.204 is stored. When the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting display data to the fifth display circuit 265 is reached, not only the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is changed, but also the display data. Even if the change is not changed, the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Here, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, display corresponding to the management result of the game history is performed, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 115) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 116) is executed. Display corresponding to the current set value. In this case, since the fifth display data buffer 275 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, the process of storing the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed as a process corresponding to the specific control. On the other hand, the process for deriving the management result of the game history is performed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the 61st to 68th parameters which are the management result of the game history are the first to fourth notification display devices. In 201-204, it becomes a display object sequentially.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 120B, not only the calculation result storage area 234 for storing the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter but also the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Among these, a display target setting area 276 for storing parameters to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided. Even in this embodiment, since the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed for 10 seconds as in the fifteenth embodiment, the processing corresponding to non-specific control is 10 seconds. Whenever the second elapses, the calculation result of the parameter to be displayed is read from the calculation result storage area 234 in accordance with a predetermined display order, and the calculation result of the read parameter is stored in the display target setting area 276. The When the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is a process corresponding to the specific control. The display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is read out, and the read display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

  On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are performed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process corresponding to the specific control. The display data for displaying that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed in the devices 201 to 204 and the display showing the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are the fifth. Stored in the display data buffer 275. When the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are performed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process corresponding to the specific control. The display data for displaying that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated in the devices 201 to 204 and the display showing the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are the fifth display data. Stored in the buffer 275.

  In the configuration in which the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 performs display data corresponding to the processing times in each processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). The display data is read from the buffers 271 to 275, the read display data is transmitted to the display IC 266, and type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 corresponds to the display data. The data is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of the display IC 266.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output unit 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output unit 284. Display data received from the main CPU 63 is stored in the display data buffer 283. The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The type data buffer 281 stores type data received from the main CPU 63. The selection signal output unit 282 is a selection signal for designating the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the classification data stored in the classification data buffer 281 among the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 as the reception destination of the display data. Is output.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using a display signal group 291. The display signal group 291 is provided so that 8-bit display data can be transmitted at a time, and the display data in units of 8 bits is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. A branch signal group 292 is provided by branching from the display signal group 291. The branch signal group 292 includes the second display circuit 262, the third display circuit 263, the fourth display circuit 264, and the fifth display circuit 265. Are electrically connected to each of the. Similar to the display signal group 291, the branch signal group 292 is provided so that 8-bit display data can be transmitted at one time. Display data in units of 8 bits is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. The

  By providing the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 as described above, when the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is the first data. To all of the fifth display circuits 261 to 265. In this case, first to fifth selection signal lines 301 to 305 are provided to specify display circuits 261 to 265 to receive and use the supplied display data.

  The first selection signal line 301 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261. When the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the first display circuit 261 and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301. Accordingly, display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the first display circuit 261.

  The second selection signal line 302 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262. When the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the second display circuit 262 and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302. Accordingly, display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the second display circuit 262.

  The third selection signal line 303 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit 263. When the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the third display circuit 263 and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a third selection signal to the third display circuit 263 through the third selection signal line 303. Thus, display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the third display circuit 263.

  The fourth selection signal line 304 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit 264. When the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the fourth display circuit 264 and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit 264 through the fourth selection signal line 304. Accordingly, display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fourth display circuit 264.

  The fifth selection signal line 305 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit 265. When the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the fifth display circuit 265 and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit 265 through the fifth selection signal line 305. Accordingly, display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fifth display circuit 265.

  122 shows that the type data and the display data are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and the display data transmitted from the display IC 266 is received by the first display circuit 261 or the second display circuit 262. It is a time chart. 122A shows a transmission period of the type data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. 122B shows a transmission period of the type clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266. FIG. ) Shows the transmission period of the display data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122 (d) shows the transmission period of the display clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. 122 (e) shows the display IC 266. 122 (f) shows the transmission period of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261, FIG. 122 (f) shows the transmission period of the second selection signal from the display IC 266 to the second display circuit 262, and FIG. A display data transmission period from the display IC 266 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is shown. The same applies to the case where display data is received by the third to fifth display circuits 263 to 265.

  Type data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 at the timing t1 after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 including the main CPU 63, the display IC 266, and the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is started. And transmission of display data is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122B, a pulse type clock signal is transmitted at each of timings t1, t2, t3, t4, and t5. As shown in (a), the pulse type data signal is transmitted in correspondence with the transmission of the pulse type clock signal at the timing t1. Thereby, information corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), a pulsed display clock at each of the timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, timing t6, timing t7, and timing t8. As shown in FIG. 122 (c), a pulsed display data signal is transmitted in correspondence with transmission of a pulsed display clock signal at timings t2, t3, t5, and t7. Is sent. As a result, display data corresponding to the information form is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

  When the transmission of the display clock signal of the 8th bit is completed at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 122 (d), the type data buffer 281 is stored at the timing of the t9 as shown in FIG. 122 (e). As shown in FIG. 122 (g), transmission of the first selection signal is started by the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 toward the first display circuit 261 corresponding to the stored type data, and at the timing t9. Then, the display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266 starts transmission of the display data stored in the display data buffer 283. Thereby, the display data is received and used by the first display circuit 261.

  Thereafter, at timing t10, as shown in FIGS. 122A to 122D, transmission of type data and display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is newly started. In this case, at the timing t10, transmission of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261 is stopped as shown in FIGS. 122 (e) and 122 (g), and the display IC 266 Transmission of display data toward the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is stopped.

  For details on the new transmission of the type data and the display data, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), a pulse type clock at each of the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14. A signal is transmitted, and a pulse type data signal is transmitted in correspondence with the transmission of the pulse type clock signal at the timing t11 as shown in FIG. 122 (a). Thereby, information corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), a pulsed display clock at each of the timing t10, the timing t11, the timing t12, the timing t13, the timing t14, the timing t15, the timing t16, and the timing t17. As shown in FIG. 122 (c), it corresponds to transmission of a pulsed display clock signal at timing t10, timing t11, timing t12, timing t15, timing t16, and timing t17. Thus, a pulsed display data signal is transmitted. As a result, display data corresponding to the information form is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

  Then, when the transmission of the 8-bit display clock signal is completed as shown in FIG. 122 (d) at the timing of t18, it is stored in the type data buffer 281 as shown in FIG. 122 (f) at the timing of t18. As shown in FIG. 122 (g), transmission of the second selection signal is started by the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 toward the second display circuit 262 corresponding to the type data, and at the timing t18. Transmission of display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is started by the display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266. Thereby, the display data is received and used by the second display circuit 262.

  For the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, only one display data is transmitted in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) that is a display data transmission target. In the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) that is the display data transmission target, four display data are transmitted in correspondence with the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As described above, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started in the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds). Each processing time is set so that one processing time is completed within the second interrupt cycle.

  With the above structure, display data can be transmitted to the plurality of display circuits 261 to 265 using one display IC 266. Here, as described above, each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but the predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the display data gradually approaches the state of all “0”. In this case, if the display data is received by the display circuits 261 to 265 for a predetermined period, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure hold display unit 38b, Even if the display contents are not changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display segment that is in the light emitting state temporarily approaches the light-off state, and as a result, the light in the display segment May blink. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, apart from the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) started in the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds), the second interrupt shorter than the first interrupt cycle. A second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) activated at a cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) is set, and transmission of display data to the display IC 266 is collectively performed in the second timer interrupt process. .

  Hereinafter, the second timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing from step S8401 to step S8413 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), an interrupt prohibition is set (step S8401). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) even if the first interrupt cycle elapses. It becomes possible not to be started by. In addition, if the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is inhibited, even if the second interrupt cycle elapses during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), the second timer interrupt process is performed. It is possible to prevent the processing (FIG. 123) from being activated twice.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8402). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 116). As already described, the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Although the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) will be executed, it is interrupted and activated even when the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. Even in the situation where the value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated.

  The situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1” means that the current processing time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is the setting value update process (FIG. 116) being executed by the main CPU 63. It means that the process has been started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8402, the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step S8403). In the setting process, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Display data for execution is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

  When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will be described with reference to FIG. The display shown in the figure is performed. Specifically, when a display indicating that the setting value is being updated in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. In each case, at least one display segment is in a light emitting state. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. Thereby, even if it is a case where the display which shows that it is the condition which is updating the setting value is performed, it will be confirmed that the display apparatus 201-204 for 1st-4th notification is not out of order. The administrator can grasp it. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment is in a light emitting state in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first to fourth notifications are displayed. Each of the display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state.

  In detail about each display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state, and the remaining display segments are in an unlit state. It becomes. Even if the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the first notification display device 201 can be in a light emitting state. When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the first notification display device 201 includes the display content in which one central display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an off state. Not. Thereby, even when the management result of the game history is displayed, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the set value is being updated while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state are displayed as the game history. It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result.

  In the second notification display device 202, as in the first notification display device 201, one display segment at the center is in a light emitting state, and the remaining display segments are in an unlit state. Even if the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the second notification display device 202 can be in a light emitting state. When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the second notification display device 202 includes the display content in which one display segment in the center is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an unlit state. Not. Thereby, even when the management result of the game history is displayed, the display contents of the second notification display device 202 in the situation where the setting value is updated while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state are displayed. It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result.

  In the third notification display device 203, some display segments are in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an unlit state so that the letter “H” is displayed. In this case, the display segment that is in the light emitting state can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but the management result of the game history is The display content of the third notification display device 203 when displayed does not include the display content in which the letter “H” is displayed. Thereby, even when the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the set value is being updated while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state is displayed as the game history. It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result. In addition, the display content of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the set value is being confirmed does not include the display content in which the letter “H” is displayed. Thus, by displaying “H” on the third notification display device 203, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the setting value is being updated.

  In the fourth notification display device 204, some display segments are turned on and the remaining display segments are turned off so that display corresponding to the current set value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124A, since the current setting value is “setting 2”, “2” corresponding to “setting 2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the game hall can grasp the current set value. It should be noted that the display content of the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the set value is being updated can be displayed in both the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed and the situation where the set value is confirmed.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), if a negative determination is made in step S8402, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step S8404). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for identifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 115). As already described, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is a situation in which the process at the start of the operation power supply is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is started. Although the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) will be executed, it is interrupted and activated even when the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. Even in the situation where the confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started.

  The situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1” means that the current processing time of the second timer interruption process (FIG. 123) is the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) being executed by the main CPU 63. It means that the process has been started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8404, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S8405). In the setting process, a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Display data for execution is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

  When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (b). The display shown in the figure is performed. Specifically, when a display indicating that the setting value is being updated in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. In each case, at least one display segment is in a light emitting state. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. Thereby, even if it is a case where the display which shows that it is the condition which is confirming a setting value is performed, it is confirmed that the display apparatus 201-204 for 1st-4th notification has not failed. The administrator can grasp it.

  In detail about each display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state, and the remaining display segments are in an unlit state. It becomes. Even if the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the first notification display device 201 can be in a light emitting state. When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the first notification display device 201 includes the display content in which one central display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an off state. Not. Thereby, even when the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the set value is confirmed while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state is displayed as the game history. It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result.

  In the second notification display device 202, as in the first notification display device 201, one display segment at the center is in a light emitting state, and the remaining display segments are in an unlit state. Even if the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the second notification display device 202 can be in a light emitting state. When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the second notification display device 202 includes the display content in which one display segment in the center is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an unlit state. Not. Thereby, even when the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in the situation where the set value is confirmed while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state is displayed as the game history. It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result.

  Here, the display contents on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are the same regardless of whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. Accordingly, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 indicate that the display target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 relates to the set value, not the management result of the game history. It becomes possible to clearly notify the manager of the game hall by the display.

  In the third notification display device 203, some display segments are in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-off state so that the letter “k” is displayed. In this case, the display segment that is in the light emitting state can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but the management result of the game history is The display content of the third notification display device 203 when displayed does not include the display content in which the character “k” is displayed. Thereby, even when the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the set value is confirmed while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state is displayed as the game history. It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result. Further, “H” is displayed on the third notification display device 203 in a situation where the set value is being updated, whereas “k” is displayed on the third notification display device 203 in a situation where the set value is being confirmed. Is displayed. Accordingly, by confirming the display content of the third notification display device 203, the game hall manager is notified of whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being checked. It becomes possible.

  In the fourth notification display device 204, some display segments are turned on and the remaining display segments are turned off so that display corresponding to the current set value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124 (b), the current setting value is “setting 2”, so that “2” corresponding to “setting 2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the game hall can grasp the current set value. Note that the display content of the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the set value is being confirmed can be displayed both in the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed and in the situation where the set value is being updated.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), if a negative determination is made in step S8404, a process for setting the fifth display data buffer 275 in the normal state is executed (step S8406). In this case, information is read from the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the parameters corresponding to the read information are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. By transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 calculate the current display target parameters among the 61st to 68th parameters. The result is displayed.

  When the process of step S8403, step S8405, or step S8406 is executed, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S8407), and the display data signal line LN3 and the display are displayed. The transmission state of the signal through the clock signal line LN4 is turned off (step S8408). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step S8409).

  The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify a display data transmission target in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt process. When the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is a transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is a transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data in the fourth display data buffer 274 is If the type counter value is “5”, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is the transmission target. In the type counter update process, 1 is added to the value of the type counter, and when the value of the type counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the upper limit “5”, the value of the type counter is set to “1”. . As a result, the display data transmission target is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 for each processing time of the second timer interrupt process.

  Thereafter, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S8410). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second value is read. When the type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64 and the value of the type counter is “3”, the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64 and the value of the type counter is If “4”, the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and if the value of the type counter is “5”, the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read. Read from the side ROM 64.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S8411). Specifically, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271 when the value of the type counter is “1”, and is read from the second display data buffer 272 when the value of the type counter is “2”. When the display data is read, the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273 when the value of the type counter is “3”, and from the fourth display data buffer 274 when the value of the type counter is “4”. The display data is read, and when the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

  Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S8412). In the transmission process, signal output is performed on the classification data signal line LN1 and the classification clock signal line LN2 so that the classification data read in step S8410 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In the transmission process, signal output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is performed so that the display data read in step S8411 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Thereafter, in order to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), the interrupt permission is set (step S8413).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. In the situation where the main process (FIG. 114) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, and a process that allows the game to proceed in the main process is executed. The setting confirmation process is executed in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

  Assuming the case where the set value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game is continued, for example, when the set value is confirmed during the execution of the game round, the set value is being confirmed. May cause the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be launched toward the special electricity prize winning device 32 in spite of the opening / closing execution mode being started. In addition, when the setting value is confirmed during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode proceeds in a situation where the setting value is being confirmed. There is a possibility that the game ball cannot be launched toward the.

  Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when the set value is confirmed, the progress of the game is stopped halfway when the confirmation of the set value is started in the situation where the game is being performed. There is a risk that the processing will be complicated. For example, if the confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of execution of a game and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game, a process for stopping the game is required. In this case, when the confirmation of the set value is started, the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is stopped halfway, and when the confirmation of the set value is completed, the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is resumed. Attempting to do so requires complicated processing. Further, for example, if the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode and the progress of the game is to be stopped halfway, a process for stopping the opening / closing execution mode is required. In addition, when the confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of the execution of the variation display of the picture in the normal map display unit 38a and the progress of the game is stopped halfway, a process for stopping the variation display of the pattern is performed. Necessary. In addition, if the confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of the execution of the open execution state of the power utility 34a and the progress of the game is stopped in the middle, a process for stopping the release execution state in the middle is required. Become. On the other hand, a configuration in which the set value is confirmed after all the games are finished is conceivable. In this case, the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, the display of the variation of the pattern on the general map display unit 38a, There is a need to wait until a state where none of the execution execution states of the object 34a is executed, and there is a possibility that the waiting time until the confirmation of the set value is started becomes long.

  On the other hand, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main process that is executed when the operation is started is the state before the process that allows the game to proceed is executed. Since the setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process is being executed, the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game has already been stopped. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being checked while the game is in progress, and to stop the progress of the game when checking the setting value, or to stop the progress of the game. There is no need to wait for confirmation of the set value until Therefore, it is possible to appropriately check the set value.

  In a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and main processing (FIG. 114) is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c. The RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on. As a result, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clear process (step S7915), and the RAM clear process (step S7915). It is possible to make the operation content for generating the game hall easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

  Even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to “0” and the information of the set value counter is not changed. Thereby, even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed.

  Based on not only turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, but also turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key. Not only the clear process (step S7915) but also the set value update process (step S7918) is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation process is performed based on the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c (step S7914). Is executed. As a result, the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a can be made common as an operation for executing the process related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation content for generating the processing related to the set value easy to understand for the game hall manager.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, a setting confirmation process is executed, and the reset button When the pressing operation 68c is added, a set value update process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the execution target process different among the setting confirmation process and the set value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Further, by increasing the operation content for executing the set value update process as compared with the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform an act of performing the set value update process illegally.

  A monitoring process for determining whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is periodically started. This makes it possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even in a situation where a game is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing even though the set value is abnormal.

  Whether the set value is abnormal is monitored every time a monitoring trigger occurs. More specifically, it is executed each time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is activated. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal.

  In the main process (FIG. 114), a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set. If a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 114), a power failure flag and checksum are set at the start of supply of operating power. In addition to monitoring, it is necessary to monitor whether or not the set value is normal, which increases the monitoring load. Further, when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of supply of operating power, if the RAM clear process (step S7915) and the set value update process (step S7918) are attempted to be executed, the processing configuration accordingly. Will be complicated. On the other hand, since the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set in the main process (FIG. 114), the processing configuration of the process at the start of supply of operating power is preferable. It becomes possible. Even if the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in this way, the setting monitoring is performed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). Since the configuration is such that the process (step S8220) is executed, it is possible to cope with the case where the set value is abnormal.

  The display setting for the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is performed by the display IC 266 according to the display data transmitted from the main CPU 63, so that the special figure display unit 37a has display contents corresponding to the display data. The special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notifications are controlled. As a result, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced. In this case, a plurality of display units such as a special drawing display unit 37a, a special drawing hold display unit 37b, a general drawing display unit 38a, a general drawing hold display unit 38b, and first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. In the provided configuration, the display ICs 266 are not provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display units, but one display IC 266 is also used for the plurality of display units. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of display units that are display control targets while suppressing an increase in the number of display ICs 266. Further, the transmission interval of the display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is set so that the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the respective display units can be maintained before the display corresponding to the display data can be maintained in the respective display units. Thus, the transmission interval at which display setting by the display IC 266 is performed is set. As a result, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is also used for a plurality of display units, it is possible to appropriately perform display corresponding to display data in each display unit.

  When the main CPU 63 transmits display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 transmits to the display IC 266 type data that can specify the type of the display circuits 261 to 265 to be set for the display data. Thus, when the display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the display IC 266 may set the display data for the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data transmitted from the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if one display IC 266 is also used for a plurality of display units, the configuration of the display IC 266 can be simplified.

  The main-side CPU 63 transmits display data so that the update cycle is repeated when a plurality of display units are set as display data once in a predetermined order as one update cycle. I do. As a result, the main CPU 63 only has to change the display unit to which display data is to be transmitted according to a predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 can be simplified.

  Even if the content of the display data for one display unit is the same as the content of the display data when the display unit was previously transmitted with the display unit as a transmission target, the main CPU 63 Transmits the display data. As a result, even if one display IC 266 is also used for a plurality of display units, the same display can be continued on a predetermined display unit.

  The main CPU 63 executes a process for transmitting display data to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) that is started by interrupting other processes when the second interrupt period is reached. Thereby, it is possible to set a cycle in which display data is set in each display unit to a predetermined cycle. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is also used for a plurality of display units, before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display unit, The display data can be set by the display IC 266.

  Processing for transmitting display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to be subjected to display setting by the display IC 266 is integrated into second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). Thereby, it is possible to set the cycle in which the display data is set in the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to the same cycle.

  When the first interrupt period is reached, the main CPU 63 interrupts other processes and executes the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is set to be shorter than the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). As a result, it is possible to transmit display data in a shorter cycle than the configuration in which the process of transmitting display data to the display IC 266 is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117).

  In addition, a process for transmitting display data to the display IC 266 is set in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) having an interrupt cycle shorter than the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in which the process for proceeding with the game is set. Has been. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) can be started at an appropriate period for executing the process for advancing the game, and the excellent effects as described above can be achieved. Become.

  The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated even when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is being executed. This makes it possible to set the display data transmission cycle to a predetermined cycle.

  When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) starts, the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) ends, the first timer interrupt process The interrupt shown in FIG. 117 is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) from being interrupted and executed in a situation where the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is being executed. Therefore, priority can be given to processing for transmitting display data.

  The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated even in the situation where the process (steps S7901 to S7918) at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114). Accordingly, it is possible to control display of a plurality of display units even in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being performed. In addition, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting the process at the start of supply of operating power, the process configuration of the process at the start of supply of operating power is not complicated. In addition, it is possible to display-control a plurality of display units in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being performed.

  Even in the situation where the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started. In FIG. 123, display data for displaying the current set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is transmitted. As a result, the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed without complicating the processing configuration of the main process (FIG. 114). It becomes possible to be made.

  Even after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated every time the second interrupt cycle elapses. Thus, by using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), either the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed or the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. It is possible to control the display of a plurality of display units.

  Note that an update button 68b is provided as in the first embodiment, and in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the set value is updated by one step each time the reset button 68c is pressed. Alternatively, the set value may be updated one step each time the update button 68b is pressed. In addition, positions corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as rotation operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the rotation operation is performed. A setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the part 68a may be set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a can be further rotated from the ON position, and the setting value being updated is set to the setting value in the next order each time the rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed. It is good also as a structure updated.

  In the set value update process (FIG. 116), the set key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF to confirm the set value being selected, and the reset button 68c is further pressed to complete the set value update process. It is good also as a structure to be made. In the configuration in which the update button 68b is provided, in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF to confirm the setting value being selected, and the update button 68b is further pressed. The setting value update process may be terminated when operated.

  Further, as a condition for executing the set value update process (FIG. 116), a configuration in which the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state may not be set, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state. It is good also as a structure in which the condition that this is not set, and it is good also as a structure in which both the conditions that the game machine main body 12 is an open state, and the conditions that the front door frame 14 is an open state are not set.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115), a configuration in which the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state may not be set, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. It is good also as a structure in which the condition that this is not set, and it is good also as a structure in which both the conditions that the game machine main body 12 is an open state, and the conditions that the front door frame 14 is an open state are not set.

  Further, in the main process (FIG. 114) executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, it is specified that the power failure flag is not set to “1” or that the checksum is abnormal. In such a case, the RAM clear process (step S7915) may be executed. In this case, after the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, the set value update process (step S7918) may be executed, and notification indicating that the set value update process (step S7918) should be executed. May be configured to stop the progress of the game and to start processing for controlling the progress of the game.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed after the determination process of whether or not the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum comparison process in the main process (FIG. 114). The configuration may be executed before these processes. In this case, it is possible to prioritize processing for confirming the set value.

  Further, the configuration monitoring process (step S8220) is not limited to a configuration that is executed every time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is activated. For example, a plurality of first timer interrupt processes (FIG. 117) are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed every time a predetermined number of triggers (for example, 10,000 times) is executed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the monitoring while periodically monitoring whether or not the set value is normal.

  Further, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed in the remaining process (steps S7921 to S7924) in the main process (FIG. 114). In this case, it is possible to monitor whether or not the set value is normal using the idle time when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) are not executed. It becomes possible.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which a setting monitoring process (step S8220) is performed when game times are newly started. More specifically, when the game times are newly started, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed before the success / failure determination process is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the determination process from being executed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

  Further, when it is specified in the setting monitoring process (step S8220) that the setting value is abnormal, the configuration may be shifted to the setting value update process (step S7918).

  When the setting monitoring process (step S8220) specifies that the setting value is abnormal, the main process (with the setting abnormality flag set in the work area 221 for specific control set to “1”) FIG. 114) may be configured to stop the progress of the game with the setting abnormality flag set to “1” and to release the state where the progress of the game is stopped → It is good also as a structure which needs ON. In this case, even if an operation for executing the set value update process is not performed in the main process (FIG. 114), if the setting abnormality flag is set to “1”, the setting is forcibly set. By executing the value update process, it is possible to force a new setting value to be set using the set value update process set in the main process (FIG. 114).

  In addition, the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the first operation port 33 and the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the second operation port 34 are stored separately. It is good also as a structure by which the 1st special figure display part and the 2nd special figure display part are provided as the special figure display part 37a corresponding to those hold information. In this case, the variation display of the pattern on the first special figure display unit and the variation display of the pattern on the second special figure display unit can be executed in an overlapping manner, and when one of the predetermined game states is entered, It is good also as a structure to which the continuous period of the fluctuation display of the picture in a special figure display part becomes extremely long. In this configuration, if it is attempted to wait for the confirmation of the set value until no game is played, the waiting time becomes longer. On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is performed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, so that the set value can be obtained without causing the standby time as described above. Can be confirmed.

  Further, in the low frequency support mode, the duration of the variable pattern display on the normal map display unit 38a may be extremely long. In this configuration, if it is attempted to wait for the confirmation of the set value until no game is played, the waiting time becomes longer. On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is performed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, so that the set value can be obtained without causing the standby time as described above. Can be confirmed.

  In addition, the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is executed is not limited to the display content in the above-described embodiment. Instead of displaying the letter “k” on the display device 203, only the central display segment may be in a light emitting state as in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. . Alternatively, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off and the fourth notification display device 204 may perform display corresponding to the current set value.

  In addition, the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the set value update process (FIG. 116) is executed is not limited to the display content in the above-described embodiment. Instead of displaying the letter “H” on the display device 203, only the central display segment may be in a light emitting state as in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. . Alternatively, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off and the fourth notification display device 204 may perform display corresponding to the current set value.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the main CPU 63 transmits the type data and the display data to the display IC 266 at the same time, the main CPU 63 may start the display data transmission after starting the transmission of the type data. In this case, transmission of display data may be started in the middle of transmission of classification data, or transmission of display data may be started after transmission of classification data is completed. The transmission of the type data may be started after the display data transmission is started. In this case, transmission of the classification data may be started in the middle of transmission of the display data, or transmission of the classification data may be started after transmission of the display data is completed.

  In addition, the display IC 266 is not limited to the configuration in which only one display IC 266 is provided so as to be common to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, and the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 are not limited. It is good also as a structure provided by corresponding to each one to one. In this configuration, if the display data is stored and held in each display IC provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, the display data on each display IC is stored. Depending on the provision cycle, unintentional blinking may occur in each display unit. On the other hand, by integrating the processing for transmitting display data into the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) having a relatively short interrupt cycle as in the above-described embodiment, the display data to be displayed on each display IC is consolidated. The provision cycle can be shortened, and unintentional blinking can be prevented from occurring in each display unit.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the hit random number counter C1 is provided in the main RAM 65, a configuration in which a random number circuit for updating the random number acquired in the validity determination process is provided. In this case, in the internal function register setting process in the main process (FIG. 114), setting for associating the random number of the random number circuit with the random number acquired in the validity determination process is performed.

  In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the timer interrupt process is prohibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after each process of steps S8201 to S8221, but this may be changed. For example, for some processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the timer interrupt process is prohibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after the other processes, while the other processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) are performed. The timer interrupt processing prohibition and the timer interrupt processing permission may not be performed before and after that. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the timer interrupt processing prohibition and the timer interrupt processing permission are set so as to sandwich a plurality of processes included in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117).

  In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the setting for prohibiting the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may not be performed. In this case, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is executed with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), it is possible to prioritize display control of a plurality of display units. . In this configuration, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited from being interrupted in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in order to prevent the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) from being activated twice. On the other hand, the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may not be prohibited.

  When both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) are triggered, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is executed as the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). 117) In place of the configuration having priority over the execution of 117), the execution of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) may be prioritized over the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). A configuration may be adopted in which the timer interrupt processing with the earlier occurrence order is started first.

  Further, in a situation where the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is executed instead of the configuration in which the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited. Even in such a situation, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) may be interrupted and activated. Thereby, it becomes possible to give priority to execution of the process for advancing a game rather than display control of a plurality of display parts.

  Also, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is not set, and the various processes of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) are the main process (FIG. 114) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), respectively. It may be configured to be executed in a distributed manner. For example, in the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the main process (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed and a display corresponding to the current setting value are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is good also as a structure in which the process for making it perform in is set. In addition, in the set value update process (step S7918) in the main process (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being updated and a display corresponding to the current set value are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is good also as a structure in which the process for making it perform in is set. Also, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), a special figure display unit 37a, a special figure hold display unit 37b, a general figure display unit 38a, a general figure hold display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are displayed. It is good also as a structure in which the process for display-controlling -204 is set.

  Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is not limited to the configuration in which only the process for controlling the display of the plurality of display units is executed. In addition to the process for controlling the display of the plurality of display units. Alternatively, a process different from the process for controlling the display of a plurality of display units may be executed. For example, a part of the process for progressing the game may be executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), and the rest may be executed by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). In this case, a process in which the execution cycle is relatively short is preferably performed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) having a relatively short interruption cycle, and no problem occurs even if the execution cycle is relatively long. Is preferably executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) having a relatively long interrupt cycle. In addition, out of the processes from step S8202 to step S8221 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) of the above embodiment, the power failure information storage process (step S8202) is executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). A process other than the above may be executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, the power failure monitoring can be repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle. In addition to or instead of the configuration, the fraud detection process (step S8206) is executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and other processes are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). It is good also as a structure to be made. In this case, fraud monitoring can be repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle.

  In addition, the number of display circuits 261 to 265 to which display data display setting is performed by the display IC 266 is not limited to five, but may be two, three, four, or six or more. Also good. Further, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not limited to the fifth display circuit 265 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are associated with each other. The display circuit may be provided in a one-to-one correspondence.

<Thirty-fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the set value update process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the thirty-third embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted. In the present embodiment, an update button 68b is provided on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S8501 to step S8508 in the set value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, “1” is set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8501). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to “setting 1” and 6 or less corresponding to “setting 6” (step). S8502). If the value of the set value counter is “0” or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8502 and “1” is set in the set value counter (step S8503). Thereby, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S8502 or when the process of step S8503 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8504). When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8504: NO), the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is provided on the condition that the update button 68b is pressed (step S8505: YES). 1 is added (step S8506). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one level higher. If the update button 68b is not pressed (step S8505: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8502; however, in step S8502, the set value counter If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, “1” is set in the set value counter in step S8503. As a result, when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting returns to “setting 1”.

  If the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S8504: YES), the current set value is confirmed and the process proceeds to step S8507. In step S8507, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF using the setting key. In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state. If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned OFF (step S8507: NO), the process of step S8507 is executed again.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step S8507: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S8508).

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the set value is updated by pressing the update button 68b, the set value is confirmed by pressing the reset button 68c, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF. This completes the set value update process. That is, in order to end the set value update process after the set value is updated in the set value update process, it is necessary not only to turn off the set key insertion unit 68a but also to press the reset button 68c. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of playing a game with the set value after the set value is illegally updated.

<Thirty-fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration relating to the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 executed by the main CPU 63 is different from the thirty-third embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the thirty-third embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  In the calculation result storage area 234, information on base values calculated by the main CPU 63 is stored. The base value is based on the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result is found. It is the ratio of the total number of game balls to be paid out.

In detail regarding the calculation of the base value, although the normal counter area 231 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control in this embodiment, the open / close execution mode counter area 232 and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are provided. Is not provided. In the normal counter area 231, as in the fifteenth embodiment, the normal general winning counter 231a, the special special electric winning counter 231b, the normal first operating counter 231c, the normal second operating counter 231d, and A normal out counter 231e is provided. In a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result is entered, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by one, and the special electricity When one game ball enters the winning device 32, the value of the special special electricity prize counter 231b is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the normal use The value of the first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 and the value is output to the out port 24a. When one game ball enters, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by one. The base values are as follows when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are K91 to K95 in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode is a jackpot result.
Base value: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K91 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K92 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K93 × “to the first operation port 33” The number of winning balls for winning of the game “+ K94 ד the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34 ”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

  The base value is calculated every time the result calculation process (FIG. 130) described later is executed in the management process (step S8920) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) described later. The values of the various counters 231a to 231e of 231 indicate a situation in which “1” is not set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the opening / closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation that is not any of the above, it is cleared to “0”. In the situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result The total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (i.e. the total number of ball game which is supplied to the game area PA) is "0" cleared by the shift reference number in nor availability deviation.

  The management start reference number is set to 300, which is smaller than the shift reference number, as in the fifteenth embodiment. In the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 and the like, an operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before the shipment. In this case, the game balls are maintained in the respective ball-entry portions and the subsequent operation is checked. Under such circumstances, the base value may be different from the situation in which a normal game is played. Therefore, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1” and neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result (ie, game When the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA) reaches the management start reference number that is smaller than the shift reference number, the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are once cleared to "0". Thus, it becomes possible to reduce the influence of the operation check on the base value in a situation where a normal game is being performed after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. Note that the management start reference number is not limited to 300, but may be any number as long as the number is plural, and may be set to a number smaller than 300 or a number larger than 300. Also good.

  The shift reference number is set to 60000. In the pachinko machine 10, a maximum of 100 game balls are fired per minute, so 60000 is the maximum number of fires in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours in the game hall are about 13 hours, and the game is performed for about 10 hours in the situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode due to the jackpot result. Therefore, the shift reference number is set on the assumption of the maximum number of game balls to be fired in one business day. By clearing the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 to “0” every time the shift reference number is reached, the base value can be calculated within the range of the shift reference number. Note that the shift reference number is not limited to 60000, but may be any number as long as it is a plural number. Good.

  The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a third history area 314 as storage areas for storing the base value information. Yes. Each of these various areas 311 to 314 has the same storage capacity, and specifically has a capacity of 1 byte so that base value information can be stored.

  The current area 311 stores the base value calculated in the latest result calculation process (FIG. 130). That is, the current base area 311 stores the latest base value.

  The first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to “1”, the first history area 312 has an opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode. Stored. Further, if the management start flag is set to “1” after the previous calculation period has elapsed, the first history area 312 includes an opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the previous calculation period, and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the situation other than the high frequency support mode becomes the management start reference number. Stored.

  In the second history area 313, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to “1”, the second history area 313 has an opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode. Stored. If the management start flag is set to “1” after the previous calculation period has elapsed, the second history area 313 includes an opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the previous calculation period and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the situation other than the high frequency support mode becomes the management start reference number. Stored.

  In the third history area 314, the final base value in the calculation period three times before is stored. In this case, if the third calculation period is after the management start flag is set to “1”, the third history area 314 has an opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the third calculation period. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode. Stored. Further, if the management start flag is set to “1” after the calculation period three times before, the third history area 314 has an opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period three times before and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the situation other than the high frequency support mode becomes the management start reference number. Stored.

  The base values stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the second history area 313 → the third history area 314 is determined in a predetermined order. The base value to be notified is switched, and the switching of the base value to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

  127 (a) to 127 (d) are for the first to fourth notifications when the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 are notified in a situation where the management start flag is set to “1”. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatuses 201-204. FIG. 127A shows an example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified, and FIG. 127B shows the first history. FIG. 127C shows an example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the area 312 is notified. FIG. 127C shows the base stored in the second history area 313. FIG. 127 (d) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the value is notified, and FIG. 127 (d) shows the case where the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified. An example of the display content of the display apparatuses 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notifications is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has eight display segments 321 to 324. Of the eight display segments 321-324, the seven display segments 321-324 are all bar-shaped light emitting areas having the same shape and the same size, and are arranged so as to generate the character “8”. Has been. On the other hand, each of the display segments 321 to 324 is a circular light emitting region, and is located at the lower right position with respect to the seven display segments 321 to 324 arranged in the shape of “8”. Is provided. Even when any base value of the various areas 311 to 314 is notified, at least one of the display segments 321 to 324 is in a light emitting state in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In the first notification display device 201, a display indicating that the base value is being notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. Specifically, even if any base value in the various areas 311 to 314 is notified, the first notification display device 201 displays the letter “b”. When information other than the base value is notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the letter “b” is not displayed on the first notification display device 201. Thus, by confirming that the character “b” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the manager of the game hall can change the base on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. It is possible to grasp that the value is notified.

  In the second notification display device 202, display indicating which of the various areas 311 to 314 is reporting the base value is performed. Specifically, in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is informed, the letters “L.” are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. In a situation where the base value of the first history area 312 is informed, the characters “1.” are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. In a situation where the base value of the second history area 313 is informed, the character “2.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. In a situation where the base value of the third history area 314 is informed, the character “3.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127 (d). Thus, by checking the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the manager of the game hall can determine which base value is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. It is possible to grasp whether the current period is within the calculation period.

  In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 321 to 324 are in a light emitting state even in a situation where any base value of the various areas 311 to 314 is being notified. As will be described later, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display any number from “0” to “9” as the display corresponding to the base value. In this case, when any of the numbers “1” to “3” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, three numbers are displayed on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204. It becomes difficult to grasp the base value. On the other hand, when the circular display segments 321 to 324 provided at the lower right of the second notification display device 202 are in the light emitting state, the second notification display device 202 has “1” to “1” to “ 3 ”is displayed, the number displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. It becomes possible to distinguish and distinguish numbers.

  In the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number of the base value to be notified is displayed. The base value is calculated as a decimal number up to the second decimal place. The first decimal place number of the base value is displayed on the third notification display device 203. The second number is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Here, when the base value is “1.00”, a number “0” is displayed on each of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, when the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 that are the notification target, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display are displayed as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Each device 204 displays a “-” character. As a result, even when the base value calculated as the decimal number to the second decimal place is notified on the two display devices of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the base value Can be distinguished from the case where the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 to be notified.

  Note that the display contents of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are the same when the base value is “1.00” and when the base value is “0.00”. On the other hand, in order to distinguish between the two, the light emission state of “00” display may be maintained on one of the former and the latter, and the display of “00” may be blinking on the other.

  Next, in the situation where the management start flag is set to “1” with reference to the time chart of FIG. 129, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The state of being performed will be described. 129 (a) shows a period during which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, and FIG. 129 (b) is stored in the first history area 312. The base value stored in the second history area 313 is displayed in the first to fourth notifications in FIG. 129 (c). 129 (d) shows the period notified by the display devices 201-204, and the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. FIG. 129 (e) shows the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result has occurred since the base value calculation period was newly started. Number The total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA Chi) indicates the time to reach the initial reference number (6000 in particular).

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a), notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing of t1. In this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the first notification display device 201 displays that the base value is a notification target, and the second notification display device 202 stores it in the current area 311. The display indicating that the base value is the notification target is performed, and the display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 129 (e), the calculation initial display is performed from the timing t1 to the timing t2. Specifically, since the base value calculation period is newly started, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result (that is, the game area) In the period until the total number of game balls supplied to the PA reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 become display targets. Instead of continuing to turn on the characters, the display target characters are blinked and displayed as the initial calculation display. Immediately after the start of the calculation period, there is little game history information for calculating the base value, so the actual measured value of the base value can be a value that is significantly different from the theoretical value range of the base value. On the other hand, by making the calculation initial display immediately after the calculation period is started in this way, it is possible to make the game hall manager recognize that it is immediately after the calculation period starts. .

  In addition, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 that display a number corresponding to the base value in the initial calculation display continue to light the number, whereas the first notification display device In 201 and the second notification display device 202, characters to be displayed are blinked. Thus, it is possible to notify that the calculation period has just started, while preventing the visibility of the base value from being lowered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the initial calculation display, the display may be blinked on at least one of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. It is good also as a structure by which a display is performed, and it is good also as a structure by which blink display is performed only in one of the display apparatus 201 for 1st notifications, and the display apparatus 202 for 2nd notifications. In addition, the initial reference number is not limited to 6000, and any number may be used as long as the number is plural, and may be set to a number smaller than 6000 or may be set to a number larger than 6000. Good.

  At the timing of t2, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result from the timing of t1 (that is, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) When the total number) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), the calculation initial display is terminated as shown in FIG. 129 (e). Thereby, the lighting display is started not only in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 but also in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202.

  After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t1 at the timing t3, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 129 (a), and FIG. 129 (b) is completed. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final calculation result of the base value in the previous calculation period, the calculation initial display is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t3 at the timing t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is finished as shown in FIG. 129 (b), and FIG. ), The notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the final calculation result of the base value in the previous calculation period, the calculation initial display is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t4 at the timing t5, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is terminated as shown in FIG. ), The notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the third history area 314 is a calculation result of the final base value in the calculation period three times before, the calculation initial display is not performed.

  After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t5 at the timing t6, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is terminated as shown in FIG. 129 (d), and FIG. ), Notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started. In this case, since the calculation period of the base value is newly started, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a state where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result (that is, in the game area PA) In order to notify that the period until the total number of supplied game balls) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000) is shown in FIG. The calculation initial display is performed as shown in FIG.

  After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t6 at the timing t8, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is terminated as shown in FIG. 129 (a), and FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final calculation result of the base value in the previous calculation period, the calculation initial display is not performed.

  Next, a processing configuration for enabling notification of the base value as described above will be described.

  The management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which will be described later, is a process corresponding to non-specific control in step S3803 like the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Read the management execution processing program. In this management execution process (FIG. 71), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment.

  In the check process, in the situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result is specified, when a single game ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, the normal general winning counter 231a is used. When the value is incremented by 1 and the entry of one game ball into the special electricity prize device 32 is specified, the value of the special special electricity prize counter 231b is incremented by 1 and When the entry of the game ball is specified, the value of the normal first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when the entry of one game ball into the second operation port 34 is specified, the normal use When the value of the second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 and the entry of one game ball into the out port 24a is specified, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1. In the check process, a result calculation process and a display process are executed.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process. In addition, the process of step S8601-step S8615 in a result calculation process is performed using the program for nonspecific control in the main side CPU63, and the data for nonspecific control.

  First, base value calculation processing is executed (step S8601). In the calculation processing, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231. The calculation method of the base value is as already described. Then, the calculated base value is overwritten in the current area 311 (step S8602).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8603). The management start flag has a value of “0” when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. In addition, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is initialized by clearing “0” including the management start flag, the value of the management start flag becomes “0”. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, in the game area PA) in a situation where the management start flag has a value of “0” and is not in either the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result The management start flag is set to “1” when the total number of supplied game balls) becomes the management start reference number. When the management start flag is set to “1”, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to “0” and a new calculation period is started. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the influence of the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 difficult to the base value in the situation where the normal game is performed after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10.

  If a negative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by adding all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8604). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is larger than 300 which is the management start reference number (step S8605).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8605, “1” is set to the management start flag (step S8606). Thereafter, a data shift process is executed (step S8607). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is changed from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. The first history area 312 → the second history area 313 and the current status area 311 → the first history area 312 are shifted in this order. As a result, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the previous three calculation period, and the final base value in the previous previous calculation period. Is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the previous calculation period, and the last base value calculated in the current calculation period is the final base value in the previous calculation period. One history area 312 is stored. In the data shift process, an LDIR instruction is used when shifting information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area by specifying the address of the information storage source area and the address of the information storage destination area. It becomes.

  However, in the situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag, basically, the base value information is not stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, so in step S 8607, the management is substantially performed. Only the shift of the final base value of the calculation period to the first history area 312 in a situation where “1” is not set in the start flag is performed. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to “0” (step S8608).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by adding all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8609). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is larger than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S8610). If a negative determination is made in step S8610, "1" is set to the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8611), and if an affirmative determination is made in step S8610, The calculation initial flag is cleared to “0” (step S8612). The calculation initial flag is a total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result has been started since the base value calculation period was newly started (that is, the game area This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls supplied to the PA has reached the initial reference number.

  When the process of step S8611 or step S8612 is executed, it is determined whether the total number calculated in step S8609 is equal to or greater than the shift reference number of 60000 (step S8613). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8613, data shift processing is executed (step S8614). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is changed from the second history area 313 to the second history area in the same manner as step S 8607. The shift is performed in the order of 3 history area 314, first history area 312 → second history area 313, current status area 311 → first history area 312. As a result, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the previous three calculation period, and the final base value in the previous previous calculation period. Is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the previous calculation period, and the last base value calculated in the current calculation period is the final base value in the previous calculation period. One history area 312 is stored. In the data shift process, an LDIR instruction is used when shifting information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area by specifying the address of the information storage source area and the address of the information storage destination area. It becomes. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to “0” (step S8615).

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the display process. Note that the processing from step S8701 to step S8714 in the display processing is executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8701, 1 is subtracted from the value of the switching timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8702). The switching timing counter displays the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the timing for switching the base value to be notified in the devices 201-204. As described above, every time a display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, notification is made in a predetermined order: current area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314. The target base value is switched, and the switching of the base value to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

  When the process of step S8702 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching timing counter after 1 subtraction is “0”, so that the base value that is the current notification target becomes the notification target. Whether or not the display continuation period has elapsed is determined (step S8703). When an affirmative determination is made in step S8703, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8704). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “3” (step S8705: YES), the display target counter value is cleared to “0” (step S8706).

  The display target counter includes first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify a base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the base value stored in the current area 311 is a notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is “1”, the first history area When the base value stored in 312 is a notification target and the value of the display target counter is “2”, the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the notification target, and the value of the display target counter is “3”. ", The base value stored in the third history area 314 is a notification target.

  When a negative determination is made in step S8705, or when the process of step S8706 is executed, the display continuation period (specifically, the value corresponding to the next notification target switching timing is displayed in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control Specifically, a value corresponding to 5 seconds) is set (step S8707).

  When a negative determination is made in step S8703, or when the process of step S8707 is executed, the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control corresponds to the base value that is the current notification target. A process for setting display data to be executed is executed. Specifically, first, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8708). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and the notification target base. A display indicating whether the value corresponds to any of the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is displayed on the second notification display device 202. Display data to be performed.

  Thereafter, the base value is read from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter among the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234, and the read base The calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8709). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to perform display corresponding to the first digit of the decimal point in the base value to be notified, and the second digit of the decimal point in the base value to be notified. Display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform display corresponding to the above.

  As described above, display data composed of display type data and calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276. When the display data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in a second timer interruption process (FIG. 134) described later, the display corresponding to the display data is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .

  Further, the process of step S8709 is executed each time the display process (FIG. 131) is executed regardless of the timing of switching the base value to be notified. As described above, every time the calculation result storing process (FIG. 130) is executed, the base value is calculated using the current value in each of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, and the calculated base value is It is stored in the current state area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234. In this case, whenever the processing in step S8709 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 276 as described above is performed, the display processing (FIG. 131) is executed irrespective of the base value switching timing of the notification target. When the base value is changed in a situation in which the base value of the current area 311 is a notification target, the changed base value can be notified.

  Thereafter, based on the value of the display target counter, it is determined whether or not the base value of the current area 311 is a notification target (step S8710), and the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to “ It is determined whether or not “1” is set (step S8711). As described above, the calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode is caused by the jackpot result since the base value calculation period is newly started. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA has reached the initial reference number. When an affirmative determination is made in both step S8710 and step S8711, “1” is set to the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8712), and either of step S8710 or step S8711 is performed. If a negative determination is made at, the initial display flag is cleared to “0” (step S8713).

  The initial display flag is a first notification display device 201 for notifying that the base value in the current area 311 is the base value at the initial stage of calculation after the start of the calculation period in a situation where the base value is the notification target. And a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the second notification display device 202 should be blinked. When it is specified that the initial display flag is set to “1” in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described later, it is not necessary to simply transmit the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 to the display IC 266. In the case where the display corresponding to the display data is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are blinked and displayed. The notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are turned on. When it is specified that the initial display flag is not set to “1” in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described later, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is displayed. When the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are lit.

  On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control and a negative determination is made in step S8701, the current area 311 is changed regardless of the value of the display target counter. The base value is read out, and operation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number in the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). By transmitting display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the first digit of the decimal point in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base of the current area 311 is displayed. The second decimal place in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Due to the above configuration, in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag, the base value in the past calculation period is not notified, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified. Is done.

  In a situation in which “1” is not set in the management start flag, calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276, but display type data is not set. Although details will be described later, when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1”, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are managed. The display contents are different from those in the case where the base value is notified in the situation where the start flag is set to “1”.

  Next, main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processes in steps S8801 to S8825 in the main process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S8801). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. In addition, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S8802). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds). And the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is a second interrupt period that is shorter than the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 2 milliseconds).

  That is, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long as the timer interrupt process. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process is not started by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. Further, when both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing are not executed, the second timer interrupt processing is performed regardless of the elapsed order of the cycles. It is started first from timer interrupt processing. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process activated in preference to the first timer interrupt process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process may be activated in preference to the second timer interrupt process.

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63 To do. In addition, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, the setting process of numerical ranges of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set to the startup processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8803). Even if the first timer interrupt process is activated, the start-up process in-process flag executes the process for performing power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among various processes set in the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, this is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the first timer interrupt process should be terminated without executing the process for advancing the game.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The first timer interrupt process is periodically started at a 4 millisecond period which is the first interrupt period as already described. A program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  In steps S8901 to S8905, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. That is, the power failure monitoring is executed by executing the power failure information storage process in step S8901. Specifically, as in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 101) in the thirtieth embodiment, the power failure monitoring board 67 monitors whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received. When the occurrence of the error is specified, an infinite loop occurs after the power failure process is executed. In the power failure process, “1” is set to a power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Further, by executing the lottery random number update process in step S8902, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 is updated, and in step S8903 The numerical information of the random number initial value counter CINI is updated by executing the random number initial value updating process, and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is updated by executing the fluctuation counter updating process in step S8904. In step S8905, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether an event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of multiple types of events is monitored, and by confirming that any of these multiple types of events has occurred, the game stop provided in the work area 221 for specific control Set “1” to the flag.

  After executing the processing of step S8901 to step S8905, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in any of the game stop flag and the startup processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step S8906). When “1” is not set in any of the game stop flag and the startup process flag (step S8906: NO), the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are executed. In steps S8907 to S8919, the same processing as that in steps S8208 to S8220 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment is executed. In step S8920, although the management process is executed in the same manner as in step S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment, the content of the check process of the management execution process called in the management process Has already been explained. In the check process, update processing of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 is executed, and result calculation processing (FIG. 130) and display processing (FIG. 131) are executed.

  On the other hand, if “1” is set in at least one of the game stop flag and the startup process flag (step S8906: YES), the first timer interrupt process is executed without executing the processes of steps S8907 to S8920. finish. In other words, not only the situation where the game stop flag is set to “1” but also the case where the start-up process flag is set to “1”, the processing from step S8901 to step S8905 is performed in the first timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, the processing of step S8907 to step S8920 is not executed.

  As in the case of the thirty-third embodiment, the start-up processing flag indicates that the processing at the start of operating power supply (step S8801 to step S8819) is started in the main processing (FIG. 132) and interrupt permission (step S8805) is set. “1” is set before the operation is performed, and “0” is cleared before the process at the start of supplying the operating power is finished and the remaining process (steps S8822 to S8825) is started. In this case, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process, when the start process flag is set to “1”, the process of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed, thereby supplying the operating power. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in a situation where the process at the start (steps S8801 to S8819) is being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt process as described above, even when the start process flag is set to “1”, the process from step S8901 to step S8905 is executed to start the operation power supply start. Power outage monitoring is performed even in the situation where the above process (steps S8801 to S8819) is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated. Executed, and fraud detection is performed.

  In particular, even when the start-up process flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage process (step S8901) is executed, so that the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) is performed. ), Even if a power failure occurs, the power failure process can be executed on the power failure. In the power failure process, as described above, “1” is set to the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is started again, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being identified as having an abnormality. As a result, even if a power failure occurs during the setting value update process (step S8819), the setting value selected at that time can be stored and held as the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. . Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the set value update process, it is not necessary to execute the set value update process again when the supply of operating power is started again.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the set value update process is being executed, neither the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited from being interrupted at any timing. It is possible. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the main process (FIG. 132) including the set value update process, The information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 132) for returning after the timer interrupt process is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the main side immediately before the timer interrupt process is started Information of various registers of the CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated is completed, the process returns to the process of the main process (FIG. 132) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 132), after setting the startup process flag to “1” in step S8803, the initial check period (specifically, in the check counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control). A value corresponding to 5 seconds is set (step S8804). In this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, can the display segments 321 to 324 provided in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 be in a normal light emission state? In order to make the game hall manager confirm whether or not, the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until the initial check period elapses after the processing of step S8804 is started. . Specifically, as the display for checking, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128B, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the light emitting state. . In step S8804, information corresponding to this initial check period is set in the checking counter.

  Note that the initial check period is required until the process for controlling the progress of the game is started when none of the processes in steps S8811, S8812, S8815, and S8819, which will be described later, is executed in the main process. The time is set longer than the maximum time. Therefore, the game may be started in a situation where the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S8805). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. However, since “1” is set in the startup processing flag in step S8803, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, outage monitoring and various counters of the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing are performed. While the process for performing update and fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the process for advancing the game.

  Thereafter, in steps S8806 to S8825, processing similar to that in steps S7905 to S7924 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment is executed. Specifically, it is determined in step S8806 whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed. That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S8806: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8807). When the process at power failure is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set to the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing has been appropriately performed at the time of the previous power shutdown.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S8807: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S8808). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated and stored in the work area 221 for specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S8808 (step S8809). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S8810).

  If a negative determination is made in step S8807 or step S8810, that is, if "1" is not set in the power failure flag or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to “1” (step S8811). When “1” is set in the game stop flag, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is affirmative, so that step S8907 is executed. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, or the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the information storage state since the last power-off, the process for power failure monitoring, various counter updates, and fraud monitoring is executed. On the other hand, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of the supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8812). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change setting” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is issued when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (step S8819) is executed. It is good also as a structure continued.

  When “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal (step S8807 and step S8810: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key. Then, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S8814). Whether the front door frame 14 is open or not with respect to the inner frame 13 is detected using the front door opening sensor 95 in the same manner as in the thirtieth embodiment, and the gaming machine main body 12 is The main body opening sensor 96 is used for detecting whether or not the body is in the open state, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S8813: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body with respect to the outer frame 11 When 12 is in an open state (step S8814: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S8815). Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

  If the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S8806: YES), a RAM clear process is executed (step S8816). The contents of the RAM clear process are the same as step S7915 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S8817: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13, and the game is performed with respect to the outer frame 11. When the main body 12 is in the open state (step S8818: YES), the set value update process is executed (step S8819). Details of the set value update processing will be described later.

  When the process of step S8812 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S8813 or step S8814, when the process of step S8815 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S8817 or step S8818, or the process of step S8819 is executed. If it has been executed, the startup process flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S8820). When the start-up process flag is cleared to “0”, the state where the process for advancing the game is not executed even if the first timer interrupt process is started is released. In step S8820, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8821). The content of the information included in the return command and the processing content of the sound emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as those in step S7920 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. .

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S8822 to S8825. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time will occur. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S8822 to S8825 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S8822 to S8825 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly. In steps S8822 to S8825, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, the second timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing in steps S9001 to S9014 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), an interrupt prohibition is set (step S9001). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) even if the first interrupt period has elapsed. It becomes possible not to be started by. In addition, if the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is inhibited from occurring, even if the second interrupt cycle elapses during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the second timer interrupt process is performed. It is possible to prevent the processing (FIG. 134) from being activated twice.

  Thereafter, update processing of the checking counter is executed (step S9002). In the updating process of the checking counter, when the value of the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the value of the checking counter. As a result, when the initial check period is measured using the checking counter, the value of the checking counter is periodically subtracted every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started. The Rukoto.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9003). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 137). As already described, the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Although the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) will be executed, it is activated and interrupted even when the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. Even in the situation where the value update process (FIG. 137) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated.

  The situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1” means that the current processing time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is the setting value update process (FIG. 137) being executed by the main CPU 63. It means that the process has been started by interrupting the situation. When an affirmative determination is made in step S9003, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step S9004). In the setting process, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, similarly to step S8403 of the second timer interruption process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment. Display data for displaying the current status and the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that indicates that the setting value is being updated and display that indicates the current setting value. Is done.

  If a negative determination is made in step S9003, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9005). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136). As already described, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Although the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) will be executed, it is activated and interrupted even when the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. Even in the situation where the confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated.

  The situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1” means that the current processing time of the second timer interruption process (FIG. 134) is the setting confirmation process (FIG. 137) being executed by the main CPU 63. It means that the process has been started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9005, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S9006). In the setting process, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in step S8405 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment. Display data for displaying the current status and the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. Accordingly, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that indicates that the setting value is being confirmed and display that indicates the current setting value. Is done.

  If a negative determination is made in step S9005, a normal setting process is executed (step S9007). The normal setting process will be described later in detail.

  When the process of step S9004, step S9006, or step S9007 is executed, the process of step S9008 to step S9014 is executed. The processing contents of steps S9008 to S9014 are the same as those of steps S8407 to S8413 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment.

  Specifically, first, the transmission state of the signal through the classification data signal line LN1 and the classification clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S9008), and the transmission of the signal through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4. The state is set to the OFF state (step S9009). Thereafter, the type counter update process provided in the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S9010).

  The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify a display data transmission target in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt process. When the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is a transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is a transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data in the fourth display data buffer 274 is If the type counter value is “5”, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is the transmission target. In the type counter update process, 1 is added to the value of the type counter, and when the value of the type counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the upper limit “5”, the value of the type counter is set to “1”. . As a result, the display data transmission target is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 for each processing time of the second timer interrupt process.

  Thereafter, type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S9011). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second value is read. When the type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64 and the value of the type counter is “3”, the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64 and the value of the type counter is If “4”, the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and if the value of the type counter is “5”, the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read. Read from the side ROM 64.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S9012). Specifically, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271 when the value of the type counter is “1”, and is read from the second display data buffer 272 when the value of the type counter is “2”. When the display data is read, the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273 when the value of the type counter is “3”, and from the fourth display data buffer 274 when the value of the type counter is “4”. The display data is read, and when the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

  Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S9013). In the transmission process, signal output is performed on the classification data signal line LN1 and the classification clock signal line LN2 so that the classification data read in step S9011 is transmitted to the display IC 266. Further, in the transmission process, signal output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is performed so that the display data read in step S9012 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Thereafter, in order to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), an interrupt permission is set (step S9014).

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the normal setting process in step S9007 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Note that the processing in steps S9101 to S9109 in the normal setting processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more (step S9101). When the value of the checking counter is 1 or more (step S9101: YES), it means that it is an initial check period. In this case, the check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9102). The display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is display data for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as already described. In addition, the check display data is display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the display for check, that is, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is display data for setting all the display segments 321 to 324 to the light emitting state. As the check display data is supplied to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128B, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 serve as check displays. The display segments 321 to 324 are in a light emitting state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be normally in a light emitting state.

  Here, the initial check period can be canceled when confirming the setting or updating the setting value. Such a cancelable configuration will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed in step S8815 of the main process (FIG. 132). Note that the processing from step S9201 to step S9206 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, an operation instruction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S9201). Upon receiving the operation instruction command, the sound emission control device 81 outputs a sound “Please operate the reset button 68 c” from the speaker unit 54. The notification is continued until the reset button 68c is pressed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9202). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed, the process waits in step S9202. When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9202: YES), the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S9203). This cancels the initial check period.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to a setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9204). When “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) makes an affirmative determination in step S9005 as already described, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are used. In the fifth display data buffer 275, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed at 204 and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9006). Accordingly, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that indicates that the setting value is being confirmed and display that indicates the current setting value. Is done.

  Thereafter, on condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step S9205: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S9206). Thereby, the display which shows the present setting value of the pachinko machine 10, and the display which shows the present setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notifications. Is released. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

  When the setting confirmation process is started as described above, the initial check period is canceled halfway on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The set value is notified. Thereby, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and main processing (FIG. 132) is started in the main CPU 63, processing at the start of supplying operating power in the main processing is executed. Even when the initial check period is started and the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the operation is performed, the process at the start of supplying the operating power is executed. When confirming the set value in the current situation, it is possible to cancel the initial check period and display the current set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, the set value can be confirmed without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

  Even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period starts first, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is possible to confirm the set value after confirming whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 can be normally in a light emitting state. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing executed in step S8819 of the main processing (FIG. 132). In addition, the process of step S9301-step S9310 in a setting value update process is performed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main side CPU63.

  First, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S9301). Upon receiving the update start command, the voice light emission control device 81 outputs a voice “setting is being changed” from the speaker unit 54. The notification is continued until the set value update process is completed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to “setting 1” and 6 or less corresponding to “setting 6” (step). S9302). If the value of the set value counter is “0” or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S9302 and “1” is set in the set value counter (step S9303). Thereby, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S9302 or if the process of step S9303 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off using the setting key (step S9304). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state.

  If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned OFF (step S9304: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9305). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9305: YES), on condition that “1” is not set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9306: NO). In addition, “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step S9307), and the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S9308).

  The initial check period is canceled when the checking counter is cleared to “0”. Further, by setting “1” in the setting update display flag, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) makes an affirmative determination in step S9003 as already described, and the first to fourth notification display devices. Display data for displaying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in 201 to 204 and the display data for displaying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth display data buffer 275. Store (step S9004). As a result, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that indicates that the setting value is being updated and display that indicates the current setting value. Is done.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S9306, or when the process of step S9308 is executed, the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S9309). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to one level higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S9305: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S9302, but the set value counter is updated in step S9302. If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, “1” is set to the set value counter in step S9303. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting returns to “setting 1”.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step 9304: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S9310). Thereby, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. The state to be released is released. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

  When the set value update process is executed as described above, the initial check period is canceled halfway on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The set value is notified. Thereby, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and main processing (FIG. 132) is started in the main CPU 63, processing at the start of supplying operating power in the main processing is executed. Even when the initial check period is started and the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the operation is performed, the process at the start of supplying the operating power is executed. When the set value is updated in the current situation, it is possible to cancel the initial check period and display the current set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to update the set value while confirming the current set value without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

  Further, even when the set value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period starts first, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is possible to update the set value after confirming whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 can be normally in a light emitting state. As a result, the set value can be updated accurately.

  In addition, the initial check period is canceled when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 137). Thereby, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the set value, the initial check period is canceled accordingly, and the operability for canceling the initial check period can be improved. Become.

  Returning to the description of the normal setting process (FIG. 135), when the value of the checking counter is “0” and not the initial check period (step S9101: NO), the non-specific control work area 223 is provided. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag (step S9103). If “1” is not set in the management start flag (step S9103: NO), the pre-management start display setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9104). In the setting process, display data for setting all display segments 321 and 322 in the light emitting state in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. The first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are not limited to the configuration in which all the display segments 321 and 322 are in a light emitting state, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are not limited to the configuration. A configuration may be adopted in which blinking display is performed in all the display segments 321 and 322 in each of 202.

  Thereafter, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control is read (step S9105), and the read calculation result data is read to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. The display data to be applied is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9106). As described above, in the display process (FIG. 131), when “1” is not set in the management start flag (step S8701: NO), the base value is read from the current area 311 and the first decimal point in the read base value is read. The calculation result data corresponding to the first digit and the second digit of the decimal point is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). In step S9106, the calculation result data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

  As the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9104 and step S9106 is supplied to the display IC 266, the first and second notification displays are displayed as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the situation where all the display segments 321 and 322 are in the light emitting state in each of the devices 201 and 202, the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period by the third notification display device 203 Are displayed, and the fourth informing display device 204 displays the number of the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. In each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the numbers corresponding to the base values are displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 while all the display segments 321 and 322 are in a light emitting state. By doing so, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the currently reported base value is a base value in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag.

  Further, in the situation where “1” is set in the management start flag, as already explained, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the second The base value to be notified is switched in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a predetermined order of 2 history area 313 to 3rd history area 314, while the management start flag is set to “ In a situation where “1” is not set, the base value of the current area 311 is maintained as a notification target. Thereby, when the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the shipment stage of the pachinko machine 10, the current base value can be confirmed at an arbitrary timing.

  When “1” is set in the management start flag (step S9103: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control is read, and the read display data is read as the first display data. 5 is set in the display data buffer 275 (step S9107). If the display data is supplied to the display IC 266 and the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127 (a) is for the first to fourth notifications. If the base value of the first history area 312 is a notification target that is displayed on the display devices 201 to 204, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127 (b) is displayed for the first to fourth notifications. If the base value of the second history area 313 is a notification target, the display shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127 (c) is displayed on the first to fourth notification devices. If the base value of the third history area 314 is a notification target, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127 (d) is displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201. ~ 204.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S9108). The initial display flag is a first notification in order to notify that the base value is an initial calculation base value after the start of the calculation period in the situation where the base value of the current area 311 is a notification target as described above. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 should be blinked. When “1” is set in the initial display flag (step S9108: YES), the flashing setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9109).

  In the blink setting process, when the display corresponding to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display is blinked. Make settings to make it work. Specifically, the display data for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as the setting for causing the display to blink. Corresponding data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and then all the display segments 321 and 322 of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off. Data to be set is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined extinction period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and thereafter, the predetermined lighting period and the predetermined extinction period are alternately repeated. As a result, when the base value in the current area 311 becomes a notification target immediately after the start of the new calculation period of the base value, the calculation initial display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. The management of the game hall may be made aware that the current base value reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is immediately after the start of a new calculation period. It becomes possible.

  Next, display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 138. FIG. 138 (a) shows the initial check period, and FIG. 138 (b) shows the base value in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag. 138 (c) shows the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in sequence. 138 (d) shows a display indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 are first to fourth. FIG. 138 (e) shows a display period indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the current state of the pachinko machine 10 and the display period during the setting update performed in the notification display devices 201 to 204. Setting value It shows the setting confirmation during a display period that is performed in the display is the first to fourth notification display device 201 to 204 shown, FIG. 138 (f) shows the timing of the reset button 68c is pressed.

  First, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1”, a setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) A case where the set value update process (FIG. 137) is not executed will be described.

  At the timing of t1, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138 (a). Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128B, the display for check is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the initial check period ends without being canceled halfway as shown in FIG. 138 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), the pre-management display period starts at the timing t2. In the display period before the start of management, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128C, in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, all the display segments 321 and 322 are in the light emitting state, On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, a number corresponding to the current base value is displayed.

  After that, at the timing of t3, in the situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag and neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode due to the jackpot result, the game balls discharged from the game area PA The total number (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the management start reference number that is smaller than the shift reference number. As a result, when the management start flag is set to “1”, the pre-management display period ends as shown in FIG. 138 (b). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 138 (c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Will be notified sequentially.

  Next, in the situation where “1” is set in the management start flag, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) is performed in the processing at the start of operating power supply. ) And the setting value update process (FIG. 137) are not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the initial check period starts at the timing of t4. Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128B, the display for check is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), the initial check period ends without being canceled halfway. In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 138 (c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Will be notified sequentially.

  Next, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, the set value update processing (FIG. 137) is performed in the processing at the start of operating power supply. ) Will be described.

  At the timing of t6, the initial check period is started as shown in FIG. 138 (a). Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128B, the display for check is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, set value update processing (FIG. 137) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 138 (f). As a result, the initial check period is ended halfway at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 138 (a), and the display period during setting update is started at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 138 (d). The

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (d), the display period during setting update ends at the timing of t8. In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 138 (c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Will be notified sequentially.

  Next, in the situation where “1” is set in the management start flag, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) is performed in the processing at the start of operating power supply. ) Will be described.

  At the timing of t9, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138 (a). Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128B, the display for check is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 138 (f). As a result, the initial check period ends in the middle as shown in FIG. 138 (a) at the timing of t10, and the display period during setting confirmation starts as shown in FIG. 138 (e) at the timing of t10. The

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (e), the display period during setting confirmation ends at the timing of t11. In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t11 as shown in FIG. 138 (c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Will be notified sequentially.

  It should be noted that the setting confirmation process is performed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the management start flag is not set to “1” (FIG. 136). Alternatively, when the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed and the initial check period is canceled halfway, the display period before the start of management is started after the display period during setting update or the display period during setting confirmation is ended. It will be.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  As a check display, an initial check period in which each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state may occur. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 is in a light emitting state, and confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. It becomes possible to do.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Thereby, when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

  Each time the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Thereby, it is possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal each time the supply of operating power is started.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started without requiring any special operation. Thereby, it becomes possible to make it easy to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

  Even when the initial check period has not elapsed, when a cancel trigger occurs, the above-described check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is terminated halfway. Thereby, even during the initial check period, it is possible to end the above-mentioned display for check and cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform another display.

  In the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed, the initial check period is started and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are started. At 204, the check display is started. Thereby, it is possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before the game is started.

  In a configuration in which processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, in a configuration in which predetermined setting related processing such as setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) and setting value update processing (FIG. 137) is executed, start of supply of operating power The initial check period is started in the situation where the time process is being executed. As a result, it is possible to consolidate not only predetermined setting-related processing but also processing for starting the initial check period with respect to processing at the start of supply of operating power.

  In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137), these predetermined settings are used in the configuration in which the display corresponding to the current setting value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Before the related process is executed, an initial check period is started, and the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thus, after confirming whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, the current set values are confirmed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, the set value can be confirmed accurately.

  Based on the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the set value update process (FIG. 137) in the situation of the initial check period, even if the initial check period has not elapsed, the first to fourth notifications are used. The check display on the display devices 201 to 204 is terminated halfway. Thereby, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the set value update process (FIG. 137) is executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 do not have to wait for the initial check period to elapse. It is possible to display the current set values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by terminating the above-described checking process in 204. Therefore, the current set value can be confirmed at an early stage.

  When the setting check process (FIG. 136) or the set value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the situation of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed, the initial check period has elapsed. Even if it does not exist, the display for checking in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is terminated halfway. As a result, the initial check period can be ended at an arbitrary timing after the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 137) is started. For example, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the set value update process (FIG. 137) is started, the game hall manager sufficiently confirms that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. After confirming the above, it is possible to end the above-mentioned display for checking in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and start displaying the current set values.

  In the setting value update process (FIG. 137), the setting value to be selected is updated by pressing the reset button 68c. In this case, when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above, the display for checking is ended in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display of the current set value is started. By doing so, a dedicated operation for ending the display for checking and starting the display of the current set value is not necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the set value.

  The calculation result storage area 234 stores a plurality of base values derived using information in the normal counter area 231 in different periods. As a result, it is possible to grasp the base value in a plurality of periods, so that it is possible to accurately grasp the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA.

  The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current area 311 in which the latest base value is stored and first to third history areas 312 to 314 in which base values derived earlier are stored. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to grasp not only the latest one but also the past one in the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA.

  Base values that are repeatedly calculated at a relatively short period before one calculation period elapses are stored in the current area 311, and the base values calculated when one calculation period elapses are the first to third base values. Stored in the history areas 312 to 314. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the latest ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA, and to grasp the above-mentioned ratio in the past in one calculation period. Is possible. Moreover, since the base value in the unit of one calculation period is stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, the number of base values stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314 is suppressed. It becomes possible.

  Based on the elapse of one calculation period, the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the normal counter area 231. Even if the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to “0” as described above, the base values calculated when one calculation period has passed are the first to third base values. Since it is stored in the history areas 312 to 314, it becomes possible to grasp the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA in the past calculation period later.

  A plurality of history areas 312 to 314 are provided as areas for storing past base values. Thereby, it becomes possible to compare base values in a plurality of past calculation periods.

  The base values stored in each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain the base value in a some calculation period separately, suppressing the number of the apparatuses 201-204 for alerting | reporting.

  Even when the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored and the occurrence of a power failure is identified by executing the power failure information storage process (step S8901). Processing at power failure is executed. As a result, when a power failure occurs in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

  In the configuration in which the power failure information storage process (step S8901) is included in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer interrupt process is performed even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. Interrupted and activated. As a result, it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power outage even in a situation where processing at the start of supplying operating power is being performed.

  The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated even when the remaining process is being executed after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. As a result, it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed using the first timer interrupt process that is activated by interrupting the remaining process. Become.

  If the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the startup process in progress flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “ When “1” is set, processing for advancing the game is not executed. As a result, even in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the first timer interrupt process is interrupted and activated to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed.

  In the configuration in which the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the power failure information even in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed A storage process (step S8901) is executed. As a result, even if a power failure occurs during the setting of the setting value to be used, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

  The check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to a configuration that is ended when the initial check period has elapsed, and an operation for ending the check display. It is good also as a structure by which the said display for a check is continued until is performed. For example, the reset button 68c may be operated regardless of whether the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed. Alternatively, an operation unit other than the reset button 68c may be operated. In this case, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until the base value or the set value is confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the base value or the set value after confirming whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Further, since the display for check is terminated based on the operation of the operation unit, the display for check can be terminated at a desired timing.

  In addition, when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated regardless of whether the supply of operating power is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used for checking. The display may be configured to start. In this case, the check display can be started at a desired timing when the base value or the set value is confirmed. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or a different operation from the predetermined operation unit. The display for checking may be terminated when the operation unit is operated.

  In addition, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c such as the update button 68b is operated, the display devices 201 to 204 of the first to fourth notifications are displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which the display for check is not started when the display for check is started and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without operating the specific operation unit. In this case, in the configuration in which the check display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the game hall manager.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, it is not limited to the configuration in which the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. May be configured such that the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when it is specified based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 that the device is in the open state. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, first, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started, and then the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are started. The base value may be displayed at 204. Thereby, before confirming the base value, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or a different operation from the predetermined operation unit. The display for checking may be terminated when the operation unit is operated.

  Further, when the main process (FIG. 132) is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed. If the main process is started without satisfying the condition for executing the setting confirmation process without being started, the check display may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display for checking from being performed when it is determined that the setting value is confirmed.

  Further, when the main process (FIG. 132) is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update process (FIG. 137) is satisfied, the display for check of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed. When the main process is started without satisfying the condition for executing the set value update process without being started, the display for check may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is determined that the set value is updated.

  When the main process (FIG. 132) is started in a state where either the condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the condition for executing the set value update process (FIG. 137) is satisfied. The main process in a state where both the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process and the conditions for executing the set value update process are not satisfied without the display for checking of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 being started. The display for checking may be configured to start when is started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is confirmed that the setting value is confirmed or the setting value is updated.

  Moreover, in the display for a check, it is not limited to the structure by which each display segment 321-324 in each of the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display apparatuses 201-204 is maintained in a light emission state, The 1st-4th alerting | reporting. The display segments 321 to 324 in the display devices 201 to 204 may be in a blinking state. Further, in the display for check, each of the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is sequentially turned on one by one or a plurality of parts, and the range of the initial check period The display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state at least once.

  In addition, the process for performing the display for check in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control. It is good also as a structure performed as.

  When no base value is stored in any of the first to third history areas 312 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, the history areas 312 to 314 are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is good also as a structure which is not a notification target in -204. In this case, for example, when base values are stored in the current status area 311 and the first history area 312, but base values are not stored in the second history area 313 and the third history area 314, the display continuation period Each time, the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is switched between the current area 311 and the first history area 312, and the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 are It will not be a notification target.

  Further, the current value area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 store base values expressed as decimal numbers up to the second decimal place. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information on the combination of the first digit of the decimal point and the second digit of the decimal point in the base value may be stored. The total number of game balls to be calculated (K91 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K92 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K93 × “the number The number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33 + K94 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the second operating port 34”) and the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K). 4 + K95) may be configured to a combination of the information is stored with. In the former case, it is possible to set the information of the various areas 311 to 314 as they are in the display target setting area 276, and in the latter case, the base value is calculated after using the information of the various areas 311 to 314. Information about the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number extracted from the base value is set in the display target setting area 276.

  Further, the calculation result storage area 234 may be configured to include only the current area 311 and the first history area 312 as areas for storing the base value. Only two history areas 313 may be provided. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which four or more areas are provided as history areas for storing past base value information.

  In addition, the calculation result storage area 234 has various areas 311 to 314 fixed on the address, and the base value is not limited to the configuration in which the various areas 311 to 314 are shifted as necessary. ˜314 may be provided as ring buffers.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the base value is calculated as the aspect information, the 61st to 68th parameters may be calculated as in the fifteenth embodiment. In this case, all of the 61st to 68th parameters may be stored in each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. The current area 311 may store the 61st to 68th parameters, but the first to third history areas 312 to 314 may store some parameters such as only the 61st parameter.

  In addition to or instead of the base value, the occurrence probability of the jackpot result may be calculated and stored as the aspect information, or the occurrence probability of the high frequency support mode may be calculated and stored.

  Also, the trigger for shifting the base value in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is limited to the case where the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the shift reference number. Instead, the shift may be performed when a predetermined period (for example, 8 hours) elapses, or the shift may be performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The shift may be performed when the supply of operating power to the CPU 63 is started, or the shift may be performed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where there are multiple kinds of triggers for the shift.

  Further, until “1” is set to the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the display segments 321 and 322 in the first and second notification display devices 202 are in the light-emitting state. The display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 may be in a blinking state. Further, until “1” is set in the management start flag, “bL .--” → “b1 .--” → “b2 .--” → in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 → The display of “b3 .--” may be repeated.

  In addition, until “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the light emission state or the blinking state without performing the display for checking to be in the light emission state, and the third and fourth notifications. The display corresponding to the fact that “1” is not set in the management start flag may be performed such that the display corresponding to the current base value is performed on the display devices 203 and 204 for use.

  Also, if the game stop flag is set to “1” because the power failure flag is not set to “1” or the check sum does not match, the progress of the game is stopped. In the display devices 201 to 204, the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state as in the check display, and the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a blinking state.

  Further, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration performed by the main CPU 63, and may be configured by dedicated control means, and the sound emission control device 81. The configuration may be performed by the display control device 82. In this case, when the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. When displaying the set value on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the set value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. In addition, when processing at the start of supply of operating power is executed in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. Thus, information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control entity so that the check display is started.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 35th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing in steps S9401 to S9426 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  In steps S9401 to S9403, the same processes as those in steps S8801 to S8803 of the main process (FIG. 132) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S9404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. However, since “1” is set in the startup process flag in step S9403, even if the first timer interrupt process is started, outage monitoring and various counters of the various processes of the first timer interrupt process are started. While the process for performing update and fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the process for advancing the game.

  After that, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9405). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter is “0” (step S9406). Then, the process waits in step S 9406 until the value of the checking counter becomes “0”. Thereby, the display for check in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is continued until the initial check period set in step S9405 elapses.

  Then, the process of step S9407-step S9426 is performed. The processing content of these steps S9407 to S9426 is the same as that of steps S8806 to S8825 of the main processing (FIG. 132) in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and processing at the start of supplying operating power is started in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The check display is performed, and the progress of the process at the start of the supply of operating power is stopped until the initial check period elapses in that situation. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation and the setting value update from being executed during the initial check period, and it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in the middle of the initial check period.

<Thirty-seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 35th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S9501 to step S9525 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  In steps S9501 to S9518, the same processes as those in steps S7901 to S7918 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9519). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, the processing after step S9520 is executed. The processing content of steps S9520 to S9525 is the same as that of steps S7919 to S7924 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the processing (step S9501 to step S9518) at the start of the supply of operating power is completed in the main CPU 63. Before the (step S9522 to step S9525) is started, the initial check period is started. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, and thus the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation processing (step S9514) and the setting value update processing (step S9518) are executed as processing at the start of supply of operating power, whereas processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the initial check period. Will be started later. As a result, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set value is displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (step S9514). In any case where neither S9514) nor the set value update process (step S9518) is executed, the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In the main process (FIG. 140) of the main CPU 63, when either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting are performed. This is a process that is executed in common even if neither of the value update processes (step S9518) is executed, and any of the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the set value update process (step S9518). Is executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked as processing subsequent to the setting confirmation processing (step S9514) and the setting value update processing (step S9518). The process for starting the display is set. As described above, the process for starting the display for checking in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as a common process, so that the processing configuration can be simplified and the superiority as described above is achieved. It is possible to achieve the effect.

  Even in a situation where the display for check is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. Thereby, even if it is the structure by which the display for a check is performed in the display apparatuses 201-204 for 1st-4th after execution of the process for setting confirmation (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518), a game is played. It is possible to prevent the start timing of processing for progress from being delayed.

  It should be noted that the process after step S9520 may not be started until the initial check period elapses. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a situation where the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

<Thirty-eighth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the normal setting process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a normal setting process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing in steps S9601 to S9605 in the normal setting processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S9601). If “1” is not set in the management start flag (step S9601: NO), the display data for check is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9602). When the check display data is supplied to the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start the check display. Specifically, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments 321 to 324 are in a light emitting state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be normally in a light emitting state.

  If “1” is set in the management start flag (step S9601: YES), the processing of steps S9603 to S9605 is executed. The processing contents of steps S9603 to S9605 are the same as steps S9107 to S9109 in the normal setting process (FIG. 135) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. By executing the processing of step S9603 to step S9605, the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, when the base value of the current area 311 is notified immediately after the start of the new calculation period, the calculation initial display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202.

  According to the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to “1”, the initial check period during which the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. As a result, the situation in which the initial check period is started when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started is limited to a situation in which “1” is not set in the management start flag in the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Is possible.

<Thirty-ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the set value is different from that in the thirty-third embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the thirty-third embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  142 (a) to 142 (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 325 provided in the main ROM 64. FIG.

  The setting correspondence storage area 325 corresponds to the set value of the pachinko machine 10, and the low probability mode success / failure table, the high probability mode success / failure table, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115), and the set value update process (FIG. 116). The display data of the setting values used for displaying the current setting values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are set. More specifically, the setting correspondence storage area 325 includes a first setting information storage area 325a, a second setting information storage area 325b, a third setting information storage area 325c, a fourth setting information storage area 325d, and a fifth setting information storage area. 325e and a sixth setting information storage area 325f are provided.

  Each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f has a storage area for storing a success / failure table of the low probability mode referred to when the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a success / failure lottery mode. A storage area for storing a high-probability mode success / failure table to be referred to in the case of the high-probability mode, and the first to fourth notifications in the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 115) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 116) A storage area for storing display data of setting values used for displaying the current setting values on the display devices 201 to 204 is provided. In each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, a predetermined multiple-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing a low probability mode determination table, and the high probability mode determination table is stored. A predetermined multi-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing data, and a 1-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing display data of setting values. Accordingly, each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f has a storage capacity of a plurality of bytes. In this case, the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a is A (1), the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b is A (2), and the third setting information storage area 325c. The start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is A (4), and the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e is A (5). The start address of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is A (6).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first form in the present embodiment in the above configuration, as the set values of the pachinko machine 10, set values in six stages of “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment. ing. In this case, the probability of being a jackpot result in the low probability mode is different for each of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the probability of being a jackpot result in the high probability mode is the same. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the first setting information storage area 325a, a first low probability determination table LT (corresponding to “setting 1” in the storage area for storing the probability table of the low probability mode is stored. 1) is stored, and a common high-accuracy determination table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the determination table of high probability mode. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in a storage area for storing display data. In the second setting information storage area 325b, a second low-probability table LT (2) corresponding to “setting 2” is stored in a storage area for storing the low-probability mode success / failure table. A common high-accuracy acceptance table HT that is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table, and the storage area for storing the display data of the set values is stored in the storage area. Display data for displaying “2” is stored.

  In the third setting information storage area 325c, a third low-accuracy determination table LT (3) corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in a storage area for storing the determination table of the low-probability mode. A common high-accuracy acceptance table HT that is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table, and the storage area for storing the display data of the set values is stored in the storage area. Display data for displaying “3” is stored. In the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a fourth low probability determination table LT (4) corresponding to “setting 4” is stored in the storage area for storing the determination table of low probability mode. A common high-accuracy acceptance table HT that is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table, and the storage area for storing the display data of the set values is stored in the storage area. Display data for displaying “4” is stored.

  In the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the fifth low probability determination table LT (5) corresponding to “setting 5” is stored in the storage area for storing the determination table of low probability mode. A common high-accuracy acceptance table HT that is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table, and the storage area for storing the display data of the set values is stored in the storage area. Display data for displaying “5” is stored. In the sixth setting information storage area 325f, a sixth low probability determination table LT (6) corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the determination table of low probability mode. A common high-accuracy acceptance table HT that is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table, and the storage area for storing the display data of the set values is stored in the storage area. Display data for displaying “6” is stored.

  In the case of the configuration of the first embodiment, the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode increases as the set value increases. On the other hand, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is the same regardless of the set value. Since the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability mode in “Setting 6” even in “Setting 1”. High probability.

  In the first mode in which “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as the setting values, in order to execute the success / failure determination processing in step S504 of the special figure change start processing (FIG. 13), it is executed in step S503. A process for reading the validity table will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing read / write table read processing. Note that the processing from step S9701 to step S9705 in the read / write table read processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9701). Which of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325 should be referred to when the set value counter reads the success / failure table and when the set value display data is read. Is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify.

  After that, among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325, a storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9701 is selected (step S9702). The set value counter is configured to take one of the values “1” to “6” as in the thirty-third embodiment, and the first value is set when the value of the set value counter is “1”. When the setting information storage area 325a is selected, the second setting information storage area 325b is selected when the value of the setting value counter is “2”, and the third value when the value of the setting value counter is “3”. When the setting information storage area 325c is selected and the value of the setting value counter is “4”, the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is “5”, the fifth setting information storage area 325c is selected. The setting information storage area 325e is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is “6”, the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected.

  For this selection, a correspondence table stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. The correspondence table defines the correspondence between the value of the setting value counter and the start addresses of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Specifically, A (1), which is the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a, is set in correspondence with the value “1” of the setting value counter, and corresponds to the value “2” of the setting value counter. Thus, A (2), which is the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b, is set, and A, which is the start address of the third setting information storage area 325c, corresponding to the value “3” of the setting value counter. (3) is set, and A (4) which is the start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is set in correspondence with the value of “4” of the setting value counter, and “5” of the setting value counter is set. A (5), which is the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e, is set in correspondence with the value of “6”, and in the sixth setting information storage area 325f in correspondence with the value of “6” of the setting value counter. Is the start address A (6) has been set.

  Thereafter, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode (step S9703: NO), the low probability mode success / failure table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9704). On the other hand, if the current lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S9703: YES), the high probability mode success / failure table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9705).

  By executing the read / write table read process as described above, the pass / fail table corresponding to the current pass / fail lottery mode is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the value of the set value counter. Then, in the success / failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the jackpot result using the read / failed table.

  Next, a description will be given of a process when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated in a situation where the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63. To do. In this case, in the second timer interruption process (FIG. 123), the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting value update is executed (step S8403). FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. Note that the processing from step S9801 to step S9805 in the setting processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9801). After that, among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting corresponding storage area 325, the storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9801 is selected (step S9802). The set value counter is configured to take one of the values “1” to “6” as in the thirty-third embodiment, and the first value is set when the value of the set value counter is “1”. When the setting information storage area 325a is selected, the second setting information storage area 325b is selected when the value of the setting value counter is “2”, and the third value when the value of the setting value counter is “3”. When the setting information storage area 325c is selected and the value of the setting value counter is “4”, the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is “5”, the fifth setting information storage area 325c is selected. The setting information storage area 325e is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is “6”, the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected. When this selection is made, the correspondence table stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to in the same manner as the determination process of the success / failure table (FIG. 143).

  Thereafter, display data of setting values is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9802 (step S9803). Then, the display data of the read set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step S9804). Further, display data for displaying on the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 a display indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9805).

  By executing the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9805 is the first to first display. The third notification display devices 201 to 203 perform the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9804 on the fourth notification display device 204. Thereby, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124A, a display indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 are first displayed. To the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Note that the setting executed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated while the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63. Also in the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during confirmation (step S8405), the setting value display data setting is the same as the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 144). The process is executed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, six setting values “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, but depending on the model and model of the pachinko machine 10. In some cases, a setting value smaller than 6 levels may be used. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142 (b), three setting values “setting 1”, “setting 3”, and “setting 6” are set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third form shown in the explanatory diagram of 142 (c), four levels of setting values “setting 1”, “setting 2”, “setting 3”, and “setting 4” are set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth form shown in the explanatory diagram of (d), only one set value of “setting 1” is set. In this case, the first to sixth setting information storages that enable setting of six stages of setting values, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first form, in any of the pachinko machines 10 of the second to fourth forms. A setting correspondence storage area 325 having areas 325a to 325f is used.

  As for the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142 (b), the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area Various information corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in 325d. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the first low-probability table LT (1 corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in the storage area for storing the low-probability mode determination table. ) Is stored, the first high-accuracy determination table HT (1) corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in the storage area for storing the determination table of high probability mode, and the display data of the set value is displayed. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in the storage area for storing.

  Various information corresponding to “Setting 3” is stored in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e. That is, in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the third low-probability table LT (3 corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the storage area for storing the low-probability mode determination table. ) Is stored, and a third high-accuracy determination table HT (3) corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the storage area for storing the high-probability mode determination table. Display data for displaying “3” is stored in the storage area for storing.

  Various information corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the sixth low-probability table LT (6 corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the low-probability mode determination table. ) Is stored, and a sixth high-accuracy determination table HT (6) corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the determination table for high probability mode. Display data for displaying “6” is stored in the storage area for storing.

  In the case of the configuration of the second form, even if the configuration correspondence storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used. The set value of the number of steps smaller than the number of 6 is set. Then, the probability of a big hit result in the low probability mode increases as the set value increases, and the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode increases as the set value increases. The jackpot probability in the high probability mode in “Setting 1” is higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability mode in “Setting 6”.

  In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, in the determination process of the success / failure table (FIG. 143), it corresponds to “setting 1” regardless of whether the value of the setting value counter is “1” or “4”. The success / failure table is read, and the success / failure table corresponding to “setting 3” is read regardless of whether the value of the setting value counter is “2” or “5”, and the value of the setting value counter is In both cases of “3” and “6”, the success / failure table corresponding to “setting 6” is read.

  The validity table reading process (FIG. 143) is configured to read the validity table from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of setting value stages. As a result, even when three levels of setting values are set, the processing configuration of the acceptance table read processing (FIG. 143) is the same as that when the six levels of setting values are set. It becomes possible.

  In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, when the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting six steps of setting values is used, since three steps of setting values are set, the setting correspondence storage area 325 can be set. It is possible to divide the number of steps of the set value by the number of steps of the set value to be used. That is, the number of steps of the set value to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of steps of the set value that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325 and is different from the maximum number of steps. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is assigned to each setting value to be used, and one group of three-stage setting values is arranged in ascending order. In this case, setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated. Thereby, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the setting value counter is “1” in the setting value update processing (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set values displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” →. In other words, the display is changed to display different set values for one operation of the reset button 68c, and when a set value that can be set is displayed once, the display of a certain mode is displayed. The lap will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easy to perform a setting value update operation.

  In the setting process (FIG. 144) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update, the setting value display from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter is possible regardless of the number of setting value stages. This is a configuration for reading data. As a result, even when three levels of setting values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) is the same as that when six levels of setting values are set. It becomes possible.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second form, various information corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, and the third setting information storage area 325c and the second setting information storage area 325b are stored. Various information corresponding to “Setting 3” is stored in the 4 setting information storage area 325d, and various information corresponding to “Setting 6” is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. It is good also as composition which has. In other words, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are assigned to each setting value to be used, and the same setting value continues in relation to the value of the setting value counter. It is good also as a structure set to 325a-325f. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is “1” in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set values displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “1” → “3” → “3” → “6” → “6” → “1” →.

  In the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the third form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142 (c), the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area Various information corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in 325b. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, the first low-probability table LT (1 corresponding to “setting 1” in the storage area for storing the low-probability mode determination table. ) Is stored, and a common high-accuracy determination table HT that is common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the determination table of high probability mode. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in a storage area for storing data.

  Various information corresponding to “setting 2” is stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the second low-probability table LT (2) corresponding to “setting 2” is stored in the storage area for storing the low-probability mode determination table. ) Is stored, and a common high-accuracy determination table HT that is common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the determination table of high probability mode. Display data for displaying “2” is stored in a storage area for storing data.

  Various information corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e. That is, in the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the third low probability determination table LT (3) corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the storage area for storing the determination table of low probability mode. A common high-accuracy acceptance table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the probability mode success / failure table, and a storage area for storing display data of the set value Display data for displaying “3” is stored.

  Various information corresponding to “setting 4” is stored in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the fourth low probability determination table LT (4) corresponding to “setting 4” is stored in the storage area for storing the determination table of low probability mode. A common high-accuracy acceptance table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the probability mode success / failure table, and a storage area for storing display data of the set value Display data for displaying “4” is stored.

  In the case of the configuration of the third mode, even if the configuration correspondence storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used. The set value of the number of steps smaller than the number of 6 is set. The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode increases as the set value increases, and the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode becomes the same regardless of the set value. Since the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability mode in “Setting 4” even in “Setting 1”. High probability.

  In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, in the validity table read process (FIG. 143), the setting value counter corresponds to “setting 1” regardless of whether the value of the setting value counter is “1” or “2”. The success / failure table is read out, and the success / failure table corresponding to “setting 2” is read out regardless of whether the value of the setting value counter is “3” or “4”, and the value of the setting value counter is In the case of “5”, the success / failure table corresponding to “setting 3” is read out, and in the case where the value of the setting value counter is “6”, the success / failure table corresponding to “setting 4” is read out.

  The validity table reading process (FIG. 143) is configured to read the validity table from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of setting value stages. As a result, even when four levels of setting values are set, the processing configuration of the acceptance table reading process (FIG. 143) is the same as that when the six levels of setting values are set. It becomes possible.

  In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, when the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting six steps of setting values is used, the setting correspondence storage area 325 can be set because four steps of setting values are set. The number of steps of the set value cannot be divided by the number of steps of the set value to be used. In this case, for each of “setting 1” and “setting 2”, two continuous setting information storage areas 325a to 325d are allocated in relation to the value of the setting value counter, and “setting 3” and “setting 3” For each “setting 4”, one setting information storage area 325e, 325f is allocated. Thereby, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the setting value counter is “1” in the setting value update processing (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set values displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “1” → “2” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “1” →.

  In the setting process (FIG. 144) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update, the setting value display from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter is possible regardless of the number of setting value stages. This is a configuration for reading data. As a result, even when four levels of setting values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) is the same as that when six levels of setting values are set. It becomes possible.

  In the setting value update process (FIG. 116), in order to change the display of the setting values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for one operation of the reset button 68c, It is preferable that various information corresponding to the same set value is not set in the set information storage areas 325a to 325f that are continuous in relation to the value of the set value counter. For example, various information corresponding to “Setting 1” is set in the first setting information storage area 325a, various information corresponding to “Setting 2” is set in the second setting information storage area 325b, and the third setting information storage area is set. Various information corresponding to “Setting 3” is set in 325c, various information corresponding to “Setting 4” is set in the fourth setting information storage area 325d, and “Setting 1” is corresponding in the fifth setting information storage area 325e. A configuration is conceivable in which various information to be set is set and various information corresponding to “setting 2” is set in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is “1” in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set values displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “1” → “2” → “1” →.

  In the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142 (d), all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f In the table, various information corresponding to “Setting 1” is stored. That is, in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the first low probability determination table LT (1) corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in the storage area for storing the determination table of the low probability mode. In the storage area for storing the high-probability mode success / failure table, a common high-accuracy acceptability table HT that is common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored, and display data of the set value is stored. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in the storage area for storing the data.

  In the case of the configuration of the fourth embodiment, only one type of setting value is set even in a configuration in which the setting correspondence storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used. Even in a configuration in which only one type of setting value is set as described above, the determination table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the determination table reading process (FIG. 143). is there. As a result, even when only one type of setting value is set, the processing configuration of the acceptance table reading process (FIG. 143) is the same processing configuration as when six levels of setting values are set. It becomes possible to do.

  In the case of the configuration of the fourth embodiment, since it is not necessary to set the set value, it is basically unnecessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 116). However, if a set value abnormality occurs, the set value An update process (FIG. 116) may be performed. In this case, “setting 1” is assigned to all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Therefore, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is “1” in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used. As for the set value to be displayed, “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” →. It will be.

  In the setting process (FIG. 144) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update, the setting value display from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter is possible regardless of the number of setting value stages. This is a configuration for reading data. Thus, even when only one type of setting value is set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) is the same processing configuration as when six levels of setting values are set. Is possible.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects a more advantageous setting value to be used. It will be. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second to fourth forms, the first predetermined number (specifically six) of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f for storing the success / failure table corresponding to the set value is provided. In the configuration, the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number. This makes it possible to share the configuration related to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in which the number of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number and the setting correspondence storage area 325, and change the number of types of setting values. In this case, the design work of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily performed.

  In the set value update process (step S7918), the set value to be used is changed by changing the numerical information of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control every time the reset button 68c is operated. The use determination process is executed in a manner corresponding to the setting value to be used by using the determination table of the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the changed numerical information in the determination process. Become. In this case, each success / failure table of setting values that can be set is stored in at least one setting information storage area 325a to 325f, and is a part of the first predetermined number and stores a plurality of setting information storages. Since the same success / failure table is stored in the areas 325a to 325f, the success / failure table is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. As a result, the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used as they are, and the configuration for determining the setting values to be used using the setting value counter is used as it is, while the setting values to be used are set. It is possible to make the number of types smaller than the first predetermined number.

  In this configuration, the success / failure table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical value information of the setting value counter, and the success / failure determination process is executed using the read / failed table. As a result, even when the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, it is possible to directly use the configuration for reading the success / failure table when executing the success / failure determination processing. .

  In the situation where the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed, the setting value display data is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical information of the setting value counter, and the read setting value display data is displayed. The corresponding display is performed by the fourth notification display device 204. Thus, even when the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the configuration for reading the display data of the setting values is used as it is when the display corresponding to the setting values is executed. It becomes possible to do.

  The number of stages of setting values to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of stages of setting values that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is different from the maximum number of stages. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is assigned to each setting value to be used, and one group of three-stage setting values is arranged in ascending order. In this case, setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated. Thereby, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the setting value counter is “1” in the setting value update processing (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set values displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” →. In other words, the display is changed to display different set values for one operation of the reset button 68c, and when a set value that can be set is displayed once, the display of a certain mode is displayed. The lap will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easy to perform a setting value update operation.

  In the configuration in which the high-probability mode success / failure table does not change according to the set value, the high-probability mode success / failure table is stored in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f of the setting correspondence storage area 325. Instead, the configuration may be such that the setting-side storage area 325 in the main ROM 64 is stored in a different storage area.

  When there is only one set value to be used, the success / failure table corresponding to the set value is set in only one set information storage area 325a to 325f and the remaining set information storage areas 325a to 325a are set. 325f may be configured such that no success / failure table is set. In addition, when there are a plurality of setting values to be used but the number of stages is smaller than the number of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the success / failure table corresponding to each setting value is respectively A configuration may be adopted in which only one corresponding setting information storage area 325a to 325f is set and no success / failure table is set in the remaining setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. In this configuration, the numerical information corresponding to the setting information storage areas 325a to 325 in which the success / failure table is not set is set as numerical information that cannot be selected by the setting value counter, so that the setting information storage area in which the success / failure table is not set. It is possible to prevent 325a to 325f from being selected when reading the success / failure table or reading the display data of the set value.

<40th Embodiment>
In the thirty-ninth embodiment, the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting six-stage setting values is used. However, in this embodiment, setting correspondence capable of setting three-stage setting values is provided. A storage area 326 is used.

  FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 326 stored in the main ROM 64 in advance.

  In the setting correspondence storage area 326, a first setting information storage area 326a, a second setting information storage area 326b, and a third setting information storage area 326c are provided. In the first form of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 145 (a), various information corresponding to “setting 1” is set in the first setting information storage area 326a, and “setting 2” is set in the second setting information storage area 326b. Are set, and various types of information corresponding to “Setting 3” are set in the third setting information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as many setting values as possible can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 326.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second form shown in FIG. 145 (b), various types of information corresponding to “setting 1” are set in all of the first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, only one type of setting value is set using the setting correspondence storage area 326 in which setting values in three stages can be set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third form shown in FIG. 145 (c), various information corresponding to “setting 1” is set in the first setting information storage area 326a and the second setting information storage area 326b, and the third setting Various information corresponding to “setting 3” is set in the information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, two-stage setting values are set using the setting correspondence storage area 326 in which three-stage setting values can be set.

  According to the above-described configuration, the setting correspondence storage area 326 capable of setting three-stage setting values is used in the second and third embodiments in which setting values having a number of stages smaller than the three-stage setting values are used. The pachinko machine 10 can be used as it is. Similarly to the thirty-ninth embodiment, the processing configuration of the acceptance table read processing (FIG. 143) and the processing configuration of the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 144) are the first processing configuration. It can be commonly used in the pachinko machine 10 of the third form.

<Forty-first embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) or the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, it is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. This is different from the thirty-third embodiment in that predetermined notification is executed on the display unit. The following describes the configuration that is different from the thirty-third embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 146 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various display units provided in an area that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 that causes the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 to be generated.

  As various display parts, a special figure display part 37a, a special figure hold display part 37b, a general figure display part 38a, and a general figure hold display part 38b are provided. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment. The special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are provided side by side, but the round display part 330 is provided to be side by side with respect to the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a. It has been.

  The round display section 330 has seven display segments 331 to 337 as in the special figure display section 37a and the common figure display section 38a. The seven display segments 331 to 337 are all bar-shaped light emitting areas having the same shape and the same size, and are arranged so as to generate the character “8”. The seven display segments 331 to 337 are individually controlled to emit light.

  In the round display unit 330, the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result is notified. In the present embodiment, as a jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won in the hit determination process, the first jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode with a relatively small number of round games executed, and the round game There is a second jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode with a relatively large number of executions. Specifically, the round game is executed twice in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first jackpot result, and the round game is executed 16 times in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second jackpot result.

  The first jackpot result includes a jackpot result in which the success / failure lotion mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the success / failure lottery mode has a high probability after the opening / closing execution mode ends. There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode as well as the mode. The second jackpot result includes a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the success / failure lottery mode has a high probability after the opening / closing execution mode ends. There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode as well as the mode.

  FIG. 146 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the round display unit 330.

  The round display unit 330 is configured to display at least a part of the display from the non-display state in which all the display segments 331 to 337 are turned off when the open / close execution mode triggered by any jackpot result is started. A display state in which the segments 331 to 337 are in a light emitting state is obtained. In a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is continued, the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode is maintained. Then, when the open / close execution mode ends, the round display unit 330 changes from the display state to the non-display state.

  In the opening / closing execution mode in which two round games are executed, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned off, and the fifth The seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned on. In the opening / closing execution mode in which 16 round games are executed, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are lit, and the fifth The seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned off. Thereby, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10, the manager of the game hall checks the round display unit 330 so that the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to any type of opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible to grasp whether it is.

  When the set value update process (step S7918) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, the corresponding display is performed in the round display unit 330. Specifically, when the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned off, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned on.

  The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the set value update process (step S7918) is started when the set value update process (step S7918) is started, and when the set value update process (step S7918) is ended. Is terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) described later is executed, the round display unit is displayed. It is also different from the display content displayed at 330. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting value update processing (step S7918) is being executed by checking the round display unit 330. In addition, such a grasp can be performed using the round display unit 330.

  When the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, the corresponding display is performed on the round display unit 330. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned on, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned off.

  The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started, and when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is ended. Is terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and is further displayed on the round display unit 330 when the set value update process (step S7918) is executed. The displayed contents are also different. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) is being executed by checking the round display unit 330. In addition, such a grasp can be performed using the round display unit 330.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the set value update process (step S7918) are executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the process for advancing the game is not executed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the set value update process (step S7918) are not executed in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. Further, in the situation where one of the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed, the other is not executed. Therefore, even if the round display unit 330 is also used as a display unit for performing each display, a situation in which each display should be performed does not occur.

  The display content of the round display unit 330 is not limited to the display content described above, and is arbitrary as long as it is possible to distinguish the situation from the display content of the round display unit 330. One of the display and setting value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) may be configured such that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are in a lighting state. In addition, one of the display and set value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) is in the on state while all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are in the lighting state. The other may be configured such that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are blinking.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the display corresponding to the set value update process are performed in the round display unit 330, the display may be performed in the special figure display unit 37a. It is good also as a structure by which these displays are performed in the common map display part 38a. In addition, display corresponding to the setting confirmation processing is performed on any one of the special display 37a, the general display 38a, and the round display 330, and the setting is performed on the other display. It is good also as a structure by which the display corresponding to a value update process is performed.

  In addition, the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the first working port 33 and the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the second working port 34 are stored separately. As a special figure display part 37a, a game with a first special figure display part in which game times are executed triggered by the hold information corresponding to the first operation port 33, and a hold information corresponding to the second operation port 34 In the configuration provided with the second special figure display unit that is executed once, the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the display corresponding to the set value update process are performed in the first special figure display unit. The display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the display corresponding to the setting value update process may be performed in the second special figure display unit, and the first special figure display unit corresponds to the setting confirmation process. Is displayed and the set value is updated in the second special figure display It may be configured to display corresponding sense is performed.

  Further, a configuration may be provided in which a dedicated display unit for displaying that the setting confirmation processing is being executed is displayed, and the fact that the setting value update processing is being executed is displayed. A dedicated display unit may be provided, and a dedicated display for displaying that the setting confirmation process is being executed or the setting value update process is being executed. It is good also as a structure provided with the display part. In this case, the dedicated display unit may be configured to be display-controlled by the main CPU 63, or may be configured to be display-controlled by the sound emission control device 81 or the display control device 82.

<Forty-second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configurations of the main process and the first timer interrupt process are different from those in the thirty-third embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the thirty-third embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, the process of step S9901-step S9923 in a main process is performed using the program for specific control in the main side CPU63, and the data for specific control.

  First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S9901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. In addition, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S9902). In the internal function register setting process, similar to step S7902 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (a process that is periodically interrupted and started) 148) is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process. ) Is set to a second interrupt cycle (specifically 2 milliseconds) which is shorter than the first interrupt cycle.

  Thereafter, an interrupt permission is set for the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S9903). Thereby, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated at the second interrupt cycle. On the other hand, no interrupt permission is set for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is still maintained in a state where interrupts are prohibited.

  Then, the process of step S9904-step S9917 is performed. The processing contents of steps S9904 to S9917 are the same as those of steps S7905 to S7918 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

  After the processing of step S9904 to step S9917 is completed, interrupt permission is set for the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) (step S9918). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle. That is, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. Thereafter, in steps S9919 to S9923, the same processes as those in steps S7920 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The first timer interrupt process is periodically started at a 4 millisecond period which is the first interrupt period as already described. A program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), interrupt prohibition is set (step SA101). The generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is prohibited, and the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is prohibited. Even if the first interrupt cycle elapses, it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) from being activated twice. Further, by prohibiting the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) with respect to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) even if the second interrupt cycle elapses. Can be prevented from interrupting and being activated.

  Thereafter, in Step SA102 to Step SA121, the same processing as Step S8202 to Step S8221 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment is executed. When an affirmative determination is made at step SA107 or when the process at step SA121 is executed, an interrupt permission setting is made to permit generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). Is performed (step SA122).

  According to the above configuration, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is permitted to be interrupted while the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed in the main process (FIG. 147), while the first timer interrupt process is permitted. The interrupt shown in FIG. 148 is not permitted. Thereby, even if the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is possible. On the other hand, the process for controlling the progress of the game by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) can be prevented from being executed.

  Further, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is changed to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148). It does not interrupt and start up. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being activated twice.

<Forty-third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is different from that of the thirty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

Even in the present embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a normal counter area 231 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In the normal counter area 231, as in the fifteenth embodiment, the normal general winning counter 231a, the special special electric winning counter 231b, the normal first operating counter 231c, the normal second operating counter 231d, and A normal out counter 231e is provided. In a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result is entered, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by one, and the special electricity When one game ball enters the winning device 32, the value of the special special electricity prize counter 231b is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the normal use The value of the first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 and the value is output to the out port 24a. When one game ball enters, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by one. The base values are as follows when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are K91 to K95 in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode is a jackpot result.
Base value: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K91 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K92 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K93 × “to the first operation port 33” The number of winning balls for winning of the game “+ K94 ד the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34 ”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

  In addition to the normal counter area 231, a calculation result storage area 234 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Similar to the thirty-fifth embodiment, the calculation result storage area 234 has a current area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a first storage area for storing base value information. 3 history areas 314 are provided (see FIG. 126). The current area 311 stores the latest base value calculated by the result calculation process (FIG. 149). The first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. In the second history area 313, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored. In the third history area 314, the final base value in the calculation period three times before is stored.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing a result calculation process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is a process corresponding to non-specific control in step S3803 in the same manner as the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Read the management execution processing program. In this management execution process (FIG. 71), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment. In this check process, a result calculation process is executed and a display process (FIG. 150) described later is executed. Further, the processing of Step SA201 to Step SA217 in the result calculation processing is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, base value calculation processing is executed (step SA201). In this calculation process, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. Here, in the present embodiment, the calculation of the base value is not completed in one process of the result calculation process, but is completed by executing the process of the result calculation process a predetermined number of times.

  Specifically, in a predetermined processing time of the result calculation process in which the calculation of the base value is newly started, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are set to K91 to K95 in step SA201. In this case, K91 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31”, K92 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32”, and K93 × “for winning in the first operating port 33”. The number of prize balls ”, K94 ד number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34 ”, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95) are calculated, and the respective calculation results Is stored in the storage area during computation provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. After that, in step SA201 of the result calculation process one time after the predetermined processing time, the total payout number of game balls (K91 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K92 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K93 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K94 × “second operation” The number of prize balls for winning in the mouth 34 is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation storage area. Thereafter, in step SA201 of the result calculation process of the process times two times after the predetermined process time, the base value is calculated using various information stored in the storage area during calculation.

  That is, in this embodiment, it is necessary to execute the result calculation process three times in order to calculate one base value. In this case, since the result calculation process is called and executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), it is executed every time the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds) elapses. Become. Therefore, one base value is calculated with a period of about 12 milliseconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period in which one base value is calculated may be shorter than the 12 millisecond period or may be longer than the 12 millisecond period.

  As described above, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the base value by performing a configuration in which one base value is calculated by executing the result calculation processing a plurality of times. In particular, since the result calculation process is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, in order to execute the result calculation process, not only a process for reading a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control, but also specific control. It is necessary to save the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to. In this case, by reducing the processing load for calculating the base value, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load of the result calculation processing, and as a result, the processing load for executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control Can be reduced.

  Even if the result calculation process is performed multiple times to calculate one base value, each piece of information during the calculation of the base value in each process time of the result calculation process is a work for non-specific control. It is written in area 223. As a result, the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control is accompanied by the execution of the process corresponding to the specific control between one processing time and the next processing time of the result calculation process. Even if the information in the various registers is erased, it is possible to store and hold each piece of information during the calculation of the base value.

  Even if the result calculation process is performed a plurality of times to calculate one base value, the normal counter area 231 is used in the first process of the result calculation process to calculate a new base value. All the values of the various counters 231a to 231e are extracted, and the base value of the calculation times is calculated using the extracted values. Thus, even if the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are changed during the calculation of the one base value, the one base value is not affected by the change of the value. Can be calculated.

  After the base value calculation process is executed in step SA201, it is determined whether or not the calculation of one base value has been completed in the result calculation process of the current process (step SA202). When the calculation of one base value is not completed (step SA202: NO), overwriting of the base value to the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234 is not executed by not executing the processing of steps SA203 to SA205.

  When the calculation of one base value has been completed (step SA202: YES), the base value for which the calculation has been completed is overwritten in the current area 311 (step SA203). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the shift trigger flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA204). In the present embodiment, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation that is neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA). When the calculation of a new base value is completed after the shift reference number (specifically 60000) is reached, the data shift process (step SA216) in the calculation result storage area 234 is executed. In this data shift process, the information stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is changed from the second history area 313 to the third history area. After shifting in the order of 314, first history area 312 → second history area 313, current status area 311 → first history area 312, the current status area 311 is cleared to “0”. The shift trigger flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify the situation after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number and before executing the data shift process.

  When “1” is set to the shift trigger flag (step SA204: YES), “1” is set to the calculation completion flag at the time of shift provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA205). The calculation completion flag at the time of shift is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the calculation of one base value is completed after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA202, a negative determination is made in step SA204, or if the processing in step SA205 is executed, “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is determined whether it is set (step SA206). When “1” is not set in the management start flag (step SA206: NO), the pre-management start process is executed (step SA207). In the pre-management start process, the process from step S8604 to step S8608 of the result calculation process (FIG. 130) in the thirty-fifth embodiment is executed.

  When “1” is set in the management start flag (step SA206: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA208). . When “1” is not set in the shift trigger flag (step SA208: NO), the total number is calculated by adding all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step SA209). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is 60000 or more which is the shift reference number (step SA210).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA210, “1” is set to the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA211). Further, “1” is set to the pre-shift display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA212). The pre-shift display flag mainly indicates that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 should start the pre-shift display corresponding to the total number of game balls reaching the shift reference number. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63.

  If “1” is set in the shift trigger flag and an affirmative determination is made in step SA208, it is determined whether “1” is set in the calculation completion flag at the time of shifting in the work area 223 for non-specific control. (Step SA213). The calculation completion flag at the time of shift is set to “1” when calculation of one base value is completed after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number as described above. If an affirmative determination is made in step SA213, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” (step SA214). Further, the calculation completion flag at the time of shift in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” (step SA215).

  Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step SA216). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is changed from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. After shifting in the order of the first history area 312 → the second history area 313 and the current status area 311 → the first history area 312, the current status area 311 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the previous three calculation period, and the final base value in the previous previous calculation period. Is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the previous calculation period, and the base value calculated after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number in the current calculation period is one time. The final base value in the previous calculation period is stored in the first history area 312. The current area 311 is in a state where no base value is stored. In the data shift process, the LDIR instruction is used when shifting information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area by specifying the address of the information storage source area and the address of the information storage destination area. It becomes. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to “0” (step SA217).

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the display processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps SA301 to SA320 in the display process are executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA301). If a negative determination is made in step SA301, the base value is read from the current area 311 and the first decimal place in the read base value is the same as in step S8714 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. And the calculation result data corresponding to the second digit of the decimal point are set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA302). By transmitting display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the first digit of the decimal point in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base of the current area 311 is displayed. The second decimal place in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Due to the above configuration, in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag, the base value in the past calculation period is not notified, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified. Is done. The display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1” are the same as those in the thirty-fifth embodiment. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA301, 1 is subtracted from the value of the switching timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA303). The switching timing counter sets the timing for switching the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the display regarding the base value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is a counter for specifying by.

  In the present embodiment, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation that is neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA). In the situation where the shift reference number has not been reached, the notification of the base value stored in each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 is displayed for the display continuation period (specifically, Is executed for 5 seconds), and the interval non-display is set to an interval period (specifically, 1 in order to notify that the base value to be notified is switched between notifications of the base values). Second). Specifically, as the interval non-display, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments 321 to 324 are turned off so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are turned off. 204 becomes a non-display state. By not displaying the interval before the base value to be notified is switched in a predetermined order of the current state area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314, notification is performed. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly recognize that the target base value is switched.

  In a situation where the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the corresponding pre-shift display. Specifically, “A.” is displayed on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as the pre-shift display. The display content of “A.” is a display content that is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in both the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval period in which the interval is not displayed. is there. Accordingly, the entire display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the pre-shift display is performed, the display continuation period corresponding to the base value, and the interval period that is not displayed for the interval, Can have different display contents. Therefore, the game hall manager confirms that the pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, so that the total number of the game balls has reached the shift reference number. Thus, it is possible to grasp that the base value is being shifted.

  The display contents of the display before the shift are the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the check display is performed, and the first display when the flag before management start is not set to “1”. Display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being executed, and update of the set value It is also different from the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the process (FIG. 137) is being executed. Also from this point, the manager of the game hall confirms that the pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, so that the total number of the game balls is the shift reference number. It becomes possible to grasp that the base value is shifted by reaching the value.

  The execution period of the display before shift is set to a period longer than the interval period (specifically, 1 second) in which the interval non-display is performed. Further, the pre-shift display execution period is set to a period longer than the display display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) corresponding to the base value. Specifically, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to 8 seconds. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-shift display execution period may be longer than the interval period and shorter than the display display duration corresponding to the base value, or may be shorter than the interval period. . However, in order for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that the pre-shift display is being performed, it is preferable that the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to be longer than the interval period.

  As described above, in order to complete the calculation of one base value, the processing operation of the result calculation process (FIG. 149) needs to be executed a plurality of times. Specifically, the cycle in which one base value is calculated is The cycle is 12 milliseconds. In addition, the data shift process (step SA216) in which the base value information is shifted between the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number is the shift reference number. This is executed after a new base value has been calculated. In this case, the pre-shift display execution period is longer than the longest period required until the data shift process (step SA216) is completed when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number. Is set. Thereby, the new calculation of one base value and the data shift processing of the base value (step SA216) are completed in the situation where the pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is possible.

  Returning to the description of the display process (FIG. 150), when the process of step SA303 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching timing counter after “1” subtraction is “0”, thereby displaying the base value. It is determined whether or not the current measurement target period has elapsed among the duration period, the interval period in which the interval non-display is performed, and the execution period of the pre-shift display (step SA304). When an affirmative determination is made in step SA304, it is a situation where display before shift should be started by determining whether or not “1” is set in the display flag before shift in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Is determined (step SA305). If a negative determination is made in step SA305, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the interval flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA306). The interval flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the interval non-display should be started.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA306, it means that the target to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 at the current switching timing is the base value. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA307). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “3” (step SA308: YES), the display target counter value is cleared to “0” (step SA309).

  The display target counter includes first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify a base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the base value stored in the current area 311 is a notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is “1”, the first history area When the base value stored in 312 is a notification target and the value of the display target counter is “2”, the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the notification target, and the value of the display target counter is “3”. ", The base value stored in the third history area 314 is a notification target.

  When a negative determination is made at step SA308, or when the process at step SA309 is executed, the base value is displayed as a value corresponding to the next switching timing in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control. A value corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set (step SA310). Thereafter, “1” is set to the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA311). As a result, when “1” is not set in the display flag before shift in the work area 223 for non-specific control until the next switching timing, the non-interval for the interval is displayed when the next switching timing is reached. Display will be performed.

  Thereafter, processing for setting display data corresponding to the base value that is the current notification target is executed in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Specifically, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA312), as in step S8708 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. . The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and the notification target base. A display indicating whether the value corresponds to any of the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is displayed on the second notification display device 202. Display data to be performed.

  Thereafter, as in step S8709 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are displayed. The base value is read out from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first number of the decimal point and the second number of the decimal point in the read base value is displayed in the display target setting area 276. (Step SA313). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to perform display corresponding to the first digit of the decimal point in the base value to be notified, and the second digit of the decimal point in the base value to be notified. Display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform display corresponding to the above.

  When display data including display type data and calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276, the display data is displayed in the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) as in the 35th embodiment. And the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. That is, when the base value of the current area 311 is a notification target, the display as shown in FIG. 127A is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example. When the base value of the history area 312 is a notification target, for example, the display as shown in FIG. 127B is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the second history area When the base value of 313 is a notification target, for example, display as shown in FIG. 127C is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the third history area 314 is displayed. When the base value is a notification target, display as shown in FIG. 127 (d) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA306 because "1" is set in the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the current switching timing is displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. This means that the target for which notification is to be started is hidden for the interval. In this case, an interval setting process is executed (step SA314). In the setting process, a value corresponding to the interval period (specifically 1 second) is set as a value corresponding to the next switching timing in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control. Thereafter, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” (step SA315). As a result, if “1” is not set in the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control until the next switching timing, the base value is changed when the next switching timing is reached. Display will be performed.

  Thereafter, interval data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA316). The interval data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform non-display for the interval. Specifically, all of the interval data in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed. This is data for turning off the display segments 321 to 324. By setting the interval data in the display target setting area 276 as display data, the interval data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are displayed. 204 is in a non-display state. The administrator of the game hall who has confirmed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the non-display state can recognize that it is the interval period.

  When “1” is set in the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control and an affirmative determination is made in step SA 305, the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 This means that the target for which notification is to be started at the switching timing is the pre-shift display. In this case, a pre-shift display period setting process is executed (step SA317). In the setting process, a value corresponding to the execution period of the display before shift (specifically, 8 seconds) is set as a value corresponding to the next switching timing in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, the interval flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to “0”, the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to “0” (step SA318), and the non-specific control The maximum value “3” is set in the display target counter in the work area 223 (step SA319). When the pre-shift display execution period has elapsed by clearing the interval flag to “0”, the next notification target becomes the base value. If a negative determination is made in step SA306 to notify the base value by setting the maximum value in the display target counter, the display target counter after adding 1 to the value of the display target counter in step SA307. Value exceeds the maximum value, an affirmative determination is made in step SA308, and the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0". As a result, when the pre-shift display execution period has elapsed, the next notification target is the base value, and the base value is the base value of the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234.

  That is, when the display before the shift is performed, the notification of the base value is started regardless of whether the notification target before the display before the shift is performed is the base value or the interval non-display. As a result, when the pre-shift display is completed, the base value can be confirmed without waiting for the interval period to elapse. In addition, the base value that is the last notification target before the pre-shift display is performed is any of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. Even if there is, when the pre-shift display is completed, the notification is started from the base value of the current area 311. As a result, the base value notification order in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 can be returned to the initial notification order, and immediately after the base value shift occurs. It is possible to make it easier for the manager of the game hall to recognize.

  Thereafter, display data before shift is set in a display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA320). The display data before shift is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform display before shift. Specifically, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, “ A. ”is data to be displayed. By setting the display data before shift in the display target setting area 276 as display data, the display data before shift is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the first to fourth notifications are used. “A.” is displayed on each of the display devices 201 to 204. The manager of the game hall who has confirmed that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can recognize that the pre-shift display is being executed. .

  Next, in the situation where the management start flag is set to “1” with reference to the time chart of FIG. 151, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The state of being performed will be described. 151A shows a period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 151B is stored in the first history area 312. The base value stored in the second history area 313 is displayed in the first to fourth notifications in FIG. 151 (c). FIG. 151 (d) shows the base value stored in the third history area 314 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 151 (e) shows a period during which interval non-display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 151 (f) shows the first to fourth notification display devices. The period before the shift is displayed at 201-204 FIG. 151 (g) shows the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result has occurred since the base value calculation period was newly started. The timing at which (the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60000) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (a), notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing of t1. In this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the first notification display device 201 displays that the base value is a notification target, and the second notification display device 202 stores it in the current area 311. The display indicating that the base value is the notification target is performed, and the display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t1 at the timing t2, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is terminated as shown in FIG. 151 (a), and as shown in FIG. 151 (e). As described above, the interval non-display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is terminated as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing t3, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t2.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (b), notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing of t3. In this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the first notification display device 201 displays that the base value is a notification target, and the second notification display device 202 displays the first history area 312. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Is called.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t3 at the timing t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is finished as shown in FIG. 151 (b), and FIG. 151 (e) As shown in FIG. 4, the interval non-display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is terminated as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing t5, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t4.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (c), notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing of t5. In this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), the first notification display device 201 displays that the base value is a notification target, and the second notification display device 202 displays the second history area 313. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and the display corresponding to the base value stored in the second history area 313 is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Is called.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t5 at the timing t6, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is terminated as shown in FIG. 151 (c), and FIG. 151 (e) As shown in FIG. 4, the interval non-display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is terminated as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing t7, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t6.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (d), notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing of t7. In this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (d), the first notification display device 201 displays that the base value is a notification target, and the second notification display device 202 displays the third history area 314. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and the display corresponding to the base value stored in the third history area 314 is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Is called.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t7 at the timing t8, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is terminated as shown in FIG. 151 (d), and FIG. 151 (e) As shown in FIG. 4, the interval non-display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is terminated as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing t9, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t8.

  After that, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 as shown in FIG. 151 (a) is displayed in the first to first timings as shown in FIG. 4 is performed in the notification display devices 201 to 204, and the interval non-display is performed as shown in FIG. 151 (e) in the same manner as the timing t2 to the timing t3 over the timing t10 to the timing t11. This is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Then, similarly to the timing of t3 at the timing of t11, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. Start with.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (g), the base value calculation period is newly set at the timing t12, which is the timing at which the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) is shifted in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode due to the jackpot result has been started. The reference number (specifically 60000) is reached. However, at the timing of t12, since the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 was started at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 151 (b) The display corresponding to the base value in one history area 312 is continued. Accordingly, even if the timing at which the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number is arbitrary, the current notification target display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed as planned. After performing over a period of time, it becomes possible to start the pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t11 at the timing t13, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is finished as shown in FIG. 151 (b), and FIG. 151 (f) As shown in FIG. 4, the display before shift is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Even if the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while other base values are being notified, if the display continuation continues for the notification of the base value, The display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, even if the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number during the interval non-display, the pre-shift display is displayed when the interval period for the interval non-display has elapsed. First to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are started.

  Thereafter, when the pre-shift display execution period elapses from the timing t13 at the timing t14, the pre-shift display is ended as illustrated in FIG. 151 (f), and the current area 311 is illustrated as illustrated in FIG. 151 (a). Notification of the base value stored in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. That is, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display ends, it corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. The notification is started from the base value of the current area 311.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t14 at the timing t15, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as illustrated in FIG. 151 (a), and illustrated in FIG. As described above, the interval non-display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is terminated as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing of t16 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t15, and the base of the first history area 312 is shown in FIG. 151 (b). The display corresponding to the value is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Base values stored in the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is done. Accordingly, it is possible to individually notify the base values corresponding to different periods while suppressing the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Moreover, since each base value is displayed according to a predetermined order, it becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to grasp the type of base value to be displayed.

  The display order of the base values is determined in association with each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of base value to be displayed when the display of the base value is newly started.

  Before changing from the situation in which one base value is displayed to the situation in which the next base value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in an interval non-display state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp that the type of the base value to be displayed has been switched.

  In the configuration in which the base values are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, any of the opening / closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started. If the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60000) in the absence of the game area PA, -Display before shifting is performed by the fourth notification display devices 201-204. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the total number of the game balls has reached the shift reference number using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. Is shifted to the storage area at the rear of the storage order, and the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to “0”, and calculation of the base value for a new calculation period is started. Therefore, the notification content of the base value in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number. In this case, if the total number of the game balls reaches the reference shift number, the base value notification is resumed after the pre-shift display is performed, so the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number. As a result, it becomes possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the notification content of the base value is changed.

  When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while the base value is displayed, the pre-shift display is started after the display duration of the display of the base value has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to start the pre-shift display while not disturbing the display of the base value already performed.

  In a configuration in which a plurality of base values stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed according to a predetermined display order, after the pre-shift display is performed, the base values are displayed from the first base value in the predetermined display order. Thus, when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, it is possible to confirm again from the base value of the first order in the predetermined display order.

  In the configuration in which the base value is calculated in the result calculation process (FIG. 149), the result calculation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of calculation of one base value until the calculation of the base value is completed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the result calculation process as compared with the configuration in which the calculation of the base value is completed by one result calculation process.

  When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value data shift process (step SA216) is executed after the base value is newly derived at the timing when the shift reference number is reached. When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display before the shift. Thereby, in the situation where the base value is newly derived and the base value data shift processing is performed, it becomes possible to perform the pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the shift is performed. Although the reference number has been reached, it is possible to prevent the display of the previous base value from being continued.

  Note that the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result has been started since the base value calculation period was started (that is, supplied to the game area PA). In the same way as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the base value of the current area 311 is displayed until the total number of game balls reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6,000), the first to fourth It is good also as a structure by which a calculation initial display is performed in the display apparatuses 201-204 for alerting | reporting.

  Further, when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60000) in the state where the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notifications are not displayed for the interval, the shift is immediately performed. In the situation where the previous display is started and the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the total number of the game balls has reached the shift reference number (specifically 60000). In some cases, the pre-shift display may be started when the display continuation period for displaying the base value has elapsed. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display at an early stage while preventing the already displayed base value display from being terminated halfway.

  Moreover, the display content of the display before the shift is not limited to the above, and the display content on at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be displayed in other situations. However, the entire display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be a display content that is not displayed in other situations. In addition, in the case where the display before the shift is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured so that at least one of the display segments 321 to 324 is turned on. For some of the 4 notification display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments 321 to 324 may be turned off. In addition, when the display before the shift is performed, the display content of the display before the shift is not limited to the configuration that is maintained over the execution period of the display before the shift, and the display content of the display before the shift is displayed before the shift. It is good also as a structure blinked over the execution period of.

  In addition, the execution period of the pre-shift display is not limited to a fixed configuration. For example, a new base value is calculated after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60000). The execution period of the pre-shift display may be changed according to the period required until the base value data shift processing is completed.

  In addition, when the total number of the game balls reaches the reference shift number, the last display cycle of each base value performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time is the last. The display before shifting may be started after the display of the sequential base value (that is, the base value stored in the third history area 314) is completed. This makes it possible to start the display cycle of each new base value via the pre-shift display after the display cycle of each base value is completed.

  When the total number of game balls reaches the reference shift number, the base value calculation is started using the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 at that time, and the base value is calculated. A data shift process (step SA216) may be performed when the process is completed. In this case, it is possible to accurately calculate the base value at the timing when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number.

  Further, in place of the interval non-display during the interval period, at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 performs a predetermined display and displays the first to fourth notification displays. The entire display of the devices 201 to 204 may be configured such that an interval display having a display content different from the display content that may occur in a situation where the base value is notified is performed. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, only the central display segments 321 to 324 may be turned on so that “-” is displayed. It is good also as a structure in which the display of "-" is performed in some display apparatuses of 4 display apparatus 201-204, and the remaining display apparatus will be in a non-display state.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the interval period is not set. In this case, when the display continuation period has elapsed for one base value, display of the base value to be displayed in the next order is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Become.

<Forty-fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the start timing of the pre-shift display is different from that in the forty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  The start timing of the pre-shift display in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 152A shows a period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 152B is stored in the first history area 312. The base value stored in the second history area 313 is shown in the first to fourth notifications in FIG. 152 (c). 152 (d) shows a period notified by the display devices 201-204, and the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. 152 (e) shows a period during which interval non-display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 152 (f) shows the first to fourth notification display devices. The period before the shift is displayed at 201-204 FIG. 152 (g) shows the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result has occurred since the base value calculation period was newly started. The timing at which (the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60000) is shown.

  At the timings t1 to t11, the display continuation period is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the time charts of FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (g) in the forty-third embodiment. The display corresponding to the base value over the range and the execution of the non-display for the interval in the interval period are repeated, and the display corresponding to the base value is the current area 311 → first history area 312 → second in the calculation result storage area 234. The history area 313 is repeated in the order of the third history area 314. Then, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 152 (b).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (g), the base value calculation period is newly set at the timing t12, which is the middle of the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) is shifted in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode due to the jackpot result has been started. The reference number (specifically 60000) is reached. In this case, at the timing t12, the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 was started at the timing t11, but as shown in FIG. 152 (b). The notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is terminated, and the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 152 (f).

  Even when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while other base values are being notified, the pre-shift display is displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 at that timing. Start at ~ 204. Further, even when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number in the middle of the interval non-display, the pre-shift display is displayed at the timing at the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Start with.

  Thereafter, when the pre-shift display execution period elapses from the timing t12 at the timing t13, the pre-shift display is ended as illustrated in FIG. 152 (f), and the current area 311 is illustrated as illustrated in FIG. 152 (a). Notification of the base value stored in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. That is, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display ends, it corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. The notification is started from the base value of the current area 311.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t13 at the timing t14, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 152A, and the information shown in FIG. As described above, the interval non-display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is terminated as shown in FIG. 152 (e) at the timing t15 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t14, and the base of the first history area 312 is shown in FIG. 152 (b). The display corresponding to the value is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result has been started since the base value calculation period was newly started (that is, the game When the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60000), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that timing before the shift. Display starts. As a result, it is possible to start the pre-shift display at an early stage, and to notify early that the total number of the game balls has reached the shift reference number.

<Forty-fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 35th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps SA401 to SA425 in the main process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step SA401). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. In addition, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SA402). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and activated with respect to the main process, is determined from the first interrupt period. Is set to a second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is a short cycle.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt cycle is relatively short as the timer interrupt process. And exist. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Further, when both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have passed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are not executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started first regardless of the elapsed order of. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process activated in preference to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated in preference to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set as the main register. To a specific register of the side CPU 63. In addition, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, the setting process of numerical ranges of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the startup processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA403). As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag indicates that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated. While processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing processing for advancing the game. Is a flag for specifying the main CPU 63.

  As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag is set to permit interrupts (step SA404) by starting processing (step SA401 to step SA418) at the start of operating power supply in the main processing (FIG. 153). “1” is set before the operation is performed, and “0” is cleared before the process at the start of supplying the operating power is finished and the remaining process (steps SA422 to SA425) is started. In this case, similarly to the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), when “1” is set in the start-up processing flag, the processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SA401 to step SA418) is being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), as described above, even when “1” is set in the start-up process flag, the operation power can be obtained by executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905. Power outage monitoring is performed even in the situation where the process at the start of supply (steps SA401 to SA418) is being executed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI update is executed, and further fraud detection is executed.

  In particular, even when the start-up process flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage process (step S8901) is executed, so that the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is performed. ), Even if a power failure occurs, the power failure process can be executed on the power failure. In the power failure process, as in the 35th embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being identified as having an abnormality. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) or the setting value update processing (step SA418), the fact that the power failure has occurred during the setting related processing is supplied next time. It becomes possible to specify at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) or the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed. Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is performed in the main process (FIG. 153) including the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the set value update process (step SA418). When interrupted and activated, the return address information of the main process (FIG. 153) for returning after the timer interrupt process to be activated is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt process is started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 153) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After “1” is set in the startup processing flag in step SA403, the interrupt permission is set (step SA404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. However, since “1” is set in the start-up process flag in step SA403, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). Among them, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is performed, but the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing processing for advancing the game. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, like the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA405: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA406). When the process at power failure is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set to the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing has been appropriately performed at the time of the previous power shutdown.

  When “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SA406: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step SA407). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control work area 221 calculated and stored in the specific control work area 221 calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA407 (step SA408). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step SA409).

  When a negative determination is made at step SA406 or step SA409, that is, when “1” is not set in the power failure flag or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step SA410). When “1” is set in the game stop flag, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is affirmative, so that step S8907 is executed. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, or the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the information storage state since the last power-off, the process for power failure monitoring, various counter updates, and fraud monitoring is executed. On the other hand, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA411). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change setting” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is issued when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (step SA418) is executed. It is good also as a structure continued.

  When “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal (step SA406 and step SA409: YES), “1” is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step SA412). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update processing (step SA418) is being executed as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is “1”. Is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that the setting value is being updated and the setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value update processing (step SA418) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting value update processing (step SA418) is ended. In a situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is not executed, the setting update display flag is not set to “1” basically. However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is being performed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. Then, the setting update display flag is set to “1”. When the setting update display flag is set to “1”, RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, or processing for clearing the setting update display flag to “0” in the setting value update processing (step SA418). It is maintained until it is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA412 because “1” is not set in the setting update display flag, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA413). ). When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA413: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). Even when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SA413: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. Is set (step SA414: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). The setting confirmation process will be described later.

  The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is being executed as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is “1”. Is set, a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is called. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is ended. In a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is not executed, the setting confirmation display flag is not basically set to “1”. However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being performed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. In this state, “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag. When the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to “0” in the setting confirmation process (step SA415). It is maintained until it is executed.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step SA416). In the RAM clear process, the specific control is performed except for an area (specifically, a setting reference area 341 to be described later) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. The work area 221 is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to “0”. Also, a setting update area 342 (described later) provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. In the RAM clear process, the initial setting is executed after clearing various registers of the main CPU 63 to “0”. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SA402 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing the initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA417). When the ON operation has been performed (step SA417: YES), a set value update process is executed (step SA418). The set value update process will be described later.

  When the process of step SA411 is executed, when the negative determination is made at step SA414, when the process of step SA415 is executed, when the negative determination is made at step SA417, or when the process of step SA418 is executed, the specific control The information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SA419). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is after the processing (step SA401 to step SA418) at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (Step SA422 to Step SA425) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, and thus the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  Further, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the setting value update process (step SA418) are executed as processes at the start of supply of operating power, whereas the processes at the start of supply of operating power are performed during the initial check period. It starts after it finishes. As a result, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set value is displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

  Thereafter, the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step SA420). If the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the startup process flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processes in steps S8901 to S8905 are performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is cancelled. In step SA420, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA421). The content of the information included in the return command and the processing content of the sound emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as those in step S7920 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. .

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processes in steps SA422 to SA425. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time will occur. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps SA422 to SA425 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps SA422 to SA425 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly. In steps SA422 to SA425, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, a configuration related to the set value in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area relating to the set value provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored. In step S503 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 13), the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is specified by the information stored in the setting reference area 341, and the success / failure table corresponding to the specified setting value is read. In step S504, the determination process is executed using the read determination table. In the situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the display of the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is the fourth notification display. This is performed by the apparatus 204.

  The setting reference area 341 stores numerical information as setting value information. Specifically, when numerical value information “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When numerical information “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When numerical information “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When numerical information “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When numerical information “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When numerical information “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”.

  The setting update area 342 stores information on setting values being updated in the setting value update processing (step SA418). That is, in the set value update process (step SA418), the information of the set value to be selected is updated every time the reset button 68c is pressed. The value information stored in the setting update area 342 is changed without changing the value information. As a result, it is possible to update the set value while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the set value update process (step SA418) is started. When the setting value update processing (step SA418) is terminated, the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 at that time is overwritten in the setting reference area 341. Thereby, the set value resulting from the update in the set value update process (step SA418) is set as the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. In the situation where the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the display of the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is the fourth notification display. This is performed by the apparatus 204.

  The setting update area 342 stores numerical information as setting value information. Specifically, when the numerical value information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When numerical information “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When numerical information “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed in step SA415 of the main process (FIG. 153). Note that the processing of step SA501 to step SA504 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  On the condition that “1” is not set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA501: NO), “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SA502). . When “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interruption process (FIG. 134), so that the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is performed. (Step S9006) is executed.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation. Note that the processing from step SA601 to step SA603 in the setting processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, display data of a setting value corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 of the work area 221 for specific control is read (step SA601). Then, the read display data of the set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA602). Further, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA603).

  By executing the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA603 is displayed in the first to the first. The third notification display device 201 to 203 performs the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA602. Thereby, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (b), a display indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 are first displayed. To the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Returning to the description of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), when an affirmative determination is made in step SA501 or when the process of step SA502 is executed, the setting key insertion unit 68a uses the setting key to change from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined whether or not switching has been performed (step SA503). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a is changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. Also in this case, a negative determination is made in step SA503. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: NO), the process of step SA503 is repeated.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion portion 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step SA504). Accordingly, by making a negative determination in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting process (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

  As described above, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, so that supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the situation where the main process (FIG. 153) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, and the game can proceed in the main process (FIG. 153). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power, which is the situation before the process is executed. This makes it possible to check the set value in a situation where no game is played.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the set value update process executed in step SA418 of the main process (FIG. 153). Note that the processing from step SA701 to step SA710 in the set value update processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA701). If “1” is not set in the setting update display flag (step SA701: NO), “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step SA702). Thereafter, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 in the work area 221 for specific control is overwritten on the setting update area 342 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA703). Thereby, the setting value information set when the supply of operating power was stopped last time is set in the setting update area 342.

  On the other hand, after the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value update process is being executed, the supply of operating power is resumed and the RAM clear process (step SA416) of the main process (FIG. 153) is executed. If the setting update display flag has already been set to “1” (step SA701: YES), the process of step SA703 is not executed. In this case, the processing after step SA704 is executed in a state where the setting value information set in the setting update area 342 in the setting value update processing before the supply of operating power is stopped is maintained as it is. Become.

  When “1” is set in the setting update display flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), so that the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. Note that the processing of step SA801 to step SA803 in the setting processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, display data of setting values corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control is read (step SA801). Then, the read display data of the set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA802). Further, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA803).

  By executing the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA803 is changed from the first to the first display. The third notification display device 201-203 performs the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA802, on the fourth notification display device 204. Thereby, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting value selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Returning to the description of the setting value update processing (FIG. 157), when an affirmative determination is made in step SA701 or when the processing in step SA703 is executed, the information on the setting values stored in the setting update area 342 is “1” to “1”. It is determined whether or not any of “6” (step SA704). If it is not one of “1” to “6” (step SA704: NO), “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (step SA705). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA704 or when the process of step SA705 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SA706). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a is changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. Even in this case, a negative determination is made in step SA706.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA706, the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA707: YES) (step SA708). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to one level higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA707: NO) or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SA704, but the setting is updated in step SA704. If it is determined that the value of the work area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SA705. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting returns to “setting 1”.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA706: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SA709). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of the current setting value update process is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is stored in the current pachinko machine 10. Set value.

  Thereafter, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step SA710). Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), so that the setting process (step S9004) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is not executed. Therefore, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10. The state where the value is displayed is canceled.

  Based on not only performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c as described above, but also performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while further operating the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key, Not only the RAM clear process (step SA416) but also the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is performed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Executed. As a result, it is possible to make the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a common as an operation for executing the setting related process regarding the setting value. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the setting related process.

  Further, when the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed and the reset is performed. When a pressing operation of the button 68c is added, a set value update process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the execution target process different among the setting confirmation process and the set value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Further, by increasing the operation content for executing the set value update process as compared with the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform an act of performing the set value update process illegally.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the main process (FIG. 153) will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  First, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the set value update process (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the main process ( The contents of the process executed in FIG. 153) will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed without the setting key insertion portion 68a being turned on and without further pressing the reset button 68c (that is, in the case of “no operation”), the main process (FIG. 153) uses the RAM. None of the clear process (step SA416), the set value update process (step SA418), and the setting confirmation process (step SA415) are executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed while the reset button 68c is pressed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned ON (that is, when the “RAM clear operation” is performed), the main process (FIG. 153) Then, while the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, the set value update process (step SA418) and the setting confirmation process (step SA415) are not executed. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON and the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power is resumed (that is, when the “setting change operation” is performed), the main process (FIG. 153) uses RAM. While the clear process (step SA416) is executed and the set value update process (step SA418) is executed, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON, but the supply of operating power is resumed without pressing the reset button 68c (that is, when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed), the setting confirmation processing (step While SA415) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the set value update process (step SA418) are not executed.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when restarting will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “RAM clear operation” has been performed, the main process (FIG. 153) executes the RAM clear process (step SA416), while the set value update process (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed, if the “RAM clear operation” is performed upon the subsequent restart of the supply of operating power, the set value The RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed without restarting and newly executing the update process (step SA418). Accordingly, it is possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clear process (step SA416) for the “RAM clear operation”. In this case, if the power failure process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the set value update process (step SA418), the set value updated in the set value update process (step SA418) (ie, step SA418). Since the information of the changed setting value) is not set in the setting reference area 341, the setting value set before the setting value update process (step SA418) is started is the restart of the supply of operating power. It will be used later. The setting update display flag is cleared to “0” when the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” has been performed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the set value update process (step SA418) are executed in the main process (FIG. 153). On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed, the RAM is cleared when the “setting change operation” is performed upon the subsequent restart of the supply of operating power. After the process (step SA416) is executed, the set value update process (step SA418) is newly started.

  When the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” as already described. Therefore, in the set value update process (FIG. 157), step SA701 is executed. If the determination is negative, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten in the setting update area 342. Accordingly, if the power failure process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped, the set value update process (step SA418) is executed. The setting value information updated in () is invalidated because it is not set in the setting reference area 341. In this case, in the set value update process (step SA418) after the supply of operating power is resumed, the settings that were set before the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power was stopped were started. The set value is updated from the value.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of “no operation” or when the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of the “setting confirmation operation” being performed, the power failure flag and check are performed in the main process (FIG. 153). By making an affirmative determination in step SA412 on the condition that no abnormality has occurred regarding the thumb, the set value update process (step SA418) is executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416). When the RAM clear process (step SA416) is not executed, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is maintained in the state where “1” is set, so the set value update process (FIG. 157) is a step. By making an affirmative determination in SA701, information on the setting value in the setting update area 342 is maintained as it is. Therefore, the update of the set value is resumed from the set value being updated in the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped. As a result, when the power failure process is executed during the set value update process (step SA418) and the “RAM clear operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, Even if the “change operation” is not performed, the set value update process (step SA418) can be resumed.

  In particular, it is assumed that the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is erroneously performed during the execution of the set value update process (step SA418). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is immediately performed. Is considered to be performed. In this case, it is assumed that the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed without pressing the reset button 68c in a state where the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on. Then, the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. In this situation, the supply of operating power is resumed. In such a situation, the set value update process (step SA418) is executed as described above, and the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped in the set value update process (step SA418). The update of the set value is resumed from the set value being updated at. Thereby, even if the above event occurs, it is possible to restart the update of the set value without any problem.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when restarting will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “RAM clear operation” has been performed, the main process (FIG. 153) executes the RAM clear process (step SA416), while the set value update process (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being performed, the setting confirmation is performed when the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed without newly executing the processing (step SA415). Accordingly, it is possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clear process (step SA416) for the “RAM clear operation”. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to “0” when the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” has been performed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the set value update process (step SA418) are executed in the main process (FIG. 153). On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the power failure process is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being performed, the setting confirmation is performed when the “setting change operation” is performed when the subsequent supply of operating power is resumed. The set value update process (step SA418) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416), without newly executing the process (step SA415). Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize execution of the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the set value update process (step SA418) for the “setting change operation”. Even if the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is not executed in this way, the setting value update processing (step SA418) is executed so that the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. At the end of the setting value update process (step SA418), information on the setting value that is to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341, so that the manager of the game hall can use the current pachinko machine. Ten set values can be confirmed. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to “0” when the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 153) performs the setting confirmation processing (Step 153) on the condition that no abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag and the checksum. SA415) is executed. As a result, even if the power failure process is performed during the setting confirmation process (step SA415), it is possible to resume the confirmation of the set value by performing a “setting confirmation operation” when resuming the supply of operating power. It becomes.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the “no operation” situation, an affirmative determination is made in step SA414 in the main process (FIG. 153) on the condition that no abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag and the checksum. Even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on, the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is executed. As a result, even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the operation power supply is resumed thereafter, the setting value is confirmed. It can be resumed.

  Next, the end timing of the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in relation to the operation state of the setting key insertion unit 68a will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 160 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, FIG. 160 (b) shows a period during which the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON, and FIG. 160 (c) shows a setting. 160 shows the period during which the value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, FIG. 160 (d) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, and FIG. 160 (e) shows the process during power failure The period that is being used.

  First, the case where the set value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are executed in a normal flow will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (b) at the timing of t1, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key, and then the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160 (a) at the timing of t2. The operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is also performed. Accordingly, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 160 (c). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), at the timing of t4, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off from the state of turning on. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 160C, the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is completed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at the timing of t5, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key, and then the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160 (a) at the timing of t6. ON operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 160 (d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), at the timing of t8, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off from being turned on. Thereby, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is completed as shown in FIG.

  Next, a case will be described in which the process at the time of a power failure is executed during the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 157) and the situation is “no operation” when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter.

  At the timing of t9, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b), and then the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 160 (a). The operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is also performed. Therefore, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 160 (c). Then, the power is turned off as shown in FIG. 160 (a) due to the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 or the occurrence of a sudden power failure of the commercial power supply at the timing t12 during the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 157). By entering the state, the power failure process is started as shown in FIG. 160 (e). In this case, the set value update process (FIG. 157) ends as shown in FIG. 160 (c) at the timing t12, and the power failure process ends as shown in FIG. 160 (e) at the timing t13.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off at the timing t14 as shown in FIG. 160 (b), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing t15 as shown in FIG. 160 (a). An ON operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. That is, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of “no operation”. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off last time, a power failure process is executed in the middle of the set value update process (FIG. 157). Accordingly, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is started at the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 160 (c). In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON-operated state to the OFF-operated state. Even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the OFF operation state from the start timing of 157), the end condition of the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is not satisfied.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at the timing of t17 during the execution of the setting value update processing (FIG. 157), and the subsequent t18 At the timing, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the setting key insertion unit 68a is changed from being turned on to being turned off. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 160C, the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is completed.

  Next, a case where the power failure process is executed during the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the situation is “no operation” when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter will be described.

  At the timing t19, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b), and at the subsequent timing t20, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160 (a). The operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started at the timing t21 as shown in FIG. 160 (d). Then, the power is turned off as shown in FIG. 160 (a) due to the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 or the occurrence of a sudden power failure of the commercial power supply at the timing t22 during the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). By entering the state, the power failure process is started as shown in FIG. 160 (e). In this case, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) ends at the timing t22 as shown in FIG. 160 (d), and the power failure processing ends at the timing t23 as shown in FIG. 160 (e).

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off at the timing t24 as shown in FIG. 160 (b), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing t25 as shown in FIG. 160 (a). An ON operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. That is, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of “no operation”. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off last time, a power failure process is executed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). Therefore, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is started at the timing t26 as shown in FIG. 160 (d). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON-operated state to the OFF-operated state. Even if the setting key insertion portion 68a is maintained in the OFF operation state from the start timing of 155), the end condition of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is not satisfied.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at the timing of t27 during the execution of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155), and the subsequent t28 At the timing, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the setting key insertion unit 68a is changed from being turned on to being turned off. Thereby, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is completed as shown in FIG.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In order to execute the set value update processing (FIG. 157), when the supply of operating power is started, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on and the reset button 68c is pressed to set “setting”. Change operation "needs to be performed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of changing the set value illegally. In this case, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the “setting change operation” is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. Even in this case, the set value update process (FIG. 157) can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize execution of the set value update process (FIG. 157).

  When supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, a “setting check operation” is performed to check the set value when the supply of operating power is resumed. In such a case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed instead of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). As a result, it is possible to prioritize the change of the set value over the confirmation of the set value, so that the game is not started even though the change of the set value of the target of use is not actually completed. It becomes possible.

  In the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the set value selected as the update target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to change the setting value while grasping the setting value selected as the update target. In addition, since the setting value selected as the update target is displayed in this way, the setting value update process (see FIG. Even in the configuration in which 157) is prioritized, it is possible to substantially check the set value.

  In the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, not only the display corresponding to the set value selected as the update target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 but also the set value update process. A display corresponding to the situation in which (FIG. 157) is executed is also performed. As a result, even if the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is started even if the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is started. It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to grasp that it has started.

  When the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, “no operation” or “setting confirmation operation” Is performed, the setting value is changed from the setting value selected before the supply of the operating power is stopped. This makes it possible to continue changing the set value from the set value that was selected before the supply of operating power was stopped.

  When the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, if the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, The set value is changed from the set value to be used. Thereby, the initial set value when the change of the set value is started can be made different according to the operation content when the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  When the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed even when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed. The set value update process (FIG. 157) is not executed. As a result, even when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, it is not necessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 157) after that. When the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the set value update process (FIG. 157) from being executed by performing the “RAM clear operation”.

  In order to execute the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155), it is necessary to perform a “setting confirmation operation” by turning on the setting key insertion unit 68a when supply of operating power is started. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. However, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155).

  When the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed The set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). This makes it possible to prioritize the setting value changing operation over the setting value checking operation.

  The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and a setting value update process is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the situation where (FIG. 157) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is updated and stored in the setting reference area 341 while the setting value information set before the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started is stored and held. The set value can be changed.

  When the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the case of “no operation” or “setting confirmation operation” was performed when restarting the subsequent supply of operating power In this case, when the setting value change is started from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. What is necessary is just to start the change of the said setting value from the setting value corresponding to the information memorize | stored in the setting reference area 341. FIG. As a result, each of these situations can be appropriately generated.

  In order to start the setting value update process (FIG. 157), it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion unit 68a using the setting key, so the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is to be started illegally. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an action. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not completed only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF, but when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF from the ON operation. Is finished. As a result, the setting key is inserted when the operation power supply is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and when there is no operation when the operation power supply is resumed thereafter. Even if the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in a situation where the part 68a is in the OFF state, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not immediately terminated, and the setting key insertion part 68a is once turned ON. Since the set value update process (FIG. 157) is ended by further turning OFF after the operation, the set value update process (FIG. 157) can be ended at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

  In order to start the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion unit 68a using the setting key, so the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is to be started illegally. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an action. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) does not end when the setting key insertion unit 68a is operated to be turned off, but is turned off from the state where the setting key insertion unit 68a is operated to be turned on. Is finished. As a result, the setting key is inserted when the operation power supply is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being executed, and when there is no operation when the operation power supply is resumed thereafter. Even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started in a state where the part 68a is in the OFF state, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not immediately terminated, and the setting key insertion part 68a is once turned on. Since the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is terminated by further turning OFF after the operation, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) can be terminated at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing (step SA422 to step SA422) is performed after the processing (step SA401 to step SA418) at the start of the supply of operating power is completed in the main CPU 63. Before the SA425) starts, an initial check period starts. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, and thus the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) are executed as processing at the start of supply of operating power, whereas the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed during the initial check period. Will be started later. As a result, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set value is displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) and the set value update process (FIG. 157) are both executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In the main process (FIG. 153) of the main CPU 63, when either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting are performed. Any of the case where none of the value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed, this processing is executed in common, and any of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 157). Is executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked as processing subsequent to the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 157). The process for starting the display is set. As described above, the process for starting the display for checking in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as a common process, so that the processing configuration can be simplified and the superiority as described above is achieved. It is possible to achieve the effect.

  Even in a situation where the display for check is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. Thereby, even if it is the structure by which the display for a check is performed in the display apparatus 201-204 for 1st-4th notification after execution of the process for a setting confirmation (FIG. 155) or a setting value update process (FIG. 157), a game is played. It is possible to prevent the start timing of processing for progress from being delayed.

  When the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the supply of operating power is resumed, and there is “no operation”, the set value update process. (FIG. 157) is not limited to the configuration starting from the setting value in the middle of the change before the supply of operating power is stopped, but from the current setting value of the usage target stored in the setting reference area 341. The configuration may be started. In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the operation power supply is resumed, and there is “no operation”, the RAM clear process ( The configuration may be such that the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed after step SA416) is executed, or the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed after the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed. It is good.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the supply of the operating power is resumed, the set value update process ( A configuration may be adopted in which FIG. 157) is not executed. In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting updating area 342 when the next setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is started.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the setting confirmation process ( The configuration shown in FIG. 155) may not be executed.

  Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, when the “RAM clear operation” is performed, The configuration may be such that the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting value being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 It may be configured to start from the set value.

  Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, when the “RAM clear operation” is performed, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416), and the RAM clear process (step SA416) after the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be configured to be executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting value being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 It may be configured to start from the set value.

  In addition, when the operation power supply is resumed when the operation power supply is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the “RAM clear operation” is performed. The configuration confirmation processing (FIG. 155) may be executed after the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is performed without executing the RAM clear processing (step SA416). The RAM clear process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed.

  In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, Although the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the current setting value to be used stored in the setting reference area 341, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) stops supplying operating power. It is good also as a structure started from the setting value in the middle of a change before being performed.

  In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416), and the RAM clear process (step SA416) after the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be configured to be executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting value being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 It may be configured to start from the set value.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being performed and the supply of operating power is resumed, Although the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the current setting value to be used stored in the setting reference area 341, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) stops supplying operating power. It is good also as a structure which starts from the setting value in the middle of a change before being performed.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being performed and the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416), and the RAM clear process (step SA416) after the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be configured to be executed.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being performed and the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed. The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be performed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. The configuration may be executed, or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) may be executed after the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed. In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being performed and the supply of operating power is resumed, A configuration may be adopted in which both the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) are not executed.

  In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped when the setting power update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the supply of operating power is resumed, The set value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the configuration starting from the set value being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the set value update process (FIG. 157) is set to the setting reference area. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that it starts from the set value of the current usage target stored in 341.

  In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped when the setting power update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the supply of operating power is resumed, The configuration may be such that the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, and the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed after the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. It may be configured to be executed.

  In addition, when the setting power update process (FIG. 157) is being performed and the supply of operating power is stopped, the setting is performed when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. The configuration may be such that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is executed without executing the value update processing (FIG. 157). In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting updating area 342 when the next setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is started.

  In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped when the setting power update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the setting check process (FIG. 155) is executed. The setting check process (FIG. 155) is executed after the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. ) May be executed. In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped when the setting power update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the supply of operating power is resumed, A configuration may be adopted in which both the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) are not executed.

  In addition, when supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the power-on initial setting process (step SA401) is used for weighting. When the interruption of the second timer interruption process (FIG. 134) is permitted after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is stored in the display and setting update area 342 indicating that the setting value is being updated. The display indicating the setting value corresponding to the information is not limited to the configuration that is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and these waits can be made without waiting for the predetermined time for the weight to elapse. The display may be configured to start. In addition, even if the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the setting value is being updated. It is good also as a structure by which the display which shows the setting value corresponding to the display memorize | stored and the information memorize | stored in the area 342 for setting update and the setting update is performed in the display apparatus 201-204 for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being performed in a situation where the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is not executed.

  Further, when supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the power-on initial setting process (step SA 401) After the predetermined time has elapsed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted to be interrupted, and is stored in the display and setting reference area 341 indicating that the setting value is being checked. The display indicating the setting value corresponding to the information is not limited to the configuration that is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and these waits can be made without waiting for the predetermined time for the weight to elapse. The display may be configured to start. Further, even if the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, the setting value is confirmed on the condition that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being executed. It is good also as a structure by which the display which shows the setting value corresponding to the display memorize | stored and the information memorize | stored in the area 342 for setting update and the setting update is performed in the display apparatus 201-204 for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being performed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is not executed.

  Further, in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, an image indicating that the set value is being updated on the symbol display device 41 may be displayed. In addition to or instead of this, an image showing an operation procedure for updating the setting value may be displayed, and the setting light value is updated by the display light emitting unit 53 or the speaker unit 54. The notification may be performed. In this case, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly recognize that the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is being executed.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, an image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed on the symbol display device 41 may be displayed. In addition to or instead of the above, an image showing an operation procedure for confirming the set value may be displayed, and the display light emitting unit 53 or the speaker unit 54 confirms the set value. The notification may be performed. In this case, it is possible to make the game hall manager clearly recognize that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being executed.

  Further, the operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the reset button 68c, and may be a dedicated operation unit such as the update button 68b. An operation unit provided in the main control device 60 to cancel the abnormal state may be used. In addition, positions corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as rotation operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the rotation operation is performed. A setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the part 68a may be set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a can be further rotated from the ON position, and the setting value being updated is set to the setting value in the next order each time the rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed. It is good also as a structure updated.

  Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, a signal corresponding thereto may be externally output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall. In this case, the signal output may be performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds), and the signal output is continued while the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed. It is also possible to have a configuration. Thereby, it becomes possible for the management computer of the game hall to grasp that the set value update processing (FIG. 157) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, a signal corresponding thereto may be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall. In this case, the signal output may be performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds), and the signal output is continued while the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being executed. It is also possible to have a configuration. As a result, the management computer of the game hall can grasp that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the configuration in which the process is terminated when the key insertion unit is changed from the ON state to the OFF state is applied to processes other than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157). Also good. For example, in order to display the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the predetermined key insertion unit needs to be operated to the ON position, and the predetermined key insertion unit is ON. The display may be terminated when it is specified that the state has been changed to the OFF state.

  In addition, as a condition for starting the set value update process (FIG. 157), a condition may be set in which a condition that an opening target that is at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is opened is set. . In this configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the operation power supply is resumed, “no operation” or “setting confirmation operation” ”Is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started even if the release target is not opened.

  Further, as a condition for starting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), a condition may be set in which a condition that an opening target that is at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is opened is set. . In this configuration, when the operation power supply is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed and the operation power supply is resumed, the above operation is performed. The configuration confirmation processing (FIG. 155) may be started even if the target is not opened.

  Also, initialization is performed in the main RAM 65 by a RAM clear process executed before the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed and a RAM clear process executed without the set value update process being executed. It is good also as a structure from which the area used as object differs.

  Further, when the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is started in a situation where the setting update display flag is not set to “1”, the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is used. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the setting value is changed, but may be configured to change the setting value from a preset initial value. The initial value may be, for example, “setting 1”, “setting 6”, or a setting value other than these.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the set value update process (FIG. 157) is performed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the “setting change operation” The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed based on the fact that “ Even in this configuration, when the set value update process (FIG. 157) is completed before the normal end trigger occurs, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed even if the “setting change operation” is not performed. It becomes possible to give priority to the work of changing the set value by adopting the configuration to be executed.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is performed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the “setting check operation” The setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) may be executed based on the fact that “ Even in this configuration, when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is completed before the normal termination trigger occurs, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is performed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed. It becomes possible to give priority to the check operation of the set value by adopting the configuration to be executed.

<Forty-sixth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps SA901 to SA925 in the main process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  In steps SA901 to SA904, the same processing as that in steps SA401 to SA404 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA905). When the supply of operating power is resumed after the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) is being executed, the setting update display flag is set to “1” The main process is started at.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA905, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA906: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA907). When the process at power failure is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set to the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing has been appropriately performed at the time of the previous power shutdown.

  When “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SA907: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step SA908). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated and stored in the work area 221 for specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA908 (step SA909). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step SA910).

  When a negative determination is made at step SA907 or step SA910, that is, when “1” is not set in the power failure flag or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to “1” (step SA911). In addition, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA912). The processing contents of these steps SA911 and SA912 are the same as the steps SA410 and SA411 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

  When “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal (step SA907 and step SA910: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key. (Step SA913). When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA914). The processing content of the setting confirmation processing is the same as that in the forty-fifth embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, even if the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the setting confirmation processing is executed as long as the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on. Not. Therefore, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation process is not executed unless the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” has been performed.

  When “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step SA905: YES), or when the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step SA915). The process contents of the RAM clear process are the same as the RAM clear process (step SA416) of the main process (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, when “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step SA916: YES), the setting value update processing is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step S916). SA918). On the other hand, when “1” is not set in the setting update display flag (step SA916: NO), the setting value update is performed on condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step SA917: YES). Processing is executed (step SA918). In other words, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value update process is being executed, the RAM clear process (step After the execution of (SA915), the set value update process (step SA918) is newly started.

  When the process of step SA912 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step SA913, when the process of step SA914 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step SA917, or when the process of step SA918 is executed, step SA919 Step SA925 is executed. The processing contents of Step SA919 to Step SA925 are the same as Step SA419 to Step SA425 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

  FIG. 162 shows a main process (restarting the supply of operating power) when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the process performed in FIG.

  When the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the set value update process (step SA918) nor the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is executed, the main process (FIG. 161) The contents of the process executed in () are the same as those in the forty-fifth embodiment. That is, when the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of “no operation”, in the main process (FIG. 161), the RAM clear process (step SA915), the set value update process (step SA918), and the setting confirmation process (step None of SA914) is executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the main process (FIG. 161) executes the RAM clear process (step SA915), while the set value update process (step SA918) and the setting confirmation process (step SA914) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” has been performed, the main process (FIG. 161) executes the RAM clear process (step SA915) and the set value update process (step SA918). On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 161) executes the setting confirmation processing (step SA914), while the RAM clear processing (step SA915). And the set value update process (step SA918) is not executed.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA918) is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when restarting will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of “no operation”, when the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of “RAM clear operation”, the operation is performed in the situation of “setting change operation” Whether the supply of power is resumed or the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the main process (FIG. 161) performs the RAM clear process (step SA915). ) Is executed and the set value update process (step SA918) is executed, while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is not executed. That is, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA918) is being executed, the RAM is cleared regardless of the operation content at the time of restarting the supply of the operating power thereafter. After the process (step SA915) is executed, the set value update process (step SA918) is newly started.

  With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process (step SA918), the setting key insertion unit when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when restarting the supply of operating power. Regardless of the operation content on 68a and the reset button 68c, it is possible to newly start the set value update process (step SA918) after the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the update of the set value, when the supply of operating power is restarted after that, the opportunity to be completed after updating the set value is surely generated. It becomes possible. Therefore, the setting before the previous set value update process (step SA918) is started when the supply of operating power is resumed after the supply of operating power has been stopped during the set value update. It is possible to prevent the game from being started with the value.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped during the set value update process (step SA918), the RAM clear process (step SA915) is uniquely executed regardless of the operation content when the supply of operating power is resumed. By performing the set value update process (step SA918) after being performed, the processing configuration is simplified as compared with the configuration in which the processing content executed according to each operation content is changed, and the above-described superiority is achieved. It is possible to achieve the effect.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when restarting will be described.

  When the process for power failure is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), The content of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 161) is the case where the processing at power failure is executed in a situation where neither the set value update processing (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is executed. In FIG. 16, the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) upon the resumption of the supply of operating power thereafter are the same. That is, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being performed, if the supply of operating power is resumed after that, Processing corresponding to the operation content is executed.

  The check of the set value is different from the change of the set value, and even if it is terminated in the middle and is not resumed as it is, there is no influence on the game. Therefore, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the confirmation of the set value, the process corresponding to the operation content when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is executed, so that the manager of the game hall It is possible to prioritize the operation content when the power is turned on by the.

<Forty-seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, the main process ( The contents of the process executed in FIG. 161) are different from those in the forty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 163 shows the main process (restarting the supply of operating power) when the power failure process is executed when the set value update process (FIG. 157) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the process performed in FIG.

  When the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the set value update process (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the main process (FIG. 153) The contents of the process executed in () are the same as those in the forty-fifth embodiment. Further, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step FIG. 155) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) upon restarting are the same as those in the forty-sixth embodiment.

  When the process at power failure is executed in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to “1”), In the case of “no operation” and “setting confirmation operation”, the content of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 153) is the same as in the 45th embodiment, and the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is resumed. It is. In the case of “RAM clear operation” and “setting change operation”, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is resumed after the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clear process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the work area 221 for specific control but also the setting update display flag and setting update provided in the work area 221 for specific control. Area 342 is excluded from the initialization target. Therefore, even if the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed in the situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting update display flag is set at the start of the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157). “1” is set, and updating of the setting value is started from the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 at that time.

  With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of updating the set value, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is not only reliably executed when restarting the subsequent supply of operating power. Thus, it becomes possible to restart the update of the set value from the set value in the middle of the update immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. As a result, the setting value changing operation can be continued as it is.

<Forty-eighth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, the main process ( The contents of the process executed in FIG. 161) are different from those in the forty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 164 shows the main process (when the power supply is resumed after the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the process performed in FIG.

  When the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the set value update process (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the main process (FIG. 153) The contents of the process executed in () are the same as those in the forty-fifth embodiment. Further, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step FIG. 155) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) upon restarting are the same as those in the forty-sixth embodiment.

  When the process at power failure is executed in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to “1”), The contents of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 153) are “no operation”, “RAM clear operation”, and “setting confirmation operation”, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) and setting confirmation. The same as the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of the operating power is resumed when the power failure process is executed in a situation where none of the processing (FIG. 155) is executed It is. That is, in the case of “no operation”, none of the RAM clear process (step SA416), the set value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are executed. In this case, although the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, the set value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are not executed. Although the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the set value update process (FIG. 157) are not executed.

  On the other hand, in the case of “setting change operation”, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is resumed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clear process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the work area 221 for specific control but also the setting update display flag and setting update provided in the work area 221 for specific control. Area 342 is excluded from the initialization target. Therefore, even if the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed in the situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting update display flag is set at the start of the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157). “1” is set, and updating of the setting value is started from the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 at that time.

  Due to the above configuration, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value is being updated, it corresponds to the operation content by the administrator of the game hall when restarting the subsequent supply of operating power It is possible to prioritize execution of processing.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value is being updated, if the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where a “setting change operation” has been performed, the supply of operating power It is possible to restart the update of the set value from the set value in the middle of the update immediately before the stop. As a result, the setting value changing operation can be continued as it is.

Forty-ninth embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, the process of step SB101-step SB128 in a main process is performed using the program for specific control in the main side CPU63, and the data for specific control.

  First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step SB101). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. In addition, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SB102). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and activated with respect to the main process, is determined from the first interrupt period. Is set to a second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is a short cycle.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt cycle is relatively short as the timer interrupt process. And exist. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Further, when both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have passed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are not executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started first regardless of the elapsed order of. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process activated in preference to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated in preference to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set as the main register. To a specific register of the side CPU 63. In addition, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, the setting process of numerical ranges of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to a startup processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB103). As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag indicates that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated. While processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing processing for advancing the game. Is a flag for specifying the main CPU 63.

  The start-up processing flag is set to “1” when processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started in the main processing (FIG. 165), and processing at the start of supply of operating power. “0” is cleared before (Step SB101 to Step SB122) is finished and the remaining processing (Step SB125 to Step SB128) is started. As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the start process flag is set to “1”, the process from step S8907 to step S8920 is not executed. Thus, in order to advance the game in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) described later is executed in the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power. It is possible to prevent this process from being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), as described above, even when “1” is set in the start-up process flag, the operation power can be obtained by executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905. Outage monitoring (step SB101 to step SB122), even if the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or setting value update processing (FIG. 167) described later is being executed, the power failure monitoring is executed. At the same time, the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is further performed.

  In particular, even when the start-up process flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage process (step S8901) is executed, so that the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed. ), Even if a power failure occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) described later is being executed, it is possible to execute the power failure processing. In the power failure process, as in the 35th embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being identified as having an abnormality. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167), the fact that the power failure occurred during the setting related processing is supplied next time. It becomes possible to specify at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed. Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 165) for returning after the timer interrupt process to be activated ends is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control and the timer interrupt process is activated. Information on various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 165) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After “1” is set in the startup processing flag in step SB103, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB104). . When the process at power failure is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set to the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing has been appropriately performed at the time of the previous power shutdown.

  When “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SB104: YES), it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal (step SB105). Specifically, first, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated and stored in the work area 221 for specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main process. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

  If the checksums match (step SB105: YES), is the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control within a normal range? It is determined whether or not (step SB106). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area for storing information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 as in the 45th embodiment. When numerical information “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When numerical information “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When numerical information “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When numerical information “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When numerical information “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When numerical information “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SB106, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is any one of “1” to “6”.

  If affirmative determination is made in all of step SB104 to step SB106, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB107). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is being executed as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is “1”. Is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that the setting value is being updated and the setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is ended. In a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 167) is not executed, the setting update display flag is basically not set to “1”. However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. Then, the setting update display flag is set to “1”. The state in which “1” is set in the setting update display flag is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting update display flag to “0” is executed in the setting value update processing (FIG. 167).

  If a negative determination is made in step SB107 because “1” is not set in the setting update display flag, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB108). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, like the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB108: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB109). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. When “1” is set in the game stop flag, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is affirmative, so that step S8907 is executed. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If at least one of the checksums does not match because the information storage state has changed since the previous power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB109, processing in step SB121 and step SB122 described later is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB109, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SB110). When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB110: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112). Even when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON using the setting key (step SB110: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. Is set (step SB111: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112).

  The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is being executed as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is “1”. Is set, a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is called. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is ended. In a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed, the setting confirmation display flag is not set to “1” basically. However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. In this state, “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag. When the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, a first RAM clear process (step SB117) described later is executed, a setting value update process (FIG. 167) described later is executed, or a setting confirmation is performed. This is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting confirmation display flag to “0” is executed in the processing (FIG. 166).

  As described above, not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed, but also when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (that is, when “setting confirmation operation” is performed), the reset button 68c is The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed by executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) even when the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1” in the state where the pressing operation is not performed. When the power failure process is executed in the current situation, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Thereby, it becomes possible to continue the confirmation of the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when restarting the subsequent supply of operating power, The process corresponding to the operation performed at the time of restarting the supply of operating power is executed in the first RAM clear process (step SB117) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Is done. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the first RAM clear process (step SB117) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) over the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166).

  Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step SB112 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing. Note that the processing from step SB201 to step SB207 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SB201). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

  In the present embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power. In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167), an interrupt is permitted. Accordingly, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 166) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed. ) And second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, since the start process flag is set to “1”, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for power failure monitoring, various counter updating and fraud monitoring are executed, while the game is advanced. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the process.

  Thereafter, on the condition that “1” is not set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control, “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SB202). When “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interruption process (FIG. 134), so that the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is performed. (Step S9006) is executed. The processing contents of the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation are the same as those in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing the processing, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124B, a display indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 Is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB203). Upon receiving the confirmation start command, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes the image indicating that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is being executed and the operation content for ending the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166). Display control of the display control device 82 is performed so that an image for enabling the display is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and is necessary to end the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166). It is possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the external output which shows that the process for a setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is performed is performed with respect to the apparatus outside the pachinko machine 10, such as the management computer of a game hall, for example.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB204). Specifically, as in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a corresponds to the ON state. It is determined whether the reception state corresponding to the OFF state is changed from the reception state to be performed. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is changed. Even if it is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SB204. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: NO), the processing of step SB204 is repeated.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step SB205). Accordingly, by making a negative determination in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting process (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

  After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step SB206). As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is completed and the process returns to the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the operation power supply in the main process (FIG. 165), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB207). By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound emission control device 81 specifies that the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the operation power supply in the main CPU 63 is completed, and the current operation power It is specified that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). And the process corresponding to having received the return command at the time of confirmation is performed. The contents of this process will be described later.

  As described above, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, so that supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the situation where the main process (FIG. 165) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, and the game is advanced in the main process (FIG. 165). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power, which is the situation before the process is executed, is executed. This makes it possible to check the set value in a situation where no game is played.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 165), when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON using the setting key and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to “1” (steps SB110 and 165). Step SB111: NO), a normal return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB113). By receiving the normal return command, the sound emission control device 81 specifies that the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the operation power supply in the main CPU 63 is completed, and starts the operation power supply this time. In the time process (step SB101 to step SB122), it is specified that none of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. . Then, a process corresponding to the reception of the normal return command is executed. The contents of this process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and if it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SB108 and step SB114). : YES), or if it is determined in step SB107 that the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting value updating process is executed (step SB115). As described above, not only when the reset button 68c is pressed and when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (that is, when “setting change operation” is performed), the reset button 68c Regardless of whether or not the pressing operation and the setting key insertion portion 68a are turned on, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed even when the setting update display flag is set to “1”, thereby updating the setting value. In the situation where the process (FIG. 167) is being executed, when the process at power failure is executed, the operation contents at the start of the subsequent supply of operating power are “no operation”, “RAM clear operation”, “setting change” Regardless of “operation” or “setting confirmation operation”, the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 167).

  Here, the setting value update process executed in step SB115 will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing. Note that the processing of step SB301 to step SB314 in the set value update processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SB301). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

  In the present embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power. In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167), an interrupt is permitted. Accordingly, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 166) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed. ) And second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, since the start process flag is set to “1”, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for power failure monitoring, various counter updating and fraud monitoring are executed, while the game is advanced. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the process.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the setting update display flag on condition that “1” is not set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB302). By setting “1” in the setting update display flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), so that the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The processing content of the setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the 45th embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are selected. The set values being displayed are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initial setting at the start is performed (step SB303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. When the power failure flag is not set to “1” (step SB104: NO) because the processing at the time of power failure was not properly performed at the time of the previous power interruption, the game stop flag When at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control does not match the checksum due to a change in the information storage state since the previous power shutdown (step SB105: NO), or the setting reference area 341 Is a flag that is set to “1” in step SB119 of the main process (FIG. 165) when the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SB106: NO). When “1” is set in the game stop flag, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is affirmative, so that step S8907 is executed. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to “0” in the process of step SB303, the state where the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. Is possible.

  Thereafter, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information of setting values being updated in the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) as in the 45th embodiment. When numerical value information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When numerical information “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When numerical information “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  By setting “1” in the setting update area 342 in step SB304, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. In other words, in the present embodiment, the setting value to be updated is “setting 1” when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

  Thereafter, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB305). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 receives an image indicating that the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is being executed, and an image for enabling the operation content for changing the set value to be recognized. , And display control of the display control device 82 so that an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for ending the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the setting value is being changed, and operation contents and setting value update processing necessary to change the setting value (FIG. 167). It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content necessary for ending the game. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the external output which shows that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is performed is performed with respect to the apparatus outside the pachinko machine 10, such as the management computer of a game hall, for example.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of “1” to “6” (step SB306). If it is not one of “1” to “6” (step SB306: NO), “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SB306 or when the process of step SB307 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a is changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. Also in this case, a negative determination is made in step SB308.

  When a negative determination is made in step SB308, on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB309: YES), 1 is added to the value of the setting update area 342 (step SB310). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to one level higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB309: NO), or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SB306, but the setting is updated in step SB306. If it is determined that the value of the work area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SB307. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting returns to “setting 1”.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SB311). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process (FIG. 167) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current value. This is the set value of the pachinko machine 10.

  After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step SB312). As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) ends and the process returns to the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 165), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

  Thereafter, the second RAM clear process is executed (step SB313). In the second RAM clear process, similarly to the RAM clear process in the forty-fifth embodiment (step SA416), an area (set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to “0”. Also, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. Further, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the second RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. In the second RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”, and initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing the initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB314). The sound emission control device 81 receives the return command at the time of update, thereby specifying that the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) has been completed in the main CPU 63, and for the current operating power. It is specified that the set value update process (FIG. 167) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). And the process corresponding to having received the return command at the time of update is executed. The contents of this process will be described later.

  Based on not only performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c as described above, but also performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while further operating the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key, A set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is performed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Executed. As a result, it is possible to make the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a common as an operation for executing the setting related process regarding the setting value. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the setting related process.

  In addition, in the case where the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is performed. When it is executed and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c is added, a set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. This makes it possible to make the execution target process different among the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167). In addition, an operation for making the set value update process (FIG. 167) illegally performed is performed by increasing the operation content for executing the set value update process (FIG. 167) rather than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). It can be made difficult.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 165), it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned ON using the setting key. If it is determined (step SB114: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB116). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. When “1” is set in the game stop flag, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is affirmative, so that step S8907 is executed. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If at least one of the checksums does not match because the information storage state has changed since the previous power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  When “1” is not set in the game stop flag (step SB116: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step SB117). In the first RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process in the forty-fifth embodiment (step SA416), in the work area 221 for specific control, an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to “0”. Also, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the first RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. In the first RAM clear process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0”, and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed.

  Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing the initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The processing contents of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), but some of these processing contents are different. It is good also as composition which has. For example, in the first RAM clear process (step SB117), an area that is subject to “0” clear and initial setting may not be subject to “0” clear and initial setting in the second RAM clear process (step SB313). In the second RAM clear process (step SB313), an area that is a target of “0” clear and initial setting may not be a target of “0” clear and initial setting in the first RAM clear process (step SB117).

  After that, a clear return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB118). The sound emission control device 81 receives the return command at the time of clearing, thereby specifying that the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the operation power supply in the main CPU 63 is completed, and the current operation power It is specified that the first RAM clear process (step SB117) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (step SB101 to step SB122). Then, processing corresponding to reception of the return command at the time of clear is executed. The contents of this process will be described later.

  When a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main process (FIG. 165), that is, when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. If it is, “1” is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB119). As described above, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the affirmative determination is made in step S8906. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If at least one of the checksums does not match because the information storage state has changed since the previous power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB120: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. (Step SB121). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change setting” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is issued when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. It will start again.

  Thereafter, an external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB122). In the external output process at the time of abnormality, a process for outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the situation where the game stop flag is set to “1”, the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and the game stop flag is cleared to “0”, so that the abnormal signal is output. The signal output may be stopped. The abnormal signal can also be output when an abnormality different from the abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs. For example, an abnormal signal is also generated when it is specified in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) that the fraudulent subject to be monitored (the detection of illegal radio waves or the detection of illegal magnetism) has occurred. Output externally. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used in this way, and a configuration in which an abnormal signal dedicated to an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, or the set value may be output externally, An abnormality signal corresponding to each of the abnormality relating to the checksum, the abnormality relating to the checksum, and the abnormality relating to the set value may be output externally.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB114). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB114 and step SB120: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB115). The processing content of the setting value update processing is as already described. That is, when operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 in a state where the “setting change operation” is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, and therefore, negative in any of Step SB104 to Step SB106. Even when the determination is made, the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed. Thereby, it is possible to give priority to the change of the set value. In the set value update process (FIG. 167), the game stop flag is cleared to “0” by executing the initial setting at the start in step SB303 as already described. Thereby, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, after the update of the set value is completed, it is possible to eliminate the state where the abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65.

  On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion part 68a is not turned ON (step SB120: YES, step SB114: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. "Is set (step SB116). Since “1” is set to the game stop flag in the process of step SB116 after “1” is set to the game stop flag in step SB119, an affirmative determination is made in step SB116. In this case, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 in step SB121, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB122.

  That is, when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of Step SB104 to Step SB106, the operation to the main CPU 63 in a situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed. Even if the power supply is started, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is not executed. The first RAM clear process is also performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to “1” and the “RAM clear operation” is being performed. (Step SB117) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the “RAM clear operation” is being performed, the state where the game stop flag is set to “1” is not canceled. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed and the setting is performed regardless of whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. The game stop flag is cleared to “0” in the initial setting (step SB303) at the start of the value update process (FIG. 167). As a result, it is necessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 167) in order to cancel the state where the game stop flag is set to “1”. Accordingly, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, not only the process for initializing the work area 221 for specific control but also the setting value needs to be reset. .

  Further, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to “1”, the “setting change operation” is not performed, that is, “no operation”. In the case of “RAM clear operation” or “setting confirmation operation”, an affirmative determination is made in step SB109 or step SB116, so that an abnormal command is transmitted in step SB121 and an abnormality is detected in step SB122. Execute external output processing. As a result, when “1” is set in the game stop flag, the main side is not executed unless the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed regardless of the processing results of steps SB104 to SB106 in the subsequent main process. Every time the supply of operating power to the CPU 63 is started, an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output at the time of abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game hall manager recognize that the set value should be changed.

  When the process of step SB112 is executed, when the process of step SB113 is executed, when the process of step SB115 is executed, when the process of step SB118 is executed, or when the process of step SB122 is executed, Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB123). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (Step SB125 to Step SB128) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, and thus the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  Further, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as processes at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), whereas the initial check period includes operating power. The process is started after the process at the start of supply is completed. As a result, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set value is displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

  Thereafter, the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step SB124). If the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the startup process flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processes in steps S8901 to S8905 are performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is cancelled. In step SB124, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB125 to SB128. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time will occur. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps SB125 to SB128 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps SB125 to SB128 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly. In Step SB125 to Step SB128, the same processing as Step S113 to Step S116 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, interruption of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is being executed. The situation will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 168 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an ON state, and FIG. 168 (b) shows a period during which processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is executed. 168 (c) shows a period in which “1” is set in the startup process flag in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 168 (d) shows the remaining processes (steps SB125 to SB128). 168 (e) shows a period during which an interrupt is permitted, and FIG. 168 (f) shows a case where the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is performed. 168 (g) shows the period during which the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, and FIG. 168 (h) shows the process for confirming the setting (FIG. 166). To indicate the period it is.

  First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are not executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

  As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing t1. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a “no operation” state where none of the “RAM clear operation”, “setting change operation”, and “setting confirmation operation” is performed. At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the main CPU 63 starts a process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying operating power. Also, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), “1” is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed as shown in FIG. 168 (b), and the remaining processing (step SB125) is performed as shown in FIG. 168 (d). Step SB128) is started. In addition, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. Note that interrupts are not permitted as shown in FIG. 168 (e) at the timing when the residual processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB128) is completed as shown in FIG. 168 (d), and an interrupt is permitted as shown in FIG. 168 (e). As a result, timer interrupt processing is started as shown in FIG. In this case, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is completed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) It may be configured to be executed.

  Next, the case where the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) will be described.

  At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the main CPU 63 starts the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power. Also, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), “1” is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the set value update process (FIG. 167) is started as shown in FIG. 168 (g) at the timing of t5. In this case, an interrupt is permitted at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 168 (e). When the interrupt is permitted, the timer interrupt process is started at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 168 (f). In this case, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is completed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) It may be configured to be executed. Even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, “1” is set in the startup process flag as shown in FIG. 168 (c). While the process for performing fraud monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  The timer interrupt processing ends at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 168 (f), and then the set value update processing (FIG. 167) ends at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 168 (g). Then, at the time t8, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the operation power supply start processing (steps SB101 to SB122) ends, and the start-up processing flag is set as shown in FIG. 168 (c). “0” is cleared. Further, the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 168 (d).

  Next, a case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) will be described.

  At time t9, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 168 (a). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing for starting the supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122). Also, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), “1” is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 168 (h), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is started at the timing of t10. In this case, an interrupt is permitted at the timing t10 as shown in FIG. When the interrupt is permitted, the timer interrupt process is started at the timing t11 as shown in FIG. 168 (f). In this case, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is completed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) It may be configured to be executed. Even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, “1” is set in the startup process flag as shown in FIG. 168 (c). While the process for performing fraud monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  The timer interrupt process ends at the timing t12 as shown in FIG. 168 (f), and then the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) ends as shown in FIG. 168 (h) at the timing t13. Then, at the timing of t13, the operation power supply start processing (step SB101 to step SB122) ends as shown in FIG. 168 (b) and the start-up processing flag is set as shown in FIG. 168 (c). “0” is cleared. Further, the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started at the timing t13 as shown in FIG. 168 (d).

  As described above, the first timer interrupt process (when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 167) is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed. 133) and execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is interrupted and not started during the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the operation power supply. By doing so, it becomes possible to complete the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power at an early stage.

  On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process according to the operation of the manager of the game hall is executed. Becomes longer. In this case, if the interrupt of the timer interrupt process remains prohibited even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the timer interrupt process starts to be executed. The timing is extremely slow. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, an interrupt of the timer interrupt process is permitted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt process from becoming extremely late. Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are being executed, processing for display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is used to display the setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. It is possible to make it happen.

  Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is being executed, “1” is set to the startup processing flag. Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. Among the various processes of 133), the process for performing the power failure monitoring, the updating of various counters and the fraud monitoring is executed, while the process for advancing the game can be prevented from being executed.

  Next, the progress of processing when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, checksum, or set value occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 169 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an ON state, and FIG. 169 (b) shows a period during which processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is executed. 169 (c) shows a period during which the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB128) is executed, and FIG. 169 (d) shows the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). ) Is executed, FIG. 169 (e) shows a period in which “1” is set in the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 169 (f) shows that the abnormal signal is external FIG. 169 (g) shows a period during which the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (a), the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing t1. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a “no operation” state where none of the “RAM clear operation”, “setting change operation”, and “setting confirmation operation” is performed. At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the main CPU 63 starts a process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying operating power.

  Thereafter, the occurrence of an abnormality related to any one of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value is identified at the timing t2, and the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “ “1” is set. Further, external output of the abnormality signal is started at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 169 (f). As a result, it is possible to specify in the management computer of the game hall that an abnormality relating to any one of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the processing at the start of supplying operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) ends as shown in FIG. 169 (b) and the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB125) as shown in FIG. SB128) is started. Also, the external output of the abnormal signal is terminated at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 169 (f). An abnormality relating to any one of the power failure flag, checksum, and set value occurs in the pachinko machine 10 by the external output of the abnormality signal being continued for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from the timing t2 to the timing t4. This can be accurately specified in the management computer of the game hall. Moreover, since the period during which the external output of the abnormal signal is continued is constant for a predetermined period, the processing configuration for performing the external output of the abnormal signal can be simplified. In addition to the external output of the abnormality signal, abnormality notification in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is also executed.

  Thereafter, the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) ends at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 169 (c). Then, the timer interrupt process is executed as shown in FIG. 169 (d) from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and the remaining process (as shown in FIG. 169 (c) is performed from the timing t6 to the timing t7. Steps SB125 to SB128) are executed, and timer interrupt processing is executed as shown in FIG. 169 (d) over the timing from t7 to t8. However, as shown in FIG. 169 (e), since the game stop flag is set to “1”, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, power failure monitoring, various counter updates and fraud Although the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. At the time of t8, the power failure process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169 (a).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 169 (a), and the processing at the start of supply of operating power as shown in FIG. ) Is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 169 (e), “1” is set in the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control. Therefore, the abnormality signal is externally output as shown in FIG. 169 (f) from the timing t10 to the timing t12. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the management computer of the game hall recognize again that an abnormality relating to any one of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. In addition to the external output of the abnormality signal, abnormality notification in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is also executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) ends at the timing t11, and the timing from the timing t11 to the timing t13 in FIG. 169 (c). As shown in FIG. 5, the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (d), timer interrupt processing is executed at the timing of t13. However, as shown in FIG. 169 (e), since the game stop flag is set to “1”, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, power failure monitoring, various counter updates and fraud Although the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. At the time t14, the power failure process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169 (a).

  After that, at the timing of t15, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 169 (a), and the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) as shown in FIG. 169 (b). ) Is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (g), the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed over the timing from t16 to the timing of t17. Not only is the set value changed by executing the set value update process (FIG. 167), but the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 169 (e). The Thereby, the state where execution of the process for advancing the game due to the occurrence of the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control is prevented is eliminated. Thereafter, the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. 169 (c) from the timing of t17 to the timing of t18, and the timer interrupt processing is executed at the timing of t18 as shown in FIG. 169 (d). Is started.

  As described above, when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main process (FIG. 165), a game in the work area 221 for specific control When the stop flag is set to “1”, the process for advancing the game is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game from being played despite the occurrence of an information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Further, the state where the game stop flag is set to “1” is not canceled unless the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. As a result, in order to eliminate the state where the game stop flag is set to “1”, it is necessary to execute the set value update processing (FIG. 167), and the occurrence of an information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control At this time, not only the process for initializing the work area 221 for specific control but also the resetting of the set value can be required.

  Next, display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 170A shows a period during which the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed, and FIG. 170B shows the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). ) Shows the period during which the process is executed, FIG. 170 (c) shows the initial check period, and FIG. 170 (d) shows the period during which the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. FIG. 170 (e) shows a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 170 (f) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, and FIG. 170 (g) shows the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 confirmed. The It shows the setting confirmation during a display period which is performed a display indicating the current settings of the display and the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth notification display device 201 to 204 indicate a that situation.

  First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are not executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

  As shown in FIG. 170 (a), the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is executed over the timing from t1 to t2. Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), the processing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the checking counter setting process in step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing t2. Thereby, the display for a check is started by the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display devices 201-204 (refer FIG.128 (b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be performed in the situation where the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 170 (c). Thereby, the display of the base value is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Next, the case where the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) will be described.

  At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is started. Then, the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed as shown in FIG. 170 (d) from the timing t5 to the timing t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170 (e), the display period during the setting update is performed from the timing t5 to the timing t6.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), the process after the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started at the timing of t6. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the checking counter setting process in step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t6. Thereby, the display for a check is started by the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display devices 201-204 (refer FIG.128 (b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be performed in the situation where the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . Thereafter, the initial check period ends at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 170 (c). Thereby, the display of the base value is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Next, a case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) will be described.

  At the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is started. Then, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed as shown in FIG. 170 (f) from the timing t9 to the timing t10. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170 (g), the display period is during setting confirmation from the timing t9 to the timing t10.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), the processing after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started at the timing of t10. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the checking counter setting process in step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t10. Thereby, the display for a check is started by the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display devices 201-204 (refer FIG.128 (b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be performed in the situation where the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . Thereafter, the initial check period ends at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 170 (c). Thereby, the display of the base value is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (Step SB125 to Step SB128) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, and thus the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  Further, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as processes at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), whereas the initial check period includes operating power. The process is started after the process at the start of supply is completed. As a result, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set value is displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, the main process (FIG. 165) will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the situation where neither the set value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the main process (FIG. 165) is resumed when the operation power supply is resumed. The contents of the process executed in (1) will be described first.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of “no operation”, in the main process (FIG. 165), the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). ) Is not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), while the set value update process ( FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the main process (FIG. 165) executes the set value update process (FIG. 167), while the first RAM clear process (step SB117). ) And setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the main processing (FIG. 165) executes the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), while the first RAM clear processing (step SB117). ) And set value update processing (FIG. 167) are not executed.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent operation power supply The contents of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 165) when restarting will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of “no operation”, when the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of “RAM clear operation”, the operation is performed in the situation of “setting change operation” Regardless of whether the supply of power is resumed or the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” has been performed, the main process (FIG. 165) updates the set value (see FIG. 167) is executed, but the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is not executed. That is, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the set value update is performed regardless of the operation content at the time of restarting the supply of the operating power thereafter. Processing (FIG. 167) is newly started.

  Due to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 167), the setting key insertion unit when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when restarting the supply of operating power. It becomes possible to newly start the set value update processing (FIG. 167) regardless of the operation contents on the 68a and the reset button 68c. As a result, an opportunity to complete the update of the set value can be surely generated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the set value has not been updated.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the set value update process (FIG. 167), the set value update process (FIG. 167) is uniquely executed regardless of the operation contents when the supply of the operating power is resumed. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the processing content executed according to each operation content is changed.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 165) when restarting will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), while the set value update process (FIG. 167). And the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. That is, even if the power failure process is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being performed, the setting confirmation is performed when the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed without newly executing the process (FIG. 166). Accordingly, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the first RAM clear process (step SB117) for the “RAM clear operation”. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to “0” by executing the first RAM clear process (step SB117).

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being performed, the setting confirmation is performed when a “setting change operation” is performed when the operation power supply is resumed thereafter. The set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed without newly executing the process (FIG. 166). As a result, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 167) for the “setting change operation”. Even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed as described above, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, so that the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. At the end of the setting value update process (FIG. 167), information on the setting value to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341, so that the manager of the game hall can use the current pachinko machine. Ten set values can be confirmed. Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to “0” by executing the second RAM clear process (step SB313) in the set value update process (FIG. 167).

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting check operation” has been performed, the main process (FIG. 165) is for setting check on the condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, checksum, and set value. Processing (FIG. 166) is executed. As a result, even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), it is possible to resume the confirmation of the set value by performing a “setting confirmation operation” when resuming the supply of operating power. It becomes.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of “no operation”, the setting key insertion unit 68a determines that the main process (FIG. 165) has no abnormality regarding the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value. The setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed even when the ON operation is not performed. As a result, even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the operation power is resumed after that, the setting value is confirmed. It can be resumed.

  Next, processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 will be described. Prior to the description of the processing, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 81 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  The audio emission control device 81 includes an audio emission control board 351. A sound light side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound emission control board 351. The sound light side MPU 352 includes a sound light side ROM 354 and a sound light side RAM 355 in addition to the sound light side CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit. In addition to the above elements, the sound light side MPU 352 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The sound-light side ROM 354 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The sound light side ROM 354 stores various control programs executed by the sound light side CPU 353 and fixed value data.

  The sound-light side RAM 355 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound light side RAM 355 can be accessed at random, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound light side ROM 354 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound light side RAM 355 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the sound light side ROM 354.

  In addition to the sound light side MPU 352, the RTC 356 and the RTC memory 357 are mounted on the sound emission control board 351. The RTC 356 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date / time information) being measured in accordance with an instruction from the sound side CPU 353. This is a possible configuration. The RTC 356 is provided with a backup power source, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the date / time information is measured in the RTC 356, and only the time information may be measured.

  The RTC memory 357 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The RTC memory 357 stores date and time information of the RTC 356 in accordance with an instruction from the sound side CPU 353. The date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is read by the sound light side CPU 353 as necessary. The sound side CPU 353 grasps the reference time based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, and the time corresponding effect is executed every time a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses with reference to the reference time. Execute the process to make it. The RTC memory 357 is configured to be supplied with backup power from a backup power source provided for the RTC 356, and date and time information is stored and held even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTC memory 357 may be an EEPROM or the like that does not require external power supply to store and hold information.

  Next, the effect control process executed by the sound side CPU 353 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect control process is executed when the supply of operating power to the sound side CPU 353 is started.

  When an update start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB401: YES), update time notification setting processing is executed (step SB402). The update start command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 353 when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is started in the main side CPU 63 as already described. In the update notification setting process, an image indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, an image for enabling the operation contents for changing the set value to be recognized, and the set value update process ( The display control device 82 is display-controlled so that an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for ending FIG. 167) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the setting value is being changed, and operation contents and setting value update processing necessary to change the setting value (FIG. 167). It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content necessary for ending the game. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41.

  When the confirmation start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB403: YES), a confirmation notification setting process is executed (step SB404). The confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is started in the main side CPU 63 as already described. In the confirmation notification setting process, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed and an image for enabling the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) to be recognized. The display control device 82 is controlled to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and is necessary to end the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166). It is possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41.

  When the processing of step SB401 to step SB404 is executed, it is determined whether any of the normal return command, the clear return command, the check return command, and the update return command is received from the main CPU 63 ( Step SB405). The normal return command is a process at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101) without executing any of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the set value update process (FIG. 167). Sent when step SB122) ends. The return command at the time of clear is transmitted when the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed and the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted when the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is executed and the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of update is transmitted when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed and the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed.

  If these return commands have not been received (step SB405: NO), the process returns to step SB401. The main CPU 63 transmits one of the return commands to the sound light CPU 353 when the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (Steps SB101 to SB122) ends. In this case, as described above, the sound side CPU 353 does not execute the processes after step SB406 until receiving any return command from the main CPU 63. Thereby, while the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122), it is possible to prevent the sound light side CPU 353 from starting the execution control of the normal effect. It becomes possible.

  Further, in a situation where no return command is received, there is a possibility that an update start command or a confirmation start command is received from the main CPU 63. When an update start command is received, the set value update process is already performed as described above. The notification corresponding to the execution of (FIG. 167) needs to be performed, and when the confirmation start command is received, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed as described above. It is necessary to make a corresponding notification. In this case, the sound-side CPU 353 does not execute the processing after step SB406 until it receives any return command from the main CPU 63, so that a notification corresponding to the update start command or confirmation start command is received. Can be suitably started.

  When any return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB405: YES), it is determined whether or not the received return command is a normal return command (step SB406). As described above, the normal return command is the time when the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed and the supply of operating power starts. This is transmitted when the process (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed. When the normal return command is received (step SB406: YES), the current date / time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date / time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). Thus, the date and time information serving as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-related effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

  If the return command received this time is not a normal return command (step SB406: NO) but is a return command at the time of update (step SB408: YES), an end-of-update notification process is executed (step SB409). The return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound side CPU 353 when the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is ended in the main side CPU 63 as already described. In the update notification end processing, the notification corresponding to the set value update processing (FIG. 167) started in step SB402 is ended.

  If the return command received this time is not a return command at the time of update (step SB408: NO) and is a return command at the time of confirmation (step SB410: YES), a confirmation time notification end process is executed (step SB411). The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is terminated in the main side CPU 63 as already described. In the confirmation end notification process, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) started in step SB404 is ended.

  When the process of step SB407 is executed, when the process of step SB409 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step SB410, or when the process of step SB411 is executed, a process for performing execution control of a normal effect is performed. Run. Specifically, it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of the time-related effect (step SB412).

  The time-corresponding effect is an effect that is executed every time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses with reference to the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. In the time corresponding effect, the display light emitting unit 53 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the time corresponding effect, the speaker unit 54 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the time corresponding effect, and the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the time corresponding effect. A display effect is performed.

  When a time-related effect is started in a situation where a game-time effect is being executed, the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the time-based effect with priority over the game-time effect. On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, an image display corresponding to the time-corresponding effect is performed in a state where an image display corresponding to the effect for game play is reduced and displayed on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In addition, when a time-related effect is started in a situation where an effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the time-based effect is executed with priority over the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, the image display corresponding to the time-corresponding effect is performed in a state where the image display corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is reduced and displayed on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

  With a configuration in which a time-corresponding effect is executed each time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses with reference to a reference time corresponding to date / time information stored in the RTC memory 357, a plurality of adjacent game halls If the reference times of the pachinko machines 10 are the same, it becomes possible to simultaneously start time-related effects on the plurality of pachinko machines 10. In the game hall, the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is simultaneously turned on, so that the reference times of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are basically the same.

  In step SB412, the reference time is grasped based on the date / time information stored in the RTC memory 357. Also, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the difference between the reference time and the time corresponding to the current date and time information read from the RTC 356 is an integral multiple of the predetermined time. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB412, time setting effect setting processing is executed (step SB413). In the setting process of the time corresponding effect, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 perform setting for executing the time corresponding effect, and the symbol display device 41 displays a command for executing the time corresponding effect. 82. Note that the execution content of the time-related effect may be different depending on the number of times the time-related effect is executed when the reference time corresponding to the date / time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is used as a reference.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB412, or if the process of step SB413 is executed, other processes are executed (step SB414). In the other processing, when a command for starting an effect for game play is received from the main CPU 63, the effect for starting game play is started by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. If it is a situation where an effect for game times is to be advanced, settings for advancing the effect for game times are performed on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In the situation where the effect for the game should be ended, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to end the effect for playing the game. In other processes, when a command for starting the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 provide the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. When the setting for starting is performed and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode should be advanced, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is advanced by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. If the setting is made and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is to be ended, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to end the effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, the action corresponding to the content of the processing executed in the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  All of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the set value update process (FIG. 167) in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63. Is not executed, the main CPU 63 transmits a normal return command to the sound light side CPU 353 when the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) ends. When receiving the normal return command, the sound light side CPU 353 does not execute control related to the notification. On the other hand, when receiving the normal return command, the sound side CPU 353 stores the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time referred to in order to specify the execution trigger of the time-related effect is newly stored in the RTC memory 357.

  When the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) When the process ends, the main CPU 63 transmits a clear return command to the sound light CPU 353. When the sound light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of clearing, it does not execute control related to the notification. Even if the sound side CPU 353 receives a clear return command, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since power for backup is supplied to the RTC memory 357, when new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, the RTC memory is turned off before the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and held as it is.

  When the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) When the process ends, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of update to the sound light CPU 353. When the sound light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of update, the sound light side CPU 353 ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the set value update processing (FIG. 167). Even if the sound side CPU 353 receives a return command at the time of update, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is not stored in the RTC memory 357. Since power for backup is supplied to the RTC memory 357, when new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, the RTC memory is turned off before the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and held as it is.

  When the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed in the processing at the start of operating power supply in the main CPU 63 (step SB101 to step SB122), the processing at the start of operating power supply (step SB101 to step SB122) When the process ends, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of confirmation to the sound light CPU 353. When receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound light side CPU 353 terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166). Even if the sound side CPU 353 receives a return command at the time of confirmation, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is not stored in the RTC memory 357. Since power for backup is supplied to the RTC memory 357, when new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, the RTC memory is turned off before the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and held as it is.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value is changed from a predetermined setting value corresponding to the start. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) changes the setting value from the set value corresponding to a certain start. Can be performed. Therefore, the work content of the setting value changing operation is easy for the operator to understand.

  Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the set value is changed from “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the administrator of the game hall unintentionally ends the set value update process (FIG. 167) immediately after the start of the set value update process (FIG. 167), the setting value having the lowest advantage is Therefore, even if a game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

  The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and a setting value update process is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the situation where (FIG. 167) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is updated and stored in the setting reference area 341 while the setting value information set before the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started is stored and held. The set value can be changed.

  When the supply of operating power is started, the main-side CPU 63 transmits a clear return command when the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, and executes the set value update process (FIG. 167). A return command at the time of update is transmitted, and when a process for confirming the setting (FIG. 166) is executed, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted. When none of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, a normal return command is transmitted. As a result, it is possible to perform not only the main CPU 63 but also the sound side CPU 353 to perform control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started.

  The sound side CPU 353 makes an affirmative determination in step SB405 of the effect control process (FIG. 173) regardless of whether the normal return command, the clear return command, the update return command, or the check return command is received. Then, the process of step SB412 to step SB414 is executed. On the other hand, when a normal return command is received, a write process to the RTC memory 357 (step SB407) is executed, and when a return command at the time of update is received, an update time notification end process (step SB409) is executed. When the confirmation return command is received, the confirmation notification end processing (step SB411) is executed, and when the clear return command is received, the dedicated processing is not executed. As a result, the process corresponding to the progress of the game is started in the sound side CPU 353 upon reception of any one return command among the return commands, and the control corresponding to each return command is performed. It can be executed by the side CPU 353.

  After sending any return command, the main CPU 63 ends the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of operating power supply and starts the processing (steps S8907 to S8920) for controlling the progress of the game. Then, the sound light side CPU 353 performs execution control of the production corresponding to the progress of the game when any of the return commands is received. As a result, after the main CPU 63 executes a process for controlling the progress of the game, the sound light side CPU 353 controls the execution of the performance corresponding to the progress of the game. Is possible. In this case, the sound side CPU 353 executes processing corresponding to each return command. As a result, the sound light side CPU 353 uses the plurality of return commands that make the execution contents of the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the sound light side CPU 353 different from each other, and the sound light side CPU 353 triggers the start of the execution control of the effect corresponding to the game progress contents. Can be recognized.

  Since the time-related effect is executed when the time-related effect is executed based on the date / time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the time-related effect is executed at a predetermined time. It becomes possible to. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. No new date / time information is stored in the RTC memory 357, while the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are all executed. If not, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 according to the processing contents executed by the main CPU 63, and the RTC It is possible to cause a situation in which the date and time information is not newly stored in the memory 357.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, and the “setting change operation” is performed. The set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and when the “setting check operation” is performed, the setting check process (FIG. 166) is executed. On the other hand, when the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is started in the state of “no operation”, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). None of these are executed. In this case, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started as described above, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. In this case, new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, but any of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Is not executed, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. As a result, when the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the date / time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 or the date / time information is not newly stored in the RTC memory 357. Can be selected by the manager of the game hall.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB125) is performed after the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power is completed in the main CPU 63. Before the SB 128) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, and thus the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are executed as processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power, whereas the supply of operating power is performed during the initial check period. It starts after the start process is completed. As a result, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set value is displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In the main process (FIG. 165) of the main CPU 63, when either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting are performed. This is a process that is executed in common even if neither of the value update processes (FIG. 167) is executed, and any of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167). Is executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked as processing subsequent to the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167). The process for starting the display is set. As described above, the process for starting the display for checking in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as a common process, so that the processing configuration can be simplified and the superiority as described above is achieved. It is possible to achieve the effect.

  Even in a situation where the display for check is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. Thereby, even if it is the structure by which the display for a check is performed in the display apparatuses 201-204 for 1st-4th after execution of the process for a setting confirmation (FIG. 166) or a setting value update process (FIG. 167), a game is played. It is possible to prevent the start timing of processing for progress from being delayed.

  Whether or not the setting value of the target of use is within a normal range in the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power that is executed when the supply of operating power is started in the main CPU 63. Processing for monitoring is executed. And when the setting value of use object is abnormal, it will be in the control state in which the process for advancing a game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started in spite of the fact that the set value to be used is abnormal.

  The process for monitoring whether or not the set value to be used is within the normal range is the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) even after the process at the start of the operation power supply (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. ) In step S8919. As a result, even if the setting value of the usage target becomes abnormal in the process of progressing the game, it is possible to cope with it.

  Whether or not the setting value to be used is within a normal range in the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power, which is executed when the supply of operating power is started in the main CPU 63 In addition to monitoring, monitoring is performed as to whether or not the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1” and the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are checked. Whether the thumb is normal or not is monitored. Then, when “1” is not set in the power failure flag or when the checksum is abnormal, a restriction state in which the process for advancing the game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started in spite of the occurrence of an information abnormality with respect to the main RAM 65.

  The restricted state is resumed when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the process for advancing the game from being restricted due to the occurrence of an information abnormality with respect to the main RAM 65 from being canceled only by stopping the supply of operating power. Become.

  The restricted state is released by executing the set value update process (FIG. 167). Thereby, when the state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of the information abnormality with respect to the main side RAM 65 is released, it is possible to newly set the setting value to be used.

  Even in the restricted state, power failure monitoring and various counter updating processes are executed. Thereby, even if the progress of the game is restricted as described above, it is possible to ensure execution of necessary processing. In particular, by performing power outage monitoring, it is possible to appropriately cope with a power outage that occurs even when the progress of the game is restricted.

  When the restriction state is reached, it is notified that the set value to be used should be changed. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to resolve it.

  When an information abnormality has occurred with respect to the main RAM 65, an abnormality signal is output to the management computer of the game hall. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to resolve it.

  An abnormal signal is output to the management computer of the game hall even when an abnormality different from the case where an information abnormality has occurred with respect to the main RAM 65. As a result, it is possible to share the configuration for performing external output.

  Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in a restricted state where the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of information abnormality with respect to the main RAM 65, it is still restricted when the supply of operating power is resumed. When the state is not released, external output of the abnormal signal is performed again. As a result, an abnormal signal is externally output every time the supply of operating power is resumed in the restricted state. Therefore, it becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to recognize that an information abnormality has occurred regarding the main RAM 65.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the set value update processing (FIG. 167) are not executed in the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). In the situation where the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and Execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is interrupted and not started during the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the operation power supply. By doing so, it becomes possible to complete the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power at an early stage.

  On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process according to the operation of the manager of the game hall is executed. Becomes longer. In this case, if the interrupt of the timer interrupt process remains prohibited even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the timer interrupt process starts to be executed. The timing is extremely slow. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, an interrupt of the timer interrupt process is permitted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt process from becoming extremely late. Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are being executed, processing for display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is used to display the setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. It is possible to make it happen.

  Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is being executed, “1” is set to the startup processing flag. Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. Among the various processes of 133), the process for performing the power failure monitoring, the updating of various counters and the fraud monitoring is executed, while the process for advancing the game can be prevented from being executed.

  When none of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. When the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 is performed. It is not limited to the structure which does not generate | occur | produce. For example, when none of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or when the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed. Alternatively, a new storage of the date / time information in the RTC memory 357 may occur. Further, when none of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. Alternatively, a new storage of the date / time information in the RTC memory 357 may occur. Further, when none of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. Alternatively, a new storage of the date / time information in the RTC memory 357 may occur.

  Further, when none of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, Alternatively, the configuration may be such that new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed. Further, when none of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, when the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, Alternatively, the configuration may be such that new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed. Further, when none of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or when the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs when the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed.

  When the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. In other cases, new date / time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. A configuration in which storage does not occur may be employed. Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, and in other cases, new date / time information in the RTC memory 357 is generated. A configuration in which storage does not occur may be employed. In addition, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. In other cases, new date / time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. A configuration in which storage does not occur may be employed. In addition, when the first RAM clear process (step SB117) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. A configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur. When the first RAM clear process (step SB117) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, and in other cases, the RTC memory 357 is stored. A configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date and time information does not occur. Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, and otherwise, for the RTC. A configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur.

  Further, when the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, all of the work areas 221 for specific control including the setting reference area 341 and the setting update area 342 in the initial setting at the start (step SB303). The area may be cleared to “0” and the initialization may be executed. In this case, the second RAM clear process (step SB313) may not be executed in the set value update process (FIG. 167).

  Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value may be changed from a predetermined set value other than “setting 1”. For example, the setting value may be changed from “setting 2”, the setting value may be changed from “setting 3”, and the setting value change may be started from “setting 4”. The setting value change may be started from “setting 5”, or the setting value change may be started from “setting 6”.

  When the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten in the setting update area 342 as in the 45th embodiment. Thus, the setting value may be changed from the setting value that has been set as the use target until then.

  In addition, a process for transmitting various return commands in the main process (FIG. 165) may be set as a process before the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started. In this case, when any one of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the corresponding flag is set, In the process for transmitting various return commands, a return command corresponding to the state of the flag may be transmitted to the sound side CPU 353.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the time corresponding effect is executed every time a predetermined time elapses with reference to the date / time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the date / time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is used as a reference. It may be configured to monitor whether or not a predetermined abnormality occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. Every time a predetermined time elapses with reference to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 The base value may be notified. In this case, the RTC 356 and the RTC memory 357 may be provided on the main control board 61, and the abnormality monitoring or the base value notification may be performed by the main CPU 63. Anomaly monitoring is simultaneously performed by a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall, and the result is notified by, for example, the symbol display device 41, so that it is periodically determined whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred. Monitoring can be performed collectively for a plurality of pachinko machines 10. In addition, the base value is regularly notified to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 by simultaneously reporting the base value by the symbol display device 41 or the like in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 set in the game hall. Can be performed. The various notifications are not limited to the configuration performed by the pachinko machine 10 itself, and may be configured to be performed by external output to the management computer of the game hall.

  Further, when it is determined in the main process (FIG. 165) that “1” is not set in the power failure flag, when it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, or when the setting value in the setting reference area 341 is abnormal. If it is determined, the setting value update process (FIG. 165) may be forcibly executed regardless of whether the “setting change operation” is performed. As a result, it is possible to immediately change the set value when an information abnormality has occurred with respect to the main RAM 65.

<50th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the effect control process executed by the sound side CPU 353 is different from that of the 49th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the effect control process in the present embodiment executed by the sound light side CPU 353.

  In Step SB501 to Step SB505, the same processing as Step SB401 to Step SB405 of the effect control processing (FIG. 173) in the forty-ninth embodiment is executed. When any of the normal return command, the clear return command, the check return command, and the update return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB505: YES), the currently received return command is other than the normal return command. It is determined whether the command is a return command (step SB506).

  When the return command received this time is one of the return command at the time of clear, the return command at the time of confirmation, and the return command at the time of update (step SB506: YES), the effect control process in the forty-ninth embodiment (FIG. 173) As in step SB407, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). Thus, the date and time information serving as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-related effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

  In step SB508 to step SB514, the same process as step SB408 to step SB414 of the effect control process (FIG. 173) in the 49th embodiment is executed.

  FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram for describing an action corresponding to the content of the process executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) when the main CPU 63 starts supplying the operating power.

  As in the 49th embodiment, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) When none of the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, the main CPU 63 transmits a normal return command to the sound side CPU 353, and when the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed. The main CPU 63 transmits a clear return command to the sound side CPU 353, and when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command upon update to the sound side CPU 353. When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the main CPU 63 sends a return command upon confirmation to the sound light CPU 353. To send.

  Similar to the 49th embodiment, the sound-side CPU 353 terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 167) when receiving the return command at the time of update, and at the time of confirmation. When the return command is received, the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is terminated. In addition, similar to the 49th embodiment, the sound-side CPU 353 does not perform control related to notification for receiving a normal return command and a return command at the time of clearing.

  When the sound light side CPU 353 receives any one of the clear return command, the update return command, and the check return command, it stores the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time referred to in order to specify the execution trigger of the time-related effect is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. On the other hand, even if the sound light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is not stored in the RTC memory 357. Since power for backup is supplied to the RTC memory 357, when new storage of date / time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, the RTC memory 357 is turned on before the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The date and time information stored in the memory 357 is stored and held as it is.

  According to the above configuration, any one of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of operating power supply Is executed, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is rewritten to the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356, whereas the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB101) If none of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in step SB122), it is stored in the RTC memory 357. Date / time information cannot be rewritten. As a result, even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off for maintenance and operation check of the pachinko machine 10 during the game hall operation, the operation power supply is resumed after the operation is resumed. By performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10, the date / time information stored in the RTC memory 357 can be prevented from being rewritten. Therefore, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off during the game hall operation and the supply of the operating power is resumed, the time base effect reference time is made the same with the surrounding pachinko machine 10 in the game hall. However, the operability for resuming the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in the state of “no operation”, the date / time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is not rewritten, so that the date / time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is not rewritten. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on so as not to be rewritten, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are out of purpose. It is possible to prevent the processing from being executed.

<51st Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, the process of step SB601 to step SB630 in the main process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  Steps SB601 to SB622 execute the same processes as steps SB101 to SB122 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  When the process of step SB612 is executed, when the process of step SB613 is executed, when the process of step SB615 is executed, when the process of step SB618 is executed, or when the process of step SB622 is executed, Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB623). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the residual processing is performed after the processing (step SB601 to step SB622) at the start of the supply of operating power is completed in the main CPU 63. Before the (step SB627 to step SB630) is started, the initial check period is started. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, and thus the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  Further, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are executed as processing (step SB601 to step SB622) at the start of supply of operating power, whereas the initial check period has operating power. The process is started after the process at the start of supply is completed. As a result, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set value is displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB624). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated and activated, the first to fourth notification display devices are configured so that the check display is performed in a situation where a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter. 201-204 are display-controlled.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter in the work area 221 for specific control is “0” (step SB625). Then, the process waits at step SB625 until the value of the checking counter becomes “0”. In this case, since the state where the start process flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1” is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the process for performing power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is executed, while the process for advancing the game is not performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB623 elapses, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a check in a situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. Will continue.

  Thereafter, the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step SB626). If the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the startup process flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processes in steps S8901 to S8905 are performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is cancelled. In step SB626, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB627 to SB630. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time will occur. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes of Step SB627 to Step SB630 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in Steps SB627 to SB630 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly. In Step SB627 to Step SB630, the same processing as Step S113 to Step S116 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  According to the said structure, the display for a check is performed in the display apparatus 201-204 for 1st-4th notification in the condition where execution of the process for advancing a game was blocked | prevented. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal in a situation where no game is played.

<52nd embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, the process of step SB701 to step SB734 in the main process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  Unlike the 49th embodiment, the main process of the present embodiment does not execute the power-on initial setting process. Therefore, when the main process is started, the processes after step SB701 are started without waiting for a predetermined time for waiting to elapse. The power-on initial setting process is not executed, but access to the main RAM 65 is permitted when the main process is started.

  In the main process, first, the internal function register setting process is executed (step SB701) similarly to step SB102 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment, and the main process (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment. As in step SB103, “1” is set to the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB702). After that, “1” is set in the power failure flag, the checksum is normal, the set value is normal, and further, “1” is not set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control. On the condition (step SB703 to step SB705: YES, step SB706: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB707).

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB707: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB708). When the game stop flag is not set to “1” and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB708: NO, step SB709: YES), or the game stop flag Is not set to “1” and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON using the setting key, and “1” is set to the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control. If so (step SB708 and step SB709: NO, step SB710: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB711). In the setting confirmation process, the processing of step SB201 to step SB202 and step SB204 to step SB207 is executed in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  That is, the confirmation start command is not transmitted to the sound side CPU 353 in the setting confirmation process of this embodiment. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, even if the setting confirmation process is executed, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process is not executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the main process is started, the process after step SB701 is started without waiting for a predetermined time for waiting to pass. The operation start and initial setting of the display device 41 may not be completed. On the other hand, display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed by preventing the symbol display device 41 from executing notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process as described above. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. In addition, although the notification corresponding to the process for setting confirmation is performed in the display light emission part 53 and the speaker part 54, it is good also as a structure which is not performed in the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG.

  After executing the setting confirmation process, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB712). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. That is, when the setting confirmation process is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB701 to SB729), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are completed after the setting confirmation process is completed. At 204, the check display is started, and the check display is performed in a state where the progress of the process is not waited.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed and the game stop flag is not set to "1", and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON using the setting key, the work for specific control If “1” is not set in the setting confirmation display flag in the area 221 (step SB707 to step SB710: NO), the initial check period (specifically, the check counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set. 5 seconds) is set (step SB713). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB714). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated and activated, the first to fourth notification display devices are configured so that the check display is performed in a situation where a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter. 201-204 are display-controlled.

  Thereafter, a weighting process is executed (step SB715). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the checking counter in the work area 221 for specific control becomes “0”. In this case, since the state where the start process flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1” is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the process for performing power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is executed, while the process for advancing the game is not performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB713 elapses, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a check in a situation where execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. Will continue. Further, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the waiting time in the weight processing. In other words, using the wait period for preventing the execution of the process for progressing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used. Display for checking. After the wait process (step SB715) is completed, a normal return command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 353 (step SB716) in the same manner as in step SB113 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB707 and step SB717: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB718). Even when “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control regardless of whether or not the “setting change operation” as described above is performed (step SB706: YES). ), A set value update process is executed (step SB717). In the set value update process, the process of step SB301 to step SB304 and step SB306 to step SB314 is executed in the set value update process (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  That is, the update start command is not transmitted to the sound side CPU 353 in the setting value update process of the present embodiment. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the set value update process is executed, the notification corresponding to the set value update process is not executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the main process is activated, the design value update process is started at the timing when the set value update process is started in order to start the process after step SB701 without waiting for a predetermined time for waiting to elapse. The operation start and initial setting of the display device 41 may not be completed. On the other hand, display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed by preventing the symbol display device 41 from executing notification corresponding to the set value update processing as described above. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. The notification corresponding to the set value update processing may be performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, but may not be performed by the symbol display device 41.

  After executing the set value update processing, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB719). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. That is, when the set value update process is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB701 to SB729), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are terminated after the set value update process is completed. At 204, the check display is started, and the check display is performed in a state where the progress of the process is not waited.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned ON (step SB707: YES, step SB717: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is “1”. Is set (step SB720: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step SB721). The processing contents of the first RAM clear process are the same as the first RAM clear process (step SB117) of the main process (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment.

  Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB722). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB723). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated and activated, the first to fourth notification display devices are configured so that the check display is performed in a situation where a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter. 201-204 are display-controlled.

  Thereafter, a weighting process is executed (step SB724). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the checking counter in the work area 221 for specific control becomes “0”. In this case, since the state where the start process flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1” is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the process for performing power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is executed, while the process for advancing the game is not performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB722 elapses, the display for check is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the execution of the process for progressing the game is blocked. Will continue. Further, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the waiting time in the weight processing. In other words, using the wait period for preventing the execution of the process for progressing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used. Display for checking. After the wait process (step SB724) is completed, a clear return command is transmitted to the sound-side CPU 353 (step SB725) as in step SB118 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB703 to SB705, whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed after setting the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control to “1” (step SB726). Is determined (step SB727). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB717 and step SB727: YES), the setting value update process is performed in step SB718. In step SB719, the checking counter setting process is executed. The contents of these processes are as already described.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB727: NO), when it is determined in step SB720 that “1” is set in the game stop flag, or in step SB708, the game stop flag is “1”. When it is determined that is set, the processing of step SB728 and step SB729 is executed. The processing contents of step SB728 and step SB729 are the same as those of step SB121 and step SB122 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  When the process of step SB712 is executed, when the process of step SB716 is executed, when the process of step SB719 is executed, when the process of step SB725 is executed, or when the process of step SB729 is executed, The startup processing flag in the work area 221 is cleared to “0” (step SB730). If the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the startup process flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processes in steps S8901 to S8905 are performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is cancelled. In step SB730, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB731 to SB734. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time will occur. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes of Step SB731 to Step SB734 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps SB731 to SB734 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly. In Steps SB731 to SB734, the same processing as Steps S113 to S116 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting confirmation processing (step SB711) and the setting value update processing (step SB718) are not executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB701 to step SB729), the processing for weight is performed. The display for check is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the process is on standby. Accordingly, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used by using the wait period for preventing the execution of the process for proceeding the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. It is possible to make a display for checking. Moreover, before the process for advancing a game is started, it is possible to ensure an opportunity to confirm the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) does not end unless at least the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off by the administrator of the game hall, so these setting confirmation processes (step SB711). Alternatively, by the time the set value update process (step SB718) is completed, the time required for starting the operation of the symbol display device 41 and completing the initial setting has elapsed. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed, the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or setting is prevented by preventing the wait process from being executed. When the value update process (step SB718) is executed, it is possible to prevent the time required until the process for proceeding with the game from starting excessively.

  Further, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed, the first to first items after the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is completed. 4 Display for check is performed in the display devices 201 to 204 for notification. Thereby, the display for checking is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 without affecting the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

<53rd Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, the process of step SB801-step SB826 in a main process is performed using the program for specific control in the main side CPU63, and the data for specific control.

  First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step SB801). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. In addition, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SB802). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and activated with respect to the main process, is determined from the first interrupt period. Is set to a second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is a short cycle.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt cycle is relatively short as the timer interrupt process. And exist. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Further, when both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have passed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are not executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started first regardless of the elapsed order of. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process activated in preference to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated in preference to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set as the main register. To a specific register of the side CPU 63. In addition, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, the setting process of numerical ranges of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to a startup processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB803). As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag indicates that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated. While processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing processing for advancing the game. Is a flag for specifying the main CPU 63.

  The start-up process flag is set to “1” when the process (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supply of operating power is started in the main process (FIG. 165). “0” is cleared before the process at the start of the supply is completed and the remaining process (step SB 819 to step SB 822) is started. As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the start process flag is set to “1”, the process from step S8907 to step S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, a setting confirmation process (step SB810) or a setting value update process (FIG. 181) described later is executed among the processes (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), as described above, even when “1” is set in the start-up process flag, the operation power can be obtained by executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905. Among the processes at the start of supply (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826), a setting confirmation process (step SB810) or a setting value update process (FIG. 181) described later is being executed. While the power failure monitoring is executed, the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further illegal detection is executed.

  In particular, even when the start-up process flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage process (step S8901) is executed, so that the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818) is performed. , Even if a power failure occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SB810) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 181), which will be described later, is executed among the steps SB823 to SB826), the power failure processing is executed on the power failure. It becomes possible. In the power failure process, as in the 35th embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being identified as having an abnormality. As a result, if a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation processing (step SB810) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 181), the fact that the power failure occurred during the setting related processing is supplied next time. It becomes possible to specify at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed. Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 179) for returning after the timer interrupt process to be activated is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. Information on various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 179) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After “1” is set in the startup processing flag in step SB803, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB804). . When the process at power failure is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set to the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing has been appropriately performed at the time of the previous power shutdown.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SB804: YES), it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal (step SB805). Specifically, first, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated and stored in the work area 221 for specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main process. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

  If the checksums match (step SB805: YES), is the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control within a normal range? It is determined whether or not (step SB806). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area for storing information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 as in the 45th embodiment. When numerical information “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When numerical information “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When numerical information “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When numerical information “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When numerical information “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When numerical information “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SB806, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is any one of “1” to “6”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in all of step SB804 to step SB806, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB807). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, like the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB807: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step SB808).

  The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. When “1” is set in the game stop flag, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is affirmative, so that step S8907 is executed. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If at least one of the checksums does not match because the information storage state has changed since the previous power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is “1”. Is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that the setting value is being updated and the setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is ended. In a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 181) is not executed, the setting update display flag is not basically set to “1”. However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. Then, the setting update display flag is set to “1”. The state in which “1” is set in the setting update display flag is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting update display flag to “0” is executed in the setting value update processing (FIG. 181).

  If “1” is not set in the game stop flag and the setting update display flag and a negative determination is made in step SB808, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key. (Step SB809). When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB809: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB810). The processing content of the setting confirmation process is the same as the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment. Note that in this embodiment, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during the execution of the setting check process, the setting check is performed unless the “setting check operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. Processing is not executed.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON using the setting key (step SB809: NO), a normal return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB811). The processing contents executed by the sound emission control device 81 when the normal return command is received are the same as those in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (steps SB807 and SB812). : YES), a set value update process is executed (step SB813). That is, in this embodiment, even if “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control, the “setting change operation” is not performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. As long as the set value update process is not executed. Details of the set value update processing will be described later.

  If it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned ON using the setting key (step SB812: NO), the identification It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the control work area 221 (step SB814).

  When “1” is not set in both the game stop flag and the setting update display flag (step SB814: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step SB815). In the first RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process in the forty-fifth embodiment (step SA416), in the work area 221 for specific control, an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to “0”. Also, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the first RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. In the first RAM clear process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0”, and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB802 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing the initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of clear is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB816). The processing content executed by the sound emission control device 81 when a clear return command is received is the same as that in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  When the process of step SB810 is executed, when the process of step SB811 is executed, when the process of step SB813 is executed, or when the process of step SB816 is executed, during the check provided in the work area 221 for specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the counter (step SB817). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 is completed. The initial check period starts after the remaining process (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, and thus the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the set value update process (FIG. 181) are executed as processes at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). The initial check period starts after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set value is displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

  After that, the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step SB818). If the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the startup process flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processes in steps S8901 to S8905 are performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is cancelled. In step SB818, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB819 to SB822. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time will occur. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes of Step SB819 to Step SB822 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in Steps SB819 to SB822 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly. In Step SB819 to Step SB822, the same processing as Step S113 to Step S116 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806 in the main process (FIG. 179), that is, if the power failure flag is not set to “1”, the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal If it is, “1” is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB823). As described above, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the affirmative determination is made in step S8906. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If at least one of the checksums does not match because the information storage state has changed since the previous power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB824). When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB824: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. (Step SB825). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change setting” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is issued when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. It will be resumed.

  Thereafter, an external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB826). In the external output process at the time of abnormality, a process for outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the situation where an event that triggers the execution of the process of step SB826 occurs, the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and an event that triggers the execution of the process of step SB826 occurs. It may be configured that the output of the abnormal signal is stopped when the situation does not occur. In addition, the abnormal signal is not output only in step SB826, but may be output by other processing. For example, an abnormal signal is also generated when it is specified in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) that the fraudulent subject to be monitored (the detection of illegal radio waves or the detection of illegal magnetism) has occurred. Output externally. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used in this way, and a configuration in which an abnormal signal dedicated to step SB826 is output to the outside may be employed.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB824: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB812). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB812 and step SB824: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB813). That is, when operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 in a state where the “setting change operation” is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, and therefore any of steps SB804 to SB806 is denied. Even when the determination is made, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. Thereby, it is possible to give priority to the change of the set value.

  On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned ON (step SB824: YES, step SB812: NO), the game stop flag or setting update in the work area 221 for specific control It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the display flag (step SB814). Since the game stop flag is set to “1” as a matter of course in the process of step SB814 after “1” is set to the game stop flag in step SB823, an affirmative determination is made in step SB814. In this case, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 at step SB825, and an abnormal signal is externally output at step SB826. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB819 to SB822 without executing the processes of step SB817 and step SB818.

  That is, when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any one of Steps SB804 to SB806, the operation to the main CPU 63 in a situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed. Even if power supply is started, the first RAM clear process (step SB815) is not executed. The first RAM clear process is also performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to “1” and the “RAM clear operation” is being performed. (Step SB815) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the “RAM clear operation” is being performed, the state where the game stop flag is set to “1” is not canceled. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the “setting change operation” is performed, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed regardless of whether or not the game stop flag is set to “1” and the details are as follows. As will be described later, the game stop flag is cleared to “0” by the initial setting at the start of the set value update process (FIG. 181). Thereby, in order to cancel the state where “1” is set in the game stop flag, it is necessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 181). Accordingly, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, not only the process for initializing the work area 221 for specific control but also the setting value needs to be reset. .

  If it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has not been pressed, “1” is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control in step SB808. In step SB825, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. And after performing these processes, it transfers to the residual process of step SB819-step SB822, without performing the process of step SB817 and step SB818. Further, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is pressed, and in step SB812, it is determined that the setting key insertion portion 68a is not operated (that is, "RAM clear operation" is performed). However, if “1” is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control, an affirmative determination is made in step SB814, and a sound is emitted in step SB825. An abnormal command is transmitted to the control device 81, and an abnormal signal is externally output at step SB826. And after performing these processes, it transfers to the residual process of step SB819-step SB822, without performing the process of step SB817 and step SB818.

  Next, the state of the subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. . FIG. 180 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an ON state, and FIG. 180 (b) shows processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). FIG. 180 (c) shows a period in which the processing after the processing (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supply of operating power is completed, FIG. 180 (d) shows a period during which the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is executed, and FIG. 180 (e) shows that the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. FIG. 180 (f) shows the period, and “1” is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control. It indicates how long are, FIG 180 (g) shows a period during which the abnormal signal is externally outputted.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (a), the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing t1. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the “setting change operation” is performed. As shown in FIG. 180 (b), at the timing of the t1, the main CPU 63 starts processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826), and FIG. ), “1” is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started as shown in FIG. 180 (d) at the timing of t2. In this case, “1” is set to the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control as shown in FIG. 180 (e) at the timing of t2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off at the timing t3, which is a state in the middle of executing the set value update process (FIG. 181). The supply of operating power is stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) ends, and the set value update processing (see FIG. 180 (d)). FIG. 181) ends.

  Thereafter, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 180 (a). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). Further, as shown in FIGS. 180 (e) and 180 (f), “1” is set to both the setting update display flag and the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control from before the previous stop of the supply of operating power. "Is set.

  This time, since the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the first RAM clear process (step SB815) ) Is executed, an abnormal signal is externally output for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from the timing t5 to the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 180 (g). In addition, abnormality notification based on transmission of the abnormality command is started at timing t5.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (b), the processing (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of the operation power supply started at the timing t4 ends at the timing t6. And the process after the process (step SB801-step SB818, step SB823-step SB826) at the time of the supply start of operating electric power is complete | finished at the timing of the said t6.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 180 (f), since “1” is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is activated. However, while the power outage monitoring, the updating of various counters and the fraud monitoring are executed, the processing for advancing the game is not executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing of t8, whereby the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. Moreover, the process after supply is complete | finished as shown in FIG.180 (c) at the timing of the said t8.

  Thereafter, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). Further, as shown in FIGS. 180 (e) and 180 (f), “1” is set to both the setting update display flag and the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control from before the previous stop of the supply of operating power. "Is set.

  Thereafter, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed as shown in FIG. 180 (d) from the timing t10 to the timing t11. In this case, the set value update process (FIG. 181) ends normally. Then, at the timing of t11, which is the end timing, the setting update display flag is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. Further, at the time t11, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) ends. Thereby, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 180 (f), the startup processing flag is cleared to “0”. Then, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), the processing after the processing (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supplying operating power is started. In this case, since the startup processing flag has already been cleared to “0”, when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started, processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is performed. In addition to this, processing for advancing the game is executed.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed as described above, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed. Unless the “setting change operation” is performed, in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826), an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission controller 81 and an abnormal signal is externally output. Even if the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB815) is not performed, and the setting confirmation process (step SB815) is performed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. Step SB810) is not executed. Furthermore, when an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 and an external output of an abnormal signal is executed, a process of clearing the startup process flag in the work area 221 for specific control to “0” (step) Since the remaining process (step SB819 to step SB822) is executed without executing SB818), even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, the power failure monitoring, the updating of various counters, and the fraud monitoring are performed. However, the process for advancing the game is not executed. Thereby, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the main CPU 63 is in the situation where the “setting change operation” has been performed. It is necessary to restart the supply of operating power and execute the set value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the set value.

  Next, the setting value update process in the present embodiment executed in step SB813 of the main process (FIG. 179) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the processing of step SB901 to step SB918 in the set value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 (step SB901). The OFF confirmation flag 361 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Even in the present embodiment, in the set value update process (FIG. 181), the value of the setting update area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control, that is, the set value to be updated is 1 each time the reset button 68c is pressed. Is added. In this case, when the reset button 68c is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state so that only “1” is added to the set value to be updated for one pressing operation of the reset button 68c, that is, When the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 68c is switched from the operation non-detection state to the operation detection state, the setting update area 342 is incremented by one to set the update target setting value 1 is added.

  In this configuration, the OFF confirmation flag 361 indicates whether or not it is the timing when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is started when it is confirmed whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181). This is a flag for confirmation. In the setting value update process (FIG. 181), after executing the determination process (step SB910) on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed, “1” is determined when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed. "Is set or the set state of" 1 "is maintained, and when it is determined that the reset button 68c is not pressed," 0 "is cleared or the state of" 0 "is maintained.

  Here, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed on the condition that it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in step SB807 or step SB824 of the main process (FIG. 179) as already described. In step SB807 or step SB824, the main CPU 63 directly monitors the input port to which the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed, so that the reset button 68c is pressed. Determine whether. In this case, instead of confirming the start timing and end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, it is confirmed whether or not the reset button 68c is being pressed. Therefore, in step SB807 or step SB824, an affirmative determination is made when a signal corresponding to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is input to the input port without confirming the OFF confirmation flag 361.

  However, in this configuration, the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c and the start timing of the set value update process (FIG. 181) when the power of the pachinko machine 10 for starting the set value update process (FIG. 181) is turned on. Depending on the relationship, there are cases where the pressing operation triggers the addition of the set value to be updated and when it does not trigger. If it does so, the update mode of the setting value of an update object will change according to the completion | finish timing of pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and operativity will fall. On the other hand, in a configuration in which 1 is added to the set value to be updated when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where “0” is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361, the set value update process When (FIG. 181) is started, “1” is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 in step SB901 executed before the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. By doing so, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  After executing the process of step SB901, the interrupt permission is set (step SB902). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. In the present embodiment, as in the 49th embodiment, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is basically the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the Interrupts in the two-timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited, and interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the set value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the set value update process (FIG. 181) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited from being executed, and the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed. Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the startup timer flag is set to “1”, so the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for power failure monitoring, various counter updating and fraud monitoring are executed, while the game is advanced. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the process.

  Thereafter, on the condition that “1” is not set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control, “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step SB903). By setting “1” in the setting update display flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), so that the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The processing content of the setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the 45th embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are selected. The set values being displayed are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initial setting at the start is performed (step SB904). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. When the power failure flag is not set to “1” (step SB804: NO) because the processing at the time of power failure was not properly performed at the time of the previous power cut-off, the game stop flag and the work area 221 for specific control When at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control does not match the checksum due to a change in the information storage state since the previous power shutdown (step SB805: NO), or the setting reference area 341 Is a flag that is set to “1” in step SB823 of the main process (FIG. 179) when the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SB806: NO). When “1” is set in the game stop flag, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is affirmative, so that step S8907 is executed. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to “0” in the process of step SB904, the state where the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. Is possible.

  Thereafter, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB905). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information of setting values being updated in the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) as in the 45th embodiment. When numerical value information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When numerical information “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When numerical information “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  By setting “1” in the setting update area 342 in step SB905, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started regardless of the current set value of the pachinko machine 10, the set value to be updated is “setting 1”.

  Thereafter, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB906). The sound emission control device 81 receives the update start command, and thereby an image indicating that the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed, and an image for enabling the operation content for changing the set value to be recognized. , And display control of the display control device 82 so that an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for ending the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation content and setting value update processing required to change the setting value (FIG. 181) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content necessary for ending the game. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the external output which shows that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is performed is performed with respect to the apparatus outside the pachinko machine 10, such as the management computer of a game hall, for example.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of “1” to “6” (step SB907). If it is not one of “1” to “6” (step SB907: NO), “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB908). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SB907 or when the process of step SB908 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB909). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a is changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB909, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed by directly monitoring an input port to which a detection signal from a detection sensor that detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step SB911), and the process returns to step SB907.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is “0” (step SB912). When “1” is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 (step SB912: NO), the current confirmation timing is not the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, but the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is continued. Therefore, the process returns to step SB907 without adding 1 to the set value to be updated.

  When the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0” (step SB912: YES), it means that the current confirmation timing is the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c. In this case, after setting “1” to the OFF confirmation flag 361 (step SB913), the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB914). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to one level higher. Further, when the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), when the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “1” (step SB912: NO), or the value of the setting update area 342 is set to 1. If it is added (step SB914), the process returns to step SB907, but if it is determined in step SB907 that the value of the setting update area 342 is 7 or more, the setting update area in step SB908. “1” is set in 342. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting returns to “setting 1”.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB909: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SB915). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current value. This is the set value of the pachinko machine 10.

  After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step SB916). As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is terminated and the process returns to the process (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of the operation power supply in the main process (FIG. 179). Interrupts in the 1 timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

  Thereafter, the second RAM clear process is executed (step SB917). In the second RAM clear process, similarly to the RAM clear process in the forty-fifth embodiment (step SA416), an area (set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the lottery regardless of the lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the power train hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to “0”, the hold information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the map display section. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to “0”. Also, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. Further, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the second RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. In the second RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”, and initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB802 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing the initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB918). The processing content executed by the sound emission control device 81 when the return command at the time of update is received is the same as that in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  Next, how the setting value to be updated is updated will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 183 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, FIG. 183 (b) shows the operation status of the setting key insertion unit 68a, and FIG. 183 (c) shows the operation of the reset button 68c. 183 (d) shows a period during which the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed, FIG. 183 (e) shows the setting status of the OFF confirmation flag 361, and FIG. 183 (f) shows the setting. Indicates the value update timing.

  First, a comparative example in which “1” is not set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 when the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is started will be described.

  At the timing t1, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183 (b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 183 (a), the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing t2, which is a state where the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued. In this case, since the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the set value update process (see FIG. 183 (d)) at the timing of t3. FIG. 181) is started.

  In the comparative example, when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, “1” is not set to the OFF confirmation flag 361. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183 (e), the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 at the timing t3. Is “0”. Thereafter, the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0” at a timing t4, which is a situation where the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is continued when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 183 (f), the set value to be updated is incremented by one. In addition, at the timing of t4, “1” is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 as shown in FIG. 183 (e).

  That is, in the comparative example, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of turning on the power is continued even after the start of the setting value updating process (FIG. 181), so that the setting value to be updated becomes 1 when triggered by the pressing operation. Will be added. In this case, although the administrator of the game hall does not intend to update the setting value to be updated, the setting value to be updated is updated.

  Next, a description will be given of the present embodiment in which “1” is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 when the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is started.

  At the timing t5, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183 (b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183 (c). Then, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 183 (a) at the timing t6 when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on and the reset button 68c is pressed. In this case, since the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed in the situation where the “setting change operation” has been performed, the set value update process (see FIG. 183 (d)) at the timing t7. FIG. 181) is started. When the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, a process of setting “1” to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is executed in step SB901. Therefore, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 183 (e), the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “1”. The timing for setting “1” in the OFF confirmation flag 361 is a timing before the timing for determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed in the set value update process (FIG. 181). ), Even if the pressing operation of the reset button 68c during the power ON operation is continued, the set value to be updated is not incremented by one. Thereafter, when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is ended as shown in FIG. 183 (c) at the timing of t8, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 183 (e).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 183 (c), the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is performed at each of timings t9 to t10, timings t11 to t12, and timings t13 to t14. In this case, the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0” at each of the timing t9, the timing t11, and the timing t13. As shown, the set value to be updated is incremented by 1 at each of these timings.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF at the timing t15, as shown in FIG. 183 (b). As a result, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is performed as shown in FIG. 183 (d) at the timing t15. ) Ends.

  As described above, in the configuration in which “1” is added to the setting value to be updated when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where “0” is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361, the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is started, “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in step SB901 which is executed prior to the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the set value is changed from a preset start-corresponding set value. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) changes the setting value from the set value corresponding to a certain start. Can be performed. Therefore, the work content of the setting value changing operation is easy for the operator to understand.

  Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the set value is changed from “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Thereby, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally ends the set value update process (FIG. 181) immediately after the start of the set value update process (FIG. 181), the setting value having the lowest advantage is obtained. Therefore, even if a game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

  The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and a setting value update process is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the situation in which (FIG. 181) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is updated and stored in the setting reference area 341 while the setting value information set before the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started is stored and held. The set value can be changed.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the game is resumed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently resumed. It will be in the regulation state where the process for advancing is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started although the set value update process (FIG. 181) has not been completed.

  Even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently resumed. When the “setting change operation” is performed, the restricted state is not reached. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the process for advancing the game from being restricted until the set value is changed.

  Even in the restricted state, power failure monitoring and various counter updating processes are executed. Thereby, even if the progress of the game is restricted as described above, it is possible to ensure execution of necessary processing. In particular, by performing power outage monitoring, it is possible to appropriately cope with a power outage that occurs even when the progress of the game is restricted.

  The restricted state is resumed when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped. As a result, in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the state where the execution of the process for advancing the game is restricted by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is the operating power. It is possible not to be released only by stopping the supply.

  In the configuration in which 1 is added to the setting value to be updated when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed while the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “0”. When the value update process (FIG. 181) is started, “1” is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 in step SB901 which is executed before the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. It is the structure to do. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  It should be noted that, in the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the set value update process (FIG. 181), a setting confirmation process ( When step SB810) is executed, the setting update display flag may be cleared to “0” so that execution of the process for proceeding with the game is not restricted. By executing the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the current setting value of the usage target is notified, so that the administrator of the game hall can grasp the setting value of the usage target. In such a case, even if the execution of the process for advancing the game is not restricted, the game does not proceed with the set value not assumed by the manager of the game hall.

  If the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the set value update process (FIG. 181), whether or not a “setting change operation” has been performed when restarting the supply of operating power thereafter. The setting value update process (FIG. 181) may be forcibly executed regardless of the above. As a result, the set value can be forcibly changed.

  Further, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the execution of the process for advancing the game is restricted when the subsequent supply of operating power is resumed. It is good also as composition which will be in the regulation state. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is performed when restarting the supply of operating power, the configuration may not be the above-described restriction state. In addition to or instead of the configuration, when restarting the supply of operating power When the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed, a configuration in which the restriction state is not achieved may be adopted.

  If the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting check process (step SB810), whether or not a “setting check operation” has been performed when restarting the supply of operating power thereafter. Regardless of the setting, the configuration confirmation process (step SB810) may be forcibly executed. Thereby, it is possible to forcibly confirm the set value.

  Further, in the set value update processing (FIG. 181), it is specified that the reset button 68c is not pressed in the front processing time in the two consecutive processing times, and the reset button 68c is set in the rear processing time. The setting value of the selection target is changed when it is determined that the pressing operation is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c is used in each of a plurality of past consecutive processing times. Is determined not to be pressed, and in this situation, it is specified that the reset button 68c is pressed in one processing time or a plurality of consecutive processing times. It is good also as a structure to be made. Even in this case, when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the reset button 68c is pressed to display information related to the confirmation history of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of past consecutive processing times. By rewriting the information corresponding to the setting value, the setting value to be selected is changed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) by the pressing operation of the reset button 68c for starting the setting value updating process (FIG. 181). It becomes possible not to be.

<Fifty-fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 53rd embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described fifty-third embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the above-described fifty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SC101 to step SC128 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  In Step SC101 to Step SC106, the same processing as Step SB801 to Step SB806 of the main processing (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment is executed. When an affirmative determination is made in all of step SC104 to step SC106, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SC107). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SC107: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC108). ). When the reset button 68c is not pressed and “1” is not set in the setting update display flag (step SC107 and step SC108: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. "Is set (step SC109). If the game stop flag is set to “1”, an abnormal command is transmitted at step SC127 and external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed at step SC128.

  When “1” is not set in the game stop flag (step SC109: NO), the process proceeds to step SC110. In Steps SC110 to SC112, the same processing as Steps SB809 to SB811 of the main processing (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment is executed.

  If it is determined in step SC107 that the reset button 68c is pressed, or if it is determined in step SC108 that the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting key insertion unit 68a is determined in step SC113. Is determined to be ON using the setting key. When it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step SC113: YES), “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC114), and then the setting is made. Value update processing is executed (step SC115). In steps SC116 to SC128, the same processes as steps SB114 to SB826 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment are executed.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the setting value update process (step SC115), the situation of “no operation” or “RAM clear operation” is performed. When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in the situation, the situation in which the process for advancing the game is stopped is continued as in the above-described 53rd embodiment, while the “setting change operation” Not only when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in the situation where the operation is performed, but also when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. A set value update process (step SC115) is executed. Thus, the setting value update process (when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the set value update process (step SC115)). Step SC115) is easily performed.

  In particular, in the “setting change operation”, it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion portion 68a using the setting key and to press the reset button 68c, and in the “setting confirmation operation”, the setting key is used to set. In a configuration in which the key insertion portion 68a needs to be turned ON, when the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. As a result, the set value update processing (step SC115) is executed. As a result, the setting value update process (step SC115) is started by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, but for example, the power OFF operation is erroneously performed in the middle of the process. If the setting key insertion portion 68a is kept on in order to quickly return to the power-on state after that, the setting key insertion portion 68a is kept on, while the reset button 68c is not pressed. The value update process (step SC115) can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, if it is determined in step SC112 that the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON, the work for specific control is performed in step SC114 before the setting value update process (step SC115) is started. “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the area 221. As a result, when the set value update process (step SC115) is started, the process of setting “1” to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not performed, but triggered by the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power is turned on. It is possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by one. Incidentally, in the set value update process (step SC115) in the present embodiment, the process in steps SB902 to SB918 is not executed without executing the process in step SB901 in the set value update process (FIG. 181) in the 53rd embodiment. Executed.

  In the set value update processing (step SC115), it is specified that the reset button 68c is not pressed in the front processing time in the two consecutive processing times, and the reset button 68c is set in the rear processing time. The setting value of the selection target is changed when it is determined that the pressing operation is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c is used in each of a plurality of past consecutive processing times. Is determined not to be pressed, and in this situation, it is specified that the reset button 68c is pressed in one processing time or a plurality of consecutive processing times. It is good also as a structure to be made. Even in this case, when the set value update process (step SC115) is started, information regarding the confirmation history of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of successive processing times is pressed and the reset button 68c is pressed. By rewriting the information corresponding to the setting value, the setting value to be selected is changed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) by the pressing operation of the reset button 68c for starting the setting value updating process (FIG. 181). It becomes possible not to be.

<55th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SC201 to step SC230 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step SC201). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. In addition, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SC202). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 4 milliseconds) and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and started with respect to the main process, is determined from the first interrupt period. Is set to a second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is a short cycle.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are performed so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long as the timer interrupt process. And exist. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188). Further, when both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have passed in the situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are not executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is started first regardless of the elapse order. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is a process activated in preference to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated in preference to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188).

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is set as the main interrupt register process. To a specific register of the side CPU 63. In addition, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, the setting process of numerical ranges of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the startup processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC203). As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag indicates that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated. While processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing processing for advancing the game. Is a flag for specifying the main CPU 63.

  The start-up process flag is set to “1” when the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of operating power supply is started in the main process (FIG. 185), and the process at the start of operating power supply is set. “0” is cleared before (Step SC201 to Step SC223) is finished and the remaining processing (Step SC227 to Step SC230) is started. As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the start process flag is set to “1”, the process from step S8907 to step S8920 is not executed. Thus, the process for advancing the game in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed among the processes (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power. Can be prevented from being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), as described above, even when “1” is set in the start-up process flag, the operation power can be obtained by executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905. Power outage monitoring is performed even in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed among the processes at the start of supply (step SC201 to step SC223), The winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is performed.

  In particular, even when the start-up process flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage process (step S8901) is executed, so that the process at the start of supplying operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is performed. ), Even if a power failure occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, it is possible to execute the power failure process. In the power failure process, as in the 35th embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being identified as having an abnormality. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) or the setting value update processing (step SC216), it is determined that the power failure has occurred during the setting related processing and the next supply of operating power. It becomes possible to specify at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are performed. Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is interrupted and activated in the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 185) for returning after the timer interrupt process to be activated ends is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control and the timer interrupt process is activated. Information on various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated ends, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 185) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the display start flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step SC204). The display start flag specifies in the main CPU 63 that the display control of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a should be started after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. It is a flag for.

  Thereafter, in steps SC205 to SC225, the same processes as steps SB104 to SB124 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment are executed. In this case, the processing content executed in the main processing (FIG. 185) in relation to the combination of the situation at the previous stop of the supply of operating power and the operation details at the start of the supply of the current operating power is The processing contents shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 171 are the same as in the embodiment. For example, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the setting check process (step SC213) nor the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, the setting check process (step SC213) is executed. In the case where the process at power failure is executed in the situation where the operation is performed, when the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the first RAM clear process (step 185) is performed in the main process (FIG. 185). SC218) is executed. In addition, when the power failure process is executed in a state where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the set value update process ( In step SC216), the second RAM clear process (step SB313 in FIG. 167 in the 49th embodiment) is executed, and the power failure process is executed in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is not executed. Even in this case, when the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the second RAM clear processing (step 49 in FIG. 49 in the 49th embodiment) is performed in the setting value update processing (step SC216). Step SB313) is executed.

  In the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process, the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is performed, while the non-clear area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control. For “”, “0” clear and initial setting are not executed. FIG. 186 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Even in the present embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped because the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power / launch control is performed. Backup power is supplied from the power interruption power supply unit provided in the device 78 to the main RAM 65 as power for storing data. By supplying the backup power to the main RAM 65 in this way, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Also backup power is supplied. Then, backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 by supplying backup power to the work area 221 for specific control. Thereby, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped because the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372. In the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372, information is stored and held.

  The clear target area 371 includes a second display data buffer 272, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer 275. Similar to the thirty-third embodiment, the second display data buffer 272 is an area for setting display data for causing the special figure hold display section 37b to perform a predetermined display. When the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is newly stored in the hold storage area 65a in the hold information acquisition process (step S401) in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12), the first timer interrupt process Display data corresponding to the number of hold information for the special figure display section 37a stored in the hold storage area 65a after the storage by the display control means (step S8915) in (FIG. 133) is the second display data buffer 272. Set to Further, when the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is digested as an execution timing of the game times in the data setting process (step S502) in the special figure change start process (FIG. 13), the first timer interruption process ( In FIG. 133), the display control means (step S8915) displays in the second display data buffer 272 the display data corresponding to the number of hold information for the special figure display section 37a stored in the hold storage area 65a after the digestion. Is set.

  Similar to the thirty-third embodiment, the fourth display data buffer 274 is an area for storing display data for causing the general-purpose hold display unit 38b to perform a predetermined display. In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the hold information for the common map display unit 38 a is newly stored in the general call hold area 65 c in the general power control process (step S8914), the first timer Display data corresponding to the number of hold information for the general-purpose display area 38a stored in the general-purpose display hold area 65c after the storage by the display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is displayed in the fourth display. The data buffer 274 is set. In addition, the hold information for the general-purpose display unit 38a was digested as the execution timing of the variable display time of the general-purpose display unit 38a in the general-purpose display control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). In this case, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interruption process (FIG. 133) corresponds to the number of hold information for the general map display section 38a stored in the general power reservation area 65c after the digestion. Display data to be set is set in the fourth display data buffer 274.

  The fifth display data buffer 275 is an area in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display is set as in the thirty-third embodiment. Setting of display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is executed in steps SC403, SC405, and SC406 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) described later.

  In addition to the second display data buffer 272, the fourth display data buffer 274, and the fifth display data buffer 275, the clear target area 371 includes a hold storage area 65a for storing the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a, and a general storage area 65a. A power transmission reservation area 65c in which hold information for the figure display unit 38a is stored is included. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a and the hold information for the general figure display unit 38a are erased. In this case, as described above, the clear display area 371 includes the second display data buffer 272 and the fourth display data buffer 274. As a result, when the hold storage area 65a is initialized and the number of hold information for the special figure display unit 37a becomes zero, the display content of the special figure hold display unit 37b is also held for the special figure display unit 37a. It becomes possible to make the display contents zero information, and when the general power reservation area 65c is initialized, there is zero reservation information for the general map display section 38a. The display content of the display unit 38b can also be set to display content with zero hold information for the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  Further, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, basically, after the processing at the start of the operation power supply (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed in the same manner as in the 49th embodiment, the base is basically used. Information on the value will be displayed, but if the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the current pachinko machine 10 If the set value is displayed and the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, the set value in the middle of the update is displayed, and the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. In some cases, a check display is performed. That is, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the supply of the operating power is resumed, information different from the base value information displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Will be displayed. Therefore, even if the fifth display data buffer 275 is initialized when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, no problem occurs as the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .

  The clear target area 371 includes, in addition to the above areas, an area for special figure special power control and an area for ordinary power control. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the success / failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game turn is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display portion 38a is not variably displayed, and the general utility 34a is in a closed state. Situation. In addition, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to “0”, and the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. Is done. Further, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. Further, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0”. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SC202 is executed.

  Note that the processing content of the first RAM clear processing is the same as the processing content of the second RAM clear processing in the setting value update processing, but a part of the processing content may be different. For example, an area that is subject to “0” clearing and initial setting in the first RAM clearing process may not be “0” clearing and initial setting in the second RAM clearing process, and “0” in the second RAM clearing process. The area that is the target of clearing and initial setting may not be the target of “0” clearing and initial setting in the first RAM clear process.

  The non-clear target area 372 includes a first display data buffer 271, a third display data buffer 273, and an initial display completed flag 373. The first display data buffer 271 is an area for storing display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display, as in the thirty-third embodiment. In step S513 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 13), the special figure display unit 37a executes a process for starting the change display of the picture, whereby the display control means in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ( In step S8915), the display data corresponding to the display at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure display unit 37a is set in the first display data buffer 271. Further, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed by executing the process for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure changing process (step S407) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12). 133) Display data for advancing the variable display of the picture on the special figure display section 37a is set in the first display data buffer 271 by the display control means (step S8915). In addition, in the special figure finalizing process (step S408) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12), the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is determined as a success / failure determination process (step S504) and a distribution determination process ( The processing for setting the display content corresponding to the processing result in step S506) is executed, so that the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) displays the current game on the special figure display unit 37a. Display data for performing display corresponding to the results of the times is set in the first display data buffer 271. The display data set in this case is the display data selected in step S507 or step S509 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13) at the start of the current game round. Further, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until a special game display unit 37a enters a state in which a new game turn is started.

  The third display data buffer 273 is an area for storing display data for causing the general-purpose display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display as in the thirty-third embodiment. The first timer interrupt process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed by the process for starting the variable display of the pattern in the universal chart display unit 38a. In FIG. 133), the display control means (step S8915) sets the display data corresponding to the display at the start of the fluctuation of the universal display section 38a in the third display data buffer 273. In addition, the first timer interrupt process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed to update the display contents of the general map display unit 38a. In FIG. 133), display data for advancing the variable display of the picture on the general display portion 38a is set in the third display data buffer 273 by the display control means (step S8915). In addition, the display content of the general map display unit 38a is changed to the display content corresponding to the result of the public power open lottery in the current variable display time in the general map general power control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). Is executed, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) causes the universal map display unit 38a to perform display corresponding to the result of the current variable display time. Display data for this is set in the third display data buffer 273. The display data set in this case is stored and held in the third display data buffer 273 until a new variable display time is started in the general map display unit 38a.

  The initial display flag 373 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is after the initial display of the special drawing display unit 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a at the factory shipment stage. Since the initial display completed flag 373 is included in the area 372 that is not to be cleared, once the initial display of the special chart display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a at the factory shipping stage is confirmed, It is possible to prevent the initial display from being performed when the supply is resumed.

  By including the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the non-clear target area 372, even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the supply of operating power is resumed. After that, when the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started, the display contents of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped. It is possible to return to Thereby, even if the player confirms the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a after the supply of the operating power is resumed, it is specified whether or not the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed. I can't do that.

  In particular, since the second RAM clear process is executed in the set value update process (step SC216) that allows the set value of the pachinko machine 10 to be changed, a special figure display unit is displayed when the second RAM clear process is executed. If the display content of at least one of 37a and the general map display unit 38a becomes display content corresponding to the execution of the second RAM clear process or is changed from the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped, the display content The presence / absence of a change in the set value of the pachinko machine 10 can be predicted by checking the special figure display part 37a or the general figure display part 38a. On the other hand, even if the second RAM clear process is executed, after the supply of the operating power is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the special figure display unit 38a are displayed when the special figure display unit 37a starts displaying. And the display content of the general map display part 38a will return to the display content before supply of operating electric power is stopped. This makes it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed even if the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are confirmed.

  In addition to the above areas, the non-clear target area 372 includes an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, a setting reference area 341). Thereby, even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the information of the set value indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is. Further, the non-clear target area 372 includes a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Incidentally, since the backup power is not supplied to the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the operation power is supplied to the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82. When the operation is stopped, the information stored in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 is deleted. However, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed, the supply of operating power is stopped from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81. When the command for returning to the state immediately before the operation is transmitted, the contents of the execution control of the effects in the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are returned to the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. It will be.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 185), after the process of step SC225 is executed, a display start process is executed (step SC226). Thereafter, residual processing is executed in steps SC227 to SC230. The processing contents of steps SC227 to SC230 are the same as steps SB125 to SB128 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  Next, the display start process executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 185) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing from step SC301 to step SC305 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  When “1” is not set in the initial display completed flag 373 (step SC301: NO), the initial display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC302), and the initial display for ordinary drawing is used. Display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC303). Then, “1” is set in the initial display flag 373 (step SC304).

  By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display data for special figures stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs initial display. Although the display content of the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is arbitrary, for example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may be in a light emitting state, and provided in the special figure display unit 37a. A configuration may be adopted in which some of the plurality of light emitting units are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting units that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting units that are maintained in the unlit state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order. Further, the display of the general map display unit 38a is controlled using the initial display data for general maps stored in the third display data buffer 273, whereby the initial display is performed in the general map display unit 38a. The display content of the initial display in the universal map display unit 38a is arbitrary. For example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the universal map display unit 38a may be in a light emitting state, and provided in the universal map display unit 38a. A configuration may be adopted in which some of the plurality of light emitting units are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting units that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting units that are maintained in the unlit state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display completed flag 373 (step SC301: YES), the processing of step SC302 and step SC303 is not executed. Accordingly, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. Since the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the non-clear target area 372 as already described, the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are performed in the main process (FIG. 185). Even if either one is executed, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is stored in the operating power. The display data stored immediately before the supply is stopped is stored as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SC301 or when the process of step SC304 is executed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC305). . The display start flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b should be started. It is. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b.

  As already described, the display start flag is cleared to “0” in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, as described above, “1” is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 187) executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. Thus, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the start processing (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b is started.

  Next, the second timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the process of step SC401-step SC415 in a 2nd timer interruption process is performed using the program for specific control in the main side CPU63, and the data for specific control. In the second timer interrupt process, an interrupt is permitted when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started, and an interrupt is prohibited when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is terminated. In the second timer interrupt process, an interrupt is permitted when the set value update process (step SC216) is started, and an interrupt is prohibited when the set value update process (step SC216) is terminated. The second interrupt process is interrupted until interrupt permission is set in step SC227 of the main process (FIG. 185) after interrupt permission is set in step SC230 of the main process (FIG. 185). Allowed. The same applies to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133).

  In Step SC401 to Step SC409, the same processing as Step S8401 to Step S8409 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the type counter is “5” (step SC410). Similar to the thirty-third embodiment, the type counter specifies the display data transmission target in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing round of the second timer interrupt process by the main CPU 63. It is a counter for doing. When the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is a transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is a transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data in the fourth display data buffer 274 is If the type counter value is “5”, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is the transmission target.

  When the value of the type counter is any one of “1” to “4”, that is, any one of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure hold display part 38b is displayed. If it is in the situation of control (step SC410: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the display start flag of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC411). When the value of the type counter is “5” (step SC410: YES), or when the value of the type counter is any of “1” to “4” and the display start flag is set to “1” (Step SC410: NO, Step SC411: YES), Steps SC412 to Step SC414 are executed.

  In the processing from step SC412 to step SC414, first, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step SC412). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second value is read. When the type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64 and the value of the type counter is “3”, the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64 and the value of the type counter is If “4”, the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and if the value of the type counter is “5”, the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read. Read from the side ROM 64.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step SC413). Specifically, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271 when the value of the type counter is “1”, and is read from the second display data buffer 272 when the value of the type counter is “2”. When the display data is read, the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273 when the value of the type counter is “3”, and from the fourth display data buffer 274 when the value of the type counter is “4”. The display data is read, and when the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

  Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step SC414). In the transmission process, signal output is performed on the classification data signal line LN1 and the classification clock signal line LN2 so that the classification data read in step SC412 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In the transmission process, signal output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is performed so that the display data read in step SC413 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  On the other hand, if the value of the type counter is any one of “1” to “4” and “1” is not set in the display start flag (step SC410 and step SC411: NO), the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 Do not execute. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, until the display start flag is set to “1”, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, and the general map display unit 38a. And the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure hold display part 38b are maintained in the light-off state without the display control of the general figure hold display part 38b being started.

  When a negative determination is made at step SC411 or when the process at step SC414 is executed, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process (step SC415).

  Next, the display contents of the special drawing display unit 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be described. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power.

  Since the initial display flag 373 has not yet been set to “1” at the factory shipment stage, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a are displayed. When it is started, initial display is started in the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a. The initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is that a special ball is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the game start condition is satisfied. This is continued until the variable display starts. The initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the variation of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started.

  If it is not the factory shipment stage, that is, if “1” is already set in the initial display flag 373, the first RAM clear process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power. If it is executed, the set value update process is executed, the setting confirmation process is executed, or the process is not executed, the supply of operating power is stopped. The special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a are display-controlled so that the display contents immediately before are displayed. This makes it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed even if the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are confirmed.

  In particular, the display contents when the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started, and the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped are the display contents. Are the same. Thereby, after confirming and remembering the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure are displayed after the supply of the operating power is started. Even if the display content initially displayed on the display unit 38a is confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the set value update processing (step SC216) has been executed.

  Further, by setting the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the non-clearing target area 372 that is not the execution target of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process in the work area 221 for specific control, The display contents when the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are started are the same as the display contents of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. It is the structure to do. That is, no special process is required to prevent the setting value update process (step SC216) from being executed even if the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are confirmed. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing an increase in processing load.

  The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which both the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the non-clear target area 372, and the first display data buffer 271 is not included in the non-clear target area 372. Although provided, the third display data buffer 273 may be provided in the clear target area 371. In this case, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the special figure display unit 37a displays the display contents before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Will be started, but the initial display will be performed in the general map display section 38a. Instead of this, the third display data buffer 273 is provided in the non-clear target area 372, but the first display data buffer 271 may be provided in the clear target area 371. In this case, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the general display unit 38a displays the display contents before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Will be started, but initial display will be performed in the special figure display part 37a.

  Further, in a configuration in which a round display unit is provided as a display unit that is controlled by the main CPU 63 to notify the number of round games that occur in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result. May be configured such that an area in which display data for displaying on the round display unit is stored is provided in the non-clear target area 372. In this case, the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the predetermined display is performed on the round display unit. However, the predetermined display is resumed in the round display section.

  In addition, all the display units that are directly controlled by the main CPU 63, including the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b, perform display. The display data storage area may not be initialized by the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process. In this case, any display unit that is directly display-controlled by the main CPU 63 supplies the operating power even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Will be displayed according to the display content before the operation is stopped. In this configuration, although the display based on the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped at the special figure hold display unit 37b and the general figure hold display unit 38b is temporarily started, the hold information corresponding to the display after that is 0. It is good also as a structure which switches to the display content corresponding to being a piece.

  In addition, the area for storing display data for display in the special figure hold display unit 37b and the general figure hold display unit 38b is initialized when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed. However, the special figure hold display unit 37b and the general figure hold display unit 38b may be displayed in such a manner that the number of corresponding hold information is difficult for the player to understand. In this case, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, a display indicating that the corresponding hold information is zero in each of the special figure hold display part 37b and the general figure hold display part 38b is performed. Even if it is broken, it is difficult for the player to understand that the display indicating that there is no hold information is performed. However, it is difficult to specify that the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed.

<56th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special-purpose display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those of the 55th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 55th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 55th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

  In the clear target area 371, a second display data buffer 272 for storing display data for causing the special figure hold display section 37b to perform a predetermined display, and a normal display hold display section 38b for performing a predetermined display Not only the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data is stored and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display is stored. The first display data buffer 271 storing display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display, and the first display data storing the display data for causing the special figure display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display are stored. A three display data buffer 273 is provided. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, operating power is supplied. The display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a immediately before being stopped are deleted.

  In addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, an initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371. The initial display flag 375 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to perform an initial display in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, the initial display flag 375 is “0” when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185). It will be cleared. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), a special figure is displayed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is executed. When the display of the part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a display start process in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, the process of step SC501-step SC511 in a display start process is performed using the program for specific control in the main side CPU63, and the data for specific control.

  When “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC501: NO), the initial display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC502), and the initial display for ordinary drawing is used. Display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC503). Then, “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC504).

  By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display data for special figures stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs initial display. Although the display content of the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is arbitrary, for example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may be in a light emitting state, and provided in the special figure display unit 37a. A configuration may be adopted in which some of the plurality of light emitting units are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting units that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting units that are maintained in the unlit state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order. In addition, the display content of the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is different from the display content that is stopped and displayed in order to notify the game result of the game times in the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, the display content of the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is different from the display content displayed in the situation where the display of variation of the picture is performed in the special figure display unit 37a. Thereby, it is possible to clearly specify that the initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a.

  By using the initial display data for general maps stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general map display unit 38a is controlled to perform initial display in the general map display unit 38a. The display content of the initial display in the universal map display unit 38a is arbitrary. For example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the universal map display unit 38a may be in a light emitting state, and provided in the universal map display unit 38a. A configuration may be adopted in which some of the plurality of light emitting units are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting units that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting units that are maintained in the unlit state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order. The display content of the initial display in the general map display unit 38a is different from the display content that is stopped and displayed to notify the result of the lottery release lottery in the variable display time in the general map display unit 38a. Yes. In addition, the display content of the initial display in the general map display unit 38a is different from the display content displayed in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is displayed on the general map display unit 38a. As a result, it is possible to clearly specify that the initial display is being performed on the general map display unit 38a.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SC501, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the game times are being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, It is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution (step SC505). The storage area stores information indicating that the game times are being executed when the game times are started, and information indicating that the game times are being executed when the game times are ended. Erased from the area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. Even when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of power is resumed, the data is stored and held.

  In addition, by referring to a storage area in which information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, the operating power can be increased during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been resumed after the supply of power is stopped (step SC506). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and indicates that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed when the opening / closing execution mode is ended. Information is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. Even when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of power is resumed, the data is stored and held.

  If the previous stop of the supply of operating power was neither during the execution of the game times nor during execution of the opening / closing execution mode (step SC505 and step SC506: NO), the initial display data for special figure is the first display data. The buffer 271 is set (step SC507). By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display data for special figures stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display already described in the special figure display unit 37a is performed. On the other hand, if the previous stop of the supply of operating power was either during the game round or the open / close execution mode (step SC505 or step SC506: YES), the initial display data for special drawing is the first Since the display data buffer 271 is not set, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is resumed as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made at step SC505, when an affirmative determination is made at step SC506, or when the process at step SC507 is executed, the fluctuation of the general map display portion 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the display is in progress is stored, the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the variable display of the picture on the normal display unit 38a. It is determined whether or not this situation is present (step SC508). In the storage area, information indicating that the variable display of the pattern is being executed by the general map display unit 38a when the variable display of the pattern is started by the general map display unit 38a is stored. When the variation display of the pattern is terminated, the information indicating that the variation display of the pattern is being executed is deleted from the storage area in the general-purpose display unit 38a. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. Even when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of power is resumed, the data is stored and held.

  Further, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the normal power open state is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is being executed, the normal power open state is being executed. It is determined whether the supply of operating power has been resumed after the supply of operating power has been stopped (step SC509). The storage area stores information indicating that the normal power open state is being executed when the normal power open state is started, and the normal power open state is being executed when the normal power open state is terminated. Information indicating that it exists is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. Even when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of power is resumed, the data is stored and held.

  When the previous stop of the supply of operating power is neither during the execution of the pattern change display in the ordinary figure display unit 38a nor during the ordinary electric power open state (step SC508 and step SC509: NO), Is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC510). By using the initial display data for general maps stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general map display unit 38a is controlled to display the initial display already described in the general map display unit 38a. On the other hand, when the previous stop of the supply of operating power was either during the execution of the pattern change display in the general map display unit 38a or during the execution of the general power open state (step SC508 or step SC509: YES) Since the initial display data for ordinary use is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. . Therefore, when the display on the general map display unit 38a is started, the display content of the general map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is resumed.

  When the process of step SC504 is executed, when an affirmative determination is made at step SC508, when an affirmative determination is made at step SC509, or when the process of step SC510 is executed, the area to be cleared of the work area 221 for specific control “1” is set to the display start flag provided in 371 (step SC511). As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b.

  As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to “0” in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, “1” is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 191) executed after the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. Thus, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the start processing (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 191), the first display data buffer 271 stores the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process in the main process (FIG. 185) as already described. In some cases, initial display data for special drawing is set, and initial display data for general drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure display unit are started. The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped in 38a. Then, the player who has visually observed the change in the display contents starts the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a in a situation where both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed. I can grasp what was done. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. Is set to “1”, and display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

  Next, the display contents of the special drawing display unit 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be described. FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the universal diagram display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of the supply of operating power.

  When the first RAM clear process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is set to “1”. ”Is not set, and when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started, the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display are displayed. Initial display is started in the section 38a. The initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is that a special ball is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the game start condition is satisfied. This is continued until the variable display starts. The initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the variation of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. In the factory shipping stage, “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375, so that the initial display is started in the special view display unit 37a and the general view display unit 38a.

  As described above, either when the first RAM clear process is executed based on the “RAM clear operation” or when the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed based on the “setting change operation”, When the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started, the special display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a perform the initial display so that the supply of operating power is started. Which of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing is executed even if the display contents of the display portions 37a and 38a are confirmed when the display is started in the figure display portion 37a and the general view display portion 38a? I can't figure it out. As a result, even if the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the set value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

  Even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped is a game When the display is started by the special figure display unit 37a when the current state is neither during the execution of the opening or the opening / closing execution mode, the initial display is started by the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, even when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the supply of the operating power is stopped When the display is started in the general map display unit 38a, when the display is started in the general map display unit 38a. Initial display is started in the section 38a. As described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the second RAM clear process of the first RAM clear process or the set value update process are executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223). Initial display is performed in the common map display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are performed. It becomes possible not to specify that either one has been executed.

  On the other hand, the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the game times or the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, and the first RAM is provided in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of operating power. When the clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed, when the display is started in the special figure display part 37a, the special figure display part is set so that the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is obtained. The display 37a is controlled. In addition, the state in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal diagram display unit 38a or during the execution of the open state of the normal power, and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201) When the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in step SC223), the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped when the display is started in the general-purpose display unit 38a. The general-purpose display unit 38a is controlled so that As a result, when the supply of operating power is resumed and the gaming situation immediately before the stopping of the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 37a and the ordinary game are displayed in a manner corresponding to the resumption of the gaming situation. The display of the figure display unit 38a can be started.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the content of the initial display displayed on the special figure display unit 37a differs between when the first RAM clear process is executed and when the second RAM clear process is executed. It is good also as composition which has. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the contents of the initial display displayed on the general map display unit 38a are different between the case where the first RAM clear process is executed and the case where the second RAM clear process is executed. It is good also as composition which has.

  When the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the special display display unit 37a performs initial display, whereas the general map display unit 38a. Then, the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped may be displayed. When the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the special display display unit 37a performs initial display on the general map display unit 38a. Then, the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped may be displayed.

  In addition, there are a plurality of types of initial display of the special figure display unit 37a, and when the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is selected by lottery. It is good also as a structure by which an initial display is performed in the special figure display part 37a. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of initial displays on the general map display unit 38a and the initial display is performed on the general map display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is selected by lottery. It is good also as a structure by which an initial display is performed in the general map display part 38a.

  Further, in a configuration in which a round display unit is provided as a display unit that is controlled by the main CPU 63 to notify the number of round games that occur in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result. When either of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process is executed when supply of operating power is started, and when both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed Even if it exists, it is good also as a structure by which an initial display is performed in a round display part. Accordingly, even if the round display unit is confirmed, it cannot be specified whether or not the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed.

  In addition, all the display units that are directly controlled by the main CPU 63, including the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b, supply operating power. When either of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process is executed and when both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed, the initial display is performed. It is good also as a structure performed. In this configuration, although the initial display is temporarily started by the special figure hold display unit 37b and the general figure hold display unit 38b, the display content corresponding to the fact that the corresponding hold information is zero thereafter is switched. It is good also as a structure.

  When the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process is executed, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) are executed, while the second RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clear process is executed, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) are executed while the first RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) are not executed.

<57th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those of the 56th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned fifty-sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the display start process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SC601 to step SC605 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63. Also, first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 and an initial display flag 375 are provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control.

  When “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC601: NO), the special display out-of-display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC602), and the normal display out-of-use is displayed. Display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC603). Then, “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC604).

  The off-display data for the special figure is selected by the stop result setting process (step S509) for the off-result when the result of the success / failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13) is the off result. Display data. In other words, the special figure out display data is display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to finally perform out display in the game times in which the result of the success / failure determination process is the out result. Since only one type of outlier display data for special figure is set, the type of outlier display in the special figure display unit 37a is also one type. In addition, a plurality of types of winning displays that are finally displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game times in which the result of the success / failure determination process is a winning result are set. However, the missed display is different from these plural types of winning displays. The contents are displayed.

  By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the special figure out display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs outlier display. The display content of the off display is arbitrary, but, for example, only one light emitting unit among the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may be in a light emitting state, and the plurality of light emitting units emit light. It is good also as composition which will be in a state.

  If the result of the public power open lottery in the general power general electric control process (step S8914) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is an outlier result, the outage display data for the normal map is executed. This is display data for causing the universal map display unit 38a to finally perform a detachment display in the variable display time of the universal map display unit 38a corresponding to. Since only one type of out-of-display display data is set, there is one out-of-display type in the general-purpose display unit 38a. In addition, only one type of winning display is finally set to be displayed on the general map display unit 38a in the variable display time of the general map display unit 38a in which the result of the public train opening lottery is a winning result. The display content is different from the winning display.

  By performing display control of the general map display unit 38a using the general map display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general map display unit 38a performs a display error display. The display content of the off display is arbitrary, but for example, only one light emitting unit among the plurality of light emitting units provided in the general-purpose display unit 38a may be in a light emitting state, and the plurality of light emitting units emit light. It is good also as composition which will be in a state.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SC601 or when the process of step SC604 is executed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC605). . As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b.

  As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to “0” in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, “1” is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 193) executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. Thus, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the start processing (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 193), when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as already described, a special indication is given to the first display data buffer 271. The out-of-order display data is set for the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure display unit are started. At 38a, the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is displayed immediately after the display content is displayed. Then, the player who has visually observed such a change in the display contents starts out-of-display on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed. I can grasp what was done. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. Is set to “1”, and display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC601: YES), the processing of step SC602 and step SC603 is not executed. Accordingly, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Display corresponding to is performed in the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the general map display section 38a.

  Next, the display contents of the special drawing display unit 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be described. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the universal diagram display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of the supply of operating power.

  When the first RAM clear process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is set to “1”. ”Is not set, and when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started, the special figure display part 37a and the general figure are displayed. Out-of-display is started on the display unit 38a. The out-of-game display in the special figure display unit 37a is a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game is satisfied. This is continued until the variable display starts. The out-of-game display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. In addition, since “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 even at the factory shipping stage, out-of-order display is started in the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  Whether the first RAM clear process is executed as described above or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a start displaying. When the special figure display unit 37a and the general diagram display unit 38a perform the off display, the supply of the operating power is started, and the special diagram display unit 37a and the general diagram display unit 38a start the display. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a are confirmed, it is impossible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the set value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

  When the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. In this case, the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the general map display unit 38a. The display on the general map display unit 38a is started with the display content immediately before the start. Here, in the game hall business closing time, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is mostly shut off when neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In most cases, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off in a situation where neither the variable display time nor the open state of the normal power is being executed. That is, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped are basically out-of-display. And as already explained, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the operation power supply, the special figure display unit 37a and An out-of-call display is performed on the normal map display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the off-display is performed on the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are performed. It becomes possible not to specify that either one has been executed.

  In the configuration in which there are a plurality of types of out-of-display displays of the special figure display unit 37a, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the plurality of types are displayed. It is good also as a structure by which the predetermined type display part 37a performs one kind of predetermined out display among the out display. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of out-of-display displays of the general-purpose display unit 38a, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the plurality of types are displayed. It is good also as a structure by which one type of predetermined | prescribed outlier display is performed in the common figure display part 38a among outlier displays.

  Further, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process is executed, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) are executed, while the second RAM clear process is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clear process is executed, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) are executed, while the first RAM clear process is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) are not executed.

<58th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special-purpose display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those of the 55th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 55th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 55th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 and the clear target non-exclusive area 372 of the work area 221 for specific control.

  In the clear target area 371, a second display data buffer 272 for storing display data for causing the special figure hold display section 37b to perform a predetermined display, and a normal display hold display section 38b for performing a predetermined display Not only the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data is stored and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display is stored. The first display data buffer 271 storing display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display, and the first display data storing the display data for causing the special figure display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display are stored. A three display data buffer 273 is provided. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, operating power is supplied. The display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a immediately before being stopped are deleted.

  In addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, an initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371. The initial display flag 375 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the special display display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a need to perform a detachment display as an initial display. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, the initial display flag 375 is “0” when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185). It will be cleared. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), a special figure is displayed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is executed. In the unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the off display is performed as the initial display.

  The non-clear target area 372 is provided with an initial display counter 381 for special drawings and an initial display counter 382 for ordinary drawings. The special display initial display counter 381 has a plurality of types for the special figure when the special figure display unit 37a causes the special figure display unit 37a to perform the detachment display as the initial display when the display is started. It is a counter for deciding which kind of special figure out display is to be performed by lottery. The numerical range that the special display initial display counter 381 can take is “0 to 59”, but is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

  An initial display counter 382 for a general map is used for a general map that has a plurality of types when the display of the general map display unit 38a starts an off display as an initial display when the display of the general map display unit 38a is started. It is a counter for determining which kind of out-of-game display for ordinary drawing is to be performed by lottery. The numerical range that the initial display counter 382 for ordinary use can take is “0 to 59”, but is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

  The special display initial display counter 381 and the general display initial display counter 382 are provided in the non-clear target area 372 as described above. Thus, if the supply of backup power to the main RAM 65 is continued in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the first RAM clear process or the first process is performed in the main process (FIG. 185). Even when the 2RAM clear process is executed, the special display initial display counter 381 and the general display initial display counter 382 are not initialized, and the numerical information immediately before the operation power supply is stopped is stored. Is maintained.

  The numerical information of the special display initial display counter 381 and the numerical information of the general display initial display counter 382 are periodically updated by the first timer interrupt processing in a situation where the start of the first timer interrupt processing is permitted. Is done. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, the process of step SC701 to step SC722 in the first timer interrupt process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  In Step SC705 to Step SC705, the same processing as Step S8901 to Step S8905 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) in the 35th embodiment is executed. Thereafter, an initial display counter update process for special graphics is executed (step SC706). In the update process, the current numerical value information is read from the special display initial display counter 381, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and the numerical information after the addition is overwritten in the special graphic initial display counter 381. To do. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically “59”), it is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, in step SC707, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in any of the game stop flag and the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control. If “1” is set in any of the flags (step SC707: YES), the first timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes in steps SC708 to SC722. If “1” is not set in any of the flags (step SC707: NO), an initial display counter update process for ordinary use is executed (step SC708). In the update processing, the current numerical information is read from the initial display counter 382 for ordinary maps, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and the numerical information after the addition is overwritten on the initial display counter 382 for ordinary maps. To do. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically “59”), it is cleared to “0”. In Step SC709 to Step SC722, the same processing as Step S8907 to Step S8920 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) in the 35th embodiment is executed.

  Here, the special display initial display counter update process (step SC706) is set as a process that is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag or the startup process flag is set to "1". On the other hand, the initial display counter update process for normal use (step SC708) is set as a process that is not executed when the game stop flag or the startup process flag is set to "1". As a result, it is possible to make the update frequency different between the special display initial display counter 381 and the general display initial display counter 382. Can be kept out of sync.

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the display start process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SC801 to step SC807 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  When “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC801: NO), a lottery process of special display outlier display data is executed (step SC802). In the lottery process of the special figure out display data, the special figure out display lottery table 383 stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 198 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special display outlier display lottery table 383. FIG. As shown in FIG. 198 (a), there are first off display data for special figure, second out display data for special figure, and third out display data for special figure as special figure out display data. ing.

  The first out-of-order display data for special figure, the second out-of-order display data for special figure, and the third out-of-order display data for special figure are the results of the success / failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure start process (FIG. 13) This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process (step S509) for a detachment result when it is a detachment result. In other words, the first to third out-of-order display data for special figure is display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to finally perform out-of-game display in the game times in which the result of the success / failure determination process is the out result. . The special figure first out-of-display data is data for displaying the special figure first out-of-display on the special figure display unit 37a, and the special figure second out-of-display data is the special figure second out-of-order. This is data for displaying the display on the special figure display unit 37a, and the third out-of-order display data for special figure is data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display the third out-of-display for special figure. The display contents of the first off display for the special drawing, the second off display for the special drawing, and the third off display for the special drawing are different from each other. In addition, in the game times in which the result of the success / failure determination process is a winning result, a plurality of types of winning displays that are finally displayed on the special figure display unit 37a are set, but the first to third outliers for special figures are displayed. The display content is different from the multiple types of hit display. In the stop result setting process (step S509) for the outlier, the outage display to be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is also made using the special display initial display counter 381 and the special figure outdisplay lottery table 383. The type is selected from the first to third out-of-order displays for special drawings.

  In the special figure outlier display lottery table 383, the numerical range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set for each of the first to third outlier display data for special figures. Specifically, the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “0 to 19” is set for the first special display data for special figures, and the second special display data for special figures is displayed. On the other hand, the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “20 to 39” is set, and the initial display counter for special display of “40 to 59” with respect to the third outlier display data for special illustration. A numerical value range of 381 is set. In other words, the selection probability of the first special display data for special figure, the second special display data for special figure, and the third special display data for special figure in the lottery process of special display display data is “1/3”. "Is the same.

  In the lottery process for special figure out-of-display data, after reading out the special figure out-of-display display lottery table 383, the special display initial display counter 381 provided in the non-clearing area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control. Get the current numerical information of. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated against the special figure out-of-display display lottery table 383, so that the display data to be displayed at this time is changed to the first out-of-special display data for special figure and the second for special figure. Selection is made from out-of-range display data and third out-of-display data for special drawings.

  The display data selected in the special display out-of-display data lottery process is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC803). When the special figure display unit 37a is controlled to display using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs an outlier display corresponding to the display data. That is, when the special display first out-of-display data is set in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37 a performs the first out-of-special display for the special figure, and the first display data buffer 271. When the second out-of-order display data for special figure is set, the special figure display unit 37a performs the second out-of-special display for special figure, and the first display data buffer 271 displays the third out-of-sign for special figure. When the display data is set, the special figure display unit 37a performs the third off display for the special figure.

  Thereafter, a lottery process for out-of-order display data is executed (step SC804). In the lottery process of the extraordinary outlier display data, the extraordinary outlier display lottery table 384 stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 198 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an out-of-game display lottery table 384. As shown in FIG. 198 (b), there are first out-of-display data for general use, second out-of-display data for general use, and third out-of-display data for general use as out-of-use display data for general use. ing.

  The first-out display data for the general map, the second out-of-display data for the general map, and the third out-of-display data for the general map are stored in the general map power control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ), The result of the lottery opening lottery performed using the universal utility release counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the universal utility 34a is an outlier result. This is display data for causing the general map display unit 38a to finally perform an off-display for a general map in the variable display time of the figure display unit 38a. The first out-of-display data for the general map is data for displaying the first out-of-display for the general map on the general-purpose display unit 38a, and the second out-of-display data for the general map is the second out-of-map for the general map. The data for displaying the display on the general map display unit 38a, and the third out-of-display data for the general map are data for displaying the third out-of-display for the general map on the general map display unit 38a. The display contents of the first out-of-normal display, the second out-of-display for general-use display, and the third out-of-display for general-use figure are different from each other. In addition, there are a plurality of types of winning displays that are finally displayed on the general map display unit 38a in the variable display times in which the result of the public train opening lottery is a winning result. The display has different display contents from the multiple types of hit display. It should be noted that also in the general map power control process (step SC716), the initial display counter 382 for general maps and the off display lottery table 384 for general maps are used to select the types of out display to be displayed on the general map display unit 38a. Select from the first to third out-of-order displays for general use.

  A numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the general map is set in each of the first to third out-of-display data for the general map in the standard outlier display lottery table 384. Specifically, a numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the general map of “0 to 19” is set for the first out-of-display data for the general map, and the second out-of-display data for the general map is displayed. On the other hand, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for general maps of “20 to 39” is set, and the initial display counter for general maps of “40 to 59” with respect to the third outlier display data for general maps. A numerical range of 382 is set. That is, the selection probability of the first out-of-display data for the normal map, the second out-of-display data for the normal map, and the third out-of-display data for the normal map in the lottery process of the out-of-standard display data is “1/3”. "Is the same.

  In the lottery process for the out-of-place display data for the normal map, the initial display counter 382 for the general map provided in the non-clearing area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is read after reading the out-of-range display lottery table 384 for the normal map. Get the current numerical information of. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated against the off-page drawing lottery table 384 for the normal map, so that the display data to be displayed this time is the first off-display data for the normal map and the second for the normal map. Selection is made from out-of-range display data and third out-of-display data for ordinary use.

  The display data selected in the lottery process for the out-of-normal display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC805). By using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general map display unit 38a is display-controlled, so that the general map display unit 38a performs an outlier display corresponding to the display data. That is, when the first out-of-display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-display for the general map is displayed in the general map display unit 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. Is set to the second out-of-display data for the normal map, the second out-of-display for the general map is displayed in the general-purpose display unit 38a, and the third out-of-map for the normal map is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third figure display for the common figure is performed in the common figure display unit 38a.

  After executing the processing of step SC802 to step SC805, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC806).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SC801 or if the process of step SC806 is executed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC807). . As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b.

  As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to “0” in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, “1” is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 197) executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. Thus, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the start processing (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 197), when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as already described, a special indication is given to the first display data buffer 271. Any one of the first to third outlier display data for use is set, and any one of the first to third outlier display data for ordinary use is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure display unit are started. At 38a, the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is displayed immediately after the display content is displayed. Then, the player who has visually observed such a change in the display contents starts out-of-display on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed. I can grasp what was done. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 197), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. Is set to “1”, and display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC801: YES), the processing from step SC802 to step SC805 is not executed. Accordingly, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Display corresponding to is performed in the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the general map display section 38a.

  As described above in detail, when the first RAM clear process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, or when the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, Since “1” is not set in the display flag 375, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special view display unit 37a and the general view display unit 38a is started, these special features are displayed. Out-of-display is started in the figure display part 37a and the general-purpose display part 38a. The out-of-game display in the special figure display unit 37a is a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game is satisfied. This is continued until the variable display starts. The out-of-game display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. In addition, since “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 even at the factory shipping stage, out-of-order display is started in the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  Whether the first RAM clear process is executed as described above or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a are displayed. When the start is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general diagram display unit 38a perform a detachment display, so that the supply of the operating power is started and the special map display unit 37a and the general diagram display unit 38a display. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a in the case of starting are confirmed, it is impossible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the set value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

  When the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. In this case, the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the general map display unit 38a. The display in the general map display unit 38a is started with the display content immediately before the start. Here, in the game hall business closing time, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is mostly shut off when neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In most cases, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off in a situation where neither the variable display time nor the open state of the normal power is being executed. That is, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped are basically out-of-display. And as already explained, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the operation power supply, the special figure display unit 37a and An out-of-call display is performed on the normal map display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the off-display is performed on the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are performed. It becomes possible not to specify that either one has been executed.

  In particular, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in a configuration in which there are multiple types of out-of-order displays for special drawings, a selection is made by lottery from these multiple types of out-of-display. The out-of-order display of the type is performed in the special figure display unit 37a. Accordingly, whether or not any of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed from the type of outlier display first displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of operating power is started. It is possible to make it difficult to specify even if an attempt is made.

  Similarly, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in a configuration in which a plurality of types of out-of-game display are present, a selection is made by lottery from among the plurality of types of out-of-display. The displayed type of out-of-range display is performed on the general map display section 38a. Accordingly, whether or not any of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed based on the type of out-of-display displayed first on the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started. It is possible to make it difficult to specify even if an attempt is made.

  It should be noted that the special outlier display data for the special figure, the special outlier display data for the special figure, and the special outlier display data in the lottery process (step SC802) for the special figure out display data executed in the display start process (FIG. 197). The selection probabilities of the third outlier display data shown in the figure are not limited to the same configuration, but may be a configuration that is slightly different but may be substantially the same, or may have a greatly different selection probability.

  Also, the special figure first out display data, the special figure second out display data, and the special figure out display data lottery process (step SC802) executed in the display start process (FIG. 197). The first outlier display data for the special figure, the second outlier display data for the special figure, and the third outlier display for the special figure in the game times in which the selection probabilities of the third outlier display data for the figure are the outage results. Although the configuration is the same as the selection probability of each data, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be substantially the same although slightly different, or the configuration may be a greatly different selection probability.

  In addition, the first out-of-display data for the general map, the second out-of-display data for the general map, the second out-of-display data for the general map, and the general out It is not limited to the configuration in which the selection probabilities of the third outlier display data for the figure are the same, and may be a configuration that is slightly different but substantially the same, or that has a selection probability that is greatly different from each other. Good.

  In addition, the first out-of-display data for the general map, the second out-of-display data for the general map, the second out-of-display data for the general map, and the general out The first outlier display data for the normal map, the second outlier display data for the general map, and the third outlier for the normal map in the variable display times in which the selection probabilities of the third outlier display data for the figure are the outlier results. Although the configuration is the same as the selection probability of each of the display data, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a configuration that is slightly different but may be substantially the same, or may have a greatly different selection probability.

  When the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process is executed, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are executed while the second RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clear process is executed, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are executed while the first RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are not executed.

  If the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third misses for special drawing are performed in step SC802 of the display start process (FIG. 197). The display data is not limited to the configuration selected by lottery. When the supply of operating power is started, the first out-of-order display data for the special figure is displayed every time the process of step SC802 is executed. The second out-of-order display data → the third out-of-order display data for special drawings → the first out-of-spec display data for special drawings →... The configuration may be changed sequentially.

  Further, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third misses for normal use are performed in step SC804 of the display start process (FIG. 197). The display data is not limited to the configuration selected by lottery. When the supply of operating power is started, the first out-of-display data for the normal map → the normal map is used every time the process of step SC804 is executed. Second outlier display data → third outlier display data for ordinary drawings → first outlier display data for ordinary drawings →... It is good also as a structure changed sequentially by.

<59th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special-purpose display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those of the 58th embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the above-mentioned 58th embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the 58th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing display start processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SC901 to step SC907 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC901: NO), a lottery process for initial display data for special drawing is executed (step SC902). In the lottery processing of the special display initial display data, the special drawing initial display lottery table 385 stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 200A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial display lottery table 385 for special drawings. As shown in FIG. 200 (a), as the special display initial display data, first special display data for special figure, second special display data for special figure, third special display data for special figure, special figure There is first per-display data for use, second per-use display data for special drawing, and third per-display data for special drawing.

  The first out-of-order display data for special figure, the second out-of-order display data for special figure, and the third out-of-order display data for special figure are the results of the success / failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure start process (FIG. 13) This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process (step S509) for a detachment result when it is a detachment result. Further, the first hit display data for the special figure, the second hit display data for the special figure, and the third hit display data for the special figure are subjected to the success / failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process (step S507) for the jackpot result when the result is a hit result. In other words, the first to third out display data for the special figure is display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to finally perform out display in the game times in which the result of the determination process is the out result. The first to third hit display data for the special figure is display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to finally perform a win display in the game times in which the result of the success / failure determination process is the win result.

  The special figure first out-of-display data is data for displaying the special figure first out-of-display on the special figure display unit 37a, and the special figure second out-of-display data is the special figure second out-of-order. This is data for displaying the display on the special figure display unit 37a, and the third out-of-order display data for special figure is data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display the third out-of-display for special figure. Further, the first hit display data for the special figure is data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display the first hit display for the special figure, and the second hit display data for the special figure is the first special display for the special figure. This is data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display the two-hit display, and the third hit display data for special figure is data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display the third hit display for special figure. . The first hit display for the special figure is the result of the success / failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13), and the result of the distribution determination process (step S506) is the low likelihood hit result. It is finally displayed on the special figure display part 37a in a certain game round. Further, the second winning display for the special figure is the result of the success / failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13), and the result of the allocation determination process (step S506) is the low winning prize amount. It is finally displayed on the special figure display part 37a in the game times which are the probable winning results. Further, the third hit display for the special figure is a hit result of the success / failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13), and the result of the distribution determination process (step S506) is the most advantageous hit. In the game times as a result, it is finally displayed on the special figure display part 37a. For these special charts, the first out display, the second out display for special figures, the third out display for special figures, the first per display for special figures, the second per display for special figures, and the special figures The display contents of the third hit display are different from each other.

  In the special drawing initial display lottery table 385, the special display initial display counter 381 for each of the first to third off display data for special drawing and the first to third per-display data for special drawing. The numerical range of is set. Specifically, a numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “0 to 9” is set for the first special display data for special figures, and the second special display data for special figures is displayed. On the other hand, the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 for “10-19” is set, and the special display initial display counter for “20-29” with respect to the third outlier display data for special illustration. The numerical value range of 381 is set, and the numerical value range of the initial display counter 381 for special figures “30 to 39” is set for the first per-display data for special figures, The numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 for “40 to 49” is set for the display data per 2 and the special drawing for “50 to 59” is set for the third hit display data for the special drawing. A numerical range of the initial display counter 381 is set. That is, in the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures, the first special display data for special figures, the second special display data for special figures, the third special display data for special figures, and the first special figure for special figures. The selection probabilities of the display data, the second per second display data for special figures, and the third per second display data for special figures are “1/6” and are the same.

  In the lottery processing of the special display initial display data, after reading the special display initial display lottery table 385, the special display initial display counter 381 provided in the non-clearing area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control. Get the current numerical information of. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with the initial display lottery table 385 for special drawings, so that the display data to be displayed this time is changed to the first out-of-display data for special drawings and the second for special drawings. Selection is made from out-of-range display data, third out-of-order display data for special figures, first per-display data for special figures, second per-second display data for special figures, and third per-minute display data for special figures.

  The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC903). By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs outlier display or hit display corresponding to the display data. . That is, when the special display first out-of-display data is set in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37 a performs the first out-of-special display for the special figure, and the first display data buffer 271. When the second out-of-order display data for special figure is set, the special figure display unit 37a performs the second out-of-special display for special figure, and the first display data buffer 271 displays the third out-of-sign for special figure. When the display data is set, the special figure display unit 37a performs the third off display for the special figure. In addition, when first special display data for special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first special display for special figure is performed by the special figure display unit 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second hit display data for the special figure is set, the special figure display unit 37a displays the second hit for the special figure, and the third display for the special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display unit 37a displays the third hit for special figure.

  Thereafter, lottery processing of initial display data for ordinary use is executed (step SC904). In the lottery process for the initial display data for the ordinary map, the initial display lottery table 386 for the ordinary map stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 200B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary drawings. As shown in FIG. 200 (b), as the initial display data for the general map, the first out display data for the general map, the second out display data for the general map, the third out display data for the general map, and the general map The hit display data for exists.

  The first-out display data for the general map, the second out-of-display data for the general map, and the third out-of-display data for the general map are stored in the general map power control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ), The result of the lottery opening lottery performed using the universal utility release counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the universal utility 34a is an outlier result. This is display data for causing the general map display unit 38a to finally perform an off-display for a general map in the variable display time of the figure display unit 38a. In addition, when the result of the above-mentioned lottery opening lottery is a winning result, the hitting display data for the usual map is finally displayed on the usual figure display unit 38a in the variable display time of the usual figure display unit 38a. This is display data for performing a win-win display.

  The first out-of-display data for the general map is data for displaying the first out-of-display for the general map on the general-purpose display unit 38a, and the second out-of-display data for the general map is the second out-of-map for the general map. The data for displaying the display on the general map display unit 38a, and the third out-of-display data for the general map are data for displaying the third out-of-display for the general map on the general map display unit 38a. Moreover, the hit display data for common maps is data for displaying the hit display for universal maps on the universal map display unit 38a. The display contents of the first out-of-use display for general maps, the second out-of-display for general maps, the third out-of-display for general maps, and the hit display for general maps are different from each other.

  In the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary maps, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary maps is set for each of the first to third outlier display data for ordinary maps and the hit display data for ordinary maps. Has been. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the general map of “0-14” is set for the first out-of-display data for the general map, and the second out-of-display data for the general map is displayed. On the other hand, the numerical value range of the initial display counter 382 for general maps “15 to 29” is set, and the initial display counter for general maps “30 to 44” with respect to the third outlier display data for general maps. A numerical value range of 382 is set, and a numerical value range of the initial display counter 382 for general maps of “45 to 59” is set for hit display data for general maps. That is, in the lottery process of the initial display data for general maps, the first out display data for general maps, the second out display data for general maps, the third out display data for general maps, and the hit display data for general maps The selection probability is equal to “1/4”.

  In the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary maps, the initial display counter 382 for ordinary maps provided in the non-clearing area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is read after reading the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary maps. Get the current numerical information of. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary drawings, so that the display data to be displayed at this time is changed to the first outlier display data for ordinary drawings, the second for ordinary drawings. Selection is made from outlier display data, third outlier display data for ordinary drawings, and hit display data for ordinary drawings.

  The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary maps is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC905). By performing display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general-purpose display unit 38a performs outlier display or winning display corresponding to the display data. . That is, when the first out-of-display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-display for the general map is displayed in the general map display unit 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. Is set to the second out-of-display data for the normal map, the second out-of-display for the general map is displayed in the general-purpose display unit 38a, and the third out-of-map for the normal map is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third display for the general map is displayed in the general map display unit 38a, and when the hit display data for the general map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the general display is displayed. The figure display unit 38a performs a hitting display for ordinary drawing.

  After executing the processing of step SC902 to step SC905, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC906).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SC901 or when the process of step SC906 is executed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC907). . As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b.

  As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to “0” in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, “1” is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 199) executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. Thus, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the start processing (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 199), as described above, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is specially displayed. 1st to 3rd display data for display and 1st to 3rd display data for special drawing are set, and the 1st to 3rd display data for normal use are stored in the third display data buffer 273. Set one of the hit display data for common maps. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure display unit are started. As soon as the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped in 38a is displayed, the detachment display or the hit display is started. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in the display contents displays an off-going display or hit on the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed. It is possible to grasp that the display has started. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 199), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. Is set to “1”, and display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC901: YES), the processing from step SC902 to step SC905 is not executed. Accordingly, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Display corresponding to is performed in the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the general map display section 38a.

  Next, the display contents of the special drawing display unit 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be described. FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power.

  When the first RAM clear process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is set to “1”. ”Is not set, and when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started, the special figure display part 37a and the general figure are displayed. In the display unit 38a, the off display or hit display is started. The out-of-game display or the hit display in the special figure display unit 37a is performed when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game times is satisfied. It continues until the change display of the pattern is started. The out-of-game display or hit display in the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. In addition, since “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 even at the factory shipping stage, the off-going display or the win display is started in the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  Whether the first RAM clear process is executed as described above or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a are displayed. When the start is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a perform a detachment display or a hit display to start the supply of the operating power, and the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a when the display is started are confirmed, it is impossible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the set value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

  When the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. In this case, the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the general map display unit 38a. The display in the general map display unit 38a is started with the display content immediately before the start. That is, if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the special figure display unit 37a and the normal diagram are displayed. The display content of the display unit 38a depends on the situation at the timing when the supply of operating power is stopped, and the display content becomes various. On the other hand, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the special figure display unit 37a and the common figure display unit 37a In the figure display part 38a, the off display or the winning display is determined by lottery and displayed. As a result, even when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in the process at the start of the operation power supply (step SC201 to step SC223), the operation power supply starts As in the case where the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223), the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a are displayed. It is possible to diversify. Therefore, even if the display of the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a is started when the supply of the operating power is started, even if the display is confirmed, either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to specify what has been executed.

  In addition, a special figure display unit 37a that can be selected when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of operating power, The display data on the display unit 38a is display data that can be selected in a normal game. As a result, the first RAM clear process or the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is performed without increasing the data capacity of the display data of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. When the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a.

  It should be noted that, in the lottery process (step SC902) of the initial display data for special figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), the first outlier display data for special figure, the second outlier display data for special figure, Limited to configurations in which the selection probabilities of the third outlier display data for the figure, the first hit display data for the special figure, the second hit display data for the special figure, and the third hit display data for the special figure are the same. The configuration may be substantially the same although slightly different, and the configuration may be a selection probability that is greatly different. For example, the total selection probability of the first to third outlier display data for the special figure is higher than the total selection probability of the first to third display data for the special figure. Or a low configuration.

  In addition, the first out-of-display data for the general map, the second out-of-display data for the general map in the lottery process (step SC904) of the initial display data for the general map executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), The selection probabilities of the third outlier display data for illustrations and the hit display data for general illustrations are not limited to the same configuration, but may be slightly different but may be substantially the same configuration. It is good also as a structure which is a probability.

  In addition, in order to display the display data selected in the lottery process (step SC902) of the initial display data for special charts executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), it is not included in the game result stop result. The display data may be included. In addition, as the display data selected in the lottery process (step SC904) of the initial display data for ordinary drawing executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), a display not included in the stop result of the variable display times is performed. The display data may be included.

  When the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process is executed, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) are executed while the second RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clear process is executed, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) are executed, while the first RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) are not executed.

  If the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third misses for special drawing are performed in step SC902 of the display start process (FIG. 199). The display data and the first to third display data for the special drawing are not limited to the configuration selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC902 is executed when the supply of operating power is started. First out-of-order display data for special figures → second out-of-order display data for special figures → third out-of-order display data for special figures → first per-minute display data for special figures → second per-second display data for special figures → The display data to be selected may be sequentially changed in a predetermined order, such as third hit display data for special figures → first out-of-order display data for special figures →.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the first to third deviations for normal use are performed in step SC904 of the display start process (FIG. 199). The display data and the first-to-third display data for ordinary use are not limited to the configuration selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC904 is executed when the supply of operating power is started. 1st out-of-display data for general maps → 2nd out-of-display data for general maps → 3rd out-of-display data for general maps → hit display data for general maps → first out-of-display data for general maps → ・ ・The display data to be selected may be changed sequentially in a predetermined order.

<60th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special-purpose display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those of the 59th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 59th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 59th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the display start process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SD101 to step SD115 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  When “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD101: NO), the processing from step SD102 to step SD106 is executed. The processing contents of steps SD102 to SD106 are the same as those of steps SC901 to SC906 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) in the 59th embodiment. As a result, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started as in the case of the 59th embodiment. In such a case, a missed display or a hit display is performed.

  When “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD101: YES), information indicating whether or not a game round is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored. By referring to the storage area, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the game (step SD107). The storage area stores information indicating that the game times are being executed when the game times are started, and information indicating that the game times are being executed when the game times are ended. Erased from the area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the power is stored and held.

  In addition, by referring to a storage area in which information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, the operating power during execution of the opening / closing execution mode is referred to. It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been resumed after the supply of power is stopped (step SD108). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and indicates that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed when the opening / closing execution mode is ended. Information is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the power is stored and held.

  If the previous stop of the supply of operating power was neither during the game play nor during the opening / closing execution mode (step SD107 and step SD108: NO), the lottery processing of the initial display data for special drawing is executed. (Step SD109). The details of the lottery process for the initial display data for the special figure are the same as in step SD102, and more specifically, the same as step SC902 in the display start process (FIG. 199) in the 59th embodiment. As a result, when the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, as the display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform the outlier display or the hit display, the first outlier display data for the special figure, Select one of the second out-of-display data, the third out-of-display data for special drawings, the first per-display data for special drawings, the second per-display data for special drawings, and the third per-display data for special drawings Is done.

  The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD110). By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs outlier display or hit display corresponding to the display data. . That is, when the special display first out-of-display data is set in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37 a performs the first out-of-special display for the special figure, and the first display data buffer 271. When the second out-of-order display data for special figure is set, the special figure display unit 37a performs the second out-of-special display for special figure, and the first display data buffer 271 displays the third out-of-sign for special figure. When the display data is set, the special figure display unit 37a performs the third off display for the special figure. In addition, when first special display data for special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first special display for special figure is performed by the special figure display unit 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second hit display data for the special figure is set, the special figure display unit 37a displays the second hit for the special figure, and the third display for the special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display unit 37a displays the third hit for special figure.

  On the other hand, if the previous stop of the supply of operating power was either during the game round or open / close execution mode (step SD107 or step SD108: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is Since the display data buffer 271 is not set, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is resumed as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made at step SD107, when an affirmative determination is made at step SD108, or when the process at step SD110 is executed, the fluctuation of the general map display section 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the display is in progress is stored, the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the variable display of the picture on the normal display unit 38a. It is determined whether or not the current situation is present (step SD111). In the storage area, information indicating that the variable display of the pattern is being executed by the general map display unit 38a when the variable display of the pattern is started by the general map display unit 38a is stored. When the variation display of the pattern is terminated, the information indicating that the variation display of the pattern is being executed is deleted from the storage area in the general-purpose display unit 38a. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the power is stored and held.

  Further, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the normal power open state is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is being executed, the normal power open state is being executed. It is determined whether the supply of operating power has been resumed after the supply of operating power has been stopped (step SD112). The storage area stores information indicating that the normal power open state is being executed when the normal power open state is started, and the normal power open state is being executed when the normal power open state is terminated. Information indicating that it exists is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the power is stored and held.

  When the previous stop of the supply of operating power is neither during the execution of the pattern change display in the general map display unit 38a nor during the execution of the general power open state (step SD111 and step SD112: NO) The initial display data lottery process is executed (step SD113). The contents of the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary maps are the same as in step SD104, and more specifically, the same as step SC904 in the display start process (FIG. 199) in the 59th embodiment. As a result, when the display of the general map display unit 38a is started, as the display data for causing the general map display unit 38a to perform the off display or the hit display, the first out display data for the general map, Any one of the second out-of-display data, the third out-of-display display data for the normal map, and the hit display data for the normal map is selected.

  The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the usual map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD114). By performing display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general-purpose display unit 38a performs outlier display or winning display corresponding to the display data. . That is, when the first out-of-display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-display for the general map is displayed in the general map display unit 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. Is set to the second out-of-display data for the normal map, the second out-of-display for the general map is displayed in the general-purpose display unit 38a, and the third out-of-map for the normal map is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third display for the general map is displayed in the general map display unit 38a, and when the hit display data for the general map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the general display is displayed. The figure display unit 38a performs a hitting display for ordinary drawing.

  On the other hand, when the previous stop of the supply of operating power was either during the execution of the pattern change display in the ordinary figure display unit 38a or during the execution of the ordinary power open state (step SD111 or step SD112: YES), Since the initial display data for ordinary use is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. . Therefore, when the display on the general map display unit 38a is started, the display content of the general map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is resumed.

  When the process of step SD106 is executed, when the determination is affirmative at step SD111, when the determination is affirmative at step SD112, or when the process of step SD114 is executed, the area to be cleared of the work area 221 for specific control “1” is set to the display start flag provided in 371 (step SD115). As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b.

  As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to “0” in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, “1” is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 202) executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. Thus, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the start processing (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 202), the first display data buffer 271 stores the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process in the main process (FIG. 185) as already described. In some cases, initial display data for special drawing is set, and initial display data for general drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure display unit are started. The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped in 38a. Then, the player who has visually observed the change in the display contents starts the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a in a situation where both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed. I can grasp what was done. In contrast, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 202), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. Is set to “1”, and display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

  Next, the display contents of the special drawing display unit 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be described. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power.

  When the first RAM clear process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is set to “1”. ”Is not set, and when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started, the special figure display part 37a and the general figure are displayed. In the display unit 38a, the off display or hit display is started. The out-of-game display or the hit display in the special figure display unit 37a is performed when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game times is satisfied. It continues until the change display of the pattern is started. The out-of-game display or hit display in the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. In addition, since “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 even at the factory shipping stage, the off-going display or the win display is started in the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  Whether the first RAM clear process is executed as described above or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a are displayed. When the start is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a perform a detachment display or a hit display to start the supply of the operating power, and the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a when the display is started are confirmed, it is impossible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the set value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

  Even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped is a game When the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a when the situation is neither during the execution of the opening and the open / close execution mode, the outlier display or the hit display is started in the special figure display unit 37a. Is done. In addition, even when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the supply of the operating power is stopped When the display is started in the general map display unit 38a, when the display is started in the general map display unit 38a. The part 38a starts off display or hit display. As described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the second RAM clear process of the first RAM clear process or the set value update process are executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223). An out-of-game display or a win display is performed in the general-purpose display unit 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the off-display or the hit display is performed on the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clear process and the second RAM It becomes possible not to specify that one of the clear processes has been executed.

  On the other hand, the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the game times or the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, and the first RAM is provided in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of operating power. When the clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed, when the display is started in the special figure display part 37a, the special figure display part is set so that the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is obtained. The display 37a is controlled. In addition, the state in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal diagram display unit 38a or during the execution of the open state of the normal power, and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201) When the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in step SC223), the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped when the display is started in the general-purpose display unit 38a. The general-purpose display unit 38a is controlled so that As a result, when the supply of operating power is resumed and the gaming situation immediately before the stopping of the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 37a and the ordinary game are displayed in a manner corresponding to the resumption of the gaming situation. The display of the figure display unit 38a can be started.

  It should be noted that the special display first out display data and the special out second display in the lottery processing (step SD102 and step SD109) of the special display initial display data executed in the display start processing (FIG. 202). The selection probabilities of the data, the third out-of-order display data for special drawings, the first hit display data for special drawings, the second hit display data for special drawings, and the third hit display data for special drawings are the same. It is not limited to the configuration, but may be a configuration that is substantially the same although it is slightly different, or a configuration that has greatly different selection probabilities. For example, the total selection probability of the first to third outlier display data for the special figure is higher than the total selection probability of the first to third display data for the special figure. Or a low configuration.

  In addition, the first out-of-display data for the general drawing and the second out-of-display for the general drawing in the lottery processing (step SD104, step SD113) of the initial display data for general drawing executed in the display start processing (FIG. 202). The selection probability of each of the data, the third out-of-order display data for ordinary maps, and the hit display data for ordinary maps is not limited to the same configuration, and may be configured to be substantially the same although slightly different. A configuration with greatly different selection probabilities may be used.

  In addition, as a display data selected in the lottery process (step SD102, step SD109) of the special display initial display data executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), a display that is not included in the stop result of the game times is displayed. It is good also as a structure containing the display data for making it perform. In addition, as display data selected in the lottery process (step SD104, step SD113) of the initial display data for general maps executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), a display not included in the stop result of the variable display times It is good also as a structure including the display data for performing.

  Further, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process is executed, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) are executed, while the second RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clear process is executed, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) are executed, while the first RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) are not executed.

<61st Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those of the 56th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned fifty-sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the display start process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SD201 to step SD219 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  When “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD201: NO), the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is provided in the special figure display unit 37a. “7” corresponding to the number of emitted light emitting units is set (step SD202). The lottery target counter is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not it is necessary to execute the processing of step SD203 to step SD207 or the processing of step SD211 to step SD215.

  Thereafter, a random value is obtained from the special-purpose random number circuit corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD203). In the present embodiment, the special control random number circuit corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37 a is provided on the main control board 61. Specifically, since the special figure display unit 37a is provided with seven light emitting units, seven special figure random number circuits are provided. These seven special-purpose random number circuits have a relatively short period (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and each of them is held at a different period. In addition, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by supplying backup power. This is a configuration that can store and hold a random number value immediately before.

  When the seven light emitting parts of the special figure display part 37a are the first to seventh light emitting parts and the seven special figure random number circuits are the first to seventh special figure random number circuits, the first special figure A random number circuit for the first light emitting unit, a second random number circuit for the special figure corresponding to the second light emitting unit, a random number circuit for the third special figure corresponding to the third light emitting unit, The fourth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the fourth light emitting part, the fifth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the fifth light emitting part, and the sixth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the sixth light emitting part. The seventh special figure random number circuit corresponds to the seventh light emitting section. Further, when the value of the lottery object counter is “7”, it corresponds to the first light emitting unit and the first special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery object counter is “6”, the second light emitting unit. It corresponds to the light emitting unit and the second special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “5”, it corresponds to the third light emitting unit and the third special figure random number circuit, and the lottery target When the value of the counter is “4”, it corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit and the fourth special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “3”, the fifth light emitting unit and the fourth light emitting unit. 5 corresponds to the random number circuit for special drawing, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “2”, it corresponds to the sixth light emitting unit and the sixth special figure random number circuit, and the value of the lottery target counter is In the case of “1”, it corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit and the seventh special figure random number circuit. Note that the random number circuits for the first to seventh special diagrams all have the same numerical range of random numbers (for example, “0 to 255”).

  Thereafter, a special drawing lighting lottery process is executed (step SD204). In the special drawing lighting lottery process, the special drawing lighting lottery table is read from the main ROM 64. In the special drawing lighting lottery table, half of the random number values that can be taken in the first to seventh special figure random number circuits are set as winning random number values. Then, the random number value acquired in step SD203 is checked against a special drawing lighting lottery table.

  When the result of the special drawing lighting lottery process is lighting winning (step SD205: YES), the lighting information is displayed in the area corresponding to the current lottery target counter value in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. Is stored (step SD206). Each area provided corresponding to the lottery target counter is cleared to “0” when the process of step SD202 is executed.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the lottery object counter (step SD207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery object counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step SD208). If a negative determination is made in step SD208, the processes in steps SD203 to SD207 are executed again.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SD208, initial display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD209). The special display initial display data is determined by the presence or absence of lighting information corresponding to each of the lottery target counter values “1” to “7”. For example, lighting information corresponding to cases where the value of the lottery object counter is “7”, “5”, and “1” is stored, while lighting information corresponding to other values of the lottery object counter is not stored. In this case, the first light emitting unit, the third light emitting unit, and the seventh light emitting unit of the special figure display unit 37a are in a light emitting state, and the second light emitting unit, the fourth light emitting unit, the fifth light emitting unit, and the sixth light emitting unit are turned on. Initial display data for special graphics that enables initial display for special graphics to be turned off is set in the first display data buffer 271.

  By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs initial display corresponding to the display data. The display contents that can be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a as an initial display include display contents that can be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in a normal game, and a display that is not displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in a normal game. Contents are also included. In addition, the display contents that can be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a as an initial display and can be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in a normal game, the final display on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round of the outage result And a special figure hit display that is finally displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure out-of-game display and the game result of the hit result.

  Thereafter, “7” corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided in the general-purpose display unit 38a is set in the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD210).

  Thereafter, a random value is acquired from the random number circuit corresponding to the lottery object counter (step SD211). In the present embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with a number of random numbers circuits for general maps corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided in the general map display unit 38a. Specifically, since the general-purpose display unit 38a is provided with seven light emitting units, seven general-purpose random number circuits are provided. These seven general-purpose random number circuits have a relatively short period (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and each of them is held at a different period. In addition, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by supplying backup power. This is a configuration that can store and hold a random number value immediately before.

  In the case where the seven light emitting units of the common map display unit 38a are the first to seventh light emitting units and the seven common random number circuits are the first to seventh common random number circuits, A random number circuit for the first light emitting unit, a second random number circuit for the normal map corresponding to the second light emitting unit, a random number circuit for the third general map corresponding to the third light emitting unit, The fourth random number circuit corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit, the fifth common random number circuit corresponds to the fifth light emitting unit, and the sixth common random number circuit corresponds to the sixth light emitting unit. The seventh general-purpose random number circuit corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit. Further, when the value of the lottery object counter is “7”, it corresponds to the first light emitting unit and the first random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery object counter is “6”, When the value of the lottery target counter is “5”, it corresponds to the third light emitter and the third random number circuit, and the lottery target. When the value of the counter is “4”, it corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit and the fourth random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “3”, the fifth light emitting unit and the fourth light emitting unit. 5 corresponds to the random number circuit for 5 figures, and when the value of the lottery object counter is “2”, it corresponds to the sixth light emitting unit and the 6th figure random number circuit, and the value of the lottery object counter is In the case of “1”, it corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit and the seventh random number circuit. Note that the first to seventh common random number circuits all have the same numerical value range (for example, “0 to 255”).

  Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for ordinary use is executed (step SD212). In the lighting drawing lottery process, the lighting drawing lottery table is read from the main ROM 64. In the lighting lottery table for ordinary figures, half of the random number values that can be taken in the first to seventh ordinary number random number circuits are set as winning random number values. And the random number value acquired in step SD211 is collated with the lighting lottery table for ordinary use.

  When the result of the lighting lottery process for the usual drawing is the lighting winning (step SD213: YES), the lighting information is displayed in the area corresponding to the current lottery target counter value in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. Is stored (step SD214). Each area provided corresponding to the lottery object counter is cleared to “0” when the process of step SD210 is executed.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the lottery object counter (step SD215), and it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery object counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step SD216). If a negative determination is made in step SD216, the processes in steps SD211 to SD215 are executed again.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SD216, initial display data for ordinary use is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD217). The initial display data for normal use is determined by the presence or absence of lighting information corresponding to each of the lottery target counter values “1” to “7”. For example, lighting information corresponding to cases where the value of the lottery object counter is “7”, “5”, and “1” is stored, while lighting information corresponding to other values of the lottery object counter is not stored. In this case, the first light emitting unit, the third light emitting unit, and the seventh light emitting unit of the common map display unit 38a are in a light emitting state, and the second light emitting unit, the fourth light emitting unit, the fifth light emitting unit, and the sixth light emitting unit are activated. In the third display data buffer 273, the initial display data for the universal map that enables execution of the initial display for the universal map that is turned off is set.

  By performing display control of the general map display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the general map display unit 38a. The display content that can be displayed on the general map display unit 38a as an initial display includes display content that can be displayed on the general map display unit 38a in a normal game, and a display that is not displayed on the general map display unit 38a in a normal game. Contents are also included. In addition, the display content that can be displayed on the general map display unit 38a as the initial display, and the display content that can be displayed on the general map display unit 38a in a normal game, In this case, the normal-use hit display that is finally displayed on the general-purpose display portion 38a in the normal-use out-of-use display and the fluctuation display times of the hit results is included.

  After executing the processing of step SD202 to step SD217, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD218).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SD201 or when the process of step SD218 is executed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD219). . As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b.

  As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to “0” in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, “1” is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 204) executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. Thus, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the start processing (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 204), as described above, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is specially displayed. Initial display data is set, and initial display data for general use is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure display unit are started. The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped in 38a. Then, the player who has visually observed such a change in the display contents starts initial display on the special chart display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed. I can grasp what was done. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 204), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. Is set to “1”, and display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD201: YES), the processing from step SD202 to step SD218 is not executed. Accordingly, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Display corresponding to is performed in the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the general map display section 38a.

  As described above in detail, when the first RAM clear process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, or when the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, Since “1” is not set in the display flag 375, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special view display unit 37a and the general view display unit 38a is started, these special features are displayed. Initial display is started in the figure display part 37a and the common figure display part 38a. The initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is that a special ball is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the game start condition is satisfied. This is continued until the variable display starts. The initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the variation of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. In addition, since “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 even at the factory shipping stage, out-of-order display is started in the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  Whether the first RAM clear process is executed as described above or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a are displayed. When starting, initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, so that the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a display. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a in the case of starting are confirmed, it is impossible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the set value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

  When the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. In this case, the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the general map display unit 38a. The display in the general map display unit 38a is started with the display content immediately before the start. That is, if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the special figure display unit 37a and the normal diagram are displayed. The display content of the display unit 38a depends on the situation at the timing when the supply of operating power is stopped, and the display content becomes various. On the other hand, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the special figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 37a. The initial display is determined by lottery and displayed on the figure display unit 38a. As a result, even when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in the process at the start of the operation power supply (step SC201 to step SC223), the operation power supply starts As in the case where the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223), the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a are displayed. It is possible to diversify. Therefore, even if the display of the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a is started when the supply of the operating power is started, even if the display is confirmed, either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to specify what has been executed.

  In particular, when determining the display contents of the initial display, the lighting lottery process is executed in units of each light emitting unit for each of the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a. This makes it possible to diversify the display contents that can be selected as the initial display.

  It should be noted that the processing from step SD202 to step SD218 of the display start process (FIG. 204) is executed even when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of operating power is started. Also good. In this case, even if the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a are confirmed when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are performed when the supply of operating power is started. It becomes possible not to specify whether or not any of them has been executed. In addition, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the configuration, the display is started when the variation display of the pattern is being executed in the special figure display unit 37a or in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. The display of the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped may be resumed by the special figure display unit 37a by not performing the process of step SD202 to step SD209 of the process (FIG. 204). . In addition, when it is in the midst of executing the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped or in the middle of the open state of the general power, the display start process ( The display of the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped may be resumed by the special figure display unit 37a by not performing the processing of step SD210 to step SD217 of FIG. 204).

  Also, in the special drawing lighting lottery process (step SD204) in the display start process (FIG. 204), it is not a lottery to determine whether or not each light emitting unit of the special figure display unit 37a is individually lit. It is good also as a structure which performs the lottery of whether to light by predetermined several units, such as two or three. Further, in the lighting drawing lottery process (step SD212) for the general map in the display start process (FIG. 204), it is not a lottery to determine whether or not each light emitting unit of the general map display unit 38a is lit individually. It is good also as a structure which performs the lottery of whether to light by predetermined several units, such as two or three.

  When the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process is executed, the display start process (FIG. 204), step SD202 to step SD217, is executed while the second RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 204) are not executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clear process is executed, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 204) are executed, while the first RAM clear process is executed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 204) are not executed.

<62nd Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special-purpose display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is different from those of the 58th embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the above-mentioned 58th embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the 58th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing in the present embodiment, which is executed in step SC216 in the main processing (FIG. 185) of the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SD301 to step SD316 in the set value update processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SD301). Thus, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

  In the present embodiment, in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the set value update process (FIG. 205), an interrupt is permitted. Therefore, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 205) are not executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed. ) And second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (FIG. 205) is being executed, the startup timer flag is set to “1”, so the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is activated, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196), the processes for power failure monitoring, various counter updating and fraud monitoring are executed, while the game is advanced. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is terminated without executing the process.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the setting update display flag on condition that “1” is not set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD302). When the setting update display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step SC402 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), so that the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step SC403) is executed. The processing content of the setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the 45th embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are selected. The set values being displayed are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initial setting at the start is performed (step SD303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. When the power failure flag is not set to “1” (step SC205: NO), the game stop flag indicates that the power failure flag has not been properly processed at the time of the previous power interruption. When at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control does not match the checksum due to a change in the information storage state since the previous power shutdown (step SC206: NO), or the setting reference area 341 This flag is set to “1” in step SC220 of the main process (FIG. 185) when the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SC207: NO). When “1” is set in the game stop flag, the processing of step SC701 to step SC706 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196), while the determination in step SC707 is affirmative so that step SC708 to step SC The process of SC722 is not executed. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to “0” in the process of step SD303, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed. Is possible.

  Thereafter, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information on setting values being updated in the setting value update processing (FIG. 205), as in the 45th embodiment. When numerical value information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When numerical information “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When numerical information “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  By setting “1” in the setting update area 342 in step SD304, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting value to be updated is “setting 1” when the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is started regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

  Thereafter, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SD305). The sound emission control device 81 receives the update start command, and thereby an image indicating that the set value update processing (FIG. 205) is being executed, and an image for enabling the operation contents for changing the set value to be recognized. , And display control of the display control device 82 so that an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for ending the set value update processing (FIG. 205) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation content and setting value update processing required to change the setting value (FIG. 205) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content necessary for ending the game. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41. Further, an external output indicating that the set value update processing (FIG. 205) is being performed may be performed on a device outside the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer for a game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of “1” to “6” (step SD306). If it is not one of “1” to “6” (step SD306: NO), “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (step SD307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SD306 or when the process of step SD307 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SD308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a is changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. Even in this case, a negative determination is made in step SD308.

  If a negative determination is made in step SD308, the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SD309: YES) (step SD310). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to one level higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SD309: NO) or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SD306, but the setting is updated in step SD306. If it is determined that the value of the work area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SD307. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting returns to “setting 1”.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SD308: YES), the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is stored in the setting reference area 341. By determining whether or not the set value is equal to or greater than the set value corresponding to the information that has been set, the set value that is greater than or equal to the advantage of the set value that was selected before the current set value update process (FIG. 205) is started. It is determined whether or not it has been selected in the current set value update process (FIG. 205) (step SD311). When an affirmative determination is made in step SD311, "1" is set to the rising expectation flag provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD312). The rising expectation flag indicates whether or not a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value that has been selected so far in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of operating power is set on the main side This flag is specified by the CPU 63.

  When a negative determination is made in step SD311, or when the process of step SD312 is executed, the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 (step SD313). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of the current setting value update process (FIG. 205) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current value. This is the set value of the pachinko machine 10.

  After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step SD314). As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 205) ends and the process returns to the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 185), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are prohibited.

  Thereafter, a second RAM clear process is executed (step SD315). In the second RAM clear process, similarly to the first RAM clear process (step SC218) of the main process (FIG. 185), the area provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared and initialized. Perform configuration. It should be noted that an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area 341) is provided not in the clear target area 371 but in the non-clear target area 372.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SD316). The sound emission control device 81 receives the return command at the time of update, thereby specifying that the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed in the main CPU 63, and the current operating power It is specified that the set value update process (FIG. 205) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (step SC201 to step SC223). Then, similarly to the 49th embodiment, the process corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of update is executed.

  FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the display start process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SD401 to step SD413 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD401: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the rising expectation flag of the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. Determination is made (step SD402). When “1” is not set in the ascending expectation flag (step SD402: NO), the first display allocation table 391 for the special figure provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD403), When “1” is set (step SD402: YES), the special display second display distribution table 392 provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD404).

  FIG. 207 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display allocation table 391 for special maps, and FIG. 207 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display allocation table 392 for special maps. FIG. The first initial display data for special figure, the special display for special figure, as the initial display data for special figure in both the first display distribution table 391 for special figure and the second display distribution table 392 for special figure There are second initial display data and third initial display data for special drawings.

  The first initial display data for the special figure is data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display the first initial display for the special figure, and the second initial display data for the special figure is the second initial display data for the special figure. This is data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display the display. The third initial display data for special figure is data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display the third initial display for special figure. The display contents of the first initial display for special graphics, the second initial display for special graphics, and the third initial display for special graphics are different from each other.

  The first initial display data for special figure, the second initial display data for special figure, and the third initial display data for special figure are the stop result setting process for jackpot result in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13) (step The display data is not selected in any of S507) and the stop result setting process (step S509). Therefore, the first initial display for the special figure, the second initial display for the special figure, and the third initial display for the special figure are different from the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game times. ing. Furthermore, the first initial display for the special figure, the second initial display for the special figure, and the third initial display for the special figure are displayed when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 37a in the game. The display content is not selected as. As a result, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the first initial display for special figures, the second initial display for special figures, and the third for special figures. When any of the initial displays is performed, any of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of operating power this time. It becomes possible to grasp what has been executed.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (a) and FIG. 207 (b), the first display allocation table 391 for special maps and the second display distribution table 392 for special maps respectively. A numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 is set for each of the third initial display data. Since the special display initial display counter 381 is provided in the non-clearing area 372 as in the above-described 58th embodiment, the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped to the main RAM 65 in a situation where it is stopped. If the backup power supply is continued, the numerical value immediately before the operation power supply is stopped without being initialized even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed. The state where the information is stored is maintained. Also, the numerical information of the special display initial display counter 381 is updated in step SC706 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) as in the above-described 58th embodiment.

  In the special display first display distribution table 391, as shown in FIG. 207 (a), the special display initial display counter 381 of "0 to 39" with respect to the first initial display data for special figure. A numerical value range is set, and a numerical value range of the initial display counter 381 for special figures “40 to 54” is set for the second initial display data for special figures, and a third initial value for special figures is set. A numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for a special figure “55 to 59” is set for the display data. That is, in the special display first display distribution table 391, the selection probability of the first initial display data for special figures is 2/3, so that the selection probability is highest, and the second initial display for special figures. When the data selection probability is 1/4, the selection probability is the second highest, and when the selection probability of the third initial display data for the special drawing is 1/12, the selection probability is the lowest.

  In the special display second display distribution table 392, as shown in FIG. 207 (b), the special display initial display counter 381 of “0 to 9” with respect to the first initial display data for special figure is displayed. The numerical range is set, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure “10 to 39” is set for the second initial display data for the special figure, and the third initial value for the special figure is set. A numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure “40 to 59” is set for the display data. That is, in the special display second display distribution table 392, the selection probability is the highest when the selection probability of the second initial display data for special figures is ½, and the third initial display for special figures. When the data selection probability is 1/3, the selection probability is the second highest, and when the selection probability of the first initial display data for the special drawing is 1/6, the selection probability is the lowest.

  Returning to the description of the display start process (FIG. 206), after the process of step SD403 or the process of step SD404 is executed, a lottery process of initial display data for special figures is executed (step SD405). In the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for special figures is acquired. Then, the acquired numeric information is read from the main ROM 64 in step SD403, and the special display first display distribution table 391 is read from the main ROM 64 in step SD404. By comparing with 392, display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first initial display data for special figures, the second initial display data for special figures, and the third initial display data for special figures. select.

  The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD406). By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs initial display corresponding to the display data. That is, when the first initial display data for special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for special figure is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second initial display data for special figure is set, the special figure display unit 37a performs the second initial display for special figure, and the third initial data for special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the third initial display for the special figure is performed by the special figure display unit 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the rising expectation flag of the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD407). When “1” is not set in the rising expectation flag (step SD407: NO), the first display distribution table 393 for general use provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD408), and the rising expectation flag is set. When “1” is set (step SD407: YES), the second display allocation table 394 for ordinary maps provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD409).

  FIG. 207 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display allocation table 393 for ordinary maps, and FIG. 207 (d) is an explanation for explaining the second display allocation table 394 for ordinary maps. FIG. Both the first display distribution table 393 for general maps and the second display distribution table 394 for general maps include initial initial display data for general maps, There are second initial display data and third initial display data for ordinary use.

  The first initial display data for the general map is data for displaying the first initial display for the general map on the general map display unit 38a, and the second initial display data for the general map is the second initial display data for the general map. This is data for displaying the display on the general map display unit 38a, and the third initial display data for general map is data for displaying the third initial display for general map on the general map display unit 38a. The display contents of the first initial display for general maps, the second initial display for general maps, and the third initial display for general maps are different from each other.

  The first initial display data for the universal map, the second initial display data for the universal map, and the third initial display data for the universal map are the universal map control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ), The result of the lottery opening lottery executed by using the universal utility release counter C4 in order to determine whether or not the public utility 34a is in the open state is a losing result and the winning result The display data is not selected in any case. Accordingly, the first initial display for the general map, the second initial display for the general map, and the third initial display for the general map are the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the general map display unit 38a in the variable display time. Is different. Furthermore, the first initial display for the general map, the second initial display for the general map, and the third initial display for the general map are displayed when the variable display is performed on the general map display unit 38a in the variable display time. The display content is not selected as a target. As a result, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the first initial display for the normal map, the second initial display for the normal map, and the third for the normal map when the display on the general map display unit 38a is started. When any of the initial displays is performed, any of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of operating power this time. It becomes possible to grasp what has been executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 207 (c) and 207 (d), the first display allocation table 393 for universal maps and the second display allocation table 394 for universal maps are respectively shown in FIG. The numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for general use is set for each of the third initial display data. Since the initial display counter 382 for ordinary use is provided in the non-clearing area 372 as in the above-described 58th embodiment, the main RAM 63 is supplied to the main RAM 65 in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. If the backup power supply is continued, the numerical value immediately before the operation power supply is stopped without being initialized even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed. The state where the information is stored is maintained. The numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary use is updated at step SC708 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) as in the case of the 58th embodiment.

  In the first display allocation table 393 for ordinary maps, as shown in FIG. 207 (c), the initial display counter 382 for ordinary maps of “0 to 29” for the first initial display data for ordinary maps is displayed. The numerical range is set, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the general map of “30 to 49” is set for the second initial display data for the general map, and the third initial value for the general map is set. The numerical value range of the initial display counter 382 for general use of “50 to 59” is set for the display data. In other words, in the first display allocation table 393 for ordinary maps, the selection probability of the first initial display data for ordinary maps is ½, so that the selection probability is highest, and the second initial display for ordinary maps is used. When the data selection probability is 1/3, the selection probability is the second highest, and when the selection probability of the third initial display data for ordinary use is 1/6, the selection probability is the lowest.

  In the second display allocation table 394 for ordinary maps, as shown in FIG. 207 (d), the initial display counter 382 for ordinary maps of “0 to 19” with respect to the first initial display data for ordinary maps is displayed. The numerical range is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for general maps of “20 to 29” is set for the second initial display data for general maps, and the third initial display for general maps is set. The numerical value range of the initial display counter 382 for general use of “30 to 59” is set for the display data. That is, in the second display allocation table 394 for ordinary maps, the selection probability of the third initial display data for ordinary maps is the highest because the selection probability is 1/2, and the first initial display for ordinary maps is the first. When the data selection probability is 1/3, the second selection probability is the second highest, and when the selection probability of the second initial display data for ordinary use is 1/6, the selection probability is the lowest.

  Returning to the description of the display start process (FIG. 206), after the process of step SD408 or the process of step SD409 is executed, the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary drawing is executed (step SD410). In the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary maps, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary maps is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is read from the main ROM 64 in the step SD408, and the first display distribution table 393 for the normal drawing read from the main ROM 64 in the step SD409. By collating with 394, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first initial display data for general maps, the second initial display data for general maps, and the third initial display data for general maps. select.

  The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the usual map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD411). By performing display control of the general map display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the general map display unit 38a. That is, when the first initial display data for the general map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for the general map is performed in the general map display unit 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second initial display data for the general map is set, the second initial display for the general map is performed in the general map display unit 38a, and the third initial data for the general map is stored in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, a third initial display for a general map is performed in the general map display unit 38a.

  After executing the processing of step SD402 to step SD411, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD412).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SD401 or when the process of step SD412 is executed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD413). . As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b.

  As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to “0” in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, “1” is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 206) executed after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. Thus, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the start processing (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 206), as described above, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is specially displayed. One of the first to third initial display data for use is set, and one of the first to third initial display data for ordinary use is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure display unit are started. The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped in 38a. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 206), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. Is set to “1”, and the display of the special figure display part 37a and the universal figure display part 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD401: YES), the processing from step SD402 to step SD412 is not executed. Accordingly, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Display corresponding to is performed in the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the general map display section 38a.

  As described above in detail, when the first RAM clear process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, or when the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, Since “1” is not set in the display flag 375, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special view display unit 37a and the general view display unit 38a is started, these special features are displayed. Initial display is started in the figure display part 37a and the common figure display part 38a. The initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is that a special ball is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the game start condition is satisfied. This is continued until the variable display starts. The initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the variation of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. In the factory shipping stage, “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375, so that the initial display is started in the special view display unit 37a and the general view display unit 38a.

  Whether the first RAM clear process is executed as described above or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a are displayed. When starting, initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, so that the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a display. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a in the case of starting are confirmed, it is impossible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special-figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the set value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

  On the other hand, when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and a set value greater than the advantage of the set value up to that point is selected in the set value update process (FIG. 205), the special figure display unit 37a. When the special display second display distribution table 392 is selected as the table for determining the initial display to be performed, the set value update process (FIG. 205) is not executed or the set value is updated. If a setting value greater than the advantage of the setting value up to that point has not been selected in the process (FIG. 205), the first special chart display table is used to determine the initial display to be performed by the special figure display unit 37a. A display distribution table 391 is selected. The first display allocation table 391 for special graphics and the second display allocation table 392 for special graphics differ in the selection mode of the initial display. As a result, by confirming the contents of the initial display when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, a set value that is higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point is newly set. It is possible to predict whether or not it has been done.

  Similarly, when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and a set value greater than the advantage of the set value up to that point is selected in the set value update process (FIG. 205), When the second display allocation table 394 for general use is selected as the table for determining the initial display to be displayed on the display unit 38a, whereas the set value update process (FIG. 205) is not executed or In the setting value update process (FIG. 205), if a setting value greater than the advantage of the setting value up to that point has not been selected, the table for determining the initial display to be displayed on the map display unit 38a The first display distribution table 393 is selected. The first display allocation table 393 for normal maps and the second display allocation table 394 for general maps have different initial display selection modes. As a result, by confirming the contents of the initial display when the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the general map display unit 38a is started, a set value that is higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point is newly set. It is possible to predict whether or not it has been done.

  In addition, as described above, it is predicted whether or not a setting value that is higher than the advantage of the setting value up to that point is newly set according to the content of the initial display when the supply of operating power is started and the display is started. There are a plurality of display parts, a special figure display part 37a and a common figure display part 38a, as display parts that can be used. As a result, more judgment materials are available for predicting whether or not a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point has been set, so that the accuracy of the prediction by the player can be increased. .

  In the setting value update process (FIG. 205), when a setting value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the setting value up to that point is set, “1” is set in the rising expectation flag, and the initial display data is drawn for lottery. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the second display allocation table 392 or the second display allocation table 394 for general use is referred to, and is more advantageous than the set values up to that point in the set value update processing (FIG. 205). When the set value is set, “1” is set to the rising expectation flag, and the second display distribution table 392 for special maps or the second display distribution table 394 for general maps is referred to when initial display data is drawn. When the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed, the rising expectation flag is set to “1” regardless of which set value is newly set, and the initial display data is selected by lottery. In Second display sorting table 394 for the second display sorting table 392 or Prussian diagram for JP diagram may be configured to be referenced.

  Further, the initial display data for special figure that can be selected when referring to the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the special figure that can be selected when referring to the second display distribution table 392 for special figures. The initial display data for use in the special display is not limited to the configuration completely matching, and the special display initial display data set in the first display distribution table 391 for special drawing and the special display for special drawing are used. The special display initial display data set in the second display distribution table 392 may not completely match. In this case, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is clearly different depending on whether or not “1” is set to the rising expectation flag in the set value update processing (FIG. 205). Therefore, by confirming the display content of the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of operating power is started, it is clearly specified whether or not a set value greater than the advantage of the set value up to that point has been set. Is possible.

  In addition, special display initial display data common to each of the special display first display distribution table 391 and the special display second display distribution table 392 is set. The first display distribution table 391 and the special display second display distribution table 392 may be configured to include special display initial display data that is not set to the other. In this case, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the special figure set only in the first display distribution table 391 for the special figure is executed in the special figure display unit 37a, the setting up to that point is performed. It is possible to specify that a set value equal to or greater than the value advantage has not been set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the special figure set only in the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure is executed in the special figure display unit 37a, the setting up to that point is performed. It is possible to specify that a set value equal to or greater than the value advantage is set.

  Further, the initial display data for general maps that can be selected when referring to the first display allocation table 393 for general maps and the general map that can be selected when referring to the second display allocation table 394 for general maps. It is not limited to the configuration in which the initial display data for the map is completely coincident, and the initial display data for the common map set in the first display distribution table 393 for the common map and the map for the common map are used. A configuration may be adopted in which the initial display data for general maps set in the second display distribution table 394 does not completely match. In this case, the display content of the general map display section 38a is clearly different depending on whether or not “1” is set in the rising expectation flag in the set value update processing (FIG. 205). Therefore, it is possible to clearly identify whether or not a set value that is higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point has been set by checking the display content of the general map display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started. Is possible.

  Further, although common initial display data is set for each of the first display allocation table 393 for general maps and the second display allocation table 394 for general maps, The first display distribution table 393 and the second display distribution table 394 for general maps may be set to one of the initial display data for general maps that are not set to the other. In this case, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the general map set only in the first display distribution table 393 for the general map is executed in the general map display unit 38a, the setting up to that point is performed. It is possible to specify that a set value equal to or greater than the value advantage has not been set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the general map set only in the second display distribution table 394 for the general map is executed in the general map display unit 38a, the setting up to that point is performed. It is possible to specify that a set value equal to or greater than the value advantage is set.

  Further, the special display initial display data is not limited to the configuration determined by lottery, and the special display initial display data selected when the rising expectation flag is set to “1” is 1. There are only one type of initial display data for special figure selected when “1” is not set in the rising expectation flag, and the initial display data for each special figure is different. It is good also as composition which has. In this case, the display content of the special figure display section 37a differs depending on whether or not a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point has been set.

  In addition, the initial display data for the normal map is not limited to the configuration determined by the lottery. The initial display data for the normal map selected when the rising expectation flag is set to “1” is 1 There is only one type, and only one type of initial display data for a common map is selected when “1” is not set in the rising expectation flag, and the initial display data for each map is different. It is good also as composition which has. In this case, the display content of the general-purpose display unit 38a differs depending on whether or not a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value is set.

63rd Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special-purpose display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those in the 62nd embodiment. In the following, the configuration different from the above 62nd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the 62nd embodiment is omitted.

  FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the display start process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SD501 to step SD514 in the display start processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  When “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD501: NO), a lottery process for initial display is executed (step SD502). In the lottery process for initial display, the same process as step SD402 to step SD411 of the display start process (FIG. 206) in the 62nd embodiment is executed. Thereby, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started as in the above-described 62nd embodiment. In some cases, an initial display is made. Thereafter, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 (step SD503).

  When “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD501: YES), information indicating whether or not a game round is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored. By referring to the storage area, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the game (step SD504). The storage area stores information indicating that the game times are being executed when the game times are started, and information indicating that the game times are being executed when the game times are ended. Erased from the area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the power is stored and held.

  In addition, by referring to a storage area in which information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, the operating power can be increased during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is resumed after the supply of power is stopped (step SD505). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and indicates that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed when the opening / closing execution mode is ended. Information is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the power is stored and held.

  If the previous stop of the supply of operating power is neither during the game play nor during the open / close execution mode (step SD504 and step SD505: NO), the main display 64 displays the first display for special drawing. The minute table 391 is read (step SD506). Then, the lottery process for the initial display data for special drawing is executed (step SD507). In the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for special figures is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated against the first display distribution table 391 for special figures read from the main ROM 64 in step SD506, so that the display data to be displayed this time is used for special figures. The first initial display data, the second initial display data for special graphics, and the third initial display data for special graphics are selected.

  The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD508). By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs initial display corresponding to the display data. That is, when the first initial display data for special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for special figure is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second initial display data for special figure is set, the special figure display unit 37a performs the second initial display for special figure, and the third initial data for special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the third initial display for the special figure is performed by the special figure display unit 37a.

  On the other hand, if the previous stop of the supply of operating power was either during the game round or the open / close execution mode (step SD504 or step SD505: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is Since the display data buffer 271 is not set, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is resumed as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made at step SD504, when an affirmative determination is made at step SD505, or when the process at step SD508 is executed, the fluctuation of the normal map display section 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the display is in progress is stored, the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the variable display of the picture on the normal display unit 38a. It is determined whether or not this situation is present (step SD509). In the storage area, information indicating that the variable display of the pattern is being executed by the general map display unit 38a when the variable display of the pattern is started by the general map display unit 38a is stored. When the variation display of the pattern is terminated, the information indicating that the variation display of the pattern is being executed is deleted from the storage area in the general-purpose display unit 38a. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the power is stored and held.

  Further, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the normal power open state is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is being executed, the normal power open state is being executed. It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been resumed after the supply of operating power has been stopped (step SD510). The storage area stores information indicating that the normal power open state is being executed when the normal power open state is started, and the normal power open state is being executed when the normal power open state is terminated. Information indicating that it exists is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the power is stored and held.

  When the previous stop of the supply of operating power is neither during the execution of the display of the change of the pattern in the normal diagram display unit 38a nor during the execution of the open state of the normal power (step SD509 and step SD510: NO), the main ROM 64 The first display distribution table 393 for ordinary use is read out from (step SD511). Then, the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary use is executed (step SD512). In the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary maps, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary maps is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary maps read from the main ROM 64 in step SD511, so that the display data to be displayed this time is The first initial display data, the second initial display data for ordinary drawings, and the third initial display data for ordinary drawings are selected.

  The display data selected in the initial display data lottery process for ordinary maps is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD513). By performing display control of the general map display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the general map display unit 38a. That is, when the first initial display data for the general map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for the general map is performed in the general map display unit 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second initial display data for the general map is set, the second initial display for the general map is performed in the general map display unit 38a, and the third initial data for the general map is stored in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, a third initial display for a general map is performed in the general map display unit 38a.

  On the other hand, when the previous stop of the supply of operating power was either during the execution of the pattern change display in the ordinary figure display unit 38a or during the execution of the ordinary power open state (step SD509 or step SD510: YES), Since the initial display data for ordinary use is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. . Therefore, when the display on the general map display unit 38a is started, the display content of the general map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is resumed.

  When the process of step SD503 is executed, when an affirmative determination is made at step SD509, when an affirmative determination is made at step SD510, or when the process of step SD513 is executed, the area to be cleared of the work area 221 for specific control “1” is set to the display start flag provided in 371 (step SD514). As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b.

  As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to “0” in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure hold display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure hold display part 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, “1” is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 202) executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. Thus, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure hold display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure hold display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the start processing (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display unit 37a, special figure hold display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, and general figure hold display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 202), the first display data buffer 271 stores the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process in the main process (FIG. 185) as already described. In some cases, initial display data for special drawing is set, and initial display data for general drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure display unit are started. The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped in 38a. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 208), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. Is set to “1”, and display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

  According to the above configuration, even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the operating power is supplied. When the stopped state is neither during the execution of the game times nor during execution of the opening / closing execution mode, when the display is started in the special figure display part 37a, the special figure display part 37a is initially set Display starts. In addition, even when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the supply of the operating power is stopped When the display is started in the general map display unit 38a, when the display is started in the general map display unit 38a. Initial display is started in the section 38a. As described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the second RAM clear process of the first RAM clear process or the set value update process are executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223). Initial display is performed in the common map display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are performed. It becomes possible not to specify that either one has been executed.

  In addition, when the initial display is performed in the special display unit 37a and the general display unit 38a when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed, the special display is performed in the lottery process of the initial display data. The first display distribution table 391 for general use and the first display distribution table 393 for general use are referred to. As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and only when a set value that is greater than the advantage of the previous set value is newly set, the initial display data lottery process is performed. It is possible to refer to the second display distribution table 392 and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary drawings. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that it is not possible to specify that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed as described above, the supply of the operating power is started and the special figure display unit By confirming the contents of the initial display when the display of 37a and the general map display unit 38a is started, it is predicted to the player whether or not a set value that is more than the advantage of the set value so far is set. It becomes possible to make it.

  On the other hand, the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the game times or the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, and the first RAM is provided in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of operating power. When the clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed, when the display is started in the special figure display part 37a, the special figure display part is set so that the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is obtained. The display 37a is controlled. In addition, the state in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal diagram display unit 38a or during the execution of the open state of the normal power, and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201) When the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in step SC223), the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped when the display is started in the general-purpose display unit 38a. The general-purpose display unit 38a is controlled so that As a result, when the supply of operating power is resumed and the gaming situation immediately before the stopping of the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 37a and the ordinary game are displayed in a manner corresponding to the resumption of the gaming situation. The display of the figure display unit 38a can be started.

<64th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the game execution content is different from that of the above-mentioned 56th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned fifty-sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  An inner rail portion 401 and an outer rail portion 402 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning portion 411, a first operating portion 412, a second operating portion 413, a through winning portion 414, a distribution winning device 415, a special prize winning device 416, a variable display unit 421, a special figure unit 422, and a general figure. Units 423 and the like are provided. A total of four general winning portions 411 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

  Even if a game ball enters the through winning portion 414, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, if a game ball enters any of the general winning unit 411, the first operating unit 412, the second operating unit 413, the distribution winning device 415, and the special electricity winning device 416, the player can use the ball. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out in order to increase the number of game media. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when a game ball enters the general winning portion 411, 10 game balls are paid out, and the game ball enters the first operating portion 412. When a game ball is generated, three game balls are paid out. When a game ball enters the second actuating portion 413, one game ball is paid out, and a prize distribution device is provided. When a game ball enters 415, 15 game balls are paid out. When a game ball enters the special electricity prize device 416, the game ball enters the distribution prize device 415. The same 15 game balls are paid out as when the balls are generated.

  As will be described later, the distribution winning device 415 is provided with a discharge passage region 445b and a V winning passage region 445c. One of the areas 445c will be passed, but the same number (specifically, 15) of game balls will be paid out regardless of which of the discharge path area 445b and V winning path area 445c passes. Is done. Further, the number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the first actuating unit 412 and the second actuating part 413 may be the same. The configuration may be greater or less than the number of prize balls of the device 416.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. The game board 24 is provided with a number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to appropriately distribute and adjust the falling direction of the game ball.

  A variable display unit 421 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 421 projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game balls launched into the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 421, and a lower area than the variable display unit 421 that is continuous below the upper area PA1. A left area PA2 that is a left area, a right area PA3 that is continuous to the upper area PA1 and below the variable display unit 421, and a left area PA2 and a right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 which is continuous below and below the variable display unit 421.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount within a first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the game ball is moved to the left of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. Run down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the left area PA2, and the lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, in the upper area PA1, on the right side of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the launch operation device 28, and the right area A game can be played so that a game ball flows down on PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4.

  The first operating part 412 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating part 412 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating part 412 is provided. In a situation where game balls are being fired in the same manner, the winning probability to the first operating unit 412 is constant without depending on the game state. In other words, the first operating unit 412 can always enter a game ball that flows down the game area PA toward the first operating unit 412. The first operating unit 412 is a game ball that is disposed directly below the stage 421a formed in the variable display unit 421 and flows into the stage 421a through a guide passage formed in the variable display unit 421. The game balls discharged from the center of the stage 421a in the lateral direction to the outside of the variable display unit 421 are easy to win the first operating unit 412. The first operating part 412 is provided with a detection sensor 412a, and the detection sensor 412a detects a game ball won in the first operating part 412. The detection sensor 412a is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the detection sensor 412a, the presence or absence of winning in the first operating unit 412 is specified by the main CPU 63.

  As described above, the first operating part 412 is provided in the lower area PA4. On the upstream side of the first operating part 412 toward the right area PA3, a game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is first. A restricting nail 24 c is provided so as to make it impossible to reach the first operating portion 412. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 421a is provided for the left area PA2, and is not provided for the right area PA3. With these configurations, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the first operating unit 412 can be won, but the game ball flows down the right area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, the first operating unit 412 cannot be awarded. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls flow down the right area PA3 because the regulation nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 421a is provided in the right area PA3. Even if the firing operation device 28 is being operated, the first operating unit 412 may be awarded.

  The 2nd operation part 413 is installed in right area PA3. In other words, the second operating unit 413 cannot win when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is being operated.

  The configuration of the second operating unit 413 will be described with reference to FIG. 210 (a). FIG. 210A is a longitudinal sectional view of the second operating portion 413 in the non-induction state. The second operating unit 413 includes a base unit 431 in which a discharge passage 433 for discharging the game ball flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 is formed, and a discharge ball 433 for the game ball flowing down the game area PA. And a guiding unit 432 for guiding to The inlet portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 has an opening area equal to or larger than one game ball, and is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 434 is provided on the outlet portion 433b side of the discharge passage 433, and the game ball won in the second operating portion 413 is detected by the detection sensor 434. The detection sensor 434 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the detection sensor 434, the presence or absence of winning in the second operating unit 413 is specified by the main CPU 63.

  The guide unit 432 receives a game ball flowing down from the front area of the entrance portion 433a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 433, and into the discharge passage 433. The guide drive unit 436 for displacing the guide member 435 between the initial position where the game ball cannot be guided and the guide position where the guidance is enabled, and the guide member 435 are disposed at the initial position In the state where the guide ball 435 is disposed at the guiding position and the guide member 435 is disposed at the guide position, the non-blocking position where the flow of the game ball into the discharge path 433 is not blocked. A blocking member 437. The guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction so that the guide member 435 is located below. A transmission unit 438 is provided so as to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 436 to the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437.

  When the guide driving unit 436 is in a non-driven state, the guide member 435 is disposed at the initial position and the blocking member 437 is disposed at the blocking position by a biasing force of a biasing unit such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 433 and do not protrude into the game area PA. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the inlet portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 433 by the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437, that is, the game ball is second The game area PA flows downward without entering the operating portion 413. Further, since the blocking member 437 is disposed at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 is less than one game ball. Thereby, in the situation where the guide member 435 is disposed at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second operating portion 413.

  When the guide driving unit 436 is in the driving state, the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, so that the guide member 435 is disposed at the guiding position and the blocking member 437 is non-blocking. Located in the blocking position. FIG. 210 (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion 413 in the induction state.

  When the guide member 435 is disposed at the guide position, the distal end side of the guide member 435 protrudes from the inlet portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 to the game area PA side. The amount of protrusion is such that a game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 433a in the game area PA can be received from below. The top surface of the guide member 435 has an upper surface inclined downward toward the inlet 433a of the discharge passage 433, so that the game ball received from below on the front end side of the guide member 435 can be obtained from the guide member 435. The upper surface rolls and is guided into the discharge passage 433. Further, when the blocking member 437 is disposed at the non-blocking position, the blocking member 437 is displaced so that the tip portion is positioned above the blocking position, so that the game rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 435. The sphere flows into the discharge passage 433 without interfering with the blocking member 437. As a result, when the guide drive unit 436 is in the drive state, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance part 433a in the game area PA enters the second operating part 413. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the guide driving unit 436 is in the non-driven state, the guide member 435 is disposed at the initial position, and the blocking member 437 is disposed at the blocking position. A state in which the guide driving unit 436 is in the driving state, the guide member 435 is disposed in the guiding position, and the blocking member 437 is disposed in the non-blocking position is referred to as the guiding state of the guiding unit 432 or the second operating unit. This is referred to as an open state 413.

  The second operating portion 413 includes a cover member 439 provided so as to face the inlet portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 439 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a passage portion 439a in the vertical direction in a region in front of the entrance portion 433a in the game area PA. It is provided to restrict the movement of the game ball to the front and the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 while limiting the number of the game balls. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 433 of the second operating part 413 when the guiding unit 432 of the second operating part 413 is in the guiding state, It is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front area of the inlet portion 433a into the discharge passage 433 in the guide state. The guide drive unit 436 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the guide drive unit 436.

  As shown in FIG. 209, a through winning portion 414 is provided above the second operating portion 413 in the right region PA3. In other words, the through winning portion 414 cannot receive a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation device so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when 28 is operated. The through winning portion 414 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. In addition, a second operating unit 413 is provided at a position vertically below the through winning unit 414. Further, in the right region PA3, a special electric prize winning device 416 and a distribution winning device are arranged downstream of the second operating unit 413. 415 is provided. Therefore, it is possible for the game ball that has won the through winning portion 414 to win the second operating portion 413, the special electricity winning device 416, or the distribution winning device 415.

  The right area PA3 in which the second actuating part 413 and the through prize winning part 414 are collectively arranged is defined by a side wall 421b that bulges ahead of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 in the variable display unit 421. In addition, the right side is defined by a restriction wall that is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24. The right-side area PA3 is set to have a smaller horizontal dimension than the lower area PA4, and the horizontal dimension is such that it is impossible to line up the game ball entry devices in the horizontal direction at the same height position. It has become. This makes it possible to limit the flow trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 to a predetermined range, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the second operating portion 413 and the through winning portion 414. .

  In the right region PA3, the arrangement of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through winning portion 414 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right region PA3 to the through winning portion 414. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is easy to enter the through winning portion 414, and easily enters the second operating portion 413 along with the easy entry into the through winning portion 414. Yes. The through winning portion 414 is provided with a detection sensor 414a, and the detection sensor 414a detects a game ball won in the through winning portion 414. The detection sensor 414a is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Based on the detection result of the detection sensor 414a, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning in the through winning portion 414.

  Based on the winning in the through winning portion 414, the guiding unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is switched from the non-inducing state to the guiding state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning in the through winning portion 414 as a trigger, and a general-purpose display portion of the general-purpose unit 423 provided in the lower left corner of the game area PA where a game ball does not pass. At 423a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning in the guidance execution state, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and when the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 423a is finished, the state shifts to the guidance execution state. In the guidance execution state, the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state in a predetermined manner.

  The general-purpose display unit 423a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 424 in the general-purpose display unit 423a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the general-purpose display unit 423a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the general map display unit 423a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 423, a universal map hold display section 423b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 423a. The number of game balls won in the through winning portion 414 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the ordinary reservation display portion 423b. The universal map display unit 423a and the universal map hold display unit 423b are electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 executes display control of the universal map display unit 423a and the universal map hold display unit 423b. Is done.

  Incidentally, the display range of the general-purpose display unit 423a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 424. Furthermore, the display range for both the universal symbol display unit 423a and the universal symbol hold display unit 423b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 424. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the player's degree of attention to the symbol display device 424 more than the general symbol display unit 423a and the general diagram hold display unit 423b.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of modes are set as support modes so that the frequency of occurrence of the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 is different. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency at which the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state per unit time when compared with the game area PA in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in a similar manner is relative. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so as to be high and low.

  The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode have the same probability (specifically, 4/5) that the induction state is won in the induction state lottery based on the game ball entering the through winning portion 414. However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state when the guidance state is selected is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and guidance is performed in one guidance control execution time. The upper limit induction period in which the unit 432 is maintained in the induction state is set to be long. In this case, when the induction state is won in the high frequency support mode and the induction state of the induction unit 432 occurs a plurality of times, the closing period from the end of one induction state to the start of the next induction state is It is set to be shorter than one upper limit induction period. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is less than the low-frequency support mode, and the minimum reserved time (ie, the normal map display section) after the next guidance state lottery is performed after the first guidance state lottery is performed. The display continuation time of one picture variation display at 423a) is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operating unit 413 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating unit 412 than in the second operating unit 413, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than in the first operating unit 412. The probability of winning a prize in the section 413 increases. When a prize is awarded to the second operating unit 413, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of held balls. Can do.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high-frequency support mode is in the guided state per unit time higher than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the guided state winning in the guided state lottery It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of becoming high. Also, a secured time (for example, executed in the normal display unit 423a based on winning to the through winning portion 414) secured after the next guiding state lottery is performed after the next guiding state lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of variable display times) are prepared, even in the high frequency support mode, even if the short reservation time is easily selected or the average reservation time is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode. Good. Furthermore, the number of executions of the guidance state is increased, the upper limit induction period is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next guidance state lottery is performed after one guidance state lottery is performed is shortened. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode is increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability. Good.

  A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize for the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. When the winning lottery is performed, the special figure unit 422 displays the change of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the winning lottery result is displayed.

  The special figure unit 422 is provided at a lower right corner of the game area PA at a position where the game ball does not flow down the front. The special figure unit 422 is provided at a position where the front door frame 14 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 even when the front door frame 14 is in the closed position. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can visually check the display contents of the various display units 425 to 429 provided in the special figure unit 422 without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine body 12 and the opening operation of the front door frame 14. It becomes.

  FIG. 209 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special figure unit 422. Specifically, the special figure unit 422 is provided with a first special figure display unit 425 and a second special figure display unit 426. In the first special figure display unit 425, a winning lottery is performed based on the fact that the first operating unit 412 has been won, thereby displaying a variation of the pattern, and finally displaying a result corresponding to the lottery result. Is done. In addition, in the second special figure display unit 426, a winning lottery is performed based on the winning of the second operating unit 413, so that a variation display of the pattern is performed, and finally the result corresponding to the lottery result Is displayed. The display of the variation of the picture is started in either the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, and the display of the fluctuation of the pattern is terminated after displaying a predetermined result. Equivalent to times.

  The first special figure display unit 425 includes seven display segments 425a. Each of these display segments 425a is formed in a bar shape, and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 425a are arranged so that the first special figure display unit 425 is a so-called seven-segment display. The first special figure display unit 425 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinction of the display segments 425a. Although it is impossible to perform complicated display like the symbol display device 424 in the first special figure display unit 425, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the first special figure display unit 425. .

  The display segments 425a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 425a may be arranged in a linear shape or a circular shape. In addition, the first special figure display unit 425 may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the first special figure display unit 425, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types A configuration in which the color of the image is displayed is conceivable.

  The second special figure display unit 426 includes seven display segments 426a. Each of these display segments 426a is formed in a bar shape, and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 426a are arranged so that the second special figure display unit 426 becomes a so-called 7-segment display. The second special figure display unit 426 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinction of the display segments 426a. Although it is impossible to perform complicated display like the symbol display device 424 in the second special figure display unit 426, it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the second special figure display unit 426. .

  The display segments 426a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 426a may be arranged in a linear shape or a circular shape. In addition, the second special figure display unit 426 may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the second special figure display unit 426, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types A configuration in which the color of the image is displayed is considered.

  In the special figure unit 422, a first special figure holding display part 427 is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display part 425. The maximum number of game balls won in the first operating unit 412 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first special figure reservation display unit 427 is turned on. Further, a second special figure holding display part 428 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display part 426. The maximum number of game balls won in the second operating unit 413 is reserved, and the number of reserved game balls is displayed when the second special figure reservation display unit 428 is turned on. The first special figure hold display section 427 and the second special figure hold display section 428 are electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the first special figure hold display section 427 and the second special figure are displayed by the main CPU 63. Display control of the hold display unit 428 is executed.

  In the special figure unit 422, a special display part 429 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display part 426. When the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity winning device 416 is opened is started, the special display unit 429 is controlled so as to be in a predetermined display state, and the opening / closing execution mode is ended and a new game is started. In such a case, the special display unit 429 is controlled to display so that the predetermined display state ends and the light is turned off.

  The special display unit 429 includes seven display segments 429a. Each of these display segments 429a is formed in a bar shape and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 429a are arranged so that the special display portion 429 is a so-called 7-segment display. The special display unit 429 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinction of the display segments 429a. Although it is impossible to perform complicated display like the symbol display device 424 in the special display unit 429, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the special display unit 429.

  Note that the display segments 429a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 429a may be arranged in a straight line shape or a circular shape. In addition, the special display unit 429 may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. The contents displayed on the special display unit 429 include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. The displayed configuration can be considered.

  The display range of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 424. In addition, the display range of the entire first special figure display unit 425, second special figure display unit 426, first special figure hold display unit 427, second special figure hold display unit 428, and special display unit 429 is also displayed as a symbol. The range is narrower than the display surface of the device 424. Thereby, the game to the symbol display device 424 rather than the 1st special figure display part 425, the 2nd special figure display part 426, the 1st special figure reservation display part 427, the 2nd special figure reservation display part 428, and the special display part 429. It becomes possible to raise the attention level of the person.

  When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, that is, when the game times are being executed, the symbol display device 424 provided in the variable display unit 421 adjusts accordingly. The display effect is performed. In addition, in the symbol display device 424, not only the display effect triggered by winning the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413, but also the display effect during the opening / closing execution mode that shifts to after a big hit result or the like A display effect or the like during the sort execution mode that shifts after the small hit result is obtained. In the opening / closing execution mode, the distribution execution mode, and the high frequency support mode, a right-handed notification image for notifying that the game ball should be launched aiming at the right area PA3 is displayed on the symbol display device 424. .

  The symbol display device 424 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 82. Note that the symbol display device 424 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display surface such as a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  The contents of the display effect performed by the symbol display device 424 during the game times will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the symbol display device 424 when game times are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (a), on the display surface of the symbol display device 424, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. That is, when the game times are executed, the variation display of the symbols is performed using the entire display surface of the symbol display device 424.

  FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram for explaining main symbols and sub-designs that are variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As shown in FIG. 212 (a) to FIG. 212 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers “1” to “9”, and a shell-shaped design. It is comprised by the sub-pattern which consists of. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (b), nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and a sub symbol is 1 between each main symbol. It is arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. In the symbol display device 424, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. As a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the symbol display device 424 has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. .

  When symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display surface based on winning in the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Basically, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It ends with. Also, when the symbol variation display ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a 15R jackpot result to be described later, a combination of “7” symbols is formed on one of the active lines, and the result of the internal lottery will be described later. If the result is a 6R jackpot result, a combination of the same odd symbols other than the “7” symbol is formed on any active line, and the result of the internal lottery is one of the first to third small hit results to be described later If it is, the same even symbol combination is formed on one of the effective lines.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the symbol variation display is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, an expected effect is set as a display effect of the symbol display device 424 when the game times are executed. The expected effect is a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 424, and the display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be a jackpot result. Say. Two types of expectation effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of a reach display or a jackpot result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the same type of symbols for the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the remaining middle symbols in that state The display state in which the symbol variation display is performed in the column Z2 is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. If the game number is a jackpot result or a small hit result, the same type of symbols as the symbols forming the combination of the reach symbols are stopped on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2, and the jackpot results and the small hit results are displayed. If the game times are none, a different type of symbols from the symbols forming the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2.

  In the notice display, in a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or a part of the symbol columns Z1 to Z1. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in Z3, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  When either the 6R jackpot result or the 15R jackpot result is selected in the internal lottery executed based on the winning to the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are completed. Later, the mode changes to the opening / closing execution mode. In the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to win a special electric prize winning device 416. As shown in FIG. 209, the special prize winning device 416 is provided at a position below the second operating unit 413 and above the sorting prize winning device 415 in the right region PA3. In other words, the special electric prize winning device 416 cannot receive a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation device so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when 28 is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 209, the special electric prize winning device 416 includes a large winning opening 416a formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough, and a closed state in which a gaming ball cannot pass through the large winning opening 416a. And a special electric side opening / closing member 416b for switching to an open state in which a game ball can pass. The special electric side opening / closing member 416b is opened by being driven by a special electric drive unit 416c through a link mechanism (not shown). The special electricity prize winning device 416 has a game ball passage so that the big prize opening 416a becomes an entrance portion, and a game ball that has flowed into the game ball passage through the big prize opening 416a is a special electricity prize detection sensor provided in the game ball passage. After being detected by 416d, it is discharged to the rear of the game board 24. The special electric prize detection sensor 416d is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a special electric prize apparatus 416 has been awarded based on the detection result of the special electric prize detection sensor 416d. The special electric drive unit 416c is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the special electric drive unit 416c.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, a round game is executed a plurality of times (specifically, 5, 6, 8, 14, or 16 times). The round game is continued until one of the conditions in which the number of opening / closing of the special electric prize device 416 reaches the upper limit and the predetermined number of gaming balls to win the special electric prize device 416 is satisfied. It is a game to play. In the present embodiment, the special prize winning device 416 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the open duration in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Further, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric prize winning device 416 is set to ten. In the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Is set to a time longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit winning number of one round game. Therefore, it can be expected that more than the maximum number of game balls will be awarded to the special electricity prize winning device 416 in each round game.

  When any one of the first small hit result to the third small hit result is selected in the internal lottery executed based on the winning to the second operating unit 413, after the game times corresponding to the small hit result are finished Move to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, winning to the distribution winning device 415 is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 209, the distribution winning device 415 is provided at a position below the special electricity winning device 416 in the right area PA3. In other words, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the allocation winning device 415 cannot win, and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is being operated.

  The configuration of the distribution winning device 415 will be described with reference to FIG. 213 in addition to FIG. FIG. 213 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the sorting and winning device 415.

  As shown in FIG. 209, the distribution winning device 415 includes a distribution inlet 441 that is large enough to allow a game ball to pass therethrough, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the distribution inlet 441 and a game. A distribution-side opening / closing member 442 that switches to an open state in which a ball can pass is provided. The distribution side opening / closing member 442 is opened by being driven by a distribution inlet drive unit 443 through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution inlet drive unit 443 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the distribution inlet drive unit 443.

  As shown in FIG. 213, the game ball that has won the distribution entrance 441 is led to a branch passage 445 formed in the base body 444 of the distribution winning apparatus 415. The branch passage 445 includes an upstream passage region 445a that is set so that the passage direction is inclined downward in the lateral direction from the entrance portion of the branch passage 445 to the middle position of the branch passage 445, and the upstream passage region 445a. A discharge passage area 445b that is continuous with the downstream end of the discharge passage and is set so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and is branched from a midway position of the discharge passage area 445b, and is played on a different side from the discharge passage area 445b. V winning path area 445c for guiding the ball. In this case, the upstream passage region 445a has a dimension in a direction orthogonal to the passage direction that is equal to or greater than one game ball and less than two game balls, and therefore is in a direction orthogonal to the passage direction. The game balls are prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 445a in a state where a plurality of game balls are arranged. Therefore, a plurality of game balls are prevented from reaching the branch position to the V winning path area 445c in the discharge path area 445b at the same time.

  A switching piece 446 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the discharge path area 445b to the V prize path area 445c is provided at a branch point of the discharge path area 445b to the V prize path area 445c. The switching piece 446 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning award passage region 445c with respect to the discharge passage region 445b in the base body 444, and is retracted as a whole outside the discharge passage region 445b. It can be displaced between the position and the V guide position protruding into the discharge passage area 445b. The driving force of the switching drive unit 447 is transmitted to the switching piece 446 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 447 is in the non-driven state, the switching piece 446 is disposed at the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and the switching drive unit 447 is in the driving state. The switching piece 446 is displaced against the urging force and disposed at the V guide position. The switching drive unit 447 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the switching drive unit 447.

  When the switching piece 446 is disposed at the retracted position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch path 445 flows down the discharge path area 445b without being guided to the V winning path area 445c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the count detection sensor 448 provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 446 in the discharge passage area 445b. The count detection sensor 448 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the presence or absence of detection of the game ball in the count detection sensor 448 is specified by the main CPU 63 based on the detection result of the count detection sensor 448.

  On the other hand, when the switching piece 446 is disposed at the V guide position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 445 is received from below by the switching piece 446. The upper surface of the switching piece 446 in the state where it is arranged at the V guide position is inclined downward toward the V winning path area 445c. Thereby, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 446 flows into the V winning path area 445c by its own weight, and flows down through the V winning path area 445c. Then, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 provided in the V winning path area 445c and then discharged to the rear of the game board 24. The V winning detection sensor 449 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a game ball passes through the V winning path area 445c based on the detection result of the V winning detection sensor 449. Is done.

  When the distribution-side opening / closing member 442 is in the open state, the period in which the distribution-side opening / closing member 442 is opened is constant at 10 seconds, which is a period longer than the game ball firing cycle, and in the distribution execution mode. The upper limit number of game balls that can enter the winning device 415 is 10 and is fixed. Further, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 reaches the position of the sorting side opening / closing member 442 unless it enters the second operating unit 413 or the special electricity prize winning device 416 on the way. Then, if the game ball is continuously discharged so that the game ball flows down toward the distribution prize device 415 when the distribution side opening / closing member 442 is opened, the upper limit is set to the distribution prize device 415. It is possible to win more than the number of game balls won.

  On the other hand, the switching piece 446 is disposed from the retracted position to the V guide position at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the timing at which the distribution side opening / closing member 442 is opened, and then moved to the V guide position for 12 seconds. Retained. When 12 seconds have elapsed, the V guide position returns to the retracted position. In this case, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player as described above, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Therefore, at the timing when the switching piece 446 is arranged at the V guide position, the number of winnings to the allocation winning device 415 has not yet reached the upper limit winning number of the allocation execution mode, and the allocation side opening / closing member 442 An open state is maintained. Further, as described above, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 reaches the position of the sorting-side opening / closing member 442 unless it enters the second operating part 413 or the special electricity prize winning device 416 on the way. Accordingly, if the game ball is continuously fired so that the game ball flows down toward the distribution winning device 415 when the distribution side opening / closing member 442 is opened, the distribution side opening / closing member 442 The switching piece 446 is arranged at the V guide position at the timing when the game ball that has won the distribution winning device 415 reaches the position of the switching piece 446 after two seconds have passed since the release state. Therefore, in the allocation execution mode, the game ball is basically detected by the V winning detection sensor 449.

  Whether the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 448 or the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449, the same number of winning balls corresponding to the distribution winning device 415 are paid out. Is done. In addition, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in the distribution execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the allocation execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 449, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various counter information in the game to perform winning occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display units 425 and 426, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 424, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 423a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, as shown in FIG. 214, a winning random number counter C1 used for winning lottery, a type counter C2 used for determining a big hit type and a small hit type, and a symbol display Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the device 424 fluctuates and fluctuates, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the hit random number counter C1, special figure display units 425 and 426, and symbol display device 424 And a variation type counter CS that determines the display duration of the game times. Further, the utility utility release counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the guidance unit 432 of the second operation unit 413 is in the guidance execution state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is a special figure reservation area provided in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413 occurs. 451 is stored. The special figure reservation area 451 includes a first special figure reservation area 452, a second special figure reservation area 453, and a special drawing execution area 454.

  The first special figure holding area 452 includes a first area 452a, a second area 452b, a third area 452c, and a fourth area 452d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 452a to 452d as the hold information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d, the first area 452a → the second area 452b → the third area 452c → the third area 452d when a winning to the first operating unit 412 occurs continuously several times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the four areas 452d. By providing the four areas 452a to 452d as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating unit 412 are held and stored. The number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The second special figure holding area 453 includes a first area 453a, a second area 453b, a third area 453c, and a fourth area 453d, and a winning random number counter C1, according to the winning history to the second operating unit 413, Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 453a to 453d as the hold information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d, the first area 453a → the second area 453b → the third area 453c → the second area when the winning to the second operating unit 413 occurs continuously a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the four areas 453d. By providing the four areas 453a to 453d as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the second operating unit 413 are stored on hold. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The special figure execution area 454 is an area for storing the hold information to be subjected to determination of whether or not the special figure is appropriate and the type when the variable display is started in any of the special figure display units 425 and 426. It is. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 425 is started, the hold information stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure hold area 452 is moved to the special figure execution area 454. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 426 is started, the hold information stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure hold area 453 is moved to the execution area 454 for special figures. In the following description, the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 452 and the hold information moved from the first special figure hold area 452 to the special drawing execution area 454 are held on the first special figure side. The hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 453 and the hold information moved from the second special figure hold area 453 to the special drawing execution area 454 are referred to as hold information on the second special figure side. .

  The information corresponding to the general electric utility release counter C4 is stored in the general figure holding area 455 provided in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the through winning portion 414 occurs. The reserved map area 455 includes a first area 455a, a second area 455b, a third area 455c, and a fourth area 455d. According to the winning history to the through winning portion 414, the common utility release counter C4 is provided. Is stored in one of the areas 455a to 455d as the hold information on the normal side. In this case, in the first area 455a to the fourth area 455d, the first area 455a → the second area 455b → the third area 455c → the fourth when the winning to the through winning portion 414 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the area 455d. By providing the four areas 455a to 455d in this way, up to four game ball winning histories to the through winning portion 414 are held and stored. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the ordinary map reservation area 455 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be two, three, five or more, and the like. It may be.

  In the common map holding area 455, an execution area 456 for general maps is provided. In the execution area 456 for the general map, when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 423a, the hold information of the target for performing the guidance state lottery for determining whether or not the guidance unit 432 is set to the guidance state is displayed. The area to be stored. Specifically, when the variable display of the general map display unit 423a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 455a of the general map hold area 455 is moved to the execution area 456 for general maps.

  The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 will be described in detail.

  First, the general electric utility release counter C4 will be described. The general electric utility release counter C4 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 250 and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general-purpose holding area 455 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball wins the through winning portion 414. Then, at a predetermined timing, a guidance state lottery for determining whether to control the guidance unit 432 to the guidance state based on the stored value of the utility utility release counter C4 is performed. As described above, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set as the support mode of the guidance unit 432 (that is, the support mode of the second operation unit 413), and the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 (the second operation unit 413) Is controlled in a manner corresponding to the type of support mode at that time.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 9999, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. Then, using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1, a determination process is performed.

  The random number value that is won in the determination process is stored in the main ROM 64 as a determination table. As the success / failure table, there is provided a success / failure table 461 for the first special figure corresponding to the hold information on the first special figure side, and a success / failure table for the second special figure corresponding to the hold information on the second special figure side. 462 is provided. Also, in this embodiment, as the success / failure lottery mode, there are not a plurality of types of modes in which the probability of being a jackpot result is different, but the probability of being a jackpot result is constant if the same setting value is used. One mode is set.

  FIG. 215 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table 461 of the first special figure, and FIG. 215 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table 462 of the second special figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), there are a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result as the success / failure results of the success / failure determination process. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special prize winning apparatus 416 is controlled to open / close, and can also serve as the transition trigger for the support mode. The small hit result is an opportunity to shift to the distribution execution mode in which the distribution winning device 415 is controlled to open and close, and when the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, it is an opportunity to shift to the opening / closing execution mode and the support mode. On the other hand, if a V prize is not generated in the distribution execution mode, the result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the switching between the opening / closing execution mode and the support mode. The detachment result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and the distribution execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition for the support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (a), in the first special figure's success / failure table 461, as a result of the success / failure determination process, a big hit result and a miss result are set, but no small hit result is set. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of an outlier result. Is set to

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the setting value “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of losing 9950 is set as the number of. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number counter that is a result of losing The number of numerical information of C1 is set to 9948. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value one level higher than “setting 2”, is set with 54 hitting random number counters C1 as numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, and a hit random number counter that results in a loss result. 9946 is set as the number of numerical information of C1. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 3”, is set to 56 as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number counter that is a result of losing 9944 numbers are set as the number of numerical information of C1. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and a hit random number counter that is a result of losing 9942 are set as the number of numerical information of C1. In addition, 60 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, and as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of losing 9940 are set.

  That is, in “Setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is 1/200. In “Setting 2”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is about 1/192. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is about 1/185. In “Setting 4”, the probability of having a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is about 1/179. In “Setting 5”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is about 1/172. In “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is about 1/167. Note that the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result may be set so as to be serial numbers, and at least a part or all of the numerical information is set to be distributed so as not to be serial numbers. It is good also as composition which has.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (b), a jackpot result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the judgment results of the judgment processing in the second special figure. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of an outlier result. Is set to On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of small hit 2000 is set as the number of information, and 7950 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of the losing. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 2000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 7948 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is the result of losing. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 2”, is set with 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 2000 is set as the number of the numerical information of the counter C1, and 7946 is set as the number of the numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value one level higher than “setting 3”, is set with 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit result, and the hit random number that is the small hit result 2000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 7944 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the hit result 2000 is set as the number of the numerical information of the counter C1, and 7942 is set as the number of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of the losing. In addition, 60 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of the small hit 2000 is set, and 7940 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing.

  That is, in “Setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result with the hold information on the second special figure side as a trigger is 1/200 that is the same as the probability of a jackpot result with the hold information on the first special figure side as a trigger. In “Setting 2”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is approximately 1/192 that is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1/185 that is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. In “Setting 4”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1/179 which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. In “Setting 5”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1/172, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. In “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1/167, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side.

  The probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is 1/5 which is the same for any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. The probability of the small hit result is higher than the probability of the big hit result in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Note that the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result may be set so as to be serial numbers, and at least a part or all of the numerical information is set to be distributed so as not to be serial numbers. It is good also as composition which has. Further, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit result may be set so as to be a sequential number, and at least a part or all of the numerical information may be set so as not to be a sequential number. It is good also as composition which has.

  As described above, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the jackpot result will be higher if the hold information on the first special figure side is the trigger or the hold information on the second special figure side is the trigger. By being set, the higher the set value, the more advantageous for the player. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode is a period in which the amount of increase in the player's ball per unit time is the largest, and the probability of the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode varies according to the set value, It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

  Thus, in the configuration in which the probability of the big hit result varies according to the set value, the probability of the big hit result is the same for any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. As a result, it is possible to limit the target that the player pays attention to in order to estimate the set value to the jackpot result, making it difficult to estimate the set value.

  Further, in the success / failure table 462 of the second special figure, the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result is larger than the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result regardless of the set value. In the configuration in which the number of pieces of numerical information is larger, the variation due to the set value of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the jackpot result is the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result. Is absorbed by fluctuations in the number of From this point, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value.

  Next, the type counter C2 will be described. The type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 29, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. Then, a type determination process is performed using the stored value of the type counter C2.

  The type determination process using the type counter C2 is performed in each of a case where a big hit result and a small hit result are obtained in the success / failure determination process. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of big hit results are set, and a plurality of types of small hit results are set. When the jackpot result is selected in the determination process, the jackpot result type is selected using the jackpot type table 463 and the type counter C2 stored in advance in the main ROM 64. When a small hit result is selected in the determination process, the type of the small hit result is selected using the small hit type table 464 and the type counter C2 stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. Hereinafter, the types of jackpot results and types of jackpot results will be described.

  216 (a) is referred to in order to sort the types of jackpot results when a jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the type table 463 for jackpots. FIG. 216 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a plurality of types of jackpot results.

  The jackpot type table 463 is referred to when a jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process triggered by the hold information for the first special figure, and the success / failure decision triggered by the hold information for the second special figure Referenced when a jackpot result is selected in the process. In other words, when a jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process triggered by the hold information for the first special figure, and when a jackpot result is selected in the success / failure judgment process triggered by the hold information for the second special figure In any case, the same jackpot type table 463 is referred to.

  In the jackpot type table 463, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), as types of jackpot results, 6R jackpot results and 15R jackpot results are set. The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “0 to 26” corresponds to the 6R jackpot result, and the numerical information of the type counter C2 of “27 to 29” corresponds to the 15R jackpot result. That is, when a jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process, a 6R jackpot result is selected with a probability of 9/10, and a 15R jackpot result is selected with a probability of 1/10.

  When the 6R jackpot result is reached, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), the round game is generated six times in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode starts. In this high-frequency support mode, when the hold information that triggered the occurrence of the 6R jackpot result is the hold information on the first special figure side, the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side If it is executed once, the process ends and shifts to the low frequency support mode. As described above, the second special figure holding area 453 is provided with the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and can hold four pieces of holding information on the second special figure side. Therefore, four in the second operation unit 413 controlled in the mode of the high frequency support mode in the situation where the first game round is executed with the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode is finished. By entering the game ball, it is possible to execute five game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  On the other hand, when the hold information that triggered the occurrence of the 6R jackpot result was the hold information on the second special figure side, the game times were triggered five times with the hold information on the second special figure side In some cases, the process ends and shifts to the low frequency support mode. As described above, the second special figure holding area 453 is provided with the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and can hold four pieces of holding information on the second special figure side. Therefore, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the second operation unit 413 controlled in the high-frequency support mode in the situation where the fifth game time is executed with the hold information on the second special figure side as an opportunity is executed. By entering a single game ball, it is possible to execute nine game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  When the 15R jackpot result is reached, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), the round game is generated 15 times in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the 15R jackpot result is more advantageous than the 6R jackpot result at least in terms of the number of round games executed. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode starts. In this high frequency support mode, even if the hold information that triggered the occurrence of the 15R jackpot result is either the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side, the second special figure side When the game times triggered by the hold information are executed five times, the game is terminated and the low frequency support mode is entered. As described above, the second special figure holding area 453 is provided with the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and can hold four pieces of holding information on the second special figure side. Therefore, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the second operation unit 413 controlled in the high-frequency support mode in the situation where the fifth game time is executed with the hold information on the second special figure side as an opportunity is executed. By entering a single game ball, it is possible to execute nine game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  FIG. 216 (c) shows a type table for small hits 464 that is referred to in order to sort the types of the small hit results when the small hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. FIG. 216 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a plurality of types of small hit results. As already explained, since the winning / failing determination process using the hold information on the first special figure side is not selected, the small hit result is not selected in the game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. The winning type table 464 is not referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 216 (c), the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result are set in the small hit type table 464 as shown in FIG. 216 (c). The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “0-9” corresponds to the first small hit result, the numerical information of the type counter C2 of “10-19” corresponds to the second small hit result, The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “20 to 29” corresponds to the third small hit result. That is, when the small hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process, the first small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3, the second small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3, and 1/3 The third small hit result is selected with the probability of.

  Regardless of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, or the third small hit result, as shown in FIG. 216 (d), the distribution execution mode is started first. In this distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 415 is opened and closed once. The open state of the allocation winning device 415 reaches 10 when the number of game balls that have entered the allocation winning device 415 reaches the upper limit winning number when 10 seconds as the opening continuation period have elapsed as described above. The process continues until one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, in a situation where the open state of the distribution winning device 415 is continued, the launch operation is continued so that the game ball flows down toward the distribution winning device 415, thereby entering the distribution winning device 415. A V-winning in which a game ball is detected by the V-winning detection sensor 449 is generated. Even if a plurality of game balls are detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in one distribution execution mode, the number of occurrences of the V winning is treated as one.

  After the V winning is generated, the opening / closing execution mode is generated. In this case, if it is after the distribution execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, it becomes an opening / closing execution mode in which five round games are executed, and if the distribution execution mode is triggered by the second small hit result For example, an open / close execution mode in which 8 round games are executed, and an open / close execution mode in which 14 round games are executed in the distribution execution mode triggered by the third small hit result. Therefore, the second small hit result is more advantageous than the first small hit result, and the third small hit result is more advantageous than the second small hit result, at least in terms of the number of round games executed.

  When the first small hit result, the second small hit result, or the third small hit result becomes one of the results of the V winning in the distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the opening / closing execution mode is terminated. The high frequency support mode is set later regardless of the support mode before the start of the distribution execution mode. In this high frequency support mode, regardless of whether the first small hit result, the second small hit result or the third small hit result is triggered, the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side Is executed five times, the process ends and shifts to the low frequency support mode. As described above, the second special figure holding area 453 is provided with the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and can hold four pieces of holding information on the second special figure side. Therefore, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the second operation unit 413 controlled in the high-frequency support mode in the situation where the fifth game time is executed with the hold information on the second special figure side as an opportunity is executed. By entering a single game ball, it is possible to execute nine game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, in the distribution execution mode triggered by any one of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result, the distribution execution mode is After completion, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, and the support mode before the start of the distribution execution mode is maintained.

  A flow of the game by setting the success / failure tables 461 and 462 and the type tables 463 and 464 as described above will be described. The support mode is basically the low-frequency support mode when the game hall starts business. In the low frequency support mode, a launch operation is performed aiming at winning a prize to the first operating unit 412, and when the winning to the first operating unit 412 occurs, a change display of the pattern is displayed on the first special figure display unit 425. The game times in which the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 424 are executed. When the jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process executed at the start of the game times, the opening / closing execution mode is generated after the game times are ended. In this opening / closing execution mode, if the 6R jackpot result is triggered, the round game is executed 6 times, and if the 15R jackpot result is triggered, the round game is executed 15 times.

  After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set. In this case, the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the game number in the second special figure display unit 426 is executed once if the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R jackpot result, If the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is a 15R jackpot result, the game is terminated when the game times in the second special figure display unit 426 are executed five times. When the high frequency support mode is terminated when the game times in the second special figure display unit 426 is executed once, it is possible to execute the game times five times with the hold information on the second special figure side as a trigger. When the high frequency support mode is terminated when the game times in the second special figure display unit 426 are executed five times, the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side are executed nine times. Is possible.

  In the high frequency support mode, a shooting operation is performed aiming at winning a prize to the second operating part 413, and when the winning to the second operating part 413 occurs, the second special figure display part 426 displays a change in the pattern. The game times in which the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 424 are executed. In game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, a small hit result is obtained with a high probability of 1/5. When the result is a small win result, the distribution execution mode is entered, and in this distribution execution mode, the V winning is basically generated by continuing the launch operation aiming for winning the distribution winning device 415. When a V prize is generated, an opening / closing execution mode is subsequently generated. In this open / close execution mode, if the first small hit result is an occurrence trigger, the round game is executed five times, and if the second small hit result is an occurrence trigger, the round game is executed eight times, and the third small hit result is If it occurs, the round game is executed 14 times. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is entered regardless of whether the occurrence trigger is the first small hit result, the second small hit result, or the third small hit result. The game is ended when the game times in the second special figure display unit 426 are executed five times. In this case, it is possible to execute nine game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side.

  In other words, when a transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs, a small hit result is generated in the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, thereby generating a distribution execution mode and an opening / closing execution mode It is possible to execute the game times 9 times with the hold information on the second special figure side as a trigger. As a result, the player expects the transition to the high-frequency support mode, and when the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs, the game is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side. Therefore, we expect that it will be a small hit result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that a jackpot result can also be generated in the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, and an open / close execution mode occurs when a jackpot result occurs. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, regardless of the type of jackpot result that has occurred, the high-frequency support mode is set, and the high-frequency support mode is executed five times in the second special figure display unit 426. Is terminated if

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. Then, using the value of the stored reach random number counter C3, it is determined whether or not a reach display is to be generated in the game times that result in a miss.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 424. Expected effects include a symbol display device 424 that can perform variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is a result of giving corresponding to a game round that results in a big hit result or a small hit result, This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the assignment correspondence result before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display in the device 424 is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 424, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner is included in the column. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, in a situation in which symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol sequences after the symbol variation display is started on the display surface of the symbol display device 424, or in some symbol sequences, a plurality of symbols are displayed. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on a symbol row the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped, that is, the game times corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission controller 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 indicates that the game times corresponding to any one of the big hit results or the small win results are more likely to generate a notice display and the appearance rate of the game times corresponding to the lost results. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that a low notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 424.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display continuation period of the pattern variation display in the special symbol display units 425 and 426 and the display continuation period of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 424. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated, and is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the pattern variation in the special symbol display units 425 and 426 and at the time of starting the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 424.

<General-purpose power control processing>
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing a normal power control process executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the ordinary power transmission control process is executed in step S8914 in the first timer interruption process (FIG. 133). In addition, the processing of step SD601 to step SD610 in the ordinary power transmission control processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, the hold information acquisition process on the normal side is executed (step SD601). In the acquisition process, when a winning to the through winning portion 414 has occurred, and when the upper limit number of holding information on the side of the map is not acquired in the map holding area 455, the utility counter release counter C4 Is stored in the ordinary map holding area 455. In this case, the hold information on the normal side is stored in the order of the first area 455a → second area 455b → third area 455c → fourth area 455d.

  After that, the numerical information of the general-purpose power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step SD602), and the general-purpose power address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD603). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the general-purpose power counter is acquired from the general-purpose power address table (step SD604), and the process jumps to the processing indicated by the acquired start address (step SD605).

  The general-purpose power transmission counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes from step SD606 to step SD610 should be executed in the general-purpose power control process. In the address table, a start address in a program for executing each processing of step SD606 to step SD610 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the ordinary power counter. If the value of the general-purpose power counter is “0”, the process jumps to the processing for starting the normal-time fluctuation in step SD606, and if the value of the general-purpose power counter is “1”, the normal-value fluctuation in step SD607. Jump to the middle processing, and if the value of the general-purpose power counter is “2”, the processing jumps to the processing for determining the general-purpose figure in step SD608, and if the value of the general-purpose power counter is “3” The process jumps to the process during open of normal power at step SD609, and when the value of the general-purpose normal power counter is “4”, the process jumps to the process during closing of normal power at step SD610.

  In the map change start process in step SD606, the map information hold information stored in the map hold area 455 is reserved on the condition that the map information hold information is stored in the map hold area 455. The process of shifting is executed. Specifically, the hold information on the map side stored in the first area 455a of the map hold area 455 is shifted to the execution area 456 for the map, and then the second area 455b → the first area 455a, The hold information on the normal side is shifted so that the third area 455c → the second area 455b and the fourth area 455d → the third area 455c. Then, the guidance state lottery process is executed using the holding information on the normal map side newly shifted to the execution area 456 for normal maps as the lottery value. In the present embodiment, as already described, there are a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode as support modes. However, the probability of winning the guided state in the guided state lottery process is the same in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode (specifically 4/5).

  When the guidance state lottery process is executed in the usual figure change start process, a process for starting the change display of the pattern in the ordinary figure display unit 423a is executed. In this case, information of the display continuation period in which the pattern display unit 423a displays the pattern in a variable manner is set in a general map general-purpose timer counter provided in the main RAM 65. The value set in the ordinary power / general timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step S8910) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. In this case, the display continuation period is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the display duration is 1 second, and in the low frequency support mode, the display duration is 10 seconds. Then, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the general-purpose display unit 423a, the value of the general-purpose normal power counter is updated from “0” to “1”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general map / electric power control process becomes the normal map changing process.

  In the normal map change process of step SD607, a process for updating the display of the pattern in the general map display unit 423a is executed. In addition, when the value set in the general-purpose power timer counter of the main RAM 65 in the normal-data change start process is “0”, the information on the fixed-term information on the normal-data side is displayed in the main RAM 65. In addition to being set in the general electric timer counter, the pattern corresponding to the result of the guidance state lottery process that triggered the execution of the current pattern variation display time in the general map display unit 423a is stopped and displayed on the general map display unit 423a. Execute the process. Then, the value of the ordinary power counter is updated from “1” to “2”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the general map / electric power control process becomes the general chart determination process.

  In the process of confirming the universal map in step SD608, when the value of the universal map / general timer counter is “0”, the result of the guidance state lottery process that triggered the execution of the variable display times of the current pattern is guided. It is determined whether or not the state is won. When the guidance state is not won, the value of the ordinary power counter is cleared to “0”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the ordinary map / electric power control process becomes the ordinary map variation start process.

  When the guidance state is won, a process for setting the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 to the guidance state is executed. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, three times are set as the number of times that the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state, and the upper limit guidance period in the execution times of each guidance state is set to 2 seconds. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, one is set as the number of times that the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state, and the upper limit guidance period in the execution times of the guidance state is set to 0.6 seconds. Information on the number of executions of the guidance state is set in a general power release number counter provided in the main RAM 65, and information on the upper limit induction period is set in a general power general timer counter. Further, in any of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the upper limit winning number of game balls to the second operation unit 413 when the guidance state is won is 10. The information on the upper limit winning number is set in a public power winning counter provided in the main RAM 65. When the value of the general power winning prize counter becomes “0”, the execution of the guidance state triggered by the current guidance state winning is terminated. Further, by starting the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 436, the guide unit 432 is switched from the non-guide state to the guide state. After the setting for enabling execution of the guidance state as described above is performed, the value of the ordinary power counter is updated from “2” to “3”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the ordinary power transmission control process becomes the normal power open process.

  In the process of opening the ordinary power in step SD609, when a prize is awarded to the second operating unit 413, a value corresponding to the number of prizes is subtracted from the value of the ordinary electricity prize counter in the main RAM 65. When the value of the general power prize counter is “0”, the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 436 is stopped to switch the induction unit 432 from the induction state to the non-induction state. Clears the value of the utility counter “0”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the ordinary map / electric power control process becomes the ordinary map variation start process. Even if the value of the general power prize counter is not “0”, if the value of the general power general timer counter is “0”, the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 436 is stopped. As a result, the induction unit 432 is switched from the induction state to the non-induction state, and the value of the general-purpose electric power release number counter is decremented by one. Then, if the value of the general electric power open counter is not “0”, the information of the non-induction continuation period of the guidance unit 432 is set in the general electric power timer counter and then the value of the general electric power counter is set to “3”. Is updated to “4”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the ordinary power transmission control process becomes the normal power closed process. When the value of the general electric power open counter is “0”, the value of the general electric power counter is cleared to “0”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the ordinary map / electric power control process becomes the ordinary map variation start process.

  In the process of closing the normal power transmission in step SD610, on the condition that the value of the general power general power timer counter is “0”, the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 436 is started, and the guidance unit 432 is thereby activated. The non-inductive state is switched to the inductive state, and the information on the upper limit induction period is set in the general-purpose ordinary power timer counter. Then, the value of the ordinary power counter is updated from “4” to “3”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the ordinary power transmission control process becomes the normal power open process.

  As described above, when the ordinary electric power / electric power control process is executed, when the winning to the through winning portion 414 occurs, the variation display of the pattern is performed in the universal display portion 423a. And when it is a guidance state winning in guidance state lottery processing, guidance unit 432 of the 2nd operation part 413 will be in a guidance state. When the second operating part 413 is in the guiding state, it is possible to win a game ball to the second operating part 413, and when the game ball wins the second operating part 413, the holding information on the second special figure side is obtained. It is stored in the second special figure reservation area 453.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing a special figure special power control process executed by the main CPU 63. The special figure special electric control process is executed in step S8913 in the first timer interruption process (FIG. 133). Further, the processing of step SD701 to step SD713 in the special figure special electric control processing is executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, hold information acquisition processing is executed (step SD701). In the holding information acquisition process, when a winning to the first operating unit 412 occurs, the number of holding information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 452 is the upper limit storage number (specifically On the condition that it is less than 4), the storing process of the hold information on the first special figure side is executed. In the storing process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the hold information on the first special figure side, and the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d of the first special figure hold area 452. In the area where the hold information on the first special figure side in FIG. When the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 427 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information on the first special figure side this time. Set the data to make sure. When the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of reserved information stored in the holding information on the first special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the holding information on the first special figure side.

  When the winning to the second operating unit 413 has occurred, the number of the hold information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 is less than the upper limit storage number (specifically four). On the condition that it is, the storage processing of the hold information on the second special figure side is executed. In the storing process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the hold information on the second special figure side, and the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d of the second special figure hold area 453 are used. In the area where the hold information on the second special figure side is not stored, it is stored in the area on the faster digestion order side. When the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 428 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information on the second special figure side this time. Set the data to make sure. When the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of reserved information stored in the hold information on the second special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the hold information on the second special figure side.

  After executing the hold information acquisition process, the special figure special power address table stored in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD702). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step SD703), and the process jumps to the processing indicated by the acquired start address (step SD704).

  The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes in steps SD705 to SD713 in the special figure special electric control process is to be executed. Is set with a start address in a program for executing each processing of step SD705 to step SD713 in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter. When the value of the special figure special electric counter is “0”, the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step SD705, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is “1”, the special figure fluctuation in process of step SD706. When the value of the special figure special power counter is “2”, the process jumps to the special figure finalizing process of step SD707, and when the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “3”, the process of step SD708 is executed. Jump to the minute start process. If the special figure special power counter value is "4", jump to the distribution process in step SD709. If the special figure special power counter value is "5", step When jumping to the special electricity start process of SD710 and the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “6”, jump to the special electricity release process of step SD711 and when the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “7”. Jump to electrically movable device control the closure during the processing of step SD712, when the value of special electrically movable device control counter is "8" jump to electrically movable device control termination processing of step SD713. Hereinafter, each process of step SD705 to step SD713 will be described individually.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process of step SD705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing of step SD801 to step SD818 in the special figure variation start processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In the special figure variation start process, the data setting process is executed (step SD802) on condition that the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side is stored (step SD801: YES). . In the data setting process, when the hold information on the second special figure side is stored in the second special figure hold area 453, the hold information on the second special figure side is obtained in the first special figure hold area 452 Regardless of whether or not the reserved information on the first special figure side is acquired, the reserved information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure reserved area 453 is stored in the game times. It is moved to a special drawing execution area 454 to be executed. As a result, the hold information on the second special figure side can be given priority over the hold information on the first special figure side as an execution trigger for the success / failure determination process, and can be given priority as an execution trigger for the game times. Become.

  When the holding information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure holding area 453 is moved to the execution area 454 for special drawing, it is stored in the second special figure holding area 453 thereafter. The process of shifting the hold information on the second special figure side is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted and the fourth area 453d, such as the second area 453b → first area 453a, the third area 453c → second area 453b, and the fourth area 453d → third area 453c. Is cleared to “0”. In the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 428 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the second special figure side this time. In the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the number of reserved information stored in the hold information on the second special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the decrease in the hold information on the second special figure side.

  On the other hand, in the data setting process, when the second special figure side holding information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 453, the data stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure holding area 452 is specially shown. Move to the execution area 454. Thereafter, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 452a to 452d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the second area 452b → the first area 452a, the third area 452c → the second area 452b, the fourth area 452d → the third area 452c, and the like, the data in each area is shifted and the fourth area 452d. Is cleared to “0”. In the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 427 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the first special figure side this time. In the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Thereby, the image for alerting | reporting the number of holding | maintenance memory | storage of the hold information by the side of the 1st special figure in the symbol display apparatus 424 is updated corresponding to the reduction | decrease of the hold information by the 1st special figure side.

  After executing the data setting process, the validity determination process is executed (step SD803). In the success / failure determination process, when the holding information on the first special figure side is stored in the execution area 454 for special figures, and the current game time is triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side, the current pachinko Read / write table 461 (see FIG. 215 (a)) of the first special figure corresponding to the set value of machine 10 is read from main ROM 64. Then, the numerical information on the winning random number counter C1 is read out from the hold information on the first special figure side that has triggered the start of the current game round, and the read numerical information is read from the first special figure on / off table 461. Thus, it is specified whether the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result or a miss result.

  On the other hand, in the success / failure determination process, the holding information on the second special figure side is stored in the special figure execution area 454, and the current game time is triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side. 2 is read from the main ROM 64, and the second special figure corresponding table 462 (see FIG. 215 (b)) corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is read. Then, the numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 is read out from the hold information on the second special figure side that has triggered the start of this game round, and the read numerical information is read from the above-mentioned second special figure on / off table 462. Thus, it is specified whether the result of the success / failure determination process at this time is a jackpot result, a jackpot result, or a miss result.

  When the result of the determination process is a jackpot result (step SD804: YES), the type determination process at the time of jackpot is executed (step SD805). In the jackpot type determination process, the jackpot type table 463 shown in FIG. 216 (a) is read from the main ROM 64. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is an opportunity for this game, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the first special figure side, and the hold on the second special figure side When the information is the trigger of the current game round, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the second special figure side. Then, which numerical value information about the read type counter C2 corresponds to the numerical range of the jackpot result of either type among the 6R jackpot result and the 15R jackpot result set in the jackpot type table 463. Identify.

  After executing the jackpot type determination process, “1” is set in the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the type determination process (step SD806). The state of the flag in which “1” is set is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step SD807). Specifically, the information on the pattern stop mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 that is the execution target of the game round. Are identified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In this jackpot result stop result table, the types of the pattern stop modes displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426 are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step SD807, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step SD805 is stored in the main RAM 65. In addition, the pattern stop mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some jackpot results. Although the method for selecting the stop result for the jackpot result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

  If the result of the hit / fail judgment process is a small hit result (step SD808: YES), the type determination process for the small hit is executed (step SD809). As described above, when the success / failure determination process is executed for the hold information on the first special figure side, the small hit result is not selected, and the success / failure is determined for the hold information on the second special figure side. The small hit result can be selected when the determination process is executed. In the type determination process at the time of small hitting, the type table 464 for small hitting shown in FIG. 216 (c) is read from the main ROM 64. Moreover, the numerical information regarding the type counter C2 is read out from the hold information on the second special figure side that is the trigger of the current game round. Then, the numerical information on the read type counter C2 has any kind of small hit result among the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result set in the small hit type table 464. Specify whether it corresponds to the numerical range of hit results.

  After executing the type determination process at the time of the small hit, “1” is set to the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in the type determination process (step SD810). If the opening / closing execution mode does not occur after the end of the distribution execution mode, the flag state with “1” set is cleared to “0” when the distribution execution mode ends, and the distribution execution mode ends. When the opening / closing execution mode occurs later, “0” is cleared when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, stop result setting processing for the small hit result is executed (step SD811). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 in the current game round is obtained from the stop result table for the small hit result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the small hit results, the types of the stop modes of the pictures to be stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 are set differently for each type of the small hit results. In step SD811, The information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in step SD809 is stored in the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result. The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each small hit result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some small hit results. . Although the method for selecting the stop result for the small hit result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

  If the result of the hit / fail judgment process is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step SD804 and step SD808: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step SD812). Specifically, the information on the pattern stop mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 that is the execution target of the game round. Is specified from the stop result table for the outlier stored in advance in the main ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The picture mode information selected in this case is different from the picture mode information selected for the jackpot result and the picture mode information selected for the jackpot result.

  After executing one of the stop result setting processes, a display continuation period grasping process is executed (step SD813). In such processing, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated in the symbol display device 424 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game times related to the start of the current variation are any of the big hit results or any of the small hit results. Further, even if neither the big hit result nor any small hit result is obtained, the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the special drawing execution area 454 is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach. In this case, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the display duration period of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table stored in the main ROM 64 To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is referred to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64. Get the duration. Incidentally, the display duration of game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the display duration of game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation duration table.

  After that, as a result of the current pass / fail determination process and the type determination process, the current support mode type and the change command and type command corresponding to the process result in step SD813 are selected from the main ROM 64 (step SD814). Then, the selected change command and type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SD815). The sound emission control device 81 executes control for causing the effect for game times corresponding to the received variation command and type command to be executed.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the pattern is started on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 that is the execution target of the current game round (step SD816). The first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit are used as tables to be referred to by the main CPU 63 when the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426 displays the variation of the picture. A special display variation display table common to 426 is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. The When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the variation display of the pattern by a predetermined pattern is repeated. The control data for one round in the pattern variation display by the predetermined pattern is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the variable display table for special figures until the display duration of the game times determined in step SD813 elapses. Will be used repeatedly.

  The contents of the variable display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 are arbitrary. For example, when all the display segments 425a and 426a are in a light emitting state in a predetermined order, It is also possible to have a configuration in which a variable display of the pattern is performed, or a display in which the display of the pattern is varied is performed by causing some of the display segments 425a, 426a to emit light in a predetermined order, such as two or three. Further, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which all the display segments 425a and 426a blink to display the variation of the pattern, and one or two of the display segments 425a and 426a may blink to display the variation of the pattern. It is good also as composition which is performed.

  Thereafter, the special display unit 429 is turned off (step SD817). In the special display unit 429, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 6R jackpot result, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, display corresponding to six round games is performed on the special display unit 429. When the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 15R jackpot result, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, display corresponding to 15 round games is performed on the special display unit 429. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs due to the occurrence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, the special display unit 429 displays 5 when the opening / closing execution mode is started. The display corresponding to the round game is performed. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode is generated when the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode triggered by the second small hit result, the special display unit 429 displays 8 when the opening / closing execution mode is started. The display corresponding to the round game is performed. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is generated by the occurrence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode triggered by the third small hit result, the special display unit 429 displays 14 when the opening / closing execution mode is started. The display corresponding to the round game is performed. In the above configuration, the special display unit 429 is turned off in step SD817 of the special figure change start process, thereby corresponding to the number of round games in the special display unit 429 started when the opening / closing execution mode is started. The display to be ended is ended when a new game is started after the opening / closing execution mode is ended. The special display unit 429 is kept off until a new opening / closing execution mode is generated.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step SD818). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special figure fluctuation in-process ( It becomes “1” corresponding to step SD706).

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step SD706 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218) will be described.

  If the display duration of the current game times has not elapsed, and if it is the update timing of the display contents of the special figure display units 425 and 426 that are the execution targets of the current game times, By referring to the fluctuation display table, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 425 and 426 is performed. Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the special figure display part 425,426 used as the execution object of this game round is updated to the display content of the next order. The main side RAM 65 has a first display order counter that is referred to in order to derive the display contents of the pattern from the variable display table for the special figure when the first special figure display unit 425 reaches the update timing of the pattern. Is provided. The main side RAM 65 has a second display order counter which is referred to in order to derive the display contents of the pattern from the variable display table for the special figure when the second special figure display unit 426 reaches the update timing of the pattern. Is provided.

  In the special figure display units 425 and 426, the mode at the start of the pattern variation display and the pattern variation display update mode are performed in a certain mode regardless of the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. Regardless of the contents of the effects for the game times in the symbol display device 424, it is performed in a certain manner. For example, when a predetermined multiple update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in a constant display order is repeatedly performed, and the display duration of the game times has elapsed In any situation where the display patterns are displayed in any order, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 425 and 426.

  On the other hand, when the game continuation display duration has elapsed, information on the pattern stop mode of the special figure display units 425 and 426 stored in the main RAM 65 at the start of the game cycle is read and the pattern stop mode and Thus, the special figure display units 425 and 426 that are the execution targets of the current game round are controlled to be displayed. As a result, in the special figure display units 425 and 426 that are the execution targets of the current game round, the pattern corresponding to the result of the current game round determination process and the type determination process are displayed. Fluctuation display is stopped. Regardless of whether or not the pattern is stopped and displayed in the special figure display units 425 and 426, the next display of the fluctuation of the pattern in the special figure display units 425 and 426 is performed regardless of whether the mode is the distribution execution mode or the opening / closing execution mode. Maintained until started. Further, information on the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Thereby, the measurement of the last stop period is started.

  Thereafter, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the final stop command from the main CPU 63, the sound emission control device 81 transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82. When the display controller 82 receives the final stop command from the sound emission controller 81, the display controller 82 reads a display pattern table for stopping and displaying the combination of stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. Thereby, the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the current game time is stopped and displayed in the symbol display device 424 over the final stop period.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter. Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation process is executed is “1”, the value of the special figure special electricity counter corresponds to the special figure finalizing process (step SD707) by adding 1. “2”.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure finalizing process executed in step SD707 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing of step SD901 to step SD915 in the special figure determination processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  When the final stop period has elapsed and the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result (step SD901 and step SD902: YES), the display start process of the special display unit 429 is executed (step SD903). . In the display start process of the special display unit 429, when the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, data setting for display control of the special display unit 429 is started so that display corresponding to six round games is started. I do. Further, in the display start process of the special display unit 429, when the current jackpot result is a 15R jackpot result, the display for controlling the special display unit 429 is started so that display corresponding to 15 round games is started. Set the data. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 3 (step SD904). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding three is the special electric charge start process (step SD710). ) Corresponding to “5”.

  When the final stop period has elapsed and this game time does not correspond to the jackpot result (step SD901: YES, step SD902: NO), the support flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to “1”. Is determined (step SD905). The support flag is a flag that is set to “1” when in the high frequency support mode and is set to “0” when in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in step SD905, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

  If it is the high frequency support mode and the support flag is set to “1” (step SD905: YES), whether or not the game times that have ended this time are game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side Is determined (step SD906). When the game times ended this time are game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side (step SD906: YES), the value of the second special figure counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. (Step SD907), 1 is subtracted from the value of the total counter provided in the main RAM 65 (Step SD908). On the other hand, when the game times ended this time are game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side (step SD906: NO), the value of the first special figure counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. At the same time (step SD909), 1 is subtracted from the value of the total counter in the main RAM 65 (step SD910). After executing the process of step SD908 or step SD910, it is determined whether any of the first special figure counter, the second special figure counter, and the total counter is “0” (step SD911). When an affirmative determination is made in step SD911, the support flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step SD912). As a result, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is completed reaches the end reference number, and the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. The first special figure counter, the second special figure counter, and the total counter are all counters for specifying the end reference number by the main CPU 63. The first special figure counter is a counter for measuring the number of times the game times have been executed triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the second special figure counter is opened / closed. It is a counter for measuring the number of game times executed with the hold information on the second special figure side after the mode is ended, and the total counter is the counter on the first special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode is ended. It is a counter for measuring the total number of executions of the game times triggered by the hold information and the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side. Regardless of the type of jackpot result or jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode, “100” is set in the first special figure counter and the total counter when the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is done. On the other hand, the counter for the second special figure is set to “1” when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 6R jackpot result by the hold information on the first special figure side, and the opening / closing execution is triggered by other cases. If the mode is selected, “5” is set.

  As described above, when the game times are executed with the hold information on the first special figure side as a trigger, the values of the first special figure counter and the total counter are each decremented by 1, and the hold information on the second special figure side When the game times are executed, the values of the second special figure counter and the total counter are decremented by 1, respectively. When the value of any of the first special figure counter, the second special figure counter, and the total counter becomes “0”, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode is ended when the number of times of the game is executed once or five times with the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the number of game times executed with the hold information on the first special figure side later becomes 100, or the game times with the hold information on the first special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends And when the total number of game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side becomes 100 times, the process ends.

  However, in the high frequency support mode, the launch operation is basically performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Therefore, the high-frequency support mode is basically terminated when the number of times of the game is executed once or five times with the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It becomes. Note that when the number of game times executed with the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes one, it means that the first time after the opening / closing execution mode ends 2 The high frequency support mode is ended when the game times with the holding information on the special figure side are ended. In addition, when the number of game times executed with the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes 5 times, it means that the fifth time after the opening / closing execution mode ends The high-frequency support mode is ended when the game time is ended with the hold information on the second special figure side as an opportunity.

  When a negative determination is made at step SD905, when a negative determination is made at step SD911, or when the process at step SD912 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the small hit result (step SD913). When the game time this time does not correspond to the small hit result (step SD913: NO), the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step SD914). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step SD705). On the other hand, if the current game time corresponds to the small hit result (step SD913: YES), the value of the special figure special counter is incremented by 1 (step SD915). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the distribution start process ( It becomes “3” corresponding to step SD708).

<Process for starting distribution>
Next, the distribution start process executed in step SD708 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218) will be described.

  First, a distribution start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When the sound emission control device 81 receives the distribution start command from the main CPU 63, the sound emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound of the speaker unit 54 are performed so that an effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is being executed is executed. Execute output control. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a sorting start command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the distribution start command from the sound emission control device 81, the display control device 82 displays that the distribution execution mode is in effect after executing the display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode has been started. Display control of the symbol display device 424 is performed so that the effect is executed.

  Thereafter, “10” is set to the distribution prize counter provided in the main RAM 65. The allocation prize counter is an opportunity to switch the allocation prize device 415 from the open state to the closed state in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the allocation prize device 415 that is open in the allocation execution mode. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify. In addition, a set process for the distribution release period is executed. In the setting process of the allocation release period, information corresponding to the 10 seconds is stored in the timer counter of the main RAM 65 so that the period in which the allocation prize-winning device 415 is maintained in the release state is 10 seconds which is the allocation release period. set. Then, output of the drive signal to the drive unit 443 for the distribution entrance is started in order to place the distribution winning device 415 in the open state.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the distribution start process is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special electric counter corresponding to the distribution process (step SD709) is increased by one. 4 ".

<Processing for sorting>
Next, the distribution process executed in step SD709 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing of step SE101 to step SE118 in the distribution processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the switching piece 446 of the sorting and winning device 415 from the retracted position to the V guide position (step SE101). If two seconds have passed since the allocation prize winning device 415 is in the open state, an affirmative determination is made in step SE101. When an affirmative determination is made in step SE101, a drive signal is output to the switching drive unit 447 so that the switching piece 446 moves from the retracted position to the V guide position (step SE102). As a result, the switching piece 446 is arranged at the V guide position, and the game ball that has subsequently reached the position of the switching piece 446 is guided to the V winning path area 445c by the switching piece 446 and detected by the V winning detection sensor 449. .

  When a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 of the distribution winning device 415 (step SE103: YES), “1” is set to the V winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step SE104). The V winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that a game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 449. Further, the V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SE105). When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the V winning command from the main CPU 63, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the display light emitting unit 53 are executed so that an effect corresponding to the detection of the game ball is executed by the V winning detection sensor 449. Sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is executed. Further, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a V winning command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the V winning command from the sound emission control device 81, the display control device 82 displays the symbol display device 424 so that a display effect indicating that a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 is executed. Control.

  In a situation where the distribution winning device 415 is in an open state, it is determined whether or not the distribution release period measured using the timer counter of the main RAM 65 has elapsed (step SE106). If the allocation release period has not elapsed (step SE106: NO), it is determined by determining whether or not a game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 448 or the V prize detection sensor 449 of the allocation prize winning device 415. It is determined whether or not a winning device 415 has been won (step SE107). When a winning to the allocation winning device 415 has occurred (step SE107: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the allocation winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step SE108). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution prize counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step SE109).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SE106 or an affirmative determination is made in step SE109, the closing condition of the distribution prize winning device 415 is satisfied, and therefore the drive signal is output to the distribution entrance drive unit 443. Is stopped to close the distribution winning device 415 (step SE110). Thereafter, in order to wait for the end of the allocation execution mode until there is no game ball in the allocation prize winning device 415, information corresponding to the standby period is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65 (step SE111). . The standby period is set as a period longer than the longest period required for a game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 415 to be detected by either the count detection sensor 448 or the V winning detection sensor 449. Specifically, it is set to 4 seconds. By waiting for the end of the distribution execution mode until the waiting period elapses in this way, the game ball that has entered the distribution prize apparatus 415 immediately before the allocation prize apparatus 415 is closed is temporarily detected as a V prize. When detected by the sensor 449, it can be treated as effective.

  When the standby period measured by the timer counter of the main RAM 65 has elapsed (step SE112: YES), the switching drive unit 447 is driven so that the switching piece 446 returns from the V guide position to the retracted position. The signal output is stopped (step SE113). Thereby, the switching piece 446 returns to the retracted position.

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 65, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in the current distribution execution mode. (Step SE114). When “1” is set in the V winning flag (step SE114: YES), the display start process of the special display unit 429 is executed (step SE115). In the display start processing of the special display unit 429, the special display unit 429 is displayed so that display corresponding to five round games is started when the current distribution execution mode is triggered by the first small hit result. Set the data for control. Further, in the display start process of the special display unit 429, when the current distribution execution mode is triggered by the second small hit result, the special display unit 429 is started so that display corresponding to eight round games is started. Set data to control display. Further, in the display start process of the special display unit 429, when the current distribution execution mode is triggered by the third small hit result, the special display unit 429 is started so that display corresponding to 14 round games is started. Set data to control display. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step SE116). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the distribution process is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special electricity start process (step SD710). “5” corresponding to If an affirmative determination is made in step SE114, the V winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  When “1” is not set in the V winning flag (step SE114: NO), a flag clear process is executed (step SE117). In the flag clear process, a flag for specifying the type of the small hit result is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step SE118). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step SD705).

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process executed in step SD710 of the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 218) will be described.

  In the special electric power start process, if it is before the start of the opening period, measurement of the opening period (for example, 4 seconds) is started and an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the opening command, the sound emission control device 81 performs the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the opening effect is executed. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an opening command to the display control device 82. When receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 424 so that the opening effect is executed.

  In the special electricity start process, when the opening period has elapsed, information corresponding to the number of executions of the round game in the current open / close execution mode is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 65. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode, and the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 each time a round game is executed. In addition, the information on the continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the special prize winning device 416 in one round game is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 65. Information (specifically “10”) corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings is set. Then, an opening setting process for special electricity is executed. In the opening setting process, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is started so that the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “6” corresponding to the special electricity release process (step SD711).

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special electric power release opening process executed in step SD711 of the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 218) will be described.

  In the special electric release opening process, the closing setting process is executed when the opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 416 has elapsed, or when the special electric prize winning device 416 has won a maximum number of winning game balls. In the closing setting process, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is stopped so that the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the closed state. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter in the main RAM 65.

  When the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is not “0”, information corresponding to the closing duration (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “7” corresponding to the special electricity closing process (step SD712).

  When the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is “0”, information corresponding to the ending period (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Also, an ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 81 performs the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the ending effect is executed. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an ending command to the display control device 82. When receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 424 so that the ending effect is executed. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by two. As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “8” corresponding to the special electricity termination processing (step SD713).

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electricity closing process executed in step SD712 of the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 218) will be described.

  When the closing continuation period has elapsed, information on the continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65, and one round game is stored in the winning counter of the main RAM 65. The information (specifically “10”) corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electric prize winning device 416 is set. Then, the special electricity winning device 416 is opened by executing the special electricity release setting process. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure special electricity counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “6” corresponding to the special electricity release process (step SD711).

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special power end process executed in step SD713 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 218) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 222. Note that the processing of step SE201 to step SE209 in the special electric power end processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  When the ending period has elapsed (step SE201: YES), “100” is set to the total counter of the main RAM 65 (step SE202), and “100” is set to the first special figure counter of the main RAM 65. Set (step SE203). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side (step SE204). If the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side (step SE204: NO), it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by a 15R jackpot result (step SE204). SE205). When an affirmative determination is made at step SE204 or step SE205, “5” is set in the second special figure counter of the main RAM 65 (step SE206), and a negative determination is made at both step SE204 and step SE205 Is set to "2" in the second special figure counter of the main RAM 65 (step SE207). An end condition for the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is ended by the processing of step SE202 to step SE207 is set.

  When the process of step SE206 or step SE207 is executed, “1” is set to the support flag of the main RAM 65 (step SE208). Thereby, the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high-frequency support mode. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step SE209). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step SD705).

<Notification that setting-related processing is being executed>
Next, a setting confirmation process (step SC213) or a setting value update process (step SC216) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) that is activated when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. A configuration for notifying that the situation is present will be described.

  FIG. 223 is an explanatory diagram for describing each area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

  Similar to the fifty-sixth embodiment, the clear target area 371 includes a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer 275. Is provided. In addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, a sixth display data buffer 471, a seventh display data buffer 472, and an eighth display data buffer 473 are provided in the clear target area 371.

  The first display data buffer 271 stores display data for causing the first special figure display unit 425 to perform a predetermined display. Display control in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed by the first special figure display unit 425 executing the process for starting the variable display of the pattern in step SD816 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 219). In the means (step S8915), display data corresponding to the display at the time of the start of fluctuation of the first special figure display unit 425 is set in the first display data buffer 271. Further, the first timer interrupt process is executed by executing the process for updating the display content of the first special figure display unit 425 in the special figure changing process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218). Display data for advancing the variable display of the picture on the first special figure display unit 425 is set in the first display data buffer 271 by the display control means (step S8915) in (FIG. 133). In addition, in the special figure changing process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218), the display content of the first special figure display unit 425 is determined as the success / failure determination process (step SD803) in the current game round and the big hit time. The first special figure display is performed by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) by executing the process for obtaining the display contents corresponding to the processing result of the type determination process (step SD805). Display data for causing the unit 425 to perform display corresponding to the result of the current game round is set in the first display data buffer 271. The display data set in this case is the display data selected in step SD807 or step SD812 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 219) at the start of the current game round. The display data set in this case is stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until the first special figure display unit 425 enters a state in which a new game round is started. A first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the first special figure display unit 425, and the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is supplied to the first display circuit 261 to display the display. The display corresponding to the data is performed by the first special figure display unit 425.

  The second display data buffer 272 stores display data for causing the first special figure holding display unit 427 to perform a predetermined display. When the hold information on the first special figure side is newly stored in the first special figure hold area 452 in the hold information acquisition process (step SD701) in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 218), the first timer Display data corresponding to the number of hold information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 452 after the storage by the display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is the second. It is set in the display data buffer 272. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is digested as an execution timing of the game times in the data setting process (step SD802) in the special figure change start process (FIG. 219), the first timer interruption process (FIG. 133) display data corresponding to the number of hold information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 452 after the digestion by the display control means (step S8915) in the second display data buffer 272 Set to A second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the first special figure hold display unit 427, and the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is supplied to the second display circuit 262, so that The display corresponding to the display data is performed by the first special figure hold display unit 427.

  The third display data buffer 273 stores display data for causing the general map display unit 423a to perform a predetermined display. The first timer interrupt process (when the process for starting the fluctuation display of the picture in the universal figure display unit 423a is executed in the normal figure fluctuation start process (step SD606) of the ordinary figure electric power control process (FIG. 217). In FIG. 133), display data corresponding to the display at the time of the start of fluctuation of the universal display unit 423a is set in the third display data buffer 273 by the display control means (step S8915). In addition, the first timer interrupt process (when the process for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 423a is executed in the normal map change process (step SD607) of the general map power control process (FIG. 217). In FIG. 133), the display control means (step S8915) sets display data for advancing the variable display of the picture on the universal display unit 423a in the third display data buffer 273. Further, the display contents corresponding to the result of the guidance state lottery in the current fluctuation display times are changed from the display contents of the universal figure display unit 423a in the normal figure change process (step SD607) of the normal figure normal power control process (FIG. 217). In order to cause the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) to perform the display corresponding to the result of the current variable display times by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). Are displayed in the third display data buffer 273. The display data set in this case is stored and held in the third display data buffer 273 until a new variable display time is started in the general-purpose display unit 423a. Note that a third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the general display unit 423a, and the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is supplied to the third display circuit 263, whereby the display data is displayed. Corresponding display is performed in the general map display unit 423a.

  The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data for causing the ordinary map display unit 423b to perform a predetermined display. If the hold information on the general map side is newly stored in the general map hold area 455 in the hold information acquisition process (step SD601) on the general map side of the general map / electric power control process (FIG. 217), the first The display control means (step S8915) in the timer interruption process (FIG. 133) displays display data corresponding to the number of hold information on the map side stored in the map holding area 455 after the storage, in the fourth display data buffer. 274 is set. Further, when the hold information on the general map side is digested as the execution timing of the variable display time of the general map display unit 423a in the general map fluctuation start process (step SD606) of the general map display control process (FIG. 217). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the display control means (step S8915) displays the fourth display data corresponding to the number of hold information on the map side stored in the map holding area 455 after the digestion. It is set in the display data buffer 274. Note that a fourth display circuit 264 is provided in correspondence with the general map hold display portion 423b, and the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264, whereby the display data is displayed. The display corresponding to is performed in the usual figure hold display part 423b.

  The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display. The setting of display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is executed in step SE303, step SE307, and step SE310 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) described later. A fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265. Thus, the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  The sixth display data buffer 471 stores display data for causing the second special figure display unit 426 to perform a predetermined display. The display control in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed by the second special figure display unit 426 executing the process for starting the pattern change display in step SD816 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 219). In the means (step S8915), display data corresponding to the display at the start of the fluctuation of the second special figure display unit 426 is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. Also, the first timer interrupt process is executed by executing the process for updating the display content of the second special figure display unit 426 in the special figure changing process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218). Display data for advancing the variable display of the picture of the second special figure display unit 426 is set in the sixth display data buffer 471 by the display control means (step S8915) in (FIG. 133). In addition, in the special figure changing process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218), the display content of the second special figure display unit 426 is determined as the success / failure determination process (step SD803) in the current game round. Display control in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed by executing a process for setting the display contents corresponding to the processing result of the type determination process (step SD805) and the type determination process at the time of small hit (step SD809). In the means (step S8915), display data for causing the second special figure display unit 426 to perform display corresponding to the result of the current game round is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. The display data set in this case is the display data selected in step SD807, step SD811, or step SD812 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 219) at the start of the current game round. Further, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the sixth display data buffer 471 until the second special figure display unit 426 enters a state in which a new game round is started. A sixth display circuit is provided in correspondence with the second special figure display unit 426, and the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 471 is supplied to the sixth display circuit, so that the display data is displayed. Corresponding display is performed in the second special figure display unit 426.

  The seventh display data buffer 472 stores display data for causing the second special figure holding display unit 428 to perform a predetermined display. When the hold information on the second special figure side is newly stored in the second special figure hold area 453 in the hold information acquisition process (step SD701) in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 218), the first timer Display data corresponding to the number of hold information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 453 after the storage by the display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is the seventh. It is set in the display data buffer 472. In addition, when the hold information on the second special figure side is digested as an execution timing of the game times in the data setting process (step SD802) in the special figure change start process (FIG. 219), the first timer interruption process (FIG. 133) display data corresponding to the number of hold information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 453 after the digestion by the display control means (step S8915) in the seventh display data buffer 472 Set to Note that a seventh display circuit is provided corresponding to the second special figure hold display unit 428, and the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 472 is supplied to the seventh display circuit, whereby the display data is displayed. Display corresponding to is performed in the second special figure hold display section 428.

  The eighth display data buffer 473 stores display data for causing the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display. When information on the number of round games is set in the display start process (step SD903) of the special display unit 429 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 220) in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, the first timer interrupt Display data corresponding to the information of the number of round games is stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 by the display control means (step S8915) in the process (FIG. 133). In addition, when the number of round games is set in the display start process (step SE115) of the special display unit 429 in the distribution process (FIG. 221) by entering the distribution execution mode, the first timer Display data corresponding to information on the number of round games is stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 by the display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 133). Further, when the special display unit 429 extinguishing process (step SD817) is executed in the special figure change start process (FIG. 219), the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. As a result, the display data in the eighth display data buffer 473 is cleared to “0”. An eighth display circuit is provided corresponding to the special display unit 429, and the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 is supplied to the eighth display circuit, so that the display corresponding to the display data is displayed. Is performed in the special display unit 429.

  Since the clear target area 371 includes the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473, the first RAM clear process (step SC218) or the set value update process (step 218) of the main process (FIG. 185). When the second RAM clear process of SC216) is executed, the display data set in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 is cleared to “0”. In addition, the clear target area 371 includes an area for special figure special electric control and an area for general electric power control other than the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode regardless of the support mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game turn is not executed and the opening / closing execution mode is not executed. Further, the general-purpose display unit 423a is not variably displayed, and the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is The situation is a non-inductive state. In addition, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to “0”, and the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. Is done. Further, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initial setting is executed. Further, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0”.

  FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing a second timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SE301 to step SE317 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63. The second timer interrupt process is interrupted when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) of the main process (FIG. 185) is started, and when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is terminated. Is prohibited. The second timer interrupt process is interrupted when the set value update process (step SC216) of the main process (FIG. 185) is started and interrupted when the set value update process (step SC216) ends. Is prohibited. The second timer interrupt process is interrupted until interrupt permission is set in step SC227 of the main process (FIG. 185) after interrupt permission is set in step SC230 of the main process (FIG. 185). Is allowed. The same applies to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133).

  First, in order to prohibit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224), an interrupt prohibition is set (step SE301). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) even if the first interrupt cycle elapses. It becomes possible not to be started by. Moreover, even if the second interrupt cycle elapses during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) due to the prohibition of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) is performed. It is possible to prevent the processing (FIG. 224) from being activated twice.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SE302). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update processing (step SC216). Similar to the above-described 56th embodiment, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) is interrupted and started even in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE302, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE303). In the setting process, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the pachinko machine 10. Display data for displaying the current set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. Thereby, the display which shows that it is the condition which is updating the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the 1st-4th display apparatus 201-204 and the display which shows the present setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. . This display is continued while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  Thereafter, a setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update is executed (step SE304). FIG. 225 (a) is a flowchart showing a setting process to the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update. Note that the processing of step SE401 to step SE405 in the setting processing to the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In the setting process, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the change display of the pattern is performed in the same manner as when the game times are being executed in the first special figure display unit 425. Execute the process. Further, in the setting process, in order to cause the first special figure display unit 425 to perform the fluctuation display of the pattern, the special figure fluctuation display table and the second special figure used in the special figure changing process (step SD706) One display order counter is used.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not this time is the update timing of the display content of the first special figure display unit 425 (step SE401). The cycle for updating the display content of the pattern of the first special figure display unit 425 is the same as the cycle for updating the display content of the pattern of the first special figure display unit 425 in the game times. When it is the display content update timing (step SE401: YES), 1 is added to the value of the first display order counter in the main RAM 65 (step SE402). If the value of the first display order counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value (for example, “20”) (step SE403: YES), the value of the first display order counter is cleared to “0” ( Step SE404). As described above, the first display order counter is a counter for specifying the display content of the pattern to be derived from the variation display table for special figure when the first special figure display unit 425 has reached the update timing of the pattern. .

  When a negative determination is made at step E401, when a negative determination is made at step SE403, or when the process at step SE404 is executed, the display content of the pattern corresponding to the current value of the first display order counter is used for special illustration. The display data corresponding to the display contents of the derived picture is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SE405). Thereby, the pattern corresponding to the display data is displayed on the first special figure display unit 425.

  In the situation in which the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed due to the above configuration, the display order is in a fixed order as in the case where the game times are being executed in the first special figure display unit 425. The variation display of the pattern by a certain display pattern is repeated in the first special figure display unit 425. In this case, the special display variable display table and the first display order counter used for performing the variable display of the pattern are used when the first special figure display unit 425 executes game times. Is. As a result, it is possible to cause the first special figure display unit 425 to display the variation of the picture in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed while suppressing an increase in the necessary storage capacity. Become.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224), after executing the setting process (step SE304) to the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update, the process to the eighth display data buffer 473 during the setting update is performed. A setting process is executed (step SE305). In the setting process, display data for causing the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. Specifically, the display setting corresponding to the number of round games executed in the case of a 15R jackpot result in the display start process (step SD903) of the special display unit 429 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 220) was performed. In this case, the same display data as the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. As a result, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 not only displays the variation of the picture as in the case of the game times, but also the special display unit 429. In the same manner as in the case of 15R jackpot result, a display corresponding to the number of round games being executed is 15 times.

  The display data set in the first display data buffer 271 in step SE304 and the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE305 are executed when the set value update processing (step SC216) ends. In the second RAM clear process (step SB313), “0” is cleared. As a result, when the set value update process (step SC216) is completed, the display corresponding to the fact that the variation display of the picture in the first special figure display unit 425 and the number of executions of the round game in the special display unit 429 are 15 times. Can be terminated. Thereafter, display start processing (FIG. 191) is executed in step SC226 of the main processing (FIG. 185), whereby initial display data for special graphics is set in the first display data buffer 271. Thereby, the initial display is started in the first special figure display unit 425 as in the above-described 56th embodiment. On the other hand, the special display unit 429 is kept off until the next opening / closing execution mode is started.

  Note that the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE305 is not limited to the configuration that is the display data for performing display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 15. For example, display data for displaying corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 6 times may be the same as in the case of 6R jackpot result, as in the case of the first jackpot result. Display data corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 5 times may be displayed, and the number of executions of the round game is 8 times as in the case of the second small hit result. It may be display data for performing display corresponding to a certain thing, and in order to perform display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 14 as in the case of the third small hit result. Display data. Even in these cases, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the set value update process (step SC216) is executed using display data used to cause the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display. The special display unit 429 can notify that the situation is present.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE302, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SE306). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation processing (step SC213). Similar to the 56th embodiment, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) is interrupted and activated even in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SE306, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE307). In the setting process, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the pachinko machine 10. Display data for displaying the current set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. Thereby, the display which shows the state which is confirming the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the display apparatus 201-204 for the 1st-4th notification and the display which shows the present setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. . This display is continued while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

  Thereafter, a setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE308). FIG. 225 (b) is a flowchart showing a setting process to the sixth display data buffer 471 during the setting confirmation. Note that the processing from step SE501 to step SE505 in the setting processing to the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In the setting process, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the variation display of the pattern is performed in the same manner as when the game times are being executed in the second special figure display unit 426. Execute the process. Further, in the setting process, in order to cause the second special figure display unit 426 to display this picture fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation display table used in the special figure changing process (step SD706) and the second special figure display unit 426 are used. 2 Display order counter is used.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not this time is the update timing of the display content of the second special figure display unit 426 (step SE501). The cycle for updating the display content of the pattern on the second special figure display unit 426 is the same as the cycle for updating the display content of the design on the second special figure display unit 426 in the game round. When it is the display content update timing (step SE501: YES), 1 is added to the value of the second display order counter in the main RAM 65 (step SE502). Then, when the value of the second display order counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value (for example, “20”) (step SE503: YES), the value of the second display order counter is cleared to “0” ( Step SE504). As described above, the second display order counter is a counter for specifying the display content of the picture to be derived from the special figure variable display table when the second special figure display unit 426 reaches the pattern update timing. .

  When a negative determination is made at step E501, when a negative determination is made at step SE503, or when the process at step SE504 is executed, the display content of the pattern corresponding to the current value of the second display order counter is used for a special figure. Display data corresponding to the display contents of the derived picture is set in the sixth display data buffer 471 (step SE505). As a result, the pattern corresponding to the display data is displayed on the second special figure display unit 426.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed due to the above configuration, the display order is in a fixed order, as in the case where the game times are being executed in the second special figure display unit 426. The variation display of the pattern according to a certain display pattern is repeated in the second special figure display unit 426. In this case, the special display variable display table and the second display order counter used for performing the variable display of the pattern are used when the second special figure display unit 426 executes the game times. Is. As a result, it is possible to cause the second special figure display unit 426 to display the variation of the picture in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed while suppressing an increase in the necessary storage capacity. Become.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224), after executing the setting process (step SE308) to the sixth display data buffer 471 during the setting confirmation, the process to the eighth display data buffer 473 during the setting confirmation is performed. A setting process is executed (step SE309). In the setting process, display data for causing the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. Specifically, the display setting corresponding to the number of round games executed when the 6R jackpot result is obtained in the display start process (step SD903) of the special display unit 429 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 220). In this case, the same display data as the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. As a result, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 not only displays the variation of the picture as in the case of the game times, but also the special display unit 429. In the same manner as in the case where the 6R jackpot result is obtained, the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 6 is performed. The display content of the special display unit 429 is different from the display content of the special display unit 429 in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  The display data set in the sixth display data buffer 471 in step SE308 and the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE309 are “0” when the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is completed. Cleared. As a result, when the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is completed, the display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game in the special display section 429 and the variation display of the picture in the second special figure display section 426 is six times is displayed. Can be terminated. Thereafter, display start processing (FIG. 191) is executed in step SC226 of the main processing (FIG. 185), whereby initial display data for special graphics is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. Thereby, the initial display is started in the second special figure display unit 426. On the other hand, the special display unit 429 is kept off until the next opening / closing execution mode is started.

  Note that the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE309 is not limited to a configuration that is display data for causing display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being six. For example, it may be display data for performing display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 15 as in the case of 15R jackpot result, as in the case of the first jackpot result. Display data corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 5 times may be displayed, and the number of executions of the round game is 8 times as in the case of the second small hit result. It may be display data for performing display corresponding to a certain thing, and in order to perform display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 14 as in the case of the third small hit result. Display data. Even in these cases, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed using display data used to cause the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display. The special display unit 429 can notify that the user is present.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE306, the process of step SE310 is executed. The processing content of step SE310 is the same as that of step S8406 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment.

  When the processing of step SE305, step SE309, or step SE310 is executed, the signal transmission state through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is set to the OFF state (step 33) as in the thirty-third embodiment. SE311), and the transmission state of the signal through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is turned off (step SE312). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step SE313).

  The type counter is a counter for specifying the display data transmission target in the main CPU 63 among the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt process. . When the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is a transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is a transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data in the fourth display data buffer 274 is If the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 is the target of transmission, and if the value of the type counter is “6”, the display of the sixth display data buffer 471 is displayed. When data is a transmission target and the value of the type counter is “7”, the display data in the seventh display data buffer 472 is a transmission target and the type counter If the value of the data is "8", the display data of the eighth display data buffer 473 is transmitted. In the type counter update process, 1 is added to the value of the type counter, and when the value of the type counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the upper limit “8”, the value of the type counter is set to “1”. . Accordingly, the display data transmission target is sequentially changed in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 for each processing time of the second timer interrupt process.

  Thereafter, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step SE314). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second value is read. When the type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64 and the value of the type counter is “3”, the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64 and the value of the type counter is If “4”, the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and if the value of the type counter is “5”, the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read. When the value of the type counter is “6” read from the side ROM 64, the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is read from the main ROM 64 and the value of the type counter is “7”. In some cases read from the main side ROM64 the type data corresponding to the seventh display circuit, when the value of the type counter is "8" reads the type data from the main side ROM64, corresponding to the eighth display circuit.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step SE315). Specifically, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271 when the value of the type counter is “1”, and is read from the second display data buffer 272 when the value of the type counter is “2”. When the display data is read, the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273 when the value of the type counter is “3”, and from the fourth display data buffer 274 when the value of the type counter is “4”. When the display data is read, the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275 when the value of the type counter is “5”, and from the sixth display data buffer 471 when the value of the type counter is “6”. When the display data is read and the value of the type counter is “7”, the display data is read from the seventh display data buffer 472, and the type count is read. If the value is "8" reads the display data from the eighth display data buffer 473.

  Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step SE316). In the transmission process, signal output is performed on the classification data signal line LN1 and the classification clock signal line LN2 so that the classification data read in step SE314 is transmitted to the display IC 266. Further, in the transmission process, signal output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is performed so that the display data read in step SE315 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Thereafter, in order to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224), the interrupt permission is set (step SE317).

  Next, how the display contents of the first special figure display unit 425, the second special figure display unit 426, and the special display unit 429 change according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. . FIG. 226 (a) shows a period during which the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, FIG. 226 (b) shows a period during which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, and FIG. ) Shows a period during which the variable display of the pattern is executed in the first special figure display unit 425, and FIG. 226 (d) shows a period during which the predetermined graphic is stopped and displayed in the first special figure display unit 425. 226 (e) shows a period during which the variation display of the pattern is executed in the second special figure display unit 426, and FIG. 226 (f) shows that the predetermined pattern is stopped in the second special figure display unit 426. The displayed period is shown, and FIG. 226 (g) shows the period during which the special display unit 429 performs a predetermined display.

  First, a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) are not executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (c), the display of the variation of the pattern is started in the first special figure display unit 425 by starting the game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side at the timing of t1. Is done. Then, when the display continuation period of the game times elapses at the timing t2, as shown in FIGS. 226 (c) and 226 (d), the display of the variation of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 is ended, The display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process in the game time is started in the first special figure display unit 425. In this case, the 15R jackpot result is selected in the game times. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the 15R jackpot result is started in the first special figure display unit 425.

  Thereafter, when the final stop period of the stop display of the pattern has elapsed at the timing of t3, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are completed, and the opening / closing execution mode is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 226 (g), the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 15 is started on the special display unit 429 at the timing of t3. Note that the special display unit 429 is turned off until the timing t3.

  Thereafter, at the timing t4, the opening / closing execution mode ends, and as shown in FIG. In this case, the special display unit 429 is turned off at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 226 (g). Then, when the display duration of the game times elapses at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 226 (e) and FIG. 226 (f), the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426 is ended, The display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process in the game time is started in the second special figure display unit 426. In this case, the first small hit result is selected in the game times. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the first small hit result is started by the second special figure display unit 426.

  Thereafter, the distribution execution mode is started when the final stop period of the stop display of the pattern has elapsed, and the distribution execution mode ends at the timing of t6. The open / close execution mode is started at timing t6 because the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode. In this case, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 226 (g), display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 5 is started on the special display unit 429. Note that the special display unit 429 is turned off until the timing t6. After that, although the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t7, the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game in the special display unit 429 being 5 times is the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426. This continues until a new game is started.

  When a game is being performed as described above, a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is performed on the special display unit 429 in a situation where the display of the variation of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 425. Similarly, in the situation where the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is performed on the special display unit 429, the first special figure display unit 425 does not perform the variable display of the pattern. In addition, when a game is being performed as described above, a display corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special display unit 429 in a situation where the variation display of the pattern is performed in the second special figure display unit 426. Similarly, in the situation where the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is performed on the special display unit 429, the second special figure display unit 426 does not perform the variable display of the pattern. .

  Next, a situation in which the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed will be described.

  At the timing of t8, the set value update process (step SC216) is started as shown in FIG. 226 (a). In this case, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 226 (c), the first special figure display unit 425 is switched from the extinguished state to the state in which the pattern change display is performed. In addition, at time t8, as shown in FIG. 226 (g), the special display unit 429 switches from a light-off state to a state in which a display corresponding to the number of round games being executed is 15.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), the set value update process (step SC216) ends at the timing of t9. As a result, at the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 226 (c), the variation display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 is terminated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 226 (d), the first special figure display unit 425 starts the initial display. The contents of the initial display are the same as the contents of the initial display of the special figure display section 37a in the above-mentioned 56th embodiment. Also, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 226 (g), the display corresponding to the number of round games executed on the special display portion 429 being 15 is ended. In this case, the special display portion 429 is turned off.

  Next, a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (b), the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started at the timing of t10. In this case, at the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 226 (e), the second special figure display unit 426 switches from the extinguished state to the state in which the change display of the pattern is performed. In addition, at time t10, as shown in FIG. 226 (g), the special display unit 429 switches from a light-off state to a state in which a display corresponding to the number of round game executions is six.

  Thereafter, the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) ends as shown in FIG. 226 (b) at the timing of t11. As a result, at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 226 (e), the pattern change display on the second special figure display unit 426 is terminated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 226 (f), the second special figure display unit 426 starts the initial display. The contents of the initial display are the same as the contents of the initial display of the special figure display section 37a in the above-mentioned 56th embodiment. Also, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 226 (g), the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game in the special display unit 429 is ended. In this case, the special display portion 429 is turned off.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 displays a variation of the picture and the special display unit 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of round games executed. Is called. When a game is being performed, the special display unit 429 does not display a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed in the situation where the first special figure display unit 425 displays a change in the pattern. . Therefore, the manager of the game hall confirms that the display of the variation of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 425 and the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is performed on the special display unit 429. By doing this, it is possible to grasp that the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed.

  In particular, the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 are provided in a region that can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. The notification indicating that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed in the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 is performed, so that the set value update process (step SC216) is performed. ) Can be easily confirmed whether or not the situation is being executed.

  In addition, when the game is being performed, the opening / closing execution mode occurs after the game times are executed. Therefore, after the variable display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 425, the special display unit 429 performs the display. A display corresponding to the number of round games executed is performed. In the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed at the same time, the display of both of the execution periods before and after the execution period is performed simultaneously, whereby the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed. This can be clearly notified.

  A notification indicating that the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed is performed by a combination of the display contents of the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429. As a result, in order to illegally notify that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, each of the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 is provided. It is necessary to cheat. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the illegal act.

  The first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 are display units used when a game is being executed. By performing notification indicating that the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being performed using such a display unit, it is possible to perform the notification while suppressing the complexity of the configuration. Become.

  When notification indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed is performed, the first special figure display unit 425 displays a change in the pattern, and the special display unit 429 executes the round game. Display corresponding to the number of times is performed. The variation display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 is a display content that occurs even when a game is being executed, and the display corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special display unit 429 is that the game has been executed The display content also occurs when Thereby, it is possible to notify that the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed using display contents generated when a game is being executed.

  The first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 are provided as a special figure unit 422 in a predetermined range. Thereby, it becomes possible to make it easy to confirm the display contents of the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429.

  In a situation where a game is being executed, if the display corresponding to the number of round games executed is performed on the special display unit 429, the special electric prize device 416 is opened and closed. On the other hand, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special electric prize device 416 is closed in the situation where the display corresponding to the number of round games executed is performed on the special display unit 429. Maintained. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 displays a variation of the picture, and the special display unit 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed. Is called. When a game is being performed, the special display unit 429 does not display a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed in a situation where the second special figure display unit 426 displays a change in the pattern. . Therefore, the manager of the game hall confirms that the display of the variation of the picture is performed on the second special figure display unit 426 and the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is performed on the special display unit 429. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed.

  In addition, the special display unit 429 corresponds to the number of round games that are executed regardless of whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. On the other hand, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 displays the variation of the pattern, whereas the setting confirmation process (step SC213). ) Is executed, the second special figure display unit 426 displays a change in the pattern. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can clearly distinguish which of the setting value update process (step SC216) and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

  The variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result in the determination process of whether or not the hold information on the second special figure side is a success / failure on the hold information on the second special figure side It is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be an outlier result in the determination process. As a result, it is possible to obtain a jackpot result in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side, while not affecting the probability of a small hit result in the determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side. Probability can be varied.

  The number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small hit result in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the probability that the small hit result is selected in the determination process for the hold information on the hold information on the second special figure side for all set values. In addition, even if the probability that a small hit result is selected in the determination process for determining whether or not to hold information on the second special figure side is constant, the determination process for determining whether or not to hold information on the second special figure side will be used. Because the variation of each set value of the probability that the jackpot result is selected is absorbed by the variation of the probability that the outlier result is selected, the jackpot result is selected in the determination process of the hold information on the second special figure side It is possible to set the probability of being set to a probability according to the set value.

  The number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be an outlier result in the determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side is the largest for any of the set values. As a result, the variation in each set value of the probability that the jackpot result will be selected in the determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side is selected in the determination result for the hold information on the second special figure side. Even if it is a configuration that absorbs the fluctuation amount of the probability, the probability that the result of losing result in the hold determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side will not cause a large fluctuation among the set values of multiple stages It becomes possible to do.

  Note that, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 displays a variation of the picture and the second special figure display unit. It is good also as a structure by which the change display of a pattern is performed in 426. When a game is being performed, when one of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 is performing a variable display of the pattern, the other is a variable display of the pattern. It is a structure that is not broken. In this case, in the situation where the set value update processing (step SC216) is being executed as described above, the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 each perform a variable display of the pattern. Thus, it is possible to notify the game hall manager that the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed. When notifying that the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed in the configuration, the first and second special figure display units 425 and 426 display the variation of the pattern. In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the change display of the pattern is performed in the general-purpose display unit 423a. It is good also as a structure by which a predetermined display is performed.

  Further, the display content displayed on the special display unit 429 in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed is not limited to the configuration that is the display content corresponding to the number of executions of the round game. Although the display content does not correspond to the number of round games executed, a predetermined display may be performed when at least one display segment 429a in the special display portion 429 is in a light emitting state. When the game is being performed, when the display of the variation of the pattern is being performed in the first special figure display unit 425, the special display unit 429 is in a non-display state in which all the display segments 429a are turned off. Therefore, the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed because the special display unit 429 is not in the non-display state in the situation where the display of the variation of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 425. It is possible to notify that the situation is present. Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 displays a variation of the picture and the special display unit 429 displays the number corresponding to the number of round games executed. Although it is not, it is good also as a structure by which the predetermined display is performed.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, a dedicated display unit for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed includes the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame. It is good also as a structure provided in the area | region which can be visually recognized through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without requiring 14 open operation.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, a dedicated display unit for notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed is provided in the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame. It is good also as a structure provided in the area | region which can be visually recognized through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without requiring 14 open operation.

  In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, a dedicated display unit and a setting confirmation process (step SC213) for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed are provided. Each of the dedicated display units for notifying that the situation is being executed can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. It is good also as a structure provided in the area | region.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, a dedicated device for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. The display unit may be provided in an area that can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. In this case, the same dedicated display unit is notified whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. . In the configuration, the display content on the same dedicated display unit is different between the situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It is good also as composition which has.

  In addition, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, the same notification is issued regardless of whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It may be configured to be executed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which is alert | reported about one of the condition where the setting value update process (step SC216) is performed, and the condition where the process for setting confirmation (step SC213) is performed, but not the other.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, even if the set value update process (step SC216) is executed as in the 55th embodiment, after the execution of the process at the start of the supply of operating power, In the configuration in which the display at the time of the previous power interruption is resumed by the one special figure display unit 425, the display data corresponding to the display at the time of the previous power interruption when the set value update process (step SC216) is started. Is saved from the first display data buffer 271 to the area where the “0” clear and initialization are not executed in the main RAM 65 when the second RAM clear process is executed, and when the set value update process (step SC216) is completed The display data may be returned to the first display data buffer 271. As a result, in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, after the set value update process (step SC216) is completed while the corresponding display is performed on the first special figure display unit 425. It is possible to restart the display at the previous power interruption.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be provided in which a display unit corresponding to the distribution execution is provided that displays the distribution execution mode in the situation of the distribution execution mode. Good. The display unit corresponding to the distribution execution is switched from the non-display state (that is, the all-off state) to the predetermined display state when the distribution execution mode is started, and the predetermined display is performed when the distribution execution mode ends. The state is switched to the non-display state. In the configuration, when the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the display unit corresponding to the distribution execution is in a predetermined display state, and the special display unit 429 is in a predetermined display state. It is possible to notify that the value update process (step SC216) is being executed. Moreover, you may apply the structure regarding such alerting | reporting with respect to the condition where the process for setting confirmation (step SC213) is performed.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which the small hit result can be selected also when the hold information on the first special figure side is the target of the success / failure determination process. Even in this case, when the success / failure determination process is executed for the hold information on the first special figure side, the variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot result However, it may be configured to be absorbed by fluctuations in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a result of losing when the determination processing is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side. . In this case, the probability that the small hit result is selected when the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side may be the same in each set value. In addition, instead of the above configuration, the variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result when the success / failure determination process is executed on the hold information on the first special figure side As a configuration in which the minute is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small hit result when the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side Also good.

  Further, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, each of the numbers of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result when the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side The variation in the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information in the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small hit result when the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, there is a configuration in which a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot result in the success / failure determination process is relatively high and low exist. Also good. In addition, in the configuration, even when the success / failure determination process is executed on the hold information on the first special figure side, the small hit result can be selected, and on the hold information on the first special figure side Sorting is executed regardless of whether the determination process is executed and the small hit result is selected or the determination result is executed on the hold information on the second special figure side and the small hit result is selected. It is good also as a structure which transfers to opening / closing execution mode instead of mode. In the opening / closing execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 416 is configured such that a short opening of about 1 second is executed a small number of times such as about 2 times. In the configuration as described above, as a type of jackpot result, in the opening / closing execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened in the same manner as when the small hitting result is obtained, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set. However, when the support mode before the start of the opening / closing execution mode is the low frequency support mode, there may be a configuration in which there is a latent probability variation jackpot result in which the low frequency support mode is maintained. In this case, in the situation where the mode is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a short opening of about 1 second is executed a small number of times such as about 2 times in the special electric prize device 416 triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. It is possible to cause the player to predict which of the small hit result and the latent probability variation jackpot result is triggered. In addition, the probability that the small hit result is selected when the success / failure determination process is executed on at least the hold information on the first special figure side in the configuration is the same regardless of the success / failure lottery mode and the set value. By adopting substantially the same configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping not only the set value but also the winning / failing lottery mode from the occurrence frequency of the small hit result.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs due to the V winning in the allocation execution mode resulting in any of the small hit results, the allocation that has already ended It is good also as a structure by which the display corresponding to the frequency | count of execution of the round game in the special display part 429 is performed by making execution mode into 1 round. In this case, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, display corresponding to six round games is performed on the special display unit 429, and in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second small hit result, nine times. The display corresponding to the round game is performed on the special display unit 429. In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the third small hit result, the display corresponding to 15 round games is performed on the special display unit 429.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, there is only one kind of small win result, and when the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the number of round games generated in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode is It is good also as a structure determined by lottery. In this case, the player pays attention to the timing when the V prize is generated.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which the distribution probability of the type of jackpot result varies according to the set value. In this case, the probability that the jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process may be varied according to the set value, and the probability that the jackpot result is selected in the determination process is not changed according to the set value. It is good also as a structure which is constant.

<65th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the second timer interrupt process is different from that of the 64th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-mentioned 64th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the second timer interrupt process in this embodiment. Note that the processing of step SE601 to step SE615 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, as in step SE301 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment, interrupt prohibition is set (step SE601). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SE602). When “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step SE602: YES), the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE603). The processing contents of the setting processing are the same as those in step SE303 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

  Thereafter, the setting process of all lighting display during the setting update is executed (step SE604). In the setting process, all display segments in the general map display unit 423a, all light emitting units in the general map hold display unit 423b, all display segments 425a in the first special diagram display unit 425, and second special diagram display unit. All the display segments 426a of 426, all the light emitting parts of the first special figure hold display part 427, all the light emitting parts of the second special figure hold display part 428, and all the display segments 429a of the special display part 429 The light emission state is set. That is, all of the display units that are display-controlled by the main CPU 63 and that are visible through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are set to the light emitting state. This all-lit state is terminated when the set value update process (step SC216) is terminated. The full lighting state as described above does not occur in other situations including a situation where a game is being performed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the set value update processing (step SC216) is being executed by confirming whether or not the all lighting state as described above is performed. .

  If a negative determination is made in step SE602, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE605). When “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE605: YES), a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE606). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE307 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

  Thereafter, a setting process of all lighting display during setting confirmation is executed (step SE607). In the setting process, all display segments 425a of the first special figure display unit 425, all display segments 426a of the second special figure display unit 426, all light emitting units of the first special figure display unit 427, 2 All the light emitting units of the special figure hold display unit 428 and all the display segments 429a of the special display unit 429 are set in a light emitting state. In other words, among the display units that are display-controlled by the main CPU 63 and can be viewed through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, the normal map display unit 423a and the general display unit 423a. All the display parts other than the figure holding display part 423b are set to the light emitting state. This all-lit state is terminated when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is terminated. The full lighting state as described above does not occur in other situations including a situation where a game is being performed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by confirming whether or not the above-described all-lighting state is performed. .

  If a negative determination is made in step SE605, the processing from step SE608 to step SE615 is executed. Further, when the process of step SE604 or step SE607 is executed, the processes of step SE609 to step SE615 are executed. The processing contents of step SE608 to step SE615 are the same as those of step SE310 to step SE317 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the display unit is display-controlled by the main CPU 63 and requires an opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. All of the display units that are visible through the window panel 52 are in a light emitting state. Such a full lighting state does not occur in other situations including a situation where a game is being performed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the set value update processing (step SC216) is being executed by confirming whether or not the all lighting state as described above is performed. . In addition, all the display units that are display-controlled by the main CPU 63 and are visible through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are in a light emitting state. It becomes easy to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  While the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the window panel 52 is a display unit that is display-controlled by the main CPU 63 and does not require the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. All of the display units other than the general map display unit 423a and the general map hold display unit 423b among the display units that can be visually recognized through the display are in a light emitting state. Such a full lighting state does not occur in other situations including a situation where a game is being performed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by confirming whether or not the above-described all-lighting state is performed. .

  In the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the display unit in which all the display segments are in the light emitting state does not require the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, and the window panel 52. It is not limited to the structure which is all the display parts which can be visually recognized through, and it is good also as a structure which is a one part display part. For example, in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, all the display segments 425a and 429a of the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 may be in a light emitting state. Alternatively, all of the display segments 425a and 426a of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 may be in a light emitting state, and each of the general figure display unit 423a and the special display unit 429 may be configured. All the display segments may be in a light emitting state, or all the display segments of the general map display unit 423a, the second special figure display unit 426, and the special display unit 429 may be in a light emitting state. Good. Moreover, you may apply the said structure as a structure for alert | reporting that it is the condition where the process for setting confirmation (step SC213) is performed.

<66th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configurations of the second timer interrupt process and the set value update process are different from those of the 64th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-mentioned 64th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the second timer interrupt process in this embodiment. Note that the processing of step SE701 to step SE715 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set in the same manner as in step SE301 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment (step SE701). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SE702).

  When “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step SE702: YES), the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE703). The processing contents of the setting processing are the same as those in step SE303 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment. Thereafter, a setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update is executed (step SE704). The processing contents of the setting processing are the same as those in step SE304 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment. As a result, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 displays the variation of the pattern. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE305 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment is not executed. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the special display unit 429 does not perform a predetermined display in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, and the light-off state is maintained.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE702, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE705). When “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE705: YES), a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE706). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE307 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment. Thereafter, a setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE707). The processing content of the setting process is the same as that in step SE308 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment. As a result, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 displays the variation of the pattern. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE309 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed, the special display unit 429 does not perform a predetermined display and maintains the extinguished state.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE705, the processing from step SE708 to step SE715 is executed. Further, when the process of step SE704 or step SE707 is executed, the processes of step SE709 to step SE715 are executed. The processing contents of these steps SE708 to SE715 are the same as those of steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

  FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing in this embodiment. Note that the processing of step SE801 to step SE816 in the set value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SE801). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 228) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

  Thereafter, the special electric prize winning device 416 is released (step SE802). In the release process, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c provided in the special electric prize winning device 416 is started. As a result, the special electricity prize winning device 416 is opened. Thereafter, processing for updating the set value is executed in step SE803 to step SE812, interrupt prohibition is set in step SE813, second RAM clear processing is executed in step SE814, and update is performed in step SE815 Send a return command. The processing contents of step SE803 to step SE815 are the same as those of step SB302 to step SB314 of the setting value update process (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  Thereafter, the closing process of the special electric prize winning device 416 is executed (step SE816). In the closing process, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c provided in the special electric prize winning device 416 is stopped. As a result, the special electricity prize winning device 416 is closed.

  Due to the above configuration, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 displays the variation of the picture and the special electric prize winning device 416 is It becomes an open state. When a game is being played, the special electric prize device 416 is opened in a situation where a game corresponding to the jackpot result is executed and the first special figure display unit 425 stops displaying the picture corresponding to the jackpot result. It becomes a state. In other words, when a game is being performed, the special electricity prize winning device 416 will not be in an open state in a situation where the first special figure display unit 425 is performing a variable display of the pattern. On the other hand, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 executes the variable display of the pattern and the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened. Thus, it is possible to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the first special figure display unit 425 and the special electricity prize winning device 416.

  Further, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special display unit 429 is maintained in the non-display state even though the special prize winning device 416 is in the open state. When a game is being performed, when the special electricity prize winning device 416 is in an open state, a display corresponding to the number of round games executed is performed on the special display unit 429. Accordingly, the game hall manager sets the special display unit 429 by confirming that the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is not performed in spite of the fact that the special electricity prize winning device 416 is open. It is possible to grasp that the value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  In particular, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, all the display segments 429a of the special display unit 429 are maintained in the unlit state even though the special prize winning device 416 is in an open state. As a result, the special display portion 429 is not displayed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall confirms whether or not any display is performed on the special display unit 429 in a situation where the special electricity prize winning device 416 is in an open state, so that the set value update process (step SC216). It is possible to clearly grasp that the situation is being executed.

  Here, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed, the special prize winning apparatus 416 is in the open state as in the situation where the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed. In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 displays a change in the pattern. When a game is being performed, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result or the jackpot result are executed, and the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result or the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 426. Under special circumstances, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened. That is, when a game is being performed, the special electricity prize winning device 416 is not opened in a situation where the second special figure display unit 426 is performing the variable display of the pattern. On the other hand, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 executes the display of the variation of the pattern and the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed using the second special figure display unit 426 and the special electric prize winning device 416.

  Instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a notification is made that the situation is one of the situation in which the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to do this, it is good also as a structure which makes the guidance unit 432 of the 2nd action | operation part 413 a guidance state while making it display the change display of a pattern in the general map display part 423a. When a game is being performed, the situation in which the change display of the picture is displayed on the general map display unit 423a and the situation in which the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the guidance state do not occur at the same time. Therefore, by generating these situations at the same time, the situation is one of the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It is possible to notify.

  In addition, in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, notification is made that one of the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to do this, it is possible to have both the distribution prize device 415 and the special electricity prize device 416 open. When a game is being performed, there is no situation where both the distribution winning device 415 and the special prize winning device 416 are open, so both the sorting winning device 415 and the special prize winning device 416 are open. Thus, it is possible to notify that the situation is one of the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. .

  Further, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, when a plurality of special electricity prize devices 416 that are opened in the opening / closing execution mode are provided and a game is being performed, the plurality of special electricity prize devices 416 are simultaneously opened. In a configuration that does not become, in order to notify that the situation is one of the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In addition, the plurality of special prize winning devices 416 may be simultaneously opened.

  In addition, in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, notification is made that one of the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to do so, the special electric prize winning device 416 may be opened, but the degree of opening may be less than the opened state when a game is being played.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a display unit corresponding to the distribution execution that performs a predetermined display in the distribution execution mode is provided, and the set value update process (step SC216) is executed. The special display unit 429 in the situation where the special prize winning device 416 is in an open state in order to notify that the situation is one of the situation and the setting confirmation process (step SC213). In addition, both the display unit corresponding to the distribution execution and the display unit may be turned off.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the setting check process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, the special electric prize winning device 416 may be in an open state, and a display different from the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game may be performed on the special display unit 429.

<67th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the second timer interrupt process is different from that of the 64th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-mentioned 64th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the second timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. Note that the processing of step SE901 to step SE915 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, as in step SE301 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment, interrupt prohibition is set (step SE901). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SE902).

  If “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step SE902: YES), the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE903). The processing contents of the setting processing are the same as those in step SE303 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

  Thereafter, display data during setting update is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SE904). The display data during setting update is continuously stored in the first display data buffer 271 until the second RAM clear process is executed in the set value update process (step SC216), and the second RAM clear process is executed. “0” is cleared.

  The setting update display data is display data for causing the first special figure display unit 425 to perform setting update display. The display during setting update is not included in the display content displayed when the first special figure display unit 425 performs the variable display in the game times, and further, the result and type of the determination process of the game times. It is not included in the display content of the picture stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 in order to notify the result of the determination process. That is, the display during setting update has display contents that are not displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 in a situation where a game is being executed. Further, the display during setting update is a display content that is not displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 in a situation where the set value update processing (step SC216) is not executed. As a result, it is determined whether or not the setting update process (step SC216) is being performed by checking whether or not the setting update display is being performed on the first special figure display unit 425. It becomes possible to do.

  Specifically, the display content of the display during setting update is the display content in which all the display segments 425a of the first special figure display unit 425 are in a light emitting state. That is, in the setting update display, the display segment 425a that can be in a light emitting state in a situation where a game is being played is in a light emitting state, but the combination of the display segment 425a that is in a light emitting state is in a game. The combination is not selected in. Note that the display content of the display during setting update is not limited to the above, and only the display segment 425a that does not enter the light-emitting state in a situation where a game is being performed may be the display content that is in the light-emitting state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE305 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment is not executed. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the special display unit 429 does not perform a predetermined display in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, and the light-off state is maintained.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE902, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE905). When “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE905: YES), a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE906). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE307 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

  Thereafter, display data during setting confirmation is set in the sixth display data buffer 471 (step SE907). This display data during setting confirmation is continuously stored in the sixth display data buffer 471 until the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is completed, and “0” is cleared when the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is completed. The

  The setting confirmation display data is display data for causing the second special figure display unit 426 to perform the setting confirmation display. The display during setting confirmation is not included in the display content displayed when the second special figure display unit 426 performs the variable display in the game times, and the result and type of the determination process for the game times. It is not included in the display content of the picture stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 in order to notify the result of the determination process. That is, the setting confirmation display has display contents that are not displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 in a situation where a game is being executed. Further, the setting confirmation display is a display content that is not displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is not executed. Thereby, it is grasped whether or not the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed by confirming whether or not the setting confirmation display is performed on the second special figure display unit 426. It becomes possible to do.

  Specifically, the display content of the display during setting confirmation is the display content in which all the display segments 426a of the second special figure display unit 426 are in the light emission state. That is, in the setting confirmation display, the display segment 426a that can be in the light emitting state in the state where the game is being performed is in the light emitting state, but the combination of the display segment 426a that is in the light emitting state is in the game. The combination is not selected in. Note that the display content of the display during setting confirmation is not limited to the above, and only the display segment 426a that does not enter the light-emitting state in a situation where a game is being performed may be the display content that is in the light-emitting state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE309 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed, the special display unit 429 does not perform a predetermined display and maintains the extinguished state.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE905, the processing from step SE908 to step SE915 is executed. Further, when the process of step SE904 or step SE907 is executed, the process of step SE909 to step SE915 is executed. The processing contents of step SE908 to step SE915 are the same as those of step SE310 to step SE317 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, a dedicated display content indicating that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed by the first special figure display unit 425. Is displayed during setting update. Accordingly, it is possible to notify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the first special figure display unit 425.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 is a setting that is a dedicated display content indicating that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. Display during confirmation. Thus, it is possible to notify whether or not the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed using the second special figure display unit 426.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the situation is one of the situation in which the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display that is not displayed when a game is played on the special display unit 429 may be used.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the setting check process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display that is not displayed when a game is played on both the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 may be used.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the setting check process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display that is not displayed when a game is played on both the second special figure display unit 426 and the special display unit 429 may be used.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the setting check process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display that is not displayed when a game is played on both the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 may be used.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the setting check process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display that is not displayed when a game is being played on the general-purpose display unit 423a may be used.

<68th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for informing that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed is the 64th configuration. This is different from the embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-mentioned 64th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 231 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the special display unit 429 in the present embodiment.

  In the special display portion 429, four light emitting portions 481 to 484 are provided side by side so as to be equally spaced. Among the four light emitting units 481 to 484, the leftmost light emitting unit 481 is a 15R display unit 481 for informing that 15 round games are executed, and the display unit 482 on the right side thereof has 9 round games. A 9R display unit 482 for notifying that the game is executed, and a display unit 483 adjacent to the right is a 6R display unit 483 for notifying that the round game is executed six times, and a display unit 484 on the right end. Is a small hit display section 484 for notifying that it is in the distribution execution mode.

  A number “15” is displayed as a 15R indication unit 485 indicating that the 15R display unit 481 corresponds to the execution of 15 round games at a position adjacent to the 15R display unit 481 (specifically, a lower position). Printed. A number “9” is displayed as a 9R indication section 486 indicating that the 9R display section 482 corresponds to the execution of nine round games at a position adjacent to the 9R display section 482 (specifically, a lower position). Printed. A number “6” is displayed as a 6R indication unit 487 indicating that the 6R display unit 483 corresponds to the execution of six round games at a position adjacent to the 6R display unit 483 (specifically, a lower position). Printed. On the other hand, the position adjacent to the small hit display portion 484 is not provided with an explicit portion indicating that the small hit display portion 484 corresponds to execution of the distribution execution mode.

  When the result of the go / no-go determination process and the type determination process is a 15R jackpot result and the opening / closing execution mode is started, the 15R display unit 481 changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting state. While the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the 15R display unit 481 is maintained in the light emitting state, and when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the 15R display unit 481 is turned off from the light emitting state. Also, an open / close execution mode in which 14 round games are executed when a V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode triggered by the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process being the third small hit result. Is started, the 15R display portion 481 changes from the light-off state to the light-emitting state. While the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the 15R display unit 481 is maintained in the light emitting state, and when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the 15R display unit 481 is turned off from the light emitting state.

  An open / close execution mode is started in which eight round games are executed as a result of V winning in the distribution execution mode triggered by the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process being the second small hit result In this case, the 9R display unit 482 changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting state. Then, the 9R display unit 482 is maintained in the light emitting state while the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and the 9R display unit 482 is switched from the light emitting state to the extinguished state when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  When the result of the right / no-go determination process and the type determination process is a 6R jackpot result and the opening / closing execution mode is started, the 6R display unit 483 changes from a light-off state to a light emission state. The 6R display unit 483 is maintained in the light emitting state while the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and the 6R display unit 483 is switched from the light emitting state to the extinguished state when the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, an open / close execution mode in which five round games are executed when a V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode triggered by the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process being the first small hit result. Is started, the 6R display portion 483 changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting state. The 6R display unit 483 is maintained in the light emitting state while the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and the 6R display unit 483 is switched from the light emitting state to the extinguished state when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process is one of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, or the third small hit result, and the sort execution mode is started, the small hit display unit 484 is turned off. The light emission state is activated. Then, the small hit display portion 484 is maintained in the light emission state while the distribution execution mode is being executed, and the small hit display portion 484 is turned off from the light emission state when the distribution execution mode ends.

  In the situation where a game is being performed due to the above configuration, a plurality of display units 481 to 484 of the 15R display unit 481, the 9R display unit 482, the 6R display unit 483, and the small hit display unit 484 are simultaneously in a light emitting state. Never become. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the 15R display unit 481, the 9R display unit 482, A plurality of display units 481 to 484 out of the 6R display unit 483 and the small hit display unit 484 are simultaneously in a light emitting state.

  FIG. 231 (b) shows the display contents of the 15R display unit 481, the 6R display unit 483, and the small hit display unit 484 in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It is a time chart. FIG. 231 (b1) shows a period during which the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, FIG. 231 (b2) shows a period during which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed, and FIG. 231 (b3) ) Indicates a period during which the 15R display unit 481 is in a light emitting state, FIG. 231 (b4) indicates a period during which the 6R display unit 483 is in a light emitting state, and FIG. 231 (b5) indicates that the small hit display unit 484 is The period during which the light emission state is set is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (b1), the set value update process (step SC216) is started at the timing of t1. In this case, at the timing t1, the 15R display unit 481 switches from the off state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 231 (b3) and the small hit display unit 484 emits light from the off state as shown in FIG. 231 (b5). Switch to state. The light emission states of the 15R display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484 are continued while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  Thereafter, the set value update process (step SC216) ends at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 231 (b1). Thus, at the timing t2, the 15R display unit 481 switches from the light emitting state to the unlit state as shown in FIG. 231 (b3), and the small hit display unit 484 turns off from the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 231 (b5). Switch to state.

  Also, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 231 (b2). In this case, at the timing t3, the 15R display unit 481 switches from the unlit state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 231 (b3) and the 6R display unit 483 changes from the unlit state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 231 (b4). Switch to. The light emission states of the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483 are continued while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

  Thereafter, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends as shown in FIG. 231 (b2) at the timing of t4. As a result, the 15R display unit 481 switches from the light emitting state to the unlit state as shown in FIG. 231 (b3) at the timing t4, and the 6R display unit 483 switches from the light emitting state to the unlit state as shown in FIG. 231 (b4). Switch to.

  According to the above configuration, both the 15R display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484 are in a light emitting state in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed. The situation where both the 15R display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484 are in a light emitting state does not occur in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is not executed, including the situation where a game is being executed. Thus, it is possible to notify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the 15R display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, both the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483 are in a light emitting state. The situation where both the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483 are in a light emitting state does not occur in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is not executed, including the situation where a game is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to notify whether or not the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed using the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the game execution content is different from the above-described 64 embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-mentioned 64th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 232 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  Even in this embodiment, the game board 24 is provided with the inner rail portion 401 and the outer rail portion 402 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The rail portion 402 constitutes a guide rail as guide means. The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning section 411, a first operating section 412, a second operating section 413, a through winning section 414, a special prize winning device 416, a variable display unit 421, a special figure unit 422, a universal figure unit 423, etc. It has been. The game area PA is divided into an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4 by a variable display unit 421. The general winning section 411, the first operating section 412, the second operating section 413, the through winning section 414, the special prize winning device 416, the variable display unit 421, the special figure unit 422, and the universal figure unit 423 are configured in the sixty-fourth embodiment. And the arrangement position in the game area PA are the same as those in the 64th embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the distribution winning device 415 in the 64th embodiment is not provided.

  Even if a game ball enters the through winning portion 414, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a game ball enters one of the general winning unit 4111, the first operating unit 412, the second operating unit 413, and the special electricity winning device 416, the number of game media usable by the player is increased. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out as much as possible. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when a game ball enters the general winning portion 411, 10 game balls are paid out, and the game ball enters the first operating portion 412. When a game ball is generated, three game balls are paid out. When a game ball enters the second operating unit 413, one game ball is paid out. When a game ball enters the ball, 15 game balls are paid out.

  A first guide nail 491a that guides all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through prize portion 414 is provided in an area above the through prize portion 414 in the right area PA3. By providing the first guide nail 491a, all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 pass through the through winning portion 414. However, since the game ball won in the through winning part 414 continues to flow down in the right area PA3, the second operating part 413 and the special electric prize provided downstream of the through winning part 414 in the right area PA3. Wins on device 416 may occur. Note that the game balls that flow into the right area PA3 are not limited to the configuration in which all the game balls flow into the through winning portion 414; It is good also as a structure which wins the part 414.

  A second guide nail 491b that guides all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the second action part 413 in the right area PA3 below the through winning part 414 and above the second action part 413. Is provided. By providing the second guide nail 491b, all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 surely flow into the passage portion 439a formed by the cover member 439 of the second operation portion 413. Therefore, the game ball that flows into the right area PA3 and is guided to the second operating part 413 by the second guide nail 491b in a situation where the guiding unit 432 of the second operating part 413 is in the guiding state is surely the second operating part 413. Will enter the ball. On the other hand, in the situation where the guidance unit 432 of the second operation part 413 is in the non-induction state, the game ball that flows into the right region PA3 and is guided to the second action part 413 by the second guide nail 491b is the second action part 413 Although it flows into the passage portion 439a by the cover member 439, it does not enter the second operating portion 413. The game ball passes through the passage portion 439a and flows down downstream of the second operating portion 413. For example, when the special electricity prize winning device 416 is in an open state, the game ball enters the special electricity prize winning device 416 with a high probability. In addition, when the special electricity prize-winning device 416 is in an open state, the game ball may be configured to surely enter the special electricity prize-winning device 416.

  In the above configuration, since the number of game balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the second operating unit 413 is one, even if frequent balls enter the second operating unit 413 substantially The number of game balls owned by the player does not increase. On the other hand, when the guiding unit 432 of the second operating part 413 is in the non-inducing state, even a game ball guided to the second guiding nail 491b does not enter the second operating part 413. Therefore, even if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode and the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state at a high frequency, as long as the opening / closing execution mode is generated and the game ball does not enter the special electricity prize device 416, Even if it becomes difficult for the game balls owned by the player to decrease, there is no increase.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various counter information in the game to perform winning occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display units 425 and 426, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 424, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 423a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 233, the random number counter C1 used for winning lottery, the type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 424 are disconnected. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when fluctuating, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and special game display units 425, 426 and symbol display device 424 A variation type counter CS that determines the display continuation period is used. Further, the utility utility release counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the guidance unit 432 of the second operation unit 413 is in the guidance execution state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is a special figure reservation area provided in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413 occurs. 451 is stored. The special figure reservation area 451 includes a first special figure reservation area 452, a second special figure reservation area 453, and a special drawing execution area 492.

  The first special figure holding area 452 includes a first area 452a, a second area 452b, a third area 452c, and a fourth area 452d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 452a to 452d as the hold information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d, the first area 452a → the second area 452b → the third area 452c → the third area 452d when a winning to the first operating unit 412 occurs continuously several times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the four areas 452d. By providing the four areas 452a to 452d as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating unit 412 are held and stored. The number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The second special figure holding area 453 includes a first area 453a, a second area 453b, a third area 453c, and a fourth area 453d, and a winning random number counter C1, according to the winning history to the second operating unit 413, Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 453a to 453d as the hold information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d, the first area 453a → the second area 453b → the third area 453c → the second area when the winning to the second operating unit 413 occurs continuously a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the four areas 453d. By providing the four areas 453a to 453d as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the second operating unit 413 are stored on hold. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The special drawing execution area 492 includes a first special drawing execution area 493 and a second special drawing execution area 494. The execution area 493 for the first special figure is the first special figure side to be subjected to the special decision determination / type determination process or the like when the first special figure display unit 425 starts the variable display of the pattern. This is the area where the hold information is stored. The second special figure execution area 494 is the second special figure side that is the target of the special figure success / failure determination process, type determination process, and the like when the second special figure display unit 426 starts to display the variation of the pattern. This is the area where the hold information is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425, the holding information on the first special figure side stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure holding area 452 is the first special figure holding area 452. It is moved to the execution area 493 for one special figure. On the other hand, when the variable display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426 is started, the holding information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure holding area 453 is the second special figure. Is moved to the execution area 494.

  The information corresponding to the general electric utility release counter C4 is stored in the general figure holding area 455 provided in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the through winning portion 414 occurs. The reserved map area 455 includes a first area 455a, a second area 455b, a third area 455c, and a fourth area 455d. According to the winning history to the through winning portion 414, the common utility release counter C4 is provided. Is stored in one of the areas 455a to 455d as the hold information on the normal side. In this case, in the first area 455a to the fourth area 455d, the first area 455a → the second area 455b → the third area 455c → the fourth when the winning to the through winning portion 414 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the area 455d. By providing the four areas 455a to 455d in this way, up to four game ball winning histories to the through winning portion 414 are held and stored. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the ordinary map reservation area 455 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be two, three, five or more, and the like. It may be.

  In the common map holding area 455, an execution area 456 for general maps is provided. The execution area 456 for the common map is the target map side where the guidance state lottery for determining whether or not the guidance unit 432 is set to the guidance state when starting the variable display on the universal map display unit 423a. This is the area where the hold information is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the general map display unit 423a, the general map hold information stored in the first area 455a of the general map hold area 455 moves to the general map execution area 456. Is done.

  Among the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4, the configuration related to the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, and the universal utility release counter C4 is the same as that in the 64th embodiment. On the other hand, the configuration relating to the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS is different from that of the 64th embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations related to the random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS will be described. In the present embodiment, the reach display does not occur in the symbol display device 424 in the game times corresponding to the small hit result, and the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed after the symbol variation is displayed.

  First, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 9999, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. Then, using the stored numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, a determination process is performed.

  The random number value that is won in the determination process is stored in the main ROM 64 as a determination table. As the success / failure tables, there are provided first success / failure tables 495 and 496 corresponding to the hold information on the first special figure side, and second success / failure tables 497 and 498 corresponding to the hold information on the second special figure side. Is provided. In the present embodiment, there are a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of a jackpot result is relatively high and low as the success / failure lottery mode.

  FIG. 234 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first success / failure table 495 at the time of low probability, which is referred to when the success / failure determination processing is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode. (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first success / failure table 496 at the time of high probability, which is referred to when performing the success / failure determination processing on the hold information on the first special figure side in the high probability mode, and FIG. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second success / failure table 497 at the low probability which is referred to when the success / failure determination processing is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side in the low probability mode, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table 498 at the time of the high probability referred when performing the success / failure determination process about the hold information on the second special figure side in the high probability mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 234 (a) to 234 (d), as in the sixty-fourth embodiment, as a result of the success / failure determination process, there are a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can be a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed, and can be a trigger for shifting to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close lottery mode and the support mode, while the special power prize winning device 416 is triggered to shift to the opening / closing execution mode. The detachment result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 234 (a), in the first hit / fail table 495 at the time of low probability, a big hit result, a small hit result and a miss result are set as the result of the hit / no-go determination process. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of an outlier result. Is set to On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of small hit 1000 is set as the number of pieces of information, and 8950 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8948 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 2”, is set with 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 1000 is set as the number of the numerical information of the counter C1, and 8946 is set as the number of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value one level higher than “setting 3”, is set with 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit result, and the hit random number that is the small hit result 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8944 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the hit result 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8942 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, 60 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of the small hit 1000 is set, and 8940 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of the losing.

  As shown in FIG. 234 (b), in the first success / failure table 496 at the time of high probability, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a lost result are set as the determination results of the success / failure determination. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of an outlier result. Is set to On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 500 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of small hit 1000 is set as the number of information, and 8500 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 520 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the result of a small hit 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8480 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is the result of losing. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 2”, is set with 540 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8460 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 3”, is set with 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 1000 is set as the number of the numerical information of the counter C1, and 8440 is set as the number of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 580 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8420 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a result of losing. The highest setting value “setting 6” is set to 600 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a small hit result. 1000 is set, and 8400 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a result of losing.

  In “Setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20 of that in the high probability mode. It is. In “Setting 2”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is about 1/192 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /19.2. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is about 1/185 in the low probability mode and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /18.5. In “Setting 4”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is about 1/179 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /17.9. In “Setting 5”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is about 1/172 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /17.2. In “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the side of the first special figure is about 1/167 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /16.7. In other words, in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the probability that the jackpot result is triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is the case of the low probability mode when the probability is the high probability mode. 10 times.

  On the other hand, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is 1/10, which is the same for any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In addition, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is 1/10, which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. That is, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is constant regardless of the setting state and the winning / losing lottery mode. In addition, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is higher than the probability of a big hitting result regardless of the setting state and the winning / losing lottery mode. However, when the hold information on the side of the first special figure is used as a trigger, the probability of being a result of losing is the highest probability regardless of the setting state and the lottery mode. In addition, the probability of a losing result when the hold information on the first special figure side is triggered is higher than the combined probability of the jackpot result and the jackpot result regardless of the setting state and the lottery mode. .

  Note that the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result may be set so as to be serial numbers, and at least a part or all of the numerical information is set to be distributed so as not to be serial numbers. It is good also as composition which has. Further, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit result may be set so as to be a sequential number, and at least a part or all of the numerical information may be set so as not to be a sequential number. It is good also as composition which has.

  As shown in FIG. 234 (c), a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set in the second hit / miss table 497 at the low probability as the result of the hit / fail judgment process. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of an outlier result. Is set to On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of small hit 9400 is set as the number of information, and 550 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of the loss. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 548 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of losing. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 2”, is set with 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 546 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of the losing. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value one level higher than “setting 3”, is set with 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit result, and the hit random number that is the small hit result 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 544 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the hit result 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 542 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, 60 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of the small hit 9400 are set, and 540 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing.

  As shown in FIG. 234 (d), in the second probability table 498 at the time of high probability, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a lost result are set as the results of the success / failure determination process. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of an outlier result. Is set to On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 500 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of small hit 9400 is set as the number of information, and 100 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 520 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the result of a small hit 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 80 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of losing. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 2”, is set with 540 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 60 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 3”, is set with 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 40 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 580 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 20 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing. The highest setting value “setting 6” is set to 600 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a small hit result. 9400 are set, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a result of losing is 0.

  In “Setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20 of 10 times in the high probability mode. It is. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/192 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /19.2. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/185 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /18.5. In “Setting 4”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1/179 in the low probability mode and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /17.9. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/172 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /17.2. In “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/167 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /16.7. In other words, in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the probability that the jackpot result is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is the case of the low probability mode in the case of the high probability mode. 10 times. In addition, the probability that the jackpot result is obtained when the combination of the setting state and the winning lottery mode combination is the same is based on the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side. It is the same as the case.

  On the other hand, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is approximately 1 / 1.06, which is the same for any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In addition, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is 1 / 1.06, which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In other words, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is constant regardless of the setting state and the lottery mode. The probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is higher than the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. In addition, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is higher than the probability of a big hitting result regardless of the setting state and the winning / losing lottery mode. In addition, when the hold information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small hit result is higher than the probability of a missed result regardless of the setting state and the lottery mode. Furthermore, the probability of a small hit result when triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is higher than the combined probability of the big hit result and the off result regardless of the setting state and the winning / failing lottery mode. .

  Note that the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result may be set so as to be serial numbers, and at least a part or all of the numerical information is set to be distributed so as not to be serial numbers. It is good also as composition which has. Further, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit result may be set so as to be a sequential number, and at least a part or all of the numerical information may be set so as not to be a sequential number. It is good also as composition which has.

  As described above, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the jackpot result will be higher if the hold information on the first special figure side is the trigger or the hold information on the second special figure side is the trigger. By being set, the higher the set value, the more advantageous for the player. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode is a period in which the amount of increase in the player's ball per unit time is the largest, and the probability of the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode varies according to the set value, It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability that a jackpot result is obtained in the high probability mode regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Is a certain number of times higher than “1” (specifically, 10 times) higher than the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the fluctuation rate of the probability of the jackpot result between the low probability mode and the high probability mode in any setting state.

  In addition, the probability that the jackpot result is obtained when the combination of the setting state and the winning lottery mode combination is the same is based on the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side. It is the same as the case. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence probability of the jackpot result between the case where the hold information on the first special figure side is triggered and the case where the hold information on the second special figure side is triggered. .

  In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is used as an opportunity, the probability of a small hit result is the same for any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, and the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and It is the same regardless of the high probability mode. In addition, the probability of a small hit result when triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is the same for any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” and the lottery mode is a low probability mode and It is the same regardless of the high probability mode. As a result, it is possible to limit the target that the player pays attention to in order to estimate the set value to the jackpot result, making it difficult to estimate the set value.

  On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is higher when the hold information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger than on the hold information on the first special figure side. Thus, the occurrence frequency of the small hit result when the game times are executed with the hold information on the first special figure side as the trigger and when the game times are executed with the hold information on the second special figure side as the trigger Can be made different.

  Further, the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result is larger than the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result in the first success / failure table 495, 496. In the configuration, the variation in the probability of the jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result. The number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the result of losing is the largest. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability variation of the outlier result due to the set value for absorbing the probability variation of the jackpot result due to the set value. Therefore, when the hold information on the first special figure side is used as an opportunity, it is possible to limit the target of attention to the jackpot result for the player to guess the set value, making it difficult to guess the set value. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result is smaller than the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result in the second success / failure tables 497 and 498. In the configuration, the variation in the probability of the jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result. And when it is "setting 6" which is the situation where the combined probability of the jackpot result and the small hit result is the highest, and in the high probability mode, the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side The probability of an outlier result in the situation is 0%. Thereby, when it is “setting 6” and the high probability mode is set, the combined probability of the jackpot result and the small hit result in the situation where the determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side is performed is suitably increased. It becomes possible.

  Next, the type counter C2 will be described. The type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 29, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. Then, a type determination process is performed using the stored value of the type counter C2.

  The type determination process using the type counter C2 is performed when a jackpot result is obtained in the success / failure determination process. On the other hand, the type determination process is not performed when a small hit result is obtained in the determination process. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set, whereas only one type of jackpot result is set. When the jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process, the type of jackpot result is selected using the type table 499 and the type counter C2 stored in advance in the main ROM 64. Hereinafter, the contents of each type of jackpot result and the contents of the jackpot result will be described.

  FIG. 235 (a) is referred to in order to sort the types of jackpot results when the jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the classification table 499. FIG. FIG. 235 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a plurality of types of jackpot results and the contents of one type of jackpot results.

  The type table 499 is referred to when a jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process triggered by the hold information for the first special figure, and the jackpot in the success / failure determination process triggered by the hold information for the second special figure Referenced when a result is selected. In other words, when a jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process triggered by the hold information for the first special figure, and when a jackpot result is selected in the success / failure judgment process triggered by the hold information for the second special figure In any case, the same type table 499 is referred to.

  In the type table 499, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), a 6R normal jackpot result, a 6R high probability jackpot result, and a 16R high probability jackpot result are set as types of jackpot results. The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “0 to 10” corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, the numerical information of the type counter C2 of “11 to 26” corresponds to the 6R high probability big hit result, The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “27-29” corresponds to the 16R high-precision hit result. That is, when a jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process, a 6R normal jackpot result is selected with a probability of 11/30, a 6R high probability jackpot result is selected with a probability of 16/30, and a probability of 3/30 is selected. The 16R high probability hit result is selected.

  When the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), the round game is generated six times in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the low-probability mode is set regardless of whether or not the lottery mode is before the opening / closing execution mode starts, and the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode starts. . However, this high-frequency support mode ends when the total number of game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side and the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is executed 50 times. And shift to the low frequency support mode.

  In the round game, as in the 64th embodiment, the opening / closing frequency of the special electric prize device 416 becomes the upper limit, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win the special electric prize device 416. A game that continues until one of the conditions is met. In the present embodiment, the special prize winning device 416 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the open duration in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Further, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric prize winning device 416 is set to ten. In the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Is set to a time longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit winning number of one round game. Therefore, it can be expected that more than the maximum number of game balls will be awarded to the special electricity prize winning device 416 in each round game.

  When the 6R high probability winning result is obtained, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), the round game is generated six times in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of whether or not the lottery mode is set before the opening / closing execution mode starts, and the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode starts. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the game round that will be the next jackpot result ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode will be terminated when the number of game times reaches the end reference number, but the end reference number will be a jackpot result. The configuration may be such that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the game times that will be the next jackpot result substantially end because the number of times is very large compared to the probability.

  When the 16R high probability winning result is obtained, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), the round game is generated 16 times in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the 16R high-accuracy big hit result is the most advantageous big hit result in terms of at least the number of round games executed. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the high probability mode is set regardless of the success / failure lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the low-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode is started. . These high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode continue until the next game round that results in a jackpot is completed. However, the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are not limited to this, and the game ends when the number of game times reaches the end reference number, but the end reference number is a jackpot result. The configuration may be such that the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode continue until the game times that will be the next jackpot result substantially end due to the extremely large number of times compared to the probability.

  When the small hit result is obtained, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode, the special prize winning device 416 is opened once. This one opening round ends when either one of two seconds elapses or the number of winnings to the special electric prize winning device 416 reaches ten. In this case, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player as already described, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is set so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Since the drive control is performed, the release continuation period of the release times is set to a time shorter than the product of the launch period of the game balls and the upper limit winning number of the release times. Therefore, in the opening round, basically, no more than the upper limit number of game balls are won in the special electric prize winning device 416, and the special electric prize winning device 416 is in a closed state after the opening duration of 2 seconds elapses. . Even if the small hit result is generated, the winning / raising lottery mode and the support mode are maintained in the mode before the opening / closing execution mode is started.

  As described above, the small hit result can be selected in the success / failure determination process regardless of whether the hold information on the first special figure side is triggered or the hold information on the second special figure side is triggered. However, the probability that the small hit result is selected is higher when the hold information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger than on the hold information on the first special figure side. More specifically, when the hold information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability that the small hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process is higher than the combined probability of the jackpot result and the outlier result. Thus, when the hold information on the first special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability that the outlier result is selected is higher than the probability that the small hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process. Therefore, the high-frequency support mode in which the winning frequency to the second operation unit 413 is high has a higher probability of having a small hit result per unit number of shots than the low-frequency support mode. However, the expected number of game balls that will be awarded to the special electric prize winning device 416 when the small hit result is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is lower in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode Many. The reason why such an event occurs will be described below.

  FIG. 235 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode. In either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, the probability that the guidance state wins in the guidance state lottery for determining whether to control the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 to the guidance state is It is the same at 95%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the guidance state may be substantially the same in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode is better than the low frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure with high probability of becoming a guidance state winning.

  The display continuation period of the variable image display in the general map display unit 423a executed when the guidance state lottery is executed is 4 seconds in the low-frequency support mode, whereas the high-frequency support mode. Is 0.1 seconds. While the change display of the pattern is being displayed on the general map display unit 423a, the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the guidance state even if the general map side hold information is stored in the general map storage area 455. Not. When the guidance unit 432 of the second operation unit 413 is in the non-induction state, the game ball that has flowed into the right region PA3 is located at the position of the special prize winning device 416 existing on the downstream side of the second operation unit 413. Can reach.

  When the guidance unit is won, the guidance unit 432 performs the guidance state in the low-frequency support mode, whereas the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state only once over 2 seconds. In the frequency support mode, the guidance unit 432 is in a guidance state only once for 6 seconds. Note that the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 also ends when the number of winnings to the second operating unit 413 reaches 10 which is the maximum number of winnings, but as described above, the firing operation device 28 is used by the player. Since the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds in the situation operated by the When 432 is in the guiding state for 2 seconds and in the high frequency support mode, the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state for 6 seconds.

  Due to the above configuration, in the high-frequency support mode, there is a high probability that the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state winning state with a high probability of 95%, and the display duration of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 423a is 0.1 seconds. The induction unit 432 enters the induction state for 6 seconds in the induction state. As already described, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 basically win the through winning portion 414 and basically win the second operating portion 413 if the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the right area PA3, the guidance unit 432 is basically in the guidance state and the second operating unit 413 is awarded a prize. As a result, the game ball does not flow downstream of the second operating portion 413. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, although winning to the second operating unit 413 occurs frequently, a small hit result is generated by the hold information on the second special figure side, and the special electric prize winning device 416 Even if the open state is reached, the game ball does not reach the position where the special electric prize winning device 416 can be entered, so that the special electric prize winning device 416 is basically not won. Incidentally, the number of game balls to be paid out is one even if a win to the second operating unit 413 occurs, so even if a win to the second operating unit 413 occurs frequently in the high-frequency support mode. The number of game balls owned by the person does not increase.

  On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, there is a high probability of 95% that the guidance unit 432 is elected to the guidance state, and the display duration of the picture on the normal display portion 423a is longer than the game ball firing cycle of 4 seconds. It is time, and in the induction state, the induction unit 432 is in the induction state for 2 seconds. As already described, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 basically win the through winning portion 414 and basically win the second operating portion 413 if the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball is continuously fired so as to flow down the right area PA3, the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state, so that the winning to the second operating unit 413 may occur. The game ball can reach the position of the special electricity prize winning device 416 on the downstream side of the second operating unit 413. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the second operating unit 413 is lower than that in the high frequency support mode, but the result of the small hitting is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side. Winning to the special electric prize winning device 416 in the open state may occur.

  In the low-frequency support mode, in the configuration in which a winning to the special electric prize winning device 416 that is in an open state can be generated due to a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, the second special figure display The right region in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode by differentiating the display duration of the game times in the part 426 between the case where the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the case where the lottery mode is the high probability mode Even if the launch operation is performed so as to flow down PA3, while the profit per unit time is extremely low, the launch operation is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3 in the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If done, the profit per unit time will be high. The configuration will be described below.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to “0”. The variation type counter CS includes a display continuation period (that is, a pattern variation display period) of the symbol variation display in the special symbol display units 425 and 426 and a symbol display continuation period (that is, a symbol variation display period) in the symbol display device 424. Is used in determining the main CPU 63 (these display continuation periods are also referred to as game continuation display continuation periods). The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display units 425 and 426 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 424. The setting mode of the display duration of game times will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. The numbers “0 to 99” in FIG. 236 correspond to the value of the variation type counter CS.

  In the low probability mode, the setting mode of the game duration display duration in the first special figure display unit 425 is the normal setting mode. In the normal setting mode, as shown in FIG. 236, if the result of the success / failure determination process is a disapproval result and a complete disengagement where a reach effect does not occur, the upper limit number (specifically, in the first special figure reservation area 452). Is 4) When a new game is started in the situation where the hold information on the first special figure side is stored, 2 seconds is selected as the display duration of the game number, and the first special figure is held. When a new game turn is started in a situation where the upper limit number of first special figure side hold information is not stored in the area 452, the game continuation display duration is any of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds. Is selected. In addition, in the normal setting mode, the result of the success / failure determination process is a disapproval result, but in the case of a disapproval reach where a reach effect occurs, the case where the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result, and the result of the success / failure determination process is a small hit result. In any case, any one of 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 1 minute, 1 minute 30 seconds, and 2 minutes is selected as the display duration of the game times. In this case, it is easier for the jackpot result or the small hit result to be selected for a longer duration than for a missed reach, and the selected average duration is also larger for the jackpot result or the jackpot result than for a missed reach. It is getting longer.

  On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting mode of the game continuation display duration in the second special figure display unit 426 is a long-term setting mode. In the long-term setting mode, the display duration of the selected game times is only one type, and the display of the one type of game times is continued regardless of whether the target game times are determined or not. A period is selected. The display duration of the selected game times is 10 minutes. The display continuation period is longer than 2 minutes, which is the display continuation period of the longest game time selected in the normal selection mode. Thereby, in the low probability mode, the execution frequency of the game times in the second special figure display unit 426 is lower than the execution frequency of the game times in the first special figure display unit 425.

  In the high probability mode, the display duration setting mode of the game times is different from that in the low probability mode. Specifically, in the high probability mode, the display duration of the game times on the first special figure display unit 425 is only one type regardless of whether or not the reach effect is generated when the result of the determination is incorrect. Is selected, and only one type is selected as a selection target even if the result of the determination is a big hit result or a small hit result. In this case, the display duration of the game times in the case of the big hit result or the small hit result is set longer than the display duration of the game times in the case of a loss result, specifically in the case of a loss result The display continuation period of game times is 30 seconds when the display continuation period of game times is 10 seconds, whereas the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained.

  In the high probability mode, the display duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 426 is selected as 0.5 seconds with a probability of 9/10 when the determination result is an outlier result or a small hit result. One minute and 30 seconds are selected with a probability of 10. On the other hand, when the determination result is a jackpot result, only one type of 1 minute 30 seconds is selected.

  When game times are executed in the second special figure display unit 426 in the high probability mode and a small hit result is obtained, the display duration of the game times is 0.5 seconds with a high probability, The total period of the game times including the final stop period of the game times is 1 second. On the other hand, as already explained, in the low frequency support mode, the display continuation period of the general-purpose display unit 423a is 4 seconds and the guidance unit 432 continues to be guided for 2 seconds. When a winning in the unit 413 occurs, a small hit result is obtained with a high probability, and in the opening / closing execution mode in the case of the small hit result, the period in which the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state is 2 seconds. Then, in the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game ball launch operation is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3 to the special electric prize winning device 416 which is in an open state with the small hit result as an opportunity. The frequency of winning is higher than in other situations. In the situation where the winning frequency is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the number of game balls owned by the player is determined when the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right area PA3. The winning frequency is set to increase.

  As described above, the trigger for generating the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is the 16R high probability hit result. In the case of a 16R high probability big hit result, a situation where the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set until a new big hit result occurs after the opening / closing execution mode in which round games occur 16 times is performed. Will continue. And, as described above, in the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game ball launch operation is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3. The frequency at which the winning to the device 416 occurs is a game owned by the player when the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right area PA3 in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The winning frequency is set so that the number of balls increases. Accordingly, the game ball possessed by the player increases as the number of game times in the second special figure display unit 426 executed until a new jackpot result is generated after the opening / closing execution mode is completed after the 16R high-accuracy big hit result is obtained. Will increase in number. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects that no jackpot result will occur.

  Even if a jackpot result occurs, if it is a 16R high probability jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is generated 16 times is performed, the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode occurs again. It will be. Therefore, the player expects that the jackpot result will not be generated, but if the jackpot result is obtained, the player expects a 16R high probability jackpot result.

  When the 6R high probability winning result is generated, after the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is generated six times is performed, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set. The situation continues until a new jackpot result occurs. In this situation, as described above, the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down in the right area PA3. However, although the winning to the second operating unit 413 occurs frequently, the small hit result results in an open state. The prize winning to the special electric prize winning device 416 is basically not generated. Therefore, in this situation, the number of game balls owned by the player cannot be increased, but the next jackpot result can be generated while not decreasing so much. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects the jackpot result to occur early.

  When the 6R normal jackpot result occurs, after the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is generated six times is performed, the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set. Even in this situation, a special operation prize that is open due to a small hit result, although winning to the second operating unit 413 occurs frequently by performing a launch operation so that the game ball flows down in the right area PA3 There is basically no winning in the device 416. However, the success / failure lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and when the number of game times is 50, the high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is entered. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects that the next jackpot result will occur within a range in which the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls owned by the player.

  In the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, even if the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down in the right area PA3, the display duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 426 is extreme. 10 minutes long. In this case, even if the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down in the right area PA3, the digestion efficiency of the game is deteriorated. Therefore, the player performs the launch operation so that the game ball flows down in the left area PA2. Become. A game operation in the first special figure display unit 425 is executed by performing a launch operation so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2. The display duration of the game times in this case is the normal setting mode as already described.

<First Special Figure Special Electric Control Process and Second Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the first special figure special power control process and the second special figure special electric control process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described. In this embodiment, unlike the 64th embodiment described above, the game times can be started in the second special figure display unit 426 even if the game times are being executed in the first special figure display unit 425, and Even in a situation where game times are being executed in the 2 special figure display unit 426, the game times can be started in the first special figure display unit 425. Accordingly, the first special figure special electric control process is set as the special special figure special electric control process for the first special figure display unit 425, and the second special figure special electric control process for the second special figure display unit 426 is set. Special electric control processing is set. These first special figure special electric control process and second special figure special electric control process are executed in place of the special figure special electric control process in the 64th embodiment, and are steps in the first timer interruption process (FIG. 133). This is executed in S8913.

  FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special electric control process, and FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the second special figure special electric control process. In addition, the process of step SF101-step SF111 in a 1st special figure special electric control process, and the process of step SF201-step SF211 in a 2nd special figure special electric control process are the program for specific control in the main side CPU63, and the data for specific control. It is executed using

  In the first special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 237), first, the holding process of the hold information on the first special figure side is executed (step SF101). In the acquisition process, when a winning to the first operating unit 412 has occurred, the number of hold information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is the upper limit storage number (specifically, On the condition that it is less than 4), the storage processing of the hold information on the first special figure side is executed. In the storing process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the hold information on the first special figure side, and the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d of the first special figure hold area 452. In the area where the hold information on the first special figure side in FIG. When the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 427 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information on the first special figure side this time. Set the data to make sure. When the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of reserved information stored in the holding information on the first special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the holding information on the first special figure side.

  In the second special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 238), first, a hold information acquisition process on the second special figure side is executed (step SF201). In the acquisition process, when the winning to the second operating unit 413 occurs, the number of the hold information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 453 is the upper limit storage number (specifically, On the condition that it is less than 4), the storage processing of the hold information on the second special figure side is executed. In the storing process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the hold information on the second special figure side, and the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d of the second special figure hold area 453 are used. In the area where the hold information on the second special figure side is not stored, it is stored in the area on the faster digestion order side. When the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 428 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information on the second special figure side this time. Set the data to make sure. When the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of reserved information stored in the hold information on the second special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the hold information on the second special figure side.

  Returning to the description of the first special figure special power control process (FIG. 237) and the second special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 238), after executing the holding information acquisition process (step SF101 or step SF201), the main ROM 64 The stored special figure special electricity address table is read (step SF101, step SF202). In the case of the first special figure special power control process (FIG. 237), the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special electric power counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step SF103). The process jumps to the process shown (step SF104). In the case of the second special figure special power control process (FIG. 238), the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the second special figure special electric power counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step SF203). The process jumps to the process shown (step SF204).

  The first special figure special electricity counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes of steps SF105 to SF111 in the first special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 237) should be executed. is there. The second special figure special electricity counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes of steps SF205 to SF211 in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238) should be executed. is there. In the special figure special power address table, the start address in the program for executing each processing of step SF105 to step SF111 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the first special figure special electric power counter, and the second special figure special electric power counter The start address in the program for executing each processing of step SF205 to step SF211 is set in correspondence with the numerical information.

  When the value of the first special figure special electric counter or the second special figure special electric counter is “0”, the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step SF105 or step SF205, and the first special figure special electric counter or the second special figure When the value of the special electricity counter is “1”, the process jumps to the special figure changing process of step SF106 or step SF206, and the value of the first special figure special electricity counter or the second special figure special electricity counter is “2”. In step SF107 or step SF207, the process jumps to the special figure finalizing process. If the value of the first special figure special electric counter or the second special figure special electric counter is “3”, the special electric charge starting process in step SF108 or step SF208 is executed. When the value of the first special figure special electric counter or the second special figure special electric counter is “4”, step SF109 or step SF2 9 jumps to the special electric power release opening process, and if the value of the first special figure special electric counter or the second special electric figure special counter is “5”, jumps to the special electric charge closing process of step SF110 or step SF210. When the value of the special figure special electricity counter or the second special figure special electricity counter is “6”, the process jumps to the special electricity ending process of step SF111 or step SF211. Hereafter, each process of step SF105-step SF111 and step SF205-step SF211 is demonstrated separately.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in step SF105 and step SF205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the processing of step SF301 to step SF317 in the special figure variation start processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In the special figure variation start process, it is first determined whether or not the process for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 237 and 238) (step SF301). As already described, even if the game times are being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426, the game times can be executed on the other side. In this case, step SF301 is executed, and if the process for the opening / closing execution mode is executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 237 and 238), the process after step SF302 is executed. The start of a new game round is regulated. Thus, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed in response to the game time in one of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426, the game time in the other is not newly started. Be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the opening / closing execution mode. If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), it is determined in step SF301 whether or not the value of the second special figure special electric counter is three or more. In this case, the processing after step SF302 is not executed. If this time is the special figure variation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), it is determined in step SF301 whether or not the value of the first special figure special electric counter is three or more. In this case, the processing after step SF302 is not executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step SF301, it is determined whether or not the corresponding number of holds is one or more (step SF302). If this time is the special figure variation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of hold information on the first special figure side are stored in the first special figure hold area 452. If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), whether or not one or more pieces of holding information on the second special figure side are stored in the second special figure holding area 453. Determine.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SF302, a data setting process is executed (step SF303). In the data setting process, if this time is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the data stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure reservation area 452 is stored in the execution area 493 for the first special figure. Moving. Thereafter, processing for shifting data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 452 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 452a to 452d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the second area 452b → the first area 452a, the third area 452c → the second area 452b, the fourth area 452d → the third area 452c, and the like, the data in each area is shifted and the fourth area 452d. Is cleared to “0”. In the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 427 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the first special figure side this time. In the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Thereby, the image for alerting | reporting the number of holding | maintenance memory | storage of the hold information by the side of the 1st special figure in the symbol display apparatus 424 is updated corresponding to the reduction | decrease of the hold information by the 1st special figure side.

  In the data setting process, if this time is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), the data stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure reservation area 453 is stored in the execution area 494 for the second special figure. Moving. Thereafter, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 453 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted and the fourth area 453d, such as the second area 453b → first area 453a, the third area 453c → second area 453b, and the fourth area 453d → third area 453c. Is cleared to “0”. In the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 428 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the second special figure side this time. In the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the number of reserved information stored in the hold information on the second special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the decrease in the hold information on the second special figure side.

  After executing the data setting process, the validity determination process is executed (step SF304). In the success / failure determination process, when the current game time is triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, the first success / failure table 495, 496 corresponding to the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 and the success / failure lottery mode (see FIG. 234 (a) and FIG. 234 (b)) are read from the main ROM 64. Then, the numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 is read out of the holding information on the first special figure side that has triggered the start of the current game round, and the read numerical information is stored in the first success / failure tables 495, 496. By collating, it is specified whether the current result of the success / failure determination process is a big hit result, a small hit result, or a lost result. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination process, when the current game round is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, the second success / failure tables 497 and 498 corresponding to the current set values and the success / failure lottery mode of the pachinko machine 10. (See FIGS. 234 (c) and 234 (d)) is read from the main ROM 64. Then, the numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 is read out from the holding information on the second special figure side that has triggered the start of this game round, and the read numerical information is stored in the second success / failure tables 497 and 498. By collating, it is specified whether the current result of the success / failure determination process is a big hit result, a small hit result, or a lost result.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result (step SF305: YES), the type determination process is executed (step SF306). In the type determination process, the type table 499 shown in FIG. 235 (a) is read from the main ROM 64. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is an opportunity for this game, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the first special figure side, and the hold on the second special figure side When the information is the trigger of the current game round, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the second special figure side. The numerical information on the read type counter C2 is in the numerical range of any type of jackpot result among the 6R normal jackpot result, 6R high probability jackpot result, and 16R high probability jackpot result set in the type table 499. Determine if it is compatible.

  After executing the type determination process, “1” is set to the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the type determination process (step SF307). The state of the flag in which “1” is set is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step SF308). Specifically, the information on the pattern stop mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 that is the execution target of the game round. Are identified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In this jackpot result stop result table, the types of the pattern stop modes displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426 are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step SF308, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step SF306 is stored in the main RAM 65. In addition, the pattern stop mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some jackpot results. Although the method for selecting the stop result for the jackpot result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

  If the result of the determination process is a small hit result (step SF309: YES), “1” is set to the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the small hit result (step SF310). The state of the flag in which “1” is set is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step SF311). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information is read out. Store in the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  When the result of the determination process is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step SF305 and step SF309: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step SF312). Specifically, the information on the pattern stop mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 that is the execution target of the game round. Is specified from the stop result table for the outlier stored in advance in the main ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The picture mode information selected in this case is different from the picture mode information selected for the jackpot result and the picture mode information selected for the jackpot result.

  After executing any of the stop result setting processes, a display continuation period grasping process is performed (step SF313). In this process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and the current status and the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the variation type counter CS are selected in the manner shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  After that, as a result of the current pass / fail determination process and type determination process, the current type of correct / incorrect lottery mode, the current support mode type, and the change command and type command corresponding to the process result of step SF313 are selected from the main ROM 64. To do. Then, the selected variation command and type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SF314). The sound emission control device 81 executes control for causing the effect for game times corresponding to the received variation command and type command to be executed.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the pattern is started on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 that is the execution target of the current game round (step SF315). The first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit are used as tables to be referred to by the main CPU 63 when the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426 displays the variation of the picture. A special display variation display table common to 426 is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. The When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the variation display of the pattern by a predetermined pattern is repeated. The control data for one round in the pattern variation display by the predetermined pattern is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the variable display table for special figures until the display duration of the game times determined in step SF313 elapses. Will be used repeatedly.

  Thereafter, the special display unit 429 is turned off (step SF316). In the special display unit 429, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. In other words, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 6R normal jackpot result or 6R high-probability jackpot result, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special display unit 429 performs six round games. Corresponding display is performed. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs when the 16R high probability winning result is obtained, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, a display corresponding to 16 round games is displayed on the special display unit 429. Is called. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs when the small hitting result is triggered, a display corresponding to the small hitting result is performed on the special display unit 429 when the opening / closing execution mode is started. In the above-described configuration, the display on the special display unit 429 that is started when the opening / closing execution mode is started by executing the extinguishing process of the special display unit 429 in step SF316 of the special figure variation start process indicates the opening / closing execution mode. When a new game is started after ending. The special display unit 429 is kept off until a new opening / closing execution mode is generated.

  Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 238), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter (step SF317). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special figure fluctuation in-process ( It becomes “1” corresponding to step SF106, step SF206).

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step SF106 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) and step SF206 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

  If the display duration of the current game times has not elapsed, and if it is the update timing of the display contents of the special figure display units 425 and 426 that are the execution targets of the current game times, By referring to the fluctuation display table, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 425 and 426 is performed. Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the special figure display part 425,426 used as the execution object of this game round is updated to the display content of the next order. The main side RAM 65 has a first display order counter that is referred to in order to derive the display contents of the pattern from the variable display table for the special figure when the first special figure display unit 425 reaches the update timing of the pattern. Is provided. The main side RAM 65 has a second display order counter which is referred to in order to derive the display contents of the pattern from the variable display table for the special figure when the second special figure display unit 426 reaches the update timing of the pattern. Is provided.

  In the special figure display units 425 and 426, the mode at the start of the pattern variation display and the pattern variation display update mode are performed in a certain mode regardless of the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. Regardless of the contents of the effects for the game times in the symbol display device 424, it is performed in a certain manner. For example, when a predetermined multiple update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in a constant display order is repeatedly performed, and the display duration of the game times has elapsed In any situation where the display patterns are displayed in any order, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 425 and 426.

  On the other hand, when the game continuation display duration has elapsed, information on the pattern stop mode of the special figure display units 425 and 426 stored in the main RAM 65 at the start of the game cycle is read and the pattern stop mode and Thus, the special figure display units 425 and 426 that are the execution targets of the current game round are controlled to be displayed. As a result, in the special figure display units 425 and 426 that are the execution targets of the current game round, the pattern corresponding to the result of the current game round determination process and the type determination process are displayed. Fluctuation display is stopped. Regardless of whether or not the display mode is the open / close execution mode, the mode of the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the special figure display units 425 and 426 is maintained until the next variable display of the special figure display units 425 and 426 is started. Is done. Further, information on the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Thereby, the measurement of the last stop period is started.

  Thereafter, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the final stop command from the main CPU 63, the sound emission control device 81 transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82. When the display controller 82 receives the final stop command from the sound emission controller 81, the display controller 82 reads a display pattern table for stopping and displaying the combination of stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. Thereby, the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the current game time is stopped and displayed in the symbol display device 424 over the final stop period.

  Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 238), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter. Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation process is executed is “1”, the value of the special figure special electricity counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special figure finalizing process ( “2” corresponding to step SF107 and step SF207).

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 240 for the special figure finalizing process executed in step SF107 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) and step SF207 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238). While explaining. Note that the processing in steps SF401 to SF409 in the special figure determination processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  When the final stop period has elapsed and the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result (step SF401 and step SF402: YES), the jackpot setting process is executed (step SF403). In the jackpot setting process, if the current jackpot result is a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R high-probability jackpot result, display control is performed on the special display unit 429 so that display corresponding to six round games is started. Set the data for In the jackpot setting process, if the current jackpot result is a 16R high-probability jackpot result, data for display control of the special display unit 429 so that display corresponding to 16 round games is started. Set up.

  When the final stop period has elapsed and the current game time corresponds to the small hit result (step SF401 and step SF404: YES), a setting process for small hit is executed (step SF405). In the setting process for small hits, data setting for display control of the special display unit 429 is performed so that display corresponding to the small hit result is started.

  When the process of step SF403 or step SF405 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 237 and 238) is cleared to “0” (step SF406). As a result, even if the execution control of the game times is performed in the special figure special power control process (FIGS. 237, 238) on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 237, 238). Times are forcibly terminated. That is, in the situation where game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426, when one game round that results in a big hit result or a small hit result ends, the other The game times will also end in the middle. Thereafter, the other game times end process is executed (step SF407). In the termination process, the special figure display units 425 and 426 on the side where the game times are forcibly terminated are displayed corresponding to the result of the detachment.

  Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 238), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter (step SF408). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special electric counter to be added by adding 1 is designated as the special electricity start process (step SF108). , “3” corresponding to step SF208).

  If the current game round is a missed result (step SF404: NO), if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is set to " If the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step SF409). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step SF105, step SF205).

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process executed in step SF108 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) and step SF208 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

  In the special electric power start process, if it is before the start of the opening period, measurement of the opening period (for example, 4 seconds) is started and an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the opening command, the sound emission control device 81 performs the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the opening effect is executed. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an opening command to the display control device 82. When receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 424 so that the opening effect is executed.

  In the special electricity start process, if the opening period has passed, if this time is triggered by any of the jackpot results, the round counter provided in the main RAM 65 corresponds to the number of round games executed in the current open / close execution mode. Set the information to be used. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode, and the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 each time a round game is executed. In addition, the information on the continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the special prize winning device 416 in one round game is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 65. Information (specifically “10”) corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings is set. On the other hand, if this time is triggered by the small hit result, “1” is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 65. Also, information on the duration of opening of the small hit result (specifically 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter provided in the main RAM 65, and the special prize winning in the small hit result is set in the win counter provided in the main RAM 65. Information (specifically, “10”) corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the device 416 is set.

  After that, an open setting process for special electricity is executed. In the opening setting process, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is started so that the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 238), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter. When the special electricity start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3”. Therefore, the value of the special figure special electricity counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special electricity release process (step SF109, It becomes “4” corresponding to step SF209).

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special electric release opening process executed in step SF109 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) and step SF209 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

  In the special electric release opening process, the closing setting process is executed when the opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 416 has elapsed, or when the special electric prize winning device 416 has won a maximum number of winning game balls. In the closing setting process, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is stopped so that the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the closed state. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter in the main RAM 65.

  When the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is not “0”, information corresponding to the closing duration (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 238), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special electric charge closing process (step SF110). , “5” corresponding to step SF210).

  When the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is “0”, information corresponding to the ending period (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Also, an ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 81 performs the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the ending effect is executed. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an ending command to the display control device 82. When receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 424 so that the ending effect is executed. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 2, and the present process is the second special figure special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 238), 2 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter. Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 2 is the special electric charge termination process (step SF111, It becomes “6” corresponding to step SF211).

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electric power closing process executed in step SF110 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) and step SF210 of the second special electric figure special electric control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

  When the closing continuation period has elapsed, information on the continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65, and one round game is stored in the winning counter of the main RAM 65. The information (specifically “10”) corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electric prize winning device 416 is set. Then, the special electricity winning device 416 is opened by executing the special electricity release setting process. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is decremented by 1, and the current process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 238), 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special figure special counter. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special electric charge closing process is executed is “5”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the object of subtraction by subtracting 1 is the special electric charge opening process (step SF109). , “4” corresponding to step SF209).

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special electric power end process executed in step SF111 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) and step SF211 of the second special electric figure special electric control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

  When the ending period has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In this transition process, if the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a 6R normal jackpot result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. In addition, when the total number of game times reaches 50 times, information for ending the high frequency support mode is also set. When the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a 6R high probability winning result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. When the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a 16R high probability winning result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit result, the process for changing the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode from before the opening / closing execution mode is started is not executed.

  Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to “0”, and the present process is the second special figure special electric control. If it corresponds to the process (FIG. 238), the value of the second special figure special counter is cleared to “0”. Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step SF105, step SF205).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Fluctuation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result in the determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side is determined whether or not the set information on the first special figure side is on hold It is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be an outlier result in the processing. As a result, it is possible to obtain a jackpot result in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side, while not affecting the probability of being a small hit result in the determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side. Probability can be varied.

  The number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small hit result in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the probability that the small hit result is selected in the determination processing for the hold information on the hold information on the first special figure side for all set values. In addition, even in such a configuration in which the probability that a small hit result is selected in the determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side is constant, the determination process for the hold information on the hold information on the first special figure side is performed. Because the variation of each set value of the probability that the jackpot result is selected is absorbed by the variation of the probability that the outlier result is selected, the jackpot result is selected in the decision processing for the hold information on the first special figure side It is possible to set the probability of being set to a probability according to the set value.

  The number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be an outlier result in the determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side is the largest for any of the set values. As a result, the variation in each set value of the probability that the jackpot result is selected in the determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side is selected in the determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side. Even if it is a structure that absorbs the fluctuation amount of the probability to be generated, the probability that the result of losing result in the determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side will not cause a large fluctuation among the set values of multiple stages. It becomes possible to do.

  Fluctuation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result in the determination process of whether or not the hold information on the second special figure side is determined to be true or false on the hold information on the second special figure side It is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be an outlier result in the processing. As a result, it is possible to obtain a jackpot result in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side, while not affecting the probability of a small hit result in the determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side. Probability can be varied.

  The number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small hit result in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the probability that the small hit result is selected in the determination process for the hold information on the hold information on the second special figure side for all set values. In addition, even if the probability that a small hit result is selected in the determination process for determining whether or not to hold information on the second special figure side is constant, the determination process for determining whether or not to hold information on the second special figure side will be used. Because the variation of each set value of the probability that the jackpot result is selected is absorbed by the variation of the probability that the outlier result is selected, the jackpot result is selected in the determination process of the hold information on the second special figure side It is possible to set the probability of being set to a probability according to the set value.

  In a situation where the setting value is “setting 6” and the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode in the situation where the probability of being a jackpot result is the highest in the success / failure determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side, The number of pieces of numerical information in the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a result of losing in the determination process of whether or not to hold information on the special figure side is zero. As a result, the variation in each set value of the probability of being a jackpot result in the determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side is calculated as the probability that the result of the success determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side is an outlier result. In the configuration that absorbs the fluctuation, it is possible to increase the probability of the jackpot result as much as possible in the situation where the probability of the jackpot result is the highest as described above.

  The probability of a small hit result in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side is the same regardless of the set value and the success / failure lottery mode. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the winning / losing lottery mode from the probability of the small hit result.

  The probability of a small hit result not only in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side but also in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side is either the set value or the success / failure lottery mode. Are the same. As a result, in both the determination process for the hold information on the first figure side and the determination process for the hold information on the second figure side, the set value and the lottery mode are determined based on the probability of the small hit result. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing both.

  The probability that a small hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side is different from the probability that the small hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side. Yes. As a result, not only in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side, but also in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side, the probability of the small hit result is any of the set value and the success / failure lottery mode. Even in the same configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a small hit result is different.

  Instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, each of the numbers of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot result when the success / failure determination process is executed for the hold information on the first special figure side. The variation in the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information in the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small hit result when the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  Further, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, each of the numbers of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result when the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side The variation in the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information in the hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small hit result when the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  In addition, when the winning / failing determination process is executed on the hold information on the first special figure side, the small hit result can be selected. Instead, on the hold information on the first special figure side A configuration may be adopted in which a small hit result is not selected when the success / failure determination process is executed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the success / failure table referred to in the success / failure determination process are different from those in the 69th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 69th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 69th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 241 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first success / failure table 495 at the low probability that is referred to when performing the acceptance / rejection determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode. (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first success / failure table 496 at a high probability that is referred to when performing the success / failure determination processing on the hold information on the first special figure side in the high probability mode, and FIG. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second success / failure table 501 at the low probability that is referred to when the success / failure determination processing is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side in the low probability mode, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table 502 at the time of high probability referred when performing the success / failure determination process about the hold information on the 2nd special figure side in high probability mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), the contents of the first success / failure table 495 at the low probability and the first success / failure table 496 at the high probability are the same as those in the 69th embodiment. On the other hand, the contents of the second success / failure table 501 at the low probability shown in FIG. 241 (c) and the contents of the second success / failure table 502 at the high probability shown in FIG. 241 (d) are different from those of the 69th embodiment. The second success / failure table 501 at the low probability and the second success / failure table 502 at the high probability will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (c), in the second winning / failing table 501 at the time of low probability, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a lost result are set as the determination results of the hit / fail determination process. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of an outlier result. Is set to On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of small hit 9300 is set as the number of information, and 650 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of losing. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9300 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 648 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 2”, is set with 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9300 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 646 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 3”, is set with 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the hit result 9300 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 644 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the hit result 9300 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 642 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, 60 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of the small hit 9300 is set as 640, and 640 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a result of losing.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (d), in the second success / failure table 502 at the time of high probability, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the determination results of the success / failure determination process. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of an outlier result. Is set to On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 500 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of small hit 9300 is set as the number of information, and 200 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the result of losing. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 520 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the result of a small hit 9300 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 180 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 2”, is set with 540 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9300 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 160 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is the result of losing. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 3”, is set with 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9300 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 140 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 580 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9300 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 120 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing. The highest setting value “setting 6” is set to 600 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a small hit result. 9300 are set as 100, and 100 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing.

  In “Setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20 of 10 times in the high probability mode. It is. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/192 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /19.2. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/185 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /18.5. In “Setting 4”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1/179 in the low probability mode and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /17.9. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/172 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /17.2. In “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/167 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /16.7. In other words, in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the probability that the jackpot result is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is the case of the low probability mode in the case of the high probability mode. 10 times. In addition, the probability that the jackpot result is obtained when the combination of the setting state and the winning lottery mode combination is the same is based on the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side. It is the same as the case.

  On the other hand, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1 / 1.08 which is the same for any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In addition, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is 1 / 1.08 which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In other words, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is constant regardless of the setting state and the lottery mode. The probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is higher than the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. In addition, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is higher than the probability of a big hitting result regardless of the setting state and the winning / losing lottery mode. In addition, when the hold information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small hit result is higher than the probability of a missed result regardless of the setting state and the lottery mode. Furthermore, the probability of a small hit result when triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is higher than the combined probability of the big hit result and the off result regardless of the setting state and the winning / failing lottery mode. .

  Note that the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result may be set so as to be serial numbers, and at least a part or all of the numerical information is set to be distributed so as not to be serial numbers. It is good also as composition which has. Further, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit result may be set so as to be a sequential number, and at least a part or all of the numerical information may be set so as not to be a sequential number. It is good also as composition which has.

  According to the above configuration, the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result than the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result in the second success / failure table 497, 498. In the configuration with the smaller number, the variation in the probability of the jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information in the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result. In this case, in the case of “setting 6”, which is the situation in which the combined probability of the jackpot result and the jackpot result is the highest, and in the high probability mode, the determination processing for the second special figure side holding information is performed. Even in a broken situation, the probability of a detachment result is 1/100. As a result, in the case of “Setting 6” and the high probability mode, it is possible to select a detachment result even in a situation where the determination of whether or not the hold information on the second special figure side is determined. It becomes possible.

71st Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the contents of the success / failure table referred to in the success / failure determination process are different from those in the 69th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 69th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 69th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 242 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first success / failure table 495 at the low probability that is referred to when performing the success / failure determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode. FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first success / failure table 496 at a high probability that is referred to when performing the success / failure determination process on the hold information on the first special figure side in the high probability mode, and FIG. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second success / failure table 503 at a low probability, which is referred to when performing the success / failure determination process on the hold information on the second special figure side in the low probability mode, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table 504 at the time of high probability referred when performing the success / failure determination process about the hold information on the 2nd special figure side in high probability mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 242 (a) and 242 (b), the contents of the first success / failure table 495 at the low probability and the first success / failure table 496 at the high probability are the same as those in the 69th embodiment. On the other hand, the contents of the second success / failure table 503 at the low probability shown in FIG. 242 (c) and the contents of the second success / failure table 504 at the high probability shown in FIG. 242 (d) are different from those of the 69th embodiment. The second success / failure table 503 at the low probability and the second success / failure table 504 at the high probability will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 242 (c), in the second success / failure table 503 at the low probability, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a lost result are set as the judgment results of the success / failure determination process. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big hit result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a small hit result. It is set to be. On the other hand, the probability of the result of losing is set to be the same for any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of small hit 9450 are set as the number of information, and 500 are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of the loss. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9448 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 2”, is set with 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 9446 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is the result of losing. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value one level higher than “setting 3”, is set with 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit result, and the hit random number that is the small hit result 9444 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the hit result 9442 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is the result of losing. In addition, 60 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of the small hit 9440 are set, and 500 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing.

  As shown in FIG. 242 (d), in the second success / failure table 504 at the time of high probability, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a lost result are set as the judgment results of the success / failure determination process. The pachinko machine 10 has “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” setting states. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big hit result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a small hit result. It is set to be. On the other hand, the probability of the result of losing is set to be the same for any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 500 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in “setting 1” that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of small hit 9000 is set as the number of information, and 500 is set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 2”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 1”, is set with 520 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is the result of a small hit 8980 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of the losing. In addition, “setting 3”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 2”, is set with 540 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 8960 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 is set as the number of numerical information of the per-random number counter C1 that is a result of losing. In addition, “setting 4”, which is a setting value one step higher than “setting 3”, is set with 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 8940 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of the losing. In addition, “setting 5”, which is a setting value that is one step higher than “setting 4”, is set with 580 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result, and the hit random number that is a hit result 8920 is set as the number of the numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 is set as the number of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of losing. The highest setting value “setting 6” is set to 600 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a small hit result. 8900 pieces are set, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 as a result of losing is 500 pieces.

  In “Setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20 of 10 times in the high probability mode. It is. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/192 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /19.2. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/185 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /18.5. In “Setting 4”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1/179 in the low probability mode and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /17.9. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/172 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /17.2. In “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second figure side is about 1/167 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /16.7. In other words, in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the probability that the jackpot result is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is the case of the low probability mode in the case of the high probability mode. 10 times. In addition, the probability that the jackpot result is obtained when the combination of the setting state and the winning lottery mode combination is the same is based on the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side. It is the same as the case.

  In addition, in “Setting 1”, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1 / 1.582 in the low probability mode, and about in the high probability mode. 1 / 1.111. In “Setting 2”, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1 / 1.0584 in the low probability mode, and about 1 / 1.0 in the high probability mode. 1.113. In “Setting 3”, the probability that a small hit result is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1 / 1.586 in the low probability mode, and about 1 / 1.0 in the high probability mode. 1.116. In “Setting 4”, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1 / 1.589 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 1.0 in the high probability mode. 1.119. In “Setting 5”, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1 / 1.0591 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 1.0 in the high probability mode. 1.121. In “Setting 6”, the probability of a small hitting result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is about 1 / 1.593 in the low probability mode, and about 1 / 1.0 in the high probability mode. 1.124.

  Note that the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result may be set so as to be serial numbers, and at least a part or all of the numerical information is set to be distributed so as not to be serial numbers. It is good also as composition which has. Further, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit result may be set so as to be a sequential number, and at least a part or all of the numerical information may be set so as not to be a sequential number. It is good also as composition which has.

  According to the above configuration, the number of values of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result is more than the number of values of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the result of the first hit / fail table 495, 496. In many configurations, the variation in the probability of the jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result. Then, regardless of the set value, the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result is the largest. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability variation of the outlier result due to the set value for absorbing the probability variation of the jackpot result due to the set value. Therefore, when the hold information on the first special figure side is used as an opportunity, it is possible to limit the target of attention to the jackpot result for the player to guess the set value, making it difficult to guess the set value. It becomes possible.

  Further, the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result is larger than the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result in the second success / failure tables 503 and 504. In the configuration, the variation in the probability of the jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result. In any set value, the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result is the largest. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability variation of the small hit result due to the set value for absorbing the probability variation of the big hit result due to the set value. Therefore, when the hold information on the first special figure side is used as an opportunity, it is possible to limit the target of attention to the jackpot result in order to guess the set value, making it difficult to guess the set value. It becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In the above first to fourteenth embodiments, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game is calculated as the parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the opening / closing execution mode. Thus, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA may be calculated. In addition to or instead of this, a configuration is obtained in which a result obtained by dividing the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode by the total number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is calculated. It is good. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (2) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, as the parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode with respect to the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time and the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode However, in addition to or in place of this, it is also possible to calculate the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. Good. In addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is calculated. It is good also as a structure. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (3) Not only the jackpot result but also the jackpot result may exist as a game result that triggers the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of a small hit result, the open / close execution mode is generated, but the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which becomes low frequency prize-winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode which became a small hit result. In this case, when a jackpot result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is stored in the history memory 117, and when a jackpot result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is recorded as history. The configuration may be stored in the memory 117 for use. In this configuration, a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the big hit result and a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the small hit result may be calculated by using the history information stored in the history memory 117. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and it is good also as a structure which does not change. In the case of a configuration in which the probability of winning the small hit result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, a higher setting value may have a higher probability of winning the small hit result, and a higher setting value wins the small hit result. It is good also as a structure with a low probability of doing.

  Further, in a configuration in which a small hit result exists, the hold information acquired when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 and the game information that is acquired when the game ball enters the second operation port 34 are acquired. When the jackpot result is different from the holding information, the distribution ratio of the type of jackpot result is different, and when aiming to enter the first operating port 33, the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA In addition, the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area, and when aiming to enter the second operation port 34, the game ball flows down the right area from the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. In addition, a configuration in which a launch operation is performed, and a configuration in which a small hit result can be generated based on the hold information acquired when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 may be possible.

In this configuration, the following 51st parameter may exist as a game history management result. Note that the normal period is the sum of the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result based on the ball entering the first operating port 33 and the execution period of the low-frequency support mode instead of the opening / closing execution mode. To do. Also, the number of balls entered into the out port 24a during the normal period is the number of balls entered K51, and the number of balls entered into the general prize port 31 during the normal period is the number of balls entered K52. The number of balls entered is K53, the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 during the normal period is the number K54 of incoming balls, and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 during the normal period is the number of incoming balls K55.
51st parameter: the total number of game balls to be paid out during the normal period (K52 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K53 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K54 × “first” Number of winning balls for winning at the operating port 33 + K55 × “number of winning balls for winning at the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA in the normal period (K51 + K52 + K53 + K54 + K55) In the configuration in which the 51st parameter is calculated, if the winning probability of the small hit result varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, when the winning probability of the small hit result does not vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is not deleted even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

  (4) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the type of jackpot result. The history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result may be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency is calculated for each type of jackpot result. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (5) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameter, and thirty-first to forty-second parameters) are periodically provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various parameters are calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches the calculation trigger number (for example, 10,000). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which various parameters are calculated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the number of game times executed is the number of times of calculation (for example, 1000 times). In some cases, various parameters may be calculated. In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” at the timing when various parameters are calculated. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (6) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the Although all of the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the present invention is not limited to this. Only one of the various parameters is subject to calculation at one calculation timing, and each time the calculation timing is reached. Alternatively, the parameter group to be calculated may be sequentially changed. For example, the first to eighth parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the first to eighteenth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the next calculation is calculated. In the timing, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters may be calculated, and thereafter, the calculation target may be changed in the above order every time the calculation timing comes. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the parameter when one calculation timing is reached. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (7) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters may be calculated using history information in the history memory 117 on condition that a game is being played. For example, the calculation of various parameters may be executed on condition that a game ball is supplied to the game area PA. As a result, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being unnecessarily repeated even though no game is being played. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (8) The first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the function of the management IC 66 is performed by the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in advance in the main ROM 64. In addition, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, and a separate storage memory 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65. The history RAM 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate memory 171 may be provided in the main RAM 65. A configuration in which the function of the storage memory 171 is performed may be employed. In the configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are performed in the main RAM 65, when the clear processing (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed, the history memory A part or all of the areas corresponding to the memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to “0”. The history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage The area corresponding to each of the memory 171 may be excluded from the “0” clear target, and “0” may be cleared when the corresponding clear condition in each of the above embodiments is satisfied. Further, in the main RAM 65, the manual operation contents for executing the clear process in the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 and the other areas may be different. Good. The function of the management IC 66 may be performed by the sound emission control device 81.

  (9) When a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the first to fourteenth embodiments, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased. Various parameters stored in the result memory 131 may be deleted. Thus, after a new setting state is set, it is possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the setting is made. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (10) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the setting value update process is executed in the main CPU 63), If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the history memory 117 may not be cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In this configuration, even if the clearing process (step S117) is executed for all the areas for storing the setting values in the main RAM 65, the setting value updating process ( It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed, the management CPU 112 may output a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

  Further, when a signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, if the management CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the history memory 117 is not cleared, and the management CPU 112 has specified that the setting value has been changed. In this case, the history memory 117 can be cleared.

  (11) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the set value update process is executed in the main CPU 63), When the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the configuration may be such that the calculation processing of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the setting state is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated in response to a new setting state even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In this configuration, even if the clearing process (step S117) is executed for all the areas for storing the setting values in the main RAM 65, the setting value updating process ( It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed, the management CPU 112 may output a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

  Further, when a signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management side CPU 112 does not execute the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state. When it is specified that the value has been changed, it is possible to execute various parameter calculations triggered by the new setting of the current setting state.

  (12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, various parameters are calculated in various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time. Rather, the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the storage target area in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 and the calculation is performed. The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to “0”. In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171 at an early stage. Become.

  (13) In the third to fifth embodiments, when the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are subjected to a predetermined display start operation. It is good also as a structure displayed on the display apparatus 69a-69c for 1st-3rd information, or another display apparatus. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or by performing a predetermined dedicated operation on an operation unit for performing other operations. As a result, various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171 can be easily confirmed.

  (14) Although all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are set as the storage targets of the history information (or the ball entering history), It is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is a storage target of history information. It is good. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is configured to store history information. It ’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the game ball entry mode in a predetermined period for the ball entry part for which history information is to be stored.

  (15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in association with each of the first prize opening detection sensor 42a, the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. Although 118a-118c was set as the structure, it is not limited to this, The information corresponding to the entrance result about the same type of entrance part has two or more entrance parts of the same type. In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of entrance detection sensors exist corresponding thereto may be transmitted as one type of information. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be suppressed.

  (16) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is used for management from the main CPU 63. Although the configuration is such that the information is transmitted to the IC 66, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, it is not necessary to execute processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, and thus the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (17) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 receives the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 are capable of two-way communication, and are used for management. The configuration may be such that the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the correspondence information is received from the IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and used for both reading and writing. Correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of operating power is stopped, the correspondence memory 116 is configured to store and hold the operation power. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

  (18) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 receives the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. Is transmitted using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can determine which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 based on the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (19) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. By transmitting a command corresponding to the content of the parameter to the sound emission control device 81, notification corresponding to the content of various parameters is executed using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. It is good also as composition to do.

  (20) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 is notified based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters may be calculated, and the contents of the calculated parameters may be notified using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entering mode of the game area PA was normal on the previous business day at the start of the game hall. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (21) If various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the first to fourteenth embodiments are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 is used until the prohibition canceling operation is performed. It is good also as a structure which cannot start a game. As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration in which the launch of the game ball may be prohibited, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is invalidated, or the first operation port Even if a winning to 33 or the 2nd operation mouth 34 occurs, it is good also as composition which does not perform the success / failure judgment processing. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the reset button 68c being pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11. It is good also as operation of the operation means used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game ball entering mode in the game area PA is in an abnormal mode. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is abnormal. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (22) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42 a to 48 a is stored in the history memory 117 in the first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters are calculated using the history information. The configuration may be such that neither the main CPU 63 nor the management CPU 112 executes. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by an operator of the reading work. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated using the read history information in the external device. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (23) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 is provided with a power source different from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 The configuration may be such that the calculation of various parameters using history information and the output of history information or information of various parameters may be performed. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, history information and various parameters can be read by an external device.

  (24) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the reading terminal 68d used for reading a program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters with an external device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by an external device is a reading terminal 68d for reading a program from the main ROM 64. It is good also as a structure provided separately. In this case, the terminal used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (25) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 are limited to the configuration provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. For example, any one of these memories 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and store information, and backup power is supplied to the memory so that the main side Even if the supply of the operating power to the CPU 63 is stopped, the information may be stored and held. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, and backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply / launch control device 78 that supplies the main RAM 65 with backup power. Also good.

  (26) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 includes the management CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and performs history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113. The configuration to be executed is not limited, and a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63. The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. For example, in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, the hardware circuit has received the signal. The counter value corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, when an operation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

  (27) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate boards, or may be provided as separate control devices. It is good also as a structure provided as.

  (28) Regarding the number of game balls that have entered the out port 24a, the number of balls entered is measured, while the number of game balls such as the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is increased. The history information including the RTC information may be stored for the entry into the bonus opportunity entry part that becomes the trigger for the payout of winning balls and the determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball portion with respect to the total number of game balls discharged while allowing the game ball entry history to the privilege opportunity ball portion to be extracted. Become.

  (29) It is good also as a structure in which things other than the thing in said each embodiment are included as a predetermined event used as the opportunity which memorize | stores historical information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing when the full state is started, and the timing when the full state is released may be stored as history information. It may be configured that at least one of the timing when the ball has become unsatisfied, the timing at which the ball has no state is started, and the timing at which the state without the ball is released is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 becomes in an abnormal state. In addition, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is canceled may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

  (30) In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 when the type identification command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. It is good. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the set value update signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o is compatible with the set value update signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence relationship between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66.

  (31) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 may transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether or not the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (32) The display device that displays the setting value being updated in the setting value update processing is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the symbol display device 41. A dedicated display device may be used. Further, the display device that displays the set value in the setting confirmation process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the symbol display device 41 or a dedicated display device. It may be.

  (33) The operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process is not limited to the update button 68b, and may be the reset button 68c. In addition, positions corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as rotation operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the rotation operation is performed. A setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the part 68a may be set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a can be further rotated from the ON position, and the setting value being updated is set to the setting value in the next order each time the rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed. It is good also as a structure updated.

  (34) In the first to tenth and fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged side by side, but are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction. It is good also as a structure currently arranged, it is good also as a structure arranged in parallel diagonally, and good also as a structure arranged in parallel so that it may become two steps of upper and lower sides. In the first to fourteenth and twenty-second to sixty-sixth embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side, but are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. It is good also as a structure, It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel diagonally, It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel so that it may become two steps of upper and lower sides. In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be used as display devices for displaying the management result of the game history.

  (35) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, history information used for calculating a parameter whose normal value varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as variation target history information). ) And history information used to calculate a parameter whose normal value does not vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as non-variable history information) are different areas in the history memory 117. It is good also as a structure memorize | stored in. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, an area in which history information to be changed is stored in the history memory 117 is “0”. On the other hand, the area in which history information that is not changed is stored in the history memory 117 may be configured not to be cleared to “0”. Thereby, the calculation of the parameter whose normal value fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately performed even after the setting value is changed, and the normal value does not fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The accuracy of parameter calculation can be increased. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to 71st embodiments.

  (36) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be specified in the main RAM 65 in advance. Even in this case, the areas corresponding to the stack areas 222 and 224 are designated in the main RAM 65 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, but the area is designated exceeding the storage capacity of the area. When information storage processing is executed, information that is not originally planned is written in an area that is not originally planned, so the main RAM 65 may be cleared to “0”.

  (37) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, when the main RAM 65 clear process (step S105, step S117) is executed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are “ Although “0” is cleared, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to “0”. Instead, the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S105, In step S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to “0”. . Further, in the clear process (steps S105 and S117) of the main RAM 65, not only the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 but also the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232 and the high frequency The support mode counter area 233 may be cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

  (38) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the operation for clearing the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 to “0”, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control work area 223 The specific control stack area 224 may be configured to be different from the operation for clearing “0”. For example, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to “0”, and the update button 68b is updated. When supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to “0”. Thereby, each information can be selectively deleted. Further, in the configuration, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating both the update button 68b and the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are started. The non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may all be cleared to “0”. As a result, in the configuration that enables selective erasure as described above, it is possible to improve workability when erasing information in each area 221 to 224 collectively.

  (39) In the fifteenth to eighteenth and twentieth embodiments, as in the nineteenth embodiment, when the processing corresponding to non-specific control is started, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is used for non-specific control work. A configuration may be adopted in which the saved information is returned to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control while being saved in the area 223. Thereby, even if the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started can be changed, the main side when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It becomes possible to return the state of the stack pointer of the CPU 63 to the state before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  (40) Processing for collecting game history information as processing corresponding to non-specific control in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and The process for notifying the calculation result is executed, but only part of these processes is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, and the other is executed as a process corresponding to specific control. It is good. In addition to or instead of the process for collecting game history information, the process for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and the process for notifying the calculation result, The process may be executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control. For example, at least one of the fraud monitoring and the monitoring result notification may be executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control.

  (41) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed in the main CPU 63, the flag register of the main CPU 63, Although neither the stack pointer nor the various registers are saved in the main RAM 65, instead, the main CPU 63 performs processing corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. When returning, at least part of the flag register, stack pointer, and various registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started again. In this case, it may be configured to be restored to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63. Thereby, it is possible to carry over and use the information of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

  (42) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the various parameters are calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area is 6000. The total number of game balls may be larger or smaller than 6000. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area is 60000. In this case, the storage capacity necessary for storing the game history information increases, but the game history information is stored in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 as in the twenty-first embodiment. By adopting the storage configuration, it is possible to flexibly cope with the increase in the storage capacity.

  (43) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated as game history management results. In addition to or instead of this, the thirty-first parameter in the first embodiment is used. A configuration may be employed in which at least a part of the parameters, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are calculated.

  (44) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control Further, not only the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared. In this case, when processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency The support mode counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to “0”.

  In addition, when processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control The normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may be cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

  Further, when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are “0”. The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured so that “0” is not cleared, although cleared. In this case, the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 can be protected.

  Further, when the configuration of (43) is provided, the first setting is performed when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Although the history information for calculating the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter in the embodiment is deleted, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are deleted. The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”.

  (45) In the first to 71st embodiments described above, instead of the configuration in which the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is used to calculate various parameters, the game area PA is supplied to the game area PA. The total supply number of game balls may be used. In this case, for example, a detection sensor is provided to detect a game ball that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and has reached the game area PA, and the game balls supplied to the game area PA based on the detection result of the detection sensor. It is good also as a structure which measures a number. In this configuration, since it is not necessary to measure the number of game balls discharged from the out port 24a, the out port detection sensor 48a may not be provided.

  (46) In the fifteenth to seventy-first embodiments, at least a part of the various registers and stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is for the specific control stack area 222 or the non-specific control stack area 224. It may be configured to be saved by a load instruction. In this case, it is necessary to update the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when saving the information to the stack areas 222 and 224. The information saved in the stack areas 222 and 224 may be restored to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction. Also in this case, it is necessary to update the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 when the information is restored from the stack areas 222 and 224.

  (47) When the set value update process is executed in each of the above embodiments, a corresponding notification may be performed by any of the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp that the set value update processing is being executed.

  (48) In the above embodiments, a history that a set value is newly set may be stored in the main RAM 65. Further, a history that a set value is newly set may be stored in a RAM provided in the sound emission control device 81. In this case, every time the set value update process is completed, a command including information on the set value set in the set value update process is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, and the sound emission control device Each time the command 81 is received, information indicating that the set value is newly set and information indicating the set value at that time are cumulatively stored in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81. In the configuration, when a predetermined operation is performed, a setting history of setting values accumulated in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  (49) In each of the above embodiments, when the set value is newly set in the set value update process, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout control device 77 is not erased. However, instead of this, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out may be deleted. If the set value update process is executed but the set value is not changed, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out is not deleted, and if the set value is changed, the payout schedule is set. The information indicating the number of game balls may be deleted.

  (50) If the set value update processing is executed in each of the above embodiments but the set value is not changed, each area 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 is not cleared to “0”, and the set value is If changed, at least a part of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 may be cleared to “0”. For example, when the set value is changed, the area other than the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control may be cleared to “0”.

  (51) In the twenty-second to seventy-first embodiments, even if the main CPU 63 is executing a process for confirming the set value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 87), it is beneficial to the game. It is good also as a structure by which operation | movement of the movable object which participates is continued. For example, a V zone and a non-V zone are provided in the entrance means that can enter in the opening / closing execution mode, and game balls that enter the entrance means are distributed to either the V zone or the non-V zone. In the configuration including the distribution member, the operation of the distribution member may be continued even in a situation where the processing for confirming the set value is performed in the setting confirmation processing. In this case, it is possible to disable the operation of the sorting member by improperly generating a situation in which the process for confirming the set value is executed in the setting confirmation process. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned distribution member, the movable member that has continued to operate even when the process for confirming the set value is performed in the setting confirmation process has entered the ball entry means. A game ball in any of an advantageous opening that causes a round game to be generated after the game ball enters and a discharge opening that discharges the game ball that has entered the entry means without entering the advantageous opening It is possible to use a sorting member that sorts.

  (52) In the twenty-second to seventy-first embodiments, at least one of the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be configured not to be monitored for information abnormality. In this case, even if it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control The configuration in which 224 is not cleared to “0” does not cause a situation where the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0” based on the occurrence of an information abnormality. It becomes possible to do.

  (53) In the twenty-second to seventy-first embodiments, information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. A configuration may be adopted in which all the monitoring of whether or not it occurs is performed in a process corresponding to non-specific control. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which all the processes for clearing each area 221-224 "0" when information abnormality generate | occur | produces are the processes corresponding to non-specific control.

  (54) In each of the above embodiments, the main RAM 65 needs to be supplied with power to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF. However, the main RAM 65 may be a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply to store and store information.

  (55) In each of the above embodiments, the various clear processes of the main RAM 65 are configured to initialize the target area by executing a process of clearing “0” and a process of initial setting for the target area of the main RAM 65. Instead of this, the above-described target area may be initialized by executing the initial setting process without executing the process of clearing “0”.

  (56) In the above embodiments, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON, the setting value update process is executed without requiring any other operation. It is good also as a structure to be made. Further, instead of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned ON / OFF by a setting key, a setting switch that is directly turned ON / OFF by a hand may be provided. If the reset button 68c is pressed when the setting key insertion portion 68a is not provided and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting value is not required. A configuration in which update processing is executed may be adopted. In this case, a cover member may be provided so that it can be switched between a closed state that covers the reset button 68c and an open state that does not cover it, and the locking device that locks the cover member in a closed position. It is good also as a structure provided.

  (57) Configuration in which the setting value being selected is confirmed and the setting value updating process is terminated when the setting key insertion unit 68a has been operated to the OFF position in the setting value updating process for a predetermined period. It is good. Further, when an end reference period (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the setting value update process was started, the setting value being selected is automatically confirmed and the setting value update process is terminated. In addition, when the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed for more than the end reference period (for example, 10 seconds) in the set value update process, the selected set value is determined and the set value update process is ended. It is good also as a structure.

  (58) The setting key insertion portion 68a can be further rotated from the ON position, and the setting value being updated is the next set value every time the rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed. In the configuration updated, the setting confirmation process is started to enable the confirmation of the set value when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is operated to the ON position. The setting confirmation processing may be terminated when the setting key insertion unit 68a is operated to the OFF position. In addition, when the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the set value is started. The configuration confirmation process may be terminated when the pressing operation is released. Further, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned ON / OFF by hand is provided in place of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned ON / OFF by a setting key, the main switch is turned on when the setting switch is turned ON. When the supply of operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, a setting confirmation process that allows the setting value to be confirmed is started, and when the setting switch is turned OFF or turned ON after the OFF operation The configuration confirmation process may be terminated. Further, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned ON / OFF by hand is provided in place of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned ON / OFF by a setting key, the main switch is turned on when the setting switch is turned ON. The setting confirmation process that enables the confirmation of the set value is started when the supply of operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, and the setting confirmation process is ended when the reset button 68c is pressed. Also good.

  (59) When the setting confirmation process or the set value update process is executed in each of the above-described embodiments, an image corresponding to the procedure may be performed by the symbol display device 41, and this is supported. Alternatively, a sound corresponding to the procedure may be output from the speaker unit 54. For example, in the set value update process in the thirty-third embodiment, the set value is changed by one step by pressing the reset button 68c, and the set value update process is ended by turning the setting key insertion unit 68a OFF. It is good also as composition which is notified of being done. This makes it easier to update the set value. In addition, since the display control of the symbol display device 41 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the sound emission control device 81, when the setting confirmation processing or the setting value update processing is started, a corresponding command is issued. When the setting confirmation process or the set value update process is completed after being transmitted from the main CPU 63, it is necessary to transmit a corresponding command from the main CPU 63.

  (60) In the above embodiments, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not ended when the initial check period has elapsed, but for ending the check display. The check display may be continued until an operation is performed. As the operation for ending, for example, the reset button 68c may be operated regardless of whether one of the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process is being executed, and an operation other than the reset button 68c. The unit may be operated. In this case, the display for checking is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until the base value or the set value is confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the base value or the set value after confirming whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Further, since the display for check is terminated based on the operation of the operation unit, the display for check can be terminated at a desired timing.

  (61) The first to fourth notification display devices when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated regardless of whether or not the supply of operating power is started in each of the above embodiments. It is good also as a structure by which the display for a check of 201-204 is started. In this case, the check display can be started at a desired timing when the base value or the set value is confirmed. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or a different operation from the predetermined operation unit. The display for checking may be terminated when the operation unit is operated.

  (62) In the above embodiments, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c such as the update button 68b is operated, the first to fourth notifications When the display for check of the display devices 201 to 204 is started and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without operating the specific operation unit, the display for check may not be started. . In this case, in the configuration in which the check display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the game hall manager.

  (63) In each of the above embodiments, the base value is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state. The base value may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when 12 is specified based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, first, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started, and then the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are started. The base value may be displayed at 204. Thereby, before confirming the base value, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or a different operation from the predetermined operation unit. The display for checking may be terminated when the operation unit is operated.

  (64) When the main process is started in a state where the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process are satisfied in each of the above embodiments, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Alternatively, the display for checking may be started when the main process is started in a state where the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process are not satisfied. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display for checking from being performed when it is determined that the setting value is confirmed.

  (65) When the main process is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update process is satisfied in each of the above-described embodiments, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Alternatively, the display for checking may be started when the main process is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update process is not satisfied. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is determined that the set value is updated.

  (66) The first to fourth notifications when the main process is started in a state where either the condition for executing the setting confirmation process or the condition for executing the set value update process is satisfied in each of the above embodiments When the main process is started without satisfying both the condition for executing the setting confirmation process and the condition for executing the set value update process without starting the display for checking on the display devices 201 to 204 May be configured to start the display for checking. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is confirmed that the setting value is confirmed or the setting value is updated.

  (67) In each of the above-described embodiments, the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the light emitting state in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is good also as a structure by which each display segment 321-324 in each of the alerting display apparatuses 201-204 is made to blink. Further, in the display for check, each of the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is sequentially turned on one by one or a plurality of parts, and the range of the initial check period The display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state at least once.

  (68) In each of the above embodiments, the process of causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display is not executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, but corresponds to the non-specific control. It is good also as a structure performed as a process.

  (69) In the above embodiments, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not performed by the main CPU 63 but may be performed by dedicated control means. The configuration may be performed by 81, or may be performed by the display control device 82. In this case, when the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. When displaying the set value on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the set value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. In addition, when processing at the start of supply of operating power is executed in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. Thus, information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control entity so that the check display is started.

  (70) In the above embodiments, when the power outage flag is not set to “1” or the checksum does not match, the game stop flag is set to “1” and the progress of the game is stopped. In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state as in the check display, and the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a blinking state. Good.

  (71) In each of the embodiments described above, not only when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but also when a setting change trigger occurs after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power ends. It is good also as a structure by which an update process is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being turned off and on when starting the set value update process.

  (72) In each of the embodiments described above, the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation” may have a reverse relationship. That is, when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, it is specified that the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, and the reset button 68c is not pressed and is set. The configuration may be such that the “setting change operation” is specified when the key insertion portion 68a is turned on. Further, the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation” may be configured such that no operation is duplicated.

  (73) In the above embodiments, the set value update process is started based on the start of the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the set value update process The setting value of the selection target is not changed each time the reset button 68c is pressed, but the selection target is selected in the operation unit operated to start the setting value update process and the setting value update process. It is good also as a structure where the operation part operated in order to change this setting value does not correspond.

  (74) In the forty-seventh to seventy-first embodiments, the process for setting the information of the setting update area 342 in the setting reference area 341 in the setting value updating process, that is, the process for setting the setting value to be used is performed. Although the second RAM clear process is executed later, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second RAM clear process may be executed before the process of setting the setting value to be used. In this case, the second RAM clear process may be executed instead of the initial setting at the start of the set value update process.

  In addition, in the setting value update process, since both the initial setting at the start and the second RAM clear process are not executed, even if the setting value to be used is set in the setting value update process, the clear target area 371 is set. The initialization may not be executed. When this configuration is applied to the 55th to 63rd embodiments, the initialization of the clear target area 371 is executed when the first RAM clear process is executed by performing the “RAM clear operation”. When the set value update process is executed, initialization of the clear target area 371 is not executed. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the above-described 56th embodiment, even if the set value update processing is executed, the initial display may be performed by the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a. The initial display may not be performed. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the above-described 57th to 58th embodiments, even if the set value update processing is executed, the special display display unit 37a and the general display display unit 38a are configured to perform out-of-display. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the outlier display is not performed. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the 59th to 60th embodiments, even if the set value update process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a perform out-of-range display or win display. It is good also as a structure which is not displayed, and the said off display or hit display is not performed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 61st embodiment, even if the set value update process is executed, each light emitting unit of the special figure display unit 37a and each light emitting unit of the general map display unit 38a are lit. The lottery process may be executed, or the lighting lottery process may not be executed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the above-described 62nd to 63rd embodiments, the initial display data lottery process (step SD405) in the display start process (FIG. 206, FIG. 208) even if the set value update process is executed. , Step SD410, step SD502) may be executed, or the initial display data lottery process (step SD405, step SD410, step SD502) may not be executed.

  (75) In the 49th to 71st embodiments described above, instead of the configuration in which the display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display is stored in the main RAM 65 that requires power supply when storing information. Thus, the display data may be stored in a memory that does not need to be supplied with power when storing information and is used for both reading and writing. In this case, the display data stored in the memory may not be erased during the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process, and the clear target area 371 is initialized during the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process and The display data stored in the memory may be erased. Further, the configuration may be applied to display data for causing the general map display unit 38a to display.

  (76) In the 55th to 71st embodiments, acquired when the special information side holding information acquired when the winning to the first operating port 33 occurs and the winning to the second operating port 34 occurs. It is possible to apply a configuration in which the reserved information on the special drawing side is stored separately from the stored information and the reserved information on the second operation port 34 side is preferentially digested. A configuration in which the hold information on the 33rd side is preferentially digested may be applied, and a configuration in which the information is digested in the acquisition order regardless of whether it is the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 Also good. In the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged in parallel vertically, but the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 may be arranged in the left and right directions. It is good also as a structure by which the opening | mouth was diagonally arranged in parallel. Furthermore, according to the operation mode of the firing operation device 28, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged apart from each other so that only the winning of the first operating port 33 or only the winning of the second operating port 34 can be aimed. It is good also as a structure. In addition, when the hold information acquired by winning a prize to the first operating port 33 becomes a target of the determination of whether or not, and the hold information acquired by winning a prize to the second operating port 34 is It is good also as a structure from which the profit which a player obtains differs by the case where it becomes the object of a decision | availability determination.

  Moreover, in the said structure, as the special figure display part 37a, to the 1st special figure display part which displays the result of determination of the success / failure of the hold information acquired based on the winning to the 1st operation port 33, and the 2nd operation port 34 You may provide separately the 2nd special figure display part which displays the result of the decision | availability determination of the hold information acquired based on this prize. In this case, on the first special figure display unit, the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first operating port 33 becomes the target of the determination of the success or failure, or based on the determination of the result of the determination. Is displayed, and a stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of fluctuation for one game time is ended. In addition, on the basis of the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second working port 34 becomes the object of the determination of the success / failure or based on the object of the determination of the success / failure, the second special figure display unit displays the picture. While the variable display is started, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the variable display for one game time is ended.

  In the configuration in which the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit are provided as described above, the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operating power in the 55th to 63rd embodiments is started. The display content configuration may be applied to each of the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part, and is applied to only one of the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part. May be.

  Note that, in the configuration in which the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit are individually provided as described above, one of the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit is displayed in a variable manner. When the target game time is being executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the game time for which the other is a variable display target of the pattern is not executed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can be performed by the game time which makes the 1st special figure display part the fluctuation display object of a pattern, and the 2nd special figure display part make the fluctuation display object of a pattern overlap. Thus, in the configuration in which game times can be executed in duplicate, as a result of the game times in the second special figure display unit, the expected number of game balls to be awarded to the special electric prize device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is greater than the result of the jackpot result. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a small hitting result is set to be less and a winning probability of the small hitting result is set higher than that of the big hitting result. In this configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped, there is a high possibility that a hit display corresponding to either the big hit result or the small hit result is performed in the special figure display unit 37a. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third out-of-order display data for special figures and the like as in the 59th embodiment, It is preferable that one of the first to third display data for the special figure is selected.

  (77) The characteristic display content configuration when the supply of operating power is started in the 55th to 71st embodiments is applied to both the special figure display part 37a and the universal figure display part 38a. The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be applied to only one of the special drawing display unit 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a. For example, the configuration of characteristic display contents when supply of operating power is started may be applied only to the special figure display unit 37a, or may be applied only to the general map display unit 38a. Also good.

  (78) In the 55th to 71st embodiments, even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal diagram are set until the display start flag is set to "1". The display unit 38a does not start displaying. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display start flag is not provided. When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the display unit 38a is not particularly limited. It is good also as a structure by which the display in the figure display part 37a and the common figure display part 38a is started. In this case, if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the supply of the operating power is stopped in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a. After the immediately preceding display is started, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are switched to the display corresponding to the execution of the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process.

  (79) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, the both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 60, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (80) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, for example, a result of a lottery process of a combination executed when starting one game based on an operation of a start lever is history information. The actual winning probability of each role may be calculated using the history information, and when a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information, and the history The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special gaming state is calculated using information, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special gaming state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by an external device, or notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself. Further, a configuration in which a plurality of setting states such as “setting 1” to “setting 6” exist and the winning probability in the lottery process of the combination may be changed according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration in each of the above embodiments may be applied with respect to handling of history information, calculation of various parameters, and handling of repeated changes when a setting state setting is newly set or a setting value is changed. .

  (81) You may mutually apply the characteristic structure of the said 1st-71st embodiment in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the thirtieth embodiment. The configuration, the characteristic configuration of the 45th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 55th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 64th embodiment may be combined. Characteristic configuration of the second embodiment, characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment, characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment, The characteristic configuration of the thirty-third embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirty-third embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the eighty-eighth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the sixty-fifth embodiment And the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the fifteenth embodiment. Configuration, characteristic configuration of the twenty-first embodiment, characteristic configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, characteristic configuration of the thirty-fourth embodiment, and feature of the forty-ninth embodiment The characteristic configuration of the 60th embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the 69th embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment, Characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment, characteristic configuration of the twenty-second embodiment, characteristic configuration of the thirty-fifth embodiment, and characteristic configuration of the thirty-ninth embodiment The characteristic configuration of the 53rd embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 62nd embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 71st embodiment may be combined. Moreover, the configuration of the above-described another embodiment may be applied in an arbitrary combination to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to 71st embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117). )When,
An information erasure unit (a third erasure unit) that erases at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit, based on at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1809 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the steps S2306 to S2 in the management CPU 112 in the sixth embodiment. A function for executing the process of S2308, a function for executing the process of step S2608 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is erased on the basis of at least one condition that the setting value to be used is newly set. As a result, it is possible to adjust the contents of the history storage unit so that the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation after the setting value to be used is newly set can be suitably managed. .

Feature A2. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature A2, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result according to the set value. In this case, since the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, the history storage unit can appropriately manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation after the probability of the assignment correspondence result is changed. The contents can be adjusted.

  Feature A3. The information erasing means erases all of the history information stored in the history storage means on the condition that at least one of the setting values to be used by the setting means has been set. A gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2.

  According to the feature A3, setting of the setting value to be used is performed by erasing all the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set. It is possible to specify the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event with reference to the timing at which this is newly performed.

  Feature A4. The information erasing unit erases a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is left.

  According to the feature A4, when a setting value to be used is newly set, history information unnecessary for managing the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event thereafter is deleted, and the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event thereafter is managed. Necessary history information can be left. Thereby, it is possible to suitably manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event after the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information in which an occurrence probability of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value (history indicating that an opening / closing execution mode has occurred). Information) and second history information that does not vary according to the set value (history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA),
The information erasure unit erases the first history information stored in the history storage unit, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein the second history information stored in history storage means is left.

  According to the feature A5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to a predetermined event whose occurrence probability varies according to the setting value is deleted, and the occurrence probability is the set value. The second history information corresponding to the predetermined event that does not vary according to the is not deleted. Accordingly, when the first history information before the setting value to be used is newly set is inherited after the setting value is newly set, a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information is generated. The first history information which is not preferable in specifying the frequency can be deleted when the setting value is newly set. On the other hand, the second history information is referred to when the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information is specified by not deleting even if a setting value to be used is newly set. Since a large number of second history information can be secured, it is possible to specify the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information with high accuracy.

Feature A6. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
According to the setting value, the probability of the grant correspondence result in the grant determination varies.
The first history information includes information corresponding to the provision of the privilege,
The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to a game ball being discharged from the gaming area in a predetermined manner.

  According to the feature A6, since the privilege grant probability varies depending on the set value, the first history information is deleted when the set value to be used is newly set. Thus, it is possible to specify the privilege grant frequency under the setting value that has been newly set. On the other hand, since the frequency at which game balls are discharged from the game area does not vary according to the set value, the second history information is not deleted even if a set value to be used is newly set, It becomes possible to specify the frequency with which the game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner with high accuracy.

  Feature A7. The information erasure unit is configured to set at least the history information when the setting unit sets the setting value to be used and when the history storage unit stores a predetermined amount of the history information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein a part is erased.

  According to the feature A7, when predetermined history information is not stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more, the history information is not erased even if a new setting value to be used is set. As a result, even if a new setting value is repeated in a situation where no game is played, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history storage unit from being repeatedly erased.

  Feature A8. Corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, on the condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set Information deriving means for deriving the mode information to be performed (a function for executing the processing of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein:

  According to the feature A8, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit has the configuration of the feature A1 and is stored on the basis of at least one condition that a setting value to be used is newly set. An aspect corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using history information stored in the history storage means when a new setting value to be used is set in the configuration to be deleted Information is derived. As a result, even if at least a part of the history information is deleted when the setting value is changed, the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed is grasped. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising aspect information storage means (another storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature A9, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature A10, since a plurality of pieces of aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage unit, the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods are grasped based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do. In addition, even if a new setting value is repeated under a situation where no game is played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is being played is substantially the mode information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature A11. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is a means for executing special processing when the setting value set by the setting means exceeds the predetermined number under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, further comprising a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes, a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A11, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially performed does not remain in the aspect information storage unit. When the new setting is repeated, a special process is performed on the new setting. Thereby, it becomes possible to cope with the action.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information deriving unit derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit. .

  According to the feature A12, since the aspect information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit, it is possible to prevent the aspect information from being unnecessarily derived. .

  Feature A13. The information erasing unit erases the history information from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit until a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage unit. Without setting the setting value when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage unit after the setting unit sets the setting value to be used by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted.

  According to the feature A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. The history information that has been set is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

Feature A14. The history storage means includes first history storage means (first history memory 191) and second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means includes
When the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set to when the release condition is satisfied, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the first history storage unit and Means for storing in both the second history storage means (function to execute the process of step S2604 in the management CPU 112);
Means for storing the history information corresponding to the first history storage means and the second history storage means set as a storage target when the predetermined event occurs in a period other than the predetermined period (Function for executing the process of step S2603 in the management-side CPU 112);
With
The information erasure unit erases the history information stored in the storage target of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit until the cancellation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein:

  According to the feature A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. History information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect simply by appropriately changing the history storage unit that is the storage target of the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Feature A15. Deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means The gaming machine according to Feature A14, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the processing of Step S2703 in the management CPU 112).

  According to the feature A15, even when the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit due to the new setting value setting, the history information is used. Information can be appropriately derived.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A15, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117). )When,
With
The predetermined history information stored in the history storage unit before setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set to the setting value to be used by the setting unit. The gaming machine is stored and held in the history storage means even after the game.

  According to the feature B1, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is stored and held without being erased. As a result, even if the setting value to be used is set, the history information up to that time can be continuously stored in the history storage means and accumulated in the history storage means over a long period of time. The management result of the game history can be specified using the history information.

  Feature B2. The history storage execution means, when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history storage means corresponding to the setting is stored in the history storage means (first storage The game according to Feature B1, including a function for executing the process of step S1307 in the management-side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2408 in the management-side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. Machine.

  According to the feature B2, the setting value to be used is newly set in the configuration in which the history information is stored and held without being erased even if the setting value to be used is newly set. The corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed and history information after the setting is performed.

  Feature B3. The storage execution unit at the time of setting causes the history storage unit to store information corresponding to the set setting value as the history information when the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by that.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to specify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

  Feature B4. The history storage means includes a plurality of corresponding history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

  According to the feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each setting value, it is possible to store history information separately for each setting value.

  Feature B5. In the case where the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to the setting value for which the setting has been performed is a means for storing the history information thereafter (management side) The gaming machine according to Feature B4, further including a function of executing the process of Step S2406 in the CPU 112).

  According to the feature B5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the corresponding history storage unit corresponding to the setting value is a storage target of subsequent history information. It is possible to store history information in distinction.

  Feature B6. Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the correspondence history storing means as the storage target (display output processing in the management CPU 112) The gaming machine according to Feature B5, which is provided with a function of

  According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which history information is stored separately for each set value, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set value.

Feature B7. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature B7, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the result of giving correspondence according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117). )When,
The post-setting handling means that does not erase the history information until the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is performed until at least a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means. (Function to execute the processing of step S2506 and step S2605 to step S2609 in the management-side CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. History information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

  Feature C2. The post-setting handling means sets the setting value when a predetermined amount of history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to C1, wherein the history information stored in the history storage means is erased before the game is performed.

  According to the feature C2, when a specific amount of history information is stored in the history storage unit, the management result of the game history in a predetermined period after the setting value is newly set can be specified. The history information stored in the history storage means before the new setting value is set is deleted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unnecessary history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage means includes first history storage means (first history memory 191) and second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means includes
When the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the history information corresponding to the first history storage means and the second history storage means set as a storage target (step S2603 in the management CPU 112) Function to execute processing)
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means (management-side CPU 112) for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means for the occurrence of the predetermined event until the predetermined amount or more is stored. The function of executing the process of step S2604 in FIG.
With
The post-setting response means is
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for changing the storage object between the first history storage means and the second history storage means (function to execute the processing of step S2607 in the management side CPU 112) when the specified amount or more is stored;
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. When the specified amount or more is stored, the history information on the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that has been set as the storage target until then (step S2608 in the management CPU 112) Function to execute processing)
A gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. History information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect simply by appropriately changing the history storage unit that is the storage target of the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Feature C4. Deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means The gaming machine according to Feature C3, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the processing of Step S2703 in the management CPU 112).

  According to the feature C4, even when the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit due to a new setting value setting, the history information is used. Information can be appropriately derived.

Feature C5. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature C5, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Special execution means for executing special processing on the basis of at least one condition that setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed in a special situation (in the third embodiment, monitoring of repeated changes in the management CPU 112) A function for executing processing, a function for executing repetitive change monitoring processing in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for making a negative determination in step S2106 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, the special processing is executed on at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation. Thereby, it becomes possible to cope with a case where a new setting value is set under an unfavorable situation.

  Feature D2. The special execution means executes the special processing on at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set a specific number of times or more in the special situation. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature D2, even if a new setting value to be used in a special situation is executed, the special process is not executed if the number of executions is less than a specific number. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the special process from being executed until a regular worker performs a new setting value setting less than a specific number of times in a special situation.

  Feature D3. The special execution means sets, as the special situation, a situation in which a game has not been performed since the setting value is set by the setting means or a setting value to be used by the setting means. The special process is executed on at least one condition that the setting means has set the setting value to be used in a situation where a game exceeding a predetermined standard has not been played since A gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

  According to the feature D3, when a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed in a situation where no game is performed or a game is not substantially performed, special processing is executed. When this action is performed, it is possible to cope with it.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution unit executes a notification process as the special process.

  According to the feature D4, the notification process is executed under at least one condition that a new setting of a setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. As a result, when a new setting value is set under an unfavorable situation, it is possible to prompt the user to deal with it.

Feature D5. History storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117). )When,
Corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, on the condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set Information deriving means for deriving mode information to be performed (a function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that

  According to the feature D5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means when a new setting value to be used is set. Derived. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the set value is changed.

  Feature D6. The special execution means derives the mode information by the information deriving means as the special processing on the condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed in the special situation. The gaming machine according to Feature D5, wherein the gaming machine is not allowed to perform.

  According to the feature D6, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the mode information is not derived when the setting is performed in an unfavorable situation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the aspect information from being unnecessarily derived.

  Feature D7. The gaming machine according to D5 or D6, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature D7, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature D8, since it is possible to store a plurality of pieces of aspect information in the aspect information storage unit, the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods are grasped based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do. In addition, even if a new setting value is repeated under a situation where no game is played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is being played is substantially the mode information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature D9. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The special execution means is for executing the special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set to exceed the predetermined number in the special situation. Or the game machine as described in D8.

  According to the feature D9, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially performed does not remain in the aspect information storage unit. When the new setting is repeated, a special process is performed on the new setting. Thereby, it becomes possible to cope with the action.

Feature D10. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature D10, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117). )When,
Corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, on the condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set Information deriving means for deriving mode information to be performed (a function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means when a new setting value to be used is set. Derived. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the set value is changed.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising aspect information storage means (another storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature E2, aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means triggered by the new setting of the setting value to be used Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature E3. The gaming machine according to Feature E2, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature E3, since a plurality of pieces of aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage unit, the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods are grasped based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do. In addition, even if a new setting value is repeated under a situation where no game is played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is being played is substantially the mode information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature E4. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is a means for executing special processing when the setting value set by the setting means exceeds the predetermined number under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, further comprising a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes, a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature E4, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially performed does not remain in the aspect information storage unit. When the new setting is repeated, a special process is performed on the new setting. Thereby, it becomes possible to cope with the action.

  Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the information deriving unit derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit. .

  According to the feature E5, since the mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being unnecessarily derived. Become.

Feature E6. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature E6, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the front of the gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launch device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
With
The grant determination means has, as the grant determination mode, a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively high and low,
The gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the grant correspondence result varies at least in the low probability mode according to the set value.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to change the probability of an assignment correspondence result in at least the low probability mode according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine. Thereby, even if it is a single game machine, it becomes possible to produce the situation where it becomes advantageous or unfavorable about the probability which becomes a grant correspondence result in low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode does not vary according to the set value.

  According to the feature F2, the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode is not changed according to the set value. By doing so, it becomes possible to limit the influence of the set value to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of benefits,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein a selection mode of the privilege does not vary according to the set value.

  According to the feature F3, the probability of the result corresponding to the grant in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the selection mode of the privilege is not changed according to the set value. Can be limited to situations in low probability mode.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group F, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the front of the gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launch device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. History storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117). )When,
Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112) A function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to the first information so that the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed). In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (function to execute display processing in the management CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Second information display control means for controlling display of the information display means so that display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed (in the first to tenth embodiments, steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63). In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63. In the twelfth embodiment, steps S3201, S3202, and S3204 in the main CPU 63. And the function of executing the process of step S3210, the function of executing the abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding thereto is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. The information display means displays not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the other information. As a result, the information display means can be used effectively.

  Feature G2. The period according to which the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the information display unit and the period during which the display corresponding to the other information is performed in the information display unit are distinguished from each other in the feature G1 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G2, which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed in the information display unit by grasping the situation where the display is performed in the information display unit. Can be specified.

  Feature G3. The second information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, so that the display corresponding to the different information is displayed. The gaming machine according to the characteristic G1 or G2, wherein the gaming machine is performed.

  According to the feature G3, by grasping the display mode of the information display unit, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed in the information display unit. It becomes possible.

  Feature G4. As the information display means, individual information display means capable of performing a plurality of types of display (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, 11th to 14th). In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, comprising a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing a display corresponding to the aspect information using a plurality of individual information display means. In addition, since there are a plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode greatly different between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the different information is performed. .

  Feature G5. The second information display control means is a predetermined individual that is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201 and second notification display devices in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments. The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature G5, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. This makes it possible to clearly identify which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means that is in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature G6. The second information display control means is a specific individual information display means (first display) that is in a display state when displaying the mode information among the plurality of individual information display means when performing display corresponding to the different information. The first notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification in the thirteenth embodiment. Display device 204) in a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed can be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature G5.

  According to the feature G6, in the specific individual information display means, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed can be displayed also when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when the display corresponding to the information is performed. In addition, even if the specific individual information display means has the same display contents as described above, it is not in a non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is provided with the configuration of the feature G5. When the display corresponding to the different information is performed by the predetermined individual information display unit, the display is in a non-display state, and thus it is possible to specify which display is performed on the plurality of individual information display units.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to the characteristic G5 or G6, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

  According to the feature G7, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so that the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the different information in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly distinguish from the case where the display is performed.

  Feature G8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and the predetermined individual information display means is not displayed even when the display of the aspect information is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G7, wherein

  According to the feature G8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing when the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed, it is specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed on the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

  Feature G9. The second information display control means is one specific individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, eleventh, twelfth) among the plurality of individual information display means. In any of the features G5 to G8, in the fourth notification display device 204), display corresponding to the different information is performed in the fourth notification display device 204), and the remaining individual information display means is set in a non-display state. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature G9, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, only one individual information display unit is in the display state, so that it is easy to grasp whether the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Become.

Feature G10. The plurality of individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to Feature G9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end portion in the predetermined direction among the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature G10, since one individual information display means for displaying corresponding to the different information is present at the end in the predetermined direction, it is grasped whether the display corresponding to the different information is performed. It becomes easy to do.

Feature G11. The first information display control means is an individual information display means of a type display target that is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (first notification display device 69a, eleventh in the first to tenth embodiments). In the fourteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) perform display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed, and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means of a result display object that is a part of the display information (the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device in the 11th to 14th embodiments. 3 notification display device 203 and fourth notification display device 204) display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the individual information display means of the type display target.

  According to the feature G11, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display unit of the type display target and the individual information display of the result display target The display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed in the means is performed. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp | ascertain the aspect information used as display object. In this case, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the individual information display means of the type display target is in the non-display state, so the state of the type display non-display corresponds to the different information, It will be easier to grasp if other information is displayed.

Feature G12. The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting units in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Is a possible configuration,
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit that can be in a light emitting state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of unit light emitting units to be in a light emitting state. When the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the combination of the unit light emitting units that is in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, wherein the gaming machine is a combination.

  According to the feature G12, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the display corresponding to the other information is performed by setting the unit light emitting unit that can be in the light emission state to the light emission state, thereby performing the display corresponding to the different information. In order to diversify, it is possible to limit the content of the display corresponding to the mode information as much as possible. On the other hand, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emission state is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emission state.

Feature G13. There are a plurality of display modes of display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to Feature G12, wherein the plurality of unit light emitting units include no unit light emitting unit that does not enter a light emitting state even when all the display corresponding to the aspect information of the plurality of aspects is performed. Machine.

  According to the feature G13, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light emitting units in an arbitrary combination are configured to be in the light emitting state. Therefore, the mode for diversifying the display corresponding to the mode information It is possible to minimize the restrictions on the display contents corresponding to the information.

Feature G14. Specific individual information display means which is the information display means (third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, thirteenth The embodiment includes a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
The second information display control means is a predetermined individual that is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201 and second notification display devices in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments. The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in G13.

  According to the feature G14, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. This makes it possible to clearly identify which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means that is in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature G15. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the second information display control unit causes display corresponding to the different information to be performed in a situation where the set value can be changed.

  According to the feature G15, the information display unit that performs display corresponding to the mode information can be used as a display unit for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

  Feature G16. The gaming machine according to Feature G15, wherein the second information display control means displays information corresponding to a set value currently selected as a display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature G16, the information display unit that performs display corresponding to the mode information can be also used as a display unit for displaying the setting value being changed.

  Feature G17. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine to be performed as a display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature G17, the information display unit that performs display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display unit for performing display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

  Feature G18. The second information display control means causes the display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state to be performed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the situation where the abnormal state does not occur. A gaming machine according to Feature G17.

  According to the feature G18, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G18, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H1. History storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117). )When,
Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112) A function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to the first information so that the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed). In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (function to execute display processing in the management CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Second information display control means for controlling display of the information display means so that display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed (in the first to tenth embodiments, steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63). In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63. In the twelfth embodiment, steps S3201, S3202, and S3204 in the main CPU 63. And the function of executing the process of step S3210, the function of executing the abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
With
The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting units in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Is a possible configuration,
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit that can be in a light emitting state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of unit light emitting units to be in a light emitting state. When the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the combination of the unit light emitting units that is in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. A gaming machine characterized by being a combination.

  According to the feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. The information display means displays not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the other information. As a result, the information display means can be used effectively.

  In addition, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light emitting unit that can be in the light emitting state is set in the light emitting state, and the display corresponding to the different information is performed, thereby diversifying the display corresponding to the mode information Therefore, it is possible to limit the display contents corresponding to the mode information as much as possible. On the other hand, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emission state is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emission state.

Feature H2. There are a plurality of display modes of display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to Feature H1, wherein the plurality of unit light emitting units do not have a unit light emitting unit that does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the aspect information of the plurality of aspects are performed. Machine.

  According to the feature H2, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light emitting units in an arbitrary combination are configured to be in the light emitting state. Therefore, the mode for diversifying the display corresponding to the mode information It is possible to minimize the restrictions on the display contents corresponding to the information.

Feature H3. Specific individual information display means which is the information display means (third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, thirteenth The embodiment includes a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
The second information display control means is a predetermined individual that is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201 and second notification display devices in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments. The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in H2.

  According to the feature H3, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. This makes it possible to clearly identify which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means that is in the non-display state. Is possible.

  Feature H4. The game machine according to Feature H3, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when displaying corresponding to the aspect information.

  According to the feature H4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and therefore the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the different information in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly distinguish from the case where the display is performed.

  Feature H5. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and the predetermined individual information display means is not displayed even when the display of the aspect information is changed. The gaming machine according to the feature H3 or H4, wherein

  According to the feature H5, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing when the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed, it is specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed on the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

Feature H6. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the second information display control unit causes display corresponding to the different information to be performed in a situation where the set value can be changed.

  According to the feature H6, the information display unit that performs display corresponding to the mode information can be used as a display unit for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

  Feature H7. The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the second information display control means displays information corresponding to a set value currently selected as a display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature H7, the information display unit that performs the display corresponding to the mode information can be used as the display unit for displaying the setting value being changed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. History storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117). )When,
Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112) A function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
First information display control means (management side) for controlling display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed. A function of executing processing for display in the CPU 112);
Second information display control means (function for executing abnormality display processing in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the information display means so that display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. The information display means displays not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine. As a result, the information display means can be used effectively.

  Feature I2. The second information display control means causes the display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state to be performed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the situation where the abnormal state does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

  According to the feature I2, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display unit.

  Feature I3. A feature I1 or I2 is characterized in that a period in which the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the information display means is distinguished from a period in which the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the information display means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature I3, which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the information display unit by grasping the situation where the display is performed in the information display unit. Can be specified.

  Feature I4. The second information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, so that the display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed. The gaming machine according to the characteristic G1 or G2, wherein the gaming machine is performed.

  According to the characteristic I4, it is possible to identify which of the display corresponding to the aspect information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed by the information display unit by grasping the display mode of the information display unit. It becomes possible.

  Feature I5. The information display means includes a plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) each capable of performing a plurality of types of display. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature I5, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing display corresponding to the aspect information using a plurality of individual information display means. Further, since there are a plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode greatly different between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. .

  Feature I6. The second information display control means is a predetermined individual that does not enter a non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the information display means (the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) is in a non-display state.

  According to the feature I6, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. In this way, it is possible to clearly identify which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature I7. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, the second information display control unit is a specific individual information display unit (first unit that is in a display state when displaying the mode information among the plurality of individual information display units. 3 notification display device 203 and fourth notification display device 204) are in a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed can be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. A gaming machine according to feature I6.

  According to the characteristic I7, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the specific individual information display means can be displayed even when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when the display corresponding to the information is performed. In addition, even if the specific individual information display means has the same display content as described above, it does not become a non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed with the configuration of the feature I7. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the predetermined individual information display means, the display is in the non-display state, so it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means.

  Feature I8. The gaming machine according to the characteristic I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed.

  According to the feature I8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and thus the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the abnormal state in which the display state is not displayed. It is possible to clearly distinguish from the case where the display is performed.

  Feature I9. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and the predetermined individual information display means is not displayed even when the display of the aspect information is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, wherein

  According to the feature I9, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing when the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed, it is specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. History storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117). )When,
Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112) A function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to the first information so that the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed). In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (function to execute display processing in the management CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
With
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the aspect information in the information display means, and the information display means is not displayed even when the display corresponding to the aspect information is changed. A gaming machine characterized by not being maintained in a state.

  According to the feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the display corresponding to the mode information regardless of the timing when the information display means is confirmed.

  Feature J2. As the information display means, individual information display means capable of performing a plurality of types of display (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, 11th to 14th). In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to the feature J1 is provided with a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

  According to the feature J2, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing a display corresponding to the aspect information using a plurality of individual information display means.

  Feature J3. The game machine according to Feature J2, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when displaying corresponding to the mode information.

  According to the feature J3, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and even when the display corresponding to the aspect information is changed, the display state is maintained. Maintained. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp | ascertain aspect information.

  Feature J4. The first information display control means is an individual information display means of a type display target that is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (first notification display device 69a, eleventh in the first to tenth embodiments). In the fourteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) perform display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed, and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means of a result display object that is a part of the display information (the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device in the 11th to 14th embodiments. 3 informing display device 203 and 4th informing display device 204) display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed is performed. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3

  According to the feature J4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display unit of the type display target and the individual information display of the result display target The display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed in the means is performed. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp | ascertain the aspect information used as display object.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )
The history storage execution means is means for preventing the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs (function of making a negative determination in step S3501 in the main CPU 63) when the predetermined event occurs. ).

  According to the feature K1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Further, since history information is not stored even if a predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored in a situation where it is not desirable to store history information. .

  Feature K2. The gaming machine according to claim K1, wherein the restriction situation can occur as a situation from the start of supply of operating power to the history storage execution means until a restriction release event occurs.

  According to the feature K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined event due to an operation check immediately after the start of supply of operating power from being stored as history information.

Feature K3. Means for setting the restriction status when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is satisfied (function for executing the process of step S3610 in the main CPU 63); ,
Means for not setting the restriction status when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is not satisfied (function of executing the process of step S3621 in the main CPU 63) When,
A gaming machine according to Feature K2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K3, there is a case where the restriction status is set and a case where the restriction condition is not set depending on whether or not the restriction condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction status from being set as necessary.

  Feature K4. The restriction situation may occur as a situation from the start of supply of operating power to the history storage execution means until the number of game balls discharged from the game area exceeds a predetermined reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K3.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored until the number of game balls discharged from the game area exceeds a predetermined reference number after the supply of operating power is started.

Feature K5. When a predetermined event occurs by executing a game, the history information of the game corresponding thereto is stored in history storage means (normal counter area 231, opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233). History storage execution means for storing (a function of executing a normal entrance management process in the main CPU 63, an entrance management process in the opening / closing execution mode, and an entrance management process in the high frequency support mode);
Information deriving means (function for executing the processing of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means;
With
The information derivation means does not derive the mode information when the situation is restricted.

  According to the feature K5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. In addition, in a restricted situation, even if a predetermined event occurs, the aspect information is not derived. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the aspect information from being derived in a situation where it is not preferable to derive the aspect information. .

  Feature K6. The gaming machine according to Feature K5, wherein the restriction situation can occur as a situation from the start of supply of operating power to the history storage execution means until a restriction release event occurs.

  According to the feature K6, it is possible to prevent the mode information using the history information based on the occurrence of the predetermined event by the operation check immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power from being derived.

  Feature K7. The restriction situation may occur as a situation from the start of supply of operating power to the history storage execution means until the number of game balls discharged from the game area exceeds a predetermined reference number. A gaming machine according to K5 or K6.

  According to the feature K7, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being derived until the number of game balls discharged from the game area becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number after the supply of operating power is started.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, and the feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the front of the gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launch device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Saving execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3802 and S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, In the embodiment, the function of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 is executed. In the seventeenth embodiment, the function of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 is executed. In the eighteenth embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 is executed. The function of executing the processing of S4602, the main-side CP in the nineteenth embodiment Processing of step S4701 and step S4703 and the ability to perform) in 63,
The return execution means for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 in the main CPU 63) The function of executing steps S3910 to S3915, the function of executing step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, and the processes of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. A function for executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L1, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is stored in the internal storage means At least a part of the information is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. In addition, when the second predetermined process is ended or after the end, the information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the internal storage unit. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. As described above, various controls can be suitably performed.

  Feature L2. The gaming machine according to the characteristic L1, wherein the predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature L2, since only a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the predetermined storage means, the storage capacity necessary for saving the information in the internal storage means in the predetermined storage means is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature L3. The internal storage means includes a first storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register) and a second storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and A register other than the IY register),
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to store information in the first storage area in the second predetermined process, but not to store information in the second storage area,
The game machine according to Feature L2, wherein the save execution means saves the information stored in the first storage area to the predetermined storage means.

  According to the characteristic L3, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is performed in the internal storage unit. The information in the first storage area that is the storage target of information is saved in the predetermined storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for saving the information stored in the storage means.

Feature L4. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
With
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the characteristic L4, since the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage unit, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage unit is determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is possible to make a distinct difference. Thereby, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed Is saved in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to save the information in the internal storage unit immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and it is possible to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature L5. The save execution means includes
In the first predetermined process, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed. Means for evacuating to the first predetermined storage area (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63; in the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63); ,
When the second predetermined process is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed, the second predetermined information, which is a part of information stored in the internal storage means, is stored in the second predetermined process. In the second predetermined storage area (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, in steps S4502 to S4507 of the main CPU 63; A function of executing processing, a function of executing processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, a function of executing processing of steps S4702 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment),
The gaming machine according to Feature L4, comprising:

  According to the feature L5, the first predetermined information which is a part of information stored in the internal storage unit is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage unit The second predetermined information is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to perform saving at a timing suitable for each piece of information stored in the internal storage means, and the processing for saving the information is executed in a distributed manner between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible.

  Feature L6. The gaming machine according to Feature L5, wherein the first predetermined information is information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature L6, it is possible to appropriately save the information in the flag register when the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature L7. The second predetermined storage area is
A stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area in which information can be written and read by a load instruction (work area 223 for non-specific control);
With
The game machine according to any one of features L4 to L6, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature L7, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area At least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in one of the work areas. As a result, it is possible to consolidate information saving destinations, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for returning.

  Feature L8. The game machine according to Feature L7, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

  According to the feature L8, since the save destination of at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is the work area, the information can be saved without performing a cumulative change of the stack pointer. Become.

Feature L9. The first predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the first predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the second predetermined process is executed. Information cannot be stored,
The second predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the second predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L8, wherein information cannot be stored.

  According to the feature L9, the first predetermined storage area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. It becomes.

Feature L10. The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area in which information can be written and read by a load instruction (work area 223 for non-specific control);
With
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the save execution unit saves the predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature L10, the save destinations of the predetermined information can be aggregated, and the processing configuration for saving the predetermined information and the processing configuration for returning the predetermined information can be simplified.

  Feature L11. The game machine according to Feature L10, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

  According to the feature L11, since the save destination of the predetermined information is the work area, the information can be saved without performing a cumulative change of the stack pointer.

Feature L12. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The save execution unit is configured to store the internal storage unit when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. The game machine according to Feature L11, further comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) for saving specific information that is a part of information stored in the stack area to the stack area. .

  According to the feature L12, the specific information is saved in the stack area in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area. As a result, the information stored in the internal storage means can be distributed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

  Feature L13. The gaming machine according to Feature L12, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

  According to the feature L13, a predetermined amount of information larger than the specific information is saved in the work area, so that a lot of information is accumulated in the stack area when saving the information stored in the internal storage unit. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Feature L14. Information on the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed Is a configuration that becomes fixed information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L13, wherein the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage unit is not a target of saving by the saving execution unit.

  According to the feature L14, since it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving information of the stack pointer in the predetermined storage unit, the capacity of the predetermined storage unit can be suppressed. Further, even when the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, In this case, since the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, it is possible to return to the stack pointer information before the second predetermined processing is started without saving the stack pointer information as described above. Is possible.

  Feature L15. Means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after the second predetermined process is finished (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3909 in the main CPU 63, the seventeenth implementation) The game machine according to Feature L14, wherein the game machine has a function of executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment. .

  According to the feature L15, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer when the second predetermined process is ended or after the second predetermined process is started before the second predetermined process is started.

  Feature L16. When the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the stack pointer is changed to the second predetermined process. Means for setting corresponding second correspondence start information (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step S4501 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, In the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine according to the feature L14 or L15, which includes a function of executing the processing of step S4601 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature L16, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address can be set in the second predetermined process. Information can be stored in the stack area.

Feature L17. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L16, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature L17, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for executing the process is executed.

Feature L18. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
With
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature L17, comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature L18, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature L19. The second predetermined process execution means is information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to the feature L18, which is provided with a function of executing the process (1).

  According to the feature L19, game history management such as occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is performed by deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature L20. The gaming machine according to Feature L19, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature L20, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L20, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Saving execution means for saving predetermined information, which is part information, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63, seventeenth embodiment In the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63, and in the nineteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S4701 and S450 in the main CPU 63. The function of executing the processing of S4703),
When the second predetermined process is ended or after the completion, the return execution means for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3910 in the main CPU 63). A function for executing the process of step S3915; a function for executing the process of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment; a function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment; In the nineteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63),
With
The retreat execution means retreats the predetermined information to the predetermined storage means by a load command.

  According to the feature M1, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is stored in the internal storage means Predetermined information, which is at least part of information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. In addition, when the second predetermined process is completed or after the completion, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the internal storage unit. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. When the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information is saved in the predetermined storage means by the load instruction. . As a result, it is possible to save the predetermined information without changing the stack pointer.

Feature M2. The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area in which information can be written and read by a load instruction (work area 223 for non-specific control);
With
The game machine according to feature M1, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

  According to the feature M2, when the save destination of the predetermined information, which is at least a part of information stored in the internal storage means, is the work area, the information is saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer. It becomes possible.

Feature M3. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The save execution unit is configured to store the internal storage unit when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature M2, further comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) for saving specific information, which is a part of information stored in the storage area, to the stack area. .

  According to the feature M3, the specific information is saved in the stack area in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area. As a result, the information stored in the internal storage means can be distributed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

  Feature M4. The gaming machine according to Feature M3, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

  According to the feature M4, when a predetermined amount of information larger than the specific information is saved in the work area, a large amount of information is accumulated in the stack area when the information stored in the internal storage unit is saved. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Feature M5. The work area is
A first work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M4, wherein the retreat execution unit retreats the predetermined information to the second work area.

  According to the feature M5, since the first work area and the second work area are provided in the work area, the storage destination of information in the work area is clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed Is saved in the second work area. As a result, it is possible to save the information in the internal storage unit immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and it is possible to save the information without using the first work area.

Feature M6. The first work area is capable of storing information and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. Information cannot be stored,
The second work area is capable of storing information and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature M5, wherein information cannot be stored.

  According to the feature M6, the first work area can be handled as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and the second work area can be handled as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. .

Feature M7. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Saving execution means for saving predetermined information, which is part information, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63, seventeenth embodiment In the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63, and in the nineteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S4701 and S450 in the main CPU 63. The function of executing the processing of S4703),
When the second predetermined process is ended or after the completion, the return execution means for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3910 in the main CPU 63). A function for executing the process of step S3915; a function for executing the process of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment; a function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment; In the nineteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63),
With
The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area in which information can be written and read by a load instruction (work area 223 for non-specific control);
With
The retreat execution means retreats the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature M7, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is stored in the internal storage means Predetermined information, which is at least part of information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. In addition, when the second predetermined process is completed or after the completion, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the internal storage unit. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

  Further, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, one of the stack area and the work area in the predetermined storage means In addition, the predetermined information is saved. As a result, it is possible to consolidate information saving destinations, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for returning.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features M1 to M7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
With
When the status of executing the first predetermined process is changed to the status of executing the second predetermined process, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is fixed information. To play.

  According to the feature N1, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means becomes fixed information when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed. There is no need to save the information of the stack pointer when starting predetermined processing. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving the stack pointer information. In addition, when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so that the stack pointer information is not saved as described above. However, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started.

  Feature N2. Means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after the second predetermined process is finished (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3909 in the main CPU 63, the seventeenth implementation) The game machine according to Feature N1, further comprising a function for executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment. .

  According to the feature N2, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer when the second predetermined process is ended or after the second predetermined process is started.

  Feature N3. Means for setting second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined processing in the stack pointer when the second predetermined processing is executed from the state in which the first predetermined processing is executed (fifteenth In the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main CPU 63, in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4501 in the main CPU 63, and in the eighteenth embodiment, the process of step S4601 in the main CPU 63. The gaming machine according to the feature N1 or N2, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the feature N3, when the second predetermined process is started, second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address can be set in the second predetermined process. Information can be stored in the stack area.

Feature N4. At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Saving execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3802 and S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, In the embodiment, the function of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 is executed. In the seventeenth embodiment, the function of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 is executed. In the eighteenth embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 is executed. The function of executing the processing of S4602, the main-side CP in the nineteenth embodiment Processing of step S4701 and step S4703 and the ability to perform) in 63,
The return execution means for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 in the main CPU 63) The function of executing steps S3910 to S3915, the function of executing step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, and the processes of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. A function for executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not a target of saving by the saving execution means.

  According to the feature N4, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is stored in the internal storage means At least a part of the information is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. In addition, when the second predetermined process is ended or after the end, the information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the internal storage unit. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. Further, since the stack pointer information is not a target for saving, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving the stack pointer information in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the predetermined storage unit. Further, even when the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, In this case, since the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, it is possible to return to the stack pointer information before the second predetermined processing is started without saving the stack pointer information as described above. Is possible.

Feature N5. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
With
The gaming machine according to feature N4, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature N5, since the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage unit, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage unit is determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is possible to make a distinct difference. Thereby, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed Is saved in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to save the information in the internal storage unit immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and it is possible to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature N6. The first predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the first predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the second predetermined process is executed. It ’s impossible to memorize things,
The second predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the second predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature N5, wherein information on things cannot be stored.

  According to the feature N6, the first predetermined storage area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. It becomes.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features N1 to N6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature O group>
Feature O1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least a part of the storage in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed First state setting means (steps S4803 to S4808 in the main CPU 63) for setting the state of a predetermined storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) as a predetermined state. Function to execute)
A second state setting unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S4903 to S4908 in the main CPU 63) for setting the state of the predetermined storage area to the predetermined state when or after the second predetermined processing is ended;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic O1, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined storage area of the internal storage means Is set to a predetermined state, and the state of the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state again when or after the second predetermined process is ended. Thereby, the state of the predetermined storage area can be set to a predetermined state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process. As described above, various controls can be suitably performed.

  Feature O2. The gaming machine according to Feature O1, wherein the predetermined state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

  According to the feature O2, the predetermined storage area is set to a predetermined state in a state where the supply of operating power to the control unit is started, and thus the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state is simplified. Is possible.

  Feature O3. The gaming machine according to the characteristic O1 or O2, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined storage area is cleared to "0".

  According to the feature O3, the predetermined storage area is set to a state in which “0” is cleared as a predetermined state, so that the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state can be simplified.

  Feature O4. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the predetermined storage area is a partial storage area in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature O4, since only a part of the storage area of the internal storage unit is set to the predetermined state, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting to the predetermined state.

Feature O5. The internal storage means includes at least the predetermined storage area and another storage area (a register other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register),
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to store information in the predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process, but not to store information in the separate storage area,
The gaming machine according to Feature O4, wherein the first state setting means and the second state setting means do not change the state of the separate storage area.

  According to the characteristic O5, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is executed in the internal storage means. The predetermined storage area to be the information storage target is set to a predetermined state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area from the first predetermined process from affecting the second predetermined process. In addition, since the state of the separate storage area is not changed, setting the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is started may not affect the process after the second predetermined process ends. It becomes possible.

  Feature O6. The information in the predetermined storage area before the setting of the predetermined state by the first state setting means is information that is not used after the second predetermined process is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature O6, even if the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is ended. It is possible to prevent the subsequent processing from being affected.

Feature O7. A part stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed Saving execution means (function for executing the processing of step S4802 in the main CPU 63) for saving predetermined information (information in the flag register) as information on the information to the predetermined storage means (main RAM 65);
Return execution means for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is ended or after the completion (function to execute the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O6, comprising:

  According to the feature O7, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is stored in the internal storage means Predetermined information, which is part of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage unit. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, the information stored in the internal storage means when the first predetermined process is executed and the information necessary for the subsequent execution of the first predetermined process is rewritten. It becomes possible not to be. In addition, when the second predetermined process is completed or after the completion, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the internal storage unit. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

Feature O8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature O8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for executing the process is executed.

Feature O9. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
With
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature O8, comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature O9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature O10. The second predetermined process execution means is information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to Feature O9, which is provided with a function of executing the process (1).

  According to the feature O10, game history management such as occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is performed by deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature O11. The gaming machine according to Feature O10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the characteristic O11, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features O1 to O11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature P1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage unit can be clearly made different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed.

Feature P2. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to Feature P1, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature P2, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for executing the process is executed.

  Feature P3. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature P2, further comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature P3, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature P4. The second predetermined process execution means is information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The game machine according to Feature P3, further comprising:

  According to the feature P4, game history management such as occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is performed by deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature P5. The gaming machine according to claim P4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature P5, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature P6. In the first predetermined process, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed. First evacuation means for evacuating to the first predetermined storage area (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing step S3802 in the main CPU 63; in the sixteenth embodiment, executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63) Function)
When the second predetermined process is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed, the second predetermined information, which is a part of information stored in the internal storage means, is stored in the second predetermined process. In the second predetermined storage area (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63, in the seventeenth embodiment, the step S4502 in the main CPU 63). A function of executing the process of step S4507, a function of executing the process of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment. When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5, wherein:

  According to the characteristic P6, the first predetermined information which is a part of information stored in the internal storage unit is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage unit The second predetermined information is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to perform saving at a timing suitable for each piece of information stored in the internal storage means, and the processing for saving the information is executed in a distributed manner between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible.

Feature P7. When the second predetermined process is ended or after the completion, the first return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the main return means) returns the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area to the internal storage means. The function of executing the process of step S3804 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment),
When the second predetermined process is completed or after the second predetermined process is completed, second return execution means (mainly in the fifteenth embodiment, the second predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area is returned to the internal storage means. A function for executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915 in the side CPU 63, a function for executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment. A function of executing processing, a function of executing processing in steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment),
The gaming machine according to Feature P6, comprising:

  According to the characteristic P7, the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area is returned to the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is finished or after the second predetermined processing is finished, and the first predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area is restored. 2 Since the predetermined information is returned to the internal storage means, the state of the internal storage means can be returned to the state before the second predetermined processing is started.

  Feature P8. The gaming machine according to P6 or P7, wherein the first predetermined information includes information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature P8, it is possible to appropriately save the information in the flag register in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

  Feature P9. The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P8, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of all registers of the internal storage means.

  According to the feature P9, the information of all the registers in the internal storage means is saved together, so there is no need to selectively save the register information.

Feature P10. The second predetermined storage area is
A stack area where information is written by a push instruction and information is read by a pop instruction (stack area 224 for non-specific control);
A work area in which information is written and read by a load instruction (work area 223 for non-specific control);
With
The gaming machine according to claim P9, wherein the second retreat execution means retreats the second predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the characteristic P10, the information of all the registers in the internal storage unit is saved in one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, the save destinations of the information of all the registers can be collected, and the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for returning can be simplified.

  Feature P11. The game machine according to Feature P10, wherein the second save execution means saves the second predetermined information in the stack area.

  According to the feature P11, it is possible to save the information of all the registers without using the work area.

  Feature P12. The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P11, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of a stack pointer of the internal storage means.

  According to the feature P12, it is possible to appropriately save the stack pointer information when the first predetermined process is being executed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features P1 to P12, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature L group, the feature M group, the feature N group, the feature O group, and the feature P group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to suitably perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic Q group>
Feature Q1. A control means (MPU 62) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed;
A history storage means (management RAM 241) that is provided as a separate chip from the control means and can temporarily store information;
With
The control means is a history storage execution means for storing history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event in the history storage means when a predetermined event occurs by executing the game (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63, A gaming machine having a function of executing a pitch management process during the opening / closing execution mode and a pitch management process during the high-frequency support mode.

  According to the feature Q1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Further, since the history storage means is provided as a separate chip from the control means, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing history information while using general-purpose control means.

  Feature Q2. The gaming machine according to Feature Q1, wherein the control means includes predetermined storage means (main-side RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when various processes are executed.

  According to the feature Q2, in a configuration including not only the predetermined storage means provided in the control means but also the history storage means provided as a chip different from the control means, the history information is stored in the history storage means. A lot of history information can be stored and held.

  Feature Q3. The gaming machine according to the feature Q2, wherein the control means temporarily stores information in the predetermined storage means when executing the process related to the history information.

  According to the characteristic Q3, in the configuration in which the history storage unit for storing the history information is provided as a separate chip from the control unit, when processing related to the history information is executed, the predetermined storage unit provided in the control unit Since the information is temporarily stored, it is possible to prevent the processing speed from being extremely reduced when processing related to history information is executed.

  Feature Q4. The control means uses the history information stored in the history storage means to derive mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period (executes the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3, wherein

  According to the feature Q4, game history management such as occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is performed by deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means. It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature Q5. The gaming machine according to Feature Q4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature Q5, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features Q1 to Q5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature Q group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the front of the gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launch device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
When the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event. Status generating means (a function for executing steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, or a step S5503 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment). A function for executing the processing of step S5507, a function for executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature R1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occur when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. Need to be. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R2. Opening grasping means for grasping that the opening / closing body (front door frame 14) is in an open state (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S5005 in the main CPU 63, in another embodiment, in the main CPU 63) A function for executing the process of S5505, a function for executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment),
The situation generating means identifies that the first event has occurred based on the fact that the opening grasping means grasps that the opening / closing body is in an open state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature R2, the opening / closing body needs to be in an open state in order to set the setting value to be used. As a result, when an act of setting a setting value to be used illegally is performed, it is possible to make the illegal act stand out, and as a result, it is possible to easily find the illegal act. .

Feature R3. Separate opening grasping means for grasping that the separate opening / closing body (the gaming machine main body 12) is in the open state (the function of executing step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, and the main CPU 63 in the other embodiment) In step S5506, in the twenty-third embodiment, the function of executing step S5704 in the main CPU 63).
The status generating means identifies that the second event has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening grasping means has grasped that the separate opening / closing body is in an open state. A gaming machine according to feature R2.

  According to the feature R3, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening / closing body but also to open the other opening / closing body. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and to make the fraudulent action conspicuous.

Feature R4. The setting means performs at least one of selection of the setting value to be used and setting of the setting value to be used based on the operation of predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c). Is a configuration to perform,
The gaming machine according to R2 or R3, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening another open / close body.

  According to the feature R4, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless the opening / closing body different from the other opening / closing body opened to enable the predetermined operation means to be opened. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and to make the fraudulent action conspicuous.

Feature R5. The opening / closing body defines the gaming machine front side of the gaming area where the game ball flows down,
5. The gaming machine according to any one of features R2 to R4, wherein the gaming area is opened forward of the gaming machine by opening the opening / closing body.

  According to the feature R5, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the gaming area forward of the gaming machine by opening the opening / closing body. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and to make the fraudulent action conspicuous.

  Feature R6. The situation generating means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on a predetermined operation performed by the setting key on the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a). The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R5.

  According to the feature R6, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key to the setting key insertion unit but also to generate an event different from that. is there. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud.

  Feature R7. The situation generating means is configured to detect a plurality of events based on occurrence of a predetermined game event (operation of the launch operation device 28, entry to the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R6, wherein one of the events is identified as occurring.

  According to the feature R7, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is not only necessary to generate a predetermined game event that occurs when a game is performed, but separately from that. It is necessary to generate the event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud.

  Feature R8. The situation generating means is based on the fact that a game ball is detected by a ball detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) for detecting that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entrance provided in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R7, wherein one of the plurality of events is identified as occurring.

  According to the feature R8, in order to set a setting value to be used, it is necessary to cause a game ball to enter a predetermined entry part and to generate an event different from that. There is. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R9. A setting value notifying unit (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that causes the notifying unit to notify the setting value to be used set by the setting unit;
The setting value notifying means notifies the notifying means of the setting value to be used set by the setting means based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R8, characterized by:

  According to the feature R9, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of confirming the set value due to fraud. In addition, the game hall administrator only needs to generate the first event and the second event when setting the setting value to be used and when confirming the setting value. It becomes common and it becomes easy to grasp each work.

Feature R10. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
A plurality of events including both that a predetermined operation with the setting key for the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed and another event different from the predetermined operation with the setting key for the setting key insertion unit Based on what has occurred, the situation generating means (in the twenty-second embodiment, in the main CPU 63) that allows the setting means to set the setting value to be used can be set. The function of executing the processing of step S5003 to step S5006, the function of executing the processing of step S5503 to step S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another form, Processing function), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature R10, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion unit, but also to generate another event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R11. Opening grasping means for grasping that the opening / closing body (front door frame 14) is in an open state (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S5005 in the main CPU 63, in another embodiment, in the main CPU 63) A function for executing the process of S5505, a function for executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment),
The situation generating means identifies that the different event has occurred based on the fact that the opening grasping means grasps that the opening / closing body is in an open state. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature R11, the opening / closing body needs to be in an open state in order to set the setting value to be used. As a result, when an act of setting a setting value to be used illegally is performed, it is possible to make the illegal act stand out, and as a result, it is possible to easily find the illegal act. .

Feature R12. Separate opening grasping means for grasping that the separate opening / closing body (the gaming machine main body 12) is in the open state (the function of executing step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, and the main CPU 63 in the other embodiment) In step S5506, in the twenty-third embodiment, the function of executing step S5704 in the main CPU 63).
The status generating means identifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening grasping means has grasped that the separate opening / closing body is in an open state. The gaming machine according to Feature R11, wherein:

  According to the feature R12, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening / closing body but also to open the other opening / closing body. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and to make the fraudulent action conspicuous.

Feature R13. The setting means performs at least one of selection of the setting value to be used and setting of the setting value to be used based on the operation of predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c). Is a configuration to perform,
The gaming machine according to R11 or R12, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening another open / close body.

  According to the feature R13, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless the opening / closing body different from the other opening / closing body opened to enable the predetermined operation means is opened. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and to make the fraudulent action conspicuous.

Feature R14. The opening / closing body defines the gaming machine front side of the gaming area where the game ball flows down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R11 to R13, wherein the gaming area is opened forward of the gaming machine by opening the opening / closing body.

  According to the feature R14, in order to set a setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the gaming area forward of the gaming machine by opening the opening / closing body. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and to make the fraudulent action conspicuous.

  Feature R15. The situation generating means is configured to detect a plurality of events based on occurrence of a predetermined game event (operation of the launch operation device 28, entry to the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R14, wherein one of the events is identified as occurring.

  According to the feature R15, in order to set a setting value to be used, not only a predetermined operation with a setting key is performed on the setting key insertion unit but also a predetermined that occurs when a game is performed. It is necessary to generate a game event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud.

  Feature R16. The situation generating means is based on the fact that a game ball is detected by a ball detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) for detecting that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entrance provided in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R15, wherein one of the plurality of events is identified as occurring.

  According to the feature R16, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only the predetermined operation with the setting key is performed on the setting key insertion unit, but also the game ball is inserted into the predetermined pitching unit. Need to make a ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R17. A setting value notifying unit (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that causes the notifying unit to notify the setting value to be used set by the setting unit;
The setting value notification means is based on the fact that the predetermined operation by the setting key with respect to the setting key insertion portion is being performed and a plurality of events including both of the different events have occurred. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics R10 to R16, wherein the notification unit is configured to notify the set value to be used set by the notification means.

  According to the feature R17, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of confirming the set value due to fraud. In addition, the game hall administrator performs a predetermined operation with the setting key to the setting key insertion portion and generates another event regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value is confirmed. Therefore, the work is made common and it becomes easy to grasp each work.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features R1 to R17, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature R group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the front of the gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launch device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to deal with illegal acts on the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature S group>
Feature S1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Situation generating means for providing a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the twenty-second embodiment, the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 and steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63) In the other embodiment, the function of executing steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment, In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, and in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the function of executing steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63),
Setting value grasping means for grasping whether or not the setting value before the settable state is set and the setting value set by the setting means is the same (in the twenty-second embodiment, step S5017 in the main CPU 63). And a function of executing the processing of step S5111 to step S5112, in another form, a function of executing the processing of step S5611 to step S5612 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature S1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, it is grasped whether or not the set value before the settable situation is the same as the set value set in the settable situation. As a result, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable status. Therefore, when a setting value to be used is set, a preferable situation can be generated for the setting result, and a setting operation for the setting value can be suitably performed.

  Feature S2. Based on the fact that the set value grasping means grasps that the set value before the settable situation and the set value set by the setting means are the same, the corresponding simultaneous processing is performed. Same-time means to be executed (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5113 in the main CPU 63, and in another embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5613 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to Feature S1, characterized by:

  According to the feature S2, when the set values are the same across the settable situations, the same time process is executed, so that it is possible to generate a preferable situation for the same set values. Become.

  Feature S3. The gaming machine according to claim S2, wherein the same time means executes a process for making a notification corresponding to the fact that the set value has not been changed as the same time process.

  According to the feature S3, it is possible to notify the game hall manager or the like that the set values are the same across the settable situations.

  Feature S4. Based on the fact that the set value grasping means grasps that the set value before the settable state is different from the set value set by the setting means, the corresponding non-identical processing is executed. Non-same time means (function to execute step S5114 in main CPU63 in the twenty-second embodiment, function to execute step S5614 in main CPU63 in another embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3.

  According to the feature S4, when the set values are not the same across the settable situations, a non-identical process is executed, so that a preferable situation can be generated for the change of the set values. It becomes.

  Feature S5. The gaming machine according to claim S4, wherein the non-identical means executes a process for performing notification corresponding to the change of the set value as the non-identical process. .

  According to the feature S5, it is possible to notify the game hall manager or the like that the set value has been changed across the settable situation.

  Feature S6. The status generating means is configured to perform the setting based on the necessity of erasing the information in the storage means for storing the setting value after the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be in a possible situation.

  According to the feature S6, when it becomes necessary to delete the information stored in the storage means for storing the setting value, the setting is possible, so that the game is continued even though the setting value information is deleted. It becomes possible not to be. In this case, the configuration of the feature S1 is provided, and it is grasped whether or not the set value before the settable situation and the set value set in the settable situation are the same. As a result, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable status.

  Feature S7. The set value is not changed based on the fact that the set value grasping means grasps that the set value before the settable situation and the set value set by the setting means are the same. A means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5113 in the main CPU 63; in another embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5613 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to Feature S6, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  According to the feature S7, even if the setting is possible due to the deletion of the information in the storage unit, the setting value is changed if the setting value is the same across the setting possibility situation. A notification corresponding to the absence is made. This makes it possible to notify the player that the set value has not been changed even if the setting is possible during the game, and the player is safe even if the setting is possible during the game. It is possible to continue the game with heart.

Feature S8. The situation generating means is:
Based on the start of the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means, the first situation generating means (step S5003 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment) that makes the setting possible situation. The function of executing the process of step S5006, in another form, the function of executing the process of step S5503 to step S5507 in the main CPU 63, and in the twenty-third embodiment, the process of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 are executed. Function)
A second situation in which the settable situation is established based on the necessity of erasing information stored in the storage means for storing the set value after the supply of operating power to the control means is started. Generating means (in the twenty-second embodiment, the function of executing steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, the function of executing steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63),
With
The set value grasping means is configured to be able to set the settable situation generated by the first situation generating means and the settable situation caused by the second situation generating means before entering the settable situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S7, characterized in that it is ascertained whether or not the setting value in the setting and the setting value set by the setting means are the same.

  According to the feature S8, when it becomes necessary to delete the information stored in the storage means for storing the setting value, the setting is possible, so that the game is continued even though the setting value information is deleted. It becomes possible not to be. In this case, using the same process as when setting is possible based on the start of supply of operating power to the control means, setting is possible as information in the storage means is erased. When this occurs, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable situation.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features S1 to S8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature S group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the front of the gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launch device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, when a setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine is set, it is necessary to cause a suitable situation to the setting value, and this point is still improved. There is room for.

<Feature T group>
Feature T1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments);
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
First monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal (in the twenty-second embodiment, the function of executing steps S5401 to S5404 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-fourth embodiment) A function of executing processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and a step S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment. To execute the processing of step S7703),
Second monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal (in the twenty-second embodiment, the function of executing steps S5405 to S5408 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-fourth embodiment) A function of executing processing of steps S5809, S5810, S5812, and S5813 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing processing of steps S6101, S6102, S6105, and S6106 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment; In the thirty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes a process of steps S7706 to S7708),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature T1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is handled as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage unit can be clearly made different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. Further, monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal are executed, whereby the first predetermined process and the second predetermined storage area are executed. It is possible to specify whether or not each of the processes can be normally performed.

  Feature T2. The game according to claim T1, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution unit and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution unit are executed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Machine.

  According to the feature T2, monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area are normal are performed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Aggregated and executed. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to a configuration in which monitoring of each storage area is performed in a distributed manner between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

  Feature T3. The gaming machine according to claim T1 or T2, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution unit and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution unit are executed in the first predetermined process.

  According to the feature T3, monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal can be collectively performed in the first predetermined process. It becomes.

  Feature T4. Based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means specifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, predetermined erasing means for erasing information in the first predetermined storage area (in the twenty-second embodiment, the main side) The function of executing the process of step S5410 in the CPU 63, the function of executing the processes of step S5806, step S5811 and step S5814 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and the step S5906 of step S5906 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3, which includes a function of executing the processing of S6103 and step S6107.

  According to the feature T4, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is deleted, and the first predetermined process is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

  Feature T5. The predetermined erasing means erases information in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means specifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, and the second predetermined storage area The gaming machine according to Feature T4, wherein the area information is erased.

  According to the feature T5, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the first predetermined storage area but also the second predetermined storage area is erased. As a result, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the second predetermined storage area, the information in the second predetermined storage area can be deleted regardless of the monitoring result by the second monitoring execution means.

  Feature T6. The predetermined erasing unit erases the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring execution unit specifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal. A gaming machine according to T4 or T5.

  According to the feature T6, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is deleted, so that the first predetermined process is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

  Feature T7. The predetermined erasing unit erases the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring execution unit specifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, and the first predetermined storage area The gaming machine according to Feature T6, wherein the area information is erased.

  According to the feature T7, when the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the second predetermined storage area but also the first predetermined storage area is erased. As a result, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area, the information in the first predetermined storage area can be erased regardless of the monitoring result by the first monitoring execution means.

  Feature T8. The process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing unit is executed in any one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, according to any one of the characteristics T4 to T7, Game machines.

  According to the feature T8, the process of deleting the information in each predetermined storage area based on the fact that it is specified to be abnormal is collectively executed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which erasure of information in each storage area is performed in a distributed manner between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

  Feature T9. The gaming machine according to any one of features T4 to T7, wherein the process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing unit is executed in the first predetermined process.

  According to the feature T9, it is possible to collectively execute the process of deleting the information in each predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormality is specified in the first predetermined process.

Feature T10. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T9, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature T10, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for executing the process is executed.

  Feature T11. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature T10, comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature T11, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature T12. The second predetermined process execution means is information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to the feature T11, which is provided with a function of executing the process (1).

  According to the feature T12, game history management such as occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is performed by deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature T13. The gaming machine according to Feature T12, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature T13, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features T1 to T13, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature U group>
Feature U1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A flag register provided in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed State setting means (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the step in the main CPU63 in the twenty-seventh embodiment). A function of executing the processes of S6302 to S6307 and S6312),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic U1, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the flag register of the internal storage means The state is set to a specific state. Thus, the second predetermined process can be started in a situation where the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. Therefore, various controls can be suitably performed.

  Feature U2. The gaming machine according to claim U1, wherein the specific state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

  According to the characteristic U2, the flag register is set to the state when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started as the specific state, so that the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified. It becomes possible.

  Feature U3. The gaming machine according to claim U1 or U2, wherein the specific state is a state in which the flag register is cleared to "0".

  According to the feature U3, since the flag register is set to a state in which “0” is cleared as the specific state, the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified.

  Feature U4. Means (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the processing of steps S6213 to S6218 in the main CPU 63 is performed so that the state of the flag register becomes the specific state when or after the second predetermined processing is ended. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3, which is provided with a function, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6314 to S6322 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the characteristic U4, the second predetermined process is performed not only when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. The flag register state is also set to a specific state when the process ends or when the process ends. Thus, the first predetermined process can be restarted in a situation where the state of the flag register is a predetermined specific state. In addition, the state of the flag register can be set to a specific state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flag register state of one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process.

Feature U5. Provided with predetermined storage means (main-side RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when the control means executes processing;
The state setting means includes
Means for bringing the state of the predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means into the specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing steps S6202 to S6204 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-seventh embodiment A function of executing the processes of steps S6302 to S6307 in the main CPU 63);
Means for storing the information stored in the predetermined storage area in the flag register so that the state of the flag register becomes the specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the process of step S6211 in the main CPU 63 is performed). A function to be executed, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6312 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4, comprising:

  According to the feature U5, even if the flag register state cannot be directly set to a specific state as an instruction of the control unit, the flag is written using the information writing to the predetermined storage unit and the reading of the information. It is possible to set the register state to a specific state.

Feature U6. The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (stack area 222 for specific control) in which the control means can write information by a push command and the control means can read information by a pop command;
A work area (work area 221 for specific control) in which the control means can write and read information by a load command;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature U5, wherein the predetermined storage area is provided in the stack area.

  According to the feature U6, even if the information stored in the work area cannot be directly written to the flag register, the state of the flag register is specified by using the information writing to the stack area and the reading of the information. It becomes possible to set the state.

Feature U7. A predetermined register provided in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed (A function for executing the processing of steps S6205 to S6210 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and steps S6308 to S6311 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-seventh embodiment). Function to execute processing)
The state setting means makes the state of the flag register become the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state, according to any one of the characteristics U1 to U6, Gaming machine.

  The state of the flag register can change each time various processes are executed in the control means. In this case, according to the feature U7, since the state of the flag register is set to the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state, the flag register is set to the specific state immediately before the second predetermined process is started. It becomes possible to be.

Feature U8. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is a means for setting the state of the flag register to a specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63, the twenty-seventh embodiment). Then, the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 and S6312 in the main CPU63.

  According to the feature U8, the state of the flag register can be set to a specific state as necessary.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features U1 to U8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature V group>
Feature V1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A flag register provided in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed Evacuation execution means (a function for executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment). A function for executing processing, a function for executing processing in step S4802 in the main CPU 63 in the twentieth embodiment, a function for executing processing in steps S6402 to S6405 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, In the embodiment, the processing of steps S6502 to S6509 in the main CPU 63 is performed. And the execution function),
Return execution means for returning the flag register information saved in the predetermined storage means to the flag register when the second predetermined process is ended or after the completion (in step S3804 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment). In the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63 in the twentieth embodiment, and the twenty-eighth embodiment. In the 29th embodiment, the function of executing steps S6511 to S6518 in the main CPU 63), and the function of executing steps S6511 to S6518 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature V1, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information in the flag register is stored in advance. Evacuated to the means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flag register from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. In addition, when the second predetermined process is ended or after the end, the information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the flag register. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the flag register before the execution of the second predetermined process. As described above, various controls can be suitably performed.

Feature V2. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
With
The game machine according to claim V1, wherein the save execution means saves information in the flag register to the first predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature V2, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage unit, so that the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage unit is determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is possible to make a distinct difference. Thereby, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, the information in the flag register is stored in the first predetermined storage area when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Is evacuated. As a result, it is possible to save the information in the flag register immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and it is possible to save the information without using the second predetermined storage area.

Feature V3. The first predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the first predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the second predetermined process is executed. Information cannot be stored,
The second predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the second predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature V2, wherein information cannot be stored.

  According to the feature V3, the first predetermined storage area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. It becomes.

Feature V4. The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area in which information can be written and read by a load instruction (a work area 221 for specific control);
With
The game machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein the save execution means saves the information in the flag register to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature V4, when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area The information in the flag register is saved in one of the work areas. As a result, it is possible to consolidate information saving destinations, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for returning.

  Feature V5. The gaming machine according to claim V4, wherein the save execution means saves the information in the flag register to the work area.

  According to the feature V5, since the save destination of the information in the flag register is the work area, the information can be saved without performing a cumulative change of the stack pointer.

Feature V6. The save execution means includes
Means for storing information of the flag register in a predetermined register provided in the internal storage means (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the function of executing steps S6402 and S6403 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-ninth embodiment the main register The function of executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6505 in the side CPU 63),
Means for storing the information of the flag register stored in the predetermined register in the predetermined storage means (the function of executing step S6404 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the twenty-ninth embodiment) In step S6506).
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V5, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature V6, even in a configuration in which the information in the flag register cannot be directly saved in the predetermined storage unit as an instruction from the control unit, the information is written to the predetermined register and the information stored in the predetermined register is predetermined. The information in the flag register can be saved in the predetermined storage means by using writing to the storage means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features V1 to V6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature W group>
Feature W1. A control means (main CPU 63) for executing various processes is provided,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
An abnormal event monitoring means (program monitoring unit 252) for monitoring whether or not an abnormal event has occurred;
Based on the fact that the abnormal event has been identified by the abnormal event monitoring means, it is possible to cause a situation in which information erasure processing is executed at least for the first predetermined storage area Erasing status generating means (reset signal output unit 251) to perform,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature W1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is handled as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage unit can be clearly made different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In addition, based on the fact that an abnormal event has occurred, information erasure processing is executed on at least the first predetermined storage area. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is even though an abnormal event has occurred.

Feature W2. The control means includes
Means for executing processing for storing power failure response information when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped (in the thirty embodiment, the function of executing steps S6709 and S6710 in the main CPU 63) In the thirty-second embodiment, the function of executing steps S7609 to S7611 in the main CPU 63),
When supply of operating power to the control means is started and processing at the start of supply is performed in a situation where the power failure response information is not stored, the information erasing process is performed at least on the first predetermined storage area (In the thirty-third embodiment, the function of executing step S6607 in the main CPU 63, in the thirty-first embodiment, the function of executing clear processing in the main CPU 63, and the thirty-second function. In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S7704, step S7705, step S7808 and step S7810 in the main CPU 63),
With
The erasure status generating means starts the supply by the control means in a situation where the power failure response information is not stored based on the fact that the abnormal event has been identified by the abnormal event monitoring means. The gaming machine according to Feature W1, wherein a time process is executed.

  According to the feature W2, when supply of operating power to the control unit is started and processing at the start of supply is executed in a situation where no power failure response information is stored, the information erasing process is at least a first predetermined process. By being executed on the storage area, the information in the first predetermined storage area is retained as it is when supply of operating power to the control means is started in a situation where the processing at the time of power failure is not properly performed. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in the state. In this case, based on the fact that an abnormal event has occurred, the control means executes processing at the start of supply in a situation where no power failure response information is stored. As a result, when the process at the start of supply is executed by the control means in a situation where the power failure response information is not stored, the information is deleted when the abnormal event occurs. It is possible to execute the erasing process.

Feature W3. The control means executes various processes when a reset signal is received, and receives the reset signal from a situation where the reset signal is not received in a situation where operating power is supplied. The process at the start of the supply is started based on the situation being
Based on the fact that the abnormal event has been identified by the abnormal event monitoring means, the erasure status generating means sets the control means to a state in which the reset signal is not received by the control means. The game machine according to Feature W2, wherein the game apparatus is in a state of receiving the reset signal.

  According to the feature W3, the above-described excellent effect can be obtained by switching the reception state of the reset signal.

Feature W4. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage means (a register and a program counter of the main CPU 63) during execution of processing, and the information stored in the internal storage means is the first predetermined storage. It is a configuration that can be temporarily evacuated to the area,
The abnormal event monitoring means monitors whether an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the internal storage means as the abnormal event,
Any one of the characteristics W1 to W3, wherein the erasure status generating means generates a situation in which the erasing process of the information is executed at least for both the first predetermined storage area and the internal storage means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature W4, since the information stored in the internal storage means can be temporarily saved in the first predetermined storage area, when an abnormality occurs with respect to the information stored in the internal storage means, 1 There is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the predetermined storage area. In this case, when an abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the internal storage means, information erasure processing is executed not only on the internal storage means but also on the first predetermined storage area. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed as it is even though an abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the first predetermined storage area.

  Feature W5. The erasure status generation means prevents the information erasure process from being executed on the second predetermined storage area even if the abnormal event monitoring means specifies that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W4, characterized by:

  According to the feature W5, even if an abnormal event occurs, information can be stored and held in the second predetermined storage area.

  Feature W6. The erasing status generating means is configured to perform the erasing processing of the information in the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormal event is specified by the abnormal event monitoring means. The game machine according to any one of features W1 to W4, characterized in that a situation that is executed for both of the two is generated.

  According to the feature W6, based on the fact that an abnormal event has been identified, the information erasing process is executed for both the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is even though an abnormal event has occurred, and an abnormal event has occurred. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the information in the second predetermined storage area is maintained as it is.

  Feature W7. The information erasing process for the first predetermined storage area is executed in the first predetermined process, and the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area is executed in the second predetermined process. The gaming machine according to feature W6.

  According to the feature W7, also in the information erasing process, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. It is possible to make it appear.

Feature W8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature W8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for executing the process is executed.

  Feature W9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature W8, comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature W9, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature W10. The second predetermined process execution means is information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The game machine according to Feature W9, further comprising:

  According to the feature W10, game history management such as occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is performed by deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature W11. The game machine according to Feature W10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature W11, when aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features W1 to W11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature X group>
Feature X1. A control means (main CPU 63) for executing various processes is provided,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
With
The second predetermined process execution means is an erase execution means for executing an information erasure process on the second predetermined storage area as the second predetermined process based on the occurrence of an erasure trigger ( In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the function of executing steps S6103 and S6107 in the main CPU 63, in the thirty embodiment, the function of executing steps S7204 in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-first embodiment, the main CPU 63. A game machine having a function of executing the process of step S7508 in FIG. 32, a function of executing the processes of step S7808 and step S7810 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment.

  According to the feature X1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is handled as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage unit can be clearly made different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed.

  In addition, when an erasure trigger occurs, an information erasure process is executed on the second predetermined storage area, so that the second predetermined storage area is in spite of some abnormality occurring in the second predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information is held as it is. In addition, since the information erasing process is executed in the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being involved in updating the information in the second predetermined storage area.

  Feature X2. The erasing execution means executes the erasing process of the information on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the non-erasing target information (management monitoring flag, return address information, various register information) from being erased. The gaming machine according to Feature X1, which is characterized.

  According to the feature X2, the information erasure process for the second predetermined storage area is performed while preventing the non-erasure target information in the second predetermined storage area from being erased. Thereby, it is possible to execute the information erasing process on the second predetermined storage area while preventing even necessary information from being erased.

Feature X3. The second predetermined process execution means is configured to execute the second predetermined process from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed. Storage execution means (in the thirty-third embodiment) for storing return correspondence information (return address information, various register information) necessary for returning to a state in which the first predetermined process is executed in the second predetermined storage area A function for executing the processes of steps S7102 to S7107 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the processes of steps S7502 to S7507 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-first embodiment, and a step S7802 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment. ~ Function of executing the process of step S7807),
The game according to claim X2, wherein the erasure executing means executes the information erasure process on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the return correspondence information from being erased as the non-erasure target information. Machine.

  According to the feature X3, the second predetermined process is performed while preventing even the return correspondence information necessary for returning from the situation in which the second predetermined process is being executed to the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed. It is possible to execute information erasure processing on the storage area.

  Feature X4. The storage execution unit stores, as the return correspondence information, information on a return address of a program when the second predetermined process is ended and the first predetermined process is returned to the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature X3.

  According to the feature X4, since the information erasure process is performed on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the return address information of the program when returning to the first predetermined process from being erased, the second predetermined storage area Even if the information erasing process is executed, it is possible to return to the predetermined program in the first predetermined process when the second predetermined process is completed.

Feature X5. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) at the time of execution of processing,
The gaming machine according to the feature X3 or X4, wherein the storage execution unit stores information stored in the internal storage unit in the second predetermined storage area as the return correspondence information.

  According to the feature X5, the information erasing process is executed on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the information of the internal storage means used in the first predetermined process from being deleted. On the other hand, even if the information erasing process is executed, the information used in the first predetermined process can be returned to the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is completed.

  Feature X6. The erasing execution means causes the erasing process of the information to be executed on the second predetermined storage area as the occurrence of the erasing trigger based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X5.

  According to the feature X6, since the information erasing process is executed for the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of the abnormality in the second predetermined storage area, the abnormality occurs in the second predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed in the state where it is present.

  Feature X7. The second predetermined process execution means is means for monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal as the second predetermined process (in the thirtieth embodiment, in steps S7201 to S7203 in the main CPU 63). A gaming machine according to Feature X6, further comprising a function for executing processing.

  According to the feature X7, not only the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area but also the monitoring of whether the second predetermined storage area is normal can be performed in the second predetermined process without interposing the first predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to execute monitoring of whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal and execution of information erasure processing for the second predetermined storage area as a series of processes in the second predetermined process. .

Feature X8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature X8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for executing the process is executed.

  Feature X9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature X8, comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature X9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature X10. The second predetermined process execution means is information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. (8) The gaming machine according to feature X9.

  According to the feature X10, game history management such as occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is performed by deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature X11. The gaming machine according to Feature X10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature X11, when aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features X1 to X11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature Y group>
Feature Y1. A control means (main CPU 63) for executing various processes is provided,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (non-specific control work area 223, non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
First calculation means for calculating first reference numerical value information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area (in the thirty embodiment, the processes of steps S6604 and S6710 in the main CPU 63 are executed. A function for executing processing of step S7304 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-first embodiment, a function for executing processing of steps S7610 and S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic Y1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is handled as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage unit can be clearly made different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, first reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the first reference numerical information, it is possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the first predetermined storage area.

  Feature Y2. Information erasure means for causing information erasure processing to be executed for the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculation means (In the thirty-third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main CPU 63, in the thirty-first embodiment, the function of executing processes of steps S7401 and S7402 in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-second embodiment, the main side The gaming machine according to feature Y1, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S7704 and step S7705 in CPU63.

  According to the feature Y2, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified for the first reference numerical information, the information erasing process is executed on the first predetermined storage area, so that the information abnormality has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is.

Feature Y3. The first calculation means includes
First power failure time calculating means for calculating the first reference numerical information when supply of operating power to the control means is stopped (in the thirty embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S6710 in the main CPU 63, In the thirty-second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S7610 in the main CPU 63),
First power-on time calculating means for calculating the first reference numerical information when supply of operating power to the control means is started (in the thirty embodiment, the function of executing step S6604 in the main CPU 63) In the thirty-first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7304 in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7701 in the main CPU 63),
With
The information erasing means is based on the fact that the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first power failure time calculating means does not match the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first power-on time calculating means. The gaming machine according to claim Y2, wherein the information erasing process is executed at least on the first predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature Y3, it is possible to specify whether or not the information of the first predetermined storage area is stored and held across the situation where the supply of operating power is stopped by calculating the first reference numerical information It becomes. If the information in the first predetermined storage area is not stored and held across the situation where the supply of operating power is stopped, the information erasure process is performed on the first predetermined storage area, so that an information abnormality It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information in the first predetermined storage area is retained as it is despite the occurrence of the error.

  Feature Y4. The information erasing unit does not execute the information erasing process on the second predetermined storage area even if the occurrence of an abnormality is specified for the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculating unit. The gaming machine according to the feature Y2 or Y3.

  According to the feature Y4, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified for the first reference numerical information, the information erasure process is performed on the first predetermined storage area, while the information erasure is performed on the second predetermined storage area. Processing is not executed. As a result, even information in the first predetermined storage area can be prevented from being erased even in the situation where the information abnormality occurs in the first predetermined storage area.

  Feature Y5. The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y4, wherein the first reference numerical value information is information that does not vary according to information stored in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature Y5, in the configuration in which the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area exist, it is possible to individually specify information abnormality regarding the first predetermined storage area using the first reference numerical information. It becomes possible.

  Feature Y6. Second calculation means for calculating second reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area (function to execute the processes of steps S7611 and S7706 in the main CPU 63) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y5.

  According to the feature Y6, second reference numerical value information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the second reference numerical information, it is possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the second predetermined storage area.

  Feature Y7. Means for causing an information erasure process to be executed on at least the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the second reference numerical information calculated by the second calculation means; The gaming machine according to feature Y6, further comprising a function of executing processing of steps S7808 and S7810 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature Y7, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified for the second reference numerical information, the information erasing process is executed on the second predetermined storage area, so that the information abnormality has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information in the second predetermined storage area is held as it is.

Feature Y8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature Y8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for executing the process is executed.

  Feature Y9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature Y8, comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature Y9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature Y10. The second predetermined process execution means is information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. (8) The gaming machine according to feature Y9.

  According to the feature Y10, game history management such as occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is performed by deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature Y11. The gaming machine according to feature Y10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature Y11, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as a first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features Y1 to Y11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature T group, the feature U group, the feature V group, the feature W group, the feature X group, and the feature Y group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to suitably perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic Z group>
Feature Z1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Status generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S7905, S7916, and S7917 in the main CPU 63) to achieve a settable status in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
In the situation where the supply of operating power to the control means (main CPU 63) having the setting means is started and the process at the start of supply is executed, A setting notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for performing notification;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature Z1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, in order to confirm the set value set as the target of use, it is necessary to temporarily stop the supply of the operating power to the control means and then restart the supply of the operating power to the control means. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value. In addition, since the set value is notified in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being performed, it is not necessary to notify the set value in a situation where the game is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the set value.

  Feature Z2. The game machine according to claim Z1, wherein the situation generating means is configured to be in the settable situation in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed.

  According to the feature Z2, the setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be set, and the situation in which the setting value of the usage target is notified in a situation that is not the setting possible situation, It is possible to concentrate on the situation where processing is being executed.

Feature Z3. A first specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the first trigger event (function to execute the processing of step S7912 and step S7916 in the main CPU 63);
The setting notification means can be set based on a situation in which the process at the start of supply is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means. The gaming machine according to the feature Z1 or Z2, wherein the setting value of the use target in a situation other than a situation is notified.

  According to the feature Z3, in order to notify the set value to be used, it is necessary not only to start supplying operating power to the control means but also to generate a first trigger event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

  Feature Z4. The gaming machine according to Feature Z3, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation with a setting key is performed on a setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a).

  According to the feature Z4, in order to notify the setting of the usage target, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion unit. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

Feature Z5. The setting notification means is in a state where the process at the start of the supply is being executed, and the notification condition is established based on the situation where the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means. In such a case, the setting value of the target to be used is notified in a situation that is not the configurable situation,
The situation generating means is in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed, and the setting condition is established based on the situation where the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means If so, make sure that the setting is possible,
The gaming machine according to Feature Z3 or Z4, wherein the notification condition and the setting condition are different.

  According to the feature Z5, the first trigger event is not only started to supply the operating power to the control means, either in the case where the settable situation is generated or in the case where the set value to be used is notified. Need to be generated. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform both the act of setting the set value to be used due to fraud and the act of attempting to confirm the set value to be used due to fraud. On the other hand, the setting condition for generating the settable situation is different from the notification condition for informing the setting value of the use target, and therefore the settable situation and the setting value of the use target are notified. Any one of the above can be generated alone.

Feature Z6. Provided with a second specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the second trigger event (function to execute the process of step S7905 in the main CPU 63);
The setting condition is a situation in which occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed, and the second specifying means sets the second It is established based on the situation where the occurrence of the trigger event is specified,
The notification condition is a situation in which occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means in a situation where processing at the start of supply is being executed, and the second specifying means determines the second The gaming machine according to Feature Z5, which is established based on a situation in which an occurrence of a trigger event is not specified.

  According to the feature Z6, in order to generate a settable situation, it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the control means and to generate not only the first trigger event but also the second trigger event. Thereby, not only the setting of the setting value to be used is performed but also the case where the setting value to be used is notified, not only the operation power supply to the control means is started. In the configuration in which the first trigger event needs to be generated, the operation for generating the settable situation can be made more complicated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of trying to set the setting value to be used illegally more intensively.

  Feature Z7. The gaming machine according to Feature Z6, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

  According to the feature Z7, in order to generate a settable situation, it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the control unit and to operate the predetermined operation unit in addition to generating the first trigger event. As a result, it is difficult to perform an act of trying to set a setting value to be used illegally, but the operation for properly generating the settable situation is prevented from becoming excessively complicated. It becomes possible.

  Feature Z8. An information erasure unit for executing an information erasure process based on the fact that the occurrence of the second trigger event is identified by the second identification unit in the situation where the process at the start of supply is performed A gaming machine according to the feature Z6 or Z7, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S7915 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature Z8, the condition for generating the settable situation using the second trigger event necessary for executing the information erasing process, and the setting value of the target to be used in the situation that is not the settable situation It becomes possible to make it different from the conditions for making the notification.

  Feature Z9. The game machine according to claim Z8, wherein the information erasure unit executes the information erasure process even when the settable situation occurs.

  According to the feature Z9, it is possible to execute the information erasing process when the setting is possible.

  Feature Z10. In the situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed, the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means, and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means The gaming machine according to the feature Z8 or Z9, wherein if the situation is not performed, the information erasing process is executed by the information erasing means although the setting is not possible.

  According to the feature Z10, when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, depending on whether or not the first trigger event is generated, the information erasing process is executed and the setting is possible. It is possible to select the case where the erasure process is executed but the setting is not possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features Z1 to Z10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature a group>
Feature a1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Status generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S7905, S7916, and S7917 in the main CPU 63) to achieve a settable status in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
An information erasure unit (a function of executing the process of step S7915 in the main CPU 63) for executing an information erasure process;
A setting notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that performs notification of the setting value of the use target in a situation that is not the settable situation;
First specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the first trigger event (function for executing the processes of steps S7912 and S7916 in the main CPU 63);
Second specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the second trigger event (function for executing the processing of step S7905 in the main CPU 63);
With
The status generating means specifies the occurrence of the first trigger event by the first specifying means in a situation in which supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started and processing at the start of supply is being executed. Based on the situation where the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means, so as to be the settable situation,
The information erasing unit is configured to erase the information based on a situation in which the second specifying unit has identified the occurrence of the second trigger event in the situation where the process at the start of supply is being performed. Run
In the situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed, the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means, and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means If the situation is not done, the information erasure process by the information erasure means is executed, although it does not become the settable situation,
The setting notification means is a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed, and the second specifying means performs the second A gaming machine, characterized in that, based on a situation in which an occurrence of a trigger event is not specified, the setting value of the use target in a situation that is not the configurable situation is notified.

  According to the feature a1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, a more advantageous setting value is used by the player. You will expect that. Further, since the information can be erased, it is possible to prevent a game from being played even though an information abnormality has occurred. In addition, since the setting value set as the target of use can be notified, the setting value can be confirmed.

  In this case, in order to confirm the set value set as the target of use, it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the control means and generate the first trigger event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

  In order to generate a settable situation, it is necessary not only to start supplying operating power to the control means but also to generate a second trigger event as well as a first trigger event. Thereby, not only the setting of the setting value to be used is performed but also the case where the setting value to be used is notified, not only the operation power supply to the control means is started. In the configuration in which the first trigger event needs to be generated, the operation for generating the settable situation can be made more complicated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of trying to set the setting value to be used illegally more intensively.

  In addition, the second trigger event necessary for executing the information erasing process is used to notify the condition for generating the settable status and the set value of the target to be used in a status that is not the settable status. It is possible to make the conditions for doing so different.

  Further, when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, depending on whether or not the first trigger event is generated, the information erasure process is executed and the setting is possible. It is possible to select the case where the setting is executed but the setting is not possible.

  Feature a2. The gaming machine according to Feature a1, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation is performed by a setting key on a setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a).

  According to the feature a2, in order to notify the setting of the usage target, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion unit. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

  Feature a3. The gaming machine according to feature a1 or a2, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

  According to the feature a3, in order to generate a settable situation, it is necessary not only to start the supply of operating power to the control unit and to generate the first trigger event but also to operate the predetermined operation unit. As a result, it is difficult to perform an act of trying to set a setting value to be used illegally, but the operation for properly generating the settable situation is prevented from becoming excessively complicated. It becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features a1 to a3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature Z group and the feature a group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably confirming the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. .

<Feature b group>
Feature b1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Status generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S7905, S7916, and S7917 in the main CPU 63) to achieve a settable status in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
Setting monitoring means (a function for executing the process of step S8220 in the main CPU 63) for executing a setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal;
With
A gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the setting monitoring process is not included in a process at the start of supply, which is executed when supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started.

  According to the feature b1, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In addition, since the setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value of the usage target is abnormal is executed, it is possible to cope with the case where the setting value of the usage target is abnormal. In addition, since the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing.

  Feature b2. The game machine according to claim b1, wherein the situation generating means generates the settable situation in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed.

  According to the feature b2, since the setting possible situation occurs in the situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed, it becomes possible to set the set value to be used before the game is started. . In this case, since the set value to be used in the process at the start of supply is set, the processing load of the process at the start of supply increases accordingly. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature b1 is provided and the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, the processing load of the process at the start of supply is not further increased and the usage target is not increased. It is possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal.

  Feature b3. The gaming machine according to claim b1 or b2, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process after the process at the start of supply is completed.

  According to the feature b3, since the setting monitoring process is executed after the process at the start of supply is completed, the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing. It is possible to monitor whether or not.

  Feature b4. The gaming machine according to the feature b3, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process every time a monitoring trigger occurs after the supply start process is completed.

  According to the feature b4, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, it is easy to specify that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature b5. Means for executing interrupt processing that is periodically started up (a function of executing the first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b4, wherein the setting process is included in the interrupt process.

  According to the feature b5, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time it is periodically activated, it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the setting value of the usage target is abnormal.

  Feature b6. The setting monitoring means is means for restricting the progress of the game based on the fact that the setting value of the use target is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S8207 in the main CPU 63 and The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b5, which includes a function of executing the processing of step S8302.

  According to the feature b6, when it is determined that the setting value of the usage target is abnormal, the progress of the game is restricted, so that the game is continued even though the setting value of the usage target is abnormal. It becomes possible not to be.

  Feature b7. The setting monitoring means is configured to notify the player of the fact that the settable situation should be generated based on the fact that the setting value for the use target is specified to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process. The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b6, further comprising means for executing the function (a function of executing the process of step S8303 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature b7, when it is specified that the setting value of the usage target is abnormal, a notification that allows the player to recognize that a setting possible situation should be generated is executed. When the value becomes abnormal, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to resolve it.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features b1 to b7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature b group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably manage the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group c>
Feature c1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means for controlling the predetermined display means (a function of executing the second timer interruption process in the main CPU 63);
With
The predetermined display control means is a check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform a display for checking that allows the user to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal based on the occurrence of a check trigger (No. 35). The game machine is provided with a function for executing the process of step S9102 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S9602 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.

  According to the feature c1, the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display unit based on the occurrence of the check trigger. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c2. The predetermined display means has a plurality of light emitting portions (display segments 321 to 324),
The gaming machine according to claim c1, wherein the check display is a display that enables confirmation that each of the plurality of light emitting units can be in a light emitting state.

  According to the feature c2, each of the plurality of light emitting units of the predetermined display unit is in a light emitting state as a check display. Thereby, it is possible to check whether or not each of the plurality of light emitting units of the predetermined display means is in a light emitting state.

  Feature c3. The gaming machine according to the feature c1 or c2, wherein the check trigger occurs when supply of operating power is started.

  According to the feature c3, since the display for check is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal.

  Feature c4. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c3, wherein the check trigger is generated each time supply of operating power is started.

  According to the feature c4, it is possible to check whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal every time the supply of operating power is started.

  Feature c5. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c4, wherein the check trigger is generated without requiring an operation for generating the check trigger when supply of operating power is started.

  According to the characteristic c5, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display for checking is performed without requiring a special operation, so that it is easy to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature c6. The check control means causes the predetermined display means to perform the check display when the supply of operating power is started and the check trigger is generated, and the supply of operating power is started. The game machine according to any one of features c1 to c5, wherein when the check trigger has not occurred, the predetermined display means does not perform the display for checking.

  According to the feature c6, since the display for checking is performed when the supply of the operating power is started and the check trigger is generated, the predetermined display is performed before the game is started on the gaming machine. It is possible to check whether the means is normal. On the other hand, even if the supply of operating power is started, the check display is not performed when the check trigger does not occur, so the check display is performed in the situation where the check display is not required. It becomes possible not to be.

Feature c7. Based on the fact that the gaming machine has been used in a predetermined manner, it is provided with means for storing information in the use correspondence storage means (management start flag) (function to execute the process of step S8606 in the main CPU 63),
The check control means is when the check trigger is generated when the supply of operating power is started and the information stored in the use correspondence storage means does not correspond to the use correspondence information. When the predetermined display means performs the display for checking and the supply of operating power is started, and the information stored in the use correspondence storage means corresponds to the use correspondence information. The gaming machine according to claim c6, wherein the predetermined display means is not made to perform the display for checking that the check trigger has not occurred.

  According to the feature c7, when supply of operating power is started until the gaming machine is used in a predetermined mode, the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means, and the gaming machine is used in the predetermined mode. Even if the supply of operating power is started based on this, the display for checking is not performed by the predetermined display means. Thus, for example, in the shipping stage of the gaming machine, when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined display means performs a check display so that whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. It is possible to confirm, and after the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the display for checking from being performed on the predetermined display means even if the supply of operating power is started.

Feature c8. The check control means includes
A display ending unit (a function for executing the processing of step S9002 in the main CPU 63 and a function of performing a negative determination in step S9101) for ending the check display on the predetermined display unit based on the occurrence of an end trigger;
Canceling means (a function for executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and the canceling means for ending the display for checking in the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of a canceling trigger even in a situation where the termination trigger has not occurred) A function of performing a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of performing a negative determination in step S9101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c7, comprising:

  According to the feature c8, the check display is performed on the predetermined display means because the check display is ended based on the occurrence of the cancel trigger even if the check display end trigger is not generated. Even so, it is possible to terminate the display for checking in the middle and perform another display.

  Feature c9. The game machine according to claim c8, wherein the cancellation opportunity is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

  According to the feature c9, since the cancel trigger occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, the check display can be terminated at an arbitrary timing.

Feature c10. The predetermined display control means is a separate display control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) for performing a separate display different from the check display when a separate display execution state is reached. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to the feature c8 or c9, wherein the cancellation opportunity is generated based on the separate display execution status.

  According to the feature c10, since the display for check is terminated when a cancellation trigger occurs based on the occurrence of the separate display execution status, the separate display can be prioritized over the display for check.

  Feature c11. Features c1 to c include means for waiting for the progress of processing in the situation where the display for checking is being executed by the predetermined display means (function of executing the process of step S9406 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of c10.

  According to the feature c11, since the display for check is performed by the predetermined display unit in a state where the progress of the process is on standby, it is possible to perform the display for check while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

  Feature c12. The check control means causes the predetermined display means to start the check display before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of c1 to c11.

  According to the feature c12, when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before a game is played on the gaming machine.

Feature c13. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, the function of executing steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63),
With
In a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, a predetermined setting related process (setting confirmation process, setting value update process) related to the set value can be executed,
The gaming machine according to claim c12, wherein the check control means starts the display for checking on the predetermined display means in a situation where processing at the start of supply of the operating power is being performed.

  According to the feature c13, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. Further, a predetermined setting related process related to the setting value can be executed in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. As a result, the setting-related process can be executed at a stage before the game is started. In this case, the display for checking is started by the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. As a result, it is possible to consolidate not only the predetermined setting related process but also the process for starting the display for checking by the predetermined display means with respect to the process at the start of the supply of operating power.

  Feature c14. The check control means is means for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to Feature c13, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S9404 and the process of executing step S9405 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature c14, it is possible to check whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal before the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

  Feature c15. The predetermined display control means is means for causing the predetermined display means to display the current setting value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63). A gaming machine according to the feature c13 or c14, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature c15, when the predetermined setting-related process is executed, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can check the current setting value by checking the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, since the configuration of the feature c13 is provided, the processing for starting the display for checking by the predetermined display means as well as the predetermined setting related processing is integrated in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. The process of confirming the predetermined display means and grasping whether or not the predetermined display means is normal and the work of confirming the predetermined display means and grasping the current set value are processing at the start of supply of operating power Can be performed together in a situation where

  In addition, when the configuration of the feature c14 is provided, since the display for checking is started by the predetermined display unit before the current set value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, the predetermined display unit is normal. It is possible to confirm the current set value using a predetermined display means after confirming whether or not. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately.

Feature c16. The check control means includes
Means for starting the display for checking in the predetermined display means before reaching the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the display for checking based on the occurrence of a canceling event in the predetermined setting-related processing in the situation where the display for checking is being performed (function and step for executing processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) A function of performing a negative determination in S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of performing a negative determination in step S9101),
The gaming machine according to Feature c15, comprising:

  According to the feature c16, since the display for checking is started by the predetermined display unit before the current set value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, after confirming whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal Thus, it is possible to check the current set value using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately. The check display is terminated based on the fact that a predetermined setting-related process is executed and a cancel trigger occurs in a situation where the check display is being performed. Thus, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the present display value can be displayed on the predetermined display means by ending the display for checking without waiting for the display for checking to end. It becomes possible. Therefore, the current set value can be confirmed at an early stage.

  Feature c17. The gaming machine according to claim c16, wherein the cancellation trigger is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

  According to the feature c17, since the cancellation trigger is generated based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit, the check display can be ended at an arbitrary timing.

  Feature c18. As the predetermined setting-related process, means for executing a process for achieving a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63) A function of making an affirmative determination in S8806, step S8817, and step S8818, and a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S9407, step S9418, and step S9419 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features c13 to c17.

  According to the feature c18, the process for starting the display for checking is aggregated in the predetermined display unit as well as the process for setting the setting value to be used for the process at the start of the supply of the operating power. It becomes possible.

Feature c19. The setting unit updates the setting value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation unit (reset button 68c) in the settable situation.
The check control means includes
Means for starting the display for checking in the predetermined display means before entering the settable status (function for executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation in the state where the check display is being performed (the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 is executed) A function and a function of performing a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of performing a negative determination in step S9101),
With
The predetermined display control means is a means for causing the predetermined display means to display the current set value after the check display is completed in the settable state (performs the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) A gaming machine according to the feature c18.

  According to the feature c19, since the display for check is started by the predetermined display unit before the current set value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, after confirming whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal Thus, it is possible to check the current set value using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately. In addition, when the check display is being performed, the setting becomes possible, and when the predetermined operation means is operated, the check display is terminated and the current set value is displayed. As a result, when it becomes possible to set, it is possible to end the display for checking and display the current set value on the predetermined display means without waiting for the display for checking to end. . Therefore, the current set value can be confirmed at an early stage.

  Furthermore, in the configuration in which the setting value to be used is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit in the settable state, the check display is displayed based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit in the settable state. Since the current set value is displayed after the process is completed, a dedicated operation for ending the check display and displaying the current set value is not required. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting value to be used.

  Feature c20. As the predetermined setting related process, there is provided means for executing a process for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means (function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features c13 to c19, characterized by:

  According to the feature c20, the processing for starting the display for checking by the predetermined display unit as well as the processing for confirming the current set value can be integrated with respect to the processing at the start of supply of the operating power. It becomes possible.

  Feature c21. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function for executing the processing of step S8708, step S8709 and step S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c20, characterized by:

  According to the feature c21, the management result of the game history can be notified to the manager of the game hall. In this case, whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history in the predetermined display means is accurately displayed by the check display by the predetermined display means having the configuration of the feature c1. Can be confirmed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features c1 to c21, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature d group>
Feature d1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means for controlling the predetermined display means (a function of executing the second timer interruption process in the main CPU 63);
With
The predetermined display control means checks whether the predetermined display means is normal before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of operating power is started. Check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform the display (function of executing step S9102 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, execution of step S9602 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-eighth embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature d1, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal by performing the display for checking by the predetermined display unit. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the display for checking is started before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is started, Thus, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the game is played.

Feature d2. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, the function of executing steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63),
With
In a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, a predetermined setting related process (setting confirmation process, setting value update process) related to the set value can be executed,
The gaming machine according to claim d1, wherein the check control means starts the display for checking on the predetermined display means in a situation where processing at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

  According to the feature d2, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player is given a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. Further, a predetermined setting related process related to the setting value can be executed in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. As a result, the setting-related process can be executed at a stage before the game is started. In this case, the display for checking is started by the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. As a result, it is possible to consolidate not only the predetermined setting related process but also the process for starting the display for checking by the predetermined display means with respect to the process at the start of the supply of operating power.

  Feature d3. The check control means is means for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to feature d2, further comprising a function for executing the processing of step S9404 and the processing of step S9405 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature d3, it is possible to check whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal before the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

  Feature d4. The predetermined display control means is means for causing the predetermined display means to display the current setting value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to the feature d2 or d3, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature d4, when the predetermined setting related process is executed, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can check the predetermined display means to obtain the current setting value. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, since the configuration of the feature d2 is provided, the processing for starting the display for checking by the predetermined display means as well as the predetermined setting related processing is integrated in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. The process of confirming the predetermined display means and grasping whether or not the predetermined display means is normal and the work of confirming the predetermined display means and grasping the current set value are processing at the start of supply of operating power Can be performed together in a situation where

  In addition, when the configuration of the feature d3 is provided, the display for checking is started by the predetermined display unit before the current set value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, so the predetermined display unit is normal. It is possible to confirm the current set value using a predetermined display means after confirming whether or not. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately.

Feature d5. The check control means includes
Means for starting the display for checking in the predetermined display means before reaching the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the display for checking based on the occurrence of a canceling event in the predetermined setting-related processing in the situation where the display for checking is being performed (function and step for executing processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) A function of performing a negative determination in S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of performing a negative determination in step S9101),
The gaming machine according to feature d4, comprising:

  According to the feature d5, since the display for checking is started by the predetermined display unit before the current set value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, after confirming whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal Thus, it is possible to check the current set value using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately. The check display is terminated based on the fact that a predetermined setting-related process is executed and a cancel trigger occurs in a situation where the check display is being performed. Thus, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the present display value can be displayed on the predetermined display means by ending the display for checking without waiting for the display for checking to end. It becomes possible. Therefore, the current set value can be confirmed at an early stage.

  Feature d6. The gaming machine according to claim d5, wherein the cancellation trigger is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

  According to the feature d6, the canceling trigger is generated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, so that the check display can be ended at an arbitrary timing.

  Feature d7. As the predetermined setting-related process, means for executing a process for achieving a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63) A function of making an affirmative determination in S8806, step S8817, and step S8818, and a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S9407, step S9418, and step S9419 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features d2 to d6.

  According to the feature d7, not only the process for setting the setting value to be used but also the process for starting the display for checking by the predetermined display unit is integrated with respect to the process at the start of supplying the operating power. It becomes possible.

Feature d8. The setting unit updates the setting value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation unit (reset button 68c) in the settable situation.
The check control means includes
Means for starting the display for checking in the predetermined display means before entering the settable status (function for executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation in the state where the check display is being performed (the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 is executed) A function and a function of performing a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of performing a negative determination in step S9101),
With
The predetermined display control means is means for causing the predetermined display means to display the current set value after the display for checking is completed in the settable state (performs processing in steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) A gaming machine according to the feature d7.

  According to the feature d8, since the display for check is started by the predetermined display unit before the current set value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, after confirming whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal Thus, it is possible to check the current set value using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately. In addition, when the check display is being performed, the setting becomes possible, and when the predetermined operation means is operated, the check display is terminated and the current set value is displayed. As a result, when it becomes possible to set, it is possible to end the display for checking and display the current set value on the predetermined display means without waiting for the display for checking to end. . Therefore, the current set value can be confirmed at an early stage.

  Furthermore, in the configuration in which the setting value to be used is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit in the settable state, the check display is displayed based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit in the settable state. Since the current set value is displayed after the process is completed, a dedicated operation for ending the check display and displaying the current set value is not required. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting value to be used.

  Feature d9. As the predetermined setting related process, there is provided means for executing a process for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means (function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features d2 to d8.

  According to the feature d9, not only the process for confirming the current set value but also the process for starting the display for checking by the predetermined display unit can be integrated with the process at the start of the supply of the operating power. It becomes possible.

  Feature d10. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function for executing the processing of step S8708, step S8709 and step S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features d1 to d9, characterized by:

  According to the feature d10, the management result of the game history can be notified to the manager of the game hall. In this case, whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history in the predetermined display means is accurately displayed by the check display in the predetermined display means having the configuration of the feature d1. Can be confirmed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features d1 to d10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature c group and the feature d group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, a configuration capable of confirming whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is accurately performed is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Feature e group>
Feature e1. When a predetermined event occurs by executing a game, history storage execution means for storing the history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Information deriving means (function for executing the process of step S8601 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storing means;
Aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means;
With
The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information derived at different timings by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature e1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, mode information corresponding to the game result is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit, and the derived mode information is stored in the mode information storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. Further, the aspect information storage means can store a plurality of aspect information derived at different timings. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods, and thus it is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature e2. The aspect information storage means includes
A latest storage area (current area 311) for storing the latest aspect information derived by the information deriving means;
A past storage area (first to third history areas 312 to 314) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means before the aspect information stored in the latest storage area;
The gaming machine according to feature e1, further comprising:

  According to the feature e2, since the latest mode information and the past mode information derived before that are stored, the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is grasped not only the latest but also the past It becomes possible.

Feature e3. A period elapse specifying means (a function for executing the processing of step S8605 and step S8613 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the period start opportunity to the occurrence of the period end opportunity;
Nearest memory execution means for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means in the nearest storage area in a situation where it is not specified that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapsed specifying means (step in the main CPU 63 The function of executing the processing of S8602),
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means Past memory execution means (function to execute the processing of step S8607 and step S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing period corresponding mode information corresponding to the game result in the period in the past storage area;
The gaming machine according to feature e2, further comprising:

  According to the feature e3, the aspect information derived in a situation where the predetermined period has not elapsed is stored in the latest storage area, and the aspect information derived when the predetermined period has elapsed is stored in the past storage area. Is done. As a result, it is possible to grasp the most recent occurrence frequency of the predetermined event, and it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of the past predetermined event in a predetermined period unit. Moreover, since the mode information in units of a predetermined period is stored in the past storage area, the number of mode information stored in the past storage area can be suppressed.

  Feature e4. A means for deleting the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means (processing in steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature e3, further comprising:

  According to the feature e4, since the history information in the history information storage unit is deleted when a predetermined period has elapsed, the storage capacity necessary for the history information storage unit can be suppressed. In addition, even if the history information is deleted when the predetermined period elapses in this way, the mode information derived using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area. The occurrence frequency of the predetermined event during this period can be grasped later.

  Feature e5. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics e2 to e4, wherein the past storage area is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of aspect information having different derived timings.

  According to the feature e5, since a plurality of pieces of mode information are stored in the past storage area, it is possible to compare the occurrence frequencies of predetermined events corresponding to a plurality of periods.

Feature e6. Period elapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period from when a predetermined period start trigger occurs to when a predetermined period end trigger occurs (function of executing steps S8605 and S8613 in the main CPU 63) )When,
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the time period specifying means, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Past storage execution means (function to execute the processing of step S8607 and step S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing the aspect information corresponding to the period corresponding to the game result in the period in the aspect information storage means;
With
The game according to any one of features e1 to e5, wherein the mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of mode information corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods. Machine.

  According to the feature e6, a plurality of pieces of past aspect information derived in units of a predetermined period are stored. Therefore, the number of pieces of aspect information stored in the aspect information storage unit is suppressed, and a plurality of periods are supported. It is possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events.

  Feature e7. A means for deleting the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means (processing in steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature e6, further comprising:

  According to the feature e7, since the history information in the history information storage unit is deleted when a predetermined period has elapsed, the storage capacity necessary for the history information storage unit can be suppressed. In addition, even if the history information is deleted when the predetermined period elapses in this way, the mode information derived using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area. The occurrence frequency of the predetermined event during this period can be grasped later.

  Feature e8. Means (main side) for controlling the notification means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that notification corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is sequentially executed. 8. The gaming machine according to any one of features e1 to e7, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S8702 to S8709 in the CPU 63).

  According to the feature e8, the notification corresponding to the mode information is performed by the notification unit. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. In addition, since notification corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of aspect information is sequentially executed, it is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of notification means.

Feature e9. The aspect information storage means includes a first storage area (first history area 312) capable of storing the aspect information and a second storage area (second history area 313) capable of storing the aspect information. ), And
The gaming machine has means for shifting the mode information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area by an instruction including at least an LDIR instruction when an information shift trigger occurs (step S8607 in the main CPU 63). And a function of executing the process of step S8614). The gaming machine according to any one of features e1 to e8

  According to the feature e9, it is possible to shift between the storage areas of the mode information with a simple processing configuration.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features e1 to e9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature e group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the front of the gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launch device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature f group>
Feature f1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, the function of executing steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63),
A power failure monitoring means (a function of executing the process of step S8901 in the main CPU 63) that enables a power failure monitoring process to monitor the occurrence of a power failure in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being performed. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature f1, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, a power failure occurs in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. When it occurs, it becomes possible to cope with it appropriately.

Feature f2. Means for executing interrupt processing that is periodically started up (a function of executing the first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
The interruption process includes the power failure monitoring process,
The gaming machine according to claim f1, wherein the interrupt process can be interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

  According to the feature f2, since the interrupt process is periodically interrupted and activated even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the process at the start of the supply of operating power is executed. Even in situations, it is possible to regularly monitor the occurrence of power outages.

  Feature f3. The interrupt process may be interrupted and started even in a situation where post-end processing (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. The gaming machine according to feature f2.

  According to the feature f3, the occurrence of a power failure is periodically monitored in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed using the interrupt process that can be interrupted and started in the situation where the post-end process is being executed. Can be performed automatically.

Feature f4. The interrupt process includes a progress handling process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
When the interrupt process is interrupted and started in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being performed, the power failure monitoring process is performed, while the progress handling process is not performed,
The feature f3 is characterized in that both the power failure monitoring process and the progress handling process can be executed when the interrupt process is interrupted and started in a situation where the post-end process is being executed. Game machines.

  According to the feature f4, the occurrence of a power failure is regularly monitored in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is performed using the interrupt process that can be interrupted and started in the situation where the process after the end is being executed. In the configuration to be performed automatically, even if the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the progress corresponding process for controlling the progress of the game will not be executed It becomes possible to do.

Feature f5. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Any one of the characteristics f1 to f4, wherein in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, the setting value can be changed so that the setting value to be used can be changed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature f5, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the setting value to be used is set, a power failure occurs during the setting of the setting value to be used. Even if it does, it becomes possible to cope with it appropriately.

  Feature f6. If the supply of operating power is stopped after the occurrence of a power outage is identified in the power outage monitoring process, it is set as a target for use before the supply of operating power is stopped when the supply of operating power is resumed. The gaming machine according to feature f5, wherein a game can be played with the set value.

  According to the feature f6, even if a power failure occurs in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, the occurrence of the power failure is specified by the power failure monitoring process, so the supply of operating power is resumed. In such a case, it is possible to play a game in a situation where the set value selected at the time of the occurrence of a power failure becomes the target of use. Thereby, even if a power failure occurs in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, it is not necessary to set the setting value again when the supply of operating power is resumed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features f1 to f6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group f, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the front of the gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launch device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to appropriately cope with the occurrence of a power failure, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature g group>
Feature g1. Setting correspondence storage areas (first to sixth setting information storages in the thirty-ninth embodiment) for storing setting correspondence information (a probability table in low probability mode, a success table in high probability mode) corresponding to the player's degree of advantage Setting correspondence storage means (setting correspondence storage area 325 in the thirty-ninth embodiment) having a plurality of first predetermined numbers of areas 325a to 325f, in the forty embodiment, a plurality of first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c). In the 40th embodiment, the setting correspondence storage area 326),
A setting means for setting a setting value to be used (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63);
Profit-related means for executing profit-related processing (step S504) related to the player's profit using the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (Function for executing special figure variation start processing in the main CPU 63);
With
The gaming machine characterized in that the number of types of the set values that can be set by the setting means is less than the first predetermined number.

  According to the characteristic g1, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player is given a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, in the configuration in which the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value are provided, the number of types of setting values to be used is larger than the first predetermined number. The number is small. This makes it possible to share the configuration relating to the setting correspondence storage means and the gaming machine having the first predetermined number of types of setting values to be used, and the gaming machine in the case of changing the number of types of setting values Design work can be easily performed. As described above, it is possible to make the configuration related to the set value suitable.

Feature g2. Correspondence information storage means (setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control) capable of storing and holding correspondence information corresponding to each of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas;
The setting means sets the setting value to be used by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means based on a change operation,
The setting correspondence information of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one setting correspondence storage area, and is a part of the first predetermined number and a plurality of the setting correspondence information Since the same setting correspondence information is stored in the storage area, the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas. The gaming machine described in g1.

  According to the feature g2, the setting value to be used is changed by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage unit based on the changing operation, and the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the changed correspondence information The profit-related processing is executed in a manner corresponding to the setting value to be used by using the setting correspondence information in the profit-related processing. In this case, the setting correspondence information of the setting values that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one setting correspondence storage area, and is a part of the first predetermined number and a plurality of setting correspondence storages. Since the same setting correspondence information is stored in the area, the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas. Accordingly, the number of types of setting values to be used is used while using the first predetermined number of setting corresponding storage areas as they are and using the corresponding information storage unit to determine the setting values to be used as they are. Can be made smaller than the first predetermined number.

Feature g3. The profit-related means is:
Means for reading out the setting correspondence information from the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means (a function of executing read / write table read processing in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing the profit-related processing using the read setting correspondence information (function for executing the processing of step S504 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature g2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature g3, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage unit Since the profit-related processing may be executed using the setting correspondence information read from the storage area, the configuration for reading the setting correspondence information when executing the profit-related processing can be used as it is.

Feature g4. Predetermined display control for causing predetermined display means (fourth notification display device 204) to perform display corresponding to the current set value in a situation where the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means can be changed. Means (function to execute the processing of step S9801 to step S9804 in the main CPU 63),
The predetermined display control means is:
Means for reading display information of setting values corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information of the correspondence information storage means (the processing of steps S9801 to S9803 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Means for causing the predetermined display means to perform display corresponding to the display information of the read set value (function for executing the process of step S9804 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to the feature g2 or g3, characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic g4, when the set value to be used is changed, it is possible to change the set value while confirming the display corresponding to the current set value displayed on the predetermined display unit. Become. In this case, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means In this configuration, the display information of the corresponding set value is read out, and a display corresponding to the read display information of the set value is performed on a predetermined display unit. Accordingly, it is possible to use the configuration for reading the display information of the set value when executing the display corresponding to the set value.

Feature g5. The number of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means is a divisor of the first predetermined number and is different from the first predetermined number;
The gaming machine according to the feature g4, wherein the number of the setting correspondence storage areas in which the setting correspondence information corresponding to each setting value is stored is the same between the setting values.

  According to the feature g5, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the frequency with which the display corresponding to the setting value is performed by the predetermined display means is performed. It is possible to make the same between the set values.

  Feature g6. The setting correspondence information corresponding to the same set value is stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in the order in which the correspondence information is stored and held in the correspondence information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature g4 or g5, characterized in that there is no game machine.

  According to the feature g6, it is possible to change the set value to be displayed by a predetermined display unit every time the change operation is performed. Thereby, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the operability of the change operation can be improved.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features g1 to g6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature g group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic h group>
Feature h1. Display means (special display part 37a, special figure hold display part 37b, general figure display part 38a, general figure hold display part 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, first to fifth display circuits 261 ~ 265),
Display control means (main-side CPU 63) for transmitting display data (display data signal, display clock signal) corresponding to display contents to be displayed on the display means;
Display execution means (display IC 266) for setting display on the display means so that the display content corresponding to the display data is displayed when the display data is transmitted by the display control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of the display means;
The display control means includes a sequential transmission means (a function of executing a second timer interruption process in the main CPU 63) for sequentially transmitting the display data corresponding to each of the plurality of display means to the display execution means,
When the display data is transmitted by the display control unit, the display execution unit is configured to display the display content corresponding to the display data with respect to the display unit that is the setting target of the display data among the plurality of display units. The display setting is performed so that
The transmission interval of the display data from the sequential transmission unit to the display execution unit is such that the display execution unit is in each display unit before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display unit. A gaming machine characterized by a transmission interval at which the display setting is performed.

  According to the characteristic h1, the display unit is subjected to display setting by the display execution unit in accordance with the display data transmitted from the display control unit, so that the display unit is controlled so as to have display contents corresponding to the display data. The As a result, the processing load on the display control means can be reduced. In this case, in the configuration in which a plurality of display units are provided, the display execution unit is not provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display units, but one display is provided for the plurality of display units. The execution means is also used. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of display means while suppressing an increase in the number of display execution means. The display data transmission interval from the display control means to the display execution means is set so that the display execution means can set the display means for each display means before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display means. Is set to the transmission interval at which. As a result, even if one display execution unit is also used for a plurality of display units, it is possible to appropriately perform display corresponding to display data in each display unit. As described above, the configuration for controlling the display of the display means can be made suitable.

  Feature h2. The sequential transmission means, when transmitting the display data to the display execution means, specifies identifiable information (type data signal, type clock signal) that makes it possible to specify the type of the display means to be set for the display data. The gaming machine according to Feature h1, wherein the gaming machine is transmitted to the display execution means.

  According to the feature h2, when the display data is transmitted from the display control unit, the display execution unit may set the display data for the display unit corresponding to the identifiable information transmitted from the display control unit. As a result, even if one display execution unit is also used for a plurality of display units, the configuration of the display execution unit can be simplified.

  Feature h3. The sequential transmission unit is configured to repeat the update cycle when the plurality of display units are set as the display data once in a predetermined order as one update cycle. The gaming machine according to the feature h1 or h2, wherein the gaming machine transmits display data.

  According to the feature h3, the display control unit only needs to change the display unit that is the transmission target of the display data in accordance with a predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the display control unit can be simplified.

  Feature h4. Even if the content of the display data for one display means is the same as the content of the display data when the display means was previously transmitted with the display means as a transmission target, the sequential transmission means The gaming machine according to any one of the features h1 to h3, wherein the display data is transmitted in the case of becoming.

  According to the characteristic h4, since the display data is transmitted even if the content of the display data to be transmitted is not changed, one display execution unit is also used for a plurality of display units. In addition, the same display can be continued by a predetermined display means.

  Feature h5. The sequential transmission means executes a process for transmitting the display data in a predetermined interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) that is interrupted and activated while the display control means is executing a predetermined process. The gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h4, wherein:

  According to the characteristic h5, since the process for transmitting the display data is executed by the predetermined interrupt process, the period in which the display data is set in each display unit can be set as the predetermined period. Therefore, even if one display execution unit is also used for a plurality of display units, before each display unit cannot maintain a display corresponding to display data, Thus, the display data can be set by the display execution means.

  Feature h6. The process for transmitting the display data to the plurality of display units to be subjected to the display setting by the display execution unit is aggregated in the predetermined interrupt process, The characteristic h5 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature h6, it is possible to set the cycle in which the display data is set to each display unit to be subjected to display setting by the display execution unit to the same cycle.

Feature h7. The display control means includes means for interrupting and starting a specific interrupt process (first timer interrupt process) in a state where the predetermined process is being executed (function of executing the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63). ,
The game machine according to claim h5 or h6, wherein an interrupt period of the predetermined interrupt process is shorter than an interrupt period of the specific interrupt process.

  According to the characteristic h7, the process of transmitting the display data to the display execution unit is executed in the predetermined interrupt process that is shorter than the interrupt period of the specific interrupt process. Thereby, it becomes possible to transmit display data in a shorter cycle than the configuration in which the process of transmitting the display data to the display execution means is executed in the specific interrupt process.

  Feature h8. The game machine according to claim h7, wherein a process for advancing a game is executed in the specific interrupt process.

  According to the feature h8, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while the specific interrupt process is started at an appropriate cycle in executing the process for advancing the game.

  Feature h9. The gaming machine according to claim h7 or h8, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated even in a situation where the specific interrupt process is being executed.

  According to the feature h9, since the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated even in a situation where the specific interrupt process is being executed, the display data transmission cycle is reduced even if the specific interrupt process is interrupted and activated. It becomes possible to set it as a predetermined period.

  Feature h10. The features h7 to h9 are characterized in that when the predetermined interrupt processing is started, the interrupt of the specific interrupt processing is prohibited, and when the predetermined interrupt processing is ended, the interrupt of the specific interrupt processing is permitted. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the characteristic h10, it is possible to prevent the specific interrupt process from being interrupted and executed in a situation where the predetermined interrupt process is being performed. Thereby, priority can be given to the process for transmitting the display data.

Feature h11. The display control means is means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power when the supply of operating power is started (in the thirty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63). In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the function of executing steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63, the thirty-seventh embodiment. In the forty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S9501 to S9518. In the forty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S9901 to S9917.
The gaming machine according to any one of features h5 to h10, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated even in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being performed.

  According to the feature h11, it is possible to perform display control of a plurality of display units even in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being performed. In addition, since the predetermined interrupt processing is interrupted and activated with respect to the processing at the start of the supply of operating power, the operation power can be supplied without complicating the processing configuration of the processing at the start of the supply of operating power. It is possible to display-control a plurality of display means in a situation where the process at the start is being executed.

Feature h12. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, it is a configuration that can be a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The sequential transmission means transmits the display data for causing the display corresponding to the current set value to be displayed on the predetermined display means in the settable situation to the display execution means. The gaming machine according to feature h11.

  According to the feature h12, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display unit in a situation where the setting value to be used is set, it is easy to set the setting value to be used. .

Feature h13. The display control means includes means (a function for executing a first timer interruption process in the main CPU 63) for executing a progress handling process to control the progress of the game after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. Prepared,
The sequential transmission means provides the display execution means with the display data for causing the correspondence display corresponding to the execution result of the progress correspondence processing to be performed on at least some of the display means. Is to send,
The gaming machine according to claim h11 or h12, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started even after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed.

  According to the feature h13, by using a predetermined interrupt process, a plurality of processes can be performed both in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. It is possible to control display of the display means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features h1 to h13, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature i group>
Feature i1. First interrupt execution means for executing the first interrupt process by interrupting the other process based on the elapse of the first interrupt cycle in the situation where the other process is being executed (the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Second interrupt execution means for executing the second interrupt process by interrupting the other process based on the elapse of the second interrupt cycle in the situation where the other process is being executed (the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
With
The second interrupt period is shorter than the first interrupt period;
Display control for predetermined display means (special drawing display unit 37a, special figure holding display unit 37b, general drawing display unit 38a, general drawing holding display unit 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) A game machine, wherein the process is executed in the second interrupt process.

  According to the characteristic i1, a process for controlling display of a predetermined display unit is executed in the predetermined interrupt process that is shorter than the interrupt period of the specific interrupt process. As a result, it is possible to perform display control of the predetermined display means in a shorter cycle than the configuration in which the process for controlling the display of the predetermined display means is executed in the specific interrupt process.

  Feature i2. The game machine according to claim i1, wherein a process for advancing a game is executed in the first interrupt process.

  According to the feature i2, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while the first interrupt process is started at an appropriate cycle in executing the process for advancing the game.

  Feature i3. The gaming machine according to claim i1 or i2, wherein the second interrupt process is interrupted and activated even in a situation where the first interrupt process is being executed.

  According to the feature i3, since the second interrupt process is interrupted and activated even in a situation where the first interrupt process is being executed, a predetermined display is provided even if the first interrupt process is interrupted and activated. The display control of the means can be performed at a predetermined cycle.

  Feature i4. An interrupt of the first interrupt process is prohibited when the second interrupt process is started, and an interrupt of the first interrupt process is permitted when the second interrupt process is ended. The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i3.

  According to the feature i4, it is possible to prevent the first interrupt process from being interrupted and executed in a situation where the second interrupt process is being performed. Thereby, priority can be given to display control of a predetermined display means.

Feature i5. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power when the supply of operating power is started (function for executing main processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i4, wherein the second interrupt process is interrupted and activated even when the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

  According to the feature i5, it is possible to perform display control of a predetermined display unit even in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being performed. In addition, since the second interrupt process interrupts and starts the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the operation power can be reduced without complicating the process configuration of the process at the start of the supply of operating power. It is possible to control display of a predetermined display means in a situation where processing at the start of supply is being executed.

Feature i6. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, it is a configuration that can be a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The second interrupt execution means executes, in the second interrupt process, processing for causing the predetermined display means to perform display corresponding to the current set value in the settable situation. The gaming machine according to feature i5.

  According to the feature i6, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display unit in a situation where the setting value to be used is set, the setting operation of the setting value to be used can be easily performed. .

  Feature i7. The second interrupt execution means executes the second interrupt process based on the elapse of the second interrupt period even after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. Or the game machine as described in i6.

  According to the characteristic i7, by using the predetermined interrupt process, the predetermined process is performed both in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed and in the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. It is possible to control display of the display means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features i1 to i7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature h group and the feature i group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration for displaying on the display means suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature j group>
Feature j1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the thirty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S8801 to S8819. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S9401 to S9420. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the main CPU 63. A function of executing the processes of steps S9501 to S9518 in FIG. 42, a function of executing the processes of steps S9901 to S9917 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment),
Predetermined interrupt execution means for interrupting the process at the start of supply of operating power and executing a predetermined interrupt process (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63, a function for executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) )When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic j1, since the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started even in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, the predetermined interrupt process is set even immediately after the start of the supply of operating power. It is possible to prioritize the execution of the processing being performed. In addition, since there is no need to set a process that is set as a predetermined interrupt process for the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the operation can be performed without complicating the processing configuration of the process at the start of the supply of operating power. Even immediately after the start of power supply, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the process set as the predetermined interrupt process. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform processing when supply of operating power is started.

  Feature j2. The predetermined interrupt execution means includes predetermined display means (special drawing display part 37a, special figure hold display part 37b, general figure display part 38a, general figure hold display part 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. ) Is executed in the predetermined interrupt process, and the gaming machine according to the feature j1.

  According to the feature j2, it is possible to cause the predetermined display to perform a predetermined display even immediately after the start of the supply of operating power.

Feature j3. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, it is a configuration that can be a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The predetermined interrupt execution means includes a process for causing the predetermined display means (fourth notification display device 204) to perform display corresponding to the current set value in the settable situation. The gaming machine according to feature j1 or j2, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature j3, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display unit in a situation where the setting value to be used is set, the setting operation of the setting value to be used can be easily performed. .

  Feature j4. Any of the features j1 to j3, wherein the predetermined interrupt execution means executes the predetermined interrupt processing based on the elapse of a predetermined interrupt cycle even after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the characteristic j4, by using the predetermined interrupt process, the predetermined process is performed in both the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. It is possible to execute processing set as interrupt processing.

  Feature j5. The gaming machine according to any one of features j1 to j4, wherein the predetermined interrupt execution means executes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in the predetermined interrupt process.

  According to the feature j5, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, a power failure occurs in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. When it occurs, it becomes possible to cope with it appropriately.

Feature j6. The predetermined interrupt process includes a progress response process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
When the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being performed, the power failure monitoring process is performed, while the progress handling process is not performed,
When the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated in the situation where the post-end process (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed, the power failure monitoring The gaming machine according to Feature j5, wherein both the process and the progress handling process can be executed.

  According to the feature j6, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed by using a predetermined interrupt process that can be interrupted and activated in the situation where the post-end process is being executed. Even if the predetermined interruption process is interrupted and activated in the situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed in the configuration that is periodically performed, the progress corresponding process for controlling the progress of the game will not be executed It becomes possible to do so.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features j1 to j6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature j group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably perform processing when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature k group>
Feature k1. When a predetermined event occurs by executing a game, history storage execution means for storing the history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Information deriving means (function for executing the processing of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storing means;
Aspect information display control means (main-side CPU 63) that controls display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. A function for executing the display processing and the second timer interrupt processing in FIG.
Predetermined correspondence display in which a predetermined correspondence display (pre-shift display) is performed by the information display means before a display corresponding to the aspect information is newly started based on occurrence of a predetermined display opportunity. Control means (function of executing the process of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic k1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, mode information corresponding to the game result is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit, and display corresponding to the derived mode information is performed by the information display unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger, the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means before the display corresponding to the mode information is newly started. As a result, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it becomes possible to preferentially display the corresponding display corresponding to the display on the information display means over the display corresponding to the mode information. It is possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred.

Feature k2. Period elapse specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period from when a predetermined period start trigger occurs until a predetermined period end trigger occurs is provided. ,
The predetermined correspondence display control means determines that the predetermined correspondence display has occurred in the information display means on the assumption that the predetermined display trigger has occurred when the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature k1, wherein the gaming machine is performed.

  According to the feature k2, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display unit, and then a display corresponding to the mode information is newly started by the information display unit. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the mode information displayed on the information display means is after the elapse of a predetermined period.

Feature k3. The information deriving unit uses the history information corresponding to the predetermined event that has occurred after the predetermined period based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period specifying unit. To derive the aspect information,
The predetermined correspondence display control means displays the history information corresponding to the predetermined event occurring after the predetermined period based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means. The predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display unit before the display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information deriving unit is performed by the information display unit. The gaming machine according to feature k2.

  According to the feature k3, in the configuration in which new derivation of the mode information is performed based on the elapse of the predetermined period, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display unit when the predetermined period elapses A display corresponding to the newly derived mode information is performed after the elapse of a predetermined period. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is a display corresponding to the newly derived mode information after a predetermined period has elapsed. It becomes.

  Feature k4. A means for deleting the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means (executes the process of step SA217 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to the feature k3, which is provided with a function).

  According to the feature k4, the history information in the history information storage unit is erased when a predetermined period has elapsed, so that it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the history information storage unit.

Feature k5. Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means Storage execution means for storing the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the period in the aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as the period corresponding aspect information (function to execute the processes of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) )
The aspect information display control means controls display of the information display means so that display corresponding to the period correspondence aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed,
The predetermined correspondence display control means is configured to respond to the period newly stored in the mode information storage means by the storage execution means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means. The game according to any one of features k2 to k4, wherein the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means before the display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Machine.

  According to the feature k5, the past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as the period corresponding mode information and the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information is performed by the information display unit. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp the past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period by checking the information display means. In addition, when a predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display unit, a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived as a result of the predetermined period has been performed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall determines whether the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information in the information display means is a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived based on the elapse of a predetermined period. Can be grasped.

Feature k6. The aspect information storage means can store a plurality of period correspondence aspect information corresponding to the different predetermined periods,
The aspect information display control means controls display of the information display means so that display corresponding to each of the plurality of period correspondence aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed. The gaming machine according to feature k5.

  According to the feature k6, a plurality of past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored and a display corresponding to the plurality of period correspondence mode information is performed by the information display unit. It is possible to compare the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event corresponding to a predetermined period.

  Feature k7. Before the display corresponding to the aspect information different from the aspect information is performed from the situation where the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the information display means is in a pre-switching state (interval non-display state). The gaming machine according to any one of the features k1 to k6, further comprising: means for performing (a function of executing the process of step SA316 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature k7, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is in the state before switching, so that the manager of the game hall clearly indicates that the mode information to be displayed has been switched. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, a predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display unit based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger having the configuration of the characteristic k1. Thus, it is possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred using information display means for performing display corresponding to different aspect information with the state before switching in between.

  Feature k8. When the predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined correspondence display control means displays the predetermined correspondence display on the information display means even if the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the aspect information has not elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k7, wherein the gaming machine is started.

  According to the feature k8, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined correspondence display is started even if the display corresponding to the mode information is in the middle. This makes it possible to notify early that a predetermined display opportunity has occurred.

  Feature k9. When the predetermined display trigger occurs during the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the aspect information, the predetermined correspondence display control unit displays the predetermined correspondence display on the information display unit after the display continuation period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k7, wherein the gaming machine is started.

  According to the feature k9, even if a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined correspondence display is started after the display corresponding to the aspect information displayed at that time is completed. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred while not disturbing the display corresponding to the already performed mode information.

Feature k10. Aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means,
The aspect information storage means stores a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) so that each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information deriving means can be stored. , A second history area 313, a third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that display corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k9.

  According to the feature k10, notification corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of aspect information is sequentially executed, so that it is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of information display means. It becomes. In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to the predetermined display order, the manager of the game hall grasps the type of aspect information to be displayed. It becomes easy to do.

  Feature k11. The gaming machine according to feature k10, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

  According to the feature k11, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the mode information is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas, the display target when the display corresponding to one mode information is newly started It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of aspect information.

  Feature k12. The aspect information display control means, when the information display means performs the display corresponding to the aspect information after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, in the first order in the predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to the characteristic k10 or k11, which starts from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

  According to the feature k12, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, the display is started from the display corresponding to the aspect corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when a predetermined display opportunity occurs, it becomes possible to confirm again the display corresponding to the mode information from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature k13. A period elapse specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the predetermined period until the end of the predetermined period occurs;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the time period specifying means, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the period as the period corresponding aspect information in the plurality of specific storage areas;
With
Any one of the characteristics k10 to k12, wherein the storage execution unit causes the period correspondence mode information to be stored in the plurality of specific storage areas according to the order derived by the information deriving unit. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature k13, it is possible to confirm the period correspondence mode information according to the derived order.

  Feature k14. The information deriving means executes an information deriving process for deriving the aspect information based on occurrence of a process execution trigger, and the derivation of the aspect information is started after deriving the aspect information. The game machine according to any one of the features k1 to k13, wherein the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times before the completion of the process.

  According to the feature k14, since the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of the derivation of the aspect information to the completion of the derivation of the aspect information, the derivation of the aspect information is completed in one information derivation process. The processing load for executing the information derivation process can be reduced as compared with the configuration to be performed.

Feature k15. A period elapse specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the predetermined period until the end of the predetermined period occurs;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means Storage execution means for storing the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the period in the aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as the period corresponding aspect information (function to execute the processes of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) )When,
With
The aspect information display control means controls display of the information display means so that display corresponding to the period correspondence aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed,
The predetermined correspondence display control means determines that the predetermined correspondence display has occurred in the information display means on the assumption that the predetermined display trigger has occurred when the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature k14, wherein the gaming machine is performed.

  According to the feature k15, past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as the period corresponding mode information, and display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information is performed by the information display unit. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp the past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period by checking the information display means. In addition, when a predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display unit, a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived as a result of the predetermined period has been performed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall determines whether the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information in the information display means is a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived based on the elapse of a predetermined period. Can be grasped. Further, since it is possible to perform the predetermined correspondence display during the period in which the period correspondence mode information is being derived, the predetermined period has elapsed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information from being performed regardless of this.

  Feature k16. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display over a period longer than a longest period required for deriving one aspect information by the information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature k15.

  According to the feature k16, when the predetermined period has elapsed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived, the information display unit performs the predetermined correspondence display.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features k1 to k16, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic l group>
Feature l1. When a predetermined event occurs by executing a game, history storage execution means for storing the history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Information deriving means (function for executing the processing of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storing means;
Aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means;
Aspect information display control means (main side) for controlling display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed. A function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the CPU 63);
With
The aspect information storage means stores a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) so that each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information deriving means can be stored. , A second history area 313, a third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that display corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature l1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, mode information corresponding to the game result is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit, and display corresponding to the derived mode information is performed by the information display unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

  In addition, since the plurality of pieces of aspect information having different derived timings are stored in the aspect information storage unit and the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of aspect information is sequentially executed, the number of information display units is reduced. It is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods. In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to the predetermined display order, the manager of the game hall grasps the type of aspect information to be displayed. It becomes easy to do.

  Feature l2. The gaming machine according to claim 11, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

  According to the feature l2, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the mode information is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas, the display target when the display corresponding to one mode information is newly started It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of aspect information.

Feature l3. Predetermined correspondence display in which a predetermined correspondence display (pre-shift display) is performed by the information display means before a display corresponding to the aspect information is newly started based on occurrence of a predetermined display opportunity. Provided with a control means (function of executing the process of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63),
The aspect information display control means, when the information display means performs the display corresponding to the aspect information after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, in the first order in the predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to the feature l1 or l2, wherein the game machine starts from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

  According to the feature l3, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, the display is started from the display corresponding to the aspect corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it is possible to confirm again the display corresponding to the information from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature l4. A period elapse specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the predetermined period until the end of the predetermined period occurs;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the time period specifying means, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the period as the period corresponding aspect information in the plurality of specific storage areas;
With
Any of the characteristics l1 to l3, wherein the storage execution unit is configured to store the period correspondence mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas according to the order derived by the information deriving unit. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the characteristic l4, it is possible to confirm the period correspondence mode information in the derived order.

  Feature l5. Before the display corresponding to the aspect information different from the aspect information is performed from the situation where the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the information display means is in a pre-switching state (interval non-display state). The gaming machine according to any one of features l1 to l4, further comprising: means (function to execute the process of step SA316 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature 15, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is in a state before switching, so that the manager of the game hall clearly indicates that the mode information to be displayed has been switched. It becomes possible to grasp.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features 11 to 15, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature m group>
Feature m1. When a predetermined event occurs by executing a game, history storage execution means for storing the history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Information deriving means (function for executing the processing of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storing means;
With
The information deriving means executes an information deriving process for deriving the aspect information based on occurrence of a process execution trigger, and the derivation of the aspect information is started after deriving the aspect information. The game machine is characterized in that the information deriving process is executed a plurality of times before completing the process.

  According to the feature m1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. In addition, by using the history information stored in the history storage means, mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived, so that the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is grasped. It becomes possible. In addition, since the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of the derivation of the mode information to the completion of the derivation of the mode information, compared to the configuration in which the derivation of the mode information is completed in one information derivation process Thus, the processing load for executing the information derivation process can be reduced.

Feature m2. A period elapse specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the predetermined period until the end of the predetermined period occurs;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying means, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means Storage execution means for storing the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the period in the aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as the period corresponding aspect information (function to execute the processes of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) )When,
Aspect information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the display corresponding to the period correspondence aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed. A function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
Predetermined correspondence display control means (step SA320 in the main CPU 63) for causing the information display means to perform a predetermined correspondence display based on the fact that the predetermined period has been identified by the period elapsed specifying means. And the function of executing the second timer interrupt process),
The gaming machine according to feature m1, comprising:

  According to the feature m2, the past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as the period corresponding mode information and the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information is performed by the information display unit. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp the past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period by checking the information display means. In addition, when a predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display unit, a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived as a result of the predetermined period has been performed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall determines whether the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information in the information display means is a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived based on the elapse of a predetermined period. Can be grasped. Further, since it is possible to perform the predetermined correspondence display during the period in which the period correspondence mode information is being derived, the predetermined period has elapsed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information from being performed regardless of this.

  Feature m3. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display over a period longer than a longest period required for deriving one aspect information by the information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature m2.

  According to the feature m3, the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means when the predetermined period has elapsed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features m1 to m3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the feature k group, the feature l group, and the feature m group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the front of the gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launch device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic n group>
Feature n1. A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the first setting related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c). Status generating means (a function and step for making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment) that can be settable (a setting value update process is executed). A function of making an affirmative determination at SA417, a function of performing an affirmative determination at Step SA905 and Step SA916 in the main CPU 63 and a function of performing an affirmative determination at Step SA917 in the 46th embodiment),
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) has been performed when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used set by the setting unit is Notification generating means (a function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) to be notified;
With
The status generating means can be set even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status and the supply of operating power is started thereafter Post-start generation means for making a situation (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment, an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature n1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In addition, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the settable situation is entered. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of changing the setting value to be used, the setting of the target to be used is more effective than the notification of the setting value to be used when restarting the supply of operating power thereafter. It becomes possible to give priority to the change of the value, and it is possible to prevent the game from being started although the change of the setting value to be used is not actually completed.

  Feature n2. In the settable status, there is provided status notification means (a function for executing the processing of Step SA801 to Step SA803 in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the second timer interrupt processing) so as to notify the set value in the middle of the change. The gaming machine according to Feature n1, wherein:

  According to the feature n2, in the setting possible situation, the setting value in the middle of the change is notified, so that the setting value can be changed while grasping the current setting value. In addition, in this way, the setting value in the middle of the change in the settable situation is notified, so that even if the second setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the settable situation is set. Even if the value change operation is prioritized, it is possible to substantially confirm the set value.

  Feature n3. Each of the status notification unit and the notification generation unit displays a target set value on a predetermined display unit (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). A gaming machine according to n2.

  According to the feature n3, the target setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means regardless of whether the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed. On the other hand, the predetermined display means can be used also. In addition, even when the second setting related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started, even if the configuration is settable, the set value is set by a predetermined display unit when the settable status is obtained. Is displayed, the game hall manager who has performed the second setting-related operation can check the set value by viewing the predetermined display means.

  Feature n4. In the feature n3, the status notifying unit performs display corresponding to the setting value being changed and display corresponding to the settable status on the predetermined display unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature n4, in the case where the setting is possible, not only the display corresponding to the setting value being changed is displayed on the predetermined display means, but also the display corresponding to the setting possible situation is performed. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation, the settable situation is entered even though the second setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. In this case, it becomes easier for the manager of the game hall to grasp that the setting is possible.

  Feature n5. The after-start generation means enables the setting value to be changed from the setting value selected when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possibility situation when the setting possibility situation is assumed. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n4.

  According to the feature n5, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the set value is changed from the state immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The operation can be continued.

Feature n6. Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the settable situation;
With
The status generating means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that a setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the settable situation. (The function of executing the process of step SA708 in the main CPU 63)
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end trigger occurs in the settable situation. The setting value that has been the selection target in the settable situation is set as the usage target,
The setting means corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the after-start generation means assumes the setting possibility situation, and the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possibility situation The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n5, wherein the setting value can be changed from the value.

  According to the feature n6, the setting correspondence storage unit that stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage unit that stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable situation. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable situation while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the settable situation was started. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation, the operation is stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of the operating power is stopped. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. As a result, even if the operating power supply is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation, if the operating power supply is resumed, the operation for changing the set value is continued from the state immediately before the operating power supply is stopped. Can be performed.

  Feature n7. The situation generating means is the case where the first setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation and the supply of operating power is started after that, A means for enabling the setting value to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the 45th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 in the main CPU 63, In the forty-sixth embodiment, a gaming machine according to feature n6, which is provided with a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature n7, when the operation power supply is resumed after the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation, the supply of the operation power is stopped when the second setting related operation is performed. It is possible to restart the change of the set value from the set value that was the target of change before being started, while the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation When the second setting related operation is performed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means. Thereby, the initial set value when the change of the set value is started can be made different according to the operation content when the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  Feature n8. The after-start generation unit is configured to perform the first setting-related operation and the second setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics n1 to n7, wherein the setting is possible even if none of the operations is performed.

  According to the feature n8, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation, both the first setting related operation and the second setting related operation are performed when the supply of the operating power thereafter is started. Even if it is not performed, it can be settable, so if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the setting value must be changed when restarting the supply of operating power thereafter It is possible to positively create a situation where possible.

Feature n9. The first setting related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined correspondence state (a state in which the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on) by the setting key,
The status generating means ends the settable status based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit has specified that the setting key is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state (the state where the OFF operation is performed). The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n8, comprising means (function for executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature n9, since it is necessary to set the setting key insertion unit in a predetermined correspondence state using the setting key in order to obtain a setting possible situation, an action to illegally change the setting value to be used is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to do. In this case, the settable situation does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status, even if the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit is in a specific corresponding state after that, the settable status can be immediately set. Since the setting key insertion unit is changed from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state, the settable situation is terminated. For this reason, it is possible to end the settable situation at a favorable timing.

  Feature n10. The situation generating means is a case where the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value of the target of use is being notified by the notification generating means, and the supply of operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n9, wherein when the first setting-related operation is performed, the setting is possible.

  According to the feature n10, even when the supply of operating power is stopped during the notification of the setting value to be used, the first setting related operation is performed at the start of the subsequent supply of operating power Is settable. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize the setting value changing operation over the setting value checking operation.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features n1 to n10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature o group>
Feature o1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting related execution means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting related process relating to the setting value;
Based on the fact that the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, an intermediate restarting unit that restarts the predetermined setting-related process from the middle after the supply of operating power is started thereafter ( In the forty-fifth embodiment, the function for making an affirmative decision in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and the function for making an affirmative decision in step SA414 in the main CPU 63, in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment. Function to make an affirmative decision)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic o1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the predetermined setting-related process is resumed from the middle when the supply of operating power is resumed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to continue the predetermined setting-related process when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature o2. The setting related execution means is a predetermined setting related operation (if the predetermined setting related process is a set value update process, the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, and the predetermined setting related process is used for setting confirmation. The predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on if the process is performed)
The gaming machine according to claim o1, wherein the halfway restarting unit restarts the predetermined setting related process from the middle even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed.

  According to the feature o2, when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed, the predetermined setting related process is resumed from the middle even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed. It is possible to prioritize resumption from the middle of the predetermined setting related process.

Feature o3. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when supply of operating power is started.
The midway restart means restarts the predetermined setting related process from the middle even when the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started.
When the operation power supply is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed and the operation power supply is started thereafter, the predetermined setting related operation is performed. The gaming machine according to feature o2, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is not resumed from the middle, but the setting-related execution unit newly starts the predetermined setting-related process.

  According to the characteristic o3, since the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related process It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting related process, the predetermined setting related process is not completed. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the resumption from the middle of the predetermined setting related process. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power is resumed after the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a predetermined setting-related process, the predetermined setting-related process is started halfway when a predetermined setting-related operation is performed. Instead of being restarted, it is started anew. As a result, when the operation power supply is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting related process, the predetermined setting related process is newly started depending on the presence or absence of the predetermined setting related operation when the supply of the operating power is resumed. In addition, it is possible to select one of resuming predetermined setting-related processing from the middle.

Feature o4. The predetermined setting related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution unit is configured to perform the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit has specified that the setting key is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state (OFF-operated state). The feature o2 or o3 is provided with a means for terminating the processing (a function for executing the process of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the processes of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature o4, in order to start the predetermined setting related process, the setting key insertion unit needs to be in a predetermined corresponding state using the setting key. Therefore, the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting related process is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to do. In this case, the predetermined setting-related process does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit is in a specific corresponding state after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, The predetermined setting-related process is not ended, and the predetermined setting-related process is ended by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state and then further changing from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to end the predetermined setting related process at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

  Feature o5. The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o4, wherein the predetermined setting related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

  According to the characteristic o5, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of changing the setting value, when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the setting value is changed from the setting value in the middle of the change. It can be resumed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of changing the set value, the setting value can be changed continuously when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature o6. The predetermined setting related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used,
Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to setting values to be used;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the predetermined setting related processing;
With
The setting related execution means includes:
Means (main side) for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means such that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs as the predetermined setting related processing A function of executing the process of step SA708 in the CPU 63);
By storing the information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the termination trigger has occurred as the predetermined setting related processing as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means, Means for setting a setting value that has been a selection target as a use target (function for executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63);
With
The midway restarting means is configured to set the set value from the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting related processing. The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o5, wherein the game machine can be changed.

  According to the characteristic o6, the setting correspondence storage unit that stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage unit that stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable situation. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable situation while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the settable situation was started. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed, the storage is performed in the selection correspondence storage unit when the supply of the operating power is stopped. The set value is changed from the set value corresponding to the selected selection correspondence information. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of changing the set value, if the supply of operating power is resumed, the set value is changed from the state immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The operation can be continued.

Feature o7. The setting related execution means executes the predetermined setting related processing based on a predetermined setting related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started.
The midway restarting unit restarts the predetermined setting related process from the middle based on the fact that the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started.
The setting-related execution unit is configured to perform the predetermined setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed. , Means for enabling the setting value to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step SA417 in the main CPU 63). A game machine according to the feature o6, which is provided with a function, a function of making a positive determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment.

  According to the characteristic o7, the operation power is based on the fact that the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is resumed after the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of changing the set value. After the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the set value, it is possible to restart the change of the set value from the set value that was the target of change before the supply of When a predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means. Thereby, the initial set value when the change of the set value is started can be made different according to the operation content when the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features o1 to o7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature p group>
Feature p1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Predetermined setting-related operation (If the predetermined setting-related process is a set value update process, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on and the reset button 68c is pressed, and if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation process, a setting key is inserted. Setting-related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63, a setting in the main CPU 63, which executes predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value based on the ON operation of the unit 68a) Function to execute the confirmation process),
With
If the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, the setting-related execution means does not perform the predetermined setting-related operation after the supply of operating power is started after that. The post-supply execution means for executing the predetermined setting-related process (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making an affirmative determination at step SA414 in the main CPU 63, 46. A gaming machine comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of 46.

  According to the feature p1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In addition, it is possible to execute a predetermined setting related process by performing a predetermined setting related operation. In this case, even if the operation power supply is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the operation power supply is resumed. Related processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature p2. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when supply of operating power is started.
The gaming machine according to claim p1, wherein the post-supply execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process even when the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when supply of operating power is started. .

  According to the feature p2, since the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, an act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related process It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting related process, the predetermined setting related process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prioritize execution of predetermined setting related processing.

Feature p3. The predetermined setting related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution unit is configured to perform the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit has specified that the setting key is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state (OFF-operated state). Characterized in that it has means for ending the processing (function of executing processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, function of executing processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63) Gaming machine.

  According to the feature p3, in order to start the predetermined setting related process, the setting key insertion unit needs to be in a predetermined corresponding state by using the setting key. Therefore, the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting related process is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to do. In this case, the predetermined setting-related process does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit is in a specific corresponding state after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, The predetermined setting-related process is not ended, and the predetermined setting-related process is ended by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state and then further changing from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to end the predetermined setting related process at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

  Feature p4. The post-supply execution means performs the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started after that even when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p3, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the game is performed.

  According to the feature p4, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. No predetermined setting related processing is executed. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed, the supply of the operating power is started when it is not necessary to execute the predetermined setting related process thereafter. In this case, it is possible to prevent a predetermined setting related process from being executed by performing a specific related operation.

  Feature p5. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature p5, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. Also, the notification of the set value is started again. This makes it possible to prioritize notification of the set value.

Feature p6. A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the specific related operations (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) being performed. Status generating means (a function for making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and the step SA417 in the 45th embodiment) A function of making an affirmative determination in the 46th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917),
With
The post-supply execution means performs the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started after that even when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed. The predetermined setting-related processing is not executed,
Even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, the situation generating means performs the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started after that. The gaming machine as set forth in the characteristic p5, wherein the setting is possible.

  According to the feature p6, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the notification of the set value, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that In this case, the setting value notification is not executed, but the setting value can be changed. As a result, when a specific related operation for setting a settable state in which the set value can be changed is performed, the occurrence of the settable state can be prioritized over the notification of the set value.

  Feature p7. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p6, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature p7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of changing the set value, the set value can be changed when the supply of operating power is resumed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of changing the set value, the setting value can be changed continuously when the supply of operating power is resumed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features p1 to p7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic q group>
Feature q1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting related execution means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting related process relating to the setting value;
With
Even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the setting-related execution unit is configured to perform a specific related operation (predetermined setting-related process when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. If the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed if the setting confirmation process is performed, and the RAM clear operation is performed if the predetermined setting related process is the setting value update process, the predetermined setting related process is not executed. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature q1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, if the specific-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that, it is predetermined. The setting related process is not executed. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed, the supply of the operating power is started when it is not necessary to execute the predetermined setting related process thereafter. In this case, it is possible to prevent a predetermined setting related process from being executed by performing a specific related operation.

  Feature q2. The gaming machine according to Feature q1, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used.

  According to the characteristic q2, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the setting is performed when the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. Value reporting is not resumed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value, if it is not necessary to notify the set value after that, the supply of the operating power is started. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being notified by performing the specific related operation.

  Feature q3. The setting related execution means is a predetermined setting related operation (if the predetermined setting related process is a set value update process, the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, and the predetermined setting related process is used for setting confirmation. If the process is a process, the predetermined setting related process is executed based on the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a), and operating power is supplied before the predetermined setting related process is completed. Even if the operation is stopped, the predetermined setting related process is not executed when the specific related operation is performed instead of the predetermined setting related operation when the supply of operating power is started. A gaming machine according to q1 or q2.

  According to the feature q3, since it is necessary to perform a predetermined setting-related operation in order to perform a predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of executing the predetermined setting-related process illegally.

  Feature q4. The setting related execution means does not perform the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed and the supply of operating power is started thereafter. Means for executing the predetermined setting related process even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed (in the 45th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to the feature q3, which includes a function of making an affirmative determination in Step SA414.

  According to the feature q4, when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed, the predetermined setting related operation is determined depending on whether or not the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started. It is possible to select whether or not to execute a predetermined setting-related process without performing the above.

Feature q5. The predetermined setting related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution unit is configured to perform the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit has specified that the setting key is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state (OFF-operated state). The game machine according to feature q4, further comprising means for terminating the processing (function of executing processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, function of executing processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63) .

  According to the feature q5, in order to start the predetermined setting related process, the setting key insertion unit needs to be in a predetermined corresponding state using the setting key. It is possible to make it difficult to do. In this case, the predetermined setting-related process does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit is in a specific corresponding state after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, The predetermined setting-related process is not ended, and the predetermined setting-related process is ended by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state and then further changing from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to end the predetermined setting related process at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

  Feature q6. Another execution means for executing another process different from the predetermined setting related process based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when supply of operating power is started (the predetermined setting related process is used for setting confirmation) If the process is a process, only the RAM clear process in the main CPU 63 is executed and the set value update process is not executed, or the RAM clear process and the set value update process in the main CPU 63 is executed. Any one of the features q1 to q5 is provided with a function of performing only the RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment and not performing the set value update process if it is an update process. Game machines.

  According to the feature q6, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed using the specific related operation performed to execute another process, the supply of the operating power is performed thereafter. It is possible to prevent predetermined setting-related processing from being executed when started.

  Feature q7. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the separate execution means is that the specific related operation has been performed when the supply of operating power is started after that. The gaming machine according to Feature q6, wherein the different processing is executed based on the game.

  According to the characteristic q7, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. Can prioritize execution of another process over a predetermined setting-related process.

  Feature q8. The predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used, and the separate process is a process for changing a setting value to be used. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature q8, even when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the setting is performed when a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started after that. Value reporting is not resumed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value, if it is not necessary to notify the set value after that, the supply of the operating power is started. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being notified by performing the specific related operation. In addition, as an operation for preventing the notification of the set value as described above, a specific related operation for executing a process for changing the set value can be used.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features q1 to q8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic r group>
Feature r1. A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Situation generating means (a step SA412 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment) that provides a settable situation (a situation in which a set value update process is executed) in which the set value to be used can be changed. Function for making an affirmative determination in step SA417, function for making an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63, and function for making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the 46th embodiment )When,
Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the settable situation;
With
The status generating means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that a setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the settable situation. (The function of executing the process of step SA708 in the main CPU 63)
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end trigger occurs in the settable situation. Thus, the gaming machine is characterized in that the setting value that is the selection target in the settable situation is set as the usage target.

  According to the feature r1, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used and selection correspondence storage means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable situation are provided. Thus, it is possible to change the set value in the settable situation while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the settable situation was started.

  Feature r2. The status generating means is stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the previous settable situation in the previous settable situation when the settable situation is finished before the termination trigger occurs. A feature r1 is characterized by comprising first change execution means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that enables the setting value to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. The gaming machine described.

  Feature r2. When the settable status is started after the settable status ends before the end trigger occurs, the set value is changed from the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit. . As a result, even if the settable status ends before the termination trigger occurs, if the settable status is restarted, the setting value can be changed from the last selected setting value in the previous settable status. Can be continued.

  Feature r3. The status generating means is a setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the setting possibility situation that has occurred after the setting possibility situation has ended before the termination trigger has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature r2, further comprising second change execution means (a function of making a negative determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that enables the setting value to be changed from the value.

  According to the feature r3, when the settable situation starts after the settable situation ends before the end trigger occurs, the setting value is changed from the setting value last selected in the previous settable situation. It is possible not only to resume the setting, but also corresponds to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means when the setting possibility situation is started after the setting possibility situation is finished before the termination trigger occurs The set value can be changed from the set value to be set. As a result, the initial set value when the change of the set value is started can be made different depending on the situation when the settable situation is resumed.

  Feature r4. The second change execution means is a setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the setting possibility situation that occurred after the setting possibility situation that was terminated when the termination trigger occurred. The game machine according to Feature r3, wherein the setting value can be changed from

  According to the feature r4, in the normal setting possible situation, the setting value is changed from the setting value of the current use target.

  Feature r5. The status generating means is based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when the settable status is started after the settable status is ended before the end trigger is generated in the settable status. The setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage unit and the situation in which the setting value can be changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit A means (function for executing the processing of step SA405, step SA412 and step SA417 in the main CPU 63) is provided so that one of the situations in which the setting value can be changed from the value is provided. A gaming machine according to the feature r3 or r4.

  According to the feature r5, when the settable situation starts after the settable situation ends before the end trigger occurs, the setting value of the set value is determined from the setting value last selected in the previous settable situation. The administrator of the game hall can select whether to restart the change or to start the change of the set value from the set value of the current use target.

  Feature r6. The setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the settable situation is displayed on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics r1 to r5, further comprising: a function (function for executing the processing of step SA801 to step SA803 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature r6, it is possible to change the setting value while confirming the setting value in the middle of the setting in the setting possible situation.

  Feature r7. Display of setting values corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in a situation that is not the settable situation is performed by predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r6, comprising means for performing the function (a function of executing the processing of step SA601 to step SA603 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature r7, it is possible to check the set value of the current use target as necessary.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features r1 to r7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature n group, the feature o group, the feature p group, the feature q group, and the feature r group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature s group>
Feature s1. Based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which the predetermined key insertion unit 68a is turned on) by the predetermined key, the predetermined response processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value update processing) is started. Predetermined correspondence starting means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination in step SA413 in the main CPU 63 and a function for performing an affirmative determination in step SA417 in the main CPU 63, in the forty-sixth embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63 A function of making an affirmative determination in SA913 and a function of making an affirmative determination in Step SA917),
Predetermined response ending means (mainly) for ending the predetermined response process based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion unit has specified that the predetermined key is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state (OFF-operated state). The function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the side CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature s1, since it is necessary to set the predetermined key insertion unit in a predetermined response state using a predetermined key in order to start the predetermined response processing, an act of starting the predetermined response processing illegally is performed. It can be made difficult. In this case, the predetermined response process does not end when the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state, but ends when the predetermined key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. As a result, even if the predetermined response processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific response state for some reason, the predetermined response processing is not immediately terminated, and the predetermined key insertion unit is removed from the specific response state. Since the predetermined response process is completed by changing from the predetermined response state to the specific response state after the change to the predetermined response state, the predetermined response process can be ended at a timing preferable for the game hall manager.

  Feature s2. Another start means (step SA412 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment) starts the predetermined response process in a situation where the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific response state based on the specific start condition being satisfied. A function for making an affirmative determination in step SA414 in the main CPU 63, and a function for making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature s1, characterized by:

  According to the feature s2, the predetermined response process is started even when the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific response state based on the fact that the specific start condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make it. However, in this configuration, the predetermined response process is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific response state. However, the configuration of the feature s1 is provided and the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific response state. If the predetermined key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state, the processing ends. Thereby, even if the predetermined response process is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific response state, the predetermined response process is not immediately terminated, and the predetermined key insertion unit is changed from the specific response state to the predetermined response state. Since the predetermined response process is terminated by changing the predetermined response state from the predetermined response state to the specific response state after the change to, the predetermined response process can be terminated at a timing preferable for the game hall manager.

Feature s3. The predetermined response start means starts the predetermined response processing based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion unit is in the predetermined response state when the supply of operating power is started.
The characteristic start condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the predetermined corresponding process is being executed, according to the characteristic s2. Game machines.

  According to the feature s3, when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined response process is started based on the predetermined key insertion unit being in the predetermined response state. It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act. In addition, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the predetermined response processing is being executed, the predetermined key insertion unit responds to the predetermined response when the specific start condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is resumed. Even if it is not in the state, the predetermined response process is started. As a result, when the predetermined response process ends in the middle, it is possible to give priority to the start of the predetermined response process.

Feature s4. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features s1 to s3, wherein the predetermined handling process is a process related to the set value.

  According to the feature s4, the above-described excellent effect can be obtained in the processing related to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features s1 to s4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature s group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process for determining whether or not a game state advantageous to the player is generated by the control means is executed.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary for the processing of the control means to proceed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature t group>
Feature t1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S205 to S207 in the main CPU 63, In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing steps S3106 to S3108 in the main CPU 63. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing processes in steps S3207 to S3209 in the main CPU 63, the twenty-second embodiment. In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment of the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63, the main CPU 63 executes the process of steps S5605 to S5607. Function to execute)
Situation generating means (a step S103 in the main CPU 63 in the first embodiment) that provides a settable situation (a situation in which a set value update process is executed) in which the set value to be used can be changed. In the twenty-second embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination in steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63, and a function for making an affirmative determination in step SB113 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment. In the 53rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63),
Start setting means for changing the set value from a preset start-corresponding set value when the settable state is reached (in the first embodiment, the process of step S201 in the main CPU 63 is executed). A function for executing the process of step S3102 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the twelfth embodiment, and a main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment. A function for executing the process of step SB304 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB905 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature t1, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, when the setting becomes possible, the setting value is changed from a predetermined setting value corresponding to the start. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the settable situation is reached, in the settable situation, it is possible to perform an operation for changing the set value from a set value corresponding to a certain start. Therefore, the work content of the setting value changing operation is easy for the operator to understand.

  Feature t2. The gaming machine according to the feature t1, wherein the setting value corresponding to the start is the setting value ("Setting 1") having the lowest advantage.

  According to the feature t2, when the setting becomes possible, the setting value is changed from the setting value having the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally ends the settable situation immediately after the settable situation is reached, the setting value has the lowest advantage. Even if this is done, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

Feature t3. Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the settable situation;
With
The status generating means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that a setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the settable situation. (In the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing steps SB307 and SB310 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the function of executing steps SB908 and SB914 in the main CPU 63)
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end trigger occurs in the settable situation. The setting value that has been the selection target in the settable situation is set as the usage target,
The game according to the feature t1 or t2, wherein the start correspondence means stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the start correspondence setting value in the selection correspondence storage means when the settable situation is reached. Machine.

  According to the feature t3, the setting correspondence storage unit that stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage unit that stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable situation. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable situation while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the settable situation was started.

  Feature t4. The setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the settable situation is displayed on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to feature t3, further comprising: a function (function to execute the processing of step SA801 to step SA803 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature t4, it is possible to change the setting value while confirming the setting value in the middle of the setting in the setting possible situation.

  Feature t5. Display of setting values corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in a situation that is not the settable situation is performed by predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). A gaming machine according to the feature t3 or t4, characterized in that it has means (function to execute the processing of the steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature t5, it is possible to check the setting value of the current use target as necessary.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features t1 to t5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature t group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature u group>
Feature u1. First control means (MPU 62);
Second control means (sound light side MPU 352) for executing control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting first start correspondence information (return command at the time of update) based on the fact that the first start situation is reached when the supply of operating power is started (main side in the 49th embodiment) A function of executing the process of step SB314 in the CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step SB918 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment),
Second transmission means (49th transmission means) for transmitting second start correspondence information (return command at the time of confirmation or return command at the time of clear) based on the fact that the second start situation is reached when the supply of operating power is started. In the present embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB118 or step SB207 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB618 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. A function of executing the process of SB725, a function of executing the process of step SB816 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC118 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic u1, in the configuration in which the control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control unit is executed by the second control unit, the first control unit starts first when supply of operating power is started. The first start correspondence information is transmitted based on the situation, and the second start correspondence information is transmitted based on the second start situation. As a result, it is possible to perform control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started not only by the first control means but also by the second control means.

  Feature u2. The first control means performs processing at the start of supply of operating power in the case of the first start situation and the case of the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started (49th embodiment) Then, step SB101 to step SB122, in the 51st embodiment, step SB601 to step SB622, in the 52nd embodiment, step SB701 to step SB729, in the 53rd embodiment, step SB801 to step SB818 and step SB823 to step SB826, 54. The gaming machine according to feature u1, wherein at least a part of processing contents of steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128) is different in the embodiment of 54.

  According to the characteristic u2, when the supply of operating power is started, at least a part of the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the first control unit depends on which of the first start situation and the second start situation Since the processing contents are different, the first control means can execute a process corresponding to the start situation as a process at the start of the supply of operating power.

Feature u3. The second control means includes
The start response execution means for executing the start response processing in either case of receiving the first start response information or the second start response information (affirmative determination is made in step SB405 in the sound side CPU 353) Function)
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, a predetermined correspondence process is executed, and the other one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is executed. Predetermined response execution means (function to execute the processes of steps SB407, SB409, and SB411 in the sound light side CPU 353) that does not execute the predetermined response process when the start response information is received;
A gaming machine according to the characteristic u1 or u2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature u3, since the second control unit executes the start response process regardless of whether the first start response information or the second start response information is received, any start response is received from the first control unit. The start control process can be executed by the second control means triggered by the transmission of information. Further, the second control means executes a predetermined response process when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, and is predetermined when the other start correspondence information is received. The corresponding process is not executed. As a result, it is possible to perform control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started not only by the first control means but also by the second control means.

Feature u4. One of the first start situation and the second start situation is that a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Based on the
The other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs when the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the characteristic u4, the content of control executed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means depending on whether or not a predetermined start corresponding operation has been performed when the supply of operating power is started. Can be made different.

Feature u5. The first control means is a process for controlling the progress of the game after transmitting any start correspondence information among a plurality of types of start correspondence information including the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information. (Steps S8907 to S8920) are executed.
The second control means is configured to execute processing corresponding to the progress of the game (steps SB412 to SB414) after receiving any start correspondence information among the plurality of types of start correspondence information. The gaming machine described in the characteristic u3 or u4.

  According to feature u5, the first control means transmits any start correspondence information before starting the process for controlling the progress of the game, and the second control means receives any start correspondence information. A process corresponding to the progress of the game is executed. Thus, after the first control means has executed a process for controlling the progress of the game, the second control means can execute the process corresponding to the progress of the game. It becomes possible. In this case, since the configuration of the feature u3 is provided, the start of the process corresponding to the progress of the game is made using a plurality of start correspondence information that makes the second control means perform or not It becomes possible to make the second control means recognize the trigger.

Feature u6. The first control means includes
Means for executing common handling process in any of the first start situation and the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started (49th embodiment) Is a function for executing the processes of steps SB101 to SB103 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the processes of steps SB601 to SB603 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and a step in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. A function for executing the processes of SB701 and SB702, a function for executing the processes of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a process of steps SC101 to SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. Function to execute) and
When supply of operating power is started, specific response processing is executed based on being in one of the first start situation and the second start situation, and the supply of operating power is started In the case, the means for not executing the specific handling process based on the fact that the other start situation is the first start situation and the second start situation (step SB112 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, step Function for executing the process of SB115 or step SB117, function for executing the process of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, step SB711 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment Function for executing the process of SB718 or step SB721 In the 53rd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB810, step SB813 or step SB815 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SC111, step SC115 or step SC117 in the main CPU 63) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u5, wherein:

  According to the characteristic u6, the first control means executes the common handling process in any of the first start situation and the second start situation, while the first start situation and the first start situation. The specific response process is executed when the start situation is one of the two start situations. Thus, the common handling process is executed by the first control means regardless of the start situation, while the process corresponding to the type of the starting situation is executed by the first control means. It becomes possible to do. In this case, the configuration of the feature u1 is provided, and the first control unit transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and the second start situation based on the first start situation. 2 Since the start correspondence information is transmitted, the control corresponding to the type of the start situation when the supply of operating power is started can be performed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means. Become.

Feature u7. The first control means includes
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the 53rd In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63),
Based on the fact that the first setting-related operations (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) are performed when the supply of operating power is started, The first corresponding execution means (in the 49th embodiment, in the main CPU 63) that makes a setting possible situation (a situation in which the setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed. A function of making an affirmative determination in step SB114, a function of performing an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function of performing an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, In the 53rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU And function) to the affirmative determination at step SC113 in 3,
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) has been performed when the supply of operating power is started, the second setting state is set as the second start situation. Second corresponding execution means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) for notifying the set value to be used is informed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u6, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature u7, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In addition, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary It becomes possible. In this case, the configuration of the feature u1 is provided, and the first control unit transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and the second start situation based on the first start situation. Since the 2 start correspondence information is transmitted, it is possible to perform different control by the second control means when the setting is possible and when the setting value to be used is notified.

Feature u8. The first control means includes
Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
First response execution means (set value update processing or setting confirmation in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting related process related to the set value based on being in the first start state when supply of operating power is started Function to execute processing)
Second response execution means for executing another response process different from the predetermined setting related process based on the fact that the second start situation is reached when the supply of operating power is started (in the 49th embodiment, the main side A function of executing the process of step SB117 in the CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, In the embodiment of 53, the function of executing the process of step SB815 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u7, comprising:

  According to the feature u8, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value is executed based on the first start situation, and when the supply of operating power is started, the second start situation is set. Based on this, a different handling process different from the predetermined setting related process is executed. As a result, it is possible to cause a case where a predetermined setting-related process is executed and a case where it is not executed depending on the start situation when the supply of operating power is started. In this case, the configuration of the feature u1 is provided, and the first control unit transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and the second start situation based on the first start situation. 2 Since the start correspondence information is transmitted, it is possible to perform different control in the second control unit depending on whether or not the predetermined setting related process is executed in the first control unit. .

  Feature u9. The gaming machine according to claim u8, wherein the second response executing means executes a process for initializing a predetermined storage area provided in the first control means as the separate response process.

  According to the characteristic u9, there are a case where a predetermined setting-related process is executed according to a start situation when supply of operating power is started and a case where a predetermined storage area of the first control unit is initialized. It becomes possible to make it. In this case, the configuration of the feature u1 is provided, and the first control unit transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and the second start situation based on the first start situation. 2 In order to transmit the start correspondence information, different control is performed by the second control unit when the predetermined setting-related process is executed by the first control unit and when the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible to.

Feature u10. The second control means includes
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measuring means (RTC 356) capable of measuring time is stored in the time correspondence. Means for storing in means (RTC memory 357) (function of executing step SB407 in the sound side CPU 353 in the 49th embodiment, step SB507 processing in the sound side CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment) Function)
Means for executing the time correspondence processing when the processing execution timing comes based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means (in the 49th embodiment, the processing of step SB413 in the sound side CPU 353 is executed). A function to execute the process of step SB513 in the sound side CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u9, comprising:

  According to the characteristic u10, the second control unit executes the time correspondence process when the process execution timing is reached with reference to the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage unit. Thus, it is possible to execute time correspondence processing. In this case, when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is stored in the time correspondence storage means. Thereby, it is possible to select each of a situation where the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation where the time correspondence information is not newly stored.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features u1 to u10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features 1-15, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features One or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature v group>
Feature v1. Time storage execution means (in the 49th embodiment, on the sound light side) that stores the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means (RTC 356) enabling time measurement in the time correspondence storage means (RTC memory 357). A function of executing the process of step SB407 in the CPU 353, a function of executing the process of step SB507 in the sound side CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment), and
Time-corresponding execution means for executing time-corresponding processing when the processing execution timing comes based on the time-corresponding information stored in the time-corresponding storage means (in the 49th embodiment, in step SB413 in the sound side CPU 353) A function of executing the process, a function of executing the process of step SB513 in the sound side CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment),
With
The time storage execution means is a first start situation when the supply of operating power is started (in the 49th embodiment, when the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the absence of operation, the 50th In the embodiment, it is measured by the time measuring means based on the fact that the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where a RAM clear operation, a setting change operation, or a setting confirmation operation is performed. The time correspondence information is stored in the time correspondence storage means, and when the supply of operating power is started, the second start situation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation is performed in the 49th embodiment). When the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the power is turned off, in the 50th embodiment, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed without any operation). Gaming machine, wherein the time correspondence information that has been measured by the time measuring unit based on Rukoto in which not stored in the time correspondence storage means.

  According to the feature v1, the time correspondence processing is executed when the processing execution timing is reached with reference to the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means. Therefore, the time correspondence processing is performed at the predetermined time. It is possible to be executed. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, when the first start situation is reached, the time correspondence information measured by the time measuring means is stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the supply of operating power is started. If the second start situation is reached, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. Thereby, it is possible to select each of a situation where the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation where the time correspondence information is not newly stored.

Feature v2. One of the first start situation and the second start situation is that a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Based on the
The other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature v2, a situation in which the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation in which the time correspondence information is not newly stored are determined depending on whether or not a predetermined start correspondence operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started. It becomes possible to select each of these.

Feature v3. The second start situation occurs based on a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to the feature v1 or v2, wherein the first start situation occurs based on the predetermined start corresponding operation not being performed when the supply of operating power is started.

  According to the characteristic v3, when the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time corresponding storage unit, and the supply of the operating power is started. When the predetermined start corresponding operation is performed, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, the time correspondence information is basically newly stored in the time correspondence storage means, and a predetermined start correspondence operation is performed as necessary. It is possible to prevent the correspondence information from being stored in the time correspondence storage means.

  Feature v4. When supply of operating power is started, specific response processing is executed based on being in one of the first start situation and the second start situation, and the supply of operating power is started In the case, the means for not executing the specific handling process based on the fact that the other start situation is the first start situation and the second start situation (step SB112 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, step Function for executing the process of SB115 or step SB117, function for executing the process of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, step SB711 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment Function for executing the process of SB718 or step SB721 In the 53rd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB810, step SB813 or step SB815 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SC111, step SC115 or step SC117 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v3, comprising:

  According to the feature v4, the specific response process is executed when the start situation is one of the first start situation and the second start situation. In this case, the time feature information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the first start situation and the second start situation based on the fact that the configuration of the feature v1 is provided. Correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. As a result, it is possible to associate the presence / absence of the specific response processing with the presence / absence of new storage of the time response information.

  Feature v5. Specific response processing is executed based on the fact that the second start situation is reached when the supply of operating power is started, and the first start situation is found when the supply of operating power is started Means for not executing the specific handling process based on the function (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process in step SB112, step SB115 or step SB117 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, in step SB612 in the main CPU 63, A function for executing the process of step SB615 or step SB617, a function for executing the process of step SB711, step SB718 or step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, a step SB810 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, Step SB81 Or the function of executing the process of step SB815, or the function of executing the process of step SC111, step SC115 or step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature v5, the specific response process is executed when the second start situation is the first start situation and the second start situation. In this case, the time feature information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the first start situation and the second start situation based on the fact that the configuration of the feature v1 is provided. Correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the time correspondence information from being newly stored in the time correspondence storage means when the specific correspondence processing is executed.

  Feature v6. Means for executing common handling process in any of the first start situation and the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started (49th embodiment) Is a function for executing the processes of steps SB101 to SB103 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the processes of steps SB601 to SB603 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and a step in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. A function for executing the processes of SB701 and SB702, a function for executing the processes of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a process of steps SC101 to SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. Function to execute) The gaming machine according to the features v4 or v5, characterized in that that example.

  According to the feature v6, the common handling process is executed in any of the first start situation and the second start situation, while the first start situation and the second start situation. In the case of one of the start situations, the specific handling process is executed. As a result, the common handling process can be executed regardless of the start situation, while the process corresponding to the type of the start situation can be executed.

Feature v7. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
A setting-related execution means (a function for executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
With
The setting related execution means executes the predetermined setting related processing based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v6.

  According to the feature v7, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process is executed based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation. As a result, it is possible to associate the presence / absence of execution of the predetermined setting-related process with the presence / absence of new storage of time correspondence information.

  Feature v8. When supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area provided in the control means is initialized based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation. Means (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB117 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63, in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. A function of executing the process of step SB721, a function of executing the process of step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v7, wherein:

  According to the feature v8, when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined storage area of the first control means is initially set based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation. It becomes. Thereby, it is possible to associate the presence / absence of initialization of the predetermined storage area with the presence / absence of new storage of the time correspondence information.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features v1 to v8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature u group and the feature v group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably perform processing when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature w group>
Feature w1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means for controlling the predetermined display means (a function of executing the second timer interruption process in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
A setting-related execution means (a function for executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
With
The predetermined display control means includes
Means for causing the predetermined display means to display the setting value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63);
After the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, check control means (in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the main control display) causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display that enables confirmation of whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. The function of executing the process of step S9519 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SA419 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SA919 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, In the forty-ninth embodiment, the function for executing the process of step SB123 in the main CPU 63, for the 51st embodiment, the function for executing the process of step SB623 in the main CPU 63, for the 52nd embodiment, step SB712 in the main CPU 63. And the function of executing the process of step SB719, 3 embodiment is the ability to perform the processing of step SB817 in the main side CPU 63, and functions) for executing the processing of step SC119 in the main side CPU 63 in the embodiment of 54,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature w1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In addition, when a predetermined setting related process is executed, a display related to the set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that the administrator of the game hall can grasp the current set value by checking the predetermined display means It becomes. Further, since the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

  In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined display-related process is performed, and then a display for checking is performed by a predetermined display unit. As a result, when the predetermined setting-related process is started, the display regarding the set value in the case where the predetermined setting-related process is executed without requiring the adjustment process such that the display for checking is terminated halfway. Can be prioritized over the check display.

  Feature w2. The check control means is configured to display the check whether the operation power supply is started, the predetermined setting-related process is executed, or the predetermined setting-related process is not executed. The gaming machine according to the characteristic w1, wherein the predetermined display means is made to perform.

  According to the feature w2, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is performed by the predetermined display unit regardless of whether or not the predetermined setting related process is executed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature w3. As a process at the start of supply that is executed when the supply of operating power is started, either when the predetermined setting-related process is executed or when the predetermined setting-related process is not executed A process that is executed in common, and when the predetermined setting-related process is executed, a common process that is a process whose execution order is later than the predetermined setting-related process is set,
The gaming machine according to the feature w1 or w2, wherein a process for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display unit is set as the common process.

  According to the feature w3, when the supply of operating power is started, the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display unit regardless of whether or not the predetermined setting related process is executed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started. In addition, since the process for starting the display for check on the predetermined display means is set as the common process, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the process configuration.

Feature w4. Means for executing a process for advancing the game after the supply of operating power is started and the process at the start of the supply is completed (a function of executing the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w3, wherein the processing for advancing the game can be started even in a situation where the display for checking is being executed by the predetermined display means. .

  According to the feature w4, the process for advancing the game can be started even when the check display on the predetermined display unit is being executed. Therefore, the predetermined display unit performs the check after executing the predetermined setting related process. Even when the display for use is performed, it is possible to prevent the start timing of the process for progressing the game from being delayed.

Feature w5. Delay execution means for executing a delay process that allows delaying the start of the process for advancing the game when the supply of operating power is started (the processes of steps SB715 and SB724 in the main CPU 63 are executed) Function)
The check control means causes the predetermined display means to start the check display before the delay process is started when the predetermined setting related process is not executed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w4.

  According to the feature w5, the initial setting of various devices is completed by executing the delay process that allows the start of the process for advancing the game to be delayed when the supply of the operating power is started. It becomes possible to start processing for advancing the game later. In this case, if the predetermined setting related process is not executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the display for checking on the predetermined display unit is started before the delay process is started. As a result, it is possible to perform the check display using a period in which the start of the process for advancing the game is delayed.

  Feature w6. The gaming machine according to claim w5, wherein the delay execution means does not execute the delay process when the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

  According to the feature w6, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, a predetermined period is required, so that the initial setting of various devices can be completed before the process for advancing the game is started. Become. In this case, when the predetermined setting related process is executed, the delay process is not executed, so that the start of the process for advancing the game in the situation where the predetermined setting related process is executed is extremely It becomes possible not to slow down.

Feature w7. The setting related execution means includes:
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the first setting related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c). Status generating means (a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, In the 51st embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the step in the main CPU63. A function of making an affirmative determination in SB812, in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. And features that the constant determination),
Generation of notification to notify the setting value to be used based on the second setting related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) when the supply of operating power is started Means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w6, comprising:

  According to the feature w7, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started. Therefore, the setting value to be used is illegally changed. It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act to be attempted. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary It becomes possible.

  Feature w8. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function for executing the processing of step S8708, step S8709 and step S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w7, characterized by:

  According to the feature w8, the management result of the game history can be notified to the manager of the game hall. In this case, whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means is accurately displayed by the check display on the predetermined display means having the configuration of the feature w1. Can be confirmed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features w1 to w8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature x group>
Feature x1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means for controlling the predetermined display means (a function of executing the second timer interruption process in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing a process for advancing the game after the supply of operating power is started and the situation after the start of supply ends (a function for executing the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63);
With
The predetermined display control means causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display that allows the predetermined display means to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal in the situation after the start of supply (a thirty-sixth embodiment). In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SB713 and step SB722).
A delay situation that allows delaying the start of the process for advancing the game in a situation where the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means (in the thirty-sixth embodiment, a negative determination is made in step S9406). In the 52nd embodiment, a situation in which the processing of steps SB715 and SB724 is being executed by the main CPU 63) may occur.

  According to the feature x1, it is possible to check whether the predetermined display unit is normal or not by performing the display for checking on the predetermined display unit when the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, in the situation where the display for checking is being performed, a delay situation that allows delaying the start of the process for advancing the game may occur. Thereby, before the process for advancing a game is started, it is possible to ensure an opportunity to confirm the display for check on the predetermined display means. Moreover, it becomes possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before processing for advancing the game is started due to the occurrence of a delay situation. Then, it becomes possible to perform a display for checking by a predetermined display means using this delay state.

  Feature x2. In the situation where the display for checking is performed in the predetermined display means, means for causing the delay state (in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9406 in the main CPU 63, the fifty-second implementation). The game machine according to feature x1, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step SB715 and step SB724 in the main CPU 63 in the form.

  According to the feature x2, in the situation where the display for check is being performed, it is a delay situation, so that the process for advancing the game is not started while the display for check is being performed. Is possible.

  Feature x3. When the supply of operating power is started, the delay state occurs in the situation where the display for checking is performed on the predetermined display means based on the first start situation, and the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to the feature x1 or x2, wherein the delay state does not occur when the check display is performed by the predetermined display unit based on the second start state.

  According to the feature x3, in the case of the first start situation, the game is progressed while the check display is being performed due to the delay situation in the situation in which the check display is performed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to prevent the processing for the start from being started, and in the case of the second start situation, it is possible to prevent a delay situation from occurring in the situation where the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the process for progressing the game from becoming extremely late.

Feature x4. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
A setting-related execution means (a function for executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
With
The first start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting related process is not executed in the situation after the supply start,
The gaming machine according to claim x3, wherein the second start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the post-supply start situation.

  According to the feature x4, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, a predetermined period is required. Therefore, initial setting of various devices can be completed before the process for proceeding with the game is started. Become. In this case, when the predetermined setting-related process is executed, the predetermined setting-related process is executed by preventing the delay state from occurring in the situation where the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display unit. It is possible to prevent the start of processing for advancing the game in a situation from becoming extremely slow.

Feature x5. The setting related execution means includes:
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the first setting related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c). Status generating means (a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, In the 51st embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the step in the main CPU63. A function of making an affirmative determination in SB812, in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. And features that the constant determination),
Generation of notification to notify the setting value to be used based on the second setting related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) when the supply of operating power is started Means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature x4, comprising:

  According to the feature x5, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so the setting value to be used is illegally changed. It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act to be attempted. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary It becomes possible.

  Feature x6. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function for executing the processing of step S8708, step S8709 and step S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features x1 to x5.

  According to the feature x6, the management result of the game history can be notified to the manager of the game hall. In this case, whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history in the predetermined display means is accurately displayed by the check display by the predetermined display means having the configuration of the feature x1. Can be confirmed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features x1 to x6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature w group and the feature x group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, a configuration capable of confirming whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is accurately performed is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Characteristic y group>
Feature y1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the 53rd In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63),
Situation generating means (a SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment) that provides a settable situation (a situation in which a set value update process is executed) in which the set value to be used can be changed. The function of making an affirmative determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination at step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, the 53rd embodiment In the embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
Setting monitoring means for executing setting monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal (in the 49th embodiment, the function for executing the processing of step SB106 in the main CPU 63, the 51st In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB606 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB705 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, and the process of step SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment. A function to be executed, a function to execute the process of step SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
With
Supply start processing executed when the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started (step SB101 to step SB122 in the 49th embodiment, step SB601 to step SB in the 51st embodiment) (SB622, step SB701 to step SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, step SB801 to step SB818 and step SB823 to step SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, step SC101 to step SC120 and step SC125 to step SC128 in the 54th embodiment) A game machine characterized in that the setting monitoring process is included in the game machine.

  According to the feature y1, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In addition, since the setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value of the usage target is abnormal is executed, it is possible to cope with the case where the setting value of the usage target is abnormal. In addition, since the setting monitoring process is included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started even though the setting value of the usage target is abnormal It becomes.

  Feature y2. The gaming machine according to claim y1, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process every time a monitoring trigger occurs even after the process at the start of supply ends.

  According to the feature y2, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, it is easy to specify that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y3. Means for executing interrupt processing that is periodically started up (a function of executing the first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature y2, wherein the interrupt monitoring process includes the setting monitoring process.

  According to the feature y3, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time it is periodically activated, it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal.

  Feature y4. The setting monitoring unit is in a restricted state in which execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the setting value of the use target is abnormal in the setting monitoring process. Restricting means (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. The function of executing step SB726 in step 53, the function of executing step SB823 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the function of executing step SC125 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features y1 to y3, wherein:

  According to the feature y4, when it is specified that the setting value for the usage target is abnormal, the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted, so that the setting value for the usage target is abnormal. Regardless, it is possible to prevent the game from starting.

  Feature y5. Means for canceling the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable situation (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, in the 53rd embodiment, the step SB904 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature y4, further comprising:

  According to the characteristic y5, it is possible to make a new setting of the setting value of the usage target when canceling the situation where the setting value of the usage target is abnormal.

  Feature y6. The regulating means is configured to be in the regulated state when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation of the regulated state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature y6, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined advance process is restricted due to the abnormal setting value to be used from being released only by stopping the supply of operating power.

  Feature y7. A feature y4 thru / or further comprising means for executing a non-restriction process different from the predetermined progress process even in the restricted state (a function for executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of y6.

  According to the characteristic y7, it is possible to execute the non-restricting process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted because the set value of the use target is abnormal. Thereby, even if it is a regulation state, it becomes possible to ensure execution of a required process.

  Feature y8. The non-regulatory process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure, and the gaming machine according to feature y7.

  According to the feature y8, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately cope with the occurrence of a power failure in the restricted state.

  Feature y9. The setting monitoring means is configured to notify the player of the fact that the settable situation should be generated based on the fact that the setting value for the use target is specified to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process. Means to be executed (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, the 52nd implementation In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB728 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. Any one of the features y1 to y8, characterized in that Of the game machine.

  According to the feature y9, when it is specified that the setting value of the usage target is abnormal, a notification that allows the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should be generated is executed. When the value becomes abnormal, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to resolve it.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features y1 to y9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature y group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably manage the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic z group>
Feature z1. Predetermined monitoring means for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221) when the supply of operating power is started (Thirty-third Embodiment) Is a function for executing the processes of steps S7906 and S7909 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the processes of steps S8807 and S8810 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a step in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment. The function of executing the processes of S9408 and S9411, the function of executing the processes of steps S9506 and S9509 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and the processes of steps S9905 and S9908 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment. Run In the forty-fifth embodiment, the function for executing the processes of steps SA406 and SA409 in the main CPU 63, for the forty-sixth embodiment, the function for executing the processes of steps SA907 and SA910 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SB104 to SB106. In the fifty-first embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SB604 to SB606. In the fifty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63. In step SB703 to step SB705 in FIG. 5, in the 53rd embodiment, the function in step SB804 to step SB806 in the main CPU 63, and in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. Processing of step SC104~ step SC106 and the function to be executed),
A restricting means (a thirty-third embodiment) in which the predetermined monitoring means determines that the predetermined abnormality has occurred and the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted. Is a function for executing the process of step S7910 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S8811 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a process of step S9412 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment. Function, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S9510 in the main CPU 63, in the forty-second embodiment, for executing the process of step S9909 in the main CPU 63, in the forty-fifth embodiment in the main CPU 63 The function of executing the process of step SA410 in the forty-sixth embodiment The function of executing the process of step SA911 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment. In the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB726 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the step in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. SC125 processing)
Means for executing non-restriction processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (in the thirty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63, in the thirty-fifth embodiment) A function of executing processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing processing of steps SA101 to SA106 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic z1, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred regarding the information stored in the predetermined storage area, execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted. It is possible to prevent the game from being started despite being generated. In addition, it is possible to execute the non-restriction process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined advance process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. Thereby, even if it is a regulation state, it becomes possible to ensure execution of a required process.

  Feature z2. The non-regulation process includes a power failure monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure (step S8201 in the thirty-third embodiment, step S8901 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and step SA102 in the forty-second embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature z1, wherein

  According to the feature z2, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, when a power failure occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

  Feature z3. The restriction means is configured to be in the restricted state when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation of the restricted state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature z3, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined advance process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality from being released only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature z4. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the 53rd In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63),
Situation generating means (a SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment) that provides a settable situation (a situation in which a set value update process is executed) in which the set value to be used can be changed. The function of making an affirmative determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination at step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, the 53rd embodiment In the embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of features z1 to z3, comprising:

  According to the feature z4, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, if a predetermined abnormality has occurred regarding the information stored in the predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that an abnormality has also occurred regarding the set value. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature z1 is provided, and execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game is restricted when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred regarding the set value.

  Feature z5. Means for executing notification that allows the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means ( In the forty-ninth embodiment, the function for executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63, for the 51st embodiment, the function for executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63, for the 52nd embodiment, step SB728 in the main CPU 63. The function of executing step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the function of executing step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). A gaming machine according to feature z4, characterized in that

  According to the feature z5, when it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification that allows the player to recognize that a settable situation should be generated is executed. It is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to set a set value.

  Feature z6. Means for canceling the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable situation (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, in the 53rd embodiment, the step SB904 in the main CPU 63) A game machine according to the feature z4 or z5.

  According to the feature z6, it is possible to perform a new setting of the setting value to be used when canceling the situation where the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features z1 to z6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, feature v1 -V8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 ~ ΑF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 ~ ΑP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 may be applied. . Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αA group>
Feature αA1. Predetermined monitoring means for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221) when supply of operating power is started (49th embodiment) Is a function for executing processing of step SB104 to step SB106 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing processing of step SB604 to SB606 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and a step in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. The function of executing the processes of SB703 to SB705, the function of executing the processes of steps SB804 to SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the processes of steps SC104 to SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. Function to execute) ,
When it is determined that the predetermined abnormality has occurred by the predetermined monitoring unit, the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of operating power is specified by the predetermined monitoring unit to have detected that the predetermined abnormality has occurred. In the 49th embodiment, the restricting means (the function of executing step SB119 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment) A function to execute, a function to execute the process of step SB726 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, a function to execute a process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a main side in the 54th embodiment A function of executing the process of step SC125 in the CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means, specific output means for performing a specific output to the outside of the gaming machine (in the 49th embodiment, the process of step SB122 in the main CPU 63) In the fifty-first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB729 in the main-side CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, and a main function in the fifty-third embodiment. The function of executing the process of step SB826 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SC128 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αA1, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution content of the process at the start of supply of operating power does not have a predetermined abnormality Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding normally even though a predetermined abnormality has occurred. In addition, a specific output is performed outside the gaming machine based on the fact that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. This makes it possible to prompt the game hall manager to deal with the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality.

  Feature αA2. The gaming machine according to feature αA1, wherein the specific output means performs the specific output outside the gaming machine even when it is specified that an event different from the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  According to the characteristic αA2, the specific output is performed outside the gaming machine even when an event different from the predetermined abnormality occurs. As a result, it is possible to share the configuration for performing the specific output.

  Feature αA3. The specific output means is configured such that when the predetermined abnormality occurs when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the predetermined abnormality occurs, The gaming machine according to the characteristic αA1 or αA2, wherein the specific output is performed externally.

  According to the feature αA3, in a situation where a predetermined abnormality occurs, it is possible to perform a specific output outside the gaming machine every time the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  Feature αA4. The restricting means is in a restricted state in which execution of predetermined progress processing for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality is specified by the predetermined monitoring means. The gaming machine according to any one of features αA1 to αA3.

  According to the feature αA4, when it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred regarding the information stored in the predetermined storage area, execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted. It is possible to prevent the game from being started despite being generated.

  Feature αA5. Means for executing non-restriction processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (in the thirty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63, in the thirty-fifth embodiment) The characteristic αA4 is provided with a function of executing processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing processing of steps SA101 to SA106 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature αA5, it is possible to execute the non-restriction process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. Thereby, even if it is a regulation state, it becomes possible to ensure execution of a required process.

  Feature αA6. The non-regulation process includes a power failure monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure (step S8201 in the thirty-third embodiment, step S8901 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and step SA102 in the forty-second embodiment). The gaming machine according to Feature αA5, wherein:

  According to the feature αA6, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately cope with the occurrence of a power failure in the restricted state.

  Feature αA7. The regulating means is configured to enter the regulated state when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation of the regulated state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the characteristic αA7, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined advance process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality from being released only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature αA8. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the 53rd In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63),
Situation generating means (a SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment) that provides a settable situation (a situation in which a set value update process is executed) in which the set value to be used can be changed. The function of making an affirmative determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination at step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, the 53rd embodiment In the embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of features αA4 to αA7, comprising:

  According to the feature αA8, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player is given a more advantageous setting value. You will expect that. In this case, if a predetermined abnormality has occurred regarding the information stored in the predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that an abnormality has also occurred regarding the set value. On the other hand, when the configuration of the characteristic αA1 is provided and it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of operating power is predetermined. Since the execution contents are different from the case where no abnormality has occurred, it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding normally even though there may be an abnormality regarding the set value. Become. In addition, since a specific output is performed outside the gaming machine based on the fact that it has been determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, a game is performed so as to cope with a possibility that an abnormality has occurred regarding the set value. It becomes possible to prompt the manager of the hall.

  Feature αA9. Means for executing notification that allows the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means ( In the forty-ninth embodiment, the function for executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63, for the 51st embodiment, the function for executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63, for the 52nd embodiment, step SB728 in the main CPU 63. The function of executing step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the function of executing step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). The gaming machine according to Feature αA8, characterized in that

  According to the feature αA9, when it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification that allows the player to recognize that a settable situation should be generated is executed. It is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to set a set value.

Feature αA10. The restricting means is in a restricted state in which execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality is specified by the predetermined monitoring means. ,
The gaming machine has means for releasing the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable situation (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment (A function of executing the processing of step SB904 in the side CPU 63) The gaming machine according to the characteristic αA8 or αA9.

  According to the feature αA10, it is possible to perform a new setting of a setting value to be used when canceling a situation where a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αA1 to αA10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H1 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features Features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, Features v1 to v8, Features w1 to w8, Features x1 to x6, Features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, Features αA1 to αA10, Features αB1 to αB6, Features αC1 to αC13, Features αD1 to αD9, Features αE1 to αE5, Features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Applying one or more configurations of the features αP1 to αP7, the features αQ1 to αQ9, the features αR1 to αR8, the features αS1 to αS3, and the features αT1 to αT4 Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αB group>
Feature αB1. Means for starting processing at the start of supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the 49th embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622, and 52nd in the 51st embodiment) Step SB701 to Step SB729 in the embodiment, Step SB801 to Step SB818 and Step SB823 to Step SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, Step SC101 to Step SC120 and Step SC125 to Step SC128 in the 54th embodiment;
Means for executing periodically started interrupt processing (function for executing first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
As a part of the process at the start of the supply of operating power, setting related execution means for executing a predetermined setting related process related to the set value (a function for executing a set value update process or a setting check process in the main CPU 63) )When,
Permit setting means for setting from the state in which execution of the interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which execution of the interrupt process is permitted when the predetermined setting related process is executed in the process at the start of supply of the operating power (In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB201 or SB301 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αB1, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In addition, since the predetermined setting related process related to the setting value is executed as a part of the process at the start of the supply of operating power, it may be difficult to perform an action to illegally execute the predetermined setting related process. It becomes possible.

  In this case, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the state is changed from the state where the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited. In other words, while the process at the start of supplying the operating power is basically prohibited from executing the interrupt process, the interrupt process can be interrupted and activated in the predetermined setting-related process. In the process at the start of supply of operating power, basically, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited, so that the time required to complete the process at the start of supply of operating power can be shortened. On the other hand, in the predetermined setting-related process, it is assumed that the time required to complete the process is increased because the process related to the setting value is executed. In such a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is executed, By permitting execution of interrupt processing, it becomes possible to make the execution mode of processing suitable.

  Feature αB2. The gaming machine according to feature αB1, wherein the setting related execution means ends the predetermined setting related process based on an end trigger operation being performed in the predetermined setting related process.

  According to the feature αB2, the predetermined setting-related process is continued until the end trigger operation is performed, and therefore the time required for the process to be completed tends to be long. In this case, since the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the situation where the configuration of the characteristic αB1 is provided and the predetermined setting-related process is executed, it is possible to make the execution mode of the process suitable. .

  Feature αB3. Prohibition setting means (in the 49th embodiment, in the main CPU 63) that sets the interrupt process execution from the permitted state when the predetermined setting related process ends. The gaming machine according to feature αB1 or αB2, further comprising a function of executing the process of step SB206 or SB312 (a function of executing the process of step SB916 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment).

  According to the characteristic αB3, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited again when the predetermined setting-related process ends. As a result, it is possible to limit the period during which the interrupt process is allowed to be executed in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being performed to a period during which the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Feature αB4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB3, wherein the interruption process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

  According to the feature αB4, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in a situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed, so that the time required to complete the predetermined setting related process can be increased. However, when a power failure occurs in a situation where predetermined setting-related processing is being performed, it is possible to appropriately deal with the power failure.

Feature αB5. The interrupt process includes a progress handling process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
When the interrupt process is interrupted and started in a situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed, while the progress corresponding process is not executed,
When the interrupt process is interrupted and started after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed, both the power failure monitoring process and the progress handling process can be executed. Gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αB5, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a power failure is periodically monitored in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed, the interrupt process is interrupted and started in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed. Even so, it is possible to prevent the progress corresponding processing for controlling the progress of the game from being executed.

Feature αB6. The setting related execution means includes:
When the supply of operating power is started, the first setting related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed, and the use as the predetermined setting related processing is performed. Means for executing a changeable process in which a target set value can be changed (function for executing a set value update process in the main CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the second setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started, as the predetermined setting related process, the set value to be used is Means for executing a setting notification process for notifying (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
With
The permission setting means sets a state in which the execution of the interrupt process is permitted from a state in which the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited when the changeable process is performed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power. When the setting notification process is executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power, the interrupt process is prohibited from being executed, and the interrupt process is allowed to be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB5, characterized in that:

  According to the feature αB6, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started. Therefore, the setting value to be used is illegally changed. It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act to be attempted. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary It becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αB1 to αB6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature z group, the feature αA group, and the feature αB group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably perform processing when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic αC group>
Feature αC1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
A setting-related execution means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value when supply of operating power is started;
Regulation that restricts execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game when the supply of operating power is stopped after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed Restricting means for making a state (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in steps SC108 and SC116 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment) ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αC1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted when the supply of the operating power is resumed after that. The Thereby, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related process is not completed.

  Feature αC2. The regulating means executes the predetermined setting-related process even when the supply of operating power is started after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed. The gaming machine according to the feature αC1, wherein the restricted state is not set in the case of a game.

  According to the feature αC2, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed. .

  Feature αC3. A feature αC1 characterized by comprising means for executing a non-restricting process that is different from the predetermined progress process even in the restricted state (a function for executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63) A gaming machine according to αC2.

  According to the feature αC3, it is possible to execute the non-restricting process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted. Thereby, even if it is a regulation state, it becomes possible to ensure execution of a required process.

  Feature αC4. The non-regulatory process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure, and the gaming machine according to feature αC3.

  According to the feature αC4, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, and accordingly, when a power failure occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

  Feature αC5. The regulating means is configured to enter the regulated state when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation of the regulated state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature αC5, it is possible to prevent the state where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

  Feature αC6. Means for causing the player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing should be executed based on the restriction state being made (in the 53rd embodiment). Any one of the characteristics αC1 to αC5 is provided with a function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature αC6, it is possible to urge the game hall manager to execute the predetermined setting-related process again when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed. Become.

  Feature αC7. The restricting means may perform the specific related operation (setting key insertion unit 68a) even when the supply of operating power is started after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC6, wherein the restricted state is not set based on the fact that an ON operation and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c are performed.

  According to the feature αC7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the game is advanced by performing a specific related operation when restarting the supply of operating power. It is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted.

  Feature αC8. The gaming machine according to Feature αC7, wherein the setting related execution means executes the predetermined setting related processing based on the specific related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started. .

  According to the feature αC8, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game until the predetermined setting related process is executed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. .

Feature αC9. In the specific related operation, the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on) by the setting key, and other predetermined operations (pressing operation of the reset button 68c) )
In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and the supply of operating power is started after that, the regulating means has not performed the other predetermined operation. The gaming machine according to the feature αC8, wherein the setting key insertion portion is not in the restricted state based on the predetermined corresponding state.

  According to the feature αC9, even if the specific related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting key insertion unit is in the predetermined corresponding state, so that the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is executed. Can be prevented from being regulated. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the execution of the predetermined setting related process, the setting key insertion unit performs a power ON operation without performing another predetermined operation although it is in a predetermined corresponding state. Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted.

  Feature αC10. When the supply of operating power is started, another related process relating to the setting value is executed based on the setting key insertion unit being in the predetermined corresponding state in a situation where the other predetermined operation is not performed. The gaming machine according to feature αC9, comprising another related execution means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature αC10, even when the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, by performing an operation for executing another related process when the supply of operating power is resumed, It is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being restricted.

  Feature αC11. When the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the setting key insertion unit is not operated when the supply of operating power is started after that. The gaming machine according to Feature αC10, wherein the predetermined setting related process is executed without executing the separate related process based on the fact that the predetermined correspondence state is set.

  According to the feature αC11, when an operation for executing another related process is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. A predetermined setting related process is executed instead of a separate related process. As a result, it is possible to prioritize execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αC12. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting value to be used to be changed,
The gaming machine according to Feature αC11, wherein the different related process is a process for notifying a set value to be used.

  According to the feature αC12, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being changed, the setting value to be used is notified when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. It is possible to prioritize execution of processing for changing a setting value to be used over processing.

  Feature αC13. The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC12, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is processing that enables the setting value to be used to be changed.

  According to the feature αC13, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the set value to be used, the game is advanced when the supply of operating power is restarted after that. Execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being executed even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αC1 to αC13, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features Features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, Features v1 to v8, Features w1 to w8, Features x1 to x6, Features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, Features αA1 to αA10, Features αB1 to αB6, Features αC1 to αC13, Features αD1 to αD9, Features αE1 to αE5, Features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Applying one or more configurations of the features αP1 to αP7, the features αQ1 to αQ9, the features αR1 to αR8, the features αS1 to αS3, and the features αT1 to αT4 Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αD group>
Feature αD1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
When the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting related process related to the set value is executed based on the specific related operations (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) being performed. Setting related execution means (function for executing set value update processing in the main CPU 63);
Another related execution means (mainly) that executes a predetermined different related process related to the set value based on the fact that a predetermined related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed when supply of operating power is started. Function for executing set value update processing in the side CPU 63),
Regulation that restricts execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game when the supply of operating power is stopped after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed Restricting means for making a state (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in steps SC108 and SC116 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment) ,
With
The restriction means that the specific related operation has been performed when the supply of the operating power is started even after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. If the supply of operating power is started even after the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, A gaming machine that is not in the restricted state based on a predetermined related operation being performed.

  According to the feature αD1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted when the supply of the operating power is resumed after that. The Thereby, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related process is not completed.

  Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed, the execution of the predetermined progress process is not restricted by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is resumed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  Even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed, the execution of the predetermined progress process is also restricted when a predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. Not. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted when an operation for executing a process related to the set value is performed.

  Feature αD2. When the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting related process, the separate related process is performed based on the fact that the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started after that. The gaming machine according to the feature αD1, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is executed without being executed.

  According to the characteristic αD2, when an operation for executing another related process is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed A predetermined setting related process is executed instead of a separate related process. As a result, it is possible to prioritize execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αD3. In the specific related operation, the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on) by the setting key, and other predetermined operations (pressing operation of the reset button 68c) )
The predetermined related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit is brought into the predetermined corresponding state by the setting key, and does not include that the other predetermined operation is performed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature αD3, even if the specific related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the predetermined key process is performed in order to advance the game because the setting key insertion unit is in the predetermined corresponding state. Can be prevented from being regulated. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the execution of the predetermined setting related process, the setting key insertion unit performs a power ON operation without performing another predetermined operation although it is in a predetermined corresponding state. Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted.

Feature αD4. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting value to be used to be changed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3, wherein the different related process is a process for notifying a set value to be used.

  According to the feature αD4, when the supply of operating power is stopped during the process for changing the setting value to be used, the game is advanced when the supply of operating power is restarted after that. Execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being executed even though the setting value has not been changed. In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being changed, there is a process that allows the setting value to be used to be changed when restarting the supply of operating power. Predetermined progress processing not only when an operation for performing a process is performed, but also when an operation for performing a process for notifying a setting value to be used is performed Can be prevented from being restricted.

  Feature αD5. Characteristic αD1 thru | or characterized by including means (function to execute processing of Steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63) that executes non-regulation processing that is different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state. The gaming machine according to any one of αD4.

  According to the feature αD5, it is possible to execute the non-restricting process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted. Thereby, even if it is a regulation state, it becomes possible to ensure execution of a required process.

  Feature αD6. The non-regulation process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure, and the gaming machine according to feature αD5.

  According to the feature αD6, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state. Therefore, when a power failure occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

  Feature αD7. The regulating means is configured to enter the regulated state when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation of the regulated state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature αD7, it is possible to prevent the state where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

  Feature αD8. Means for causing the player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing should be executed based on the restriction state being made (in the 53rd embodiment). Any one of the characteristics αD1 to αD7 is provided with a function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature αD8, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to execute the predetermined setting-related process again when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed. Become.

Feature αD9. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
When the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting related process related to the set value is executed based on the specific related operations (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) being performed. Setting related execution means (function for executing set value update processing in the main CPU 63);
Regulation that restricts execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game when the supply of operating power is stopped after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed Restricting means for making a state (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in steps SC108 and SC116 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment) ,
With
The specific related operations include a first related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) and a second related operation (press operation of the reset button 68c),
The restriction means that the specific related operation has been performed when the supply of the operating power is started even after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. If the supply of operating power is started even after the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, A gaming machine that is not in the restricted state based on the first related operation being performed among the first related operation and the second related operation.

  According to the feature αD9, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted when the supply of the operating power is resumed after that. The Thereby, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related process is not completed.

  Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed, the execution of the predetermined progress process is not restricted by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is resumed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  Even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted if the first related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. Not. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted when a part of the operation for executing the predetermined setting related process is performed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αD1 to αD9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature αE group>
Feature αE1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
A settable situation (setting value) in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means being performed when the supply of operating power is started The situation generating means (a function for executing an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment) Function to make an affirmative decision)
An operation specifying means (function for executing the processing of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
When it is determined by the operation specifying means that the predetermined corresponding operation means is not operated, the storage state becomes a non-operation corresponding state, and it is specified by the operation specifying means that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated. An operation correspondence storage means (OFF confirmation flag 361) in which the storage state becomes an operation correspondence state when
Selection based on the fact that the predetermined operation means is operated by the operation specifying means in the situation where the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means is the non-operation corresponding state in the settable situation A selection target changing means (a function of executing the process of step SB914 in the main CPU 63) for changing the target set value;
With
The setting value that is the selection target when an end opportunity occurs in the settable situation is a configuration value that is the setting target.
The gaming machine has a state setting means for setting the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means to the operation correspondence state when the setting possibility situation is started or when the setting possibility situation is started (the 53rd embodiment). In the gaming machine, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of Step SB901, and in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of Step SC114.

  According to the feature αE1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player is given a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. Further, in order to generate a settable situation in which a setting value to be used can be changed, it is necessary to perform a power ON operation in a state where a specific related operation including an operation of a predetermined corresponding operation unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of changing the set value to be used illegally. Further, since the setting value of the selection target is changed based on the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means that is operated in order to generate the settable situation, the number of operation means necessary for changing the setting value is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress. Further, in the settable situation, the setting value to be selected is changed based on the fact that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated in the situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting value to be selected from being changed a plurality of times for one operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means.

  In this case, when the settable situation is started or when the settable situation is started, the storage state of the operation correspondence storage unit is set to the operation correspondence state. As a result, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for causing the settable situation is continued even after the start of the settable situation, the setting value to be selected is changed by the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

  Feature αE2. When the detection state of the means for detecting the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is an operation detection state, the situation generating means is that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated regardless of the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means The gaming machine according to feature αE1, characterized by specifying.

  According to the characteristic αE2, when specifying whether or not a specific related operation has been performed, it is not specified whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means has been switched from an unoperated state to an operated state. Since it is the structure which specifies whether the means is operated, it becomes possible to simplify the process structure for specifying whether a setting possible situation is generated.

Feature αE3. Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be selected;
With
The selection target changing means is specified in the settable situation that the predetermined correspondence operation means is operated by the operation identification means in a situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation correspondence state. Based on that, the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is changed so that the setting value to be selected is changed,
The status generation means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the setting correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information when the termination trigger occurs in the settable situation. Thus, the gaming machine according to the characteristic αE1 or αE2 is characterized in that the setting value that has been a selection target in the settable situation is set as a usage target.

  According to the feature αE3, the setting correspondence storage unit that stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage unit that stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable situation while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the settable situation was started.

  Feature αE4. Means (step SA801 in the main CPU 63) for displaying the set value as the selection target in the settable situation on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of the features αE1 to αE3, which is provided with a function of executing a process of step SA803.

  According to the feature αE4, it is possible to perform a setting value changing operation while confirming a setting value in the middle of the change in the settable situation.

Feature αE5. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a use target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing in steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
A settable situation (setting value) in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means being performed when the supply of operating power is started The situation generating means (a function for executing an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment) Function to make an affirmative decision)
An operation specifying means (function for executing the processing of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
Selection target changing means (step SB914 in the main CPU 63) for changing the set value to be selected based on the fact that the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated in the settable situation. Function to execute processing)
With
The setting value that is the selection target when an end opportunity occurs in the settable situation is a configuration value that is the setting target.
In this gaming machine, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means when the supply of operating power for generating the settable situation is started triggers the change of the set value to be selected in the settable situation Means to prevent it from being handled as an operation (in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC114 in the main CPU 63). A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature αE5, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. Further, in order to generate a settable situation in which a setting value to be used can be changed, it is necessary to perform a power ON operation in a state where a specific related operation including an operation of a predetermined corresponding operation unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of changing the set value to be used illegally. Further, since the setting value of the selection target is changed based on the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means that is operated in order to generate the settable situation, the number of operation means necessary for changing the setting value is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

  In this case, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means when the supply of the operating power for generating the settable situation is started is treated as an operation that triggers the change of the setting value to be selected in the settable situation. Not to be. As a result, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for causing the settable situation is continued even after the start of the settable situation, the setting value to be selected is changed by the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αE1 to αE5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature αC group, the feature αD group, and the feature αE group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αF group>
Feature αF1. Specific display means (special drawing display part 37a, universal figure display part 38a);
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273) (function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63);
Specific display control means (function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
On the basis of the start of the supply of operating power, an initialization means for initializing a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 55th embodiment) (the second RAM clear of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment) Processing function), and
With
The gaming machine, wherein the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means.

  According to the feature αF1, the game is started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of the supply of operating power. It becomes possible. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to display is set is not initialized by the initialization means. As a result, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started is the operating power regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing means or not. It is possible to obtain the display contents before the supply is stopped. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible.

Feature αF2. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of the supply of operating power (55th A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment)
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit. A gaming machine according to feature αF1, wherein:

  According to the feature αF2, a predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization unit when or when a new setting value to be used is set when the supply of operating power is started. Thus, when a new setting value to be used is set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, even if a predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing unit in association with a new setting of the setting value to be used, display data for causing the specific display unit to perform display is set. The display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. Thereby, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started is performed when a new setting value to be used is set and when a new setting value to be used is set. In any case, the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped can be obtained. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not a new setting value to be used has been set. Is possible.

Feature αF3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”. In a situation where “RAM clear operation” is performed), another initialization unit that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting unit does not set the setting value to be used ( A function of executing a first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment)
The gaming machine according to feature αF2, wherein the display storage area is not initialized by the separate initialization means.

  According to the characteristic αF3, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is set even when a new setting value to be used is not set. Therefore, even if the setting value to be used is not newly set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, display data for causing the specific display means to perform display is set regardless of whether a setting value to be used is newly set or a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. The display storage area is not initialized. As a result, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, when a new setting value is set, when a new setting value is not set, a predetermined initialization is performed. Whether the condition is satisfied or the predetermined initialization condition is not satisfied, the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped can be obtained. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, whether or not a new setting value has been set and whether or not a predetermined initialization condition has been satisfied It becomes possible not to specify.

  Feature αF4. In the situation where operating power is not supplied to the specific display control means, there is provided means for supplying backup power to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area (power supply / emission control device 78). The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF3.

  According to the characteristic αF4, even when the display storage area and the predetermined storage area require a supply of operating power for storing information, the operating power is not supplied to the specific display control means. Since backup power is supplied to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area, information is stored and retained in the display storage area and the predetermined storage area even when operating power is not supplied to the specific display means. Is possible.

Feature αF5. It is determined whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and when granting a privilege to the player, privilege grant information (information of “1” set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set to the predetermined value. Grant determining means (function to execute the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area (function of executing steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) )When,
With
The display data setting means displays the display data corresponding to the result (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means when the display timing of the determination result comes. Set to
The specific display control means corresponds to the determination result of the assignment determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF4, wherein the specific display means performs display.

  According to the characteristic αF5, the player pays attention to the specific display unit by performing the display corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player on the specific display unit. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started by providing the configuration described in the characteristic αF1, even if a predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization unit, the display is performed on the specific display unit. The display storage area in which the display data to be set is set is not initialized by the initialization means. As a result, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started is the operating power regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing means or not. It is possible to obtain the display contents before the supply is stopped. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible.

  Feature αF6. Even if the privilege granting information is erased from the predetermined storage area by initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means, the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. A gaming machine according to Feature αF5, wherein

  According to the characteristic αF6, when a predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the supply of operating power is stopped by erasing the privilege grant information from the predetermined storage area. Even if the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area before the game, if the supply of operating power is resumed, the game can be started in a state where the privilege grant information is deleted. In this case, even if the privilege grant information is erased from the predetermined storage area in this way, the display storage area in which the display data for displaying the specific display means is set is initialized by the initialization means. It is not converted. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it cannot be specified whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to prioritize.

Feature αF7. As the specific display means, a first specific display means (special drawing display part 37a) and a second specific display means (common figure display part 38a),
The display storage area includes a first display storage area (first display data buffer 271) and a second display storage area (third display data buffer 273),
The display data setting means includes
First display data setting means for setting display data in the first display storage area (function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the special figure display unit 37a);
Second display data setting means for setting display data in the second display storage area (function for executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the general-purpose display unit 38a);
With
The specific display control means includes
First specific display control means for controlling the display of the first specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display storage area is performed (step in the main CPU 63 regarding the special figure display unit 37a) SC412-step SC414 processing function),
Second specific display control means for controlling display of the second specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data stored in the second display storage area is performed (step in the main CPU 63 with respect to the general map display unit 38a). SC412-step SC414 processing function),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF6, wherein the first display storage area and the second display storage area are not initialized by the initialization unit.

  According to the characteristic αF7, the display content when the supply of the operating power is started for both the first specific display unit and the second specific display unit is displayed when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization unit and In any case where the initialization is not performed, the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped can be obtained. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of either the first specific display means or the second specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, the initialization means initializes a predetermined storage area. It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not it has been broken.

Feature αF8. The operation power supply start process is executed when the operation power supply is started, and the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the operation power supply starts. Is included in the process of
Any one of the features αF1 to αF7, wherein when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control unit starts display of the specific display unit after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is completed. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the characteristic αF8, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization unit or not, the specific display unit is displayed at the timing after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start display at.

Feature αF9. Based on the start of the supply of operating power, a settable situation is possible in which a setting value to be used can be set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage. Situation generating means (function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment)
The initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the settable situation occurs or after the settable situation occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature αF8, wherein the settable situation occurs in a situation where processing at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

  According to the feature αF9, the display on the specific display unit is started at the timing after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished, regardless of whether the settable situation occurs or not. It becomes possible to do.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αF1 to αF9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αG group>
Feature αG1. Specific display means (special drawing display part 37a, universal figure display part 38a);
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273) (function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63);
Specific display control means (function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Based on the start of the supply of operating power, initialization means (main in the 56th embodiment) for initializing a predetermined storage area (the clear target area 371 in the 56th embodiment) including the display storage area. The function of executing the second RAM clear process of the side CPU 63),
With
The display data setting means is configured such that when the operation power supply is started, the initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area and when the operation power supply starts, Correspondence setting means for setting specific correspondence display data for causing the specific display means to perform specific correspondence display in the display storage area in any case where the predetermined storage area is not initialized (step SC502 in the main CPU 63) , A function of executing the processing of step SC503, step SC507, and step SC510).

  According to the characteristic αG1, the game is started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of the supply of operating power. It becomes possible. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display is performed by the specific display means both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized. Thus, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do.

Feature αG2. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power (56th A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment)
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to feature αG1, characterized by:

  According to the feature αG2, when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of operating power is started or when a predetermined storage area is initialized, the target of use is initialized. When a new setting value is set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the specific display is performed by the specific display means both in the case where the predetermined storage area is initialized in association with the new setting of the setting value to be used and in the case where the predetermined storage area is not initialized. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not a new setting value for use has been set. Is possible.

Feature αG3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) In a situation where “RAM clear operation” is performed), another initialization unit that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting unit does not set the setting value to be used ( A function of executing a first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 56th embodiment,
The correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in the feature αG2.

  According to the characteristic αG3, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized even when a setting value is not set. Even in a situation where a new setting value is not set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when a new setting value is set, when a new setting value is not set, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined initialization condition is not satisfied In any case, specific display is performed by the specific display means. Thus, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, whether or not a new setting value has been set and whether a predetermined initialization condition has been established It becomes possible not to specify whether or not.

  Feature αG4. The correspondence setting means may supply operating power in a predetermined regulation situation (during game play, open / close execution mode, change display times in the general-purpose display unit 38a, and normal power open state). If the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization unit when the supply of operating power is started after that is stopped, the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG3.

  According to the characteristic αG4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation, and when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the display storage area is displayed when the predetermined storage area is not initialized. Since the display data corresponding to the specific is not set, the display data when the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area as it is. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation and when the supply of operating power is started after that, if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the supply of operating power is It becomes possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content of the specific display means when stopped.

Feature αG5. It is determined whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and when granting a privilege to the player, privilege grant information (information of “1” set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set to the predetermined value. Grant determining means (function to execute the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area (function of executing steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) )When,
With
The display data setting means displays the display data corresponding to the result (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means when the display timing of the determination result comes. Set to
The specific display control means corresponds to the determination result of the assignment determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG4, characterized in that display to be performed is performed by the specific display means.

  According to the characteristic αG5, the player pays attention to the specific display unit by performing the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a privilege to the player on the specific display unit. In this case, the configuration described in the feature αG1 is provided, so that when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined storage area is initialized or not initialized. The specific display is performed by the specific display means. Thus, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do.

Feature αG6. The specific display control means controls display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the determination result of the application determination means is performed after the pattern variation display is started,
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the initialization when the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is started thereafter in a situation in which the variation display of the pattern is performed by the specific display unit. The gaming machine according to feature αG5, wherein when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by means, the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area.

  According to the feature αG6, when the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is started thereafter in a situation where the display of variation of the pattern is performed by the specific display means, the predetermined storage area When is not initialized, specific display data is not set in the display storage area, and display data when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area. As a result, the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is started thereafter in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed on the specific display means If not, it is possible to restart the variable display of the pattern on the specific display means.

Feature αG7. When the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the privilege granting unit grants the privilege after a display corresponding to the granting of the privilege by the specific display unit is performed. Is,
The correspondence setting means is a case where the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is given by the privilege granting means, and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the initialization means performs the The gaming machine according to the characteristic αG5 or αG6, wherein when the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area.

  According to the feature αG7, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is given, and when the supply of operating power is started after that, the predetermined storage area is not initialized In the display storage area, the display data corresponding to the specific display data is not set. Therefore, the display data when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is granted, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the privilege It becomes possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation to which is given.

  Feature αG8. In the case where the specific display is performed by the specific display unit when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control unit is configured to display the specific display after the specific corresponding display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG7, characterized in that display of means is started.

  According to the characteristic αG8, when the supply of operating power is started, the display content when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Feature αG9. The operation power supply start process is executed when the operation power supply is started, and the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the operation power supply starts. Is included in the process of
The specific display control means starts display of the specific display means after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started. Gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αG9, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization unit or not, the specific display unit is displayed at the timing after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start display at.

Feature αG10. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power (56th A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment)
The initialization unit is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value is set by the setting unit or after the setting value is set by the setting unit. And
The gaming machine according to the characteristic αG9, wherein the setting value of the target to be used by the setting means is generated in a situation where processing at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

  According to the characteristic αG10, in the specific display unit at the timing after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is newly set or not. The display can be started.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αG1 to αG10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features Features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, Features v1 to v8, Features w1 to w8, Features x1 to x6, Features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, Features αA1 to αA10, Features αB1 to αB6, Features αC1 to αC13, Features αD1 to αD9, Features αE1 to αE5, Features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Applying one or more configurations of the features αP1 to αP7, the features αQ1 to αQ9, the features αR1 to αR8, the features αS1 to αS3, and the features αT1 to αT4 Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αH group>
Features αH1. Specific display means (special drawing display part 37a, universal figure display part 38a);
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273) (in the case of the 55th to 57th embodiments, the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 is executed. A function to execute the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 in the 58th to 60th embodiments),
Specific display control means (function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Setting means (55th to 55th) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment);
With
When the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started, and the operating power When the supply of the game is started, the game machine has a display content that makes it impossible to distinguish a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used by the setting unit has not been set.

  According to the feature αH1, in order to set the setting value to be used by setting the setting value to be used in the settable situation generated based on the start of the supply of operating power Therefore, it becomes necessary to newly start the supply of operating power, and even if the setting value to be used is illegally set, it is difficult to do so. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started is that the setting value to be used is set when the supply of operating power is started and the supply of operating power The display content is such that it is impossible to distinguish the predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used has not been set when the operation is started. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αH2. Specific display means (special drawing display part 37a, universal figure display part 38a);
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273) (in the 56th to 57th embodiments, the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 is executed. A function to execute the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 in the 58th to 60th embodiments),
Specific display control means (function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power (Nos. 56- The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment);
With
The display data setting means is provided by the setting means when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started and when the supply of operating power is started. Correspondence setting means for setting specific correspondence display data for causing the specific display means to perform specific correspondence display in the display storage area in any case where the setting value to be used is not set. (In the fifty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing processing of steps SC502, SC503, SC507, and SC510 in the main CPU 63, and in the fifty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing processing of steps SC602 and SC603 in the main CPU 63. In the 58th embodiment, step SC802 in the main CPU63. The function of executing the processing of step SC805, the function of executing the processing of step SC902 to step SC905 in the main CPU 63 in the 59th embodiment, and the steps SD102 to SD105, SD109 of the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment. A gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of step SD110, step SD113, and step SD114.

  According to the feature αH2, in order to set the setting value to be used by setting the setting value to be used in the settable situation generated based on the start of the supply of operating power Therefore, it becomes necessary to newly start the supply of operating power, and even if the setting value to be used is illegally set, it is difficult to do so. In this case, the setting value that is the target of use is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or the setting value that is the target of use is not set when the supply of the operating power is started. In any of the predetermined situations, the specific display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αH3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) When the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation), another initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area (function to execute the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 56th to 60th embodiments) With
The correspondence setting means uses the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of operating power is started and when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αH2, wherein the specific corresponding display data is set in the display storage area in any case where a target set value is set.

  According to the feature αH3, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the game is performed in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. Can be started. In this case, the specific display is performed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, regardless of whether the set value to be used is set or the predetermined storage area is initialized. Is done. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, either the new setting of the setting value to be used or the initialization of the predetermined storage area is performed. It is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the two.

  Feature αH4. When the setting value is set by the setting means or after the setting value is set by the setting means, initialization means (56th to 56th) that initializes the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to Feature αH2 or αH3, further including a function of executing a second RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the sixty-sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature αH4, when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the target of use is initialized. When a new setting value is set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the setting value that is the target of use is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or the setting value that is the target of use is not set when the supply of the operating power is started. In any of the predetermined situations, the specific display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αH5. It is determined whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and when granting a privilege to the player, privilege grant information (information of “1” set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set to the predetermined value. Grant determining means (function to execute the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area (function of executing steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) )When,
With
The display data setting means displays the display data corresponding to the result (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means when the display timing of the determination result comes. Set to
The specific display control means responds to the determination result of the assignment determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αH2 to αH4, wherein the specific display means performs display.

  According to the characteristic αH5, the player pays attention to the specific display unit by performing the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a privilege to the player on the specific display unit. In this case, since the configuration described in the characteristic αH1 is provided, the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, and the supply of the operating power is started. In any case where the setting value to be used is not set in the predetermined situation, the specific display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

  Feature αH6. The gaming machine according to Feature αH5, wherein the specific corresponding display data is display data used as the display data corresponding to the result.

  According to the characteristic αH6, the specific display is performed by the specific display unit when the supply of the operating power is started using the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the assignment determination unit. . Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started while suppressing the increase in the capacity of the display data, the setting value to be used is set. It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not.

  Feature αH7. In the characteristic αH6, the specific correspondence display data is display data used when it is determined in the grant determination means that the bonus is not given to the player among the display data corresponding to the result. The gaming machine described.

  When the game hall is closed, it is common for the power supply of the gaming machine to be cut off in a situation where the display content corresponding to the determination that the privilege is not given to the player is given by the specific display means. . In this case, according to the feature αH7, when the setting value that is a target of use is set when the supply of the operating power is started, and the setting value that is the target of use when the supply of the operating power is started In any of the predetermined situations in which the setting is not performed, the display content of the specific display means is the display content corresponding to the determination that the privilege is not given to the player by the grant determining means. Thus, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped. Can be recognized by the player, and it can be made impossible to specify whether or not a setting value to be used has been set.

Feature αH8. There are a plurality of types of specific correspondence display data,
The correspondence setting unit sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area, according to any one of the characteristics αH2 to αH7. Game machines.

  According to the characteristic αH8, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific correspondence display of the specific display unit when the supply of operating power is started.

  Feature αH9. In the case where the specific display is performed by the specific display unit when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control unit is configured to display the specific display after the specific corresponding display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αH2 to αH8, characterized in that display of means is started.

  According to the characteristic αH9, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display unit. It becomes possible.

Feature αH10. The setting means sets the setting value to be used in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being performed,
The specific display control unit starts the display of the specific display unit after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αH10, whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value to be used is not set, the process at the start of supply of operating power is performed. It is possible to start the specific correspondence display in the specific display means at the timing after the end.

Feature αH11. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) In the situation, when the “RAM clear operation” is performed), even if the setting value is not set by the setting unit, another initialization unit (56th to 5th to initialize the predetermined storage area). A function of executing a first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of 60,
The separate initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed,
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the setting by the setting unit when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization unit when the supply of operating power is started and when the supply of operating power is started. In any of the cases where a value is set, the specific corresponding display data is set in the display storage area,
In the characteristic αH9 or αH10, the specific display control unit causes the display of the specific display unit to start after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine described.

  According to the characteristic αH11, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized, so that a setting value to be used is newly set. Even if there is no situation, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the specific display is performed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, regardless of whether the set value to be used is set or the predetermined storage area is initialized. Is done. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, either the new setting of the setting value to be used or the initialization of the predetermined storage area is performed. It is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the two. Further, the specific display means at the timing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the predetermined storage area is initialized. It is possible to start the specific correspondence display at.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αH1 to αH11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features Features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, Features v1 to v8, Features w1 to w8, Features x1 to x6, Features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, Features αA1 to αA10, Features αB1 to αB6, Features αC1 to αC13, Features αD1 to αD9, Features αE1 to αE5, Features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Applying one or more configurations of the features αP1 to αP7, the features αQ1 to αQ9, the features αR1 to αR8, the features αS1 to αS3, and the features αT1 to αT4 Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αI group>
Feature αI1. Specific display means (special drawing display part 37a, universal figure display part 38a);
Whether or not to grant a privilege to a player is determined, and when granting a privilege to a player, privilege grant information (information of “1” set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined manner Grant determining means (function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area (clear target area 371 in the 57th to 60th embodiments);
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area (function of executing steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) )When,
When the display timing of the determination result is reached, the display data corresponding to the result corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination unit (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) is displayed in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, Display data setting means to be set in the third display data buffer 273 (the function of executing step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the 57th embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the 58th to 60th embodiments) The function of executing the process of step SC717 in FIG.
The display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means is displayed on the specific display means by controlling the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed. Specific display control means (function to execute the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63),
Based on the start of the supply of operating power, initialization means (57th to 5th) that initializes a predetermined storage area (the clear target area 371 in the 57th to 60th embodiments) including the display storage area. The function of executing the second RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of 60),
With
The display data setting means outputs specific corresponding display data to be used as display data corresponding to the result when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started. Corresponding setting means for setting in the display storage area (in the 57th embodiment, the function of executing steps SC602 and SC603 in the main CPU 63, and in the 58th embodiment, the steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63 are performed. Functions to be executed, in the 59th embodiment, functions to execute the processes of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63, and in the 60th embodiment, steps SD102 to SD105, steps SD109, SD110, and SD113 in the main CPU 63. And Game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing in step SD114).

  According to the characteristic αI1, the player pays attention to the specific display unit by performing the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a privilege to the player on the specific display unit. In addition, a predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of supply of operating power, so that a game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result of the assignment determination means is set in the display storage area. Is done. Thereby, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display displayed when the display content of the specific display means informs the determination result of the assignment determining means It becomes contents. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized. Become.

Feature αI2. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power (57th to The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment,
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. A gaming machine according to feature αI1, characterized by:

  According to the feature αI2, when the setting value of the usage target is set when the supply of the operating power is started or when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the usage target is initialized. When a new setting value is set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when a predetermined storage area is initialized in association with a new setting of the setting value to be used, display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the assignment determining means is displayed and stored. Set to area. Thereby, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display displayed when the display content of the specific display means informs the determination result of the assignment determining means It becomes contents. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not a new setting value for the use target has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αI3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”. When the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation), another initialization unit (first operation) that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting unit does not set the setting value to be used. 57-the function which performs the 1st RAM clear processing of main side CPU63 in 60th embodiment),
The correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in the feature αI2.

  According to the feature αI3, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized even when a setting value to be used is not set Therefore, even in a situation where a setting value to be used is not newly set, a game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, whether the setting value to be used is newly set or the predetermined storage area is initialized by satisfying the predetermined initialization condition, the assignment determining means The display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result is set in the display storage area. As a result, the display of the specific display means is performed regardless of whether a new setting of the set value to be used is performed or a predetermined storage area is initialized by satisfying a predetermined initialization condition. The content is the display content displayed when the determination result of the assignment determining means is notified. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, whether or not a new setting value of the target to be used has been set and a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not it has been done.

  Feature αI4. The specific-corresponding display data is display data that is used when it is determined in the grant determining means that the privilege is not given to the player among the display data corresponding to the result, The gaming machine according to any one of αI3.

  When the game hall is closed, it is common for the power supply of the gaming machine to be cut off in a situation where the display content corresponding to the determination that the privilege is not given to the player is given by the specific display means. . In this case, according to the characteristic αI4, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means should not give a privilege to the player in the grant determining means. The display contents correspond to the determination. Thus, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped. Can be recognized by the player, and it can be made impossible to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αI5. There are a plurality of types of specific correspondence display data,
One of the characteristics αI1 to αI4 is characterized in that the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area. Game machines.

  According to the characteristic αI5, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific correspondence display of the specific display unit when the supply of operating power is started.

  Feature αI6. In the case where the specific display is performed by the specific display unit when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control unit is configured to display the specific display after the specific corresponding display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αI1 to αI5, characterized in that display of means is started.

  According to the feature αI6, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display unit. It becomes possible.

Feature αI7. The operation power supply start process is executed when the operation power supply is started, and the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the operation power supply starts. Is included in the process of
The specific display control means starts display of the specific display means after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αI7, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization unit or not, the specific display unit is displayed at a timing after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start display at.

Feature αI8. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power (57th to The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment,
The initialization unit is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value is set by the setting unit or after the setting value is set by the setting unit. And
The gaming machine according to the characteristic αI7, wherein the setting value to be used by the setting means is set in a situation where processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed.

  According to the characteristic αI8, whether the setting value to be used is newly set or not, in the specific display means at the timing after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. The display can be started.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αI1 to αI8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αJ group>
Feature αJ1. Specific display means (special drawing display part 37a, universal figure display part 38a);
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273) (in the 58th to 60th embodiments, the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 is executed. A function to execute the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment),
Specific display control means (function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Based on the start of the supply of operating power, initialization means (58th to 58th) that initializes a predetermined storage area (the clear target area 371 in the 58th to 61st embodiments) including the display storage area. The function of executing the second RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of 61);
Correspondence setting means (58th display setting) that causes the display content of the specific display means to be in the specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started. In the embodiment, a function of executing processing of steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63 in the 59th embodiment, and a main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment. In step SD102 to step SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113 and step SD114 in the 61st embodiment, a function in step 61 to step SD217 in the main CPU 63).
With
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display.

  According to the feature αJ1, the game is started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of the supply of operating power. It becomes possible. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started becomes the specific correspondence display. There are a plurality of types of specific correspondence displays. Thereby, the display content of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized is diversified. Therefore, even if the display content of the specific display means is confirmed when the supply of operating power is started, it is difficult to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ2. The correspondence setting means is a specific correspondence display for causing the specific display means to perform the specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started. Data is set in the display storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature αJ1, wherein there are a plurality of types of specific correspondence display data.

  According to the feature αJ2, when a predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, any one of the plurality of types of specific corresponding display data is stored in the display storage area. By setting, specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, it is possible to cause specific display to be performed by the specific display means simply by selecting one type of specific corresponding display data from a plurality of types of specific corresponding display data and setting it in the display storage area. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for causing the specific display means to perform one type of specific corresponding display among a plurality of types of specific corresponding displays.

Feature αJ3. It is determined whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and when granting a privilege to the player, privilege grant information (information of “1” set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set to the predetermined value. Grant determining means (function to execute the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area (function of executing steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) )When,
With
The display data setting means displays the display data corresponding to the result (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means when the display timing of the determination result comes. Set to
The specific display control means corresponds to the determination result of the assignment determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed. Display to be performed by the specific display means,
The gaming machine according to Feature αJ2, wherein the specific corresponding display data is display data used as the display data corresponding to the result.

  According to the characteristic αJ3, the player pays attention to the specific display unit by performing the display corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player on the specific display unit. In this case, the specific display is performed by the specific display unit when the supply of the operating power is started using the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the provision determining unit. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started while suppressing an increase in the capacity of the display data, is the predetermined storage area initialized? It is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not.

  Feature αJ4. In the characteristic αJ3, the specific correspondence display data is display data used when the grant determination means determines not to grant the privilege to the player among the display data corresponding to the result. The gaming machine described.

  When the game hall is closed, it is common for the power supply of the gaming machine to be cut off in a situation where the display content corresponding to the determination that the privilege is not given to the player is given by the specific display means. . In this case, according to the feature αJ4, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means does not give a privilege to the player in the grant determining means The display contents correspond to that determined. Thus, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped. Can be recognized by the player, and it can be made impossible to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

  Feature αJ5. Among the display data corresponding to the result, the specific correspondence display data includes display data used when the grant determination unit determines not to grant the privilege to the player, and the grant determination unit provides the player with the display data. The gaming machine according to feature αJ3, including both display data used when it is determined to grant the privilege.

  According to the feature αJ5, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display and the grant determining unit when the grant determining unit determines not to grant the privilege to the player One of the displays when it is determined to give a privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means as a specific correspondence display. Thus, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped. Can be recognized by the player, and it can be made impossible to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ6. Setting means (58th to 58th settings) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment,
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ5.

  According to the feature αJ6, when the setting value of the usage target is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the usage target is initialized. When a new setting value is set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when a predetermined storage area is initialized in association with a new setting of the setting value to be used, any one of the plurality of types of specific corresponding displays is displayed on the specific display means. Done. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means when a new setting value to be used is set are diversified, and the player can display the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started. Even if the contents are confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a new setting value to be used has been set.

Feature αJ7. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”. When the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation), another initialization unit (58th to 5th) that initializes the predetermined storage area even if the setting value is not set by the setting unit. 61, a function of executing the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of 61,
The correspondence setting means uses the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of operating power is started and when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to Feature αJ6, wherein the display content of the specific display means is a specific corresponding display in any case where a target set value is set.

  According to the feature αJ7, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized even when a setting value is not set. Even in a situation where a new setting value is not set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the specific display is performed by the specific display means in any case where a new setting value is set or a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and a predetermined storage area is initialized. Done. Thus, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, whether or not a new setting value has been set and whether a predetermined initialization condition has been established It becomes possible not to specify whether or not.

  Feature αJ8. The correspondence setting means causes the display content of the specific display means to be the specific correspondence display even when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ7.

  According to the characteristic αJ8, the specific display is performed by the specific display unit when the predetermined storage area is initialized or not initialized when the supply of the operating power is started. Thus, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature αJ9. The correspondence setting means may supply operating power in a predetermined regulation situation (during game play, open / close execution mode, change display times in the general-purpose display unit 38a, and normal power open state). Specific correspondence display data for causing the specific correspondence display to be performed when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the operation power supply is started after the operation is stopped. Is not set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to feature αJ8.

  According to the characteristic αJ9, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation, and when the supply of operating power is started after that, the display storage area is not initialized. Since the display data corresponding to the specific is not set, the display data when the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area as it is. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation and when the supply of operating power is started after that, if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the supply of operating power is It becomes possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content of the specific display means when stopped.

Feature αJ10. The specific display control means controls display of the specific display means so that display corresponding to the determination result of the application determination means is performed after the pattern variation display is started,
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the initialization when the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is started thereafter in a situation in which the variation display of the pattern is performed by the specific display unit. The gaming machine according to the characteristic αJ8 or αJ9, wherein when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by means, the specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display is not set in the display storage area .

  According to the characteristic αJ10, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the display of the variation of the pattern is performed by the specific display means, and the supply of operating power is started after that, the predetermined storage area When is not initialized, specific display data is not set in the display storage area, and display data when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area. As a result, the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is started thereafter in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed on the specific display means If not, it is possible to restart the variable display of the pattern on the specific display means.

Feature αJ11. When the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the privilege granting unit grants the privilege after a display corresponding to the granting of the privilege by the specific display unit is performed. Is,
The correspondence setting means is a case where the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is given by the privilege granting means, and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the initialization means performs the The game according to any one of features αJ8 to αJ10, wherein when the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display is not set in the display storage area. Machine.

  According to the characteristic αJ11, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is given, and when the supply of operating power is started after that, the predetermined storage area is not initialized In the display storage area, the display data corresponding to the specific display data is not set. Therefore, the display data when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is granted, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the privilege It becomes possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation to which is given.

  Feature αJ12. The specific display control means starts display of the specific display means in a state where the specific correspondence display is performed when the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ11.

  According to the characteristic αJ12, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display unit. It becomes possible.

Feature αJ13. The operation power supply start process is executed when the operation power supply is started, and the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the operation power supply starts. Is included in the process of
The specific display control means starts display of the specific display means after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αJ13, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization unit or not, the specific display unit is displayed at the timing after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start display at.

Feature αJ14. Setting means (58th to 58th settings) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment,
The initialization unit is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value is set by the setting unit or after the setting value is set by the setting unit. And
The gaming machine according to the characteristic αJ13, wherein the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means occurs in a situation where processing at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

  According to the characteristic αJ14, whether the setting value to be used is newly set or not, in the specific display means at the timing after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. The display can be started.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αJ1 to αJ14, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features Features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, Features v1 to v8, Features w1 to w8, Features x1 to x6, Features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, Features αA1 to αA10, Features αB1 to αB6, Features αC1 to αC13, Features αD1 to αD9, Features αE1 to αE5, Features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Applying one or more configurations of the features αP1 to αP7, the features αQ1 to αQ9, the features αR1 to αR8, the features αS1 to αS3, and the features αT1 to αT4 Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αK group>
Feature αK1. Specific display means (special drawing display part 37a, universal figure display part 38a);
Whether or not to grant a privilege to a player is determined, and when granting a privilege to a player, privilege grant information (information of “1” set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined manner Grant determination means (function for executing the processing of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area (clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment);
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area (function of executing steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) )When,
When the display timing of the determination result is reached, the display data corresponding to the result corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination unit (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) is displayed in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, Display data setting means (function for executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) to be set in the third display data buffer 273);
The display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means is displayed on the specific display means by controlling the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed. Specific display control means (function to execute the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63),
Based on the start of the supply of operating power, initialization means (a main area in the 61st embodiment) for initializing a predetermined storage area (the clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment) including the display storage area. The function of executing the second RAM clear process of the side CPU 63),
Correspondence setting means (main-side CPU 63) that causes the display content of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started to be a specific correspondence display. In step SD202 to step SD217 in FIG.
With
There are multiple types of specific correspondence display,
The gaming machine, wherein the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include display contents that are not selected as a display corresponding to a determination result of the grant determination means.

  According to the characteristic αK1, the game is started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of the supply of operating power. It becomes possible. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started becomes the specific correspondence display. There are a plurality of types of specific correspondence displays, and the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include display contents that are not selected as the display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means. Thereby, the display content of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized is diversified. Therefore, even if the display content of the specific display means is confirmed when the supply of operating power is started, it is difficult to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

  Feature αK2. The plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include display contents that can be selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means and display contents that are not selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means. The gaming machine according to Feature αK1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature αK2, the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include both display contents that can be selected as the display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means and display contents that are not selected. It is possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means in the case where it is converted into a display.

Feature αK3. The specific display means has a plurality of light emitting units,
The correspondence setting means executes a lottery process (step SD204, step SD212) as to whether or not to individually turn on each of the plurality of light emitting units, and results of the lottery process for each of the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine according to the characteristic αK1 or αK2, wherein the specific correspondence display is performed by setting display data of a lighting pattern corresponding to the in the display storage area.

  According to the characteristic αK3, a lottery process for determining whether or not each of the plurality of light emitting units in the specific display unit is in a lighting state is executed, and the display content of the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process is stored in a predetermined storage area. Is displayed on the specific display means as a specific corresponding display when is initialized. This makes it possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized, and to suppress the display contents of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible to be regular.

Feature αK4. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that occurs based on the start of supply of operating power (61st A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment)
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK3.

  According to the feature αK4, when the setting value of the usage target is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the usage target is initialized. When a new setting value is set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when a predetermined storage area is initialized in association with a new setting of the setting value to be used, any one of the plurality of types of specific corresponding displays is displayed on the specific display means. Done. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means when a new setting value to be used is set are diversified, and the player can display the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started. Even if the contents are confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a new setting value to be used has been set.

Feature αK5. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”. When the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation), another initialization unit (first operation) that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting unit does not set the setting value to be used. 61, a function of executing the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of 61,
The correspondence setting means uses the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of operating power is started and when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to the characteristic αK4, characterized in that the display content of the specific display means is a specific corresponding display in any case where the target set value is set.

  According to the characteristic αK5, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized even when a setting value is not set. Even in a situation where a new setting value is not set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the specific display is performed by the specific display means in any case where a new setting value is set or a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and a predetermined storage area is initialized. Done. Thus, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, whether or not a new setting value has been set and whether a predetermined initialization condition has been established It becomes possible not to specify whether or not.

  Feature αK6. The specific display control means starts display of the specific display means in a state where the specific correspondence display is performed when the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK5.

  According to the characteristic αK6, when the supply of operating power is started, the display content when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Feature αK7. The operation power supply start process is executed when the operation power supply is started, and the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the operation power supply starts. Is included in the process of
The specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started, according to the characteristic αK6 Gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αK7, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized or not initialized by the initialization unit, the specific display unit is displayed at the timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start display at.

Feature αK8. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power (56th A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment)
The initialization unit is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value is set by the setting unit or after the setting value is set by the setting unit. And
The gaming machine as set forth in the characteristic αK7, wherein the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means occurs in a situation where processing at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

  According to the characteristic αK8, in the specific display means at the timing after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is newly set or not. The display can be started.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αK1 to αK8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature αF group, the feature αG group, the feature αH group, the feature αI group, the feature αJ group, and the feature αK group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the operation at the start of supply of operating power suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αL group>
Feature αL1. Specific display means (special drawing display part 37a, universal figure display part 38a);
Specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means (function for executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power (No. 62 to A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 63rd embodiment),
With
The specific display control means is a setting value or operation that is equal to or greater than the advantage of the setting value before the setting value is set by the setting means and before the supply of operating power is stopped. Based on the fact that the setting value that is more advantageous than the setting value before the power supply is stopped has been set by the setting means as the setting value to be used, which is one of the suggestion target situations. When the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is determined according to the suggestion target situation (a mode referring to the special display second display distribution table 392, a general-purpose first display The mode determining means (in the 62nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes steps SD402 to SD411). Function, a game machine, characterized in that it comprises a function) for executing the process of step SD502 in the main side CPU63 in the embodiment of the 63.

  According to the feature αL1, by confirming the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, a new setting of the setting value to be used has been performed, or the setting to be used It is possible to predict that the advantage of the value is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value so far or higher than the advantage of the set value so far. This makes it possible for the player to make a prediction regarding the set value using the display content of the specific display means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature αL2. The mode determining means has a set value that is greater than or equal to the advantage of the set value before the supply of operating power is stopped or a set value that is more advantageous than the set value before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started based on the setting value to be used set by the setting means is determined in a determination manner corresponding to the suggestion target situation, When the supply of operating power is started based on the fact that a setting value lower than the advantage of the setting value before the power supply is stopped is set by the setting means as the setting value to be used The determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation (the mode referring to the first display allocation table 391 for special drawings, the first display allocation table for general maps) The gaming machine according to the features αL1, characterized by determining at 393 manner that reference).

  According to the feature αL2, when the advantage of the setting value to be used is equal to or higher than the advantage of the previous set value or higher than the advantage of the previous set value, the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation The display content of the specific display means is determined by the above, and when the advantage of the set value to be used is lower than the previous set value, the specific display means is set in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggested target situation. Display contents are determined. Thereby, it becomes easy to predict whether or not the advantage of the set value to be used is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value so far or higher than the advantage of the set value so far.

  Feature αL3. The aspect determining means displays the display content of the specific display means when the setting power to be used is not set by the setting means based on the fact that the setting value to be used is not set. The gaming machine according to feature αL2, wherein the game machine is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the situation.

  According to the feature αL3, when the supply of the operating power is started, the supply of the operating power is started in the determination mode corresponding to the non-suggested target situation even when the setting value to be used is not newly set. Since the display content of the specific display means in the case of being determined is determined, when the display content of the specific display means is determined in the determination mode corresponding to the non-suggested target situation, the setting value that becomes the target of use of the situation It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether the setting has not been performed or whether the setting value to be used is less advantageous than before.

  Feature αL4. The aspect determining means determines the display content of the specific display means by lottery according to the lottery aspect corresponding to the suggestion target situation when it is the suggestion target situation, and any one of features αL1 to αL3 The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature αL4, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means in the suggestion target situation. Thereby, even if it confirms a specific display means, it becomes possible not to specify clearly whether it is a suggestion object situation.

  Feature αL5. The mode determining means determines the display content of the specific display means by lottery according to the lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggested target situation when the non-suggested target situation is not the suggested target situation. A gaming machine described in the feature αL4.

  According to the feature αL5, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means in the non-suggestion target situation. Thereby, even if it confirms a specific display means, it becomes possible not to specify clearly whether it is a non-suggestion object situation.

  Feature αL6. Display contents that can be selected by lottery of display contents of the specific display means according to the lottery aspect corresponding to the suggestion target situation and selections by lottery of display contents of the specific display means according to the lottery aspect corresponding to the non-implicit target situation There is common display content (first to third initial display for special drawings, first to third initial display for general maps) in any of the display contents that can be displayed, and the selection probability of the common display content is The gaming machine according to feature αL5, wherein the lottery aspect corresponding to the suggestion target situation is different from the lottery aspect corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation.

  According to the feature αL6, since the common display content is displayed by the specific display means in either the suggestion target situation or the non-suggestion target situation, it is clear whether the suggestion target situation or the non-suggestion target situation It is possible to prevent it from being specified. On the other hand, since the selection probability of the common display content is different between the case of the suggestion target situation and the case of the non-suggestion target situation, either the suggestion target situation or the non-suggestion target situation from the display content of the specific display means It is possible to predict whether it exists.

Feature αL7. Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (function to execute the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63);
The specific display control means controls the specific display means so that display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed,
Initialization of initializing a predetermined storage area including the display storage area when the setting value is set by the setting unit or after the setting value is set by the setting unit The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL6, characterized in that it comprises means (function for executing the second RAM clear processing of the main CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments).

  According to the feature αL7, when the setting value of the usage target is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the usage target is initialized. When a new setting value is set, the game can be started in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic αL1 makes it possible to use the situation in which the display storage area is initialized in accordance with the initialization of the predetermined storage area, and to suggest the situation based on the display content of the specific display means. It becomes possible to predict whether or not.

Feature αL8. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) When the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation), another initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area (function to execute the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments) With
The mode determining means determines the display content of the specific display means corresponding to the non-suggesting target situation when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means and when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to Feature αL7, wherein the game machine is determined by a mode.

  According to the feature αL8, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the game is performed in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. Can be started. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization unit, the display content of the specific display unit when the supply of the operating power is started is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. Therefore, it becomes easier to predict whether or not the suggestion target situation is present.

Feature αL9. Whether or not to grant a privilege to a player is determined, and when granting a privilege to a player, privilege grant information (information of “1” set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined manner Grant determination means (function to execute the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area;
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area (function of executing steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) )When,
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL8, wherein the specific display control unit causes the specific display unit to perform display corresponding to a determination result of the grant determination unit.

  According to the characteristic αL9, the player pays attention to the specific display unit by performing the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a privilege to the player on the specific display unit. In this case, by providing the configuration of the characteristic αL1, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above by using the specific display means.

  Feature αL10. The display content of the specific display means determined in the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation is a display content that is not displayed when the display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means is performed by the specific display means. The gaming machine according to Feature αL9, wherein

  According to the feature αL10, it is possible to distinguish the display content determined in the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation from the display content corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination unit.

  Feature αL11. The display content determined by the mode determination unit when the specific display control unit displays the display content determined by the mode determination unit when the operation power supply is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL10, wherein the display of the specific display means is started in a state where the display according to is performed.

  According to the characteristic αL11, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display of the display content when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the display according to the display content determined by the mode determination unit is performed is the specific display unit. It is possible to prevent it from being performed at.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αL1 to αL11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features Features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, Features v1 to v8, Features w1 to w8, Features x1 to x6, Features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, Features αA1 to αA10, Features αB1 to αB6, Features αC1 to αC13, Features αD1 to αD9, Features αE1 to αE5, Features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Applying one or more configurations of the features αP1 to αP7, the features αQ1 to αQ9, the features αR1 to αR8, the features αS1 to αS3, and the features αT1 to αT4 Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the characteristic αL group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature αM group>
Feature αM1. A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Corresponding operation control means for setting the state of the predetermined area that is visible from the front of the gaming machine to the corresponding operation state in a situation where predetermined setting related processing (setting value update processing, setting confirmation processing) regarding the setting value is being executed (In the sixty-fourth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SE304, SE305, SE308, and SE309. In the sixty-sixth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes steps SE604 and SE607. In the sixty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing steps SE704, SE707, SE802, and SE816 in the main CPU 63, and in steps 67 and SE907 in the main CPU 63 in the sixty-seventh embodiment. That function, and the 68 function of displaying controls the 15R display unit 481,6R display unit 483 and the small win display unit 484 in the main side CPU63 in Embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αM1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, in a situation where a predetermined setting related process relating to the setting value is being executed, the state of the predetermined area that is visible from the front of the gaming machine is the corresponding operation state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αM2. Predetermined operation means provided in the predetermined area that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine (in the 65th embodiment, the common figure display unit 423a, the first special figure display part 425, the second special figure display part 426, and the special display part 429, the 67th embodiment includes a first special figure display unit 425 and a second special figure display unit 426),
In the situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed, the corresponding operation control means sets the operation state of the predetermined operation means to an operation state that does not occur when a game is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature αM1, wherein the state is the corresponding operation state.

  According to the feature αM2, the operation state of the predetermined operation means is an operation state that does not occur when a game is being executed in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed. Accordingly, it is possible to execute notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being performed using a predetermined operation unit that operates when a game is being executed.

Feature αM3. A plurality of predetermined operation means (in the 64th embodiment, a first special figure display unit 425, a second special figure display unit 426, a special display unit 429, and a 65th embodiment in the predetermined area that can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The general map display unit 423a, the general map hold display unit 423b, the first special map display unit 425, the second special map display unit 426, the first special map hold display unit 427, the second special map hold display unit 428, and the special display. Unit 429, in the 66th embodiment, special prize winning device 416, first special figure display unit 425 and second special figure display unit 426, in the 68th embodiment, 15R display unit 481, 6R display unit 483 and small hit display unit 484),
The gaming machine according to the characteristic αM1 or αM2, wherein the corresponding operation control unit sets a combination of operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation units as the corresponding operation state.

  According to the feature αM3, notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed using a combination of operation states of a plurality of predetermined operation means is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally informing the user that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Feature αM4. The gaming machine according to Feature αM3, wherein the corresponding operation state is an operation state of a combination that does not occur when a game is being executed among combinations of operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means.

  According to the characteristic αM4, a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed by setting a combination of operation states of a plurality of predetermined operation means to a combination that does not occur when a game is being executed. Is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to execute notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed using a plurality of predetermined operation means that operate when a game is being executed.

  Feature αM5. The individual operation states in the corresponding operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means are operation states that can occur when a game is being executed, while these individual operation states are simultaneously generated when a game is being executed. The gaming machine according to Feature αM4, wherein the gaming machine is in a non-operating state.

  According to the feature αM5, each individual operation state in the corresponding operation state of a plurality of predetermined operation means is an operation state that can occur when a game is being executed, and thus occurs when a game is being executed. It is possible to execute notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed using the obtained operation state.

  Feature αM6. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics αM3 to αM5, wherein the first predetermined operation means of the plurality of predetermined operation means is a display means, and the second predetermined operation means is a movable means.

  According to the feature αM6, since the notification indicating that the predetermined setting related process is being executed is performed by the combination of the individual operation states of the display unit and the movable unit, the predetermined setting related process is executed. It becomes easy to grasp that it is the situation being done.

Feature αM7. The corresponding operation control means includes
In a situation where a first setting related process is being executed as the predetermined setting related process, a first corresponding operation control unit that sets a combination of operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation units as the corresponding operation state as a first corresponding operation state. (In the sixty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing processing of step SE304 and step SE305 in the main CPU 63, in the sixty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing processing of step SE604 in the main CPU 63, and in the sixty-sixth embodiment, the main side A function of executing the processing of step SE704, step SE802 and step SE816 in the CPU 63, a function of controlling the display of the 15R display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484 in the main CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment);
In a situation in which a second setting related process is being executed as the predetermined setting related process, a second corresponding operation control unit that sets a combination of operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation units as the corresponding operation state as a second corresponding operation state. (In the 64th embodiment, the function of executing steps SE308 and SE309 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process in step SE607 in the main CPU 63 in the 65th embodiment, and the main side in the 66th embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step SE707, step SE802 and step SE816 in the CPU 63, a function of controlling display of the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483 in the main CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features αM3 to αM6.

  According to the characteristic αM7, a notification that the first setting related process is being executed and a second setting related process are being executed using a combination of operation states of a plurality of predetermined operation means. It is possible to execute each of the notifications.

Feature αM8. The first setting related process is a process that enables setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit;
The gaming machine according to Feature αM7, wherein the second setting related process is a process for notifying the current set value.

  According to the feature αM8, a notification that the process that enables setting of a setting value to be used is performed using a combination of operation states of a plurality of predetermined operation means is performed, and the use target Each of the notifications that the process for making the setting value notified is being executed can be executed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αM1 to αM8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αN group>
Feature αN1. First period generating means for generating a first period (game times) in a situation where a game is being executed (a function of executing the processing of steps SD815 and SD816 in the main CPU 63);
The first predetermined operation means (the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426) is controlled so as to be in a state corresponding to the first period in the first period (a state in which the pattern change display is performed). 1 predetermined operation control means (function for executing the process of step SD706 in the main CPU 63);
Second period generating means for generating a second period (opening / closing execution mode) in a situation where a game is being executed (a function of executing the processing of step SD904 and step SE116 in the main CPU 63);
Second predetermined operation control means (steps SD710 to SD712 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the second predetermined operation means (special prize device 416) so as to be in the second period corresponding state (open state) in the second period. Function to execute)
A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation where predetermined setting related processing (setting value update processing, setting confirmation processing) related to the setting value is being executed, the first predetermined operation means is in a state corresponding to the first period, and the second predetermined operation means is Corresponding operation control means (function to execute the processing of step SE704, step SE707, step SE802 and step SE816 in the main CPU 63) to be in the second period corresponding state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αN1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, in a situation in which a game is being executed, a first period in which the first predetermined operation means is in the first period corresponding state may occur, and a second period in which the second predetermined operation means is in the second period corresponding state. In a configuration that can occur, in a situation where a predetermined setting related process relating to the setting value is being executed, the first predetermined operation means is in the first period corresponding state and the second predetermined operation means is in the second period corresponding state. Thus, it is possible to execute a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed using the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means that operate when a game is being executed. It becomes possible.

  In addition, a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed using the first period correspondence state and the second period correspondence state that may occur when a game is being executed may be executed. It becomes possible. In addition, when it is attempted to illegally notify that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, it is necessary to fraud both the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to illegally notify that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Feature αN2. The gaming machine according to claim αN1, wherein the second period generating means generates the second period after the first period.

  According to the characteristic αN2, in a situation where a game is being performed, the second period occurs after the first period. Therefore, the first predetermined operation unit is in the first period corresponding state and the second predetermined operation unit is in the second period. When it becomes a correspondence state, it becomes possible to give the manager of the game hall the recognition that the situation is different from the situation where the game is being played. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process relating to the setting value is being executed.

  Feature αN3. One of the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means is a display means and the other is a movable means. The gaming machine according to the characteristic αN1 or αN2.

  According to the feature αN3, since the notification indicating that the predetermined setting related process is being executed is performed by the combination of the period correspondence states of the display unit and the movable unit, the predetermined setting related process is executed. It becomes easy to grasp that it is the situation being done.

Feature αN4. Means for executing a period lottery for determining whether or not to cause the second period after the first period (function to execute the process of step SD803 in the main CPU 63);
The first predetermined operation control means is configured to notify the result of the period lottery after setting the first predetermined operation means in the first period corresponding state in the first period,
The second predetermined operation control means is configured so that the result of the lottery for the period is a result of generating the second period, and the second period is controlled so as to be in a state corresponding to the second period after the first period ends. (2) The gaming machine according to any one of features αN1 to αN3, wherein the predetermined operation means is controlled.

  According to the characteristic αN4, the first predetermined operation means for notifying the result of the period lottery and the second predetermined operation means that becomes the second period corresponding state when the result of the period lottery is the winning result are predetermined. It is possible to execute notification indicating that the setting related process is being executed.

Feature αN5. The first predetermined operation means is a pattern display means (a first special figure display unit 425, a second special figure display unit 426) for variably displaying a pattern,
The second predetermined operation means is variable entry means (special prize winning device 416) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
The first predetermined operation control means causes the picture display means to be in a state corresponding to the first period by performing a change display of the picture in the first period.
The gaming machine according to claim αN4, wherein the second predetermined motion control means sets the variable pitching means to the state corresponding to the second period by setting the open state in the second period. .

  According to the feature αN5, in a situation where a predetermined setting related process is being executed, the variable pitching means is in an open state in a situation where the pattern display means is performing a variable display of the pattern. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Feature αN6. The predetermined setting-related process is a process for enabling setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit, or a process for notifying the current setting value. The gaming machine according to any one of features αN1 to αN5.

  According to the feature αN6, in order to be notified of a situation in which processing for enabling setting of a setting value to be used is being performed or a current setting value while providing the excellent effects as described above. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that this process is being executed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αN1 to αN6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αO group>
Feature αO1. Predetermined display means (first special figure display unit 425, second special figure display unit 426) for performing a predetermined display in a situation where a game is being executed;
A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation where predetermined setting-related processing (setting value update processing, setting confirmation processing) related to the setting value is being executed, notification that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed uses the predetermined display unit Execution notification control means (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing steps SE304 and SE308 in the main CPU 63; in the 65th embodiment, in the steps SE604 and SE607 in the main CPU 63) A function for executing processing, a function for executing processing of step SE704 and step SE707 in the main CPU 63 in the 66th embodiment, a function of executing processing of step SE904 and step SE907 in the main CPU 63 in the 67th embodiment, In the 68th embodiment, the main CPU 63 And function) to the display control the kick 15R display unit 481,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αO1, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player is given a more advantageous setting value. You will expect that. In this case, in a configuration provided with a predetermined display means for performing a predetermined display in a situation where a game is being executed, the predetermined display means is used in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process relating to the setting value is being executed. Then, a notification that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed is executed. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, and to perform this notification using predetermined display means. .

  Feature αO2. The execution notification control means causes the predetermined display means to perform a specific display that does not occur in a situation where a game is being executed in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process relating to the setting value is being executed. The gaming machine described in the feature αO1.

  According to the characteristic αO2, in a situation where a predetermined setting related process is being executed, a specific display that does not occur in a situation where a game is being executed by a predetermined display means is performed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly grasp from the display contents of the predetermined display means that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αO3. Specific display means (a special display unit 429 in the 64th and 65th embodiments, a 6R display unit 483 and a small hit display unit 484 in the 68th embodiment) for performing a specific display in a situation where a game is being executed Prepared,
The execution notification control means notifies that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed in the situation where the predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value is being executed. The gaming machine according to the feature αO1 or αO2, characterized in that

  According to the characteristic αO3, when a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed is performed illegally, both the predetermined display means and the specific display means are illegal. It is necessary to apply. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to illegally notify that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Feature αO4. The gaming machine according to feature αO3, wherein the predetermined display means and the specific display means are collected in a predetermined range (special figure unit 422) that can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature αO4, in a configuration in which notification that a predetermined setting-related process is being performed using a combination of display content of a predetermined display unit and display content of a specific display unit is performed. It becomes possible to make it easy to check the display contents.

Feature αO5. The execution notification control means causes the predetermined display means to perform a predetermined correspondence display and the specific display means to perform a specific correspondence display in a situation where a predetermined setting related process relating to the setting value is being executed. And
The predetermined correspondence display in the predetermined display means is a display content that can occur in a situation where a game is being executed,
The specific correspondence display in the specific display means is a display content that can occur in a situation where a game is being executed,
The gaming machine according to the characteristic αO3 or αO4, wherein the predetermined correspondence display on the predetermined display means and the specific correspondence display on the specific display means do not occur simultaneously in a situation where a game is being executed.

  According to the characteristic αO5, a situation in which a predetermined setting-related process is executed using the predetermined correspondence display on the predetermined display means and the specific correspondence display on the specific display means that may occur when a game is being executed. It is possible to execute a notification indicating that it is.

Feature αO6. Means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (function for executing the process of step SD803 in the main CPU 63);
Means for controlling display of the predetermined display means so that a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the transition lottery is displayed after the variable display of the pattern is started (function of executing step SD706 in the main CPU 63) When,
When the lottery result of the transition lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the predetermined display means, the gaming state enters the predetermined gaming state. (Function for executing the processing of step SD904 and step SE116 in the main CPU 63),
Means for controlling the display of the specific display means (function to execute the processing of step SD903 and step SE115 in the main CPU 63) so that the state corresponding display is performed in the predetermined gaming state;
With
The gaming machine according to feature αO5, wherein the predetermined correspondence display is a display of variation of the pattern, and the specific correspondence display is the state correspondence display.

  According to the characteristic αO6, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, a specific display means indicates a predetermined gaming state in a situation where a display of a variable pattern is being displayed on the predetermined display means. A state corresponding display is performed. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Feature αO7. The predetermined setting-related process is a process for enabling setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit, or a process for notifying the current setting value. The gaming machine according to any one of features αO1 to αO6.

  According to the characteristic αO7, in order to be notified of the situation in which the process of enabling the setting of the setting value to be used is being performed or the current setting value while providing the excellent effects as described above. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that this process is being executed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αO1 to αO7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αP group>
Features αP1. A first corresponding state in which the first specific operation means (the special display unit 429 in the 64th embodiment and the special prize winning device 416 in the 66th embodiment) is in the first corresponding state in the situation where the game is being executed. Execution means (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing steps SD903 and SE115 in the main CPU 63; in the 66th embodiment, the function of executing steps SD710 to SD712 in the main CPU 63);
When the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state in the situation where the game is being executed, the second specific operation means (in the 64th embodiment, the special display unit 429 and the second special figure display unit 426, In the 66th embodiment, the special display unit 429) is set to the second corresponding state. The second corresponding state execution means (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SD706 in the main CPU 63, the 66th In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SD903 and step SE115 in the main CPU 63),
A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation where predetermined setting-related processing (setting value update processing, setting confirmation processing) relating to the setting value is being performed, the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state, and the second specific operation means is Specific correspondence control means for making the state different from the second correspondence state (in the sixty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SE304, step SE305, step SE308 and step SE309 in the main CPU 63, the 66th embodiment In the form, a function of executing the processing of step SE704, step SE707, step SE802 and step SE816 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αP1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player is given a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, in a configuration in which the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state when the game is being executed, the second specific operation means is in the second corresponding state. In the situation where the process is being executed, the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state, whereas the second specific operation means is different from the second corresponding state. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, and uses the first specific operation means and the second specific operation means to notify this notification. Can be performed.

  Feature αP2. One of said 1st specific operation means and said 2nd specific operation means is a display means, and the other is a movable means, The game machine of the characteristic (alpha) P1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the characteristic αP2, since the notification indicating that the predetermined setting related process is being executed is performed by the combination of the states of the display unit and the movable unit, the predetermined setting related process is executed. This makes it easier to grasp the situation.

Feature αP3. The second specific operation means is a variable pitching means (special prize winning device 416) that is switched between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined gaming state,
The second corresponding state is a state in which the second specific operation means is switched between an open state and a closed state,
The first specific operation means is a display means (special display unit 429) for performing display indicating the predetermined gaming state by entering the first corresponding state in the predetermined gaming state,
The gaming machine according to the characteristic αP1 or αP2, wherein the specific response control unit maintains the second specific operation unit in the closed state in a situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed.

  According to the characteristic αP3, in the situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed, the second specific operation means is displayed even though the first specific operation means displays that it is in the predetermined game state. Maintained closed. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αP4. The first specific operation means is variable pitching means (special prize winning device 416) that is switched between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined gaming state,
The first corresponding state is the open state,
The second specific operation means is a display means (special display unit 429) that displays the state of the predetermined gaming state by entering the second corresponding state in the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to the characteristic αP1 or αP2.

  According to the characteristic αP4, it is indicated that the second specific operation means is in the predetermined game state even though the first specific operation means is in an open state in a situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed. No display is made. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Feature αP5. The gaming machine according to the characteristic αP4, wherein the specific response control means puts the second specific operation means in a non-display state in a situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed.

  According to the characteristic αP5, in the situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed, the second specific operation means is in the predetermined game state even though the first specific operation means is in the open state. Not only does not perform, but it is hidden. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αP6. Means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (function to execute the process of step SD803 in the main CPU 63);
The second corresponding state execution means controls display of the second specific operation means so that a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the transition lottery is displayed after the pattern change display is started.
In the gaming machine, when the lottery result of the transition lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state, the transition stop result corresponding to the stop result is the second specific operation means. Means for shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state after being displayed (function to execute the processing of step SD904 and step SE116 in the main CPU 63);
The first corresponding state execution means switches the first specific operation means between an open state and a closed state in the predetermined gaming state,
The first corresponding state is the open state,
The gaming machine according to the characteristic αP1 or αP2, wherein the second correspondence state is a state in which the transition stop result is displayed by the second specific operation means.

  According to the feature αP6, in the situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed, the transition stop result is not displayed on the second specific operation means even though the first specific operation means is in the open state. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Feature αP7. The predetermined setting-related process is a process for enabling setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit, or a process for notifying the current setting value. The gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP6.

  According to the feature αP7, in order to be notified of a situation in which processing for enabling setting of a setting value to be used is being performed or a current setting value while providing the excellent effects as described above. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that this process is being executed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αP1 to αP7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αQ group>
Feature αQ1. Variable ball entry means (special prize winning device 416) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Updating means (a function for executing the processing of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs;
Predetermined acquisition means for acquiring the updated numerical value information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SD701 for the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63, the second In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF101 in the main CPU 63),
Predetermined transition determination means for executing predetermined transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) (In the 64th embodiment, the function of executing step SD803 on the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the first special figure side in the main CPU 63. The function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information),
Switching control means for switching the variable pitching means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined gaming state (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SD710 to step SD712 in the main CPU 63, In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps SF108 to SF110 and steps SF208 to SF210 in the main CPU 63),
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being a first winning result (a jackpot result), a transition is made to the predetermined gaming state, and a gaming mode that affects the player's advantage is changed after the predetermined gaming state ends. First transition means that can be changed from before the start of the predetermined gaming state (in the 64th embodiment, with respect to the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63, step SD805 to step SD807, step SD904 and step SE202 to step SE208 A function for executing the process, a function for executing the processes of steps SF306 to SF308 and SF403 for the hold information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63 in the 69th to 71st embodiments);
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being a second winning result (small win result), the state is shifted to a state where a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state can occur, or the predetermined gaming state is shifted to the predetermined state. Second transition means for continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the game state (steps SD809 to SD811 for the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63 in the 64th embodiment) A function for executing the process of step SD915, a function for executing the processes of step SF310, step SF311 and step SF405 for the hold information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63 in the 69th to 71st embodiments);
A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
With
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is an outlier result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
Of the plurality of setting values, the second setting value (for example, “setting 6”) is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination than the first setting value (for example, “setting 1”). The number of the updated numerical information is a configuration having a first specified number greater,
The second set value is less than the first set value, and the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result in the predetermined shift determination is a second specified number less,
The gaming machine, wherein the second specific number is equal to or greater than the first specific number.

  According to the characteristic αQ1, the player enters the first game result or the first game result because the variable entry means shifts to the predetermined game state in which the first game result or the second game result is determined to be in the open state. 2 The game will be played with the expectation that it will be the winning result. Moreover, since the mode of the subsequent game state is different between the case where the first winning result is obtained in the predetermined transition determination and the case where the second winning result is obtained, the transition state of the gaming state is diversified. Is possible. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can confirm that a more advantageous setting value is to be used. Expect.

  In this case, the variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination between the first set value and the second set value is the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination. It is absorbed by the variation of the number of update numerical information determined to be. Accordingly, the probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is set between the first setting value and the second setting value while not affecting the probability of being the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination. It can be changed.

  Feature αQ2. In all of the set values of the plurality of stages, the variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is determined to be the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination. The gaming machine according to Feature αQ1, wherein the gaming machine is absorbed by fluctuations in the number of the updated numerical information.

  According to the characteristic αQ2, the probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is changed while not affecting the probability of becoming the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination in all of the setting values in a plurality of stages. Is possible.

  Feature αQ3. The gaming machine according to the characteristic αQ1 or αQ2, wherein all the set values of the plurality of stages have the same number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination .

  According to the characteristic αQ3, it is possible to make the probability of being the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination constant for all the setting values in a plurality of stages. In addition, even in such a configuration in which the probability of being the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is constant, the variation of each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the outlier result. Therefore, the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination can be set as the probability corresponding to the set value.

  Feature αQ4. Any one of the characteristics αQ1 to αQ3 is characterized in that the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest in any of the plurality of setting values. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the characteristic αQ4, in the configuration in which the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be an outlier result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest regardless of the set value, the first winning result is determined in the predetermined transition determination. The amount of change in each set value of the number of updated numerical information determined to be absorbed by the amount of change in the number of updated numerical information determined to be an outlier result in the predetermined transition determination. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the variation in each set value of the probability that is the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability that is the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination With respect to the probability of an outlier result, it is possible to prevent a large variation between the set values of a plurality of stages.

Feature αQ5. As the gaming mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
In the situation where the probability that the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination among the setting values of the plurality of stages is the setting value, and the game mode is the high probability mode, the predetermined transition determination The gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ4, wherein the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result is zero.

  According to the characteristic αQ5, it is determined that the predetermined transition determination is an outlier result in the situation where the highest set value is the situation where the probability of being the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination and the situation is in the high probability mode. The number of pieces of updated numerical information becomes 0. As a result, in the configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of being the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination is performed as described above. Thus, in the situation where the probability of being the first winning result is the highest, the probability of being the first winning result can be made as high as possible.

Feature αQ6. As the gaming mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
In the situation where the probability that the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination among the setting values of the plurality of stages is the setting value, and the game mode is the high probability mode, the predetermined transition determination The gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ4, wherein the number of pieces of the updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result is 1 or more.

  According to the characteristic αQ6, it is determined that the predetermined transition determination is an outlier result in the situation of the highest setting value and the high probability mode in which the probability of being the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination. The number of pieces of updated numerical value information is one or more. As a result, in the configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of being the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination is performed as described above. Thus, even in a situation where the probability of being the first winning result is the highest, it is possible to select an outlier result in the predetermined transition determination.

Feature αQ7. Specific acquisition means for acquiring the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63);
Specific transition determination means for executing specific transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state (69th to 69th). In the 70th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63),
With
The first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the first winning result, and sets the gaming mode after the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. Can be changed before the start of
The second transition means shifts to a state where a transition trigger to the predetermined gaming state can occur or shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the second winning result The game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued after the predetermined game state ends,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the outlier result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
The variation due to the difference in the set value in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is determined to be the outlier result in the specific transition determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ6, wherein the gaming machine is absorbed by fluctuations in the number of updated numerical information.

  According to the characteristic αQ7, not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination, the probability of the first winning result is varied among the set values while not affecting the probability of the second winning result. It becomes possible.

  Feature αQ8. The gaming machine according to feature αQ7, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the specific transition determination is the same in all of the plurality of setting values.

  According to the feature αQ8, not only the predetermined transition determination but also the specific transition determination, it is possible to make the probability that the second winning result will be constant in all the setting values of a plurality of stages. In addition, even if the probability of becoming the second winning result in the specific transition determination is constant as described above, the variation of each set value of the probability of becoming the first winning result in the specific transition determination is the outlier result. Therefore, the probability of the first winning result in the specific transition determination can be set as the probability corresponding to the set value.

  Feature αQ9. The game according to the characteristic αQ7 or αQ8, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result in the specific transition determination is the largest in any of the plurality of setting values. Machine.

  According to the characteristic αQ9, in the configuration in which the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be an outlier result in the specific transition determination is the largest in any of the set values, it is the first winning result in the specific transition determination. The change amount of each set value of the number of update numerical information determined to be absorbed by the change of the number of update numerical information determined to be an outlier result in the specific transition determination. Thereby, even if it is the structure which absorbs the fluctuation | variation in each setting value of the probability which becomes a 1st winning result in specific transition determination with the fluctuation | variation of the probability which becomes an outlier result in specific transition determination, in specific transition determination It is possible to prevent a large variation in probability for the probability of an outlier result.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αQ1 to αQ9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αR group>
Feature αR1. Variable ball entry means (special prize winning device 416) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Updating means (a function for executing the processing of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs;
Predetermined acquisition means for acquiring the updated numerical value information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SD701 for the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63, the second In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF101 in the main CPU 63),
Predetermined transition determination means for executing predetermined transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) (In the 64th embodiment, the function of executing step SD803 on the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the first special figure side in the main CPU 63. The function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information),
Switching control means for switching the variable pitching means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined gaming state (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SD710 to step SD712 in the main CPU 63, In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps SF108 to SF110 and steps SF208 to SF210 in the main CPU 63),
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being a first winning result (a jackpot result), a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state (in the 64th embodiment, the second special figure side in the main CPU 63 side). Functions for executing the processing of step SD805 to step SD807, step SD904, and step SE202 to step SE208 for the hold information, and in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the hold information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63 is step SF306 to step SF308 and the function of executing the processing of step SF403),
A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
With
As a result of the predetermined transition determination, there is another winning result other than the losing result that does not cause the transition to the predetermined gaming state and the first winning result,
Of the plurality of setting values, the second setting value (for example, “setting 6”) is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination than the first setting value (for example, “setting 1”). The number of the updated numerical information is a first predetermined number larger,
The number of the updated numerical information determined by the predetermined transition determination that the predetermined target result (outgoing result) is different from the first winning result is the highest in each of the first set value and the second set value. There are many configurations,
The second set value is less than the first set value by the second predetermined number in the number of the update numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination;
The gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined number is equal to or greater than the first predetermined number.

  According to the feature αR1, since the variable winning means is shifted to a predetermined gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened when the first winning result is obtained in the predetermined transition determination, the player expects the first winning result. A game will be performed. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can confirm that a more advantageous setting value is to be used. Expect.

  In this case, in the configuration in which the number of updated numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination is the first setting value or the second setting value, Update numerical value information in which the variation between the first set value and the second set value of the number of update numerical information determined to be one winning result is determined as a predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination Is absorbed by fluctuations in the number of As a result, even if it is configured to absorb the variation in each set value of the probability that becomes the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination with the variation in the probability that becomes the target of the predetermined target in the predetermined transition determination, Thus, it is possible to prevent the probability of a predetermined target result from causing a large fluctuation in probability. Therefore, the predetermined target result whose probability varies according to the variation of the probability of the first winning result is selected while the set value can be predicted from the probability that the first winning result is selected in the predetermined transition determination. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value from the probability of being set.

Feature αR2. The number of the updated numerical information that is determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination is a configuration having the largest number of any of the setting values of the plurality of stages,
In all of the set values of the plurality of stages, it is determined that the variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is the predetermined target result in the predetermined shift determination The gaming machine according to the feature αR1, wherein the gaming machine is absorbed by fluctuations in the number of the updated numerical information.

  According to the feature αR2, the variation of the probability that becomes the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the relatively small probability variation of the predetermined target result having the highest selection probability in all the setting values of the plurality of stages. It becomes possible.

Feature αR3. There is a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
Even in a situation where the probability that the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination among the plurality of stages of setting values is the setting value and the high probability mode, the predetermined transition determination is performed. The gaming machine according to feature αR1 or αR2, characterized in that the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result is the largest.

  According to the characteristic αR3, the predetermined target result is determined in the predetermined transition determination even in the high setting mode in which the probability that the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination is the highest setting value. The number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be the largest. As a result, the probability of being a predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination even in the high setting mode in which the probability that the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination is the highest setting value. With respect to, it is possible to absorb the fluctuation in the probability that becomes the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination by the fluctuation in the probability that becomes the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination while preventing the large fluctuation in the probability. Become.

Feature αR4. Specific acquisition means for acquiring the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63);
Specific transition determination means for executing specific transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state (69th to 69th). In the 70th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63),
With
The first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the first winning result,
As a result of the specific transition determination, there is another winning result in addition to the losing result that does not cause the transition to the predetermined gaming state and the first winning result,
A specific target result (outgoing result) exists as a lottery result that is not a lottery result with the highest probability of being selected in the specific transition determination in each of the first set value and the second set value;
The number of the updated numerical value information determined that the second set value is the first winning result in the specific transition determination is greater than the first set value by the first specific number,
The second set value is less in the second specific number than the first set value, and the number of the update numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific shift determination is less than the second specific number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αR1 to αR3, wherein the second specific number is equal to or greater than the first specific number.

  According to the feature αR4, the variation in the probability of each set value that is the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of the specific target result that is not the highest selection probability in the specific transition determination. Thereby, in the specific transition determination, the player can estimate the set value by using each of the selection probability of the first winning result and the selection probability of the specific target result.

  Feature αR5. The gaming machine according to Feature αR4, wherein the specific target result is the predetermined target result.

  According to the characteristic αR5, it is difficult to estimate the set value depending on the selection probability of the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination, but it is easy to estimate the set value based on the selection probability of the predetermined target result in the specific transition determination. Is possible.

Feature αR6. It is a configuration that is not the lottery result with the highest probability that the specific target result is selected in the specific transition determination in all the setting values of the plurality of stages,
In all of the set values of the plurality of stages, it is determined that the variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific shift determination is the specific target result in the specific shift determination The gaming machine according to the characteristic αR4 or αR5, wherein the gaming machine is absorbed by fluctuations in the number of the updated numerical information.

  According to the feature αR6, it is possible to absorb the fluctuation amount of the probability that becomes the first winning result in the specific shift determination by the relatively large probability fluctuation of the specific target result in all the setting values of the plurality of stages. .

Feature αR7. Specific acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of step SF201 in the main CPU 63 in the 71st embodiment) to acquire the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs;
Specific transition determination means for executing a specific transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63),
With
The first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the first winning result,
As a result of the specific transition determination, there is another winning result in addition to the losing result that does not cause the transition to the predetermined gaming state and the first winning result,
The number of the updated numerical information determined in the specific transition determination that the specific target result (small hit result) is different from the first winning result is the first set value and the second set value, respectively. The most common configuration
The number of the updated numerical value information determined that the second set value is the first winning result in the specific transition determination is greater than the first set value by the first specific number,
The second set value is less in the second specific number than the first set value, and the number of the update numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific shift determination is less than the second specific number,
The second specific number is a configuration that is greater than or equal to the first specific number;
The gaming machine according to any one of features αR1 to αR3, wherein the predetermined target result and the specific target result are different.

  According to the feature αR7, even if the lottery result having the highest selection probability differs between the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination, the selection probability of the lottery result having the highest selection probability in each of the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination. The fluctuation amount between the set values of the selection probability of the first winning result is absorbed by the fluctuation amount. As a result, in both the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination, the setting value can be estimated from the probability that the first winning result is selected, but the probability varies according to the variation in the probability of the first winning result. It is possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value from the probability that the lottery result to be selected is selected.

Feature αR8. The number of the updated numerical information that is determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination is a configuration having the largest number of any of the setting values of the plurality of stages,
In all of the set values of the plurality of stages, it is determined that the variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific shift determination is the specific target result in the specific shift determination The gaming machine according to feature αR7, wherein the gaming machine is absorbed by fluctuations in the number of the updated numerical information.

  According to the characteristic αR8, the first winning result is obtained by the relatively small probability variation of the lottery result having the highest selection probability in all of the set values of the plurality of stages in any of the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination. It becomes possible to absorb the fluctuation of the probability.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αR1 to αR8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αS group>
Feature αS1. Updating means (a function for executing the processing of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs;
Predetermined acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of step SF201 in the main CPU 63 in the 70th embodiment) to acquire the updated numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs;
Predetermined transition determination means for executing predetermined transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) (In the 70th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63);
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the first winning result (the jackpot result when the hold information on the second special figure side in the 70th embodiment is the target of the determination process), the predetermined game First transition means that enables transition to a state (in the seventy-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SF306 to SF308 and step SF403 for the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63);
A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
With
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is an outlier result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
There is a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
In the state of the high probability mode, the variation between the set values of the plurality of stages of the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is determined in the predetermined transition determination. It is configured to be absorbed by a change in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result,
In the situation where the probability that the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination among the setting values of the plurality of stages is the setting value and the high probability mode, the deviation is determined in the predetermined transition determination. The setting value with the lowest probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination among the setting values of the plurality of stages so that the number of the updated numerical information determined to be a result is one or more. A gaming machine, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination in a certain situation and the high probability mode is set.

  According to the characteristic αS1, it is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state by becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination, so that the player plays a game while expecting the first winning result. Become. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can confirm that a more advantageous setting value is to be used. Expect.

  In this case, in the situation of the high probability mode, the fluctuation between the set values of the plurality of steps of the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination results in the predetermined transition determination It is absorbed by the variation of the number of updated numerical information determined to be. Then, in the situation where the highest set value is the situation where the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the highest and in the high probability mode, the updated numerical value determined as the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination The number of information is one or more. As a result, in the configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of being the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination is performed as described above. Thus, even in a situation where the probability of being the first winning result is the highest, it is possible to select an outlier result in the predetermined transition determination.

Feature αS2. Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the second winning result (the small hit result when the hold information on the second special figure side in the 70th embodiment is the target of the determination processing) A second transition means (the first transition state) for causing a transition to a gaming state to occur, or for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state and continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined gaming state after the predetermined gaming state ends; 70, the main CPU 63 has the function of executing the processing of step SF310, step SF311 and step SF405 for the hold information on the second special figure side),
The number of the updated numerical value information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination in the high probability mode is the same among the set values of the plurality of stages. The gaming machine described in αS1.

  According to the feature αS2, it is possible to make the probability that the second winning result is obtained in the predetermined transition determination in all of the plurality of setting values constant. In addition, even in such a configuration in which the probability of being the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is constant, the variation of each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the outlier result. Therefore, the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination can be set as the probability corresponding to the set value.

Feature αS3. Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the second winning result (the small hit result when the hold information on the second special figure side in the 70th embodiment is the target of the determination processing) A second transition means (the first transition state) for causing a transition to a gaming state to occur, or for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state and continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined gaming state after the predetermined gaming state ends; 70, the main CPU 63 has the function of executing the processing of step SF310, step SF311 and step SF405 for the hold information on the second special figure side),
The number of the updated numerical value information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination in the high probability mode is the largest in each of the plurality of setting values. A gaming machine according to αS1 or αS2.

  According to the feature αS3, in the situation of the high probability mode, the probability that the second winning result is selected in the predetermined transition determination has the highest probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination. It becomes possible to select an outlier result in the predetermined transition determination in the highest situation.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αS1 to αS3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αT group>
Feature αT1. Variable ball entry means (special prize winning device 416) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Updating means (a function for executing the processing of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs;
Predetermined acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step SF101 in the main CPU 63 in the 69th to 71st embodiments) for acquiring the updated numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs;
Predetermined transition determination means for executing predetermined transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) (In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63);
Switching control means for switching the variable pitching means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined gaming state (steps SF108 to SF110 and SF208 to step SF208 in the main CPU 63 in the 69th to 71st embodiments) Function to execute the processing of SF210),
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being a first winning result (a jackpot result), a transition is made to the predetermined gaming state, and a gaming mode that affects the player's advantage is changed after the predetermined gaming state ends. First transition means that can be changed from before the start of the predetermined gaming state (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the processing of steps SF306 to SF308 and SF403 is executed for the hold information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63. Function)
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being a second winning result (small win result), the state is shifted to a state where a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state can occur, or the predetermined gaming state is shifted to the predetermined state. Second transition means for continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the game state (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, step SF310, for the hold information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63, The function of executing the processing of step SF311 and step SF405);
A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
With
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is an outlier result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
As the gaming mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
The probability of being the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the same regardless of the setting value to be used and the game mode set by the setting means. Gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αT1, the player enters the first winning result or the first winning result by changing to the predetermined gaming state in which the variable pitching means is opened by the first winning result or the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination. 2 The game will be played with the expectation that it will be the winning result. Moreover, since the mode of the subsequent game state is different between the case where the first winning result is obtained in the predetermined transition determination and the case where the second winning result is obtained, the transition state of the gaming state is diversified. Is possible. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can confirm that a more advantageous setting value is to be used. Expect.

  In this case, the probability of being the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the same regardless of the set value and the game mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the game mode from the probability of the second winning result.

Feature αT2. Specific acquisition means for acquiring the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63);
Specific transition determination means for executing specific transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state (69th to 69th). In the 70th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63),
With
The first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the first winning result, and sets the gaming mode after the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. Can be changed before the start of
The second transition means shifts to a state where a transition trigger to the predetermined gaming state can occur or shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the second winning result The game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued after the predetermined game state ends,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the outlier result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
The probability of the second winning result in the specific transition determination is the same regardless of the setting value to be used and the game mode set by the setting means. A gaming machine described in feature αT1.

  According to the feature αT2, the probability that the second winning result is obtained not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination is the same regardless of the set value and the game mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the game mode from the probability of the second winning result in any of the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination.

  Feature αT3. The gaming machine according to feature αT2, wherein the probability of being the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is different from the probability of being the second winning result in the specific transition determination.

  According to the feature αT3, the probability that the second winning result is obtained not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination is the same regardless of the set value and the game mode. It is possible to create a situation in which the probability of

Feature αT4. Specific acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63 in the 69th to 71st embodiments) to acquire the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs;
Specific transition determination means for executing specific transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state (69th to 69th). In the 71st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63),
With
The first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the first winning result, and sets the gaming mode after the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. Can be changed before the start of
The second transition means shifts to a state where a transition trigger to the predetermined gaming state can occur or shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the second winning result The game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued after the predetermined game state ends,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the outlier result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
The gaming machine according to feature αT1, wherein the probability of being the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is different from the probability of being the second winning result in the specific transition determination.

  According to the characteristic αT4, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of the second winning result varies.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features αT1 to αT4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1- b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features Even if one or more configurations of αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, and features αT1 to αT4 are applied. There. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature αM group, the feature αN group, the feature αO group, the feature αP group, the feature αQ group, the feature αR group, the feature αS group, and the feature αT group, It is possible to solve.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko machine has a dish storage unit for storing game balls given to a player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, Fired toward the game area according to the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage part is a game ball launching device. The game balls that are surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game area And a gaming machine that gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming parts.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 12 ... Game machine main body, 14 ... Front door frame, 28 ... Launch operation device, 33 ... First operation port, 34 ... Second operation port, 35 ... Through gate, 37a ... Special figure display part, 38a ... Normal map display part, 49a ... Gate detection sensor, 62 ... MPU, 63 ... Main side CPU, 65 ... Main side RAM, 68a ... Setting key insertion part, 68b ... Update button, 68c ... Reset button, 69a ... First notification Display device 69b ... second notification display device, 69c ... third notification display device, 78 ... power source / launch control device, 112 ... management CPU, 117 ... history memory, 171 ... separate storage memory, 181 186 ... history memory for settings 1 to 61, 191 ... first history memory, 192 ... second history memory, 201 ... first notification display device, 201a to 201g ... display segment, 202 ... second Notification Display device, 202a to 202g ... display segment, 203 ... third notification display device, 204 ... fourth notification display device, 221 ... work area for specific control, 222 ... stack area for specific control, 223 ... non Work area for specific control, 224 ... Stack area for non-specific control, 231 ... Counter area for normal operation, 232 ... Counter area for open / close execution mode, 233 ... Counter area for high frequency support mode, 234 ... Calculation result storage area, 241 ... RAM for management, 251 ... reset signal output unit, 252 ... program monitoring unit, 266 ... display IC, 271 ... first display data buffer, 273 ... third display data buffer, 311 ... current area, 312 ... first history Area, 313 ... second history area, 314 ... third history area, 321-324 ... for display 325 ... setting correspondence storage area, 325a to 325f ... first to sixth setting information storage areas, 326 ... setting correspondence storage area, 326a to 326c ... first to third setting information storage areas, 341 ... setting reference area 342 ... Setting update area 352 ... Sound light side MPU, 353 ... Sound light side CPU, 356 ... RTC, 357 ... RTC memory, 361 ... OFF confirmation flag, 371 ... Clear target area, 391 ... 1st display allocation table, 392 ... 2nd display allocation table for special maps, 393 ... 1st display allocation table for general maps, 394 ... 2nd display allocation table for general maps, 416 ... Special electric prize Device, 423a ... universal map display unit, 425 ... first special map display unit, 426 ... second special map display unit, 429 ... special display unit, 481 ... 15R display unit, 483 ... 6R display unit, 484 ... small hits display.

Claims (8)

A variable ball entry means provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An update means for updating the update numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs,
Predetermined acquisition means for acquiring the updated numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs;
Predetermined transition determination means for performing predetermined transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state;
Switching control means for switching the variable pitching means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined gaming state;
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the first winning result, a transition is made to the predetermined gaming state and the gaming mode that affects the player's advantage is changed to the predetermined gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state. First transition means that can be varied from before the start of
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the second winning result, the state is shifted to a state where a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state can be generated, or after the transition to the predetermined gaming state and the predetermined gaming state ends. A second transition means for continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state;
A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
With
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is an outlier result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
A configuration in which the number of the updated numerical information determined that the second set value is the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is larger than the first set value among the plurality of stages of set values by the first specific number. Yes,
The second set value is less than the first set value, and the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result in the predetermined shift determination is a second specified number less,
The gaming machine, wherein the second specific number is equal to or greater than the first specific number.   In all of the set values of the plurality of stages, the variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is determined to be the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is absorbed by a change in the number of the updated numerical information.   3. The game according to claim 1, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the same in all of the plurality of setting values. Machine.   4. The number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result in the predetermined shift determination is the largest in any of the set values of the plurality of stages. 5. The gaming machine according to 1. As the gaming mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
In the situation where the probability that the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination among the setting values of the plurality of stages is the setting value, and the game mode is the high probability mode, the predetermined transition determination 5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result is zero. Specific acquisition means for acquiring the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs;
Specific transition determination means for executing specific transition determination for determining whether or not the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to the predetermined gaming state;
With
The first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the first winning result, and sets the gaming mode after the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. Can be changed before the start of
The second transition means shifts to a state where a transition trigger to the predetermined gaming state can occur or shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the second winning result The game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued after the predetermined game state ends,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the outlier result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
The variation due to the difference in the set value in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is determined to be the outlier result in the specific transition determination. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is absorbed by fluctuations in the number of pieces of updated numerical information.   The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the number of the updated numerical value information determined to be the second winning result in the specific transition determination is the same in all of the plurality of setting values.   The number of the update numerical information determined to be the outlier result in the specific transition determination is the largest in any of the plurality of setting values. Gaming machine.

Images